8th AC Proceedings

AutonomousCollege,ApprovedbyAICTE,
AffiliatedtoAnnaUniversity,Chennai.
PROCEEDINGSOF
8thMEETINGOFTHEACADEMICCOUNCIL
27thMAY2014
KARPAGAMCOLLEGEOFENGINEERING
Coimbatore641032
Phone
:04222619041,2619042
Fax
:04222619046
Email
:karpagam@vsnl.com
website :www.kce.ac.in
CONTENTS
TITLE
Appendix I
PAGE No.
Agenda
Members Present
Minutes of the Meeting
ix
BE Automobile Engineering
2012 Regulation Scheme and Syllabi for semesters 5 and 6
Appendix II
BE Mechanical Engineering
53
Appendix III
ME Degree Programmes
107
2014 Regulation
Appendix IV
ME Mechatronics
111
Appendix V
BE Civil Engineering
157
Appendix VI
BE Electronics and Communication Engineering
201
Appendix VII
ME Communication Systems
253
Appendix VIII
ME VLSI Design
299
Appendix IX
BE Electronics and Telecommunication Engineering
341
Appendix X
373
Appendix XI
BE Electrical and Electronics Engineering
411
Appendix XII
BE Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
455
Appendix XIII
BE Computer Science and Engineering
501
Appendix XIV
B. Tech Information Technology
549
Appendix XV
Master of Computer Applications
589
Appendix XVI
BE / B Tech Degree Programmes

2014 Regulation
641
Appendix XVII
BE Automobile Engineering
647
Appendix XVIII
BE Mechanical Engineering
675
Appendix XIX
BE Civil Engineering
685
Appendix XX
BE Electronics and Communication Engineering
695
Appendix XXI
711
Appendix XXII
BE Electrical and Electronics Engineering
719
Appendix XXIII
BE Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
731
Appendix XXIV
BE Computer Science and Engineering
743
Appendix XXV
B. Tech Information Technology

755
AGENDA OF EIGHTH ACADEMIC COUNCIL MEETING
(Autonomous)
COIMBATORE-32
8th Meeting of the Academic Council
27th May 2014
Venue: Placement Complex @ CSE/IT Block
AGENDA
1.
Welcome and Introductory remarks by the Chairman.
2.
The Board of Studies in Automobile Engineering recommended the scheme

and syllabi for the BE Automobile Engineering degree programme of 2012
regulations.
The Standing Committee recommends and Dr. J. Ganesh Murali will move,
(a)
3.
(i)
that the scheme and syllabi for semesters 5 and 6 for the BE
Automobile Engineering degree programme of 2012 regulations as
in Appendix I (PP. 1-52) be approved and
(ii)
that this takes effect for the batches of students admitted in 2012-2013
and subsequently under 2012 regulations.
The Board of Studies in Mechanical Engineering recommended the scheme

and syllabi for the BE Mechanical Engineering degree programme of 2012
regulations.
The Standing Committee recommends and Dr. D. Elangovan will move,
(a)
(b)
(i)
Mechanical Engineering degree programme of 2012 regulations as
in Appendix II (PP. 53-106) be approved and
(ii)
(i)
that the Regulation and scheme for M.E degree Programmes of

2014 regulations as in Appendix III (PP.107 110) be approved
and
(ii)
that this takes effect for the batches of students to be admitted in

2014 2015 and subsequently under 2014 regulations.
(c)
4.
(i)
that the scheme and syllabi for the ME Mechatronics degree

programme of 2014 regulations as in Appendix IV (PP. 111 156)
be approved and
(ii)

2014-2015 and subsequently under 2014 regulations.
The Board of Studies in Civil Engineering recommended the scheme and

syllabi for the BE Civil Engineering degree programme of 2012 regulations.
The Standing Committee recommends and Prof. S. Yuvaraj will move,
(a)
5.
(i)
that the scheme and syllabi for semesters 5 and 6 for the BE Civil
Engineering degree programme of 2012 regulations as in Appendix
V (PP.157-200) be approved and
(ii)
The Board of Studies in Electronics and Communication Engineering

recommended the scheme and syllabi for the BE Electronics and
Communication Engineering degree programme of 2012 regulations
The Standing Committee recommends and Prof. K. Lakshmi Narayanan will
move,
(a)
(b)
(c)
6.
(i)
Electronics and Communication Engineering degree programme of
2012 regulations as in Appendix VI (PP 201-252) be approved and
(ii)
(i)
that the scheme and syllabi for the ME Communication

Systems degree programme of 2014 regulations as in Appendix
VII( PP. 253 298) be approved and
(ii)

(i)
that the scheme and syllabi for the ME VLSI Design degree
programme of 2014 regulations as in Appendix VIII (PP.299
340) be approved and
(ii)

The Board of Studies in Electronics and Telecommunication Engineering

The Standing Committee recommends and Dr. P. Karthigai Kumar will move,
ii
(a)
(b)
7.
(i)
Electronics and Telecommunication Engineering degree programme
of 2010 regulations as in Appendix IX (PP. 341-372) be approved
and
(ii)
that this takes effect for the batch of students admitted in 2011-2012.
(i)
of 2012 regulations as in Appendix X (PP. 373-410) be approved and
(ii)
The Board of Studies in Electrical and Electronics Engineering

recommended the scheme and syllabi for the BE Electrical and Electronics
Engineering degree programme of 2010 and 2012 regulations
The Standing Committee recommends and Dr. R. Rajendran will move,
(a)
8.
(i)
Electrical and Electronics Engineering degree programme of 2012
regulations as in Appendix XI (PP. 411-454) be approved and
(ii)
The Board of Studies in Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering

Instrumentation Engineering degree programme of 2012 regulations.
The Standing Committee recommends and Dr. S. Manoharan will move,
(a)
9.
(i)
Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering degree programme of
2012 regulations as in Appendix XII (PP. 455-500) be approved and
(ii)
The Board of Studies in Computer Science and Engineering recommended

the scheme and syllabi for the BE Computer Science and Engineering
degree programme of 2010 and 2012 regulations
The Standing Committee recommends and Dr. D. Sivaganesan will move,
(a)
(i)
Computer Science and Engineering degree programme of 2012
regulations as in Appendix XIII (PP. 501-548) be approved and
(ii)
iii
10.
The Board of Studies in Information Technology recommended the scheme

and syllabi for the B Tech Information Technology degree programme of
2012 regulations.
The Standing Committee recommends and Dr. S. Smys will move,
(a)
11.
(i)
that the scheme and syllabi for semesters 5 and 6 for the B.Tech
Information Technology degree programme of 2012 regulations as
in Appendix XIV (PP. 549-588) be approved and
(ii)
that this takes effect for the batches of students admitted in 2012 2013 and subsequently under 2012 regulations.
The Board of Studies in Master of Computer Applications recommended the

scheme and syllabi for the Master of Computer Applications degree
programme of 2013 regulations.
The Standing Committee recommends and Dr. V. Narayani will move,
12.
(i)
that the scheme and syllabi for semesters 3 and 4 for the Master of
Computer Applications degree programme of 2013 regulations as in
Appendix XV (PP. 589-640) be approved and
(ii)
that this takes effect for the batches of students to be admitted in 20132014 and subsequently under 2013 regulations.
The Board of Studies in Science and Humanities recommended the

following:
The Standing Committee recommends and Dr. R. Parimelazhagan will move
(a)
(i)
that the Regulation, scheme and syllabi for semesters 1 and

2 for the B.E. / B.Tech. degree programmes of 2014 regulations as
in Appendix XVI to Appendix XXV (PP.641 762) be approved
and
(ii)

13.
The standing committee recommended and Dr. P. Suresh will move the
following
(a)
Approval for the list of Candidates qualified in November / December 2014,

End Semester Examination for the Conferment of Degree by Anna University,
Chennai.
14.
Any other matter.
iv
MINUTES OF EIGHTH ACADEMIC COUNCIL MEETING
KARPAGAM COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING

(Autonomous/Affiliated to Anna University, Chennai/Accredited by NBA)
Coimbatore 641 032
8th Meeting of the Academic Council

27th May 2014
Venue: Placement Complex @ CSE/IT Block
The Following members were present
1. Shri. K. Murugaiah
Chief executive officer, Karpagam Institutions.
2. Dr. A. Nirmal Kumar
Principal and Chairman Academic Council, KCE.
3. Dr. T.Thyagarajan
Professor Department of Instrumentation Engineering,

MIT Campus, Anna University, Chennai-44.
4. Dr. T. Ramachandran
Principal, Karpagam Institute of Technology.
5. Dr. C.R. Hema
Dean Engineering, Karpagam University.
6. Shri. V. Krishnakumar
Aquasub Industries Pvt. Ltd. Coimbatore.
7. Shri. R. Krishnamoorthi
KGK Industries, Coimbatore.
8. Shri. N. Somasundaram
Advocate
9. Dr. S.N. Sivanandam
Professor Emeritus, KCE.
10. Prof. R.S. Balasubramanian
Professor / EEE, KCE
11. Prof. M. Gowrisankar
Vice Principal KCE.
12. Dr. S. Manoharan
Professor Academic Affairs and HOD/EIE, KCE.
13. Dr. P. Suresh
Controller of Examinations, KCE.
14. Dr. J. Ganesh Murali
HOD Automobile Engineering, KCE.
15. Dr. D. Elangovan
HOD Mech KCE.
16. Dr. P. Sathyabalan
HOD Mech [PG], KCE
17. Prof. S. Yuvaraj
HOD (i/c) Civil Engineering, KCE
18. Prof. K. Lakshmi Narayanan
HOD ECE [UG], KCE.
19. Dr. M. Thamarai
HOD ECE [PG], KCE.
20. Dr. P. Karthigai Kumar
HOD (i/c) ETE, KCE.
21. Dr. R. Rajendran
HOD EEE, KCE.
22. Dr. D. Sivaganesan
HOD CSE, KCE.
23. Dr. S. Smys
HOD IT, KCE.
24. Dr. R. Chandrasekaran
Director MBA, KCE.
25. Dr. V. Narayani
Director (i/c) MCA, KCE.
26. Dr. R. Parimelazhagan
HOD S&H, KCE.

ix
27. Dr. C. Krishnaraj
Professor/ Mech, KCE.
28. Dr. S. Deepasri
Associate Professor / Civil, KCE.
29. Prof. V. Rajeshwari
Associate Professor / IT, KCE.
30. Prof. S. Shivkumar
AP/ECE, KCE.
31. Prof. RM. Ganesh
AP/EIE, KCE
32. Mr. J. Bannari Shankar
Alumni
33. Mr. V. Aravinth Kumar
Alumni
The Following members expressed their inability to attend the meeting due to their
preoccupation.
1.
Dr. R. Vasanthakumar
Chairman and Managing Trustee,

Karpagam Institutions.
2. Shri. V. Karthik
Trustee, Karpagam Institutions
3. Dr. T. V. Geetha
Professor Department of Computer Science and

Engineering, CEG Campus, Anna University, Chennai-25.
4. Dr. G. Nagarajan
Professor Department of Mechanical Engineering,

CEG Campus, Anna University, Chennai-25.
5. Dr. T. P. Kalanithi
Director / Karpagam Faculty of Medical

Sciences and Research.
1.
Shri K. Murugaiah, Chief executive officer of Karpagam Institutions and

Dr. A. Nirmal Kumar, the Chairman of the Academic Council welcomed the
members for the meeting.
2.
The Board of Studies in Automobile Engineering recommended the scheme

and syllabi for the BE Automobile Engineering degree programme of 2012
regulations.
The Standing Committee recommended and Dr. J. Ganesh Murali moved,
(a)
(i)
Automobile Engineering degree programme of 2012 regulations as in
Appendix I (PP. 1-52) be approved and
(ii)
Dr. B.Suresh seconded the motion.

The regulations including the Courses of Study were discussed in detail.
It was resolved to pass the detailed syllabi.
The motion was put to vote and carried.
x
3.
The Board of Studies in Mechanical Engineering recommended the scheme

and syllabi for the BE Mechanical Engineering degree programme of 2012
regulations.
The Standing Committee recommended and Dr. D. Elangovan moved,
(a)
(b)
(c)
(i)
Mechanical Engineering degree programme of 2012 regulations as in
Appendix II (PP. 53-106) be approved and
(ii)
(i)
that the Regulation and scheme for M.E degree Programmes of

2014 regulations as in Appendix III (PP.107 110) be approved
and
(ii)

(i)
that the scheme and syllabi for the ME Mechatronics degree

programme of 2014 regulations as in Appendix IV (PP. 111 156) be
approved and
(ii)

Dr. J. Ganesh Murali seconded the motion.

4.
The Board of Studies in Civil Engineering recommended the scheme and

syllabi for the BE Civil Engineering degree programme of 2012 regulations.
The Standing Committee recommended and Prof. S. Yuvaraj moved,
(a)
(i)
that the scheme and syllabi for semesters 5 and 6 for the BE Civil
Engineering degree programme of 2012 regulations as in Appendix V
(PP.157-200) be approved and
(ii)
Dr. D. Elangovan seconded the motion.

xi
5.
The Board of Studies in Electronics and Communication Engineering

The Standing Committee recommended and Prof. K. Lakshmi Narayanan
moved,
(a)
(b)
(c)
(i)
Electronics and Communication Engineering degree programme of
2012 regulations as in Appendix VI (PP 201-252) be approved and
(ii)
(i)
that the scheme and syllabi for the ME Communication

Systems degree programme of 2014 regulations as in Appendix VII
( PP. 253 298) be approved and
(ii)

(i)
that the scheme and syllabi for the ME VLSI Design degree
programme of 2014 regulations as in Appendix VIII (PP.299 340)
be approved and
(ii)

Dr. P. Karthigai Kumar seconded the motion.

6.
The Board of Studies in Electronics and Telecommunication Engineering

The Standing Committee recommended and Dr. P. Karthigai Kumar moved,
(a)
(b)
(i)
of 2010 regulations as in Appendix IX (PP. 341-372) be approved and
(ii)
that this takes effect for the batch of students admitted in 2011-2012.
(i)
of 2012 regulations as in Appendix X (PP. 373-410) be approved and
(ii)
xii
Prof. M. Thamarai seconded the motion.

7.
The Board of Studies in Electrical and Electronics Engineering recommended

the scheme and syllabi for the BE Electrical and Electronics Engineering
degree programme of 2010 and 2012 regulations
The Standing Committee recommended and Dr. R. Rajendran moved,
(a)
(i)
that the scheme and syllabi for semesters 5 and 6 for the BE Electrical
and Electronics Engineering degree programme of 2012 regulations
as in Appendix XI (PP. 411-454) be approved and
(ii)
Dr. S. Manoharan seconded the motion.

8.
The Board of Studies in Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering

Instrumentation Engineering degree programme of 2012 regulations.
The Standing Committee recommended and Dr. S. Manoharan moved,
(a)
(i)
Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering degree programme of
2012 regulations as in Appendix XII (PP. 455-500) be approved and
(ii)
Dr. R. Rajendran seconded the motion.

9.
The Board of Studies in Computer Science and Engineering recommended

the scheme and syllabi for the BE Computer Science and Engineering degree
programme of 2010 and 2012 regulations
The Standing Committee recommended and Dr. D. Sivaganesan moved,
xiii
(a)
(i)
that the scheme and syllabi for semesters 5 and 6 for the BE Computer
Science and Engineering degree programme of 2012 regulations as in
Appendix XIII (PP. 501-548) be approved and
(ii)
Prof. Prof. V. Rajeswari seconded the motion.

10.
The Board of Studies in Information Technology recommended the scheme

and syllabi for the B Tech Information Technology degree programme of
2012 regulations.
The Standing Committee recommended and Dr. S. Smys moved,
(a)
(i)
that the scheme and syllabi for semesters 5 and 6 for the B.Tech
Information Technology degree programme of 2012 regulations as in
Appendix XIV (PP. 549-588) be approved and
(ii)
that this takes effect for the batches of students admitted in 2012 2013 and subsequently under 2012 regulations.
Dr. D. Sivaganesan seconded the motion.

11.
The Board of Studies in Master of Computer Applications recommended the

scheme and syllabi for the Master of Computer Applications degree
programme of 2013 regulations.
The Standing Committee recommends and Dr. V. Narayani moved,
(i)
that the scheme and syllabi for semesters 3 and 4 for the Master of
Computer Applications degree programme of 2013 regulations as in
Appendix XV (PP. 589-640) be approved and
(ii)
that this takes effect for the batches of students to be admitted in 20132014 and subsequently under 2013 regulations.
Prof. K. Lakshmi Narayanan seconded the motion.

xiv
12.
The Board of Studies in Science and Humanities recommended the following:

The Standing Committee recommended and Dr. R. Parimelazhagan moved
(a)
(i)
that the Regulation, scheme and syllabi for semesters 1 and

2 for the B.E. / B.Tech. degree programmes of 2014 regulations as
in Appendix XVI to Appendix XXV (PP.641 762) be approved and
(ii)

Dr. P. Sathyabalan seconded the motion.

13.
The standing committee recommended and Dr. P. Suresh moved the following
(a)
Approval for the list of Candidates qualified in November / December 2014, End
Semester Examination for the Conferment of Degree by Anna University,
Chennai.
Chairman Academic Council thanked all the members for their active
participation and useful and innovative suggestions.
Dr. A. Nirmal Kumar

PRINCIPAL and Chairman
Academic Council.
xv
xvi
BE: AUTOMOBILE ENGINEERING
TOTAL CREDITS: 189

SEMESTER I
Course Title
Course
Code
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
12O101
Calculus and its Applications

Environmental Science and
Engineering
Technical English
12G102
12O103
12O104
C Programming I
Basics of Electrical and Electronics
Engineering
12A105
12A106
Engineering Drawing
3.5
40
60
100
40
60
100
3.5
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
3.5
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
17
24
PRACTICAL
12O111
C Programming Laboratory I
Electrical and Electronics
Engineering Laboratory
Environmental Chemistry Laboratory
12A112
12G113
TOTAL
SEMESTER II
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
12O201
Linear Algebra and Fourier Series
3.5
40
60
100
12A202
Physics for Mechanical Sciences
40
60
100
12O203
Communicative English
40
60
100
12O204
C Programming II
40
60
100
12A205
Fuels and Lubricants
40
60
100
12A206
Engineering Mechanics
3.5
40
60
100
PRACTICAL
12O211
C Programming Laboratory - II
1.5
40
60
100
12H212
Physics Laboratory
1.5
40
60
100
12A213
Fuels and Lubricants Laboratory
1.5
40
60
100
12H214
Engineering Practices
1.5
40
60
100
TOTAL
18
14
26
CIA Continuous Internal Assessment

ESE End Semester Examination
SEMESTER III
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
12A301
Transforms and Complex Analysis
3.5
40
60
100
12A302
Fluid Mechanics and Machineries
3.5
40
60
100
12A303
Engineering Thermodynamics
3.5
40
60
100
12A304
Automotive Engines
40
60
100
12A305
Object Oriented Programming
40
60
100
12A306
Production Processes
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
18
12
25.5
PRACTICAL
Fluid Mechanics and Machinery
Laboratory
Production Processes Laboratory
12A311
12A312
12A313
Engine Testing Laboratory

Laboratory
TOTAL
12A314
SEMESTER IV
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
12A401
Statistics and Numerical Methods
3.5
40
60
100
12A402
Two and Three Wheeler
40
60
100
12A403
Strength of Materials
3.5
40
60
100
12A404
Electric and Hybrid Vehicles

Automobile Electrical and
Electronics
Automotive Chassis
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
12A405
12A406
PRACTICAL
12A411
Two and Three Wheeler Laboratory
1.5
40
60
100
12A412
Automotive Electronics Laboratory
1.5
40
60
100
12A413
Engine Components Laboratory
1.5
40
60
100
12A414
Strength of Materials Laboratory
1.5
40
60
100
18
12
25
TOTAL
SEMESTER V
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
12A501
40
60
100
3.5
40
60
100
12A503
Metrology and Measurements

Automobile Engine Components
Design
Vehicle Dynamics
3.5
40
60
100
12A504
Automotive Transmission
3.5
40
60
100
12A505
Theory of Machines
3.5
100
100
12A506
Materials for Automobiles
40
60
100
1.5
100
100
1.5
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
18
12
26
12A502
PRACTICAL
12O511
Soft skills
Automobile Chassis Components
Laboratory
Computer Aided Engine Design
Laboratory
Laboratory
TOTAL
12A512
12A513
12A514
SEMESTER VI
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
12A602
Principles of Management and

Engineering Ethics
Automotive Chassis Design
12A603
Computer Aided Vehicle Design
3.5
40
60
100
12A604
Finite Element Analysis
3.5
40
60
100
12A605
Combustion and Heat Transfer
3.5
40
60
100
12Axxx
Elective I
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
1.5
100
100
18
24.5
12A601
40
60
100
3.5
40
60
100
PRACTICAL
12A611
12A612
12A651
Heat Transfer Laboratory

Computer Aided Chassis Design
Laboratory
Mini Project
TOTAL
SEMESTER VII
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
12A702
Manufacture of Automotive
Components
Special Vehicles
12A703
Vehicle Maintenance
40
60
100
12A704
Vehicle Body Engineering
3.5
40
60
100
12A705
Automotive Pollution and Control
40
60
100
12Axxx
Elective II
40
60
100
12A701
40
60
100
40
60
100
PRACTICAL
12A711
1.5
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
12A721
Vehicle Maintenance Laboratory

Computer Aided Manufacturing
Laboratory
Comprehension
12A751
Project Work - Phase I
1.5
100
100
TOTAL
18
23
12A712
SEMESTER VIII
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
12A801
Automotive Safety
40
60
100
12Axxx
Elective III
40
60
100
12Axxx
Elective IV
40
60
100
Project Work - Phase II
12
40
60
100
TOTAL
12
15
PRACTICAL
12A851

LIST OF ELECTIVES
Course Code
Course Title
12A001
Intelligent Transport System
12A002
Rubber Technology for Automobiles
12A003
Automotive Instrumentation
12A004
Automotive Air Conditioning
12A005
Modeling and Simulation of Internal Combustion Engines
12A006
Engine and Vehicle Management System
12A007
Commercial Fleet Operation
12A008
12A009
Vibration and Noise Engineering
12A010
Renewable Sources of Energy
12A011
Total Productive Maintenance
12A012
Computational Fluid Dynamics
12A013
Process Planning and Cost Estimation
12A014
Mechatronics
12A015
Automation, CNC and Robotics
12A016
Operations Research
12A017
Mathematical Modeling
12A018
Design of Machine Elements
12A019
Database Management Systems
12A020
Embedded Systems
* The URLs mentioned in the syllabi were available at the time of framing the syllabi.
SEMESTER V
12A501
METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS

3
OBJECTIVES:
To provide the theoretical background necessary to understand the concept of measurement.
To comprehend the use of various measuring instruments.
To provide the theoretical knowledge of measuring performance of machines.
To provide the sufficient knowledge of using computer aided measuring devices.
OUTCOMES:
Learners should be able to
explain the principles of construction and operation of measuring instruments.
identify and use the various measuring and checking instruments.
exhibit the practical knowledge to measure various parameters.
implement the measurement techniques to measure force and torque.
measure power, flow and temperature related properties.
UNIT I
CONCEPT OF MEASUREMENT
9
General concept Role of measurements in new product development and Product life cycle
Generalized measurement system Units and standards Definition of metrology Measuring
instruments Sensitivity Range of accuracy Accuracy Vs Precision Repeatability - Readability
and reproducibility Static and dynamic response in measurements Errors Systematic and Random
errors Correction Correction factor Calibration Concept of interchangeability and selective
assembly.
UNIT II
LINEAR AND ANGULAR MEASUREMENTS
9
Linear measuring instruments: Vernier Caliper Vernier height gauge Vernier depth gauge
Micrometer Internal measurement Slip gauges and classification Applications Basics of
interferometer Optical flats Limit gauges Types Taylors principle of gauge design Comparators: Mechanical Optical Pneumatic - Electrical and electronic types Applications
Angular measurements: Sine bar Sine centers Sine tables Bevel protractors Types Universal
and Optical bevel protractor Taper measurements concepts Applications Autocollimator
Applications.
UNIT III
FORM MEASUREMENTS
9
Measurement of screw threads Terminology Effective diameter Wire methods Thread
micrometer Thread gauges Floating carriage micrometer Measurement of gears Terminology
Tooth thickness Gear tooth vernier caliper - Constant chord and base tangent method - Parkinson
gear testing machine Profile projectors Radius measurements Surface finish measurements
Straightness Flatness and Roundness measurements.
UNIT IV
LASERS AND ADVANCES IN METROLOGY
9
Precision instruments based on laser Principles Laser Interferometers Applications in linear
Angular measurements and machine tool metrology Coordinate Measuring Machine (CMM)
Constructional features Types Applications Digital devices Computer Aided Inspection
Machine Vision Systems.
UNIT V
MEASUREMENT OF POWER, FLOW AND TEMPERATURE RELATED

PROPERTIES
9
Force Torque Power measurements: Mechanical Pneumatic Hydraulic and electrical type
Flow measurements: Venturimeter Orifice meter Rotameter Pitot tube Temperature
measurements Bimetallic strip Pressure thermometers Thermocouples Electrical resistance
thermister.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
publication
1.
Jain R K
Engineering Metrology
Khanna Publishers, New

Delhi, 4th Edition
2005
2.
Ragavendra
Krishnamoorthy
Engineering Metrology and

Measurements
Oxford University Press,

India
2013
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
publication
1.
Gupta I C

Delhi, 4th Edition
2005
2.
Dotson C
Harlow R
Thompson R L
Fundamentals of
Dimensional Metrology
Thompson Asia Pvt Ltd.,

Singapore, 2nd reprint
2005
3.
Bewoor
Metrology and Measurement
Tata Mc-Graw Hill

Education
2009
4.
Jack Philip
Holman
Experimental Methods for

Engineers
Mc-Graw Hill Education
2001
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://vizgep.bme.hu/letoltesek/targyak/BMEGEVGAG02-ENG/Measuring%20devices.pdf
http://teacher.buet.ac.bd/aamamun/Linear%20and%20Angular%20Measuring%20Instrument.pdf
http://elearning.vtu.ac.in/18/enotes/10ME42/Unit4-KVSRR.pdf
http://ignou.ac.in/upload/Unit-8-62.pdf
http://web.mst.edu/~cottrell/ME240/Resources/Temperature/Temperature.pdf
12A502
AUTOMOBILE ENGINE COMPONENTS DESIGN

3
0 3.5
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the properties of materials and their applications in design.
To know the principles of limits, fits and surface finish.
To provide the necessary knowledge on the concepts of designing cylinder and piston.
To understand the design concepts of flywheels and bearings.
OUTCOMES:
explain the material selection procedure and material properties.
use the limits, fits and surface finish in the design procedure.
apply the techniques and design the piston, cylinder and connecting rod.
use the concepts to design the flywheels.
pertain the techniques to design various bearings.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Classification of design Traditional and concurrent methods of design Engineering materials and
their physical properties applied to design Selection of material Factors of safety in design Endurance limit of material Determination of endurance limit for ductile material Notch sensitivity
Principles of design optimization Future trends CAD Euler's formula Theories of failure Rankine's formula Tetmajer's formula Johnson formula Design of push rods Eccentricity loaded
columns Reduction of stress concentration.
7
UNIT II
LIMITS, FITS, SURFACE FINISH AND SHAFTS
9
Types of tolerances Geometrical tolerances Types of fits Design consideration of interference fits
Surface finish Surface roughness Design of closely coiled helical springs Design of inlet and
exhaust valves Tolerance stack up analysis Simple examples.
UNIT III
DESIGN OF CYLINDER, PISTON AND CONNECTING ROD
9
Choice of material for cylinder and piston Piston friction Piston slap Design of cylinder Piston
Piston pin Piston rings Piston failures Lubrication of piston assembly Material for connecting
rod Determining minimum length of connecting rod Small end and big end design Shank design
Design of big bolts Connecting rod failures.
UNIT IV
FLYWHEELS
9
Determination of the mass of a flywheel for a given co-efficient of speed fluctuation Engine flywheel
Stresses of rim flywheels Design of hubs and arms of flywheel Turning moment diagram
Balancing of I.C. Engines Significance of firing order Material for crankshaft Design of
crankshaft under bending and twisting Balancing weight calculations.
UNIT V
BEARINGS
9
Ball and Roller bearings Types of Roller bearings Bearing life Static load capacity Dynamic
load capacity Bearing material Boundary lubrication Oil flow and temperature rise Design of
Journal bearings Design of power transmission shafts.
TOTAL: 45+15
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
publication
1.
Khurmi R S
Gupta J K
A Text Book of Machine

Design
S Chand, New Delhi
2009
2.
Krishna Rao T
Design of Machine
Elements Volume II
I K International Publishing
House Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi
2010
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
publication
1.
Vijay Kumar
Jadon
Suresh Verma
Analysis and Design of

Machine Elements
House Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi
2010
2.
Timothy H
Wentzell
Machine Design
Thomson Delmar Learning
2004
3.
Willam orthwein
Machine Component
Design
West Publishing Company
2000
4.
Robert L Norton
Design of Machinery
Tata McGraw Hill Publishing

co. Ltd., New Delhi
2004
WEB URLs:
1. http://nptel.iitk.ac.in/courses/Webcourse
contents/IIT%20Kharagpur/Machine%20design1/pdf/Module-3_lesson-3.pdf
2. http://dspace.mit.edu/bitstream/handle/1721.1/36247/77275271.pdf
3. http://ecs.umass.edu/mie/labs/mda/dlib/machine/flywheel/flywheel.html
4. http://web.mit.edu/2.75/fundamentals/FUNdaMENTALs%20Book%20pdf/FUNdaMENTALs%20
Topic%2010.PDF
5. http://engr.du.edu/clengsfe/ConceptI/Tolerances,%20Limits,%20Fits%20and%20Surface%20Finis
h.pdf
12A503
VEHICLE DYNAMICS
3
3.5
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the basic concepts of vibration.
To comprehend the necessary details to understand the structure of tyres in automobiles.
To understand the performance and handling characteristics of vehicle.
To have the knowledge on suspension system and steering geometry.
OUTCOMES:
explain the concept of degrees of freedom and types of friction.
describe the ride properties of tyre and estimation of tyre friction.
explain the performance characteristics of a vehicle.
exhibit the knowledge on handling characteristics of vehicles.
correlate and explain the relationships between vehicle design variables and vehicle dynamic
behaviour.
UNIT I
BASICS OF VIBRATION
9
Introduction Significance of vibration - Classification of vibration - Definitions - Mechanical
vibration and human comfort Single degree of freedom Free, forced and damped vibrations.
Magnification factor and transmissibility Vibration absorber Vibration measuring instruments
Two degree of freedom system Modal analysis Structural and Viscous damping in structures
Dynamic loads and types.
UNIT II
TYRES
9
Tyre forces and moments Rolling resistance of tyres Relationship between tractive effort and
longitudinal slip of tyres Cornering properties of tyres Ride properties of tyre Estimation of tyre
friction.
UNIT III
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS OF VEHICLE
9
Equation of motion and maximum tractive effort Aerodynamics forces and moments Transmission
characteristics Prediction of vehicle performance Braking performance.
UNIT IV
HANDLING CHARACTERISTICS OF VEHICLES
9
Steering geometry Steady state handling characteristics Steady state response to steering input
Transient response characteristics Directional stability of vehicle Testing of handling
characteristics.
UNIT V
DYNAMICS OF SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
9
Requirements of suspension system Spring mass frequency Wheel hop Wheel wobble Wheel
shimmy Choice of suspension spring rate Calculation of effective spring rate Vehicle suspension
in fore and aft Hydraulic dampers and choice of damping characteristics Compensated suspension
systems Vehicle ride model Load distribution Stability of a vehicle resting in a slope and running
on a banked road and curved road.
TOTAL: 45+15
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author
1.
Singiresu S Rao
2.
Rajesh Rajamani
Title of the Book
Publisher
Mechanical Vibrations
Vehicle Dynamics and
Control
Prentice Hall, New Delhi
Title of the Book
Publisher
Springer
Year of
publication
2011
2011
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
1.
2.
Author
Rao V Dukkipati
Wong J Y
Vehicle Dynamics
Year of
publication
CRC Press
Theory of Ground
Vehicles
John Wiley and Sons, 4

Edition
9
2000
th
2008
3.
Graham Kelly S
4.
Reza N Jazar
Mechanical Vibrations:
Theory and Applications,
SI Edition
Vehicle Dynamics:
Theory and Application
Cengage Learning
2011
Springer
2008
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://scholar.lib.vt.edu/theses/available/etd-5440202339731121/unrestricted/CHAP3_DOC.pdf
http://vehicledynamics-expo.com/09vdx_conf/pdfs/day1/11_Karsten_Landwehr.pdf
http://sbel.wisc.edu/documents/TR-2011-02.pdf
http://store.sae.org/catalog/vehicles-performance.pdf
http://faculty.kfupm.edu.sa/ME/qahtanih/ME413Note/Chapter1.pdf
12A504
AUTOMOTIVE TRANSMISSION
3
3.5
OBJECTIVES:
To provide the theoretical background necessary to understand the construction and operation
of the clutches.
To provide the basic understanding of the theory, operation of various types of gears and gear
boxes provided in automobiles.
To comprehend the use and the function of hydromatic drives in automobiles.
To impart the necessary knowledge on Epicyclic gear boxes.
OUTCOMES:
Learners will be able to
explain the construction and operation features of the clutches and gear box used in
automobiles.
identify component parts and terminology used in fluid coupling and torque convertor.
comprehend the use of Epicyclic gear box and its application.
explain the function of Hydromatic drives and its application.
explain the functions of Hydrostatic and Electric drives and its application.
UNIT I
CLUTCH AND GEAR BOX
9
Requirement of transmission system Different types of clutches - Principle and construction of single
plate coil spring and Diaphragm spring clutches Need and objectives of Gear box - Construction and
operation of Sliding mesh - Constant mesh and Synchromesh gearboxes - Determination of gear ratios
for vehicles Performance characteristics in different speeds Problems on performance of
automobile such as resistance to motion - Tractive effort - Engine speed and power and acceleration.
UNIT II
HYDRODYNAMIC TRANSMISSION
9
Fluid coupling Principle - Constructional details - Torque capacity - Performance characteristics Reduction of drag torque in fluid coupling Torque converter - Principle - Constructional details Performance characteristics - Multistage torque converters and Polyphase torque converters.
UNIT III
EPICYCLIC GEAR BOXES
9
Principle of Planetary gear trains Wilson Gear box Cotal electromagnetic transmission Hydraulic
control system for automatic transmission.
UNIT IV
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION APPLICATIONS
9
Need for automatic transmission Four speed longitudinally mounted automatic transmission
Chevrolet Turboglide Transmission Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) Types
Operations of a typical CVT.
UNIT V
HYDROSTATIC AND ELECTRIC DRIVE
9
Hydrostatic drive Various types of hydrostatic systems Principles of Hydrostatic drive system Advantages and limitations - Comparison of hydrostatic drive with hydrodynamic drive Construction
and working of typical Janny hydrostatic drive Electric drive Types Principle of early and
modified Ward Leonard Control system - Advantages and limitations.
TOTAL: 45+15
10
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Year of
publication
Publisher
1.
Kenneth Newton
William Steeds
Motor Vehicles
Illife Publishers
2002
2.
Judge A W
Modern Transmission
Systems
Chapman and Hall

Ltd.
2000
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Author(s)
Heinz Heisler
Crouse W H
Anglin D L
Devaradjane G
Kumaresan M
Sudhir Kumar
Saxena
Title of the Book

Advanced Vehicle
Technology
Automotive Transmission and
Power Trains Construction
Year of
publication
Publisher
Butterworth
Heinemann
2002
McGraw-Hill
2004
Automobile Engineering
AMK Publishers
2013
Laxmi Publications
2009
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://nptel.ac.in/courses/IIT-MADRAS/Machine_Design_II/pdf/3_5.pdf
http://climeg.poliba.it/file.php/121/Materiale_didattico_MAFII/hydr_coupl.pdf
http://web.mit.edu/2.972/www/reports/torque_converter/torque_converter.htm
http://elearning.vtu.ac.in/P6/enotes/ME44/Unit5-GR.pdf
http://engineering.purdue.edu/Maha/docs/Courses/me597-abe591/Fall2013/ME597-lecture14
13.pdf
12A505
THEORY OF MACHINES
3
3.5
OBJECTIVES:
To provide the necessary theoretical background on velocity and acceleration mechanisms.
To understand the basics of friction and its applications.
To impart knowledge on various types of gears and functions of Cams in automobiles.
To understand balancing and vibration concepts associated with the engines.
OUTCOMES:
explain various links, pairs and determine velocity and acceleration of simple mechanisms.
explain the types of friction in various components.
explain the various terminologies involved and the use of gears and cams.
explain the balancing concepts and gyroscopic effects
explain the vibration concepts in engines and methods to minimize the vibration.
UNIT I
MECHANISMS
9
Definition Machine and structure Kinematic link, pair and chain - Classification of kinematic pairs
- Constraint and motion - Degrees of freedom Slider crank - Single and double Crank rocker
mechanisms - Inversions and applications Introduction to kinematic analysis and synthesis of simple
mechanisms Determination of velocity and acceleration of simple mechanisms.
UNIT II
FRICTION
9
Types of friction Friction in screw and nut - Screw jack - Pivot, collar and thrust bearings - Plate and
cone clutch - Belt and rope drives - Creep in belts - Open and crossed belt drives Ratio of tensions
Effect of centrifugal and initial tensions Condition for maximum power transmission.
11
UNIT III
GEARING AND CAMS
9
Gear Types and profile - Nomenclature of spur and helical gears - Laws of gearing - Interference Requirement of minimum number of teeth in gears - Gear trains - Simple, compound and reverted gear
trains - Determination of speed and torque in epicyclic gear trains Cams Types of cams and
followers - Cam design for different follower motions.
UNIT IV
BALANCING
9
Static and dynamic balancing Single and several masses in different planes Primary and secondary
balancing of reciprocating masses Balancing of single and multi cylinder engines Governors and
Gyroscopic effects.
UNIT V
VIBRATIONS
9
Free, forced and damped vibrations of single degree of freedom systems Force transmitted to
supports Vibration isolation Vibration absorption Torsional vibration of shafts Single and multi
rotor systems Geared shafts Critical speed of shafts.
TOTAL: 45+15
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Sadhu Singh
Theory of Machines
Pearson Education India
2006
2.
Khurmi R S
Gupta J K
Theory of Machines
Eurasia Publishing House
2008
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Laxmi Publications,
New Delhi
Laxmi Publications,
New Delhi
Tata McGraw Hill
Publishing Company,
New Delhi
1.
Brar J S
Bansal R K
A Textbook of Theory of
Machines
2.
Dr Bansal R K
Theory of Machines
3.
Ratan S S
Theory of Machines
4.
Gupta V R
Theory of Machines:
Kinematics and
Dynamics
Year of
Publication
2004
2001
2002
I. K. International Pvt
Ltd
2010
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://courses.csail.mit.edu/6.S080/lectures/02_all.pdf
http://asu.edu/courses/kin335/documents/Friction.pdf
http://elearning.vtu.ac.in/P6/enotes/ME44/Unit6-AP.pdf
http://eng.uah.edu/~wallace/mae364/doc/Labs/balance.pdf
http://turbolab.tamu.edu/proc/turboproc/T6/T6pg13-22.pdf
12A506
MATERIALS FOR AUTOMOBILES

3
OBJECTIVES:
To provide the knowledge on various types of Iron and Steels used in automobiles.
To comprehend the non-ferrous alloys and their properties.
To impart the use of composite materials and their manufacturing processes.
To introduce the use of polymers and powder metallurgy processes and their applications.
12
OUTCOMES:
The learners should be able to
explain the various types of iron and steels and its applications for automobiles.
describe the application of Non-ferrous alloys in automobiles.
exhibit the knowledge on composite materials manufacturing process and application.
explain the applications of polymers.
exhibit the knowledge on powder metallurgy and their applications in automobiles.
9
UNIT I
IRON AND STEELS FOR AUTOMOTIVE APPLICATIONS
Cast iron Austempered ductile iron - Compacted graphite iron Iron Carbon Diagram Steels - Plain
carbon steels - Low alloy steels - HSLA steels - IF steels - Bake hardening steels - TRIP steels -Ultra
high strength steels - Stainless steels - Production, properties and applications in automobiles.
UNIT II
NON-FERROUS ALLOYS FOR AUTOMOTIVE APPLICATIONS
9
Aluminum alloys Cast alloys Wrought alloys Age hardenable alloys - Working and heat
treatment - Applications in automobiles Magnesium alloys Titanium alloys - Applications in
automobiles - Selection of Non-Ferrous metals.
UNIT III
COMPOSITE MATERIALS
9
Production of composite materials and products Moulding and forming of composites - Machining
and joining of composites - Application of composites in automobiles - Metal matrix composites
Polymer matrix composites and ceramic matrix composites - Applications in automotive industry.
UNIT IV
POLYMERS
9
Processing of polymers - Brief description of equipment and process details of extrusion and injection
moulding Thermoforming Blow moulding Concept of polymer design - Selection criteria for
automotive applications.
UNIT V
POWDER METALLURGY
9
Automotive applications of powder metallurgical products Ceramics for automotive applications
Preparation and forming of ceramics - Applications.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Year of
Publication
Publisher
1.
Jason Rowe
Advanced Materials in
Automotive Engineering
Wood head Publishing
2012
2.
Geoff Davies
Materials for Automobile

Bodies
Elsevier Ltd
2012
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Title of the Book
Author(s)
1.
Brain Cantor
Patrick Grant Colin
Johnston
(lightweight, functional and
novel materials)
Taylor & Francis

Group
2007
2.
Charles A Harper
Handbook of Plastics,
Elastomers and Composites
McGraw Hill, USA
2004
3.
ASM Handbook
Selection of Materials, Vol. 1

and 2
ASM Metals Park,

USA
2000
4.
Akira Okada
Innovative Materials for

Automotive Industry
Nova
Publishers
2010
13
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Sl. No.
Science
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http:// web.utk.edu/~prack/MSE%20300/FeC.pdf
http://nptel.ac.in/courses/113106032/16%20%20Properties%20and%20Applications%20of%20Materials.pdf
http://nptel.iitk.ac.in/courses/Webcourse-contents/IIScBANG/Composite%20Materials/Learning%20material%20-%20composite%20material.pdf
http://nptel.ac.in/courses/Webcourse-contents/IIScBANG/Material%20Science/pdf/Lecture_Notes/MLN_11.pdf
http://me.emu.edu.tr/majid/Powder%20Metallurgy/ME364_PM_process.pdf
12O511
SOFT SKILLS
(Common to All Branches)

0
1.5
OBJECTIVES:
To provide an opportunity to acquire knowledge of grammar to speak and write

appropriately.
To train communicate effectively and develop the interpersonal skills.
To develop team building and presentation skills.
To provide an understanding and develop etiquette necessary to present himself.

OUTCOMES:
Learner should be able to
have knowledge of grammar with an understanding.
speak and write appropriately.
communicate effectively and enhance their interpersonal relationship building skills with
renewed self confidence.
work together in teams and effectively present himself among the team members.
understand and develop the etiquette necessary to present himself in a professional manner.
UNIT I
EFFECTIVE ENGLISH
9
Basic rules of grammar Parts of speech Tense Concord Vocabulary Sentence Construction
Idioms and phrases.
UNIT II
ART OF COMMUNICATION
7
Verbal communication Non-verbal communication Body language Pose-expression Active
listening Paraphrasing Peer review Effective communication.
UNIT III
WORLD OF TEAM
7
Importance of team work Team Vs group Attributes of a successful team Self enhancement
Assertive skills Self-confidence Emotional intelligence Decision making.
UNIT IV
SOFT SKILLS
15
Interview skills Facing interview Preparation and checklist Mock interview Feedback Group
discussion Team work Discussion on news headlines Mock GD and feedback Presentation
skills Effective presentation Selection of topic Time management Mock presentation and
comments.
UNIT V
BUSINESS ETIQUETTES AND ETHICS
ETIQUETTES: Telephone and E-mail etiquette Dining etiquette Role model.
ETHICS: Importance of ethics Choices and dilemmas Negotiation skills.
TOTAL: 45
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No
1
Author(s)
Alex K
Title of the Book

Soft Skills
Publisher
Chant Publication
14
Year of
publication
2014
Peter Francis S J
Soft Skills and Professional

Communication
Tata McGraw-Hill
Education
2011
WEB URLs:
1. http://eslflow.com
2. http://onestopenglish.com
3. http://citehr.com
4. http://scribd.com
5. http:// nptel.ac.in/syllabus/109104031
12A512
AUTOMOBILE CHASSIS COMPONENTS LABORATORY

0
1.5
1.5
OBJECTIVES:
To understand various terminologies of automotive chassis.
To provide the necessary practical knowledge on various automobile chassis.
To provide hands on experience in automobile steering systems.
To develop the adequate knowledge in differential mechanism used in automobiles.
OUTCOMES:
identify and explain the applications of various automotive chassis.
demonstrate the function of different types of braking systems available in automobiles.
comprehend power steering mechanism available in automobiles.
explain the concept and use of differential mechanism.
demonstrate the function of power steering mechanism available in automobiles.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
STUDY AND MEASUREMENT OF THE FOLLOWING CHASSIS
1. Tata
2. Ashok Leyland
3. Swaraj Mazda
STUDY, DISMANTLING AND ASSEMBLING OF
1. Steering system
2. Braking system
3. Differential mechanism
4. Power steering mechanism
12A513
COMPUTER AIDED ENGINE DESIGN LABORATORY

0
OBJECTIVES:
To design the piston and its accessories.
To design connecting rod assembly.
To design crankshaft and flywheel in the automobiles.
To design the inlet and exhaust valves in an engine.
OUTCOMES:
explain the procedure and design the piston and its accessories.
apply practical skills to design the connecting rod.
implement the practical understanding in the design of crankshaft and flywheels.
comprehend the design considerations in cam shaft in automobiles.
apply the knowledge on design of combustion chamber.
15
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Design of piston, piston pin and piston rings and drawing of these components.
2. Design of connecting rod small end and big end shank design, design of big and cap bolts and
Drawing the connecting rod assembly.
3. Design of crankshaft, balancing weight calculations, development of short and long
crank arms, front end and rear end details and drawing the crankshaft assembly.
4. Design and drawing of flywheel, design of ring gear, drawing the flywheel including the
development of ring gear teeth.
5. Design and drawing of the inlet and exhaust valves.
6. Design and drawing of Cam and Camshaft and Cam profile generation.
8. Design of combustion chamber.
9. Design and drawing of engine complete assembly involved with cylinder block, cylinder head,
crankcase, valve ports, water jackets, front and rear end details.
10. Virtual validation of Automotive parts with the help of any modelling software.
12A514
METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

0
1.5
OBJECTIVES:
To provide the necessary practical understanding of calibration.
To understand the measuring methods of various dimensions.
To provide knowledge of checking the various properties.
To develop knowledge on tolerance of components.
OUTCOMES:
exhibit the skills in using various measuring devices.
identify and list the various measuring and checking instruments.
use the appropriate instruments for checking the straightness and flatness.
use the surface table and comparators.
comprehend the use of force and temperature measuring devices.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Calibration of Vernier Caliper, Micrometer and Dial Gauge.
2. Checking linear and angular dimensions of a part using Vernier Caliper and Micrometer.
3. Checking linear and angular dimensions of a part using slip gauges / sine bars.
4. Measurement of taper angle using sine bar / bevel protractor.
5. Measurement of cutting tool parameters using tool makers microscope.
6. Measurement of straightness and flatness using auto-collimator.
7. Measurement of thread parameters using Profile projector.
8. Measurement of thread parameters using Floating carriage micrometer.
9. Checking the limits of dimensional tolerances using Comparators.
(Mechanical / Pneumatic / Electrical)
10. Measurement of Temperature using Thermocouple / Pyrometer.
11. Measurement of Force using Load Cell / Proving ring.
12. Measurement of Gear tooth dimensions using Gear Tooth Tester.
SEMESTER VI
12A601/12M601/12C601/12P601/12F601 PRINCIPLES OF MANAGEMENT AND
ENGINEERING ETHICS
(Common to AUTO/MECH/CIVIL/CSE/IT)
3
OBJECTIVES:
grasp the basics of management functions.
understand basic management principles applying to individuals, small and large
organizations.
16
appreciate the ideal characteristics of a good manager.

create ethical, social and environmental awareness.
understand the importance of ethics and sustainability in the modern organization.
OUTCOMES:
work as an effective team member and leader.
demonstrate understanding of successful planning.
use problem-solving strategies and critical thinking in real life situations.
develop a position on the relation between personal morality and professional codes.
begin considering larger-scale ethical issues related to science and engineering.
UNIT I
MANAGEMENT
9
Introduction The evolution of management thought Managerial roles and styles Decision making
approach Management by objectives (MBO) Management and society Relevance of
management to modern industries.
UNIT II
MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
9
The nature and purpose of planning Objectives Strategies, policies and planning premises The
nature of organizing Organizational structure Departmentation Line/staff authority and
decentralization Co-ordination functions in organization Communication The system and process
of controlling Control techniques
UNIT III
ORGANIZATIONAL BEHAVIOUR
9
Definition, need and importance Nature and scope Importance of groups and teams Role
relationships and conflict Group dynamics Perception Personality Attitudes Work values.
UNIT IV
ENGINEERING ETHICS
9
The importance of ethics in engineering Philosophy, religion, and ethics Moral analysis The role
of codes of ethics, habits and morals Distinguishing exterior and interior morality The importance
of intention Hierarchy of moral Values Virtuous imprinting.
UNIT V
ETHICAL VALUES
9
Managing Ethics Frame work of organizational ethic theories and sources Ethics across cultures
Factors influencing business ethics Ethical decision making Ethical values Ethical leadership for
improved corporate governance Sample code of Ethics like ASME, ASCE, IEEE, Institution of
Engineers (India).
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
1.
2.
Author(s)
Koontz
ODonnell
Kitson.A
Campbell.R
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Essentials of Management
Tata McGraw Hill
2008
The Ethical Organization,
Palgrave
2008
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Prasad L M
Principles of Management
Tata McGraw Hill
2007
2.
Stphen P Robbins
Q Many Coutter
Management A Global
Perspective
Tata McGraw Hill
2010
3.
Rao VSP
Hari Krishna V
Management: Text and

Cases
Excel Books, 1st

Edition.
2009
4.
Shaikh Saleem
Business Environment
Pearson Education
2006
17
WEB URLs:
1. http://www.personal.kent.edu
2. http://www.laico.org
3. http://www.appe.indiana.edu
12A602
AUTOMOTIVE CHASSIS DESIGN

3
3.5
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the construction and use of various frames and its sub systems.
To understand the construction of steering and suspension systems in automobiles.
To impart adequate knowledge in design of gears and gear boxes.
To understand the design concepts of brakes, wheels and tyres.
OUTCOMES:
explain the construction and terminologies used in various frames and its subsystems.
apply the knowledge to design the steering and suspension system.
apply the design procedure to design the parallel axis gears and gear boxes.
implement the design procedure to design the bevel and worm gears and gear boxes.
comprehend the constructional and design procedures of brakes, wheels and tyres.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO CHASSIS FRAME AND SUB-SYSTEMS
9
Types of vehicles - Conventional and off-highway vehicles - Multi axle vehicles Vehicle
specifications Different layouts of power plant with reference to location and drive Types of frames
Frameless chassis Various forces acting on frames - Different sections Materials - Crash safety
Calculation of power required to propel a vehicle.
UNIT II
DESIGN OF STEERING AND SUSPENSION SYSTEM
9
Functions and requirements of steering system Conditions for true rolling of wheels Ackerman and
Davis steering mechanisms Roll centre and roll axis Steering linkages - Steering kinematics Steering geometry Steering angle and steering ratio Under steering and over steering Calculation
of steering wheel effort and pitman arm torque Design of pitman arm for equivalent stresses Need
and role of suspension system - Factors affecting ride quality - Types of suspension systems Kinematics of two and three axle suspension system Need and role of anti-roll bar Design of coil,
leaf and torsion bar spring Basics of pneumatic suspension and design Basics of shock absorber
design Empirical relationships.
UNIT III
DESIGN OF PARALLEL AXIS GEARS AND GEAR BOXES
9
Gear tooth terminology Speed ratio and number of teeth Force analysis Tooth stresses Dynamic
effects - Fatigue strength - Factor of safety Gear materials Module and face width Power rating
calculations based on strength and wear considerations Design of spur gear Parallel axis helical
gears Pressure angle in the normal and transverse plane Equivalent number of teeth Forces and
stresses Design of gear boxes Sliding mesh gear box - Constant mesh gear box Synchromesh
Gearbox Transfer case Two speed axles.
UNIT IV
DESIGN OF BEVEL AND WORM GEARS AND GEAR BOXES
9
Straight and spiral bevel gear tooth terminology - Tooth forces and stresses - Equivalent number of
teeth Design of straight tooth and spiral tooth bevel gears Hypoid Gears Worm Gear - Merits and
demerits - Terminology - Thermal capacity - Materials - Forces and stresses Efficiency Design of
single start and multi start worm gear pair Design of single stage and multistage final drive.
UNIT V
DESIGN OF BRAKES, WHEELS AND TYRES
9
Brakes - Function Stopping time and distance - Weight transfer during braking - Mechanical,
hydraulic and pneumatic brake actuating mechanisms - Disc and drum brakes - Design and analysis of
brake shoes and friction pads Design of drum brakes Design of shoe brakes Role of hand brake
and its types Types of wheels Spokes and rim types of wheels - Alloy wheels - Wheel specification
Tyre requirements - Selection of tyres - Wheels and mountings - Lateral force and friction coefficient
Self-aligning torque and caster offset - Overturning moment - Torque steer effects Tyre
construction - Tube and tubeless tyres - Tread patterns and their effects Effects of under and over
inflation.
TOTAL: 45+15
18
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
publication
1.
Bhandari V B
Design of Machine
Elements
Tata Mcgraw Hill,

New Delhi
2010
2.
Giri N K
Automobile Mechanics
Khanna Publishers
2006
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Year of
publication
Publisher
1.
Julian Happian
Smith
An Introduction to
Modern Vehicle Design
Butterworth
Heinemann
Publishers
2002
2.
Peter R N Childs
Mechanical Design
Elsevier Ltd
2004
3.
Reimpell J
Stoll H
Betzler J W
The Automotive Chassis
SAE International,
Second Edition
2001
4.
Gitin M Maithra
Hand book of Gear Design
Tata Mcgraw Hill,

New Delhi
2008
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://ignou.ac.in/upload/Unit-8-61.pdf
http://teachersites.schoolworld.com/webpages/MTurner/files/studyguide%20suspension%20and%
20steering.pdf
http://nptel.ac.in/courses/Webcoursecontents/IIT%20Kharagpur/Machine%20design1/pdf/mod12le
s2.pdf
12A603
COMPUTER AIDED VEHICLE DESIGN

3
0 3.5
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the design concepts of vehicle frame and suspension.
To provide adequate knowledge about the analysis of loads acting on the on front axle and
steering systems.
To understand the design method of propeller shaft and final drive.
To understand the design concepts of clutches and gear boxes with computer applications.
OUTCOMES:
design the vehicle frames and suspension systems for passenger and commercial vehicles.
analyse loads, moments and stresses in front axle and steering systems.
demonstrate the design skills on drive line and rear axle.
exhibit the knowledge on computer-aided design of clutches.
use the computer aided design skills to design propeller shaft and gear boxes.
UNIT I
VEHICLE FRAME AND SUSPENSION
9
Study of Loads - Moments and Stresses on frame members Design of frame for passenger and
commercial vehicles Design of leaf springs - Coil springs - Torsion bar springs.
UNIT II
FRONT AXLE AND STEERING SYSTEMS
9
Analysis of loads Moments and Stresses at different sections of front axle - Determination of bearing
loads at Kingpin bearings - Wheel Spindle Bearings - Choice of bearings Determination of Optimum
dimension and proportions for steering linkages ensuring minimum error in steering.
19
UNIT III
DRIVE LINE AND REAR AXLE
9
Design of propeller shaft Design of final drive gearing Design of Full-floating, semi-floating and
three quarter floating rear axle shafts and rear axle housings.
UNIT IV
CLUTCH AND GEARBOX
9
Torque capacity of Clutch - Design of clutch components - Design details of Roller and spring type
clutches Design of three speed and four speed gear boxes.
UNIT V
COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN
9
Computer Aided Design of Clutch components Propeller Shaft Gears Three speed and four speed
gear boxes.
Note: Use of Software Packages for analysis and design of mechanical systems may be used for design
problem.
TOTAL: 45+15
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.
No.
Author(s)
1.
Dean Averns
2.
Julian Happian-Smith
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Automobile Chassis
Design Book
Introduction to
Modern Vehicle
Design
Koteliansky
Press, Second Edition
2009
SAE
International
2004
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Author(s)
Stokes A
Alexandr F Andreev
Viachaslau Kabanau
Vladimir Vantsevich
Newton Steeds and
Garret
Julian HappianSmith
Title of the Book
Year of
Publication
Publisher
Manual Gearbox Design
SAE
International
2000
Driveline Systems of Ground

Vehicles: Theory and Design
CRC Press
2010
Motor Vehicle
Iliffe Books Ltd.,

London
2001
An Introduction to Modern
Vehicle Design
Elsevier
2001
WEB URLs:
1. http:// akamaiuniversity.us/PJST13_2_39.pdf
2. http:// new.dli.ernet.in/rawdataupload/upload/0088/912/PTIFF/00000001.tif
3. http:// academia.edu/1055381/DESIGN_and_STATIC_ANALYSIS_OF_REAR_AXLE
4. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/IIT-MADRAS/Machine_Design_II/pdf/3_5.pdf
5. http://ignou.ac.in/upload/Unit-4-61.pdf
12A604
FINITE ELEMENT ANALYSIS

3
3.5
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the theoretical concepts and applications of Finite Element Analysis.
To provide the knowledge to perform static analysis.
To impart adequate knowledge to perform dynamic analysis.
To comprehend the knowledge on handling the finite element equations and to provide
solutions.
OUTCOMES:
formulate and apply mathematical model for engineering problems.
formulate and provide solutions for static problems.
use the skills to formulate and analyse the dynamic problems
use various solutions methods to formulate required equations.
analyse the heat transfer and flow problems.
20
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO FEM
9
Engineering design analysis Role of FEA in new product development and Product life cycle Meaning and purpose Steady state propagation and transient problems Basic concepts of FEM Applicability of FEM to structural analysis, heat transfer and fluid flow problems - Advantages and
limitations of FEM Test for convergence - Element choice Commercial finite element packages
Organization - Advantages and limitations.
UNIT II
STATIC ANALYSIS
9
General procedure of FEM Skeletal and continuum structures Discretization of domain Basic
types of elements Concept of stiffness analysis Direct approach, formal approach using shape
function Rayleigh-Ritz method Formulation of element stiffness matrices One dimensional spar
and beam elements Two dimensional triangular and quadrilateral elements ISO parametric elements
Treatment of boundary condition FEA validation for beams, cantilever, simply supported and
verification using calculation.
UNIT III
DYNAMIC ANALYSIS
9
Equations of motion for dynamic problems Consistent and lumped mass matrices - Formulation of
element mass matrices Free vibration problem formulation Loads, load types and application Types of dynamic analysis and definition.
UNIT IV
SOLUTION METHODS FOR FINITE ELEMENT EQUATIONS
9
Handling of simultaneous equations Gaussian elimination method and Choleski method Solving
Eigen value problems Jacobi method Numerical integration.
UNIT V
HEAT TRANSFER AND FLOW ANALYSIS
9
Basic equations of heat transfer and fluid flow problems Finite Element formulation One
dimensional heat transfer and fluid flow problems.
TOTAL: 45+15
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
publication
1.
Rao S S
The Finite Element Method in

Engineering
Pergammon Press,
New York
2005
2.
Seshu P
A Text book on Finite Element

Analysis
Prentice Hall of
India, New Delhi
2003
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
publication
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
1.
David V Hutton
Fundamentals of Finite
Element Analysis
McGraw-Hill Int.
Edition New York.
2004
2.
Tirupathi R
Chandrupatla
Ashok D
Belegundu
Introduction to Finite
Elements in Engineering
Prentice Hall College

Div (1996-08-26)
2002
3.
Logan D L
Thomson Learning
2002
4.
Cook R D
Malkus D S
Plesha M E
John Wiley and Sons,

New Delhi
2003
A First Course in the

Finite Element Method
Concepts and
Applications of Finite
Element Analysis
WEB URLs:
1. http:// iitg.ernet.in/engfac/rtiwari/resume/usdixit.pdf
2. http:// leb.eei.uni-erlangen.de/winterakademie/2009/report
3. http:// engg.uvic.ca/mech410/lectures/FEA-theory.pdf
4. http:// math.usm.edu/lambers/mat461/lecture27.pdf
5. http:// tku.edu.tw/~tkjse/15-1/07-CHE9904.pdf
21
12A605
COMBUSTION AND HEAT TRANSFER

3
3.5
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the combustion and combustion process of Internal Combustion engine.
To impart the knowledge on combustion methods of SI engine and related terminologies.
To understand the various stages of combustion in CI Engines and its related terminologies.
To understand the various heat transfer methods and experimental techniques and its
applications in the Internal Combustion Engine.
OUTCOMES:
explain the combustion process of internal combustion engine.
use the knowledge of SI engine combustion process and to identify the various stages of
combustion.
use the knowledge of CI engine combustion process and to identify the various stages of
combustion.
perform the heat transfer calculations to measure the heat loss.
explain the various experimental techniques
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Definition Types of combustion Theory of combustion Combustion in premixed and diffusion
flames Combustion process in IC Engines.
UNIT II
COMBUSTION IN SI ENGINES
9
Stages of combustion in SI Engines - Flame propagation - Rate of pressure rise - Cycle to cycle
variation Abnormal combustion Theories of detonation Effect of engine operating variables on
combustion Turbulent combustion and its significance.
UNIT III
COMBUSTION IN CI ENGINES
9
Droplet and spray combustion theory Stages of combustion Delay period Peak pressure Heat
release and gas temperature Diesel Knock Turbulent combustion and its significance.
UNIT IV
HEAT TRANSFER IN IC ENGINES
9
Basic definitions Conductive heat transfer Convective heat transfer Radiative heat transfer
Temperature distribution and thermal stresses in piston Cylinder liner Cylinder head Fins and
valves Heat transfer correlations for engines Fin design Radiators and oil coolers.
UNIT V
EXPERIMENTAL TECHNIQUES
9
Photographic studies of combustion processes Pressure - Crank angle diagram in SI and CI engines
Temperature measurement in piston, cylinder liner, cylinder head and engine valves In cylinder flow
measurement techniques Combustion modeling using Computational fluid dynamics Types, models
and examples.
TOTAL: 45+15
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
1.
2.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Heywood J B
Internal Combustion
Engine Fundamentals
Ganesan V
Internal Combustion
Engineering
Publisher
McGraw Hill Book Co.,
USA
Tata McGraw Hill
Publishing Co., New
Delhi
Year of
Publication
2001
2003
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
1.
Author(s)
Spalding D B
Title of the Book

Some Fundamentals
of Combustion
22
Publisher
Butterworth Science
Publications, London
Year of
Publication
2001
2.
3.
4.
Sara McAllister
Jyh-Yuan Chen
A Carlos FernandezPello
Fundamentals of
Combustion
Processes
Holmaan J P
Heat Transfer
John H Lienhard IV
John H Lienhard V
A Heat Transfer Text

Book
Springer
2011
Tata McGraw Hill

Publishing Co., New
Delhi
Courier Dover
Publications
2000
2013
WEB URLS:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://tech.plym.ac.uk/sme/THER205-web/IC-ENGS1.PDF
http://web.itu.edu.tr/~sorusbay/ICE/index_files/LN07.pdf
http://web.iitd.ac.in/~pmvs/mel713/mel713-36.ppt
http://ocw.mit.edu/courses/mechanical-engineering/2-61-internal-combustion-engines-spring2008/lecture-notes/lecture23.pdf
http://minds.wisconsin.edu/bitstream/handle/1793/35299/2004%20-%20Dennis%20Ward.pdf
12A611
HEAT TRANSFER LABORATORY

0
1.5
OBJECTIVES:
To introduce the experimental methods to measure the thermal conductivity of metallic
materials.
To impart the practical knowledge to determine temperature distribution.
To provide adequate practical guidance to determine the heat transfer between fluids and
solids.
To impart practical knowledge on experimental methods in heat exchangers.
OUTCOMES:
measure the thermal conductivity of different metallic materials.
measure the heat transfer between fluids and solid boundaries.
measure the amount of heat exchanged between fluids in heat exchangers.
conduct experiments to measure the heat rejection from a pin fin.
carry out experiments on radiative heat transfer.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Thermal conductivity measurement by guarded plate method.
2. Heat transfer through the Composite walls.
3. Natural convection heat transfer from a vertical cylinder.
4. Forced convection inside tube.
5. Heat transfer from pin-fin (natural & forced convection modes).
6. Determination of Stefan-Boltzmann constant.
7. Determination of emissivity of a grey surface.
8. Effectiveness of Parallel/counter flow heat exchanger.
9. Thermal conductivity of insulating powder.
12A612
COMPUTER AIDED CHASSIS DESIGN LABORATORY

0
OBJECTIVES :
To understand the terminologies of the chassis.
To understand various components and design aspects of gears in automobiles.
To understand the layout of gear box in automobiles.
To understand various types of clutches used in automobiles.
23
1.5
OUTCOMES:
model the clutches and gear box
calculate and design of various clutches.
calculate and design the gear box using drafting software.
exhibit the knowledge on designing bearings using drafting software.
exhibit the knowledge on assembly drawing using drafting software.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. CLUTCH
Complete design of clutch components. Components and assembly drawing using Drafting software.
2. GEAR BOX
Gear train calculations, layout of gear box. Calculation of bearing loads and selection of bearings.
Complete assembly drawing using Drafting software.
12A651/12M651/12C651/12L651/12T651/12E651/12N651/12P651/12F651
MINI PROJECT
0
1.5
OBJECTIVES:
To provide
a n opportunity to transform theoretical knowledge acquired into practice.
sufficient confidence to carry out final year projects.
an opportunity to conceptualize an idea in to a system or product based on the theoretical
knowledge gained in the specific domain.
knowledge and practice in writing project report and its presentation to the expert committee.
OUTCOMES:
take up challenging real time problems and find solutions.
write project reports and if necessary project proposals and present them before a committee.
Guidelines
1. Maximum of 4 students per group will do the project.
2.
Each batch will select and carry out their project under the guidance of a teaching faculty.
3.
The mini project will be evaluated by the guide and coordinator nominated by the HOD as per
the following details:
Category
Marks
Project Selection and Design
20
Implementation and Validation
40
Project Report
20
Viva-Voce
20
24
Evaluated by
Guide
Guide and Coordinator
ELECTIVES
12A001
INTELLIGENT TRANSPORT SYSTEM

3
OBJECTIVES:
To provide the theoretical background necessary to understand the concept of driver

assistance systems.
To comprehend the use of GPS and navigation systems.
To provide the theoretical knowledge of safety systems for passengers and driver of a vehicle.
To understand the importance of comfort and control systems used in a vehicle.

OUTCOMES:
explain the principles of driver assistance systems.
identify and explain the use of GPS and navigation systems.
explain the use of safety and security systems provided in a car.
identify and explain the characteristics of comfort systems.
explain the use and the function of various control devices of a vehicle.
UNIT I
DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS
9
Introduction Driver support systems - Driver information - Driver perception - Driver convenience Driver monitoring Vehicle support systems General vehicle control Collision avoidance Vehicle
status monitoring.
UNIT II
TELEMATICS
9
Global Positioning Systems Geographical information systems Navigation Systems Automotive
Vision System Road recognition Driver assistance systems.
UNIT III
SAFETY AND SECURITY SYSTEMS
9
Airbags Seat belt tightening system Collision warning systems Child lock Anti-lock braking
systems Anti theft technologies Smart card system Number plate coding.
UNIT IV
COMFORT SYSTEMS
9
Active suspension systems Requirement and characteristics Different types Power steering
Collapsible and tilt able steering column Power windows.
UNIT V
ADAPTIVE CONTROL SYSTEMS
9
Adaptive cruise control Adaptive noise control Anti-spin regulation Traction control systems
Cylinder cutoff technology.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
publication
1.
Ljubo Vlacic
Michel Parent
Fumio Harashima
Intelligent Vehicle
Technologies
Butterworth-Heinemann
publications, Oxford
2001
2.
Robert Bosch
Automotive Hand Book
SAE , 5th Edition
2000
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
1.
Author
Bechhold
Title of the Book

Understanding Automotive
Electronics
25
Publisher
SAE
Year of
publication
2000
2.
William B Riddens
3.
Sumit Ghosh
Tony Lee
Tony S Lee
4.
Bob Williams
Electronics
Intelligent Transportation
Systems: New Principles and
Architectures
Intelligent Transport Systems
Standards
Butter worth
Heinemann
Woburn, 5th Edition
2000
CRC Press
2002
Artech House
2008
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://ti.com/lit/pdf/slyy044
http://nxp.com/documents/leaflet/939775016910.pdf
http://ritzel.siu.edu/courses/302s/vehicle/VehicleSafetyFeatures.pdf
http://boschautomotivetechnology.com/en/de/driving_comfort/driving_comfort_systems_for_passenger_cars
_1/driving_comfort_systems_for_passenger_cars_1.html
http://dauniv.ac.in/downloads/EmbsysRevEd_PPTs/Chap_12Lesson02EmsysNewACC.pdf
12A002
RUBBER TECHNOLOGY FOR AUTOMOBILES

3
OBJECTIVES:
To impart the necessary knowledge about the preparation, properties and application of
different rubbers.
To understand the process of vulcanization and use of additives.
To learn the various ingredients used in a rubber compounding.
To understand the process of vulcanization and manufacturing of rubber products.
OUTCOMES:
explain rubber grading and specifications.
identify and explain the various vulcanization process and additives.
explain the processes involved in compounding, mixing, modeling and vulcanization.
explain the moulding and vulcanization process
explain various rubber processing techniques.
UNIT I
GENERAL PURPOSE RUBBERS
9
Natural rubber latex Tapping Conversion to dry rubber Grading and specifications of NR
Chemically modified NR SBR Preparation Types and properties BR Polymerization IR
Vulcanization of general purpose rubbers Poly alkenamers Polynorbornene Reclaimed rubbers
Other recycling methods for rubbers.
UNIT II
VULCANISATION AGENTS AND ADDITIVES
9
Vulcanising agents Sulphur, Peroxides, Phenolic resins, Metal oxides, Amines, Urethane cure etc
Accelerators Activators PVI, retarders, coagents etc Fillers Carbon black - Their preparation Reinforcement mechanism Characteristics Non- black fillers Anti oxidants and anti ozonants
Colorants Processing aids Reclaimed rubbers.
UNIT III
COMPOUNDING AND MIXING PROCESS
9
Rubber mixing mechanism - Mixing machinery - Two roll mill - Internal mixer Machine design and
operation Simulation of flow Mixing in internal mixers and two roll mill - Mixing cycles and
procedures Operating variables and mix quality.
UNIT IV
MOULDING AND VULCANIZATION
9
Compression Transfer and injection moulding of rubbers Moulds - Process optimization
Simulation and flow analysis of moulding process Vulcanization processes Batch processes
Continuous vulcanization machinery and process Reaction injection moulding of Poly Urethane
Silicone injection moulding.
26
UNIT V
MANUFACTURE OF RUBBER PRODUCTS
9
Materials Machinery Mould, dies and process optimization for the manufacture of rubber products
Tyre, tube, hose, belts, cables, sports goods, footwear, molded and rubber to metal bonded products.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
publication
1.
John S Dick
Rubber Technology
Hanser
2001
2.
Gupta B R
Applied Rheology in Polymer

Processing
Asian Books
2005
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
publication
1.
John S Dick
Rubber Technology
Compounding and testing for
performance
Hanser
2.
James E mark
etal
Science and technology of rubber
Elsevier
2005
3.
Alan N Gent
Engineering with Rubber
Carl Hanser Verlag,

Munich
2001
4.
Sadhan K De
Jim R White
Rubber Technologist's
Handbook, Volume 1
iSmithers Rapra
Publishing
2001
2001
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://sternmfg.com/rubber.pdf
http://nzic.org.nz/ChemProcesses/polymers/10I.pdf
http://epa.gov/ttnchie1/ap42/ch04/draft/d04s12.pdf
http://me.nchu.edu.tw/~CIM/courses/Manufacturing%20Processes/Ch14-Rubber-Wiley.pdf
http://epa.gov/ttnchie1/ap42/ch04/draft/d04s12.pdf
12A003
AUTOMOTIVE INSTRUMENTATION
3
OBJECTIVES:
To provide the theoretical knowledge on various instruments used in automobiles.
To comprehend the necessary details to understand concept of various signal processing
devices.
To comprehend the basic principle of Engine Calibration techniques.
To provide the necessary knowledge on Noise, vibration, torque and force measurements.
OUTCOMES:
Learners should be able to,
explain the basics of various measurement technique.
explain the general principle and operation of signal processing devices.
exhibit the knowledge on engine calibration techniques.
explain the various methods to measure noise and vibration .
explain various methods to measure force and torque.
27
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO MEASUREMENT TECHNOLOGIES
9
Transducers Types Thermistor LVDT Inductive pickup Capacitance Strain gauges
Semiconductors Photocells Piezoelectric accelerometer Proximity sensors Micro switches
Encoders Piezo electric pressure sensors Instruments Ammeter Voltmeter Odometer
Speedometer Fuel level indicator Pressure gauge Vacuum gauge.
UNIT II
SIGNAL PROCESSING
9
Small signal amplifier General principle of operation Classification RC coupled amplifiers Gain
frequency response Input and output impedance calculations Transformer coupled amplifier
Equivalent circuit at low, medium and high frequencies Analysis and frequency response
Amplifiers and indicators Recorders Signal conditioning and filtering Analog and digital
Calibration Cathode Ray Oscilloscope Study of microprocessors 8085, Micro controller and PLC.
UNIT III
ENGINE CALIBRATION TECHNIQUES
9
Wheel alignment gauges Laser alignment Exhaust gas analyzer Emission norm standards
Flasher instrumentations Wheel balancing Calibrations Starter motor Dynamometer calibrations
Fuel ignition calibration Ignition timer calibration Stroboscope Tacho generator Tyre air
pressure instrument Head light alignment Head light intensity study Smoke meter Macro
inspection of interior parts using fiber optics.
UNIT IV
NOISE AND VIBRATION MEASUREMENT
9
Sound level meters Acoustic measurement FFT analyzer Anechoic chamber Varechoic chamber
Sound level measurements NVH standards - Accelerometer.
UNIT V
TORQUE AND FORCE MEASUREMENTS
9
Torque measuring instruments Dynamometers Rope Brake dynamometer and Eddy Current
Dynamometer.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
Beakwith T G
Buck N L
Mechanical
Measurements
2.
Ernest O Doebelin
Measurement systems
Application and Design
Publisher
Wesley Publishing
Company Limited,
USA
McGraw Hill
Publishing Company
Year of
Publication
2007
2003
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
1.
Peter Elgan
2.
David Crolla
3.
Giles J G
4.
John G
Webster
Halit Eren
Title of the Book

Sensors for Measurements and
control
Automotive Engineering e-Mega
Reference
Vehicle Operation and Testing
Measurement, Instrumentation, and
Sensors Handbook, Second
Edition: Spatial, Mechanical,
Thermal, and Radiation
Publisher
Pearson Education
Limited, England,
Second Edition
ButterworthHeinemann
Iliffe
CRC Press
Year of
Publication
2001
2009
1969
2014
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://nees.buffalo.edu/pdfs/lvdt.pdf
http://psgtech.edu/department/auto/img/2008
http://ti.com/lit/an/sboa092a/sboa092a.pdf
http://web.iitd.ac.in/~achawla/public_html/736/14-NVH-V2.pdf
http://nptel.ac.in/courses/IIT-MADRAS/Mechanical_Measurements_Metrology/pdf/4_4.pdf
28
12A004
AUTOMOTIVE AIR CONDITIONING

3
OBJECTIVES:
To provide the theoretical background necessary to understand the basics of automotive Airconditioning fundamentals.
To provide the basic understanding of the theory and operation of automotive Air-conditioner
cooling and heating system.
To comprehend the refrigerator systems, controls and refrigerants.
To provide the necessary knowledge about air conditioning testing and handling system.
OUTCOMES:
explain the automotive air conditioning fundamentals.
explain the use of Air conditioning Heating and cooling Systems.
explain the use of refrigerator systems, controls and refrigerants.
identify and explain the function of automatic temperature control.
carry out testing and service of automotive air conditioning systems.
UNIT I
AUTOMOTIVE AIRCONDITIONING FUNDAMENTALS
9
Purposes of heating Ventilation and air conditioning Environmental concerns Ozone layer
depletion Location of air conditioning components in a car Schematic layout of a vehicle
refrigeration system Psychrometry Basic terminology and Psychrometric mixtures Psychrometric
Chart Related problems.
UNIT II
COOLING AND HEATING SYSTEM
9
Vehicle refrigeration system and related problems Fixed thermostatic and Orifice tube system
Variable displacement thermostatic and Orifice tube system Vehicle air conditioning operation
Types of compressor Compressor Clutches Compressor Clutch electrical circuit Compressor
lubrication Condensers Evaporators Expansion devices Evaporator temperature and pressure
controls Receiver Drier Accumulators Refrigerant hoses, Connections and other assemblies
Heating system.
UNIT III
AIR-CONDITIOING CONTROLS, DELIVERY SYSTEM AND

REFRIGERANTS
9
Types of control devices Preventing Compressor damage Preventing damage to other systemsMaintaining drive ability Preventing overheating ram air ventilation Air delivery components
Control devices Vacuum controls containers Handling refrigerants Discharging, charging and
leak detection Refrigeration system diagnosis Diagnostic procedure Ambient conditions affecting
system pressures.
UNIT IV
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL
9
Different types of sensors and actuators used in automatic temperature control Fixed and variable
displacement temperature control Semi Automatic Controller design for fixed and variable
displacement type air conditioning system.
UNIT V
SYSTEM SERVICING AND TESTING
9
Special tools for servicing vehicle air conditioning Diagnosing components and air conditioning
systems- Diagnosing cooling system- Air delivery system- Automatic temperature control system
diagnosis and service.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Year of
publication
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
1.
Crouse W H
Anglin D I
McGraw Hill Inc
2003
2.
Goings L F
American Technical
services
2007
29
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
publication
Sl. No.
Author(s)
1.
Mitchell Information
Services
Mitchell Automatic
Heating and Air
Conditioning Systems
Prentice Hall India
2007
2.
Paul Weiser
Automotive Air
Conditioning
Reston Publishing
Inc.
2007
3.
MacDonald K I
Automotive Air
Conditioning
Theodore Audel
series
2003
4.
Dwiggins B H
Automotive Air
Conditioning
Delmar
2002
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
http:// gunt.de/download/fundamentals%20of%20air%20con_english.pdf
http://cs.berkeley.edu/~culler/cs294-f09/m197content.pdf
http://mech.unsw.edu.au/content/userDocs/co2010s2MECH9751.pdf
http:// nptel.iitk.ac.in/courses/Webcoursecontents/IIT%20Kharagpur/Ref%20and%20Air%20Cond/New_index1.html
5. http://ariazone.com/manuals/Automotive%20Air%20Conditioning%20Training%20Manual.pdf
12A005
MODELING AND SIMULATION OF INTERNAL COMBUSTION

ENGINES
3
OBJECTIVES:
To provide adequate knowledge of combustion in CI engines.
To provide knowledge of combustion in SI engines.
To understand the concepts of adiabatic flame temperature.
To provide the adequate knowledge about the simulation of IC engine.
OUTCOMES:
explain the various engine models used for computer simulation.
explain combustion and stoichiometric air requirement for complete combustion.
explain the concept of adiabatic flame temperature.
explain the SI engine simulation concept with adiabatic combustion.
explain the SI engine simulation concept with gas exchange process.
9
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
Introduction to Simulation Advantages of computer simulation Classification of engine models
Intake and exhaust flow models Quasi steady flow Filling and emptying Gas dynamic Models
Thermodynamic based in cylinder models Step by step approach in SI engine simulation.
UNIT II
COMBUSTION AND STOICHIOMETRY
9
Reactive processes Heat of reaction, measurement of Urp, measurement of Hrp Introduction
Combustion equation for hydrocarbon fuels Calculation of minimum air required for combustion
Excess air supplied and stoichiometric air required for complete combustion Conversion of
volumetric analysis to mass analysis.
UNIT III
ADIABATIC FLAME TEMPERATURE
9
Introduction Complete combustion in C-H-N-O systems Constant volume adiabatic combustion
Constant pressure adiabatic combustion Calculation of adiabatic flame temperature Isentropic
changes of state SI Engine simulation with air as working medium Deviation between actual and
ideal cycle.
30
UNIT IV
SI ENGINE SIMULATION WITH ADIABATIC COMBUSTION
9
Introduction Engine details Temperature drop due to fuel vaporization Full throttle operation
Work output and efficiency calculation Part-throttle operation Engine performance at part throttle
Super charged operation SI Engines simulation with progressive combustion Wiebes law
combustion analysis.
UNIT V
SI ENGINE SIMULATION WITH GAS EXCHANGE PROCESS
9
Introduction Gas exchange process Heat transfer process Friction calculations Compression of
simulated values Validation of the computer code Engine performance simulation Pressure crank
angle diagram Brake power Brake thermal efficiency Effect of speed on performance.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Year of
publication
Publisher
1.
Ganesan V
Computer Simulation of
Compression Ignition
Engine Process
University Press (I)

Ltd, Hyderabad
2000
2.
Heywood J B
Internal Combustion
Engine Fundamentals
McGraw Hill Book

Co., USA
2001
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Year of
publication
Publisher
1.
Ashley Campbell
Thermodynamic Analysis of
Combustion Engines
John Wiley and

Sons, New York
2000
2.
Gunnar Stiesch
Modeling Engine Spray and

Combustion Processes
Springer
2010
3.
Ganesan V
Internal Combustion
Engineering
Tata McGraw Hill

Publishing Co.,
New Delhi
2003
4.
Guzzella L
Christopher H Onder
Introduction to Modeling and

Control of Internal
Combustion Engine Systems
Springer
2009
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
http:// web.cecs.pdx.edu/~gerry/class/ME448/notes/pdf/conservationEqns.pdf
http:// sciencedirect.com/science/article/pii/0360128583900114
http:// en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Adiabatic_flame_temperature
http:// nptel.iitm.ac.in/courses/IIT-MADRAS/Applied_Thermodynamics/Module_4/5_
asoc . pdf
5. http://media.ford.com/article_display.cfm?article_id=2610
12A006
ENGINE AND VEHICLE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the working principle of various sensors.
To impart the knowledge about various sensors.
To know the SI engine management techniques.
To know the CI engine management techniques.
31
OUTCOMES:
explain the parameters to be controlled in SI and CI engines and other parts of the vehicle.
explain the use and the functions of various sensors.
describe SI engine management process.
comprehend CI engine management techniques.
comprehend various vehicle management systems.
9
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
Microprocessor architecture Open and closed loop control strategies - PID control - Look up tables
Introduction to modern control strategies like Fuzzy logic and adaptive control Parameters to be
controlled in SI and CI engines and in the other parts of the automobile.
UNIT II
SENSORS
9
Inductive Hall Effect Hot wire Thermister Piezo electric Piezo-resistive based sensors
Throttle position Air mass flow Crank shaft position Cam position Engine and wheel speed
Steering position Tyre pressure Brake pressure Steering torque Fuel level Crash Exhaust
oxygen level (two step and linear lambda) Knock Engine temperature Manifold temperature and
pressure sensors.
UNIT III
SI ENGINE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS
9
Three way catalytic converter Conversion efficiency versus lambda Layout and working of SI
engine management systems like Bosch L-Jetronic and LH-Jetronic-Group and sequential injection
techniques Working of the fuel system components Cold start and warm up phases Idle speed
control Acceleration and full load enrichment Deceleration fuel cut off Fuel control maps Open
loop control of fuel injection and closed loop lambda control Electronic ignition systems and spark
timing control Closed loop control of knock.
UNIT IV
CI ENGINE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS
9
Fuel injection system parameters affecting combustion Noise and emissions in CI engines Pilot,
main, advanced post injection and retarded post injection Electronically controlled unit injection
system Layout of the common rail fuel injection system Working of components like fuel injector
Fuel pump Rail pressure limiter Flow limiter EGR valves.
UNIT V
VEHICLE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS
9
ABS system and its need - Layout and working Electronic control of suspension Damping control
Electric power steering Supplementary restraint system of air bag system Crash sensor Seat belt
tightening Cruise control Vehicle security systems Alarms Vehicle tracking system On board
diagnostics Collision avoidance Radar warning system.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Ramesh S
Gaonkar
Microprocessor Architecture,
Programming, and
Applications with the 8085
Prentice Hall PTR
2002
2.
Robert Bosch
Diesel Engine Management
SAE Publications
2006
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Robert Bosch
Gasoline Engine Management
SAE Publications
2006
2.
William Ribbens
Electronics: An Engineering
Perspective
2012
32
3.
Tom Denton

Electronic Systems
Routledge
2013
4.
Ganesan V
IC Engines
Tata McGraw-Hill
Education
2008
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://tonybmw.co.uk/Downloads/Bosch_Fuel_Injection.pdf
http://bosch.com.au/car_parts/en/html/4596.htm
http://technicalsymposium.com/alllecturenotes_auto.html
http://forum.jntuworld.com/showthread.php18011-theory-and-design-of-automotive-engines-notes
http://materialsdesign.com/appnote/automotive
12A007
COMMERCIAL FLEET OPERATION

3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the concepts of transit operations.
To impart knowledge about ownership and fares.
To understand the vehicle maintenance process.
To know the legal aspects of fleet operation.
To know about garage management systems.

OUTCOMES:
explain the various transit operations.
explain and calculate vehicle operation costs.
identify legal issues and solutions to the fleet operation.
comprehend garage management systems.
comprehend the schedule of vehicle maintenance.

UNIT I
THE CONCEPT OF TRANSPORT AND TRANSIT OPERATION
9
The means of transport Classifications Road transport - Advantages of road transport - Advantages
of motor transport Motor transport in India Types of road and their features Route planning
Route location Stop location Route schedules Vehicle and labour scheduling Traffic control
Traffic signals - Signal timing Freeway control systems.
UNIT II
FORMS OF OWNERSHIP AND FARES
9
Sole Proprietorship Partnership Private Limited Company Public Limited Company Statutory
company Local authority undertaking / Municipal transport company Joint venture Operating
costs and types of vehicles Production economics Requirement of buses and frequency Garages
and bus stations Garage organization Construction of bus station.
UNIT III
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
9
Objectives Breakdown maintenance Preventive maintenance Tyre maintenance tips Tyre
failures Fuel saving techniques.
UNIT IV
GARAGE MANAGEMENT
9
Garage Administration Types of Garages - One spanner - Two spanner - Three spanner - Break down
truck symbol - Government approved workshops - Tools.
UNIT V
LEGAL ASPECTS
9
Motor Vehicle Act Registration Necessity of permits Insurance Test of competence to drive
Mistake and offences for which a driver can be punished Adult workers Hours of work Running
time Slit duty Journey time Round journey time Layover Frequency.
TOTAL: 45
33
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author
Title of the Book
Year of
publication
Publisher
1.
Asvin Goel
Fleet Telematics:Real-time
Management and Planning of
Commercial Vehicle Operations
Springer
2007
2.
Kulshrestha DK
Transport Management in India
Mittal Publications
1992
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Year of
publication
Publisher
Government
Publication
The Motor Vehicle Act
Government of India
1989
2.
Steffen Schorpp
Dynamic Fleet Management

for International Truck
Transportation: Focusing on
Occasional Transportation
Tasks
Springer
2011
3.
Roy Brooks
Jack Hirst
John Whipp
Vehicle Maintenance
Cengage Learning
EMEA
2001
4.
Kulshrestha DK
Management of State Road

Transports in India
Mittal Publications
1989
1.
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://tmcpfs.ops.fhwa.dot.gov/cfprojects/uploaded_files/TMCConOpsImplmGuide.pdf
http:/scribd.com/doc/18563340/Vehicle-Operating-Cost
http://millergarages.com/GarageDesigns.asp
http://tn.gov.in/sta/Mvact1988.pdf
http://cars.about.com/od/helpforcarbuyers/tp/ag_top_fuelsave.htm
12A008
AUTOMOTIVE POLLUTION AND CONTROL

3
0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the combustion process in SI engines and sources of emission.
To know various pollutants and their effects.
To impart adequate knowledge on SI and CI engine emission.
To measure emission level from the combustion process.
OUTCOMES:
comprehend various pollutants and the effects of pollution.
analyze the emission on the basis of their properties and interpretation.
assess the working conditions of engine to minimize emission.
explain the methods to obtain technical inferences from combustion process.
comprehend various emission standards and test procedures
INTRODUCTION
9
UNIT I
Pollutants Sources Formation Effects of pollution on environment and human Transient
operational effects on pollution Regulated and unregulated emissions - Emission standards.
UNIT II
EMISSIONS IN SI ENGINE
9
Chemistry of SI engine combustion HC and CO formation in SI engines NO formation in SI
engines Smoke emissions from SI engines Effect of operating variables on emission formation.
34
UNIT III
EMISSIONS IN CI ENGINE
9
Basics of diesel combustion Smoke emission and its types in diesel engines NOx emission and its
types from diesel engines Particulate emission in diesel engines Sulfur and Aldehyde emissions
from diesel engines Effect of operating variables on emission formation.
UNIT IV
CONTROL TECHNIQUES FOR REDUCTION OF EMISSION

9
Design modifications Optimization of operating factors Fuel modification Evaporative emission
control Exhaust gas recirculation SCR Fumigation Secondary Air injection PCV system
Particulate Trap CCS Exhaust treatment in SI engines Thermal reactors Catalytic converters
Catalysts Use of unleaded petrol.
UNIT V
TEST PROCEDURE & INSTRUMENTATION FOR EMISSION

MEASUREMENT AND EMISSION STANDARDS
9
Test procedures CVS1, CVS3 Test cycles IDC ECE Test cycle FTP Test cycle NDIR
Analyzer Flame ionization detectors Chemiluminescent analyzer Dilution tunnel Gas
Chromatograph Smoke meters SHED test.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
publication
1.
Pundir B P
IC Engines Combustion
and Emissions
Narosa Publishers
2010
2.
Ganesan V
Internal Combustion
Engines
Tata McGraw Hill

Co., New Delhi
2008
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
publication
1.
Thad Godish
Air Quality
Lewis publishers
2010
2.
Tim Gilles
Automotive service,
inspection, maintenance,
repair
Cengage learning
2012
3.
Jack Erjavec
Automotive Technology
Thomson- Delmar
learing
2005
4.
Rainer Friedrich and

Stefan Reis
Emissions of Air
Pollutants, measurements,
calculations and
uncertaininties
Springer
2004
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112104033/pdf_lecture/lecture18.pdf
http://web.mit.edu/sis07/www/lee.pdf
http://meca.org/galleries/files/dieselfact_0106.pdf
http://renault.com/en/lists/archivesdocuments/catalytic-converters.pdf
http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112104033/pdf_lecture/lecture7.pdf
12A009
VIBRATION AND NOISE ENGINEERING

3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the fundamentals of acoustics.
To comprehend the effects of noise and vibration in human life.
To provide the theoretical knowledge to calculate vibration.
To understand noise and vibration transducers, signal processing, and measuring techniques.
35
OUTCOMES:
explain the need of acoustics and vibration analysis.
identify and explain various techniques used to analyze vibration.
use the knowledge to estimate and control vibration.
explain the use of sound level meter and its applications.
explain noise and vibration measurement techniques.
UNIT I
FUNDAMENTALS OF ACOUSTICS AND NOISE, VIBRATION
9
Theory of Sound Predictions and measurement Sound sources Sound Propagation in the
atmosphere Sound radiation from structures and their response to sound General introduction to
vibration Vibration of simple , discrete and continuous Systems Random vibration Response of
Systems to shock Passive damping.
UNIT II
EFFECTS OF NOISE, BLAST, VIBRATION AND SHOCK ON PEOPLE
9
General introduction to noise and vibration effects on People and hearing conservation Sleep
disturbance due to transportation Noise exposure Noise induced annoyance effects of Infrasound
Low-frequency noise and Ultrasound on People Auditory Hazards of Impulse and Impact Noise
Effects of intense noise on people and hearing loss Effects of vibration on people Effects of
mechanical shock on people Rating Measures Descriptors Criteria and procedures for
determining human response to noise.
UNIT III
TRANSPORTATION NOISE AND VIBRATIONSOURCES, PREDICTION,

AND CONTROL
9
Introduction to transportation noise and vibration sources Internal Combustion Engine Noise
prediction and control Diesel exhaust and intake noise and acoustical design of Mufflers Tire/Road
Noise Generation Measurement, and abatement Aerodynamic sound sources in vehicles
Prediction and control Transmission and gearbox noise and vibration prediction and control Brake
noise prediction and control.
UNIT IV
INTERIOR TRANSPORTATION NOISE AND VIBRATION SOURCES

PREDICTION AND CONTROL
9
Introduction to interior transportation noise and vibration sources Automobile, bus, and truck interior
noise and vibration prediction and control Noise and Vibration in Off - Road vehicle interiorsPrediction and control.
UNIT V
NOISE AND VIBRATION TRANSDUCERS, ANALYSIS EQUIPMENT,

SIGNAL PROCESSING, AND MEASURING TECHNIQUES
9
General introduction to noise and vibration Transducers Measuring equipment Measurements,
Signal acquisition and processing Acoustical Transducer Principles and types of Microphones
Vibration Transducer principles and types of vibration transducers Sound Level Meters Noise
Dosimeters Analyzers and signal generators Equipment for data acquisition Noise and Vibration
Measurements Determination of sound power level and emission sound pressure level Sound
Intensity Measurements Noise and vibration data analysis Calibration of measurement
Microphones Calibration of shock and vibration Transducers Metrology and Traceability of
vibration and shock measurements .
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No
Author(s)
1.
Clarence W de Silva
2.
David A Bies
Colin H.Hansen
Title of the Book

Vibration Monitoring,
Testing, and
Instrumentation
Engineering Noise
Control: Theory and
Practice
36
Publisher
Year of
Publication
CRC Press
2007
Spon Press
2009
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Ambekar A G
Mechanical Vibrations
and Noise Engineering
PHI Learning Pvt.

Ltd.
2006
2.
Michael Peter Norton

Karczub D G
Fundamentals of Noise
and Vibration Analysis
for Engineers
Cambridge
University Press
2003
3.
Colin H Hansen
Understanding Active
Noise Cancellation
Spon Press
2003
4.
PEP (Professional
Engineering
Publishers)
Vehicle Noise and

Vibration
John Wiley and

Sons
2002
WEB URLs:
1. http://elearning.vtu.ac.in/P6/enotes/ME65/Unit6-SKK.pdf
2. http://ocw.mit.edu/courses/mechanical-engineering/2-003j-dynamics-and-control-i-spring2007/lecture-notes/lec24.pdf
3. http://secs.oakland.edu/~ychang/ME521/note/r%20k.pdf
4. http://engr.sjsu.edu/bjfurman/courses/ME120/me120pdf/VibrationMeasurement.pdf
5. http://courses.washington.edu/psy333/lecture_pdfs/chapter11_SoundPitch.pdf
12A010
RENEWABLE SOURCES OF ENERGY

3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the main sources of energy and their applications.
To comprehend the applications of solar energy.
To provide the theoretical knowledge on the usage of wind, tidal and geothermal energy.
To develop knowledge on other renewable energy resources.
OUTCOMES:
list and describe the primary renewable energy resources and technologies.
explain the various solar energy techniques.
explain the use of wind, tidal and geothermal energy sources.
explain the waste energy conversion methods .
explain the use and application of solar cells and fuel cells.
UNIT I
ENERGY AND ENVIRONMENT
9
Primary energy sources World energy resources Indian energy scenario Energy cycle of the earth
Environmental aspects of energy utilization, CO2 emissions and global warming Renewable energy
resources and their importance Potential impacts of harnessing the different renewable energy
resources.
UNIT II
SOLAR ENERGY
9
Principles of solar energy collection Solar radiation Measurements Instruments Types of
collectors Characteristics and design principles of different type of collectors Performance of
collectors Solar thermal applications Water heaters and air heaters Performance and applications
Simple calculations Solar cooling Solar drying Solar ponds Solar tower concept Solar
furnace.
UNIT III
WIND, TIDAL AND GEO THERMAL ENERGY
9
Energy from the wind General theory of windmills Types of windmills Design aspects of
horizontal axis windmills Applications Energy from tides and waves Working principles of tidal
plants and ocean thermal energy conversion plants Power from geothermal energy Principle of
working of geothermal power plants.
37
UNIT IV
BIO ENERGY
9
Energy from bio mass and bio gas plants Various types Design principles of bio gas plants
Applications Energy from wastes Waste burning power plants Utilization of industrial and
municipal wastes Energy from the agricultural wastes.
UNIT V
OTHER RENEWABLE ENERGY SOURCES
9
Direct energy conversion (Description, principle of working and basic design aspects only) Magneto
hydrodynamic systems (MHD) Thermoelectric generators Thermionic generators Fuel cells
Solar cells Types, EMF generated, power output, losses, efficiency and applications Hydrogen
conversion and storage systems.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Rai G D
Non conventional Energy Sources
Khanna Publishers
2005
2.
Ashok V Desai
Non conventional Energy
Wiley Eastern Ltd
2003
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Sukhatme S P
Solar Energy
Duffie
Beckmann John
Garg H P
Prakash J
Tiwari G N
Rajeev Kumar
Mishra
Solar Energy Thermal

Processes
Solar Energy Fundamentals
and Applications
Advanced Renewable
Energy Sources
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Tata McGraw Hill

2nd edition
2008
Wiley
2007
Tata McGraw Hill

2nd Edition
2006
Royal Society of
Chemistry
2011
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http:// apricus.com/html/solar_typesofsolar.htm
http://earthsci.org/mineral/energy/wind/wind.html
http:// biomassgasification.com
http:// fuelcellsworks.com/Typesoffuelcells.html
http:// world.org/weo/energy
12A011
TOTAL PRODUCTIVE MAINTENANCE

3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the maintenance concepts and the role of maintenance organization.
To comprehend the maintenance models and characteristics.
To understand the zero brake down and establishment of policies.
To understand the involvement of human factors and online monitoring.
OUTCOMES:
describe various concepts in total productive maintenance.
explain the functional characteristics of maintenance models.
adopt the TPM implementation methods.
describe the maintenance planning and scheduling methods
explain the use of condition monitoring techniques.
38
0 3
UNIT I
MAINTENANCE CONCEPTS
9
Objectives and functions Tero technology Reliability Centered Maintenance (RCM)
maintainability prediction availability and system effectiveness- maintenance costs Maintenance
organization.
UNIT II
MAINTENANCE MODELS
9
Minimal repair maintenance types balancing PM and breakdown maintenance- PM schedules:
deviations on both sides of target values PM schedules: functional characteristics replacement
models.
UNIT III
9
Zero breakdowns Zero Defects and TPM maximizing equipment effectiveness
autonomous maintenance program five pillars of TPM TPM small group activities
TPM organization management decision educational campaign creation of
organizations establishment of basic policies and goals formation of master plan. - TPM
implementation.
UNIT IV
MAINTENANCE LOGISTICS
9
Human factors in maintenance maintenance manuals maintenance staffing methods
queuing applications simulation spare parts management maintenance planning and scheduling.
UNIT V
ONLINE MONITORING
9
Condition Monitoring Techniques Vibration Monitoring, Signature Analysis Wear Debris
monitoring Maintenance Management Information System - Expert systems Corrosion Monitoring
and control.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.
No.
Author(s) Name
Steve Borris
1.
Peter Willmott
Dennis McCarthy
2.
Title of the Book

Total Productive Maintenance:
Proven Strategies and
Techniques to Keep Equipment
Running at Maximum
Efficiency
TPM: A Route to World-class
Performance
Publisher
Year of
Publication
McGraw Hill
Professional
2005
Newnes
International
2001
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s) Name
Title of the Book

Total productive maintenance:
the lean approach
Second Edition
1.
Nick Rich
2.
Terry Wireman
3.
Jagdeep Singh

in Manufacturing Industry
4.
Joel Levitt
TPM Reloaded: Total

Productive Maintenance
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Liverpool
Academic Pr
2001
Industrial Press Inc
2004
LAP Lambert
Academic
Publishing
Industrial Press,
Incorporated
2013
2010
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http:// productivity.in/knowledgebase/TP%20Maintenance/a.%20Total%20Productive%20
Maintenance.pdf
http://ocw.mit.edu/courses/engineering-systems-division/esd-60-lean-six-sigma-processessummer 2004/lecture-notes/7_2prevent_main.pdf
http://ame.org/sites/default/files/TPM-introduction-AME.pdf
http://home.ufam.edu.br/berti/nanomateriais/8403_PDF_CH08.pdf
http://tpm.jipms.jp/news/2013/02/tpm-fundamentals--tpm-definition-and-the-8-tpm-pillars.html
39
12A012
COMPUTATIONAL FLUID DYNAMICS

3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the governing equations and boundary conditions of Computational Fluid
Dynamics.
To comprehend the procedure of finite difference method.
To understand the finite volume method for diffusion and convective diffusion.
To provide the mathematical knowledge of heat and fluid flow problems.
To impart the necessary skills to calculate flow field.
OUTCOMES:
apply the use of continuity, Momentum and Energy equations.
use the various finite element methods for problem solving techniques.
exhibit the knowledge of finite volume methods for the application of diffusion problems
use the application of FEM calculation for convective diffusion.
use the FEM approaches and methodologies for flow field.
UNIT I
GOVERNING EQUATIONS AND BOUNDARY CONDITION
9
Basics of computational fluid dynamics Governing equations of fluid dynamics Continuity and
Momentum and Energy equations Chemical species transport Physical boundary conditions
Time-averaged equations for Turbulent Flow TurbulentKinetic Energy Equations Mathematical
behavior of PDEs on CFD - Elliptic, Parabolic and Hyperbolic equations.
UNIT II
FINITE DIFFERENCE METHOD
9
Derivation of finite difference equations Simple Methods General Methods for first and second
order accuracy Solution methods for finite difference equations Elliptic equations Iterative
solution Methods Parabolic equations Explicit and Implicit schemes Example problems on
elliptic and parabolic equations.
UNIT III
FINITE VOLUME METHOD (FVM) FOR DIFFUSION
9
Finite volume formulation for steady state One, Two and Three -dimensional diffusion problems- One
dimensional unsteady heat conduction through Explicit- Crank Nicolson and fully implicit schemes.
UNIT IV
FINITE VOLUME METHOD FOR CONVECTION DIFFUSION
9
Steady one-dimensional convection and diffusion Central-Upwind differencing schemes-properties of
discretization schemes Conservativeness- Boundedness- Transportiveness- Hybrid- Power-lawQUICK Schemes.
UNIT V
CALCULATION OF FLOW FIELD BY FVM
9
Representation of the pressure gradient term and continuity equation Staggered grid Momentum
equations Pressure and Velocity corrections Pressure Correction equation, SIMPLE algorithm and
its variants- Turbulence models- Mixing length model, Two equation (k-) models High and low
Reynolds number models.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
publication
1.
Chung T J
Computational Fluid
Dynamics
Cambridge University,
Press
2002
2.
John F Wendt
Computational Fluid
Dynamics: an introduction
Tata McGraw
Hill Publishing
Company Ltd
2009
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
1.
Author(s)
Patankar S V
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
publication
Numerical Heat Transfer and

Fluid Flow
Hemisphere Publishing
Corporation,
2004
40
2.
Muralidhar K
Sundararajan T
Computational Fluid Flow

and Heat Transfer
Narosa Publishing
House, NewDelhi
2000
3.
Frederic
Magoules
Computational Fluid
Dynamics
CRC Press
2011
4.
Pieter Wesseling
Principles of Computational
Fluid Dynamics
Springer
2009
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
http:// mathematik.uni-dortmund.de/~kuzmin/cfdintro/lecture1.pdf
http:// engr.uky.edu/~acfd/me691-lctr-nts.pdf
http:// dept.aoe.vt.edu/~mason/Mason_f/CAtxtChap8.pdf
http:// isc.tamu.edu/publications-reports/tr/9403.pdf
5. http:// aero-comlab.stanford.edu/Papers/jameson_044.pdf
12A013
PROCESS PLANNING AND COST ESTIMATION

3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the Engineering techniques of work study.
To impart the knowledge on process planning activities, realistic estimation and costing.
To impart the adequate knowledge about the cost estimation methods of a product.
To provide the theoretical knowledge to calculate machining time in various production
processes.
OUTCOMES:
exhibit the skills on work measuring tools and techniques.
adopt and use the various methods of process planning, estimating and costing.
explain the various elements of a cost.
calculate the various elements of a cost and fixing the price for a product.
estimate the machining time and optimize the production processes.
UNIT I
WORK STUDY AND ERGONOMICS
9
Work Study: Introduction to Production Systems Types of Production - Production design and
selection Productivity - Work study or Methods- Engineering techniques of Work study Method
study and Work measurement - Principles of motion economy - -Work measurement Tools and
Techniques- Standard time. Ergonomics: Introduction Human Engineering - Human factors in work
study Principles Applications.
UNIT II
PROCESS PLANNING, ESTIMATION AND COSTING
7
Process Planning: Definition Approaches to process planning - Manual experience based planning Computer aided process planning: Retrieval and generative types. Process Planning activities: Production time calculation - Selection of Optimal processes and major factors considered. Break Even
analysis Example problems. Estimating and Costing: Importance and aims of cost estimation Functions of estimation. Costing: Importance and aims of Costing. Difference between costing and
estimation - Importance of realistic estimates - Estimation procedure Estimate form.
UNIT III
ELEMENTS OF COST
10
Introduction: Material cost - Determination of material cost Labour Cost - Determination of Direct
Labour Cost Overheads other Expenses Cost of Product (Ladder of cost): Illustrative examples Analysis of overhead expenses - Factory expenses - Depreciation - Causes of depreciation - Methods of
depreciation - Administrative expenses - Selling and Distributing expenses - Allocation of overhead
expenses.
41
UNIT IV
PRODUCT COST ESTIMATION
10
Estimation in forging shop: Losses in forging - Forging cost - Illustrative examples. Estimation in
welding shop: Gas cutting Electric arc welding - Illustrative examples. Estimation in foundry shop:
Estimation of pattern cost and casting cost - Illustrative examples.
UNIT V
ESTIMATION OF MACHINING TIME
9
Estimation of Machining Time: Basics - Concepts - Terms used in the study of Machining Time.
Estimation of Machining Time for Lathe Operations - Estimation of Machining Time for drilling,
boring, shaping, planning, milling and grinding operations - Illustrative examples.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.
No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Banga T R
Sharma S C
Estimating and Costing
Khanna Publishers,
India
2006
2.
Kesavan R
Elanchezhian C
Vijaya Ramanath B
Process Planning and Cost

Estimation
New Age International
2009
Publisher
Year of
Publication
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
1.
Author(s)
Adithan M
Chitale K
Gupta R C
Shah C K
Suresh Garg
Narang G B S
Kumar V
2.
3.
4.
Title of the Book

Process Planning and Cost
Estimation
New Age International (P)

Limited, Publishers
2007
Product Design and

Manufacturing
Prentice Hall of India Pvt.

Ltd., India,Third Edition
2005
Oxford Book Company
2010
Production and Costing
Khanna Publishers, India
1995
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http:// managementhelp.org/plan_dec/gen_plan/gen_plan.htm
http://webstyleguide.com/process/plan.html
http://npd-solutions.com/capp.html
http://sepo.spawar.navy.mil/Human_Engineering_Process.pdf
http://ims-productivity.com/page.cfm/content/Method-Study/
12A014
MECHATRONICS
3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the working principles of various sensors and transducers.
To impart the necessary theoretical knowledge about various actuators.
To impart the knowledge on various system models and controllers.
To understand the various stages of designing the mechatronics systems.
OUTCOMES:
explain the basic components and operating principles of various sensors and transducers.
demonstrate the function of various actuators.
use the knowledge to form various system models and controllers.
explain the use of PLC and prepare program for Logic controllers.
describe the working principles of mechatronics systems and apply the concepts.
42
UNIT I
MECHATRONICS, SENSORS AND TRANSDUCERS
9
Introduction to Mechatronics Systems Measurement Systems Control Systems Microprocessor
based Controllers. Sensors and Transducers Performance Terminology Sensors for Displacement,
Position and Proximity; Velocity, Motion, Force, Fluid Pressure, Liquid Flow, Liquid Level,
Temperature, Light Sensors Selection of Sensors.
UNIT II
ACTUATION SYSTEMS
9
Pneumatic and Hydraulic Systems Directional Control Valves Rotary Actuators. Mechanical
Actuation Systems Cams Gear Trains Ratchet and pawl Belt and Chain Drives Bearings.
Electrical Actuation Systems Mechanical Switches Solid State Switches Solenoids D.C Motors
A.C Motors Stepper Motors.
UNIT III
SYSTEM MODELS AND CONTROLLERS
9
Building blocks of Mechanical, Electrical, Fluid and Thermal Systems, Rotational Translational
Systems, Electromechanical Systems Hydraulic Mechanical Systems. Continuous and discrete
process Controllers Control Mode Two Step mode Proportional Mode Derivative Mode
Integral Mode PID Controllers Digital Controllers Velocity Control Adaptive Control Digital
Logic Control Micro Processors Control.
UNIT IV
PROGRAMMING LOGIC CONTROLLERS
9
Programmable Logic Controllers Basic Structure Input / Output Processing Programming
Mnemonics Timers, Internal relays and counters Shift Registers Master and Jump Controls Data
Handling Analogs Input / Output Selection of a PLC Problem.
UNIT V
DESIGN OF MECHATRONICS SYSTEM
9
Stages in designing Mechatronics Systems Traditional and Mechatronic Design - Possible Design
Solutions Case Studies of Mechatronics Systems, Pick and place robot automatic Car Park Systems
Engine Management Systems.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.
No.
Author
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
publication
1.
Michael B Histand
and David G
Alciatore
Introduction to Mechatronics
and Measurement Systems
McGraw-Hill
International Editions
2000
2.
Dan Necsulesu
Mechatronics
Pearson Education
Asia
2002
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.
No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Bolton W
Mechatronics
Pearson Education, Second

Edition
2000
2.
Ganesh S Hegde
Mechatronics
Jones & Bartlett Learning
2010
3.
Nitaigour
Premchand
Mahadik
Mechatronics
Tata McGraw-Hill
publishing Company Ltd
2003
4.
Lawrence J Kamm
Understanding Electro
Mechanical Engineering
Prentice Hall of India

Pvt., Ltd.
2000
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
http://egr.msu.edu/classes/ece445/mason/Files/4-Sensors_ch2.pdf
http://nptel.ac.in/courses/Webcourse
contents/IIT%20Kharagpur/Industrial%20Automation%20control/pdf/L(SM)%20(IA&C)%20((
EE)NPTEL).pdf
http://me.emu.edu.tr/majid/IENG447/IE%20447/PDF%20FILES/CIM%20Lecture%20Notes%2
010.pdf
43
4.
5.
http://www.uta.edu/utari/acs/jyotirmay/EE4343/Labs_Projects/pidcontrollers.pdf
http://arxiv.org/pdf/1203.4475
12A015
AUTOMATION, CNC AND ROBOTICS

3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the basic principle of automation.
To comprehend the use of CNC machines and its applications.
To provide the adequate knowledge about the constructional features of CNC machines.
To develop the required knowledge on CNC part programming and robotics.
OUTCOMES:
explain the devices and manipulators used in automation.
exhibit the knowledge about the functions of various CNC machines.
explain the various constructional features of CNC machines.
exhibit the skills on part programming in CNC for various applications.
explain the function of various industrial robots and their applications.
UNIT I
AUTOMATION
9
Basic principles of automation Flexible Automation Extending the capabilities of conventional
machines through improved devices and manipulators Transfer Machines for Assembly Multispindle Automats.
UNIT II
FUNDAMENTALS OF CNC MACHINES
9
Introduction to Computer Numerical Control: CNC Systems An Overview of Fundamental
aspects of machine control Different types of CNC machines Advantages and disadvantages of
CNC machines.
UNIT III
CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES OF CNC MACHINES
9
Structure Drive Mechanism Gearbox Main drive Feed drive Spindle Motors Axes
motors Timing belts and pulleys Spindle bearing Arrangement and installation Slide ways
Re-Circulating ball screws Backlash measurement and compensation-linear motion guide way Tool
magazines ATC APC Chip conveyors.
UNIT IV
CNC PART PROGRAMMING
9
Part Program Terminology-G and M Codes Types of interpolation Methods of CNC part
programming Manual Part Programming Computer Assisted Part Programming APT
language CNC part programming using CAD/CAM-Introduction to Computer Automated Part
Programming.
UNIT V
ROBOTICS
9
Synthesis of elements with movability constraints Classification and specification of Robots Laws
of Robotics-Elements of Robot anatomy Hydraulic, pneumatic and electrical manipulators Endeffectors and their design Robot Controllers with microprocessors or fluidics Sensors Tactile and
non tactile type Performance analysis of industrial robots and their manufacturing applications
Economics of robotics.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.
No.
Author
1.
Mikell P Groover
2.
Radhakrishnan P
Title of the Book

Automation, Production
Systems and Computer
Integrated Manufacturing
Computer Numerical
Control Machines
44
Publisher
Year of
publication
Pearson Education
2013
New Central Book

Agency
2000
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Author(s)
1.
Appuu Kuttan K K
Robotics
House Pvt Ltd, New Delhi
2007
2.
Steave Krar
Arthur Gill
CNC Technology
and Programming
McGrawHill
Publishing Company
2001
Oxford University Press, II reprint
2008
2nd Edition, Tata McGraw

Hill, New Delhi
2006
3.
Ghosal A
4.
Rao P N
Title of the Book
Robotics:
Fundamental
Concepts and
Analysis
CAD / CAM
Principles and
Applications
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Sl. No.
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112103174/pdf/mod7.pdf
http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112102011
http://transport.itu.edu.tr/PDF/mak537e/MAK537E-10.pdf
http://es.ele.tue.nl/~heco/courses/EmbeddedVisualControl/Introduction%20Robotics%20lecture
1.pdf
http://webpages.sdsmt.edu/~djensen/IENG%20475/Lectures/IENG%20475%20Lecture%2010.p
pt
12A016
OPERATIONS RESEARCH
3
OBJECTIVES:
To provide the basic concepts of various linear models applied to operations research.
To comprehend the applications of transportation and assignment problems.
To provide the adequate knowledge on net working models.
To impart the concepts and problem solving techniques on inventory, queuing models and
decision models.
OUTCOMES:
use the linear model for business and industrial application.
apply the principle and provide the feasible solutions to the transportation and assignment
problems
describe the networking principles for various applications.
explain the inventory and queuing theory for the industrial applications.
explain the decision models in business and industrial applications.
UNIT I
LINEAR MODELS
9
Introduction Concept and scope of operations research (OR) Phases of OR study Models in OR
Role of computers in OR Advantages and limitations of OR Linear Programming Problems (LPP)
Formulation of LPP Methods and solution Graphical method Simplex method Big M method
Two phase method Variations in LPP Duality Primal dual problems Applications of business
and industrial problems.
UNIT II
TRANSPORTATION AND ASSIGNMENT MODELS
9
Transportation Problems (TP) Initial basic feasible solution to TP North West Corner (NWC)
method Least Cost Method (LCM) Vogels Approximation Method (VAM) Optimal solution to
TP Modified Distribution (MODI) method Unbalanced TP Degeneracy in TP Maximization in
TP Applications Assignment Problems (AP) Maximal assignment Multiple solutions
Hungarian algorithm to improve maximal assignment Unbalanced AP Impossible assignment
Maximization in AP Applications.
45
UNIT III
NETWORK MODELS
9
Sequencing models Job sequencing n jobs through 2 machines (n x 2) n jobs through 3 machines
(n x 3) n jobs through m machines (n x m) 2 jobs through m machines (2 x m) Gantt chart and
graphical method. Network Programming Problems (NPP) Construction of network diagram ESEF
schedule LSLF Schedule Network computations Critical path PERT Probability of
completing the project within the given due date Finding due date of the project for the given
probability CPM Determination of normal duration, optimal duration and minimum duration of the
project.
UNIT IV
INVENTORY AND QUEUEING MODELS
9
Inventory Models (IM) Inventory costs Economic Order Quantity (EOQ) models Deterministic
models Instantaneous and non-instantaneous receipt of goods with and without shortage Quantity
discount models Stochastic inventory models Queueing Models (QM) Queueing systems and
structures Notations Parameters Customer and server Arrival time, waiting time and serving
time Traffic intensity Single server and multi server models Poisson input and exponential service
Constant rate service Infinite population.
UNIT V
DECISION MODELS
9
Replacement Models (RM) Replacement of items that deteriorate with time and value of money
changes and does not changes with time Items that fail completely and suddenly Individual and
group replacement policy Optimum replacement due Game Theory (GT) Payoff matrix Two
person zero sum games Maximin and minimax principle Pure strategies and mixed strategies
Saddle point Value of the game Concept of dominance Graphical solution for 2 x n and m x 2
games Algebric method of problems.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
Hamdy A Taha
Operations Research
2.
Dharani
Venkatakrishnan S
Operations Research
Publisher
Ltd
Keerthi Publication
House
Year of
Publication
2006
2000
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Gupta P K
Man Mohan
Problems in Operations
Research (Methods and
Solutions)
Sultan Chand and

Sons
2004
2.
Prem kumar
Gupta P K
Hira D S
Operations
Research
S Chand and Co
2008
3.
Panneerselvam R
Operations Research
2010
4.
Sharma J K
Operations Research
theory and applications
Macmillan India
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://brunel.ac.uk/~mastjjb/jeb/or/lpmore.html
http://teachers.ash.org.au/mikemath/mathsc/linearprogramming/simplex.pdf
http://nos.org/srsec311/optlp6.pdf
http://neurotheory.columbia.edu/~larry/book/ch7.pdf
http://cdam.lse.ac.uk/Reports/Files/cdam200109.pdf
46
2007
12A017
MATHEMATICAL MODELLING
3
OBJECTIVES :
To understand the numerical operation, algorithms and programs.
To impart the knowledge on mathematical modeling, assumptions and limitations.
To understand the concept of differential equations and its applications.
To comprehend the simulation data manipulation and processing
To understand the various algorithms and its applications.
OUTCOMES:
use the differentiation and integrations to formulate the particular problem.
use the knowledge to formulate the mathematical modelling.
use the differential equation knowledge to various applications.
use the knowledge of data simulation and processing of materials.
use the Monte Carlo algorithms for various applications.
UNIT I
FUNDAMENTAL PRINCIPLES OF NUMERICAL METHODS
9
Scientific Modeling - Numerical data and Numerical operations - Numerical Algorithms - Numerical
Programs - Numerical Software - Approximations in Mathematical Model building - Numerical
integration Differentiation - Variational finite element methods Rayleighs method-Ritz method.
UNIT II
MATHEMATICAL MODELING
9
Mathematical modeling Physical simulation Advantages and limitations - Process control Transport phenomena Concept of physical domain and computational domain Assumptions and
limitations in numerical solutions Finite element method and Finite difference method.
UNIT III
DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS AND APPLICATIONS
9
Euler method, Runge-Kutta method, Multi step-differential equations Boundary values Elliptic
equations One dimensional parabolic equation Hyperbolic equation Partial differential equations
Separation of variables Wave equation Laplace equation Nonlinear partial differential equations
Approximation methods of nonlinear differential equations.
UNIT IV
SIMULATION
9
Basic concepts of simulation Data manipulation Data exchange of the structure Properties and
processing of materials Three dimensional model for capillary nanobridges and capillary forces
Molecular dynamics simulation.
UNIT V
DECISION MODELS
9
Basics of the Monte Carlo method Algorithms for Monte Carlo simulation Applications to systems
of classical particles Modified Monte Carlo techniques Percolation system Variation Monte Carlo
method Diffusion Monte Carlo method Quantum Monte Carlo method.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.
No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Chapra S C
Canale R P
Numerical methods for

Engineers
Tata McGraw Hill,

New Delhi
2002
2.
Erwin Kreyzig
Advanced Engineering
Mathematics
John Wiley & Sons
2004
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
1.
Schilling R J
Harris S L
2.
Frenkel D
Smith K
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Applied Numerical Methods for

Engineers using MATLAB and C
Understanding molecular
simulation from algorithm to
applications
47
Thomson publishers,
New Delhi
2004
Kluwar Academic
Press
2000
3.
Ohno K Esfarjani
Kawazoe Y
4.
Reinhard Illner
Introduction to Computational
Materials Science from ab initio
to Monte Carlo Methods
Mathematical Modeling: A Case
Studies Approach
Springer-Verlag
2000
American
Mathematical Soc.
2005
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http:// brunel.ac.uk/~mastjjb/jeb/or/lpmore.html
http:// teachers.ash.org.au/mikemath/mathsc/linearprogramming/simplex.pdf
http:// nos.org/srsec311/optlp6.pdf
http:// neurotheory.columbia.edu/~larry/book/ch7.pdf
http:// cdam.lse.ac.uk/Reports/Files/cdam200109.pdf
12A018
DESIGN OF MACHINE ELEMENTS

3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the factors influencing the machine design and stress calculation principles
To understand design procedure of shafts and coupling
To comprehend the design procedure of fasteners, welded joints and springs.
To comprehend the design procedure of levers and bearings.
OUTCOMES:
explain the various factors influencing the machine design and selection of materials.
explain design procedure and design the shafts and coupling
use the knowledge to design the fasteners and welded joints.
exhibit the knowledge on design of springs and levers.
adopt the skill to design bearings.
UNIT I
STEADY STRESSES AND VARIABLE STRESSES IN MACHINE

MEMBERS
9
Introduction to the design process - Factor influencing machine design, selection of materials Direct,
Bending and torsional stress equations Calculation of principle stresses Factor of safety Theories
of failure Stress Concentration Factor.
UNIT II
DESIGN OF SHAFTS AND COUPLINGS
9
Design of solid and hollow shafts based on strength, rigidity and critical speed Design of keys and
key ways Design of rigid and flexible couplings Introduction to gear and shock absorbing
couplings.
UNIT III
DESIGN OF FASTENERS AND WELDED JOINTS
9
Threaded fasteners - Design of bolted joints including eccentric loading Design of welded joints for
pressure vessels and structures Theory of bonded joints.
UNIT IV
DESIGN OF SPRINGS AND LEVERS
9
Design of helical, leaf, disc and torsional springs under constant loads and varying loads Concentric
torsion springs - Belleville springs Design of Levers.
UNIT V
DESIGN OF BEARINGS
9
Design of bearings Sliding contact and rolling contact types. Cubic mean load Design of journal
bearings McKees equation Lubrication in journal bearings Calculation of bearing dimensions.
TOTAL: 45
Note: Use of P S G Design Data Book is permitted in the End Semester Examinations
48
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
1.
Juvinall R C
Marshek K M
2.
Bhandari V B
Title of the Book

Fundamentals of
Machine Component
Design
Design of Machine
Elements
Publisher
Year of
Publication
John Wiley and

Sons
2005
Tata McGraw-Hill
Book Co
2008
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
Norton R L
Design of Machinery
2.
Ugural A C
Mechanical Design
An Integral Approach
3.
Sundrarajamoorthy T V
Shanmugam N
Machine design
4.
Khurmi R S
Machine design
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Tata McGraw-Hill
Book Co
McGraw-Hill
Book Co
Anuradha
agencies
2004
2004
2005
S.Chand and Co
2009
WEB URLs:
1. http://schhttp: /engineering/design-manufacture-machine-le
2. http://hill.com/sites/0072520361/student_view0/machine_design_tutorials.
3. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/IIT-MADRAS/Machine_Design_IIADRAS/Machine_Design_II
/pdf/5_4.pdf
4. http://freetutorials.name/reference1/mechanical_engineering.html.
5. http:// wolfram.com/solutions/industry/mechanical-engineering.
12A019
DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS

3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the basic concepts of database management system,
To learn about the Structured Query Language (SQL)
To understand the relational model and relational database management system
To provide detailed knowledge of transaction, concurrency and recovery strategies of DBMS.
To understand the different normalization techniques.
To know XML concepts in databases.
OUTCOMES:
design and create tables in database.
write SQL queries in effective way.
implement the data model and normalization theory in relational database system design.
write relational algebra expressions for queries.
write transaction processing
apply XML in database.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION AND CONCEPTUAL MODELING
9
Introduction to file and database systems Database system structure Data models Introduction to
network and hierarchical models ER model Relational model Relational algebra and calculus.
UNIT II
RELATIONAL MODEL
9
SQL Data definition Queries in SQL Updates Views Integrity and security Relational
database design Functional dependences and normalization for relational databases (up to BCNF).
49
UNIT III
DATA STORAGE AND QUERY PROCESSING
9
Record storage and primary file organization Secondary storage devices Operations on files Heap
file Sorted files Hashing techniques Index structure for files Different types of indexes B tree
B+ tree Query processing.
UNIT IV
TRANSACTION MANAGEMENT
9
Transaction processing Introduction Need for concurrency control Desirable properties of
transaction Schedule and recoverability Serializability and schedules Concurrency control
Types of locks Two phases locking Deadlock Time stamp based concurrency control Recovery
Techniques Concepts Immediate update Deferred update Shadow paging.
UNIT V
CURRENT TRENDS
9
Types of databases Object oriented databases Need for complex data types Object oriented data
model Nested relations Complex types Inheritance reference types Distributed databases
Homogenous and heterogenous distributed data Storage XML Structure of XML XML document
Schema Querying and transformation Data mining and data warehousing Introduction to
business intelligence.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
1.
2.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Abraham Silberschatz
Henry F Korth
Sudarshan S
Ramez Elmasri
Shamkant B Navathe
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Database System
Concepts
McGraw-Hill
Sixth Edition
2011
Fundamental
Database Systems
Pearson Education
Fifth Edition
2008
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Raghu Ramakrishnan
Database
Management System
Tata McGraw-Hill
Publishing Company
Third Edition
2008
2.
Hector GarciaMolina
Jeffrey D Ullman
Jennifer Widom
Database System
Implementation
Pearson Education
Second Edition
2012
3.
Peter Rob and Corlos

Coronel
Database System
Design,
Implementation and
Management
Thompson Learning
Course Technology
Tenth Edition
2012
WEB URLs:
1. http://oracle.com
2. http://microsoft.com/sql
3. http://w3schools.com/sql
4. http://ibm.com/software/data/db2
12A020
EMBEDDED SYSTEMS
3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the embedded system concepts
To comprehend the serial communication
To learn the software programming concepts in embedded system design
To study and familiarize real time operating system concepts
To learn and understand embedded system design processes
50
OUTCOMES:
Learners should be able to:
explain the embedded systems applications.
select and compare different architectures for suitable applications.
apply software programming concepts in embedded system applications.
apply real time operating system concepts
design and optimize embedded system for real time applications.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO EMBEDDED SYSTEMS
10
Design metrics Examples of embedded systems Hardware/Software codesign Embedded micro
controller cores (ARM, RISC, CISC and SOC) Embedded memories Sensors and interfacing
techniques Architecture of Embedded Systems Introduction to ARM 7 instruction set Addressing
modes Operating modes with ARM core ARM7 TDMI modes ADC Timers Interrupt
structure Byte ordering (LE, BE) Thumb mode normal mode instruction changes Pipeline
utilization with all register allocations Floating to fixed point conversion fundamentals System
design with ARM as key processor DSP features of ARM Core Digital Signal Controllers DSC
differences with conventional micro controllers.
UNIT II
SERIAL COMMUNICATION
8
SCI SPI Timing generation and measurements Analog interfacing and data acquisition Hardware
Interrupts: Various C ISR declaration syntaxes Interrupt Vectors Priorities and Nesting Tick
Timer Interrupt as heart-beat of embedded system 7-Seg LED Segment-LCD Alphanumeric LCD
Graphic LCD displays Communications and Networks: RS485 (2 and 3 wire) and Modbus Protocol
(Intro only) Ethernet and TCPIP Stack (Features and Usage only) CAN features and protocol.
UNIT III
SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING
10
Assembly Language and High Level Language C programming C program elements: Header and
Source files and Preprocessor directives Program elements: Macros and Functions Program
elements: Data types Data structures Modifiers Statements Loops and Pointers Queues
Stacks Lists and Ordered lists Embedded programming in C++ C program compiler and Cross
compiler Source code engineering tools for embedded C/C++ Optimization of memory needs.
UNIT IV
REAL TIME CONCEPTS
10
Real time operating system Required RTOS services/capabilities (in contrast with traditional OS)
Real world issues: Blocking Unpredictability Interrupts Caching Benefits of using RTOS:
Concepts of Tasks/Threads/Process Multitasking Task Scheduling Task management Inter-task
communication and Synchronization Device Drivers How to choose an RTOS.
UNIT V
FUNDAMENTALS OF DESIGN AND DEVELOPMENT
7
Program modelling tools Testing and Debugging methodologies Applications of Embedded
Systems: case studies Consumer and Home Industrial and Automation Medical Robotics
Access Control Systems (Smart cards, RFIDs, Finger Scan)
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
1.
Rajkamal
2.
Shibu K V
Title of the Book

Embedded Systems
Architecture,
Programming and
Design
Introduction to
Embedded Systems
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Tata McGraw Hill,

Second edition
2008
Tata Mc Graw Hill
2009
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
1.
Author(s)
Sriram V Iyer
Pankaj Gupta
Title of the Book

Embedded Realtime
Systems
Programming
51
Publisher
Tata McGraw Hill,
First edition
Year of
Publication
2008
2.
Frank Vahid
3.
Peter Marwedel
Embedded System
design - A unified
hardware/software
introduction
Embedded system
design
Willey India edition,

Third edition
2009
Springer, Second edition
2010
WEB URLs:
1. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/Webcourse-contents/IIT%20Kharagpur/Embedded%20systems/
New_index1.html.
2. http://onlinevideolecture.com/electrical-engineering/nptel-iit-delhi/embeddedsystems/?course_id=519
3. http://engineersgarage.com/articles/rtos-real-time-operating-system.
4. http://cs.mcgill.ca/~adenau/teaching/cs573/Other_Arch.pdf
5. http://rfidjournal.com/site/faqs
52
B.E:MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
TOTAL CREDITS: 192

SEMESTER I
Course
Code
Course Title
THEORY
12O101

12G102
Engineering
12O103
Technical English
12O104
C Programming I
12M105
Engineering
12M106
Engineering Drawing
PRACTICAL
12O111
12M112
12G113
TOTAL
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
3.5
40
60
100
40
60
100
3
3
1
0
0
0
3.5
3
40
40
60
60
100
100
40
60
100
3.5
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
17
24
SEMESTER II
Course
Code
Course Title
THEORY
12O201
12M202
12O203
12O204
C Programming II
12M205
Manufacturing Technology
12M206
PRACTICAL
12O211
C Programming Laboratory II
12H212
Physics Laboratory
12M213
Laboratory
12H214
TOTAL
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
3
3
3
3
3
3
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
2
0
0
0
3.5
3
4
3
3
3.5
40
40
40
40
40
40
60
60
60
60
60
60
100
100
100
100
100
100
0
0
0
0
3
3
1.5
1.5
40
40
60
60
100
100
1.5
40
60
100
0
18
0
2
3
14
1.5
26
40
60
100

53
SEMESTER III
Course
Code
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Course Title
THEORY
12M301
12M302
12M303
12M304
12M305
Engineering Metallurgy
12M306
PRACTICAL
Fluid Mechanics and Machinery
12M311
Laboratory
12M312
12M313
Machine Drawing
12M314
Laboratory
TOTAL
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
3
3
3
3
3
3
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3.5
3.5
3.5
3
3
3
40
40
40
40
40
40
60
60
60
60
60
60
100
100
100
100
100
100
1.5
40
60
100
0
2
0
0
3
2
1.5
3
40
100
60
100
100
1.5
40
60
100
20
11
27
SEMESTER IV
Course
Code
THEORY
12M401
12M402
12M403
12M404
12M405
12M406
Course Title

Kinematics of Machinery
Thermal Engineering
Electrical Drives and Control
Unconventional Machining Processes
PRACTICAL
Strength of Materials and
12M411
Engineering Metallurgy Laboratory
12M412
Thermal Engineering Laboratory
12M413
Laboratory
TOTAL
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
3
3
3
3
3
3
1
2
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3.5
4
3.5
3.5
3
3
40
40
40
40
40
40
60
60
60
60
60
60
100
100
100
100
100
100
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
18
10
25.5

54
SEMESTER V
Course
Code
THEORY
12M501
12M502
12M503
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Course Title
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
Economics for Business Decisions

Dynamics of Machinery
Heat and Mass Transfer
3
3
3
0
1
1
0
0
0
3
3.5
3.5
40
40
40
60
60
60
100
100
100
12M504
40
60
100
12M505
Automobile Technology
CAD/CAM/CIM
40
60
100
40
60
100
0
0
0
0
18
0
0
0
0
4
3
3
3
3
12
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
26
100
40
40
40
60
60
60
100
100
100
100
12M506
PRACTICAL
Soft Skills
12O511
Heat and Mass Transfer Laboratory
12M512
12M513
12M514
Dynamics Laboratory
CAD/CAM Laboratory
TOTAL
SEMESTER VI
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
12M601
12M602
12M603
12M604
12M605

Engineering Ethics
Gas Dynamics and Jet Propulsion
Design of Transmission Systems
Microprocessor and Microcontroller
Elective I
12Mxxx
PRACTICAL
12M611
Automobile Technology Laboratory
Computer Aided Simulation and
12M612
Analysis Laboratory
Microprocessor and Microcontroller
12M613
Laboratory
Mini Project
12M651
TOTAL
40
60
100
3
3
3
3
3
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3.5
3.5
3.5
3
3
40
40
40
40
40
60
60
60
60
60
100
100
100
100
100
1.5
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
0
18
0
3
3
12
1.5
25.5
100
100

55
SEMESTER VII
Course
Code
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Course Title
THEORY
12M701
Applied Hydraulics and Pneumatics
12M702
Mechatronics
12M703
Total Quality Management
12M704
Operations Research
12M705
12Mxxx
Elective II
PRACTICAL
12M711
Laboratory
Mechatronics Laboratory
12M712
Comprehension
12M721
12M751
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
3
3
3
3
3
3
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
3
3
3.5
3
3
40
40
40
40
40
40
60
60
60
60
60
60
100
100
100
100
100
100
1.5
40
60
100
Project Work Phase I
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
3
3
1.5
1.5
40
100
60
100
100
TOTAL
18
12
23
SEMESTER VIII
Course
Code
THEORY
12M801
12Mxxx
12Mxxx
Course Title
Power Plant Engineering

Elective III
Elective IV
PRACTICAL
12M851
Project Work Phase II
TOTAL
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
3
3
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
3
3
40
40
40
60
60
60
100
100
100
0
9
0
0
12
12
6
15
40
60
100

56
LIST OF ELECTIVES
Course Code
Course Title
12M001
Modern Concepts of Engineering Design
12M002
Design for Manufacture and Assembly
12M003
Product Design, Process Planning and Cost Estimation
12M004
Flexible Manufacturing Systems
12M005
Composite Materials
12M006
Renewable Energy Sources and Energy Management
12M007
Refrigeration and Air conditioning
12M008
12M009
Industrial Management and Safety Engineering
12M010
Supply Chain Management
12M011
Lean and Agile Manufacturing
12M012
Entrepreneurship Development
12M013
12M014
Automotive Industry and its Systems
12M015
Industrial Robotics
12M016
Aircraft Industry and its Systems
12M017
Micro Electro Mechanical Systems and Nano Technology
12M018
Business Intelligence and Its Applications
12M019
12M020
Embedded Systems
57
SEMESTER V
12M501
ECONOMICS FOR BUSINESS DECISIONS

3
OBJECTIVES:
To develop knowledge in the types economics and scope.
To understand the concept of value engineering and its applications.
To gain knowledge on the approaches to consumer and producer behavior.
To study about the various types of markets and its structure.
To understand the role of money and its impact on economy.
OUTCOMES:
identify the types of economics and its scope.
familiarize the concept of value engineering in real life situations.
select the best approach towards customer and producer behavior.
identify the best market and its structure.
utilize capital in such an way that it doesnt impact the economy.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO ECONOMICS
9
Introduction to economics Micro-economics and Macro-economics business barometers Business
cycles Flow in an economy Law of supply and demand Concept of engineering economics
Engineering efficiency Economic efficiency Scope of engineering economics Element of costs
Marginal cost Marginal revenue Sunk cost Opportunity cost Break-even analysis Break-even
point P/V ratio Elementary economic analysis Selection of a product Make or buy decision.
UNIT II
VALUE ENGINEERING
9
Value Engineering Function Aim Value engineering procedure Applications Interest formulae and
their applications Time value of money Single payment compound amount factor Single payment
present worth factor Equal payment series sinking fund factor Equal payment series payment present
worth factor Equal payment series capital recovery factor Uniform gradient series annual equivalent
factor Effective interest rate With examples in all the methods.
UNIT III
CONSUMER AND PRODUCER BEHAVIOUR
9
Consumer Market Demand and supply Determinants Market equilibrium Elasticity of demand and
supply Consumer behaviour Consumer equilibrium Approaches to consumer behaviour Production
Short-run and long-run production function Returns to scale.
UNIT IV
PRODUCT AND FACTOR MARKET
9
Product market Perfect and imperfect market Different market structures Firms equilibrium and
supply Market efficiency Economic costs of imperfect competition Factor market Land labour and
capital.
UNIT V
AGGREGATE SUPPLY AND THE ROLE OF MONEY
9
Short-run and Long-run supply curve Unemployment and its impact Okuns law Inflation and the
impact Reasons for inflation Demand Vs Supply factors Inflation Vs Unemployment tradeoff
Phillips curve Short-run and long-run Supply side policy and management Money market Demand
and supply of money Money Market equilibrium and national income The role of monetary policy.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
1.
Author(s)
Panneer Selvam R
Title of the Book
Publisher
Engineering Economics

Ltd., 2nd edition
58
Year of
Publication
2012
2.
Paul A Samuelson
William D Nordhaus
Sudip Chaudhuri
Anindya Sen
Tata Mc Graw Hill,

19th edition
Economics
2011
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Author(s)
Donald G Newman
Jerome P Lavelle
Ted Eschenbach
Degarmo E P
Sullivan W G
Bontadelli J A
Wicks E M
Richard Lipsey
Alec Charystal
Blank L T
Tarquin A J
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
and analysis

11th edition
2011
Engineering Economy
Prentice Hall,
15th edition
2011
Economics
Engineering Economy
and Costing
Sasmita Mishra

12th edition
McGraw Hill, New York
2011
2011
PHI Learning private

Ltd., 2nd edition
2013
WEB URLs:
1. http://wame.biz/index_files/econopresent.ppt
2. http://www.freequality.org/sites/www_freequality_org/documents/Training/Classes%Spring%202
002/BreakEven%Analysis.ppt
3. http://www.misronet.com/valueeng.htm
4. http://ebooks.cambridge.org/chapter.jsf?bid=CBO9780511571725&cid=CBO9780511571725A05
5. http://glossary.econguru.com/economic term/factor+market
12M502
DYNAMICS OF MACHINERY
3
3.5
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the method of static and dynamic force in various machineries.
To study the balancing effects of rotating and reciprocating masses.
To understand the concept of free vibration and their analysis.
To understand the concept of forced vibration and their analysis.
To understand the principles of governors and gyroscopes.
OUTCOMES:
analyze the static and dynamic forces in machineries.
gain the knowledge of dynamic balancing.
familiarize the concept of free vibration for practical applications.
select the appropriate systems for the analysis of forced vibration.
identify the types of governors and gyroscopes in practical applications.
UNIT I
FORCE ANALYSIS
10
Rigid body dynamics in general plane motion Equations of motion Dynamic force analysis Inertia
force and inertia torque DAlemberts principle The principle of superposition Dynamic analysis in
Reciprocating engines Gas forces Equivalent masses Bearing loads Crank shaft torque Turning
moment diagrams Fly wheels Engine shaking forces Cam dynamics Unbalance, Spring, Surge and
Windup.
59
UNIT II
BALANCING
9
Static and dynamic balancing Balancing of rotating masses Balancing a single cylinder engine
Balancing multi-cylinder engines Partial balancing in locomotive Engines Variation of tractive force
Swaying couple Hammer blow Balancing of multi cylinder inline engines Balancing linkages
Balancing machines.
UNIT III
FREE VIBRATION
9
Basic features of vibratory systems Idealized models Basic elements and lumping of parameters
Degrees of freedom Single degree of freedom Free vibration Equations of motion Natural frequency
of torsional systems Natural frequency of two and three rotor systems.
UNIT IV
FORCED VIBRATION AND DAMPING
8
Response to periodic forcing Forced damped vibration with constant harmonic excitation
Magnification factor Effect of phase angle Forcing caused by rotating unbalance Forcing caused by
reciprocating unbalance Forcing caused by excitation of support Force transmissibility and amplitude
transmissibility Vibration isolation Types of damping Damped vibration Critical speeds of simple
shaft.
UNIT V
MECHANISMS FOR CONTROL
9
Governors Types Centrifugal governors Gravity controlled and spring controlled centrifugal
governors Characteristics Effect of friction Controlling Force Other governor mechanisms
Gyroscopes Gyroscopic forces and torques Gyroscopic stabilization Gyroscopic effects in
automobiles, ships and airplanes.
TOTAL: 45+15
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Rattan S S
Theory of Machines

Company Ltd., New Delhi
2009
2.
John J Uicker
Gordon R Pennock
Joseph E Shigley
Theory of Machines
and Mechanisms
Oxford University Press, USA

Fourth Edition
2010
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Khurmi R S
Gupta J K
Theory of Machines
S. Chand and Company,

New Delhi
2010
2.
Rao J S
Dukkipati Rao V
Mechanism and
Machine Theory
New Age International,

New Delhi
2012
3.
Sadhu Singh
Theory of Machines
Pearson Education Asia,

New Delhi, 3rd edition
2011
4.
Thomas Bevan
Theory of Machines
Pearson Education
2009
5.
Ballaney P L
Theory of Machines
and Mechanisms
Khanna Publishers,
Delhi, 21st edition
2009
WEB URLs:
1. http://www.cdeep.iitb.ac.in/nptel/Mechanical/Dynamics%20of%20Machines/TOC.htm
2. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112104114/3
3. http://www.balancetechnology.com
4. http://www.precibalance.com
5. http://www.gyroscopes.org/gallery.asp
60
12M503
HEAT AND MASS TRANSFER
(Use of HMT data Book and Steam Tables are permitted)

3
3.5
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the basic concepts of heat transfer.
To understand the fundamentals of convective heat transfer.
To learn about different types of heat exchangers and its analysis.
To understand the importance of radiation heat transfer.
To enlighten the basic concepts of mass transfer.
OUTCOMES:
use the basic equations for solving heat transfer problems.
evaluate heat transfer coefficients for natural and forced convection for different fluid flows.
analyze heat exchanger performance.
evaluate radiation heat transfer between the surfaces.
gain the knowledge of mass transfer and evaluate its coefficients.
UNIT I
CONDUCTION
12
Basic concepts Mechanism of heat transfer Conduction, convection and radiation Fourier law of
conduction General differential equation of heat conduction Cartesian and cylindrical coordinates
One dimensional steady state heat conduction Conduction through plane wall Cylinders and spherical
systems Composite systems Conduction with internal heat generation Extended surfaces Unsteady
heat conduction Lumped analysis Use of heislers chart.
UNIT II
CONVECTION
9
Basic concepts Convective heat transfer coefficients Boundary layer concept Types of convection
Forced convection Dimensional analysis External Flow Flow over plates, cylinders and spheres
Internal Flow Laminar and Turbulent Flow Combined laminar and turbulent Flow over bank of tubes
Free Convection Dimensional Analysis Flow over vertical plate, horizontal plate, inclined plate,
cylinders and spheres.
UNIT III
PHASE CHANGE HEAT TRANSFER AND HEAT EXCHANGERS
9
Nusselts theory of condensation Pool boiling, the boiling curve, modes of pool boiling, flow boiling
Correlations in boiling and condensation, film wise condensation, drop wise condensation Types of Heat
Exchangers Parallel flow, counter flow and cross flow LMTD method of heat exchanger analysis
Effectiveness NTU method of heat exchanger analysis Overall heat transfer coefficient Fouling
factors.
UNIT IV
RADIATION
8
Basic Concept of thermal radiation heat transfer Laws of Radiation Planck distribution Wines
Displacement law Stefan Boltzmann law Kirchoffs law Surface absorption, reflection and
transmission Black body radiation, grey body radiation, diffuse radiation Shape factor Radiation
exchange between surfaces Electrical analogy Radiation shields Introduction to gas radiation.
UNIT V
MASS TRANSFER
7
An introduction to mass transfer, Basic concepts Diffusion mass transfer Ficks Law of Diffusion, mass
diffusion coefficient, transport properties of mixtures Convective mass transfer Equimolar counter
diffusion, momentum, heat and mass transfer analogy Steady state mass transfer with counter diffusion
Convective mass transfer correlations.
TOTAL: 45+15
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No
1.
Author(s)
Sachdeva R C
Title of the Book

Fundamentals of Engineering
61
Publisher
New Age
International, New Delhi
Year of
publication
2005
2.
Nag P K
Tata McGraw Hill,

New Delhi
Heat Transfer
2007
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
publication
Central Publishing House
2000
1.
Yadav R
Fundamentals of Heat and

Mass Transfer
2.
Ozisik M N
Heat Transfer
3.
Holman J.P
4.
Frank P Incropera
David P DeWitt
5.
Kothandaraman C P

Mass Transfer
Mass Transfer
McGraw Hill Book Co,

New Delhi
Tata McGraw Hill,
New Delhi
New Delhi
New Age
International, New Delhi
2002
2004
2009
2006
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.wisconline.com/objects/heattransfer/
http://ocw.mit.edu/highschool/physics/demonstrationsonvideo/temperatureheat/heat
transferthermalexpansion/
http://www.grantadesign.com/resources/materials/casestudies/heatexchanger.htm
http://www.engineeringtoolbox.com/radiation heat transfer d_431.html
http://www.ptl.ethz.ch/education/Mass_Transfer/lecture_notes
12M504
DESIGN OF MACHINE ELEMENTS
(Use of PSG Design Data Book is permitted)

3
OBJECTIVES:
To study the stresses induced on the machine members during different loading conditions.
To study the design aspects of shaft and coupling based on different criteria of stresses, rigidity
and critical speed.
To study the design criteria of fasteners, weld and riveted joints.
To study the design aspects of springs and levers.
To study the design principles of bearings.
OUTCOMES:
gain the knowledge of various types of stresses induced in different machine members.
design shaft and couplings to effective transmission of power.
design welded joints and fasteners for various industrial applications.
design springs for engineering applications.
select appropriate bearings for engineering applications.
UNIT I
STEADY STRESSES AND VARIABLE STRESSES IN MACHINE MEMBERS 9
Introduction to the design process Factors influencing machine design Selection of materials Direct,
bending and torsional stress equations Calculation of principal stresses for various load combinations
eccentric loading Factor of safety Theories of failure Stress concentration factor Design for variable
loading Soderberg, Goodman and Gerber relations.
UNIT II
9
Design of solid and hollow shafts based on strength, rigidity and critical speed Design of keys, key ways
and splines Design of rigid and flexible couplings Couplings Types and applications.
62
UNIT III
DESIGN OF TEMPORARY AND PERMANENT JOINTS
9
Threaded fasteners - Design of bolted joints including eccentric loading Design of welded joints for
pressure vessels and structures - Strength equations, efficiency and design of riveted joints for structures
Theory of bonded joints.
UNIT IV
DESIGN OF SPRINGS AND LEVERS
9
Design of leaf springs, helical springs, disc springs and torsional springs under constant loads and varying
loads Concentric torsion springs Belleville springs Design of levers.
UNIT V
DESIGN OF BEARINGS
9
Design of bearings sliding contact and rolling contact bearings Cubic mean load Design of journal
bearings McKees equation Sommerfield Number Lubrication in journal bearings Selection of
bearings.
TOTAL: 45+30
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Bhandari V B
Design of Machine
Elements
Tata McGraw-Hill
Book Co
Third Edition
2010
2.
Shanmugam N
Machine design
Anuradha agencies
2005
Publisher
Year of
Publication
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
1.
Khurmi R S
2.
Ugural A C
3.
Spotts M F
Shoup T E
4.
Orthwein W
5.
Juvinall R C
Marshek K M
Title of the Book

Machine design
S.Chand and Co
2009
Mechanical Design An
Integral Approach
Design of Machine
Elements
Machine Component
Design
McGraw-Hill
Book Co
Pearson Education
Eighth Edition
Jaico Publishing
Co
John Wiley and
Sons,
Fifth Edition
2004
Fundamentals of Machine
Component Design
2007
2006
2011
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://web.itu.edu.tr/temizv/VTDN/4_Fatigue.pdf
https://sites.google.com/site/designmachineelements/
http://www.e-bookspdf.org/download/design-of-machine-elements-solved-problems.html
http://www.me.iitb.ac.in/~hirani/ME331-2008.pdf
http://machinedesign.com/
12M505
AUTOMOBILE TECHNOLOGY
3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the basic concepts of vehicle structures and engines.
To understand the functions of engine auxiliary systems.
To learn different types of transmission systems.
To understand the importance of steering, brakes and suspension.
To enlighten the basic ideas of alternative energy sources.
63
OUTCOMES:
identify the types of vehicle structures and engines.
gain knowledge in engine auxiliary systems for the modern automobiles.
select appropriate transmission systems for the optimal power transmission.
gain knowledge steering, brakes and suspension systems for the effective functioning.
acquire knowledge about the advantages of alternative energy sources.
UNIT I
VEHICLE STRUCTURE AND ENGINES
9
Types of Automobiles Vehicle construction Chassis Frame and body Aerodynamics Components
of engine, functions and materials Review of cooling and lubrication systems in engine Turbo chargers
3 way catalytic controller Electronic engine management system.
UNIT II
ENGINE AUXILIARY SYSTEMS
9
Carburetor Working principle Electronic fuel injection system Mono-point and multi-point injection
Systems CRDI Construction, operation and maintenance of lead acid battery Electrical systems
Battery generator Starting motor and drives Lighting and ignition Regulators Cut outs.
UNIT III
TRANSMISSION SYSTEMS
9
Clutch Types and construction Gear boxes Manual and automatic Simple floor mounted shift
mechanism Over drives Transfer box fluid flywheel Torque convertors Propeller shaft Slip joint
Universal joints Differential and rear axle Hotchkiss drive and torque tube sdrive.
UNIT IV
STEERING, BRAKES AND SUSPENSION
9
Wheels and tyres Wheel alignment parameters Steering geometry and Types of steering gear box
power steering Types of front axle Suspension systems Braking systems Types and construction
diagonal braking system Antilock braking system.
UNIT V
ALTERNATIVE FUELS
9
Alternative energy sources Natural gas Characteristics Use of natural gas, LPG Characteristics
Applications Advantages and disadvantages Biodiesel, Gasohol and Hydrogen in Automobiles
Electric and Hybrid Vehicles, Fuel Cells.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
Kirpal Singh
Vol. 1 and 2
2.
Sethi H M
Publisher
Standard Publishers
New Delhi, 6th Edition
Tata McGraw-Hill, New
Delhi
Year of
Publication
2005
2003
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Crouse
Anglin
Automotive Mechanism
Tata McGraw-Hill,
New Delhi, Ninth Edition
2003
2.
Richard Stone
Jeffrey K Ball
Fundamentals
SAE International
2004
3.
Srinivasan S
Automotive Mechanics
Tata McGraw-Hill,
Second Edition
2003
4.
Joseph Heitner
Automotive Mechanics
East West Press
2004
5.
Yahya S M
Fundamentals of
Compressible Flow

Ltd., New Delhi
2002
64
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
https://www.sae.org/images/books/toc_pdfs/R324.pdf
http://www.iea.lth.se/publications/Theses/LTH-IEA-1039.pdf
http://www.emt-india.net/process/automobile/pdf/TransmissioninAutomobile.pdf
http://teachersites.schoolworld.com/webpages/MTurner/files/studyguide%20suspension%20and%20
steering.pdf
http://www1.eere.energy.gov/education/pdfs/transportation_alternativefuels.pdf
12M506
CAD/CAM/CIM
3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the basics of CAD / CAM and its applications in industries.
To learn different types of CAD modeling.
To understand the basic features of CNC machines and CAM programming.
To learn how to integrate computers in manufacturing.
To learn the recent advances in CAD/CAM/CIM.
OUTCOMES:
gain knowledge in the CAD / CAM concepts for various industrial applications.
create three dimensional models.
write CNC part programs for engineering components.
plan, design and evaluate the different types of layout.
gain knowledge in the recent advances in CAD/CAM/CIM.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Computers in industrial manufacturing, product life cycle CAD / CAM hardware Basic structure of
computers Storage devices Computer graphics Raster scans Graphics coordinate system Database
structure for graphics modeling.
UNIT II
COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN
9
Geometric modeling Model structure organization Database creation Modeling Wire frame, solid
modeling, surface, parametric, modeling facilities desired Drafting and modeling systems Basic
geometric commands Types and mathematical representation of curves, surfaces and solids Geometric
transformations Computer animation Mechanical assembly Clipping and hidden surface removal.
UNIT III
COMPUTER AIDED MANUFACTURING
9
Numerical Control (NC) Elements Machine tools Program generation Structure of CNC machine
tools Features of machining center, turning center Methods of manual Computer aided part
programming Tool path generation Recent developments in CNC machine tools DNC and its role in
FMS and CIMS.
UNIT IV
COMPUTER INTEGRATED MANUFACTURING
9
Cellular manufacturing system GT and benefits Part families, part classification and coding Product
flow analysis Virtual cell system Concept of quantitative analysis Building blocks of FMS Layout
Planning Applications and benefits Implementation issues Quantitative analysis Equipment
Control.
UNIT V
RECENT ADVANCES IN CAD / CAM / CIM
9
Rapid Prototyping Concept Tooling and virtual manufacturing Different RPT processes Computer
aided shop floor control Material requirement planning Factory data collection system Computer
process monitoring CAQC CAMH System Computer control production system CAPP CAPC
MRP CIM Implementation Functions and benefits Lean manufacturing JIT Manufacturing.
TOTAL: 45
65
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Year of
Publication
Publisher
1.
Radhakrishnan.P
Subramanyan S
Raju V
CAD/CAM/CIM
New Age
Publishers
2.
Mikell P Groover
Emory W Zimmers
Computer-Aided Design
and Manufacturing
Pearson Publication
International
2008
2008
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
1.
Sivasubramanian R
Ibrahim Zeid
2.
Michael Fitzpatrick
3.
Rao P N
4.
David Bedworth
5.
Eric Teicholz
Joel N Orr
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
CAD/CAM Theory and

Practices
Machining
and
CNC
Technology
CAD/ CAM: Principles
and Applications
Computer
Integrated
Design and Manufacturing
Computer
Integrated
Manufacturing
McGraw Hill International

Edition
2009
Tata McGraw Hill
2004
Tata McGraw Hill Pub.

New Delhi
2010
TMH, New Delhi
1991

Editions
1987
WEB URLS:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.cadc.iitb.ac.in
http://www.autocaddraftingindia.com
http://www.bestpricecomputers.co.uk/computer aided manufacturing.ht
http://www.eng.rpi.edu/manufacturing/cam/index.cfm
http://www.journals.elsevier.com/robotics and computer integrated manufacturing/
12O511
SOFT SKILLS
vide Automobile Engineering
12M512
HEAT AND MASS TRANSFER LABORATORY

0
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the methods of finding heat transfer coefficient through natural and forced
convection.
To study methods for determining thermal conductivity of materials.
To learn the different types of heat exchanger analysis.
To study the emissivity of various surfaces.
To study the performance of refrigeration and air conditioning system.
OUTCOMES:
evaluate heat transfer coefficients for natural and forced convection for different fluid flow.
determine the thermal conductivities of materials.
66
1.5
analyze heat exchanger performance.

estimate radiation heat transfer between the surfaces.
compute the coefficient of performance of refrigeration and air conditioning system
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Determination of thermal conductivity of pipe insulation using lagged pipe apparatus.
2. Determination of thermal conductivity of insulating powder.
3. Determination of heat transfer coefficient through Natural convection from a vertical cylinder.
4. Determination of heat transfer coefficient in Forced convection from a tube.
5. Determination of Heat transfer from pin-fin (Natural and Forced convection modes).
6. Determination of Stefan Boltzmann constant.
7. Determination of emissivity of a grey surface.
8. Determination of effectiveness of Parallel/Counter flow heat exchanger.
9. Determination of Coefficient of Performance of a refrigeration system.
10. Performance test on Air-conditioning system.
12M513
DYNAMICS LABORATORY
0
1.5
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the working of various types of governors.
To understand the method of drawing cam profile for various types of followers.
To impart the knowledge of Gyroscope and its working.
To understand the method of determining the critical speed of a shaft with concentrated loads.
To understand the method of measuring vibration in various types of rotating elements.
OUTCOMES:
apply the knowledge on various types of governors.
draw the cam profile for various types of followers.
apply the knowledge of gyroscopic couple.
measure the critical speed of a shaft when it is subjected to concentrated loads.
measure the vibration in various types of rotating masses.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Governors Determination of sensitivity, effort, etc. for Watt, Porter, Proell, Hartnell Governors
2. Drawing the cam profile of flat faced and mushroom followers.
3. Motorised Gyroscope Verification of laws Determination of gyroscopic couple.
4. Whirling of shaft Determination of critical speed of shaft with concentrated loads.
5. Balancing of rotating masses.
6. Turn table arrangement Determination of Mass Moment of Inertia
7. Vibrating system Determination of damping co-efficient of single degree of freedom system
8. Torsional Vibration Single rotor system
9. Torsional Vibration Two rotor system
12M514
CAD/CAM LABORATORY
0
OBJECTIVES:
To develop the necessary skills to generate engineering drawing and an engineering assembly
using a modern CAD system.
To expertise in 2D drafting and 3D modelling softwares.
To learn modelling and assembling skills of various engineering components.
To understand the concepts of manual part programming.
To learn about the controls of various CNC machines.
67
1.5
OUTCOMES:
create engineering drawings with different views.
create 2D and 3D models.
assemble various engineering components.
interface the 3D models from CAD to CAM and use computer numerically controlled machines to
produce simple profiles.
generate, simulate and verify CNC programs through CAM software.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Introduction to 3D modeling/ Solidworks Features, Part Modeling, Assembly Modeling
2. Modeling and Assembling of Flange Coupling
3. Modeling and Assembling of Plummer Block
4. Modeling and Assembling of Universal Coupling
5. Modeling and Assembling of Screw Jack
6. Surface Modeling /File import and Export/ STL file generation
7. Study on CNC Turning and Milling Machines
8. Part Program generation for turning and Milling for Fanuc Control System
9. Facing, Turning, Chamfering, Taper turning, Circular Interpolation using G and M codes
10. Facing, Turning, Chamfering, Taper turning, Circular Interpolation, Grooving, Threading using
canned cycles.
SEMESTER VI

ENGINEERING ETHICS
(Common to Auto/Mech/Civil/CSE/IT)
12M602
GAS DYNAMICS AND JET PROPULSION

(Use of standard Gas tables are permitted)
3
OBJECTIVES:
To learn about the basic concepts of Gas dynamics and understand the basic difference between
incompressible and compressible flow.
To understand how the flow takes place in the variable area ducts.
To know how the flow takes place in the constant area ducts.
To understand the phenomena of shock Fanno and Rayleigh flow.
To learn and understand the thrust equation and how it used in aircraft and rocket propulsion.
OUTCOMES:
gain knowledge of compressible fluid flows at flow conditions.
conduct performance analysis in airbreathing engines.
carryout simple performance analysis of subsonic and supersonic inlets.
conduct performance analysis of combustors, afterburners, and exhaust nozzles.
analyze and recognize the liquid and solid propulsion.
68
3.5
UNIT I
COMPRESSIBLE FLOW FUNDAMENTALS
9
Energy equation for flow process Momentum equation for compressible fluid flows Various regions of
flows Reference velocities Stagnation state Stagnation pressure Stagnation density Stagnation
temperature Velocity of sound Critical states Mach number Critical mach number Types of waves
Mach cone Mach angle Role of mach number on compressibility.
UNIT II
FLOW THROUGH VARIABLE AREA DUCTS
9
Comparison of isentropic and adiabatic processes for flow through nozzle and diffuser Mach number
variation Isentropic flow through variable area ducts T-s and h-s diagrams for flow through nozzle
T-s and h-s diagrams for flow through diffuser Area ratio as a function of mach number Mass flow rate
through nozzle Mass flow rate through diffuser Impulse function Effect of friction in flow through
nozzles Use of gas tables.
UNIT III
FLOW THROUGH CONSTANT AREA DUCTS
9
Flow in constant area ducts with friction (Fanno flow) Fanno curves and fanno flow equation Variation
of flow properties Velocity Density Temperature Stagnation pressure Impulse function Entropy
variation of mach number with duct length Isothermal flow with friction in constant area ducts Flow in
constant area ducts with heat transfer (Rayleigh flow) Rayleigh line and rayleigh flow equation
Variation of flow properties Maximum heat transfer.
UNIT IV
NORMAL SHOCK
9
Governing equations Variation of flow parameters like static pressure Static temperature Density
Stagnation pressure and entropy across the normal shock Prandtl Meyer equation Impossibility of
shock in subsonic flows Flow in convergent nozzle with shock Flow in divergent nozzle with shock
Normal shock in fanno flow Normal shock in rayleigh flows Flow with oblique shock (elementary
treatment only).
UNIT V
PROPULSION
9
Aircraft propulsion Types of jet engines Ram jet and pulse jet engines Diffuser Compressor
Combustion chamber Turbine and exhaust systems Performance of turbo jet engines Thrust Thrust
power Propulsive and overall efficiencies Rocket propulsion Rocket engines thrust equation Rocket
engine performance Solid and liquid propellants Comparison of different propulsion systems.
TOTAL: 45+15
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
1.
Yahya S M
2.
Jack D Mattingly
Title of the Book

Fundamental of
compressible flow Third
Edition
Elements of Gas Turbine
Propulsion
Publisher
Year of
Publication

(p) Ltd., New Delhi,
Fifth Reprint
2013
McGraw Hill
2011
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Radhakrishnan E
Gas Dynamics
Prentice Hall of India,

New Delhi
2012
2.
Theo G Keith
Keith T G
James E A John
Gas Dynamics
Prentice Hall
2006
3.
James E A John
heo G Keith
Gas Dynamics
Prentice Hall,
Third Edition
2006
69
4.
John D Anderson
Modern Compressible Flow:

With Historical Perspective
McGrawHill
2003
5.
Oscar Biblarz
Robert D Zucker
Fundamentals of Gas
Dynamics
WileyJohn and Sons
2002
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://cheresources.com/compressible _flow.shtml
http://kinindia.com/university/gas dynamics and jet propulsion
http:// aerostudents.com/files/aerodynamicsC/normalShockWaves.pdf
http://iitd.ac.in/~pmvs/mel17152008/mel1715 22.ppt
http://grc.nasa.gov/www/K 12/airplane/normal.html
12M603
DESIGN OF TRANSMISSION SYSTEMS

(Use of PSG Design data book is permitted)
3
3.5
OBJECTIVES:
To study about the design of transmission systems like belts, pulleys, sprockets etc.
To study the design principles involved in designing spur and parallel axis helical gears.
To gain the knowledge of designing bevel and worm gears.
To study about the design procedures involved in designing various types of gear boxes.
To study the design principle involved in clutches and brakes.
OUTCOMES:
gain the knowledge of power transmission components like belts, pulleys, sprockets etc.
design spur and parallel axis helical gears for various engineering applications.
design bevel and worm gears for the power transmission systems.
design gear boxes for industrial applications.
design clutches and brakes for engineering applications.
UNIT I
DESIGN OF TRANSMISSION SYSTEMS FOR FLEXIBLE ELEMENTS
9
Selection of flat belts and pulleys Selection of V belts and pulleys Materials used for belt drives Wire ropes
and pulleys Materials used for wire ropes Selection of transmission chains and sprockets Design of pulleys
and sprockets.
UNIT II
DESIGN OF SPUR GEARS AND PARALLEL AXIS HELICAL GEARS
9
Gear terminology Speed ratios and number of teeth Force analysis Tooth stresses Factor of safety
Gear materials Module and power rating calculations based on strength and wear considerations
Parallel axis helical gears Pressure angle in normal and transverse plane Equivalent number of teeth
Forces and stresses Estimating the size of a pair of parallel axis helical gears.
UNIT III
DESIGN OF BEVEL, WORM AND CROSS HELICAL GEARS
9
Straight bevel gear Tooth terminology Tooth forces and stresses Equivalent number of teeth Estimating the
dimensions of pair of straight bevel gears Worm gear Terminology Thermal capacity Materials Forces
and stresses Efficiency Estimating the size of the worm gear pair Merits and demerits Cross helical
Terminology Helix angles Estimating the size of a pair of cross helical gears.
UNIT IV
DESIGN OF GEAR BOXES
9
Requirements to obtain optimum design Geometric progression Standard step ratio Ray diagram
Kinematics layout Design of sliding mesh gear box Constant mesh gear box Design of multi speed
gear box Gear tooth loads and bearing reactions.
70
UNIT V
DESIGN OF CLUTCHES AND BRAKES
9
Clutches Role of clutches Axial clutches Cone clutches Internal expanding rim clutches Brakes
Types of brakes Self energizing and de-energizing brakes Design of internally expanding shoe brakes
Calculation of heat generation and heat dissipation in brakes.
TOTAL: 45+15
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Shigley J E
Mischke C R
Design
McGraw Hill Book

Co International
Editions, 9th Edition
2011
2.
Bhandari V B
Design of Machine
Elements
Tata McGraw Hill

Publishing Company
Ltd., 3rd Edition
2010
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
1.
2.
3.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Hamrock B J
Jacobson B
Schmid S R
Juvinall R C
Marshek K M
Maitra G M
Prasad L V
4.
Prabhu T J
5.
Shanmugam N
Year of
Publication
Publisher
Elements
McGraw Hill,
3rd Edition
2013
Component Design
Hand book of Mechanical
Design
Design of Transmission
Elements

New Delhi , 5th Edition
2011
Tata McGrawHill
2004
Mani Offset, Chennai
2004
Machine Design
Anuradha Agencies
2005
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.engineersedge.com/calculators.htm
http://www.ktj.in/static/tutorials/tut_IDP_ktj14.pdf
http://www.3.nd.edu/nmanufact/FME_pdf_files/fme3_ch15.pdf
http://www.instructables.com/id/making-a-2-speed-custom-gearbox/
http://www.kinindia.com/university/design of transmission systems notes me2352/
12M604
FINITE ELEMENT METHOD

3
3.5
OBJECTIVES:
To understand different classical techniques to develop finite element equation.
To learn the basic matrix operation to form a global matrix equation and enforce the concept of
steps in obtaining solutions for one dimensional problem.
To learn finite element modeling steps to solve two dimensional problems.
To understand the iso-parametric transformation concepts.
To learn the technique for obtaining solutions for heat transfer and fluid mechanics problems.
OUTCOMES:
discretize the given problem and develop finite element equation using different classical
techniques.
71
identify the steps required for FEM to find solution for one dimensional problem.
select the basic law of finite element modeling to solve two dimensional problems.
calculate stress and element stiffness matrix for Isoparametric elements.
identify the technique for obtaining solutions for solving heat transfer and fluid mechanics
problems.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION OF FEM PACKAGES
9
Historical background Matrix approach Application to the continuum Discretization Matrix algebra
Gaussian elimination Governing equations for continuum Preprocess procedure in FEM Weighted
residual method Ritz method.
UNIT II
ONE DIMENSIONAL PROBLEMS
9
Finite element modeling Co-ordinates and shape functions Potential energy approach Galerkin
method Element matrix and vectors Assembly for global equations Boundary conditions Shape
functions Applications to axial loading of rod Extension to plain trusses Bending of beams Finite
element formulation of stiffness matrix and load vectors Assembly to global equations Boundary
conditions Solutions and post processing Example problems.
UNIT III
TWO DIMENSIONAL CONTINUUM
9
Introduction Approximation of geometry and field variable Three noded triangular elements Four
noded rectangular elements Higher order elements Generalized coordinates approach to nodal
approximations Difficulties Natural coordinates and coordinate transformations Triangular and
quadrilateral elements Iso-parametric elements Structural mechanics applications in 2-D Elasticity
equations Stress strain relations Plane problems of elasticity Element equations Assembly Need
for quadrature formula Transformations to natural coordinates Gaussian quadrature Example
problems in plane stress, plane strain and axisymmetric application.
UNIT IV
ISOPARAMETRIC ELEMENTS FOR TWO DIMENSIONAL CONTINUUM
9
The four node quadrilateral Shape functions Element stiffness matrix and force vector Numerical
integration Stiffness integration Stress calculations four node quadrilaterals for axisymmetric problems
Applications to cylinders under internal or external pressures.
UNIT V
APPLICATIONS IN HEAT TRANSFER AND FLUID MECHANICS
9
One dimensional heat transfer element Application to one-dimensional heat transfer problems Scalar
variable problems in 2-D Applications to heat transfer in 2-D Application to problems in fluid
mechanics in 2-D Application to problems in flow through pipes.
TOTAL: 45+15
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
1.
Chandrupatla T R
Belegundu A D
2.
Reddy J N
Title of the Book

Introduction to Finite
Elements in Engineering
An Introduction to Finite
Element Method
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Pearson Education
2002
McGraw Hill
International Student
2005
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
1.
Logan D L
2.
Rao S S
3.
Zienkiewicz O C
Taylor R L
Title of the Book

A First course in the Finite
Element Method
The Finite Element Method
in Engineering
The Finite Element Methods
Vol. II
72
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Thomson Learning
2006
Pergamon Press
2006
Butterworth
Heinemann
2000
4.
Brenner Susanne
Scott Ridgway
5.
Seshu P
The Mathematical Theory of

Finite Element Methods
Text Book of Finite Element
Analysis
Springer
2008

Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi
2007
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://mathworld.wolfram.com/GaussianElimination.html
http://ms.unimelb.edu.au/~moshe/lp/
http://onesmartclick.com/engineering/finite element analysis.html
http://flatworldsolutions.com/engineering/finite element analysis.php
http://ebookbrowse.com/the finite element method pdf d
12M605
MICROPROCESSOR AND MICROCONTROLLER

3
0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To study the architecture, instruction set and programming of 8085 microprocessor.
To introduce the peripheral interfacing of microprocessors.
To learn through case studies, the system design principles using 8085.
To introduce the architecture, instruction set, programming and interfacing of 8051
microcontroller.
OUTCOMES:
describe the basic architecture of the 8085 microprocessor in terms of ALU, registers, timing and
control circuitry.
write assembly language programs using 8085 instructions.
interface 8085 with I/O devices.
write assembly language programs for the 8051 Microcontroller.
apply 8051 for speed control and temperature control.
UNIT I
8085 MICROPROCESSOR
Introduction Architecture of 8085 Pin Configuration Addressing Modes Instruction set.
10
UNIT II
TIMING DIAGRAM AND PROGRAMMING
Instruction cycle Machine cycle Timing diagram of 8085 Assembly Language Programming
using 8085 instructions.
UNIT III
PERIPHERALS AND INTERFACING
Keyboard/Display Interfacing Memory Interfacing A/D and D/A Converters Interfacing.
UNIT IV
8051 MICROCONTROLLER
12
Introduction Architecture of 8051 Pin configuration Ports External Memory Counters and Timers
Serial and Parallel I/O Interrupts Assembly language programming
UNIT V
APPLICATIONS USING INTEL 8085 AND 8051
Temperature Control Stepper Motor Control Traffic Light Controller Speed control of DC motor.
TOTAL: 45
73
TEXT BOOKS:
S.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Krishna Kant
Microprocessors and
Microcontrollers
2007
Mazidi M A
Mazidi J C
Microprocessors and
Microcontrollers
PHI / Pearson
Education
2007
REFERENCE BOOKS:
S.No.
Author(s)
1.
Ghosh P K
Sridhar P R
Kenneth J Ayala
Douclas V Hall
Levental L A
Aditya P Mathur
Publisher
Year of
Publication
2001
Thomson Delmar
Learning, Indian
Edition,
2007
Tata McGraw Hill
2010
Prentice Hall Inc
2007
Tata McGraw Hill
2007
Title of the Book

Introduction to
Microprocessors for
Engineers and Scientists
The 8051 Microcontroller,
Architecture, Programming
and applications
Microprocessors and
Interfacing, Programming
and Hardware
Introduction to
microprocessors Software
and Hardware Programming
Introduction to
Microprocessors Software
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
www.cpuworld.com/Arch/8086.html
en.wikibooks.org/wiki/microprocess/computer architecture
www.webopedia.com/TERM/E/embeddedsystem.html
www.howstuffworks.com
http://cie wc.edu/Microprocessor 7 19 2011.pdf
12M611
AUTOMOBILE TECHNOLOGY LABORATORY

0
OBJECTIVES:
To study the different components of engines.
To learn about engine assemblies.
To learn about the transmissions systems in a vehicle.
To study the wheel alignment parameters.
To learn the auxiliary systems in automobiles.
OUTCOMES:
overhaul the engine assemblies.
determine the gear ratio for different load conditions.
overhaul the transmission and other auxiliary systems in a vehicle.
74
1.5
determine the wheel alignment parameters for the vehicles.

overhaul the auxiliary systems in automobiles.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Study of Engine Components and Tools.
2. Dismantling and Assembling of Engines.
3. Dismantling and Assembling of Master Cylinder or Braking System.
4. Determine the gear ratio of Sliding mesh, Constant mesh and Synchromesh gear box.
5. Dismantling and assembling of single plate coil spring clutch.
6. Dismantling and assembling of steering Gear box.
7. Measurement of different vehicle chassis.
8. Dismantling and assembling of differential.
9. Dismantling and assembling of lubrication oil pump.
10. Dismantling and assembling of front axle and rear axle.
12M612
COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LABORATORY

0
1.5
OBJECTIVES:
To simulate real time problems by using software.
To understand the application of analysis packages.
To solve problems ranging from very simple to very complex.
To design and conduct experiments, as well as the ability to analyze and interpret data.
To change the design process from repetitive cycles of "design, prototype, test" into streamlined
process.
OUTCOMES:
solve the real time problem.
interpret data for various shapes and structure using software.
analyze various types of beams for structural static analysis.
evaluate various types of beams under various loading conditions.
solve thermal conduction and convection analysis for the given problem.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Study of Importing solid model into FEA software
2. Nonlinear analysis of the given beam
3. Structural static analysis of cantilever beam
4. Structural static analysis of fixed beam
5. Structural static analysis of simply supported beam
6. Structural static analysis of corner bracket
7. Modal analysis for cantilever beam, fixed beam and simply supported beam
8. Axis symmetry analysis of the model
9. Thermal conduction and convection analysis for rectangular plate with circular hole for different
materials
10. Solve the given transient conduction problem
12M613
MICROPROCESSOR AND MICROCONTROLLER LABORATORY

0
OBJECTIVES:
To perform 8085 microprocessor programming using instruction set.
To interface the peripherals with 8085 microprocessor.
To perform assembly language programming using 8051.
To interface the peripherals with 8051 microcontroller.
75
1.5
OUTCOMES:
program 8085 microprocessor for performing arithmetic and sorting operations.
program 8051 microcontroller for performing arithmetic and code conversion operations.
interface 8085 with A/D converters and D/A converters.
apply 8085 and 8051 for stepper motor control.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Study of 8085 Microprocessor and 8051 Microcontroller trainer kits.
2. 8085 and 8051 Assembly language programs
i) Arithmetic operations
ii) Finding largest/smallest number in an array
iii) Sorting.
3. 8085 and 8051 Assembly Language Programs for code conversion
i) BCD to binary
ii) Binary to BCD
4. 8051 Assembly Language Program for timer operations.
5. Interfacing of 8 bit A/D and D/A converters using 8085.
6. Stepper motor interface using 8085 and 8051
7. Display unit interface with 8085.
12A651/12M651/12C651/12L651/12T651/12E651/12N651/12P651/12F651
MINI PROJECT
(Common to ALL branches)
ELECTIVES
12M001
MODERN CONCEPTS OF ENGINEERING DESIGN

3
OBJECTIVES:
To learn the design process and computer aided engineering.
To understand the product planning based on customer need.
To learn the overview of selection methodologies.
To understand the basics of product architecture, industrial design and DFM.
To learn the basics of robust design and patents.
OUTCOMES:
select the codes and standards in design process using computer aided engineering.
develop a product plan based on customer requirement.
select a suitable methodology for concept generation and product testing.
identify the product architecture , industrial design and DFM concepts during product
development.
develop a robust design.
76
UNIT I
PRODUCT DESIGN PROCESS
9
Importance of product design Design process Design considerations Design morphology Marketing
organization for design Computer aided engineering Codes and standards Design review
Technological innovation and design process Product and process cycles Societal considerations in
design.
UNIT II
PRODUCT PLANNING AND SPECIFICATION
9
Opportunities identification Evaluation Resource allocation Preproject planning Customer need
identification Establishing target specification Setting the final specification.
UNIT III
CONCEPT GENERATION, SELECTION AND TESTING
9
Activity of concept generation Clarification of problem External and internal searches Concept
exploration Result analysis Overview of selection methodologies Concept screening Concept
scoring Concept testing Choice of survey population Survey formats Measurement of customer
response Interpretation and analysis of results.
UNIT IV
PRODUCT ARCHITECTURE, INDUSTRIAL DESIGN, DESIGN FOR

MANUFACTURE AND PROTOTYPING
9
Product architecture Implications Establishment Platform planning System level design Need for
industrial design and its impact The Industrial design process and its management Assessment of
quality Overview of design for manufacture process Steps in DFM Basics principles of prototyping
Prototyping technologies Planning for prototypes.
UNIT V
ROBUST DESIGN AND PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT ECONOMICS AND

INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS
9
Design of experiments Steps in the robust design process Elements of economic analysis Steps in
economic analysis process Overview of patents Utility patents Steps in preparing disclosure.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Ulrich K T
Eppinger S D
Product Design and

Development
McGraw Hill
Book Company
2007
2.
Otto K N
Wood K L
Product Design Techniques

in Reverse Engineering and
New Product Development
Butterworth Publishers
2004
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
Ullman D G
The Mechanical Design

Process
2.
Dieter G E
Engineering Design
3.
Yousef Haik
Engineering Design Process
4.
5.
Joseph E Shigley
Charles R. Mischke
Richard G Budynas
Keith Nisbett J
Richard G Budynas
Publisher
McGraw Hill
Book Co, 3rd Edition
McGraw Hill
Book Company
Vikas Publication
House
Year of
Publication
2005
2008
2002
Design
New York: McGrawHill, 7th edition
2004
Design
Tata McGraw - Hill

Education , 9th Edition
2011
77
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://faculty1.aucegypt.edu/farag/presentations/Chapter1.pdf
http://www.virtueventures.com/files/mdbl-chapter6.pdf
http://www.eng.uwaterloo.ca/~jzelek/teaching/syde361/syde361-concepts.pdf
http://www.ulrich-eppinger.net
http://www.colorado.edu/economics/mcguire/workingpapers/cwrurev.doc
12M002
DESIGN FOR MANUFACTURE AND ASSEMBLY

3
OBJECTIVES:
To introduce the tolerance analysis methods.
To understand the tolerance allocation methods.
To learn the rules and concepts of geometrical dimensioning and tolerance.
To learn to develop tolerance chart.
To study various DFM guidelines.
OUTCOMES:
analyze the tolerance for different manufacturing processes.
recognize the different types of tolerances and allocate them appropriately.
gain knowledge over the geometric dimensioning and tolerance concepts.
develop the tolerance chart for the given Engineering component.
incorporate the DFM guidelines for various Engineering applications.
UNIT I
TOLERANCE ANALYSIS
8
Introduction Concepts, definitions and relationships of tolerance Matching design tolerances with
appropriate manufacturing process Manufacturing process capability metrics Worst case Statistical
tolerance analysis Linear and non-linear analysis Sensitivity analysis Taguchis approach to tolerance
design.
UNIT II
TOLERANCE ALLOCATION
8
Tolerance synthesis Computer aided tolerance Traditional cost based analysis Taguchis quality loss
function Application of the quadratic los geometric dimensioning and tolerances function to tolerance
Principles of selective assembly Problems.
UNIT III
GEOMETRICAL DIMENSIONING AND TOLERANCING
10
Fundamentals of geometric dimensioning and tolerance Rules and concepts of geometric dimensioning
and tolerancing Form controls Datum systems Orientation controls Tolerance of position
Concentricity and symmetry controls Run out controls Profile controls.
UNIT IV
TOLERANCE CHARTING
9
Nature of the tolerance buildup Structure and setup of the tolerance chart Piece part sketches for
tolerance charts Arithmetic ground rules for tolerance charts Determination of required balance
dimensions Determination of mean working dimensions Automatic tolerance charting Tolerance
charting of angular surfaces.
UNIT V
MANUFACTURING GUIDELINES
10
DFM guidelines for casting,weldment design Formed metal components Turned parts Milled, Drilled
parts Non metallic parts Computer aided DFM software Boothroyd and Dewhurst method of DFMA
DCS VIS/VSA 3Dimensional control Statistical tolerance analysis software Applications.
TOTAL: 45
78
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Mahajan M
Industrial Engineering and Production

Management
Dhanpat Rai and

Co
2001
2.
Harry Peck
Designing for Manufacture
Pitman Publication
2013
Publisher
Year of
Publication
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
Clyde M
Creveling
Tolerance Design :A Handbook for

Developing Optimal Specifications
Prentice Hall
2012
2.
David A. Madsen
Geometric Dimensioning and

Tolerancing
Good heartWillcox Pub
2012
3.
Alex Krulikowski
Fundamentals of Geometric
Dimensioning and Tolerance
Delmar Cengage
Learning
2012
CRC Press
2002
McGraw-Hill Inc.
1999
4.
Bob Campbell
5.
James G. Bralla
Integrated Product Design and

Manufacturing Using Geometric
Dimensioning and Tolerance
(Manufacturing Engineering and
Materials Processing)
Handbook of Product Design for
Manufacturing
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.pages.drexel.edu/~rcc34/Files/Teaching/MEM201%20L6-Tolerance_RC.pdf
http://www.et.byu.edu/~chasek/ME%20477/Allocation/ToleranceAlloc.pdf
http://www.ivcc.edu/uploadedFiles/_faculty/smith/GDT%20Spring%202010t.pdf
http://web.iitd.ac.in/~pmpandey/Process_engg_html/Tolerance%20Charts.pdf
http://www.unm.edu/~bgreen/ME101/dfm.pdf
12M003
PRODUCT DESIGN, PROCESS PLANNING AND COST ESTIMATION

3
OBJECTIVES:
To introduce the product design and development.
To Introduce the product modeling
To understand the concepts of process planning, estimating and costing.
To understand the methods for material cost and labour cost.
To learn the methods of product cost estimation.
OUTCOMES:
select the concepts of product design and develop their product.
design their process chains and product models.
select the process planning activities in Engineering applications.
define their material cost and labour cost.
Estimate the cost for various Engineering applications.
79
UNIT I
PRODUCT DESIGN AND DEVELOPMENT, SCHEDULLING
9
Principles of creativity in design Integrated product development and concurrent engineering Product
analysis Criteria for product design Market research Design for customer and design for manufacture
Product life cycle Production process Single product, single batch, n-batch scheduling problem
Knowledge based scheduling system.
UNIT II
PRODUCT MODELING
9
Product modeling Definition of concept Fundamental issues Role and basic requirement of process
chains and product models Types of product models Model standardization efforts Types of process
chains Industrial demands.
UNIT III
PROCESS PLANNING, ESTIMATING AND COSTING
7
Process Planning Definition Approaches to process planning Manual experience based planning
Computer aided process planning Retrieval and generative types Process planning activities
Production time calculation Selection of optimal processes and major factors considered Breakeven
analysis Example problems Estimating and costing Importance and aims of cost estimation
Functions of estimation Costing Importance and aims of Costing Difference between costing and
estimation Importance of realistic estimates Estimation procedure Estimate form.
UNIT IV
ELEMENT OF COST
10
Introduction Material cost Determination of material cost and labour cost Determination of direct
labour cost expenses Cost of product (ladder of cost) Illustrative examples Analysis of overhead
expenses Factory expenses Depreciation Causes of depreciation Methods of depreciation
Administrative expenses Selling and distributing expenses Allocation of overhead expenses.
UNIT V
PRODUCT COST ESTIMATION
10
Estimation in forging shop Losses in forging Forging cost Illustrative examples Estimation in
welding shop gas cutting Electric welding Illustrative examples Estimation in foundry shop
Estimation of pattern cost and casting cost Illustrative examples.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Karl T Ulrich
Steven D Eppinger
Product Design and

Development
McGraw Hill Higher

Education
2012
2.
Banga T R
Sharma S C
Khanna Publishers
2011
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication

Pvt Ltd., 5th Edition
2013
Product Design for

Manufacture and
Assembly
M Dekker
2010
Cristian Campos
Product Design Now
HarperCollins
Publishers
2010
M. Bradford Clifton
Wesley P Townsend
Henry M B Bird
Robert E Albano
Target Costing
Market Driven Product
Design
CRC Press
2003
1.
Chitale K
Gupta R C
Product Design and

Manufacturing
2.
Geoffrey Boothroyd
Peter Dewhurst
Winston Anthony Knight
3.
4.
80
5.
International Labour
Office (ILO) Geneva
Introduction to Work
Study
Indian Adaptation
Oxford and IBH,

3rd Edition
2008
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.technologystudent.com/designpro/despro1.htm
http://sourceforge.net/apps/trac/gellish/wiki/Product%20Modeling
http://www.scribd.com/doc/38398597/Process-Planning-and-Cost-Estimation
http://www.preservearticles.com/2011092314033/what-are-the-various-elements-of-cost.html
http://www.slideshare.net/awasare/estimation-of-production-and-cost-function-presentation
12M004
FLEXIBLE MANUFACTURING SYSTEMS
3 0
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the modern manufacturing concepts.
To gain the knowledge on control system in flexible manufacturing system.
To understand the concepts behind flexible manufacturing system simulation and database.
To learn about the benefits and applications of group technology and justification.
To understand the applications of flexible manufacturing system and automation.
OUTCOMES:
attain an in-depth knowledge about modern manufacturing systems.
design and develop appropriate control system for product development.
develop simulation programs related to manufacturing.
practice and analyze group technology formulation.
interpret appropriate results from expert systems.
UNIT I
PLANNING, SCHEDULING AND CONTROL OF FLEXIBLE

MANUFACTURING SYSTEMS
9
Introduction to FMS Development of manufacturing systems Benefits Major elements Types of
flexibility FMS application and flexibility Single product, single batch, n-batch scheduling problem
Knowledge based scheduling system.
UNIT II
COMPUTER CONTROL AND SOFTWARE FOR FLEXIBLE

MANUFACTURING SYSTEMS
9
Introduction Composition of FMS Hierarchy of computer control Computer control of work center
and assembly lines FMS supervisory computer control Types of software specification and selection
Trends.
UNIT III
FMS SIMULATION AND DATA BASE
9
Application of simulation Model of FMS Simulation software Limitation Manufacturing data
systems / data flow FMS database systems Planning for FMS database.
UNIT IV
GROUP TECHNOLOGY AND JUSTIFICATION OF FMS
9
Introduction Matrix formulation Mathematical programming formulation Graph formulation
Knowledge based system for group technology Economic justification of FMS Application of
possibility distributions in FMS systems justification.
UNIT V
APPLICATIONS OF FMS AND FACTORY OF THE FUTURE
9
FMS application in machining Sheet metal fabrication Prismatic component production Aerospace
application FMS development towards factories of the future Artificial intelligence and expert systems
in FMS Design philosophy and characteristics for future.
TOTAL: 45
81
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
Groover M P
Automation, production
systems and computer
integrated
manufacturing
2.
Shivanand H K
Benal M M
Koti V
Flexible manufacturing
system
Year of
Publication
Publisher
Ltd.
2008
New Age International(P)

Ltd. publishers
2006
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
YoremKoren
2.
Michael Fitzpatrick
3.
Radhakrishnan P
Subramanyan S
Raju V
4.
David Bedworth
5.
James A Rehg,
Henry W Kraebber
Computer Integrated
Manufacturing system
Machining and CNC
Technology
CAD/CAM/CIM
Computer Integrated
Design and Manufacturing
Computer-Integrated
Manufacturing
Year of
Publication
Publisher
McGraw-Hill
2005
Tata McGraw Hill
2013

Publishers
2008
TMH, New Delhi
1998
Prentice Hall, 3rd edition
2004
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.uky.edu/~dsianita/611/fms.html
http://me.emu.edu.tr/majid/IENG447/FMS.pdf
http://graco.unb.br/alvares/Doutorado_Disciplinas/feature/fms_control.pdf
http://www.competitiveproduction.com/articles/flexible-manufacturing-system/
http://www.technologystudent.com/prddes1/flexbl1.
12M005
COMPOSITE MATERIALS
3
OBJECTIVES:
To learn the fundamentals of composite.
To identify the properties of polymer matrix composite and different manufacturing processes.
To learn basics of metal matrix composite and different types of processing techniques.
To understand engineering ceramic materials and its properties.
To learn the recent advances in composites.
OUTCOMES:
classify the composite matrix.
develop polymer matrix composite using fiber.
select the reinforcement material and most appropriate manufacturing process.
classify and select the suitable ceramic material.
select suitable composite material based on its properties and application.
82
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
8
Fundamentals of composite Need for composites Enhancement of properties Classification of
composites matrix Polymer matrix composites (PMC) Metal matrix composites (MMC) Ceramic
matrix composites (CMC) Reinforcement Particle reinforced composites Fiber reinforced composites
Applications of various types of composites.
UNIT II
POLYMER MATRIX COMPOSITES
12
Polymer matrix resins Thermosetting resins Thermoplastic resins Reinforcement fibers Rovings
Woven fabrics Non woven random mats Various types of fibers PMC processes Hand layup
processes Spray up processes Compression moulding Reinforced reaction injection moulding Resin
transfer moulding Pultrusion Filament winding Injection moulding Fiber reinforced plastics (FRP)
Glass fiber reinforced plastics (GRP).
UNIT III
METAL MATRIX COMPOSITES
9
Characteristics of MMC Various types of Alloy vs MMC Advantages of MMC Limitations of MMC
Metal matrix Reinforcements Particles Fibers Effect of reinforcement Volume fraction Rule of
mixtures Processing of MMC Powder metallurgy process Diffusion bonding Stir casting Squeeze
casting.
UNIT IV
CERAMIC MATRIX COMPOSITES
9
Engineering ceramic materials Properties Advantages Limitations Monolithic ceramics Need for
CMC Ceramic matrix Various types of ceramic matrix composites Oxide ceramics Non oxide
ceramics Aluminium oxide Silicon nitride Reinforcements Particles, fibers, whiskers Sintering
Hot pressing Cold isostatic pressing (CI Ping) Hot isostatic pressing (HI Ping).
UNIT V
ADVANCES IN COMPOSITES
7
Carbon/carbon composites Advantages of carbon matrix Limitations of carbon matrix carbon fiber
Chemical vapour deposition of carbon on carbon fiber perform Sol gel technique Composites for
aerospace applications.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Malik P K
Composite Materials
McGraw- HillMunish
2005
2.
Sharma S C
Composite Materials
Narosa Publishers
2000
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
1.
Krishan K Chawla
2.
Deborah D L Chung
3.
4.
5.
Jack R Vinson
Robert L
Sierakowski
Issac M. Daniel
Ori Ishai
Hyer M W
Title of the Book

Composite Materials
Science and Engineering
Composite materials:
Science and Application
The Behavior of Structures
Composed of Composite
Materials
Engineering Mechanics of
Composite Materials
Stress Analysis of Fiber
Reinforced Composite
Materials
83
Publisher
Springer India,
New Delhi
Springer India, New
Delhi
Kluwer Academic
Publishers USA
2nd Edition
Oxford
University
McGraw- HillMunish
Year of
Publication
2006
2006
2002
2007
1998
WEB URLs:
1. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/101104010/
2. http://acm-usa.com/ceramic-cutting-tools/
3. http://southalabama.edu/engineering/mechanical/faculty/gou/Teaching/ME582/ME%20582%20F06%2
0-%20Chapter%201%20Introduction.pdf
4. http://www.cantab.net/users/bryanharris/Engineering%20Composites.pdf
5. http://www.egr.unlv.edu/~bj/Ent_engineering/Materials%20For%20Entertainment%20Engineering.pdf
12M006
RENEWABLE ENERGY SOURCES AND ENERGY MANAGEMENT

3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the energy scenario in India and world energy resources.
To provide knowledge on energy production from solar plants and wind mills.
To learn the techniques of bio gas production and geo thermal energy conservations.
To study the operating principles of thermoelectric and magneto hydro dynamic power plants.
To enlighten the basic knowledge on energy management.
OUTCOMES:
have the statistical knowledge on the total energy production.
design and analyze the performance of various solar collectors and wind turbine blades.
know the utilization techniques of bio energy and geo thermal energy.
possess the knowledge about the working principle of direct energy conversion methods.
conduct energy audit.
UNIT I
ENERGY AND ENVIRONMENT
7
Primary energy sources World energy resources Indian energy scenario Energy cycle of the earth
Environmental aspects of energy utilization CO2 emissions and global warming Renewable energy
resources and their importance Potential impacts of harnessing the different renewable energy resources.
UNIT II
SOLAR AND WIND ENERGY
10
Principles of solar energy collection Solar radiation Measurements Instruments Types of collectors
Characteristics of different type of collectors Performance of collectors Solar thermal applications
Solar cooling Solar drying Solar ponds Solar tower concept Solar furnace Energy from the wind
General theory of windmills Types of windmills Design aspects of horizontal axis windmills
Applications.
UNIT III
BIO ENERGY, TIDAL AND GEO THERMAL ENERGY
10
Energy from bio mass and bio gas plants Various types Design principles of bio gas plants
Applications Energy from wastes Waste burning power plants Utilization of industrial and municipal
wastes Energy from the agricultural wastes Energy from tides and waves Working principles of tidal
plants and ocean thermal energy conversion plants Power from geothermal energy Principle of working
of geothermal power plants.
UNIT IV
OTHER RENEWABLE ENERGY SOURCES
10
Direct energy conversion (description, principle of working and basic design aspects only) Magneto
hydrodynamic systems (MHD) Thermoelectric generators Thermionic generators Fuel cells Solar
cells Types, EMF generated, power output, losses, efficiency and applications Hydrogen conversion and
storage systems.
UNIT V
ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND ECONOMICS
8
Energy auditing Methodology Analysis Energy accounting Measurements, Energy resource
management Energy management information systems Computerized energy management Energy
economics Discount rate, payback period, internal rate of return, life cycle costing Financing energy
conservation projects.
TOTAL: 45
84
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Rai G D
Non-conventional Energy Sources
Khanna Publishers
2005
2.
Witte L C
Schmidt P S
Brown D R
Industrial Energy Management and

Utilisation
Hemisphere
Publication
Washington
1988
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
1.
Author(s)
Sukhatme S P
Duffie
Beckmann John
Garg H P
Prakash J
Barney L Capehart
Wayne C Turner
William J Kennedy
2.
3.
4.
5.
Turner W C
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Solar Energy
Tata McGraw Hill

2nd edition
2008
Solar Energy Thermal Processes
Wiley
2007
Solar Energy Fundamentals and

Applications
Tata McGraw Hill

2nd Edition
2006
Guide to Energy Management
The Fairmont Press

Inc
2008
Energy Management Hand book
Wiley New York
2006
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.fi.edu/PECO/solar-guide.pdf
http://education.nationalgeographic.com/education/encyclopedia/biomass-energy/?ar_a=1
http://web.iitd.ac.in/~sbasu/seminar/presentation/5Dr.G.SASI.KUMAR.pdf
http://www.energymanagertraining.com
12M007
REFRIGERATION AND AIRCONDITIONING
(Use of Refrigeration and Air-conditioning data Book, Psychrometric chart and Steam Tables are
permitted)
3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the concepts of various refrigeration cycles.
To provide knowledge on refrigerants and functions of refrigeration system components.
To understand the concepts of unconventional refrigeration systems.
To learn the importance of psychrometry and its applications.
To study the operating principle of air conditioning systems and its components.
OUTCOMES:
have the knowledge on the working of various refrigeration cycles.
choose the right refrigerants for the different applications.
select the unconventional refrigerant system for the food storage application.
know the psychrometric properties of air and its importance.
select the appropriate air conditioning systems for industrial and domestic applications.
85
UNIT I
REFRIGERATION CYCLE
7
Review of thermodynamic principles of refrigeration Carnot refrigeration cycle Vapour compression
refrigeration cycle Use of PH charts Multistage and multiple evaporator systems Cascade system
COP comparison Air refrigeration cycles.
UNIT II
REFRIGERANTS AND SYSTEM COMPONENTS
10
Compressors Reciprocating and rotary (elementary treatment only) Types of condensers Evaporators
Cooling towers Functional aspects Refrigerants Properties Selection of refrigerants Alternate
Refrigerants Cycling controls.
UNIT III
UNCONVENTIONAL REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS
9
Vapor Absorption system Ejector jet Steam jet refrigeration Thermo electric refrigeration
Applications Ice plant Food storage plants Milk chilling plants.
UNIT IV
PSYCHROMETRY
10
Psychrometric processes Use of psychrometric charts Grand and room sensible heat factors Bypass
factor Air washers Requirements of comfort air conditioning Summer and winter air conditioning.
UNIT V
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS
9
Cooling load calculation Working principles of centralized air conditioning systems, split, ductable split,
packaged air conditioning, VAV and VRV systems Duct Design by equal friction method Indoor Air
quality concepts.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No
Author(s)
1.
Arora S C
Domkundwar S
2.
Arora C P
Title of the Book

Refrigeration and Air
Conditioning
Conditioning
Publisher
Dhanpat Rai
Publication
Tata McGraw - Hill,
New Delhi
Year of
publication
2009
1983
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No
1.
Author(s)
Sapali S N
Title of the Book

Conditioning
Conditioning
Publisher
PHI Learning Private
Ltd.
Tata McGraw - Hill,
New Delhi
Prentice Hall of
India PVT Ltd., New
Delhi
Year of
publication
2009
2.
Stocker W F
Jones J W
3.
Jordon Prister

Conditioning
4.
Roy J Dossat
Principles of Refrigeration
Pearson Education
2009
5.
Ahmadul Ameen

Conditioning

Pvt. Ltd.
2010
2009
2009
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
https://www.swtc.edu/ag_power/air_conditioning/.../basic_cycle.htm
http://www.danfoss.com/nr/rdonlyres/f35695fe-f4a2-40b9-847f-e81e20a5eea8/0/pf000f202.pdf
http://www.itiomar.it/pubblica/dispense/MECHANICAL%20ENGINEERING%20HANDBOOK/
Ch09.pdf
http://www.cengagebrain.co.nz/content/9781285280806.pdf
http://www.sidbi.com/sites/default/files/tenders/sidbij%20boq%20%2021%20ac.pdf
86
12M008
COMPUTATIONAL FLUID DYNAMICS

3
OBJECTIVES:
To learn the introductory concepts in computational fluid dynamics.
To learn to discretize and find solutions for various engineering problems.
To learn to solve heat conduction problems using finite difference method.
To understand the concept of finite volume formulation convection and diffusion.
To learn to develop continuity equations for different types of fluid flow.
OUTCOMES:
identify, solve engineering problems by computational fluid dynamics.
discretize and provide solutions for various engineering problems..
solve the heat conduction problems using finite difference method.
analyze and provide solutions for convection and diffusion problems.
develop continuity equations for different types of fluid flow.
UNIT I
GOVERNING EQUATIONS AND BOUNDARY CONDITIONS
9
Basics of computational fluid dynamics Governing equations of fluid dynamics Continuity, momentum
and energy equations Chemical species transport Physical boundary conditions Time averaged
equations for turbulent flow Turbulence kinetic energy equations Mathematical behavior of PDEs on
CFD Elliptic, Parabolic and Hyperbolic equations.
UNIT II
DISCRETIZATION AND SOLUTION METHODOLOGIES
9
Methods of deriving the discretization equations Taylor series formulation Finite difference method
Control volume formulation Spectral method Solution methodologies Direct and iterative methods,
Thomas algorithm Relaxation method Alternating direction implicit method.
UNIT III
HEAT CONDUCTION
9
Finite difference and finite volume formulation of steady/transient one dimensional conduction equation
Source term linearization Incorporating boundary conditions Finite volume formulations for two and
three dimensional conduction problems.
UNIT IV
CONVECTION AND DIFFUSION
9
Finite volume formulation of steady one dimensional convection and diffusion problems Central, upwind,
hybrid and power law schemes Discretization equations for two dimensional convection and diffusion.
UNIT V
CALCULATION OF FLOW FIELD
9
Representation of the pressure gradient term and continuity equation Staggered grid Momentum
equations Pressure and velocity corrections Pressure correction equation Simple algorithm and its
variants Turbulence models Mixing length model and two equation (k-) models.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
Muralidhar K
Biswas
Fluid Mechanics
2.
Versteeg H K
Malalasekera W
An Introduction to
Computational Fluid
Dynamics: The Finite Volume
Method
87
Publisher
Narosa Publication
House,New Delhi,
2nd Edition
Tata McGraw Hill
Publication
Company Ltd ,6th
Edition
Year of
Publication
2005
2003
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Tata McGraw Hill
New Delhi
Narosa Publication
House New Delhi
Nineth Edition
Narosa Publication
House New Delhi
Year of
Publication
2004
1.
Patankar S V
Numerical Heat Transfer and

Fluid Flow
2.
Muralidhar K
Sundarajan T
Computational Fluid Flow

and Heat Transfer
3.
Bose T K
Numerical Fluid Dynamics
4.
Prodip Niyogi
Chakrabarty S K
Laha M K
Introduction to Computational
Fluid Dynamics
Pearson Education
2005
5.
Ghoshdastidar P S
Computer Simulation of Flow

and Heat Transfer
Tata Mcgraw Hill

Publishers
1998
2004
2001
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.bakker.org/dartmouth06/engs150/01-intro.pdf
http://nptel.ac.in/downloads/112104030/
http://www.leka.lt/sites/default/files/dokumentai/computational-fluid-dynamics.pdf
http://www.mathematik.uni-dortmund.de/~kuzmin/cfdintro/lecture1.pdf
http://mussl.mie.utoronto.ca/cfd20.pdf
12M009
INDUSTRIAL MANAGEMENT AND SAFETY ENGINEERING

3
OBJECTIVES:
To learn the concepts and strategies in organization and management.
To learn the objectives, functions and principles of industrial management.
To learn the objectives, components of production planning and control.
To learn the importance of safety management.
To understand various operational safety related activities in industry.
OUTCOMES:
identify the organization and management strategies.
implement the principles of management techniques in industry.
control continuously changing industrial situations.
evaluate the safety management techniques in industry.
ensure operational safety procedures in industrial establishments.
UNIT I
OVERVIEW OF MANAGEMENT
9
Organization and management Role of manager Evolution of management thought organization and
the environmental factors Managing globally Strategies for international business.
UNIT II
INDUSTRIAL MANAGEMENT
9
Nature of management and its process Contribution of Taylor and Fayol to management Functions and
principles of management Types of organizations Management by objectives Management by
exception and management information systems.
UNIT III
PRODUCTION PLANNING AND CONTROL
9
Introduction Objectives Components of PPC Manufacturing systems Forecasting Product planning
Loading and scheduling Dispatching Production control Case studies.
88
UNIT IV
SAFETY MANAGEMENT
9
Evaluation of modern safety concepts Safety management functions Safety organization Safety
department Safety committee Safety audit Performance measurements and motivation Employee
participation in safety Safety and productivity.
UNIT V
OPERATIONAL SAFETY
9
Hot metal Operation Boiler, pressure vessels Heat treatment shop Gas furnace operation
electroplating Hot bending pipes Safety in welding and cutting Cold-metal Operation Safety in
Machine shop Cold bending and chamfering of pipes Metal cutting Shot blasting, grinding, painting
Power press and other machines.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Stephen P Robbins
Mary Coulter
Management

Eighth edition.
2004
2.
Krishnan N V
Safety Management in
Industry
Jaico Publishing House,

Bombay
1997
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Elwood S Buffa
Modern Production/
Operations Management
Wiley Eastern
2009
2.
Frank R. Spellman
Nancy E. Whiting
Safety Engineering:
principles and practices
Technomic Publishing
Company
2004
3.
Banga T R
Sharma S C
Agarwal N K
Industrial Engineering and

Management Science
Khanna Publishers,
New Delhi
2007
4.
Jain KC
Agarwal L N
Khanna Publishers ,
New Delhi
2002
5.
Sanjoy Banerjee
Taylor and Francis Books,

Inc.
2003
Production Planning and

Control and Industrial
Management
Industrial Hazards and
Plant Safety
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
http://www.du.ac.in/coursematerial/ba/esb/Lesson_7.pdf
http://www.studymode.com/essays/Difference-Between-Frederick-Taylor-And-Henri725407.html
3. http://www.tue.nl/en/education/tue-bachelor-college/undergraduate-programs/industrialengineering-and-management-sciences/
4. http://www.igi-global.com/journal/international-journal-service-science-management/1132
5. https://www.dli.mn.gov/ccld/PDF/guide2saferboiler.pdf
12M010
SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT

3
OBJECTIVES:
To learn the concepts of supply chain management.
To understand the approaches and techniques that constitutes the basis of logistics.
89
To learn about the supply chain models.

To learn about the various methods in sourcing and pricing in supply chain management.
To develop the knowledge on information technology in supply chain management.
OUTCOMES:
acquire knowledge on supply chain management.
use the techniques, skills, in logistics and supply chain management.
develop models for redesign in supply chain management.
select the right source for managing the supply.
leverage the right system of information in supply chain management.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Definition of logistics Concepts Definitions Approaches Factors affecting logistics Evolution
Scope Importance and decision phases Drivers of SC performance and obstacles in supply chain
Basic tasks of supply chain The new corporate model.
UNIT II
LOGISTICS AND SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT
9
Factors Modes of transportation Design options for transportation networks Routing and scheduling
Inbound and outbound logistics Reverse logistics 3PL Integrated logistics model Activities
Measuring logistics cost and performance Warehouse management The new paradigm The modular
company The network relations Supply chain procurement process Distribution management Case
analysis.
UNIT III
EVOLUTION OF SUPPLY CHAIN MODELS
9
Distribution in supply chain Factors in distribution network design Design options Network design in
supply chain Framework for network decisions Managing cycle inventory and safety Strategy and
structure Factors of supply chain Manufacturing strategy stages Supply chain progress Model for
competing through supply chain management PLC grid Supply chain redesign Linking supply chain
with customer.
UNIT IV
SOURCING AND PRICING IN A SUPPLY CHAIN
9
Cross functional drivers Role of sourcing in a supply chain Logistics providers Procurement process
Supplier selection Design collaboration Role of pricing and revenue management in a supply chain.
UNIT V
INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY AND COORDINATION IN A SUPPLY CHAIN

9
The role of IT in supply chain The supply chain IT frame work Customer relationship management
Supplier relationship management Future of IT in supply chain E-Business in supply chain Bullwhip
effect Effect of lack of co-ordination in supply chain Building strategic partnerships CPFR.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the book
Publisher
Year of
publication
Sunil Chopra
Peter Meindl
Supply Chain Management Strategy

Planning and operation
PHI, 5th Edition
2012
Schary P B
Larsen T S
Managing the Global Supply Chain
Copenhagen
Business School
Press, 3rd edition
2007
90
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the book
Publisher
Year of
publication
Jeremy F Shapiro
Modelling the Supply Chain
Cengage Learning;
2nd edition
2006
Simchi Levi D
Kaminsky P
SimchiLevi E
Designing and Managing the

Supply Chain
McGraw Hill
3rd Edition
2008
James Ayers JB
Handbook of Supply Chain

Management
Auerbach
Publications
New York
2006
John T Mentzer
SAGE Publications
2001
John Joseph Coyle C

John Langley
Brian J Gibson
Robert A Novack
Edward J Bardi
Supply Chain Management:

A Logistics Perspective
Cengage Learning,
9th edition
2013
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://highered.mcgraw-hill.com/sites/dl/free/007298239x/450202/Chapter_1.pdf
http://www.unidoicamt.org/Resources/SDP_Past_Programs/File4/50_File4_Annex_2.4-SCM.pdf
http://www.adi.pt/docs/innoregio_supp_management.pdf
http://deliver.jsi.com/dlvr_content/resources/allpubs/guidelines/LogiHand.pdf
http://www.zums.ac.ir/files/research/site/ebooks/management-organisation/fundamentals-of-supplychain-management.pdf
12M011
LEAN AND AGILE MANUFACTURING

3
OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge on lean and agile manufacturing principles.
To learn the concepts of value stream management.
To learn the concepts of agile and supply chain management
To learn Capacity planning and Set up time reduction approaches
To learn the skills and knowledge to benchmark and identify lean metrics
OUTCOMES:
gain knowledge on significance of quality works to manage modern organizations.
plan and manage organizational performance using value stream management.
manage the manufacturing system to achieve quality and sustainability.
analyze the set up time reduction approaches for successful product development.
use the tools in lean manufacturing to enhancing technology for machine tool system
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO LEAN AND AGILE MANUFACTURING
9
Conventional manufacturing versus Lean manufacturing Principles of lean manufacturing Basic
elements of lean manufacturing Introduction to LM Tools Agile manufacturing Definition Business
need Conceptual frame work Characteristics and generic features Developing agile manufacturing
enterprise Strategies Integration of organization Workforce and technology Reference models
Examples.
91
UNIT II
DESIGN VALUE STREAM MANAGEMENT
9
Definition VSM Types Product family selection Value stream manager Current state map Process
box. Value stream icons Three Ms Muda, mura, muri Seven types of muda Future State Map
value stream plan. Process stability Loss reduction Seven major losses reduction Demand stage
Market dynamics Customer demand PQ analysis PR analysis TAKT time Pitch Finished goods
Stock Cycle stock Buffer stock Safety stock.
UNIT III
CONCEPTS IN AGILE AND SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT
9
Applications strategies Management of complexities and information Flow Approaches
Applications of multimedia to improve agility in manufacturing System concepts Principles IT/IS
concepts in supply chain management Enterprise integration and management in agile manufacturing
Concepts Agility Adaptability and learners Comparison of concepts.
9
UNIT IV
CAPP AND SET UP TIME REDUCTION/TQM/5S/VSM
Aggregate Capacity planning and production line design Redesign in agile manufacturing Cellular
manufacturing Concepts Examples Set up time reduction Definition, philosophies and reduction
approaches. TQM Principles and implementation 5S Principles and implementation Value stream
mapping Procedure and principles.
UNIT V
LEAN METRICS AND LEAN SUSTENANCE / SKILL AND KNOWLEDGE
9
Identify lean metrics Steps involved in goal Setting Corporate goals Kaizen cloud identification in
VSM Lean assessment Cultural change Reviews Recognition Improving targets and Benchmarks
Enhancing technology for machine tool system Resumption of design requirement geometry
Definition, methods Decision support for selection of cutting parameters Design enhancements
Parametric Approach only.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No
1.
2.
Author(s)
Idris Zehrudin
Muhammed
Devadasan S R
Sivakumar V
Mohan Murugesh R
Shalij P R
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Lean And Agile Manufacturing

Systems
VDM Verlag
2009

Theoretical
Practical and Research Futurities
PHI Learning Pvt

Ltd
2012
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Lean Manufacturing: Perspectives

and Applications (Operations
Management Series)
ICFAI University
Press
2008
Implementing Lean Manufacturing:

An Operations Managers Guide
Industrial Press
Inc., U.S.
2009
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No
1.
2.
Author(s)
Aruna Desai
John W. Davis
Title of the Book
3.
Gunasekaran A
Agile Manufacturing - The 21st

Century Competitive Strategy
Elsevier
2001
4.
Goranson H T
The Agile Virtual Enterprise

Cases Metrics Tools
Green
Wood
Publishing Group
1999
How to Implement Lean

Manufacturing
McGraw-Hill
Professional
2009
5.
Lonnie Wilson
92
WEB URLs:
1. http://smallbusiness.chron.com/similarities-between-lean-agile-manufacturing-70619.html.
2. http://www.processexcellencenetwork.com/lean-six-sigma-business-transformation/articles/usinglean-in-agile-software-devel.
3. http://www.ebay.com/ctg/Transition Agile Manufacturing Staying Flexible Competitive
Advantage
4. http://www.csiro.au/en/Organisation Structure/Flagships/Future Manufacturing
Flagship/Agile Manufacturing.aspx
5. http://www.tusofia.bg/faculties/mf/adp/nntk_files/konf09/Materials/NAPRAVLENIE_8/2_N.Andr
eeva.pdf
12M012
ENTREPRENEURSHIP DEVELOPMENT
3
OBJECTIVES:
To impart the basic understanding of the concept of entrepreneurship and to recognize its impact
in economic growth.
To learn stress management and to motivate entrepreneurial instinct.
To impart basic managerial skills and understandings to run business efficiently and effectively.
To provide the skill for studying the financial needs and to avail them for the systematic
management.
To create an awareness of various supports and alternatives provided for entrepreneurs.
OUTCOMES:
attain entrepreneurial attitude, behaviors and skills.
get motivated toward an entrepreneurial career.
undertake effective and systematic management of projects.
avail finance from various sources for the smooth functioning of business.
make use of supports provided to entrepreneurs.
UNIT I
ENTREPRENEURSHIP
9
Entrepreneur Types of entrepreneurs Difference between entrepreneur and intrapreneur
Entrepreneurship in economic growth Factors affecting entrepreneurial growth Introduction to EDP.
UNIT II
MOTIVATION
9
Major motives influencing an entrepreneur Achievement motivation training Self-rating Business
game Thematic apperception test Stress management Entrepreneurship development programs Need
Objectives.
UNIT III
BUSINESS
9
Small enterprises Definition classification Characteristics Ownership structures Project
formulation Steps involved in setting up a business Identifying and selecting a good business
opportunity Market survey and research Techno economic feasibility assessment Preparation of
preliminary project reports Project appraisal Sources of information Classification of needs and
agencies.
UNIT IV
FINANCING AND ACCOUNTING
9
Need Sources of finance Term loans Capital structure Financial institution Management of
working capital Costing Break even analysis Network analysis techniques of PERT/CPM Taxation
Income tax Excise duty Sales tax Performance ratio.
UNIT V
SUPPORT TO ENTREPRENEURS
9
Sickness in small business Concept Magnitude Causes and consequences Corrective measures
Government policy for small scale enterprises Growth strategies in small industry Expansion
Diversification Joint venture Merger and sub contracting Patent rights Intellectual property rights.
TOTAL: 45
93
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
Khanka S S
Entrepreneurial Development
2.
Hisrich R D
Peters M P
Entrepreneurship
Year of
Publication
Publisher
S Chand and Co Ltd.,
New Delhi
Tata McGraw Hill,
8th Edition
2012
2008
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
2000
1.
Rabindra N
Kanungo
Entrepreneurship and
Innovation
SAGE Publications Pvt.

Ltd., New Delhi
2.
EDII Faulty
External Experts
3.
Anil Kumar S
Entrepreneurship
Development
Entrepreneurship
Development
4.
Robert D Hisrich
Entrepreneurship
5.
Prasain G P (Ed.)
Entrepreneurship
Institute of India
Ahmadabad
New Age
International
Tata McGraw Hill
Education
Akansha Publishing
House
Development
2001
2008
2011
2003
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.accelteam.com/motivation/
http://www.quickmba.com/entre/
http://www.business.com/
http://elearning.vtu.ac.in/P6/enotes/MBA21/Net_Ana-KR.pdf
http://www.1000ventures.com/business_guide/im_diversification_strategies.html
12M013

3
OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge on basics of reliability and maintenance concepts.
To learn the basic of maintenance models and its types.
To understand the concept of total productive maintenance.
To get an exposure to maintenance logistics.
To learn the basics of monitoring techniques.
OUTCOMES:
select the suitable materials and maintenance techniques.
select the suitable maintenance type.
maximize the equipment effectiveness using total productive maintenance principle.
plan and schedule maintenance using logistics.
gain the knowledge of different monitoring techniques.
UNIT I
MAINTENANCE CONCEPTS
9
Objectives and functions Tero technology Reliability centered maintenance (RCM) Maintainability
prediction Availability and system effectiveness Maintenance costs Maintenance organization.
94
UNIT II
MAINTENANCE MODELS
9
Minimal repair Maintenance types Balancing PM and breakdown maintenance PM schedules
Deviations on both sides of target values PM schedules Functional characteristics Replacement
models.
UNIT III
9
Zero breakdowns Zero defects and TPM Maximizing equipment effectiveness Autonomous
maintenance program Five pillars of TPM TPM small group activities TPM organization
Management decision Educational campaign Creation of organizations Establishment of basic
policies and goals Formation of master plan TPM implementation.
UNIT IV
MAINTENANCE LOGISTICS
9
Human factors in maintenance Maintenance manuals Maintenance staffing methods Queuing
applications Simulation Spare parts management Maintenance planning and scheduling.
UNIT V
ONLINE MONITORING
9
Condition monitoring techniques Vibration monitoring, signature analysis Wear debris monitoring
Maintenance management information system Expert systems Corrosion monitoring and control.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Seiichi Nakajima
Introduction to TPM
Productivity Press,
Chennai
1992
Gopalakrishnan P
Banerji A K
Maintenance and Spare Parts

Management
Prentice Hall of
India Pvt. Ltd
1991
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Goto F
Equipment planning for TPM

Maintenance Prevention Design
Productivity Press,
Chennai
1992
Shirose K
Total Productive Maintenance for

Workshop Leaders
Productivity Press,
Chennai
1992
Shirose K
TPM for Operators
Productivity Press,
Chennai
1996
Suzuki T
New Directions for TPM
Productivity Press,
Chennai
1993
Kelly A
Maintenance Planning and Control
Butterworth, London
1991
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.leanproduction.com/tpm.html
http://productivity.tn.nic.in/knowledgebase/TP%20Maintenance/a.%20Total%20Productive%20M
aintenance.pdf
http://www.tvss.net/pm/tpm.htm
http://www.process-improvement-japan.com/total-productive-maintenance.html
http://www.ame.org/sites/default/files/TPM-introduction-AME.pdf
95
12M014
AUTOMOTIVE INDUSTRY AND ITS SYSTEMS

3
OBJECTIVES:
To study about various types of iron and steels used in automobile industry.
To understand the various types of non-ferrous alloy materials and its applications.
To gain knowledge on composite materials used in automotive industry.
To study about polymers and its processing techniques.
To understand the concept of powdered metallurgy.
OUTCOMES:
possess the knowledge about various types of materials used in automobile industry.
select the best suited non-ferrous alloy materials based on its applications.
familiarize with composite materials used in automotive industry.
select polymers for various automotive applications.
use the knowledge of powder metallurgy for processing and forming of ceramics components.
UNIT I
IRON AND STEELS FOR AUTOMOTIVE APPLICATIONS
9
Cast iron Austempered ductile iron Compacted graphite iron Steels Plain carbon steels Low
alloy steels HSLA steels IF steels Bake hardening steels TRIP steels Ultra high strength steels
Stainless steels Production, properties and applications in automobiles.
UNIT II
NON-FERROUS ALLOYS FOR AUTOMOTIVE APPLICATIONS
9
Aluminum alloys Cast alloys Wrought alloys Age hardenable alloys Working and heat treatment,
applications in automobiles Magnesium alloys Cast and Wrought alloys Working and heat
treatment, applications in automobiles - Titanium alloys Applications in automobiles - Selection of
Non-Ferrous metals.
UNIT III
COMPOSITE MATERIALS
9
Production of composite materials and products Moulding and forming of composites Machining and
joining of composites Application of composites in automobiles Metal matrix composites, polymer
matrix composites and ceramic matrix composites Applications in automotive industry.
UNIT IV
POLYMERS
9
Processing of polymers Brief description of equipment and process details of extrusion Injection
moulding Thermoforming Blow moulding Concept of polymer design Selection criteria for
automotive applications.
UNIT V
POWDER METALLURGY
9
Automotive applications of powder metallurgical products Ceramics for automotive applications
Preparation and forming of ceramics Applications.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
1.
Jason Rowe
2.
Geoff Davies
Title of the Book

Advanced materials in
Automotive
Materials for automobile
bodies
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Wood head Publishing
2012
Elsevier Ltd.
2012
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No
Author(s)
Brain Cantor
Patrick Grant Colin
Johnston
Title of the Book

(lightweight, functional and
novel materials)
96
Publisher
Taylor and
Francis
Group
Year of
Publication
2007
Handbook of Plastics, Elastomers

and Composites
Selection of Materials,
Vol. 1 and 2
McGraw Hill,
USA
ASM Metals
Park, USA
Balram Gupta
Aerospace Materials Vol. 1,2

and 3
Chand and Co.,

New Delhi
Akira Okada
Innovative Materials for

Automotive Industry
Nova Science
Publishers
Charles A Harper
ASM Handbook
4
5
2004
2000
2007
2010
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.autosteel.org
http://www.nptel.iitm.ac.in/courses/Webcourse-contents/IISc.../MLN_09.pdf
http://www.technicalsymposium.com/alllecturenotes_auto.html
http://www.forum.jntuworld.com/showthread.php18011-theory-and-design-of-automotiveengines-notes
http://www.materialsdesign.com/appnote/automotive
12M015
INDUSTRIAL ROBOTICS
3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the basic concepts associated with the design, functioning and applications of robot.
To study about the drives and end effectors used in robot.
To study about the various types sensors used in robot.
To learn about analyzing robot kinematics and robot programming
To learn safety steps to handle the robot.
OUTCOMES:
identify the various types of robots.
select appropriate drive systems and end effector.
select the various types of sensors according to the applications of robot.
use the various types of programming languages.
analyze the economics of robots.
UNIT I
FUNDAMENTALS OF ROBOT
9
Robot Definition Robot anatomy Co-ordinate systems Work envelope Types and classification
Specifications Pitch, yaw, roll, joint notations, speed of motion, pay load Robot parts and their
functions Need for robots Different applications.
UNIT II
ROBOT DRIVE SYSTEMS AND END EFFECTORS
9
Pneumatic drives Hydraulic drives Mechanical drives Electrical drives DC and AC servo motors,
stepper motor Salient features, applications and comparison of all these drives End effectors Grippers
Mechanical grippers, pneumatic and hydraulic grippers, magnetic grippers, vacuum grippers, two
fingered and three fingered grippers, internal grippers and external grippers Selection and design
considerations.
UNIT III
SENSORS AND MACHINE VISION
9
Requirements of a sensor Principles and applications of the following types of sensors Position of
sensors (piezo electric sensor, LVDT, resolvers, optical encoders, pneumatic position sensors) Range
sensors (triangulation principle, structured, lighting approach, time of flight range finders, laser range
meters) Proximity sensors (inductive, hall effect, capacitive, ultrasonic and optical proximity sensors)
touch sensors (binary sensors, analog sensors) Wrist sensors Slip sensors camera Frame grabber
Sensing and digitizing image data Signal conversion Image storage Lighting techniques Image
processing and analysis Data reduction Segmentation Feature extraction Object recognition.
97
UNIT IV
ROBOT KINEMATICS AND ROBOT PROGRAMMING
9
Forward Kinematics, inverse kinematics and differences Forward kinematics and reverse kinematics of
manipulators with two, three degrees of freedom (in 2 dimensional), four degrees of freedom (in 3
dimensional) DH matrices Deviations and problems Teach pendant programming Lead through
programming Robot programming Languages VAL programming Motion commands Sensor
commands End effecter commands and simple programs.
UNIT V
IMPLEMENTATION AND ROBOT ECONOMICS
9
RGV AGV Implementation of robots in industries Various steps Safety considerations for robot
operations Economic analysis of robots Pay back method, EUAC method, rate of return method.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publications
1.
Mikell P Groover
Industrial Robotics :
Technology Programming and
Applications
Tata McGraw
Hill
2012
2.
Mark W Spong
Seth Hutchinson
Robot Modeling and Control
Wiley India
Pvt Ltd
2006
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publications
1.
Yoram Koren
Robotics for Engineers
McGraw Hill
1992
2.
Janakiraman P A
Robotics and Image Processing
Tata McGraw
Hill
2002
3.
Fu K S
Gonzalz R C
Lee C S G
Robotics Control Sensing

Vision and Intelligence
McGraw Hill
2005
4.
Saha S K
Introduction to Robotics
Tata McGraw
Hill
2008
5.
Harry Colestock
Industrial Robotics
McGraw-Hill
2005
WEB URLS:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.engineershandbook.com/Components/robots.htm
http://www.kukarobotics.com/en/products/software/educational_framework/arm_tutorials/PS_Con
tent_Arm2.htm
http://www.robots.com/robots.php
http://www.industrialrobotix.com/
http://www.robotics.utexas.edu/rrg/learn_more/low_ed/types/industrial.html
12M016
AIRCRAFT INDUSTRY AND ITS SYSTEMS

3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the history of flight and the current trends in the aircraft industry.
To understand the various types of aircrafts according to its design and configuration.
To gain knowledge on the various systems in an aircraft.
To study about the basic principles involved in flight.
To understand the concepts involved in basic flight mechanics.
98
OUTCOMES:
identify the basic steps involved in construction of an aircraft.
identify the various types of aircrafts based on its design and configuration.
posses the knowledge of various types of aircraft systems.
gain the knowledge of basics principles of flight based on aerodynamics.
familiarize with basics of flight mechanics.
UNIT I
AIRCRAFT INDUSTRY OVERVIEW
9
Evolution and history of flight Types of aerospace industry Key players in aerospace industry
Aerospace manufacturing Industry supply chain Prime contractors Tier 1 suppliers Key challenges
in Industry supply chain OEM supply chain strategies Mergers and acquisitions Aerospace industry
trends Advances in engineering/CAD/CAM/CAE tools and materials technology Global and Indian
aircraft scenario.
UNIT II
INTRODUCTION TO AIRCRAFTS
9
Basic components of an aircraft Structural members Aircraft axis system Aircraft motions Control
surfaces and high lift devices Types of aircrafts Lighter than air/heavier than air Aircrafts
conventional design configurations based on power plant location Wing vertical location Intake
location Tail unit arrangements Landing gear arrangements Unconventional configurations Biplane,
Variable sweep, Canard layout, Twin boom layouts, Span loaders, Blended body wing layout, STOL,
STOVL aircraft and Stealth aircraft Advantages and disadvantages of these configurations.
UNIT III
INTRODUCTION TO AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
9
Types of aircraft systems Mechanical systems, electrical and electronic systems Auxiliary systems
Mechanical Systems Environmental control systems (ECS) Pneumatic systems Hydraulic systems
Fuel systems Landing gear systems Engine control systems Cabin pressurization and air conditioning
systems Steering and brakes systems auxiliary power unit Electrical systems: Avionics Flight controls
Autopilot and flight management systems Radar system.
UNIT IV
BASIC PRINCIPLES OF FLIGHT
9
Significance of speed of sound Air speed and ground speed Properties of atmosphere Bernoullis
equation Forces on the airplane Airflow over wing section Pressure distribution over a wing section
Generation of lift Drag Pitching moments Types of drag Lift curve Drag curve Lift/drag ratio
curve Factors affecting lift and drag Center of pressure and its effects Aerofoil nomenclature Types
of aerofoil Wing section Aerodynamic center Aspect ratio Effects of lift, Drag, Speed, Air density
on drag.
UNIT V
BASICS OF FLIGHT MECHANICS
9
Mach waves Mach angles Sonic and supersonic flight and its effects stability and control Degree of
Stability Lateral Longitudinal and directional stability and controls of aircraft Effects of flaps and
slats on lift coefficients Control tabs Stalling Landing Gliding, Turning Aircraft Performance and
Maneuvers Power curves Maximum and minimum speeds of horizontal flight Effects of changes of
engine power Effects of altitude on power curves Forces acting on an aeroplane during a turn Loads
during a turn
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Book name
Publisher
1.
Kermode A C
Flight without
Formulae
2.
Kermode A C
Mechanics of Flight
99
Pearson Education
Fifth Edition
Pearson Education
Tenth Edition
Year of
Publication
2004
2007
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Book name
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Shevell S
Fundamentals of Flight
Pearson Education
2nd Edition
2007
2.
John David
Anderson
Introduction to Flight
McGraw Hill Higher

Education, 5th Edition
2004
3.
Ian Moir and

Allan Seabridge
John Wiley and Sons
2008
4.
Warren F Phillips
John Wiley and Sons
2012
5.
Barnard R H
Philpott D R
Prentice Hall
2010
Aircraft Systems
Mechanical Electrical
and Avionics
Subsystems Integration
Mechanics of flight
Aircraft Flight: A
Description of the
Physical Principles of
Aircraft Flight
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.thaitechnics.com/fly/history.html
http://thetravelinsider.info/airplanetypes.htm
http://aviators.hubpages.com/hub/Aircraft-wings-Wing-platforms-and-configurations
http://www.thaitechnics.com/fly/principle.html
http://www.grc.nasa.gov/WWW/k-12/UEET/StudentSite/dynamicsofflight.html
12M017
MICRO ELECTRO MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND NANOTECHONOLGY

3
OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge on basics of MEMS and nano materials.
To learn the basic of mechanical sensor packing.
To understand the mechanical transduction techniques.
To get an exposure to nano sensors of MEMS.
To learn the basics of nano materials application.

OUTCOMES:
select the suitable nanomaterials and manufacturing techniques.
select the suitable mechanical sensor packing.
identify the materials based on its application.
select the suitable nano sensor based on its application.
identify the desired products in nanotechnology.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO MEMS AND NANOTECHONOLGY
9
Introduction Materials Substrates Additive material Deposition Lithography Etching Surface
micro machining Printing and electroplating Mechanical properties Optical properties and electrical
properties of nano materials Role of size in nano materials Semiconducting nano particles Nano wires
Nano clusters Nano springs Nano rods.
UNIT II
MECHANICAL SENSOR PACKAGING
9
Introduction Standard IC packages Ceramic, plastic and metal packages Packaging process
Electrical interconnects Methods of die attachment Sealing techniques MEMS mechanical sensor
packaging.
100
UNIT III
MECHANICAL TRANSDUCTION TECHNIQUES
9
Piezo resistivity Piezoelectricity Capacitive techniques Optical techniques Resonant techniques and
actuation techniques Smart Sensors MEMS simulation and design tools Behavioral modeling
simulation tools and finite element simulation tools.
UNIT IV
NANO SENSORS
9
Micro and nano sensors Fundamentals of sensors Biosensor Micro fluids Packaging and
characterization of sensors Sensors for aerospace and defence Accelerometer Pressure sensor Night
vision system Nano cutting tools.
UNIT V
INDUSTRY APPLICATIONS
9
Nano materials in consumer markets Electronics Photonics Nano upto MEMS Microarray nano
Bio applications Computing technologies Present and future nano medicine Challenges to
nanotechnology Materials risks Carbon fullerene and CNT waste.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
1.
James J Allen
Micro Electro Mechanical

System Design
CRC Press
Taylor and
Francis Group
2.
Horst Gunter Rubahn
Basics of Nano Technology
Wiley VCH Verlag

Gmbh and Co
Year of
Publication
2005
2008
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Tai Ran Hsu
MEMS Packaging
EMIS Processing
Series 3 INSPEC
2004
2.
Stephen Beeby Graham

Ensell Michael Kraft
Neil White
MEMS Mechanical Sensors
Artech House Inc

Boston
2003
3.
Tai Ran Hsu
McGraw Hill
2002
4.
Chris Binns
John Wiley and

Sons
2010
5.
Charles P Poole Jr
Frank J Owens
Wiley Interscience
2003
MEMS and Microsystems

Design and Manufacture
Introduction to Nano Science
and Nano Technology
Introduction to
Nanotechnology
WEB URLs:
1. http://www.britannica.com/ microelectromechanical system MEMS
2. http://www.memsnet.org/mems/beginner/deposition.html
3. http:// www.memscyclopedia.org/introMEMS.html
4. http://www.nanosensors.com
5..http://www.nanocompositesinc.com
12M018
BUSINESS INTELLIGENCE AND ITS APPLICATIONS

3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the concept of roles and responsibilities of BI.
To learn about database concepts for the generation of report in mining and warehousing.
101
To know the basic need of integration to create the ETL using SSIS.
To study about the idea of ER and multidimensional modeling.
To figure it out the tools for the mechanical applications for BI concepts.
OUTCOMES:
execute the BI roles and responsibilities as per BI concepts.
generate the reports of mining and warehousing.
familiarize the data profiling concepts and applications.
develop the model according to the BI conception.
Facilitate the tools for relevant mechanical lab exercise.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO BUSINESS INTELLIGENCE (BI)
6
Introduction to OLTP and OLAP BI Definitions and Concepts Business applications of BI BI
framework Role of date warehousing in BI BI infrastructure components BI process BI technology
BI roles and responsibilities.
UNIT II
INTRODUCTION TO DATABASE
Introduction to database concepts Data mining Data warehousing and reports generation.
UNIT III
BASICS OF DATA INTEGRATION

(EXTRACTION TRANSFORMATION LOADING)
12
Concepts of data integration need and advantages of using data integration Introduction to common data
integration approaches Introduction to ETL using SSIS Introduction to data profiling concepts and
applications.
UNIT IV
INTRODUCTION TO MULTIDIMENSIONAL DATA MODELING
12
Introduction to data and dimension modeling, multidimensional data model ER modeling vs multidimensional modeling Concepts of dimensions Facts Cubes Attribute Hierarchies Star and
snowflake schema.
UNIT V
BUSINESS INTELLIGENCE APPLICATION AND CASE STUDIES
9
Introduction to business intelligence application Real manufacturing scenario Case studies
term/papers/assignment related to Business Intelligence space Mechanical applications and relevant lab
exercise to get exposure to BI concepts and tools.
TOTAL 45
SOFTWARE REQUIRED FOR PRACTICE:
Course
SI. No
1.
Business Intelligence (BI) And Its

Applications
S/W on students Machine
Remarks
SQL Server along with Business

Intelligence
Version 2008
TEXTBOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
1.
Mike Biere
2.
Cindi
Howson
Title of the Book

Business Intelligence for the
Enterprise
Successful Business Intelligence:
Secrets to making Killer BI
Applications
102
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Pearson Education
2010
Tata McGraw Hill

Companies
2008
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
1.
David Loshin
2.
Larissa
Terpel
uk Moss
Shaku Atre
3.
Brain Larson
4.
Lynn Langit
5.
Stephen Few
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Business Intelligence
Morgan Kaufmann
Publishers
2003
Business Intelligence Roadmap
Addison Wesley
Professional
2003
Tata McGraw Hill
2009
Title of the Book
Delivering Business Intelligence with

Microsoft SQL Server 2008
Foundations of SQL Server 2005
Information Dashboard Design
Dreamtech Press
2007
Nick Schweitzer
2006
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.businessintelligence.com
http://www.microsoft.com/enin/bi/default.aspx
http://www.webopedia.com/Business_Intelligence.html
http://www.oracle.com/us/solutions/businessanalytics/businessintelligence/overview/index.html
http://www.cio.com/article/40296/Business_Intelligence_Definition_and_Solutions
12M019

3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the basic concepts of database management system.
To learn about the Structured Query Language (SQL).
To understand the relational model and relational database management system.
To provide detailed knowledge of transaction, concurrency and recovery strategies of DBMS.
To understand the different normalization techniques.
To know XML concepts in databases.
OUTCOMES:
design and create tables in database.
write SQL queries in effective way.
implement the data model and normalization theory in relational database system design.
write relational algebra expressions for queries.
write transaction processing.
apply XML in database.
UNIT I
9
UNIT II
RELATIONAL MODEL
9
SQL Data definition Queries in SQL Updates Views Integrity and security Relational database
design Functional dependences and normalization for relational databases (up to BCNF).
UNIT III
9
Record storage and primary file organization Secondary storage devices Operations on files Heap file
Sorted files Hashing techniques Index structure for files Different types of indexes B tree B+
tree Query processing.
103
UNIT IV
9
Transaction processing Introduction Need for concurrency control Desirable properties of transaction
Schedule and recoverability Serializability and schedules Concurrency control Types of locks
Two phases locking Deadlock Time stamp based concurrency control Recovery Techniques
Concepts Immediate update Deferred update Shadow paging.
UNIT V
CURRENT TRENDS
9
Types of databases Object oriented databases Need for complex data types Object oriented data
model Nested relations Complex types Inheritance reference types Distributed databases
Homogenous and heterogenous distributed data Storage XML Structure of XML XML document
Schema Querying and transformation Data mining and data warehousing Introduction to business
intelligence.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Henry F Korth
Sudarshan S
Ramez Elmasri
Shamkant B Navathe
1.
2.
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Database System
Concepts
McGraw-Hill,
6th Edition
2011
Fundamental Database
Systems
Pearson Education,
5th Edition
2008
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Raghu Ramakrishnan
Database Management
System
Tata McGraw-Hill
Publishing Company,
3rd Edition
2008
2.
Hector GarciaMolina
Jeffrey D Ullman
Jennifer Widom
Database System
Implementation
Pearson Education,
2nd Edition
2012
3.
Database System Design,

Implementation and
Management
Thompson Learning
Course Technolog,y
10th Edition
2012
Peter Rob
Corlos Coronel
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
http://www.oracle.com
http://www.microsoft.com/sql
http://www.w3schools.com/sql
4. http:// www.ibm.com/software/data/db2
12M020
EMBEDDED SYSTEMS
3
OBJECTIVES:
To learn and know about the embedded system concepts.
To study the architecture of various embedded controllers.
To learn the software programming concepts in embedded system design.
To study and familiarize real time operating system concepts.
To learn and understand embedded system design processes.
104
OUTCOMES:
understand and identify the embedded systems applications.
apply real time operating system concepts in real time applications.
design and optimize embedded system design process for real time applications.
UNIT I
10
modes Operating modes with ARM core ARM7 TDMI modes ADC Timers Interrupt structure
Byte ordering (LE, BE) Thumb mode normal mode instruction changes Pipeline utilization with all
register allocations Floating to fixed point conversion fundamentals System design with ARM as key
processor DSP features of ARM Core Digital Signal Controllers DSC differences with conventional
micro controllers.
UNIT II
8
Interrupts: Various C ISR declaration syntaxes Interrupt Vectors Priorities and Nesting Tick Timer
Interrupt as heart-beat of embedded system 7-Seg LED Segment-LCD Alphanumeric LCD Graphic
LCD displays Communications and Networks: RS485 (2 and 3 wire) and Modbus Protocol (Intro only)
Ethernet and TCPIP Stack (Features and Usage only) CAN features and protocol.
UNIT III
10
Assembly Language and High Level Language C programming C program elements: Header and Source
files and Preprocessor directives Program elements: Macros and Functions Program elements: Data
types Data structures Modifiers Statements Loops and Pointers Queues Stacks Lists and
Ordered lists Embedded programming in C++ C program compiler and Cross compiler Source code
engineering tools for embedded C/C++ Optimization of memory needs.
UNIT IV
REAL TIME CONCEPTS
10
Real time operating system Required RTOS services/capabilities (in contrast with traditional OS) Real
world issues: Blocking Unpredictability Interrupts Caching Benefits of using RTOS: Concepts of
Tasks/Threads/Process Multitasking Task Scheduling Task management Inter-task communication
and Synchronization Device Drivers How to choose an RTOS.
UNIT V
7
Program modelling tools Testing and Debugging methodologies Applications of Embedded Systems:
case studies Consumer and Home Industrial and Automation Medical Robotics Access Control
Systems (Smart cards, RFIDs, Finger Scan).
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Rajkamal
Embedded Systems
and Design
Tata McGraw Hill,

Second edition
2008
2.
Shibu K V
Introduction to Embedded
Systems
Tata Mc Graw Hill
2009
105
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
1.
Sriram V Iyer
Pankaj Gupta
2.
Frank Vahid
3.
Peter Marwedel
Title of the Book

Embedded Realtime
Systems Programming
Embedded System design A unified hardware/software
introduction
Embedded system design
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Tata McGraw Hill,

1st edition
2008

3rd edition
2009
Springer, 2nd edition
2010
WEB URLs:
New_index1.html.
2. http://www.onlinevideolecture.com/electrical-engineering/nptel-iit-delhi/embeddedsystems/?course_id=519
3. http://www.engineersgarage.com/articles/rtos-real-time-operating-system.
4. http://www.cs.mcgill.ca/~adenau/teaching/cs573/Other_Arch.pdf
5. http://www.rfidjournal.com/site/faqs
106
ME: REGULATION 2014
KARPAGAM COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING: COIMBATORE

(Autonomous College Affiliated to Anna University, Chennai)
2014 REGULATION FOR M.E. DEGREE PROGRAMMES

(for the Batches of Candidates admitted in 2014 2015 and Subsequently)
1.
Conditions for Admission:

Candidates for admission to the M.E. degree programme will be required to satisfy the
conditions of admission thereto prescribed by the Anna University and Government of Tamil
Nadu.
2.
Duration of the Programme:

The programme will extend over a period of two years leading to the Degree of Master of
Engineering (M.E.) of the Anna University. The two academic years will be divided into four
semesters with two semesters per year. However, the candidate should complete the
programme within 8 semesters.
3.
Branches of Study:
The Following are the Branches of Study of M.E. Programmes.
M.E.
4.
Branch I
Branch II
Branch III
Mechatronics
VLSI Design
Communication Systems
Curriculum:
i) The curriculum will comprise courses of study as given in section 11infra in accordance
with the prescribed syllabi.
ii) Every candidate will be required to opt for electives from the list of electives relating to
his/her branch of study as given in section 11 infra..
iii) Every candidate will be required to undertake a suitable project in industry / department
in consultation with the Head of the Department and the faculty guide and submit the
project report thereon at the end of the third semester (Phase-I project work) and fourth
semester (Phase II project work) on dates announced by the College/Department. Also
he/she will be required to present two seminars about the progress of the project work
during each of semesters 3 and 4.
5.
Requirements of Attendance and Progress

i) A candidate will be deemed to have completed the requirements of study of any semester
only if
a) He / she has kept not less than 80% of attendance in the total number of working
periods of the concerned semester as a whole. However, a candidate who has secured
attendance between 70% and 79% in the current semester due to medical reasons
(hospitalization / accident / specific illness) or due to participation in College/
University / State / National / International level sports events with prior permission
from the Principal shall be given exemption from the prescribed attendance
requirements and he/she shall be permitted to appear for the current semester
examinations.
b) his / her conduct has been satisfactory.
ii) Candidates who do not qualify to appear for End Semester Examinations (ESE) of any
semester for want of attendance and/or conduct have to register for and redo that semester
programme at the next available opportunity subject to the approval of Anna University.
6.
Procedure for Completing the Programme:

i)
A candidate will be permitted to proceed to the courses of study of any semester only, if
he/she has satisfied the requirements of attendance and conduct in respect of the
preceding semester and had registered for the highest semester examination for which he /
she was eligible to register.
107
ME: REGULATION 2014
ii) A candidate who is required to repeat the study of any semester for want of attendance /
conduct or who desires to rejoin the course after a period of discontinuance or who upon
his / her own request is permitted by the authorities to repeat the study of any semester,
may join the semester which he/she is eligible or permitted to join, only at the time of its
normal commencement for a regular batch of candidates and after obtaining the approval
from the Director of Technical Education and Anna University.
7.
Assessment:
i) The assessment will comprise of Continuous Internal Assessment (CIA) and / or End
Semester Examination (ESE), carrying marks as specified in the scheme in section 11
infra.
ii) Continuous Internal Assessment (CIA) marks will be awarded on the basis of continuous
assessment made during the semester as per guidelines given below.
a)
Theory Courses:
Sl.No.
CATEGORY
MAX. MARKS
Assignment / Tutorial / Innovative Work
10
CIA Test I / CIA Test II / CIA Test III*
30
CIA Total Marks

*
40
Best two out of three Tests will be considered for evaluation.
b) Practical Courses:
Sl.No.
CATEGORY
MAX. MARKS
Observation and Record Work
20
Model Examination
20
CIA Total Marks
40
iii) End Semester Examination (ESE): End Semester Examination will be held at the end of
each semester for duration of 3 hours for each course. The theory exam question paper
pattern is given below.
INSTRUCTION
Maximum Marks
Pattern
REMARKS
100 marks for all Semester Examinations. (Marks secured will be
reduced to a maximum of 60 during processing)
Section A : 10 questions
Question No. 1 to 10, covering all units of the syllabus.
Section B : 10 questions
Question No. 11 to 20, Either OR type, covering all units of the
syllabus.
Allocation : Section A : 10 X 2 = 20 Marks
Section B : 5 X 16 = 80 Marks
Total
: 100 Marks
Duration : 3 Hours
iv) The letter grade and the grade points are awarded based on the percentage of marks
secured by a candidate in individual course as detailed below.
108
ME: REGULATION 2014
Range of percentage of total marks

90 to 100
80 to 89
70 to 79
60 to 69
55 to 59
50 to 54
0 to 49
or less than 50% in final examination
Absent
Withdrawal
Other Keys
U*
Grade
S
A
B
C
D
E
Grade Point
10
9
8
7
6
5
0
0
U
W
: Denotes appeared and failed in the Course.

: Denotes Absent for the End Semester Examination and failed in
the course.
: Denotes withdrawal from the End Semester Examination.
SGPA and CGPA:

a) Calculation of Semester Grade Point Average (SGPA)
SGPA = (gi x Ci) / Ci
where, gi : Grade point secured corresponding to the Course of a Semester.
Ci : Credit rating of the course of that Semester.
b) Calculation of Cumulative Grade Point Average (CGPA)
CGPA = (gi x Ci) / Ci
where, gi and Ci are Grade points secured and Credit rating of the course up to the semester in
which CGPA is computed
8.
Passing Requirements and Provisions:

i) The minimum number of total credits to be earned through successful completion of the
courses of study of the respective branch listed in section 11 infra, by a candidate to
qualify for the award of degree in the various branches of study is provided below.
Branch of Study
Minimum number of credits to be earned through

successful completion of the courses of study of
the respective branch listed in section 11 infra,
for the award of degree
ME Programme
Branch: I
Mechatronics
67
Branch: II
VLSI Design
67
Branch: III
67
ii) A candidate who secures grade point 5 or more in any course of study will be declared to
have passed that course, provided a minimum of 50% is secured in the final examination
of that course of study.
iii) A candidate, who absents or withdraws or disqualified or secures a letter grade U/U*
(Grade point 0) or less than 50% in final examination in any course carrying continuous
assessment and final examination marks, will retain the already earned continuous
assessment marks for two subsequent attempts only in the examination of that course and
thereafter he/she will be solely assessed by final examination carrying the entire marks of
that course.
iv) A candidate who lacks in attendance or who fails to submit the report on the final
semester project (or whose report is not accepted for reasons of incompleteness or other
serious deficiencies) within the prescribed date or whose project work and viva voce has
been assessed as grade U will have to register at the beginning of a subsequent semester
following the final semester, redo and submit the project report at the end of that
semester and appear for final examination.
109
ME: REGULATION 2014
v)
A candidate who is absent in final examination in a course /project work after having
registered for the same shall be considered to have not appeared and failed in that course
/project work and awarded grade U*.
vi) If a candidate fails to submit the report on project work on or before the date specified by
the college / department , he/she is deemed to have failed in the project work and awarded
grade U*.
vii) A candidate shall be declared to have qualified for the award of the M.E. Degree
provided the candidate has successfully completed the course requirements and has
passed all the prescribed courses of study in all the 4 semesters within a maximum period
of 4 years reckoned from the commencement of the semester to which the candidate was
first admitted to the programme.
viii) Classification:
CGPA
Classification
8.5 and above with no history of arrear

6.5 and above and less than 8.5 (completion of the course
within 6 consecutive semesters )
All other Cases
I Class with Distinction

I Class
II Class
9. Provisions for withdrawal from Examination

i) A candidate may, for valid reasons, be granted permission to withdraw from appearing for
the examination in any course or courses of only one semester examination during the
entire duration of the degree programme. Also, only one application for withdrawal is
permitted for that semester examination in which withdrawal is sought.
ii) Withdrawal application shall be valid only if the candidate is otherwise eligible to write
the examination and if it is made prior to the commencement of the examination in that
course or courses and also recommended by the Head of the Department.
iii) Withdrawal shall not be construed as an opportunity for appearance in the examination
for the eligibility of a candidate for First Class with Distinction.
10. Temporary Break of Study from the Programme
i) A candidate is not normally permitted to temporarily break the study. However, if a
candidate intends to temporarily discontinue the programme in the middle for valid
reasons (such as accident or hospitalization due to prolonged ill health) and to rejoin the
programme in a later respective semester, he/she shall apply to the Principal in advance,
in any case, not later than the last date for payment of examination fee of the semester in
question, through the Head of the Department and stating the reasons therefor.
ii) A candidate is permitted to rejoin the programme at the respective semester as and when
it is offered after the break subject to the approval of Director of Technical Education and
Anna University.
iii) The duration specified for passing all the courses for the purpose of classification (vide
clauses 8 (vii) and (viii) supra) shall be increased by the period of such break of study
permitted.
iv) The total period for completion of the programme reckoned from, the commencement of
the semester to which the candidate was first admitted shall not exceed the maximum
period specified in clause 8 (vii) supra irrespective of the period of break of study in order
that he/she may be qualified for the award of the degree.
v) If any candidate is detained for want of requisite attendance, progress and conduct, the
period spent in that semester shall not be considered as permitted 'Break of Study' and
clause 10 (iii) supra is not applicable for such case.
11. Courses of Study and Scheme of Assessment.
110
ME:MECHATRONICS
TOTAL CREDITS: 67
SEMESTER I
Course
Code
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Course Title
THEORY
14MM11 Applied Mathematics
14MM12
(or)
14MM13
Maximum Marks
CIA
ESE
Total
40
60
100
40
60
100
3
3
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
3
3
40
40
40
60
60
60
100
100
100
40
60
100
0
18
0
2
3
3
2
20
40
60
100
Electronic Circuits and Measuring

Instruments*
(or)
Mechanisms and Manufacturing**
Drives and Controls for Automation

Controls for Mechanical Systems
Sensors for Intelligent Automation
Image Processing and Vision
14MM17
Systems
PRACTICAL
14MM18 Mechatronics Laboratory I
TOTAL
Credits
14MM14
14MM15
14MM16
* Electronic Circuits and Measuring Instruments for Mechanical Group

** Mechanisms and Manufacturing for Electronics Group
SEMESTER II
Course Code
THEORY
14MM21
14MM22
14MM23
14MMXX
14MMXX
14MMXX
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Machine Component Design

Robotics
Microcontrollers and PLC
Elective I
Elective II
Elective III
PRACTICAL
14MM27
Mechatronics Laboratory II
TOTAL
Credits
Maximum Marks
CIA
ESE
Total
3
3
3
3
3
3
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
3
3
3
3
3
40
40
40
40
40
40
60
60
60
60
60
60
100
100
100
100
100
100
0
18
0
2
3
3
2
20
40
60
100

111
ME:MECHATRONICS
SEMESTER III
Course Code
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Course Title
Credits
Maximum Marks
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
14MMXX
Elective IV
40
60
100
14MMXX
Elective V
40
60
100
14MMXX
Elective VI
40
60
100
12
100
100
12
15
PRACTICAL
14MM39
TOTAL
SEMESTER IV
Course Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Credits
Maximum Marks
CIA
ESE
Total
PRACTICAL
14MM49

TOTAL
24
12
24
12

112
40
60
100
ME:MECHATRONICS
LIST OF ELECTIVES
Course Code
Course Title
14MM51
Auto Electronics
14MM52
Instrumentation and Control Systems
14MM53
Fiber Optics and Laser Instrumentation
14MM54
Metrology and Computer Aided Inspection
14MM55
Computer Numerically Controlled Machines
14MM56
Manufacturing System Design
14MM57
Diagnostic Techniques
14MM58
Micro Electro Mechanical Systems
14MM59
Artificial Intelligence and Expert Systems
14MM60
Applied Soft Computing
14MM61
Mechatronics System Design
14MM62
Optimization Techniques in Engineering
14MM63
Machine Tool Control and Condition Monitoring
14MM64
Vetronics
14MM65
Non Destructive Evaluation
14MM66
Design of Experiments and Taguchi Methods
14MM67
Advanced Control Systems
14MM68
Virtual Instrumentation
14MM69
Advanced Microcontrollers and Embedded Systems
14MM70
Smart Materials and Structures
113
ME:MECHATRONICS
SEMESTER I
14MM11
APPLIED MATHEMATICS
3
OBJECTIVES:
To develop an understanding of fuzzy variables, neural networks and genetic algorithms.
To make the students acquire sound knowledge of techniques in solving hyperbolic partial
differential equations.
To acquaint the students with the concepts of special functions appearing as solutions
of differential equations or integrals of elementary functions.
To familiarize the concept of random process.
To impart the knowledge on calculus of variation.
OUTCOMES:
solve the problems in soft computing whose solutions are unpredictable, uncertain and
between 0 and 1.
solve the problems using different kinds of solutions in one dimensional wave equation.
solve the higher order ordinary differential equations.
understand the ideas of random process .
solve the problems using different kinds of solutions for differential equation.
UNIT I
NUMERICAL SOLUTION OF EQUATIONS AND SOFT COMPUTING

METHODS
9
Method of false position Iteration method Newton Raphson method Solution of linear system by
Gaussian elimination and Gauss-Jordon methods Fuzzy variables Fuzzy relations Neural
networks Genetic algorithms (basic concepts only).
UNIT II
ONE DIMENSIONAL WAVE EQUATION
9
Solution of one dimensional wave equation Characteristics Canonical transformation Periodic
solutiuon DAlemberts solution Riemann Volterra solution Laplace transform solutions for
displacement in a long string.
UNIT III
SPECIAL FUNCTIONS
9
Bessels equation Bessel functions Recurrence relations Generating functions and orthogonal
property of Bessel functions Legendres equation Legendre polynomials Rodrigues formula
Recurrence relations Generating functions and orthogonal property of Legendre polynomials.
UNIT IV
RANDOM PROCESSES
9
Definitions and examples First order and second order Strictly stationary Wide sense stationary
and Ergodic processes Markov process Binomial Poisson and normal or Gaussian processes Sine
wave process.
UNIT V
CALCULUS OF VARIATION
9
Introduction Functional-Eulers equation Solution of Eulers equations Approximation solution of
boundary value problems Rayleigh-Ritz methods Lagranges equations.
TOTAL: 45+15
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
1.
Jain M K
Iyengar S R K
Jain R K
2.
Rajasekaran S
Vijayalakshmi Pai G A
3.
Sankara Rao K
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Numerical Methods for

Scientific and Engineering
Computation
Neural Network, Fuzzy Logic
and Genetic Algorithm.
Synthesis and Applications
New Age
International
Publishers Pvt Ltd
2007
Prentice Hall of
India
2013
Introduction to Partial
Differential Equations
Prentice Hall of
India
2011
114
ME:MECHATRONICS
4.
Grewal B S
Higher Engineering
Mathematics
Khanna Publishers
2012
5.
Veerarajan T
Probability, Statistics and

Random Process
Tata McGraw Hill
2008
Publisher
Year of
Publication
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
1.
2.
3.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Grewal B S
Numerical Methods
Sivanandam S N
Deepa S N
Jain R K
Iyengar S R K
Principles of Soft
Computing
Mathematics
Probability and Random
Processes with Applications
to Signal Processing
Mathematics
4.
Henry Stark
John W Woods
5.
Dass H K
Khanna
Publishers
Wiley India Pvt
Ltd
2007
2010
Narosa Publishers
2013
Pearson
Education
2013
S Chand
Publishers
2007
WEB URLs:
1. http:// www.mathworld.wolfram.com/WaveEquation1 Dimensional.html
2. http:// www.tutorial.math.lamar.edu/Classes/DE/TheWaveEquation.aspx
3. http:// www.dlmf.nist.gov/
4. http://www.ece.uah.edu/courses/ee385/
5. http:// www.PlanetMath.org.
14MM12
ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS AND MEASURING INSTRUMENTS

3
OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge on the basics and working principles of electronic components and their
applications.
To provide knowledge in design and construct circuits using bipolar transistors, FET and
Op-AMP.
To acquaint with the concepts in rectifiers and power supply circuits.
To familiarize with concepts and basics of digital electronics and digital circuits.
To provide exposure to the test and measuring instruments.
OUTCOMES:
describe the electronic components and devices.
design amplifier circuits using FET and bipolar transistors.
design linear and non-linear OpAmp circuits for various practical applications.
design combinational and sequential logic circuits.
use test and measuring instruments.
UNIT I
ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS AND DEVICES
9
Resistors, capacitors, inductors, transformers Types and properties Junction diodes, Zener diodes,
Bipolar transistors, Field effect transistors, Uni junction transistors, MOS devices, LEDs
characteristics and applications Thyristor devices SCR, DIAC, TRIAC, QUADRAC Operating
mechanism, characteristics and applications.
UNIT II
ANALOG ELECTRONICS
9
Biasing methods h parameters equivalent circuit Classes of operation Configuration of transistor
amplifiers FET biasing methods and applications Rectifiers and filters Regulated power supply
Switching power supplies, thermal considerations, feedback and power amplifiers and sine wave
oscillators.
115
ME:MECHATRONICS
UNIT III
OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIERS
9
Operational amplifiers Principles, specifications, characteristics and applications Arithmetic
operations Integrator, differentiator, comparator Schmitt trigger Instrumentation amplifier
Active filters Linear Rectifiers Waveform generators D/A converters.
UNIT IV
DIGITAL ELECTRONICS
9
Number systems Logic gates Boolean algebra Simplification of Boolean functions using Map
method Tabulation method Combinational logic circuits Full adder, code converters, multiplexers
and decoders Sequential logic circuits Flip-flops, counters, shift registers A/D converters.
UNIT V
TEST AND MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
9
Measurement of voltage, current, frequency and power using multi meters Oscilloscopes Recorders
Data loggers Signal sources Counters Analyzers Printers.
TOTAL: 45+15
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
1.
Jocob Millman
2.
Malvino A P
Donald P Leach
Title of the Book

Micro Electronics Digital
and Analog Circuits and
Systems
Digital Principles and
Application
Year of
Publication
Publisher
Tata McGraw Hill
2010
Tata McGraw Hill
2010
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No..
Author(s)
1.
Helfrick A D
Cooper W D
2.
David A Bell
3.
Millman J
Halkias C C
4.
Meena K
5.
Rajput R K
Title of the Book

Modern Electronic
Instrumentation and
Measurements Techniques
Operations Amplifier and
Linear ICs
Electronic Devices and
Circuits
Principles of Digital
Electronics
Electrical Measurements
and Measuring Instruments
Publisher
Year of
Publication
2011
Oxford University Press
2010
Tata McGraw Hill
2010
2009
S Chand and Company

Ltd.
2008
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.rmsc.nic.in/RHSDP%20Training%20Modules/ELCTRONIC%20COMPONENT
S.pdf
http://www.prof robertson.com/index_files/circuits.pdf
http://www.electronics.teipir.gr/personalpages/papageorgas/download/2/shmeiwseis/ELECT
RONIC_COMPONENTS/varistor/Analog_Electronics.pdf
http://www.zebu.uoregon.edu/~rayfrey/431/AnalogNotes.pdf.
http://www.ocw.mit.edu/ans7870/RES/RES.6-010/MITRES_6-010S13_comchaptrs.pdf
14MM13
MECHANISMS AND MANUFACTURING
(Use of Approved Data Book is permitted)

3
OBJECTIVES:
To introduce the mechanisms and their working.
To provide knowledge on the concepts of friction.
To impart knowledge on the nomenclature of various gears and cams.
To acquaint the concepts of vibration.
To familiarize with various manufacturing processes and machine tools.
116
ME:MECHATRONICS
OUTCOMES:
determine velocity and acceleration in simple mechanisms.
apply the frictional forces in transmission of power and control of mechanisms.
design gearing systems and cams.
analyse vibrations in systems.
describe the various manufacturing processes.
UNIT I
MECHANISMS
10
Introduction to mechanics Kinematics Links, pairs and mechanisms Classifications Degrees of
freedom Four bar mechanism Crank rocker Slider crank mechanisms Inversions
Determination of velocity and acceleration in simple mechanisms like four bar, slider crank and quick
return motion mechanisms.
UNIT II
FRICTION
10
Friction mechanism Laws of friction, limiting angle of friction Friction in screws and nuts Pivot
and collar friction Friction in plate clutch Belt and rope drives Ratio of tensions Power
transmitted Effect of centrifugal, initial tensions Descriptive treatment of brakes, journal bearings,
rolling element bearings, re-circulating ball/nut assembly, hydrostatic and aerostatic bearings.
UNIT III
GEARING AND CAMS
9
Gear profile and geometry Nomenclature of spur and helical gears Law of gearing Minimum
number of teeth in gears to avoid interference Gear trains Simple and compound gear trains
Determination of speed and torque in epicyclic gear trains Cam profile Different types of followers.
UNIT IV
MECHANICAL VIBRATION
9
Vibrations Types Free, forced and damped vibrations Natural frequency Critical speed of
whirling Logarithmic decrement Vibration isolation Torsional vibration Single and two rotor
systems.
UNIT V
MANUFACTURING PROCESSES AND MACHINE TOOLS
7
Introduction to casting Types Basics of welding Types Machine tools Construction features
Operations of lathe, milling machine, drilling machine.
TOTAL: 45 +15
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No..
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Rattan S S
Theory of Machines
Tata McGraw Hill
2009
2.
Sharma P C
A Text Book of Production

Technology
S Chand and
Company Ltd
2010
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No..
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Author(s)
Bansal R K
Khurmi R S
Gupta
John J Uicker
Joseph E Shigley
Gordon R Pennock
Sen G C
Bhattacharya A
Hamilton Horth Mabie
Charles F Reinholtz
Fred W Ocvirk
Title of the Book

Theory of Machines
Theory of Machines
Publisher
Laxmi Publications Pvt
Ltd
Eurasia Publishing
House Pvt Ltd
Year of
Publication
2011
2012
Theory of Machines
and Mechanisms
2009
Principles of Machine
Tools
New Central Book

Agency
1999
Mechanisms and
John Wiley and Sons Inc
1987
117
ME:MECHATRONICS
APPROVED DATA BOOK:

Sl.No.
1.
Author(s)
Faculty of Mechanical
Engineering, PSG College
of Technology
Title of the Book

PSG Design Data Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
DPV Printers
Coimbatore
2000
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.gogetpapers.com/Lectures/Kinematic
http://www.scribd.com/doc/7266098/Introduction to Mechanism and Kinematics
http:// www.ocw.mit.edu/OcwWeb/Mechanical Engineering/2 800Fall2004/LectureNotes/
http://www.onesmartclick.com/engineering/machine design.html
http://www.flipkart.com/notes design machine elements use/0548529523 6zw3fgp3cf
14MM14
DRIVES AND CONTROLS FOR AUTOMATION

3
OBJECTIVES:
To introduce the hydraulic power generation and utilizing elements.
To provide knowledge on the hydraulic control and regulation elements.
To acquaint the various hydraulic and pneumatic circuits.
To impart knowledge in electrical actuators.
To familiarise with the electrical circuits.
OUTCOMES:
decide the fluid power generation and utilizing elements.
select the fluid control elements.
design hydraulic and pneumatic circuits.
understand the principles of electrical actuators.
select ideal electrical drive circuits.
UNIT I
FLUID POWER GENERATORS AND ACTUATORS
8
Basics of fluid power system Pascals Law and its application Fluid properties Hydraulic pumps
and motors Gear, vane and piston types Linear and rotary actuators Cushioning Power packs
Construction Reservoirs Perfect gas laws Working of compressors.
UNIT II
FLUID CONTROL AND REGULATION ELEMENTS
8
Direction, flow and pressure control valves Methods of actuation, types Pressure and temperature
compensation Electro hydraulic servo valves FRL Fluidic devices.
UNIT III
CIRCUIT DESIGN
9
Typical circuits Application circuits Sequencing circuits Combinational logic circuits Cascade
method Karnaugh map method Hydro pneumatic circuits Electrical controls Ladder diagram
Uses of switches, timers, relays, counters.
UNIT IV
ELECTRICAL ACTUATORS
10
DC Motor Working principle , classification, characteristics AC Motor Working principle, types,
speed torque characteristics Servo motor Working principle, types, characteristics Stepper motor
Working Principle, classification, construction Piezo electric actuators Linear actuators Hybrid
actuators Applications.
UNIT V
ELECTRICAL DRIVE CIRCUITS
10
DC Motors Speed, direction and position control using H-bridge under PWM mode Working
Control of AC motor drives Need for V/ F drives Energy saving AC drives Stepper Motor
Drive circuits for speed and position control BLDC motor Controller Switched reluctance motor.
TOTAL: 45
118
ME:MECHATRONICS
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Anthony Esposito
Fluid Power with

Applications
Prentice Hall
2008
2.
Gopal K Dubey
Fundamentals of
Electrical Drives
Alpha Science
International Ltd.
2001
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
1.
Majumdar S R
2.
Majumdar S R
3.
Bolton W
4.
John J Pippenger
Tyler G Hicks
5.
Peter Rohner
Title of the Book

Pneumatic Systems
Principles and Maintenance
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Tata McGraw Hill
2006
Tata McGraw Hill
2002
Pearson Education
2003
Industrial Hydraulics
Tata McGraw Hill
1980
Fluid Power Logic Circuit

Design
The Macmillan Press

Ltd.
1994
Oil Hydraulic Systems

Principles and Maintenance
Mechatronics, Electronic
control systems in
Mechanical and Electrical
Engineering
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.hydraulics.com
http://www.pneumatics.com
http://www.relaysystems.com
http://www.me.umn.edu/~wkdurfee/projects/ccefp/fp chapter/fluid pwr.pdf
http://www.g w.com/pdf/sampchap/9781605250816_ch02.pdf
14MM15
CONTROLS FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

3
OBJECTIVES:
To introduce the control system.
To acquaint with the response of control system.
To impart knowledge about stability analysis.
To provide knowledge in designing feedback system.
To familiarize modern control system.
OUTCOMES:
describe a control system.
perform domain analysis.
identify the suitable feedback system.
apply principles in stability analysis.
understand the functions of modern control system.
UNIT I
SYSTEMS AND THEIR REPRESENTATION
8
Basic elements in control systems Open loop and closed loop systems Transfer function
Properties of transfer function Electrical analogy of mechanical translational and rotational system
Block diagram reduction technique Signal flow graph Feedback components Gyroscope,
synchros and tachometer.
119
ME:MECHATRONICS
UNIT II
TIME AND FREQUENCY DOMAIN ANALYSIS
10
Time response Time domain specification Types of test input I and II order system Generalized
error series Steady state error.
Frequency domain specifications Polar plot Bode plot Constant M and N circle Nichol's plot
Correlation between frequency domain and time domain specification.
UNIT III
STABILITY OF CONTROL SYSTEMS
10
Characteristic equation Location of roots in S-plane for stability Routh Hurwitz criterion Root
locus technique construction Gain margin and phase margin Nyquist stability criterion
UNIT IV
FEEDBACK CONTROL SYSTEM DESIGN
8
Effects of Proportional, Derivative, Integral control actions Design of P, PI, PD, PID Controllers
Ziegler Nichols Method for Controller Tuning.
Feedback compensator design Lead compensation Lag compensation Lag-lead compensation
using Bode plot.
UNIT V
STATE VARIABLE ANALYSIS AND DESIGN
9
Concepts of state State variable and state model State model for linear, continuous and time
system State variable and linear discrete and time system Solution of the state equation Transfer
function from state model Controllability Observability State observer.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Gopal M
Control Systems
Principles and Design
Tata McGraw Hill
2013
2.
Ogata K
Modern Control
Engineering
2012
Publisher
Year of
Publication
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book

Automatic Control
Systems
Control System Theory
and Applications
2007
Pearson Education
2012
Modern Control Systems
Pearson Education
2010
Anand Kumar A
Control Systems
2007
Bakshi U A
Control Systems
Technical Publications
2009
1.
Kuo B C
2.
Smarajit Ghosh
3.
Richard C Dorf
Robert H Bishop
4.
5.
WEB URLs:
1. http://www.controlsystems principles.co.uk
2. http://www.homepages.wmich.edu/~kamman/Me360FrequencyDomainAnalysis.pdf
3. http://www.cds.caltech.edu/~murray/courses/cds101/fa02/caltech/astrom-ch6.pdf
4. http://www.teacher.buet.ac.bd/Notes%20on%20Control%20Systems%2006.doc
5. http://www.sml.ee.upatras.gr/uploadedfiles/stateformulation.pdf
14MM16
SENSORS FOR INTELLIGENT AUTOMATION

3
OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge on the principles of measurement and response of measuring devices.
To familiarize the principle of operation of various sensors and their concept of application in
the field of automation.
120
ME:MECHATRONICS
To acquaint with sensors for mechatronics systems.

To acquaint with signal conditioning.
To introduce smart sensors.
OUTCOMES:
reduce errors in measurement by proper calibration of measuring device.
select the appropriate sensors.
measure mechanical quantities.
apply principles in signal conditioning.
work with smart sensors.
UNIT I
SCIENCE OF MEASUREMENT
7
Units and standards Calibration techniques Classification of errors Errors analysis Statistical
methods Odds and uncertainty Static and dynamic characteristics of transducers Response of
transducers to different time varying inputs
UNIT I I
SENSORS AND TRANSDUCERS FOR MEASUREMENTS
12
Classification of transducers Direct digital transducers Potentiometer Strain gauge LVDT and
RVDT RTD Thermistor Thermocouples Variable reluctance transducer Capacitive transducer
Optoelectronic transducers Piezo electric transducer Fibre optic transducer Magnetostrictive
transducer Hall effect transducer.
UNIT III
MECHANICAL MEASUREMENTS
9
Measurement of mechanical quantities Force, displacement, torque, temperature, flow, pressure,
liquid level, vibration, viscosity and velocity.
UNIT IV
SIGNAL CONDITIONING AND DATA ACQUISITION
8
Amplification Filtering Sample and holding Data logging and acquisition Distributed data
acquisition and control systems Interface system and standards.
UNIT V
SMART SENSORS
9
Primary and secondary sensors Amplification Filters Converters Compensation Information
coding / preprocessing Data communication, standard for smart sensor interface Smart transmitter
with HART communicator Smart sensor for flow and temperature measurement.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Doebelin E O
Measurement Systems
Applications and Design
Tata McGraw
Hill
2010
2.
Sawhney A K
A course in Electrical and Electronic

Measurement and Instrumentation
Dhanpat Rai
and Co Pvt Ltd
2014
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
Thomas G Beckwith
Roy D Marangon
John H Lienhard
Mechanical
Measurements
2.
Renganathan S
Transducer Engineering
3.
Roy Choudry D
Sheil Jain
Linear Integrated
Circuits
4.
John P Bentley
Principles of
Measurement Systems
121
Publisher
Pearson Education
Allied Publishers (P)
Ltd
New Age
International
Publishers
Pearson Education
Year of
Publication
2007
2003
2011
2010
ME:MECHATRONICS
5.
Nello Zuech
Handbook of Intelligent
Sensors for Industrial
Automation
Addison Wesley
1992
WEB URLs:
1. http://www.nptel.iitm.ac.in/courses/Mech_measurements
2. http://www.proscon.ie/solutions
3. http://www.rambal.com/descargas/libros/SmartSensors v1.0.pdf
4. http://www.nptel.ac.in/courses/112106138/
14MM17
IMAGE PROCESSING AND VISION SYSTEMS

3
OBJECTIVES:
To introduce the fundamentals and techniques of digital image processing.

To provide knowledge in 2D image transformations.
To acquaint with the concepts of image processing techniques like image enhancement and
restoration.
To familiarize the various techniques in image segmentation and representation.
To acquaint with the application of image processing algorithm in industry.
OUTCOMES:
have knowledge in image transformation.
describe image processing techniques.
identify an appropriate image representation procedure.
do projects in image processing.
understand the concepts of machine vision.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION AND IMAGE TRANSFORM
8
Image representation and nomenclature Relationship of image processing and computer vision
Digital image fundamentals Geometrical model for imaging and applications Imaging requirements
Image transform: DFT, DCT, DST, DWT, Walsh, Hadamard Transform.
UNIT II
IMAGE ENHANCEMENT, RESTORATION AND SEGMENTATION
12
Sampling Enhancement Restoration Segmentation Image representation and description
Processing binary images.
Image Enhancement and Restoration: Image enhancement Point operations Contrast
stretching Clipping and thresholding Digital negative intensity level slicing Bit extraction.
Histogram processing Histogram equalization Modification Spatial operations Smoothing
spatial filters, sharpening spatial filters. Transform operations. Color image enhancement Image
Restoration: Degradation model, noise models, unconstrained and constrained restoration, inverse
filtering, Removal of blur caused by uniform linear motion, Wiener filtering.
Image Segmentation: Point, line and edge detection Image segmentation based on thresholding
Region based segmentation Region growing Region splitting and merging.
UNIT III
IMAGE REPRESENTATION AND DESCRIPTION
8
Representation Chain codes Polynomial approximations Signatures Boundary descriptors
Regional descriptors: Texture regional descriptor.
UNIT IV
PRACTICAL IMAGE PROCESSING
9
2D/3D Image acquisition 3D image visualization Imaging surfaces Global image measurements.
UNIT V
MACHINE VISION
8
Human vision Machine vision and computer vision Benefits of machine vision Block diagram
and function of machine vision system implementation of industrial machine vision system Physics
of light Interactions of light Refraction at a spherical surface Thin lens equation Machine vision
applications in manufacturing.
TOTAL: 45
122
ME:MECHATRONICS
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Rafael C Gon Zalez

Richard E Woods
Digital Image
Processing
Pearson Education
2012
2.
John C Russ
The Image Processing

Hand Book
CRC Press
2011
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Robert J Schalkoff
Digital Image Processing

and Computer Vision
John Wiley and Sons

Inc
1998
2.
Alexander Hornberg
Handbook of Machine
Vision
Wiley VCH
2006
3.
Ramesh C Jain
Rangacher Kasturi
Brian G Schunck
Introduction to Machine
Vision
Tata McGraw Hill
2006
4.
Nick Efford
Addison Wesley
2000
5.
Milansonka
Vallav Hlavac
Roger Boyle

and Computer Vision
Cengage Learning
2008
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.camellia.sourceforge.net/
http://www.ph.tn.tudelft.nl/Courses/FIP/noframes/fip.html
http://www.show.docjava.com/book/ipij/ch5/html/ch5_t.html
http://www.robots.com/applications.php
http://www.mathworks.in/image video processing/
14MM18
MECHATRONICS LABORATORY I
0
OBJECTIVES:
To provide exposure to pneumatic and hydraulic circuits
To impart knowledge on sequential circuits
To acquaint with sensors used for measurements
To provide knowledge on controls of electrical actuators.
To familiarize interfacing and signal conditioning.
OUTCOMES:
recognize the hydraulic and pneumatic circuits.
design and test sequential circuits.
use sensors for measurement.
control motors with PC.
perform signal conditioning.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Study of hydraulic circuits.
2. Study of pneumatic circuits.
3. Design of sequential circuits using pneumatic trainer kits.
4. Design of fluid power circuits with electro pneumatic trainer kits.
123
ME:MECHATRONICS
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Testing of hydraulic circuits to control velocity, pressure, direction and force of an actuator.
Sensors / actuators: measurements of temperature, position.
Sensors / actuators: measurements of strain stress and force.
Closed loop position and velocity control of DC servo motor.
Signal conditioning and reconstruction.
Interfacing of stepper motor with PC.
Application of OP amp circuits.
SEMESTER II
14MM21
MACHINE COMPONENT DESIGN
(Use of Approved Data Book is permitted)

3
OBJECTIVES:
To explain the concept of stress and strain.
To familiarize the loads acting on machine components.
To impart the concept of components design.
To familiarize the design of gears, belts and chain drives.
To provide exposure to friction drives.
OUTCOMES:
select appropriate materials for applications.
design shaft and couplings.
design gears.
select belts, chain and bearings.
decide the variable drive for applications.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
8
Simple stress, strain Types Relations Engineering materials and their physical properties applied
to design Selection of materials Factors of safety in design Static and variable loading in
machine elements Stress concentration Goodmen and Soderberg method of design.
UNIT II
10
Loads acting on shaft Estimation of size of shaft subjected to various loads Design of square key
Rigid and flexible flange couplings Selection.
UNIT III
GEARS AND ROLLING CONTACT BEARINGS
10
Loads on gear tooth Design of spur and helical gears. Selection and specification of anti-friction
bearings: ball, roller, needle bearings Life rating
UNIT IV
SELECTION OF BELTS AND CHAINS
9
V-belt Selection and specification Timing Belts Selection of roller chain Silent chain Belt
drives for spindle drives and feed drives in CNC machine tools Selection.
UNIT V
CLUTCHES AND VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES
8
Clutches Design of toothed claw clutches and plate clutches Variable speed drives Types and
selection.
TOTAL: 45+ 15
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
1.
Author(s)
Khurmi R S
Gupta J K
Title of the Book

A Text Book of
Machine Design
124
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Eurasia Publishing
House Pvt. Ltd. New
Delhi
2006
ME:MECHATRONICS
Richard G Budynas
Keith Nisbett J
2.
Shigley's Mechanical
Engineering Design
McGraw Hill Book

Co Delhi
2011
Publisher
Year of
Publication
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
1.
Jain R K
2.
Spotts M F
Title of the Book

Machine Design
Design of Machine
Elements
Machine Design
Schaum's Outline
Series
Hall
Holowenko
Laughlin
Sundararajamurthy T V
Shanmugham N
3.
4.
5.
Acherkkan N
Khanna Publishers
Delhi
Prentice Hall of
India
2006
2004
Tata McGraw Hill
2007
Machine Design
Khanna Publishers
New Delhi
2003
Machine Tool Design

Vol 1 and 3
MIR Publishers
Moscow
2000
APPROVED DATA BOOKS:

Publisher
Year of
Publication
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
Faculty of Mechanical
Engineering, PSG College of
Technology
PSG Design Data Book
DPV Printers
Coimbatore
2000
2.
Patil H G
Machine Design Data

Handbook
I K International
Publishing House
Pvt. Ltd.
2011
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.machinedesign.com
http://www.ecs.umass.edu/mie/labs/mda/dlib/machine/gear/gear2.html
http://www.nptel.ac.in/courses/Webcourse.../Machine%20design1/New_index1.html
http://www.iitvids.blogspot.in/2012/12/design of machine elements.html
http://www.myopencourses.com/subject/design of machine elements i 1
14MM22
ROBOTICS
3
OBJECTIVES:
To introduce robots.
To impart knowledge on kinematics and dynamics of robot manipulators.
To acquaint with trajectory and robot motions.
To familiarize the various sensors and drivers used in robots.
To provide exposure to robot programming and path control.
OUTCOMES:
classify robots and select robots based on requirements.
calculate the various forces and motions of manipulator.
define robot path and project its motion trajectory.
identify and work with various sensors and actuators in a robot.
program a robot for various motions and operations.
125
ME:MECHATRONICS
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Overview of industrial robots Components of robot system Definitions Specifications of robot
Types of robot, Classifications based on work envelope Co-ordinate systems Robotic cell layouts
Inter locks Humanoid robots Micro robots Concepts of finite transformation Descriptions
Position, orientations and translation Mapping Changing from frame to frame Operators
Translations, rotation and transformation Further properties of rotations.
UNIT II
MECHANISM OF ROBOT SYSTEM
14
Robot Kinematics: Homogeneous transformation matrices Skew symmetrics matrices
Representation of links using Denavit-Hartenberg parameters Forward kinematics and inverse
kinematics Velocity and static force : Introduction, linear and angular velocities of a rigid body
Velocity propagation Derivation of the jacobian, serial manipulator jacobian Singularities of serial
manipulator Static force of serial and parallel manipulator Robot dynamics Acceleration of a rigid
body Inertia of a link Legrangian formulation Recursive Newton-Euler formulation Lagrange
Euler formulation Derivation of equations of motion for manipulators Inverse dynamics of
manipulator.
UNIT III
DESIGN OF ROBOT SYSTEM
9
Design of drive systems Hydraulic pneumatic and electrical drives Linear and rotary actuators and
control valves Electro-hydraulic servo valves End effectors Mechanical linkages Vacuum,
magnetic and air operated grippers Miscellaneous grippers Functions of sensors Position and
proximitys sensing Tactile sensing Sensing joint forces Drive system for end effectors
Gripping force calculations.
UNIT IV
ROBOT PATH CONTROL AND PROGRAMMING
7
Point to point Continuous path and controlled path motions Joint trajectory Vs Cartesian trajectory
Trajectory planning Trajectory following Disturbance rejection Types of robot programming
Lead through programming Textual Robot Languages Structure VAL programming for industrial
applications Picking and placing operation.
UNIT V
ROBOT APPLICATIONS
6
Robots for manufacturing process and hazardous environments Robots in surgeries and defense
services Introduction to biomechatronics and brain Computer Interfaces (BCI).
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
John J Craig
Introduction to Robotics:
Mechanics and Control
Pearson Education
2010
2.
Groover M P
Mitchel Weiss
Industrial Robotics
Tata McGraw Hill
2012
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Deb S R
Robotics Technology and

Flexible Automation
Tata McGraw Hill
2009
2.
Shitava Ghosal A
Robotics Fundamental
Concepts and Analysis
Oxford University
Press
2006
3.
Fu K S
Gonzalez R C
Robotics
McGraw Hill
2010
4.
Graham M Brooker
Introduction to
Biomechatronics
Scitech Publishing
2012
5.
Mark W Spong
Vidyasagar M
Robotics Dynamics and

Control
John Wiley and Sons
1989
126
ME:MECHATRONICS
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.colorado.edu/geography/gcraft/notes/coordsys/coordsys_f.html
http://www.ocw.mit.edu/courses/mechanical engineering/2 12 introduction to
robotics fall 2005/lecture notes/chapter3.pdf
http://www.cdeep.iitb.ac.in/nptel/Mechanical/Robotics%20Course/Course%20Objective.html
http://www.nptel.ac.in/courses/112101099/
14MM23
MICROCONTROLLERS AND PLC

3
OBJECTIVES:
To explain the concepts and basic architecture of 8051, interfacing.
To acquaint with peripheral devices.
To impart knowledge on PIC microcontroller.
To familiarize the concepts of PLC and its programming.
To expose the applications of microcontroller.
OUTCOMES:
develop background knowledge as well as core expertise in microcontroller.
analyze a typical I/O interface.
describe the PLC microcontroller.
design simple application circuits using PLC.
write assembly language programs for various applications using 8051 and PIC controllers.
UNIT I
10
Overview of Microcontrollers 8051 features, pin description Architecture Memory organization
Addressing Modes Instruction sets Timing diagram Programming techniques Input/Output ports
and circuits.
UNIT II
PERIPHERAL DEVICES AND INTERFACING
9
Types 8255 Programmable peripheral interface 8253 and 8254 Timer interface A/D and D/A
converter interface Keyboard and display interface Memory interfacing 8251 DMA interfacing.
UNIT III
PIC MICROCONTROLLERS
8
PIC microcontroller overview and features Harvard architecture and pipelining PIC Memory
organization Register file structure and addressing CPU register Simple instruction set PIC
16F8XX microcontrollers Memory organization.
UNIT IV
PLC AND SCADA
10
PLC Evolutions of PLCs Sequential and programmable controllers Architecture PLC
Programming Ladder logic
SCADA Hardware and software Remote terminal units Master station Communication
architectures and open SCADA protocols.
UNIT V
APPLICATIONS OF MICROCONTROLLERS
8
Hydraulic and pneumatic actuators interfacing Advanced CNC systems Robot systems
Measurement, inspection and quality Control Automated guided vehicles Servo motor control
LCD interfacing.
TOTAL: 45+15
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
1
Author(s)
Aditya P Mathur
Title of the Book

Introduction to
Microprocessors
127
Publisher
Tata McGraw Hill
Publishing Co Ltd
Year of
Publication
2001
ME:MECHATRONICS
Muhammad Ali Mazidi

Janice Gillispie Mazidi
Rolin McKinlay
The 8051
Microcontroller and
Embedded Systems
Pearson Education
2007
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Peatman John B
Design with PIC

Microcontroller
Kenneth Ayala
8051 Microcontroller
James W Stewart
Kai X Miao
Joseph J Mistovich
Clarke G R
Reynders D
Wright E
8051 Microcontroller :
Hardware, Software and
Interfacing
Prentice Hall
1998
Practical Modern
SCADA Protocols
Newnes
2004
Programmable Logic
Controllers
McGraw Hill
2010
4
5
Petruzella
Pearson education
New Delhi
New German
Publication
2005
2004
WEB URLs:
1. http://www.wesfryer.com
2. http://www.microcontroller.com
3. http://www.swansontec.com
4. http://www.osdata.com
5. http://www.microchip.com
14MM27
MECHATRONICS LABORATORY II
0
OBJECTIVES:
To demonstrate simulation of pneumatic and hydraulic circuits.
To demonstrate the control of a fluid circuit using PLC.
To familiarize modeling of controllers using Simulink.
To provide exposure to the Robotic toolbox MATLAB.
To familiarize LabVIEW.
OUTCOMES:
simulate hydraulic and pneumatic circuits.
control electro pneumatic circuits using PLC.
simulate the various controllers.
work with MATLAB.
use Lab VIEW in modeling pneumatic, hydraulic and electrical circuits.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Simulation of Hydraulic circuits using Automation studio.

Simulation of Pneumatic circuits using Automation studio.
Design of Electro pneumatics using PLC.
Tuning of P and PI controller using Simulink.
Tuning of PID controller using Simulink.
Design of Fuzzy logic controller using MATLAB.
Forward kinematics, inverse kinematics and Trajectory Planning for PUMA 560 and Stanford
arm using Robotic toolbox of MATLAB.
8. Simulation of mechanical translational system using MATLAB.
9. Design of a monitoring and control system using ARM processor.
10. Modeling and Analysis of Hydraulic, Pneumatic circuits using LabVIEW.
11. Modeling and Analysis of Electrical circuits using LabVIEW.
128
ME:MECHATRONICS
ELECTIVES
14MM51
AUTO ELECTRONICS
3
OBJECTIVES:
To introduce the automobile and electronics in automobiles.
To impart knowledge on the various sensors and actuators used in automobiles.
To explain the fuel injection and spark ignition in automobiles.
To provide exposure on digital control of engine.
To enlighten control of automobile motion.
OUTCOMES:
have knowledge of electronic systems in modern automobiles.
identify the measuring and actuation systems.
explain the electronic control of fuel injection and spark.
digitally control the engine parameters.
describe the mechanisms responsible for comfortable drive in automobiles.
UNIT I
FUNDAMENTALS OF AUTO ELECTRONICS
9
Introduction Systems making up the automobile Function and working Current trends in
automobiles Control systems Components for electronic engine management Electromagnetic
compatibility Security systems.
UNIT II
SENSORS AND ACTUATORS
7
Sensors Variables to be measured Types of sensors such as air flow rate, crank angle position,
speed, temperature, oxygen and knock sensors.
Actuators Fuel injector, EGR Ignition systems Solenoids, stepper motor, relays.
UNIT III
ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTION AND IGNITION SYSTEMS
9
Introduction Feedback carburetor systems (FBC), Throttle body injection and multiport or point fuel
injection, fuel injection system controls Advantages of electronic ignition systems Types of solid
state ignition systems and their principle of operation Electronic spark timing control.
UNIT IV
DIGITAL ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
9
Open loop and closed loop control systems Engine cranking and warm up control Acceleration
enrichment Deceleration leaning and idle speed control Distributorless ignition Integrated
engine control system Exhaust emission control engineering.
UNIT V
VEHICLE MOTION CONTROL AND WARNING SYSTEMS
11
Cruise control systems Anti lock braking systems Electronic suspension systems Electronic
steering system.
Warning systems Gauges Onboard diagnosis Display systems.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
William B Ribbens
Electronics
Butterworth
Heinemann
2012
Tom Denton

Electronic Systems
Routledge
2012
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No..
1.
Author(s)
Jack Erjavec
Title of the Book

Automotive Technology: A
Systems Approach
129
Publisher
Cengage Learning
Year of
Publication
2013
ME:MECHATRONICS
2.
Young A P
Griffths L
Automobile Electrical
Equipment
3.
Jurgon Ronald K
4.
Hollembeak Barry
5.
Brady Robert N
Automotive Electronics
Handbook
Automotive Electricity,
Electronics and Computer
Controls
Automotive Computers and
Digital Instrumentation
English Language
Book Society and
New Press
2005
McGraw Hill
1999
Delmar Publishers
2001
Prentice Hall
International (U.K)
Ltd
2000
WEB URLs:
1. http://www.just auto.com/analysis/review of the vehicles electrical and
electronic architecture_id100348.aspx
2. http://www.researchgate.net/publication/234496653_Automotive_Technology_Evolved_by
_Electrical_and_Electronic_Systems
3. http://www.iestcfa.org/conferences/wfcs06_files/keynote_leohold.pdf
4. http://www.bosch automotivetechnology.co.in/en_in/in/homepage_2/homepage_1.html
5. http://www.ieeexplore.ieee.org/servlet/opac?punumber=5704588
14MM52
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEMS

3
OBJECTIVES:
To explain the basics of instrumentation and intelligent instruments with their applications.
To explain the basics of adaptive control systems and its types along with its applications.
To make students understand the classification, construction and working of various
transducers.
To provide knowledge on the design and implementation procedure of computer control
techniques.
To familiarize fundamental concepts of visual inspection and liquid penetrant testing.
OUTCOMES:
implement instrumentation techniques in process industries
handle adaptive control techniques with different applications
identify the different types of transducers that can be used for measuring the various physical
quantities
design and implement the computer control techniques
detect and diagnose faults occurring in mechanical applications
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO INSTRUMENTATION
9
Measurements Method of Measurement Mode of operation Functional block of an
instrumentation system Application of instrumentation system Functional block of an intelligent
instrumentation system Recorders Necessity of Recorders Methods of recording Types ADC
and DAC Types.
UNIT II
ADAPTIVE CONTROL SYSTEMS
9
Introduction Definition of adaptive control Adaptive control schemes Applications Self tuning
regulator Model reference adaptive control The MIT Rule Auto tuning PID Controller Real
time parameter estimation Least square and recursive computation.
UNIT III
COMPUTER CONTROL SYSTEM
9
Basic building blocks of computer control system Need for computer control Data logging
Supervisory control Direct digital control Programmable logic controls Ladder logic diagram
Expert control systems.
130
ME:MECHATRONICS
UNIT I V
TRANSDUCERS AND THEIR MEASUREMENT PRINCIPLES
9
Introduction Classification and selection of transducers Variable resistance transducers
Resistance potentiometer Strain gauge Variable resistance transducers Induction potentiometer
Variable reluctance transducers LVDT Capacitive transducer and types Capacitor microphone
Piezo electric transducers.
UNIT V
INSTRUMENTATION FOR NON-DESTRUCTIVE TESTING
9
Introduction to various non-destructive methods Comparison of destructive and non destructive tests
Conditions for effective non-destructive testing Visual inspection Optical aids used for visual
inspection Applications Physical principles Procedure for penetrant testing Penetrant testing
materials Penetrant testing methods Applications.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Astrom K
Wittenmark B
Adaptive Control
Addison Wesley
Publishing Company
2009
2.
Sawhney A K
A Course in Electrical and

Electronic Measurements and
Instrumentation
Danpat Rai and Sons
2005
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
1.
Rajput R K
2.
Singh S K
3.
Patranabis D
Baldev Raj
Jeyakumar T
Thavasimuthu M
Deshpande P B
Ash R H
4.
5.
Title of the Book

Electrical and Electronic
Measurements and Instrumentation
Industrial Instrumentation and
Control
Sensors and Transducers
Practical Non Destructive Testing
Computer Process Control
Year of
Publication
Publisher
Danpat Rai and
Sons
Danpat Rai and
Sons
Prentice Hall
of India
2011
2011
2004
Narosa
publishing house
2009
ISA Publication
1995
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.scribd.com/doc/24167385/Chapter5 Sensor Transducer

http://www.industrialcontrolsonline.com/ashcroft xldp
http://www.icapeople.epfl.ch/thiran/CoursED/Ch1_Intro.pdf
http://www.cse.iitk.ac.in/~dheeraj/cs425/lec09.html
http://www.process control.com
14MM53
FIBER OPTICS AND LASER INSTRUMENTATION

3
OBJECTIVES:
To expose the students to the basic concepts of optical fibres and their properties.
To familiarize the industrial applications of optical fibres.
To expose the students to the laser fundamentals.
To acquaint industrial application of lasers.
To introduce holography and medical applications of lasers.
OUTCOMES:
describe the basics of high speed communication system.
sense different physical parameters using fiber sensors.
131
ME:MECHATRONICS
explain the principle of generation of laser.

apply lasers in measurement and manufacturing.
discuss the principle of 3D imaging and industrial applications of laser.
UNIT I
OPTICAL FIBRES AND THEIR PROPERTIES
12
Principles of light propagation through a fiber Different types of fibers and their properties
Transmission characteristics of optical fiber Absorption losses Scattering losses Dispersion
Optical fiber measurement Optical sources Optical detectors LED LD PIN and APD.
UNIT II
INDUSTRIAL APPLICATIONS OF OPTICAL FIBRES
9
Fiber optic sensors Fiber optic instrumentation system Different types of modulators Detectors
Application in instrumentation Interferometric method of measurement of length Moir fringes
Measurement of pressure, temperature, current, voltage, liquid level and strain Fiber optic gyroscope
Polarization maintaining fibers.
UNIT III
LASER FUNDAMENTALS
9
Fundamental characteristics of lasers Three level and four level lasers Properties of laser Laser
modes Resonator configuration Q-switching and mode locking Cavity jumping Types of lasers:
Gas lasers, solid lasers, liquid lasers, Semi conductor lasers.
UNIT IV
INDUSTRIAL APPLICATION OF LASERS
6
Laser for measurement of distance, length, velocity, acceleration, current, voltage and atmospheric
effect Material processing Laser heating, welding, melting, trimming and material removal and
vaporization.
UNIT V
HOLOGRAM AND MEDICAL APPLICATION
9
Holography Basic principle, methods Holographic interferometry and applications Holography
for non-destructive testing Holographic components Medical applications of lasers Laser and
tissue interaction Laser instruments for surgery, removal of tumors of vocal cords, brain surgery,
plastic surgery, gynecology and oncology.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
1.
John C Ion
2.
Senior J M
Title of the Book

Laser processing of Engineering
Materials Principles, Procedure and
Industrial Applications
Optical Fiber Communications Principles and Practice
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Elsevier
2005
Prentice Hall
2009
Publisher
Year of
Publication
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
Gupta B D
Fiber Optic Sensors - Principles

and Applications
New India
Publishing Agency
2006
2.
John F Ready
Industrial Applications of Lasers
Academic Press
2012
3.
Ghatak A K
Thiagarajan K
Introduction to Fiber Optics
Cambridge
University Press
2000
4.
Luc Thevenaz
Advanced Fiber Optics
5.
Keiser G
Optical Fiber Communications
EPFL Press
McGraw-Hill
Education
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
http://www.kayelaby.npl.co.uk/general_physics/2_5/2_5_12.html
http://www.comm.bfioptilas.co.uk/Optical+Fibre+Analysers 97.html
http://www.fas.org/man/dod 101/navy/docs/laser/fundamentals.html
132
2011
2010
ME:MECHATRONICS
4.
5.
http://www.web.phys.ksu.edu/vqm/laserweb/Apps/Ap_ind.html
http://www.en.memory alpha.org/wiki/Emergency_Medical_Holographic_program
14MM54
METROLOGY AND COMPUTER AIDED INSPECTION

3
OBJECTIVES:
To provide students the basic knowledge of inspection instruments.
To describe the working of coordinate measuring machine.
To give exposure for the students about LASER based inspection instruments.
To provide students adequate knowledge in reverse engineering.
To provide students the basic knowledge of quality and their applications.
OUTCOMES:
apply the principle of metrology.
describe the construction and working principles of inspection instruments.
learn the principle of laser based inspection instruments and their systems.
apply the principle of computer aided inspection techniques for reverse engineering.
understand the principle of quality norms and apply them.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO METROLOGY
8
Introduction to metrology and dimensional metrology Angular measurements, form measurement,
surface roughness, contour measurements, roundness, tool wear measurement Digital small tool
instruments Caliper, micrometer, height gauge Units of length Legal basis for length
measurement Traceability Interchangeability Gauge blocks Auto collimator.
UNIT II
CO-ORDINATE MEASURING MACHINES
10
Coordinate Metrology Types of CMM, constructional features Structural elements Drive systems
Support systems Displacement transducers Probing system Software Control system
Temperature fundamentals and accuracy enhancement Applications Reverse engineering.
UNIT III
OPTO ELECTRONIC MEASURING SYSTEMS AND DEVELOPMENT IN

METROLOGY
9
Opto electronic devices for measurement vision measuring systems,optical comparators
Applications in on-line and in-process monitoring systems 3D surface roundness measuring
instruments Applications of LASER in metrology, roundness measurement, LASER interferometer in
machine tool inspection Use of LASER in on-line inspection LASER micrometer LASER
alignment telescope.
UNIT IV
IMAGE PROCESSING AND ITS APPLICATION IN METROLOGY
9
Image processing Image acquisition and digitization Windowing Segmentation Thresholding
Edge detection techniques Interpretation Grey scale correlation Template matching
Applications in inspection, interfacing machine vision and robot.
UNIT V QUALITY MANAGEMENT
9
Introduction Definition of quality Chain reaction Dimensions of quality Quality pays
Evolution of quality Quality control, quality assurance, quality planning, quality improvement,
strategic planning, quality management TQM Quality costs.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Title of the Book
Author(s)
1.
Connie Dotson
Roger H Harlow
Richard Thompson
Fundamentals of
Dimensional Metrology
Thompson Asia
2005
2.
Dale H Bestefield
2011
133
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Sl.No.
ME:MECHATRONICS
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
1.
Bosch John A
2.
Safa O Kasap
3.
Jain R K
4.
Robert G
Seippel
5.
Society of
Manufacturing
Engineers
Title of the Book

Coordinate Measuring
Machines and Systems
Optoelectronics and Photonics
Optoelectronics for
Technology and
Engineering
Handbook of Industrial
Metrology
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Marcel Dekker Inc
1995
Pearson Education
2012
Khanna Publishing
2010
Prentice Hall
1989
1992
WEB URLs:
1. http://www.rfeafe.com/venders/components/metrology.html
2. http://www.directindustry.com
3. http://www.level3inspection.com/technologies/technology computer aided inspection
4. http://www.ien.com/article/computer aided inspection/1576
5. http://www.authorstream.com/Presentation/donzvasanth 1879050 unit laser cmm/
14MM55
COMPUTER NUMERICALLY CONTROLLED MACHINES

3
OBJECTIVES:
To introduce the concepts of CNC machines.
To familiarize the tooling systems.
To impart knowledge on programming.
To provide exposure to advanced CNC machines.
To discuss economic aspects and maintenance of CNC machines.
OUTCOMES:
describe CNC systems.
decide the tooling required for a process.
program CNC machines.
discuss the recent developments in CNC systems.
identify the proper CNC machines to manufacture a product.
UNIT I
BASIC CONCEPTS OF CNC MACHINES
10
Introduction to CNC Machine Tools Development of CNC technology Principles and classification
of CNC machines, advantages and economic benefits, types of control, CNC controllers
Characteristics, interpolators and application DNC concept Introduction Classification
Construction details of CNC machines Machine structure, guide ways, feed drives, spindle drive,
measuring systems Drives and controls D.C. and A.C. drives.
UNIT II
TOOLING FOR CNC MACHINES
8
Interchangeable tooling system Preset and qualified tools Coolant fed tooling system Modular
fixture Quick change tooling system Automatic head changers Tooling requirements for turning
and machining centers Tool holders Tool assemblies Tool magazines ATC mechanisms Tool
management and chip conveyors. Types of measuring systems in CNC machines Incremental and
absolute rotary encoders Principles of location Principles of clamping Work holding devices.
UNIT III
PROGRAMMING OF CNC MACHINES
12
Co-ordinate System Fundamentals of APT programming Manual part programming Structure of
part programme, G & M Codes, developing simple part programmes, Parametric programming CAM
packages for CNC machines MasterCAM and use of standard controllers FANUC, Heidenhain and
Sinumeric control system.
134
ME:MECHATRONICS
UNIT IV
SPECIAL TYPES OF CNC MACHINES
7
CNC grinding machines, EDM, wire cut EDM, punch press Installation, maintenance,performance
testing.
UNIT V
ECONOMICS ASPECTS AND MAINTENANCE OF CNC MACHINES
8
Factors influencing selection of CNC Machines Cost of operation of CNC Machines Practical
aspects of introducing CNC machines in industries Maintenance features of CNC machines
Preventive maintenance, other maintenance requirements.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
Radhakrishnan P
Computer Numerical
Control Machines
New Age
International Pvt Ltd
2010
2.
Sehrawat M S
Narang J S
CNC Machines
Dhanpat Rai and Co
2013
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
1.
2.
Author(s)
Hindustan Machine
Tools
Stephen F Krar
Arthur Gill
3.
Thyer G E
4.
Peter Smid
5.
Hans Kief
Helmut Roschiwa
Title of the Book

Mechatronics
Publisher
Year of
Publication
McGraw Hill
1998
CNC Technology and

Programming
Computer Numerical
Control Machines
CNC Programming Hand
Book
McGraw Hill
1990
ButterworthHeinemann Ltd
1991
Industrial Press
2008
CNC Handbook
McGraw Hill
2012
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.cncci.com/resources/articles/CNC%20basics%201.html
http://www.arxiv.org/ftp/cs/papers/0410/0410064.pdf
http://www.ehow.com/how_7957899_install cnc machine.html
http://www.kepumc.com/down/Installation%20and%20commissioning%20of%20CNC%20mac
hine%20tools/
http://www.sandvik.coromant.com/sitecollectiondocuments/downloads/global/technical%20gui
des/en gb/c 2929 081.pdf
14MM56
MANUFACTURING SYSTEM DESIGN

3
OBJECTIVES:
To introduce the manufacturing systems and layouts in process planning.
To familiarize the production control techniques.
To impart knowledge in various loading and scheduling devices.
To acquaint with the material handling equipments.
To provide exposure on transfer machines.
OUTCOMES:
recognize the types of layouts and process planning techniques.
describe the production control techniques.
describe loading and scheduling devices.
135
ME:MECHATRONICS
be familiar with the material handling equipments.

identify the various transfer machine systems.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO MANUFACTURING SYSTEMS AND LAYOUTS
10
Process planning Logical design of a process planning Computer aided process planning Variant
(Retrieval) approach Generative approach Semi generative approach Plant layout Definition
Objectives Principles Factors influencing layout Types of layout Cellular layout
UNIT II
PRODUCTION CONTROL
10
Overview of production control Forecasting Master production schedule Material requirements
planning Capacity planning Shop floor control Cellular manufacturing JIT and MRP FMS
UNIT III
LOADING AND SCHEDULING
8
Information required for loading and scheduling Master scheduling Perpetual loading Dispatching
Progress chasing Expediting Order scheduling devices.
UNIT IV
MATERIAL FLOW PATH ANALYSIS IN MANUFACTURING
9
Material handling function Types of equipment used Conveyor systems Automated guided
vehicle systems Guidance and routing Traffic control and safety Interfacing handling and storage
with manufacturing Design factors in material handling systems.
UNIT V
TRANSFER MACHINES
8
Types Transfer machines for housing type parts Transfer systems, turning devices, pallets,
mechanisms for locating and clamping housing type parts Transfer machines for shaft production and
gear production Continuous rotary transfer lines Layout and output.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
1.
Groover M P
2.
Halevi G
Weill R D
Title of the Book

Automatic Production
Systems and Computer
Aided Manufacturing
Principles of Process
Planning
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Prentice Hall
2009
Chapman and Hall
2012
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Groover M P
Simmers E W
Computer Aided Design

and Manufacturing
Pearson Education
2002
2.
Evert E Adams J R
Ronald J Ebert
Production and Operation

Management
2006
3.
Andrea Matta
Quirico Semeraro
Design of Advanced
Manufacturing Systems
Springer India
2010
4.
Guy L Curry
Richard M Feldman
Springer
2010
5.
Groover M P
Manufacturing Systems
Modeling and Analysis
Fundamentals of Modern
Manufacturing: Materials,
Processes and Systems
Wiley
2010
WEB URLs:
1. http://www.gogetpapers.com/Papers/Computer_Aided_Process_Planning_decision_tree
2. http:// www .personal.ashland.edu/~rjacobs/m503jit.html
3. http://www.cvn.columbia.edu/Courses/Spring2007/IEORE4000.html
4. http:// www .ocw.mit.edu/OcwWeb/Sloan School of Management/15 763JSpring
2005/LectureNotes/
5. http://www.bilkent.edu.tr/~akturk/ie561.html
136
ME:MECHATRONICS
14MM57
DIAGNOSTIC TECHNIQUES
3
OBJECTIVES:
To provide exposure on defect and failure analysis.
To introduce the types of maintenance.
To acquaint with systematic maintenance.
To provide knowledge of a computer managed maintenance system.
To familiarize the condition monitoring techniques.
OUTCOMES:
describe failures.
identify the systems required maintenance.
describe systematic maintenance procedures.
create a computer managed maintenance system.
select the appropriate condition monitoring technique.
UNIT I
DEFECTS AND FAILURE ANALYSIS
7
Defect generation Types of failures Defect reporting and recording Defect analysis Failure
analysis Equipment down time analysis Breakdown analysis FTA FMEA FMECA.
UNIT II
MAINTENANCE SYSTEMS
8
Maintenance concept Maintenance objective Challenges in maintenance Planned and
unplanned maintenance Breakdown maintenance Corrective maintenance Opportunistic
maintenance Routine maintenance Preventive maintenance Predictive maintenance Condition
based maintenance system Design out maintenance Selection of maintenance system.
UNIT III
SYSTEMATIC MAINTENANCE
10
Codification and cataloguing Instruction manual and operating manual Maintenance manual and
departmental manual Maintenance time standard Maintenance work order and work permit Job
monitoring Feedback and control Maintenance records and documentation.
UNIT IV
COMPUTER MANAGED MAINTENANCE SYSTEM
8
Selection and scope of computerization Equipment classification Codification of breakdown,
material and facilities Job sequencing Material management module Captive engineering module
Decision making in maintenance Economic aspects of maintenance.
UNIT V
CONDITION MONITORING
12
Condition monitoring techniques Visual monitoring Temperature monitoring Vibration
monitoring Lubricant monitoring Cracks monitoring Thickness monitoring Noise and sound
monitoring Condition monitoring of hydraulic system. Machine diagnostics Objectives
Monitoring strategies Examples of monitoring and diagnostics Control structures for machine
diagnosis.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Richard R Kibbe
Mechanical Systems for

Industrial Maintenance
Prentice Hall
2001
2.
William W Cato
Keith Mobley R
Computer Managed
Maintenance Systems
Butterworth
Heinemann
2001
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
1.
Author(s)
Sushil Kumar Srivastava
Title of the Book

Management
137
Publisher
S Chand and
Company Ltd
Year of
Publication
1998
ME:MECHATRONICS
2.
Manfred Weck
Bibring H
Handbook of Machine
Tools
John Wiley and Sons
2007
3.
Mishra R C
Pathak K
Maintenance
Engineering and
Management
Prentice Hall of
India Private Ltd.
2010
4.
William W Cato
Keith Mobley R
Computer Managed
Maintenance Systems
Butterworth
Heinemann
2001
5.
John Moubray
Reliability Centered
Maintenance
Industrial Press Inc
1997
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http:// www dspace.mit.edu/bitstream/handle/1721.1/34763/56714458.pdf?sequence=1

http://www.isif.org/fusion99CD/C 101.pdf
http://www.quality one.com/services/fmea.php
http://www.weibull.com/hotwire/issue46/relbasics46.htm
http://www.osti.gov/bridge/servlets/purl/16548 o3jg5I/.../16548.pdf
14MM58
MICRO ELECTRO MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

3
OBJECTIVES:
To introduce microsystems.
To provide knowledge on science behind microsystems.
To explain the various fabrication process.
To gain knowledge in designing microsystems.
To familiarize the different packaging techniques.
OUTCOMES:
describe microsystems.
design microsystems.
understand the basic scientific concepts behind the microsystems.
gain knowledge on applications of microsystems.
identify the manufacturing processes of micro systems.
UNIT I
OVERVIEW OF MEMS AND MICROSYSTEMS
8
Introduction Microsystems and microelectronics Miniaturization Working principle of
microsystems Micro sensors Types Micro actuation techniques Microactuators: Microgrippers,
micropump, micromotors and microvalves.
UNIT II
ENGINEERING SCIENCE FOR MICROSYSTEMS
7
Atomic structure of matter Ions and ionization Molecular theory of matter and intermolecular
forces Doping of semiconductors Diffusion process Plasma physics Electrochemistry
Quantum physics.
UNIT III
MATERIALS AND FABRICATION PROCESSES
12
Substrates and wafers Silicon as substrate material Silicon compounds Silicon piezoresistors
Gallium arsenide Quartz Piezoelectric crystals Polymers. Photolithography Ion implantation
Diffusion Oxidation CVD Physical vapor deposition Deposition by epitaxy Etching Bulk
micro-manufacturing Surface micromachining LIGA.
UNIT IV
MICROSYSTEMS DESIGN
10
Static bending of thin plates Thermo mechanics Fracture mechanics and mechanical vibration
(quantitative treatment only) Design considerations Process design Mechanical design.
138
ME:MECHATRONICS
UNIT V
PACKAGING AND APPLICATIONS OF MICROSYSTEMS
8
Micro system packaging Interfaces Packaging techniques Three dimensional packaging
Assembly Selection of materials Signal mapping and transduction Applications of microsystems
in industries.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Tai Ran Hsu
MEMS and Microsystems Design

and Manufacture
Tata McGraw Hill
2002
Chang Liu
Foundations of MEMS
Pearson Education
2011
Sl.No.
Author(s)
1.
2.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
1.
Author(s)
Mohamed GadelHak
Julian W Gardner
Vijay K Varadan
Osama O Awadelkarim
2.
3.
Nadim Maluf
Kirt Williams
4.
Marc J Madou
5.
Britt Ekwall
Mikke Cronquist
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
2005
The MEMS Hand Book
CRC Press
Microsensors MEMS and

Smart Devices
John Wiley and

Sons Ltd
2013
Artech
House
2004
CRC Press
2002
Nova Science
Pub Inc
2011
An Introduction to
Microelectro mechanical
Systems Engineering
Fundamentals of
Microfabrication : The Science
of Miniaturization
Micro Electro Mechanical
Systems
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.mems.hu/
http://www.mtl.mit.edu/mems/
http:// www.mems.uta.edu/
http:// www.eds.ieee.org/journal of microelectromechanical systems.html
http://www.mnsl journal.com/
14MM59
ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE AND EXPERT SYSTEMS

3
OBJECTIVES:
To introduce AI and intelligent agents.
To explain the problem solving techniques.
To acquaint with knowledge and reasoning.
To impart knowledge on planning techniques and advanced concepts.
To provide exposure to expert systems.
OUTCOMES:
understand the working of intelligent agents.
identify methods for solving using AI.
apply logic.
gain knowledge on planning.
describe expert systems.
139
ME:MECHATRONICS
UNIT I
INTELLIGENT AGENTS
9
Introduction to AI Intelligent agents Structure of agents Agent types Reflex agents Reactive
agents Reflex agents with state Goal-based agents Utility-based agents Mobile agents
Information agents.
UNIT II
PROBLEM SOLVING AND SEARCH
8
Problem solving agents Formulating problems Real world problems Searching for solutions
Search strategies Breadth-first, Uniform-cost, Depth-first, Dept-limited Avoiding repeated states
Informed search methods Best-first, A* search Heuristics functions Iterative improvement
algorithms.
UNIT III
KNOWLEDGE AND REASONING
9
Logical agents Agents based on position logic Syntax and semantics of first-order logic Using
first order logic Forward chaining Backward chaining Resolution.
UNIT IV
PLANNING AND ADVANCED CONCEPTS
10
Planning problem Partial order planning Planning graphs Planning with propositional logic
Planning time, schedules and resources Hierarchical task network planning Conditional planning.
Natural language processing Syntactic processing Semantic analysis Discourse and pragmatic
processing.
UNIT V
EXPERT SYSTEMS
9
Expert system Rule based system architectures Nonproduction system architectures Knowledge
acquisition Dealing with uncertainty Introduction to fuzzy logic, genetic algorithms and neural
network.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Stuart J Russell
Peter Norvig
Artificial Intelligence: A Modern

Approach
Pearson
Education
2010
2.
Dan W Patterson
Introduction to Artificial
Intelligence and Expert Systems
Prentice Hall
of India
2009
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
1.
Rich E
Knight K
Shivashanker B Nair
2.
Nils J Nilsson
3.
Michael Negnevitsky
4.
5.
Krishnamoorthy C S
Rajeev S
Stephen Lucci
Danny Kopec
Title of the Book

Artificial Intelligence
Artificial Intelligence A New
Synthesis
Artificial Intelligence: A
Guide to Intelligent Systems
Artificial Intelligence and
Expert Systems for Engineers
Artificial Intelligence in the
21st Century
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.springer.com/computer/ai/journal/10462/
http://www.formal.stanford.edu/jmc/whatisai/
http://www.aima.cs.berkeley.edu/
http://www.tandfonline.com/loi/uaai20
http://www.journals.elsevier.com/artificial intelligence
140
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Tata McGraw Hill
2012
Elsevier
1998
Addison Wesley
2011
CRC Press
1996
Mercury Learning
and Information
2012
ME:MECHATRONICS
14MM60
APPLIED SOFT COMPUTING
(Common to Communication Systems and VLSI Design)

3
OBJECTIVES:
To introduce soft computing.
To impart knowledge on ANN.
To provide exposure to unsupervised networks.
To familiarize algorithms of Neuro fuzzy models.
To explain concepts of genetic algorithm and its application.
OUTCOMES:
identify and select a suitable soft computing technology to solve a problem.
integrate the techniques and tools of soft computing into both everyday and advanced
applications.
develop network models.
model using neutro fuzzy and fuzzy systems.
apply GA in optimizing.
UNIT I
ARTIFICIAL NEURAL NETWORKS
9
Basic concepts Single layer perceptron Multi layer perceptron Adaline Madaline Learning
rules Supervised learning Back propagation networks Training algorithm, Practical
difficulties, Advanced algorithms Adaptive network Radial basis network Modular network
Applications.
UNIT II
UNSUPERVISED NETWORKS
9
Introduction Unsupervised learning Competitive learning networks Kohonen self organising
networks Learning vector quantisation Hebbian learning Hopfield network: Content
addressable nature, binary Hopfield network, continuous Hopfield network, travelling salesperson
problem Adaptive resonance theory Bidirectional associative memory Principle component
analysis.
UNIT III
FUZZY SYSTEMS
9
Fuzzy sets Fuzzy rules Extension principle Fuzzy relation Fuzzy reasoning Fuzzy
inference systems Mamdani model, Sugeno model, Tsukamoto model Fuzzy decision
making Multiobjective decision making Fuzzy classification Fuzzy control methods
Application.
UNIT IV
NEURO FUZZY MODELING
9
Adaptive neuro fuzzy based inference systems Classification and regression trees
Decision tress Cart algorithm Data clustering algorithms K means clustering, fuzzy C
means clustering, mountain clustering, subtractive clustering-rule base structure identification
Neuro fuzzy control Feedback control systems Expert control Inverse learning, specialized
learning and back propagation through real-time recurrent learning.
UNIT V
GENETIC ALGORITHM
9
Fundamentals of genetic algorithm Mathematical foundations Genetic modeling Survival of
the fittest Crossover Inversion and deletion Mutation Reproduction Generational cycle
Rank method Rank space method Other derivative free optimization Simulated annealing,
random search, Downhill simplex search Application.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
S. No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Jang J S R
Sun C T
Mizutani E
Neuro Fuzzy and Soft

computing
Pearson
Education
2009
2.
David E Goldberg
Genetic Algorithms in Search,

Optimization, and Machine
Learning
Pearson
Education
2002
141
ME:MECHATRONICS
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
1.
Laurene V Fausett
2.
Timothy J Ross
3.
4.
5.
Rajasekaran S
George J Klir
Bo Yuan
Deepa S N
Sivanandam S N
Title of the Book

Fundamentals of Neural
Networks
Fuzzy Logic with
Engineering Applications
Neural networks,Fuzzy
logics,and Genetic Algorithms
Fuzzy Sets and Fuzzy Logic
Principles of Soft Computing
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Pearson
Education
Wiley India
Pvt Ltd
Prentice Hall
of India
Prentice Hall
Inc
Wiley India
Pvt Ltd
2010
2011
2003
1995
2012
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.doc.ic.ac.uk/~nd/surprise_96/journal/vol4/cs11/report.html
http://www.cs.stir.ac.uk/~lss/NNIntro/InvSlides.html
http://www.willamette.edu/~gorr/classes/cs449/intro.html
http://www.fuzzysys.com
http://www.engr.wisc.edu/ece/courses/ece539.html
14MM61
MECHATRONICS SYSTEM DESIGN

3
OBJECTIVES:
To introduce the design of mechatronics system.
To explain the creation of a mathematical model.
To impart knowledge on simulations.
To familiarize the design of basic mechatronics systems.
To provide exposure on advanced mechatronics system.

OUTCOMES:
study any mechatronics system.
develop mathematical model for any system.
describe simulation of various process.
design simple systems.
develop case study of advanced systems.

UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
6
Mechatronic systems Basics Mechatronic approach to system design Structure of mechatronics
system Development of mechatroinc methodology Mechatronics system design Application types
Interfacing issues Man machine interfaces Safety aspects Optimization of mechatronic design
Fault diagnosis.
UNIT II
SYSTEM MODELLING AND IDENTIFICATION
12
Mathematical models Constructing and analyzing first order math models with practical applications
Constructing and analyzing second order models with practical applications Block diagram
modelling Analogy approach Impedance diagrams Models for electrical, mechanical, electromechanical and fluid systems System recognition Least square method Closed loop identification
Joint input/output identification State estimators Model Validation
UNIT III
SIMULATION
10
Simulation basics Principles of simulation Probability concepts in simulation Discrete event
simulation Simulation methodology Queuing system model components Continuous system
modelling Monte Carlo simulation Analysis of simulation results Simulation life cycle
Simulation of mixed systems.
142
ME:MECHATRONICS
UNIT IV
CASE STUDY ON BASIC SYSTEMS
8
Mass-spring-oscillation and damping system Position control of permanent magnet DC motorusing
hall sensor and optical encoder Auto-control system for green house temperature Transducer
calibration system Strain gauge weighing system Solenoid force Displacement calibration system.
UNIT V
CASE STUDY ON ADVANCED SYSTEMS
9
Automatic washing machine Hard drive control Auto-focusing in digital cameras Active
suspension in vehicles Visual serving models Thermal cycle fatigue of a ceramic plate pH control
system De-icing temperature control system Skip control of a CD player Simulation of rocket
thrust control Time delay blower UAV quadrotor.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Devadas Shetty
Richard A Kolk
Mechatronics System Design
Cengage
Learning
2010
2.
Bolton W
Mechatronics Electronic Control

Systems in Mechanical and
Electrical Engineering
Prentice Hall
of India
2013
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Brian Morriss S
Automated Manufacturing
Systems Actuators Controls,
Sensors and Robotics
McGraw Hill
International
Edition
2000
2.
Bradley D A
Dawson D
Burd N C
Loader A J
Mechatronics: Electronics in
Products and Processes
CRC Press
1993
3.
Krishna Kant
Prentice Hall
of India
2013
McGraw Hill
2006
Tata McGraw
Hill
2010
4.
5.
Gary Johnson
Richard Jennings
Sanjeev Gupta
John Joseph
Computer Based Industrial

Control
LabVIEW Graphical
Programming
Virtual Instrumentation using
Labview
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
https://www.google.co.in/?gfe_rd=cr&ei=1kU86HJsuW8QfcooDoBg#q=mechatronics+system+
design+pdf
http://www.sze.hu/~szenasy/Szenz_akt/Mechatronics%2520handbook%5B1%5D.pdf
https://www.gk12.poly.edu/amps cbri/pdf/Intro%20to%20Mechatronics.pdf
http://www.physics.ucc.ie/fpetersweb/FrankWeb/courses/PY3108/LabView/CNX_labViewGrap
hProg-guts.pdf
https://www.ni.com/pdf/products/us/4msw43 54_79.pdf
14MM62
OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES IN ENGINEERING

3
OBJECTIVES:
To introduce optimization.
To give exposure to linear programming.
To explain the non linear optimization techniques.
To provide exposure to integer and dynamic programming.
To enlighten on the recent optimization techniques.

143
ME:MECHATRONICS
OUTCOMES:
The Learners should be able to
formulate an optimization problem.
apply the appropriate decision.
formulate and solve a non-linear problem.
determine the shortest path.
describe nontraditional optimization techniques, namely genetic algorithms, simulated

annealing, neural network, PSO, ant colony algorithms.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
7
Optimization problem Statement Classification of optimization problems Single variable
optimization and multi variable optimization Convex programming.
UNIT II
LINEAR PROGRAMMING
10
Linear programming Graphical method Simplex method Dual simplex method Revised simplex
method Duality in LP Parametric linear programming Goal programming.
UNIT III
NON-LINEAR OPTIMIZATION
9
Introduction Lagrangian method Kuhn-Tucker conditions Quadratic programming Separable
programming Stochastic programming Geometric programming.
UNIT IV
INTEGER PROGRAMMING, DYNAMIC PROGRAMMING AND

NETWORK TECHNIQUES
11
Integer programming Cutting plane algorithm Branch and bound technique Zero-one implicit
enumeration Dynamic programming Formulation Various applications using dynamic
programming Network techniques Shortest path model Minimum spanning tree problem
Maximal flow problem.
UNIT V
NON TRADITIONAL OPTIMIZATION
8
Genetic algorithms Simulated annealing Neural network based optimization Particle swarm
optimization Ant colony optimization Optimization of fuzzy systems.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
1.
Rao Singiresu S
2.
Ravindran A
Reklaitis G V
Ragsdell K M
Title of the Book

Engineering
Optimization:
Theory
and Practice
Engineering
Optimization: Methods
And Applications
Publisher
Year of
Publication
New Age
International (P)
Limited
2010
Wiley India
2006
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
1.
Raju N V S
2.
Kalyanmoy Deb
3.
Goldberg D E
4.
Kalyanmoy Deb
5.
Rajasekaran S
Title of the Book

Optimization Methods for
Engineers
Optimization For Engineering
Design Algorithms and
Examples
Genetic Algorithms in Search,
Optimization and Machine
Learning
Multi Objective Optimization
Using Evolutionary Algorithms
Neural Networks, Fuzzy Logic
and Genetic Algorithms
144
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Prentice Hall India
2014
Prentice Hall India
2012
Pearson Education
Singapore Pvt Ltd
2002
Wiley India Pvt Ltd
2010

Limited
2003
ME:MECHATRONICS
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
https://www.scirp.org/journal/ojop/
https://www.link.springer.com/journal/11081
https://www.qjie.ir/
https://www.tandfonline.com/toc/geno20/current#.U2de_qLZWSo
https://www.optimize.ufrj.br/
14MM63
MACHINE TOOL CONTROL AND CONDITION MONITORING

3
OBJECTIVES:
To introduce automatic control in machine tools.
To provide knowledge of drive systems and feedback devices in machine tools.
To explain adaptive control and PLC.
To gain knowledge in vibration, acoustic emission.
To familiarize condition monitoring.

OUTCOMES:
describe automatic control in machine tools.
design the drive and feedback systems in machine tools.
understand the basic scientific concepts of adaptive control.
understand condition monitoring through vibration and acoustic emission systems.
describe the condition monitoring of machine tools through various other techniques.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO AUTOMATIC CONTROL IN MACHINE TOOLS
9
Open loop and closed loop system in machine tools Process model formulation Transfer function
control actions Block diagram representation of mechanical pneumatic and electrical systems
Process computer Peripherals Data logger Direct digital control Supervisory computer control.
UNIT II
DRIVE SYSTEMS AND FEED BACK DEVICES IN MACHINE TOOLS
9
Hydraulic and pneumatic drives Electrical drives AC motor, DC motor, servo motor and stepper
motor Feedback devices Syncro, resolver, diffraction gratings, potentiometer, inductosyn and
encoders Application in machine tools.
UNIT III
ADAPTIVE CONTROL AND PLC
9
Adaptive control Types ACC, ACO, real time parameter estimation Applications Adaptive
control for turning, milling, grinding and EDM Programmable logic controller Functions
Applications in machine tools.
UNIT IV
CONDITION MONITORING THROUGH VIBRATION AND ACOUSTIC

EMISSION / SOUND
9
Primary and secondary signals Online and off-line monitoring Fundamentals of vibration, sound,
acoustic emission Machine tool condition monitoring through vibration, sound, acoustic emission
Case Studies on tool wear monitoring Cutting fluid temperature monitoring.
UNIT V
CONDITION MONITORING THROUGH OTHER TECHNIQUES
9
Temperature monitoring Leakage monitoring Lubricant monitoring Condition monitoring of lube
and hydraulic systems Thickness monitoring Image processing techniques in condition monitoring
Motor current signature analysis.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
1.
Mikell P Groover
Title of the Book

Automation Production
System and Computer
Integrated Manufacturing
145
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Prentice Hall of
India
2010
ME:MECHATRONICS
2.
Sushil Kumar Srivastava
Management
S Chand and
Company Ltd
Title of the Book
Publisher
2005
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Year of
Publication
John Wiley and

Sons
Coxmoor
Publishing
Company
Prentice Hall
of India
1.
Manfred Weck
Hand Book of Machine Tools
1984
2.
Charles W Reeves
Machine and System Condition

Monitoring Series
3.
Astrom K J
Wittenmark B
Adaptive Control
4.
Petruzella
Programmable Controllers
McGraw Hill
2010
5.
Rolf Isermann
Fault Diagnosis Applications
Springer
2011
1998
1994
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.researchgate.net/publication/228390227_Process_monitoring_and_control_of_mach
ining_operations/file/5046351f672ae3208b.pdf.
https://www.psnacet.edu.in/courses/Mechanical/CAM/lecture4.pdf
https://www.nptel.ac.in/courses/112103174/pdf/mod4.pdf
https://www.irdbalancing.com/downloads/icmtech.pdf
http://www.studyigniter.com/subject/university/Anna%20University/B.E%20%20Production%2
0Engineering/PR2034%20
%20Machine%20Tool%20Control%20And%20Condition%20Monitoring/ 1/111/1116/5.
14MM64
VETRONICS
3
OBJECTIVES:
To introduce the fundamentals of vehicles.
To explain control of automotives.
To acquaint with transmission and safety system of automobiles.
To impart knowledge in aircraft mechatronics.
To provide on marine mechatronics.

OUTCOMES:
describe fundamentals of vehicles.
identify the monitoring and diagnostic technique for an automobile.
select the appropriate transmission and safety systems.
describe the principles of mechatronics in aircraft.
understand the principles of mechatronics in marine engineering.

UNIT I
FUNDAMENTALS OF VEHICLE ENGINEERING
7
Engine Types Modern engines Advanced GDI, turbo-charged engines Transmissions Chassis
systems Ignition systems Need for avionics in civil and military aircraft and space systems.
UNIT II
AUTOMOTIVE ELECTRONICS ENGINE MANAGEMENT
9
Components of electronic engine management Engine control functions Engine control modes
Fuel delivery systems MPFI Ignition Systems, Diagnostics Compression ignition engines
Emission control management Hybrid power plants BAS.
146
ME:MECHATRONICS
UNIT III
AUTOMOTIVE TRANSMISSION AND SAFETY SYSTEMS
11
Transmission control Cruise control Braking control: ABS Traction control: ESP,ASR
Suspension control Steering control Stability control Parking assist systems Safety systems:
SRS, Blind spot avoidance Warning systems Gauges Onboard diagnosis Display systems.
UNIT IV
AIRCRAFT MECHATRONICS
12
Fundamentals Components of an airplane and their functions Motions of a plane Inertial
navigation Sensors Gyroscope Principles, gyro equations, rate gyros Rate integration and free
gyro, vertical and directional gyros, laser gyroscopes Accelerometers Direct reading compass
Types of actuation systems Linear and non-linear actuation system Modeling of actuation systems
Performance testing equipments for sensors and actuation systems Measurement and control of
pressure, temperature, fuel quantity, rpm, torque, engine vibration and power Electrical power
requirement for military and civil standards Satellite navigation GPS: System description Basic
principles Position and velocity determination.
UNIT V
MARINE MECHATRONIC SYSTEMS
6
Basics of marine engineering Marine propulsion Mechatronics elements in ships and submarine
Variable buoyancy systems.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
William B Ribbens
Understanding
Automotive Electronics
Butterworth
Heinemann
2004
2.
Collinson R P G
Aircraft Instruments and

Integrated systems
Chapman and Hall
2002
3.
Taylor D A
Introduction to Marine
Engineering
Butterworth
Heinemann
2005
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Jurgen R K
Introduction to Avionics
McGraw Hill
2000
2.
Tom Denton
Automobile Electrical
and Electronic
Systems
Routledge
2012
3.
Robert H Bishop
Mechatronics: An
Introduction
CRC Press
2010
4.
Pallet E H J
Aircraft instruments,
principles and
applications
McGraw Hill
2002
5.
Myron Kyton
Walfred R Fried
Avionics Navigation
Systems
John Wiley and Sons
2000
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
https://www.oldfordcrewcabs.com/Book%20%20Understanding%20Automotiveelectronics.pdf/
https://www.goodreads.com/book/show/3733162 aircraft instruments/
https://www.books.google.co.in/books?isbn=8131728137.
https://www.books.google.co.in/books?isbn=0471547956
https://www.worldcat.org/title/ship stability powering and resistance/oclc/878149724
147
ME:MECHATRONICS
14MM65
NON DESTRUCTIVE EVALUATION

3
OBJECTIVES:
T o provide knowledge of NDT principles.
To describe the process of detection of surface and subsurface defects.
T o familiarize the interpretation of defects.
To discuss the control of breakdown of material.
To impart knowledge on handling testing equipments.

OUTCOMES:
understand the concepts of NDT.
describe Eddy current testing and acoustic emission.
know about magnetic particle testing and thermography.
know about ultrasonic testing.
describe radiography in material evaluation.

UNIT I
NON-DESTRUCTIVE TESTING: AN INTRODUCTION, VISUAL

INSPECTION AND LIQUID PENETRANT TESTING
6
Introduction to various non-destructive methods Comparison of destructive and non destructive tests
Comparison and selection of various NDT techniques Visual inspection Optical aids used for
visual inspection Applications Procedure for penetrant testing Physical principles Penetrant
testing materials Penetrant testing methods Water washable, post-emulsification methods
Applications.
UNIT II
EDDY CURRENT TESTING AND ACOUSTIC EMISSION
10
Principles Instrumentation for ECT Absolute, differential probes Techniques High sensitivity
techniques Multi frequency and phased array ECT Applications.
Principle of AET Instrumentation Applications Testing of metal pressure vessels, fatigue crack
detection in aerospace structures.
UNIT III
MAGNETIC PARTICLE TESTING AND THERMOGRAPHY
6
Principle of MPT Procedure used for testing a component Equipment used for MPT Magnetizing
techniques Applications.
Principle of thermography Infrared radiometry, active thermography measurements Applications
Imaging entrapped water under an epoxy coating Detection of carbon fiber contaminants.
UNIT IV
ULTRASONIC TESTING
11
Principle Ultrasonic transducers Ultrasonic flaw detection equipment Modes of display A-scan,
B- Scan, C-Scan Applications Inspection methods Normal incident pulse, echo inspection,
normal incident through transmission testing, angle beam pulse, echo testing and TOFD technique
Applications of normal beam inspection in detecting fatigue cracks, inclusions, slag, porosity and
intergranular cracks Codes, standards, specification and procedures.
UNIT V
RADIOGRAPHY
12
Principle of radiography X-ray and gamma ray sources Effect of radiation on film Film
processing Radiographic imaging Inspection techniques Single wall single image, double wall
penetration Multiwall penetration technique Real time radiography Codes, standards,
specification and safety procedures Interpretation and unsatisfactory radiography.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Krishnadas Nair C
G Prasad J
Non Destructive Testing and

Evaluation of Material
Tata Mcgraw Hill

Education
2011
2.
Baldev Raj
Jeyakumar T
Thavasimuthu M
Practical Non Destructive

Testing
Narosa Publishing
House New Delhi
2002
148
ME:MECHATRONICS
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Ultra Sonic Testing of

Materials
Springer Verlag
Publication
1969
Peter J Shull
Non Destructive Evaluation:

Theory, Techniques and
Application
Marcel Dekker
Inc
2002
3.
Barry Hull
Vernon john
Non Destructive Testing
Springer Verlag
Publication
2012
4.
Blitz J
Simpson G
Ultrasonic Methods of Non

destructive Testing
Springer
1996
5.
Paul E Mix
Introduction to Nondestructive
Testing: A Training Guide
Wiley
Interscience
2005
Sl.No.
Author(s)
1.
Krautkramer J
Krautkramer H
2.
Title of the Book
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
https://www.acc.spc.uchicago.edu/mae/References/Metallics/METALLURGY/Non
destructive%20testing.pdf
http://www.turkndt.org/sub/makale/ornek/a%20brief%20description%20of%20NDT.pdf
https://www.olympus ims.com/data/File/panametrics/UT technotes.en.pdf
https://www.inis.iaea.org/search/search.aspx?orig_q=RN:19100874
http://www pub.iaea.org/mtcd/publications/pdf/tcs 11.pdf
14MM66
DESIGN OF EXPERIMENTS AND TAGUCHI METHODS

3
0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To acquaint the concept of design of experiments.
To explain the single factor experiments.
To impart knowledge on multifactor experiments.
To discuss the design of special experiments.
To provide exposure to Taguchi methods.

OUTCOMES:
describe the aspects in the design of experiments.
develop single factor experiments.
design multi factor experiment systems.
develop response surfaces.
apply Taguchi methods in experimentation.

UNIT I
FUNDAMENTALS OF EXPERIMENTAL DESIGN
7
Review of statistics Experimentation Need, strategies, analysis of variance Basic principles of
design, terminology, steps in experimentation, sample size Normal probability plot Linear
regression models.
UNIT II
SINGLE FACTOR EXPERIMENTS
9
Completely randomized design Randomized block design Latin square design Statistical analysis,
estimation of model parameters, model adequacy checking and multiple comparisons.
UNIT III
MULTI FACTOR EXPERIMENTS
9
Two and three factor full factorial experiments Randomized block factorial design Experiments
with random factors Approximate F-tests Rules for expected mean squares 2k factorial
experiments.
149
ME:MECHATRONICS
UNIT IV
SPECIAL EXPERIMENTAL DESIGNS
9
Blocking and confounding in 2k designs Two level fractional factorial design, nested designs, split
plot design Response surface designs and analysis.
UNIT V
TAGUCHI METHODS
11
Taguchi methods Steps in experimentation, design using orthogonal arrays Data analysis
Robust design S/N ratios Multi-level factor designs Multi-response optimization.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
1.
Krishnaiah K
Shahabudeen P
2.
Montgomery D C
Title of the Book

Applied Design of
Experiments and Taguchi
Methods
Design and Analysis of
Experiments
Publisher
Year of
Publication
2012
John Wiley and Sons
2013
Publisher
Year of
Publication
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
1.
Jiju Antony
2.
Mark J Anderson
Patrick J Whitcomb
3.
Montgomery D C
4.
Keki R Bhote
Adi K Bhote
5.
Nicolo Belavendram
Title of the Book

Design of Experiments for
DOE Simplified : Practical
Tools for Effective
Experimentation
Experiments
World Class Quality: Using
Design of Experiments to
Make it Happen
Quality by Design: Taguchi
Techniques for Industrial
Experimentation
Elsevier
2014
Productivity Press
2007
John Wiley and Sons
2012
Amacom
2000
1995
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
https://www.statsoft.com/Textbook/Experimental Design
https://www.nutek us.com/DOE_Taguchi_Basic_Manual1.pdf
https://www.mne.psu.edu/simpson/courses/ie466/ie466.robust.handout.pdf
https://www.link.springer.com/chapter/10.1007%2F978 1 4615 5293 2_3#page 1
https://www.moresteam.com/toolbox/design of experiments.cfm
14MM67
ADVANCED CONTROL SYSTEMS

3
OBJECTIVES:
To introduce the design feedback controllers.
To familiarize with non-linear systems.
To explain the stability of control systems.
To impart knowledge different control methods.
To acquaint with variable structure systems.

OUTCOMES:
understand the concepts of conventional control system design.
know about the nonlinear systems and control.
analyze the stability of control systems.

150
ME:MECHATRONICS
identify appropriate control methods .

understand the concepts of sliding mode control.
UNIT I
STATE VARIABLE DESIGN
10
Design by state feedback Output feedback Pole assignment technique Design of state and output
feedback controllers Design of reduced and full order observers PI feedback Dynamic state
feedback.
UNIT II
NON LINEAR SYSTEMS
10
Non-linear Systems Common physical nonlinearities Linearization of nonlinear system using
feedback linearization Describing function for different nonlinearities Ideal relay, hysteresis, dead
zone, saturation Analysis of systems by describing function Stable and unstable limit cycle.
UNIT III
STABILITY OF CONTROL SYSTEMS
10
Phase plane analysis Isocline, delta method Stability concepts Equilibrium points BIBO and
asymptotic stability Direct method of Liapunov Application to non-linear problems Frequency
domain stability criteria Popovs method and its extensions.
UNIT IV
CONTROL METHODS
9
Adaptive control Optimal control Robust control Model predictive control Multivariable control
systems.
UNIT V
SLIDING MODE CONTROL
6
Variable structure systems Basic concepts Sliding modes in variable structure system conditions
for existence of sliding regions Case study Sliding mode approach to speed control of dc motors.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
1.
Ogata K
2.
Nagrath I J
Gopal M
Title of the Book

Modern Controls
Engineering
Control System
Engineering
Publisher
Year of
Publication
2012
Anshan Ltd
2008
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Tata McGraw Hill

Publishing Ltd
2013
2004
George J Thaler
Brown
Control Systems
Process Control
Modeling, Design and
Simulation
Automatic Control
System
Jaico Publications
2002
4.
Hasan A Khalil
Nonlinear Systems
2002
5.
Bakshi U A
Control Systems
Technical Publications
2009
1.
Gopal M
2.
Bequette B W
3.
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
https://www.nptel.ac.in/courses/108103007/
http://www.facstaff.bucknell.edu/mastascu/econtrolhtml/intro/intro1.html
http://www.mathworks.in/products/control/
http://www.acsdi.com/
http://www.video_demos.colostate.edu/controls/
151
ME:MECHATRONICS
14MM68
VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION
3
OBJECTIVES:
To explain the concepts of virtual instrumentation.
To brief about the concepts of programming in virtual instrumentation using LabVIEW.
To brief out the data acquisition in LabVIEW.
To impart knowledge on various instrument drivers and interfacing the system.
To describe basic applications of LabVIEW.

OUTCOMES:
review the concepts of virtual instrumentation.
program in LabVIEW with various tools.
describe with various data acquisition methods in LabVIEW.
interface the system with the external device using communication methods and instrument
drivers.
describe the various applications in LabVIEW.

UNIT I
FUNDAMENTALS OF VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION
9
Historical perspective Review of VI Concept Need Definition Architecture Merits
Traditional instruments versus VI Conventional and graphical programming LabVIEW and VI
Role of hardware and software Development of VI using LabVIEW Components of LabVIEW
Front panel and block diagram Data flow programming and GUI
UNIT II
PROGRAMMING IN VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION
9
Palettes Modular programming Editing and debugging VI Sub VI Data types Structures
Case and sequence structures Loops and charts Graphs Arrays and clusters String and file input
and output Formula nodes Shift registers Local and global variables State machine.
UNIT III
DATA ACQUISITION IN LabVIEW
9
Concepts of data acquisition Signals Types Signal conditioning Grounding and measurements
Hardware and software Configuration Analog and digital I/O Timers and counters DAQ
assistant DAQmx Concept of universal DAQ
UNIT IV
INSTRUMENT DRIVERS AND INTERFACING
9
GPIB IEEE 488 bus Hardware and software Instrument I/O assistant VISA Driver VI Serial
port communication Interface buses USB PCI PXI PCIX PCMCIA SCXI VXI LXI
Developing own instrument driver.
UNIT V
APPLICATIONS OF LabVIEW
9
Inter process communication Filtering Power spectrum Windowing Time and frequency
domain analysis Signal generation and processing.
Case Studies: Digital stop watch BCD to seven segment decoder PID controller.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
Jovitha Jerome
Using LabVIEW
2010
2.
Leonard Sokoloff
Applications in LabVIEW
2003
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
1.
Author(s)
Sanjay Gupta
Joseph John
Title of the Book

Using LabVIEW
152
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Tata McGraw
Hill
2006
ME:MECHATRONICS
2.
Robert H Bishop
Learning with LabVIEW
3.
Surekha P
Sumathi P
4.
Jeffery Y Beyon
5.
Brucemihure Austin
Texas
Using LabVIEW
LabVIEW Programming,
Data Acquisition and
Analysis (Virtual
Instrumentation)
LabVIEW for data
acquisition
Prentice Hall
of India
Acme
Learning
2003
2010
Pearson
Education
2000
Prentice Hall
of India
2001
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.ni.com/academic/labview_academy.html
http://www.ni.com/academic/students/learn
http://www.ni.com/electronics
http://www.ni.com/data acquisition/multifunction
http://www.ni.com/testcell
14MM69
ADVANCED MICROCONTROLLERS AND EMBEDDED SYSTEMS

3
0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To introduce the concepts in embedded systems.
To provide knowledge on ARM 7 Core processor.
To familarise ARM 9 processors.
To acquaint the models and languages of embedded systems.
To expose the applications of embedded systems.
OUTCOMES:
appreciate the embedded systems.
describe the ARM 7 processor.
describe the ARM 9 processor.
understand the high level languages in embedded systems.
identify application of embedded systems in real world situations.
UNIT I
7
Embedded system evolution trends Round Robin Round Robin with interrupt function
Rescheduling architecture DSPs Typical classifications Application scenarios of embedded
systems.
UNIT II
ARM 7 CORE
9
Introduction to ARM 7 Processor Internal architecture Modes of operations Register set
Instruction sets ARM thumb Thumb state registers Pipelining Applications.
UNIT III
ARM 9 CORE
7
Introduction about ARM 9 Processor DSP processor Sharc processor Internal architecture
Modes of operations Register set Pipelining AMBA Applications.
UNIT IV
REAL TIME MODELS, LANGUAGES AND OPERATING SYSTEMS
12
Task and task states Task and data Semaphore and shared data operating system services
Message queues timing functions Events Memory management Interrupt routines in an RTOS
environment Basic design using RTOS Models and languages State machine and state tables in
embedded design High level language descriptions Java based embedded system design Petrinet
models Real time languages The real time kernel OS tasks Task scheduling Kernel
services Real time languages and their features.
153
ME:MECHATRONICS
UNIT V
CASE STUDIES IN REAL TIME EMBEDDED SYSTEMS
9
Examples of time Critical and safety Critical embedded systems Applications in automation
Automotives Aerospace Medical and manufacturing
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
1.
Wayne Wolf
2.
Ball S R
Title of the Book

Computers as Components
Principles of Embedded
Computing System Design
Embedded Microprocessor
Systems Real World Design
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Morgan
Kaufmann
Publishers
Elsevier Science
and Technology
2009
2002
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Krishna C M
Kang G Shin
Real Time Systems
Tata McGraw
Hill
2009
2.
Frank Vahid
Tony D Givargis
Embedded System Design: A Unified

Hardware/Software Introduction
Wiley India Pvt

Ltd
2012
3.
Tim Wilmshurst
An Introduction to the Design of

Small-Scale Embedded Systems
Palgrave
2010
4.
Steve Furber
Arm System -on-Chip Architecture
5.
Andrew N Sloss
Dominic Symes
Chris Wright
ARM System Developer's Guide,

Designing and Optimizing System
Software
Pearson
Education
Morgan
Kaufmann
Publishers
2010
2004
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.microcontroller.com
http://www.engineersgarage.com/microcontroller
http://www.ti.com ARM Processors
http://www.analog.com/en/content/sharc_processor_architectural_overview/fca.html
http://www.electronicshub.org/microcontroller based mini projects ideas
14MM70
SMART MATERIALS AND STRUCTURES

3
OBJECTIVES:
To introduce smart materials.
To describe the principles of smart sensors.
To acquaint with smart actuators.
To familiarize the concept of smart structures.
To impart knowledge in design, analysis, manufacturing and application of smart materials.
OUTCOMES:
describe the smart materials.
identify smart sensors.
know about smart actuators.
understand the concept of smart structures.
recognize issues in integrating smart materials and devices.
154
ME:MECHATRONICS
UNIT I
SMART MATERIALS
12
Smart materials Piezoelectric materials Electrostrictive materials Magnetostrictive materials
Magneto electric materials Magneto rheological fluids Electro rheological fluids Shape memory
materials.
UNIT II
SMART SENSORS
7
Smart Sensors Accelerometers Force sensors Load cells Torque sensors Pressure sensors
Microphones Impact hammers MEMS sensors Fiber optic sensors Sensor arrays.
UNIT III
SMART ACTUATORS
8
Displacement actuators Force actuators Power actuators Vibration Dampers Shakers
Fluidic pumps Motors Smart transducers Ultrasonic transducers Sonic transducers Air
transducers.
UNIT IV
SMART STRUCTURES
10
Concept of smart structures Instrumented structures Sensing technologies Signal processing and
control of smart structures Vibration control using smart structures
UNIT V
CASE STUDIES FOR APPLICATION OF SMART MATERIALS
8
Case studies on incorporating design, analysis, manufacturing and application issues involved in
integrating smart materials and devices with signal processing Control capabilities to engineering
smart structures and products.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
1.
Srinivasan A V
2.
Moulson A J
Herbert J M
Title of the Book

Smart Structures: Analysis
and Design
Electro ceramics: Materials,
Properties, Applications
Publisher
Cambridge
University Press
John Wiley and
Sons
Year of
Publication
2001
2003
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Gautschi G
Piezoelectric Sensorics: Force,

Strain, Pressure, Acceleration and
Acoustic
Emission
Sensors,
Materials and Amplifiers
2.
Engdahl G
Handbook of Giant
Magnetostrictive Materials
Elsevier
2000
3.
Andre Preumont
Vibration Control of Active

Structures: An Introduction
Springer
2011
4.
Brian Culshaw
Smart Structures and Materials
Artech House
1996
5.
Donald J Leo
Engineering Analysis of Smart

Material Systems
Jhon Wiley
and Sons
2007
Springer
2013
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
http://www.nptel.ac.in/downloads/112104173/
http://www.nptel.ac.in/courses/112104040/pdf/lecture33.pdf
http://www.me.sc.edu/research/lamss/pdf/books/acsmst.pdf
http://www.ssdl.iitd.ac.in/vssdl/smart.pdf
5. http://www.citeseerx.ist.psu.edu/viewdoc/download?doi=10.1.1.206.4151&rep=rep1&type=p
df
155
ME:MECHATRONICS
156
BE: CIVIL ENGINEERING
TOTAL CREDITS: 186

SEMESTER I
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
12O101
12G102
12O103
12O104
12C105
12C106
3.5
40
60
100
40
60
100
3.5
40
60
100
C Programming I
Engineering
40
60
100
40
60
100
Engineering Drawing
3.5
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
17
24

Engineering
Technical English
PRACTICAL
12O111
12C112
12G113
C Programming Laboratory - I
TOTAL
SEMESTER II
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
12O201
3.5
40
60
100
12C202
40
60
100
12O203
40
60
100
12O204
C Programming II
40
60
100
12C205
3.5
40
60
100
12C206
Construction Materials
40
60
100
PRACTICAL
12O211
1.5
40
60
100
12H212
Physics Laboratory
1.5
40
60
100
12C213
Construction Materials Laboratory
1.5
40
60
100
12H214
1.5
40
60
100
TOTAL
18
14
26

157
SEMESTER III
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
12C301
3.5
40
60
100
12C302
Mechanics of Solids I
3.5
40
60
100
12C303
Mechanics of Fluids
3.5
40
60
100
12C304
Applied Geology
40
60
100
12C305
Water Supply Engineering
40
60
100
12C306
Surveying and Levelling
40
60
100
PRACTICAL
12C311
1.5
40
60
100
12C312
Survey Laboratory I
1.5
40
60
100
12C313
Building Drawing (Manual)
1.5
40
60
100
18
24
TOTAL
SEMESTER IV
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
12C401
3.5
40
60
100
12C402
Mechanics of Solids II
3.5
40
60
100
12C403
Applied Hydraulic Engineering
3.5
40
60
100
12C404
Wastewater Engineering
40
60
100
12C405
Construction Technology
40
60
100
12C406
Advanced Surveying
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
18
24
PRACTICAL
12C411
12C412
12C413
Computer Aided Building Drawing

Laboratory
Survey Laboratory II
TOTAL

158
SEMESTER V
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Credits
Maximum Marks
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
12C501
Structural Analysis I
3.5
40
60
100
12C502
Basic Structural Design
3.5
100
100
12C503
Transportation Engineering
40
60
100
12C504
Soil Mechanics
3.5
40
60
100
12C505
Design of RC Elements
Water Resource and Irrigation
Engineering
3.5
40
60
100
3.5
40
60
100
12C506
PRACTICAL
12O511
Soft Skills
1.5
100
100
12C512
Soil Mechanics Laboratory

Computer Aided Irrigation and
Environmental Drawing
TOTAL
1.5
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
18
25
12C513
SEMESTER VI
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
12C602

Engineering Ethics
Structural Analysis II
12C603
Design of Steel Structures
3.5
40
60
100
12C604
Foundation Engineering
3.5
40
60
100
12C605
Remote Sensing and GIS
40
60
100
12Cxxx
Elective I
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
1.5
100
100
18
24
12C601
40
60
100
3.5
40
60
100
PRACTICAL
12C611
12C612
12C651
Computer Applications in Civil

Engineering
Environmental Engineering
Laboratory
Mini Project
TOTAL

159
SEMESTER VII
Course
Code
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Course Title
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
12C702
Structural Dynamics and Earthquake

Engineering
Pre-stressed Concrete Structures
12C703
3.5
40
60
100
12C704
Building Services
40
60
100
12C705
Construction Management
40
60
100
12Cxxx
Elective II
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
12C701
40
60
100
3.5
40
60
100
PRACTICAL
12C712
Structural Design and Drafting

Laboratory
Concrete and Highway Laboratory
12C721
Comprehension
12C751
1.5
100
100
TOTAL
18
23.5
12C711
SEMESTER VIII
Course
Code
THEORY
12C801
12Cxxx
12Cxxx
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
Advanced Concrete Design

Elective III
3
3
1
0
0
0
3.5
3
40
40
60
60
100
100
Elective IV
40
60
100
12
40
60
100
TOTAL
12
15.5
PRACTICAL
12C851

160
LIST OF ELECTIVES
Course Code
Course Title
12C001
Hydrology
12C002
12C003
Housing Planning Management
12C004
Pavement Engineering
12C005
Ground Improvement Techniques
12C006
Soil Dynamics and Machine Foundation
12C007
Environmental Impact Assessment
12C008
Industrial Waste Management
12C009
Air Pollution Management
12C010
Solid Waste Management
12C011
Bridge Engineering
12C012
Tall Buildings
12C013
Prefabricated Structures
12C014
Industrial Structures
12C015
Smart Structures
12C016
Contract Laws and Regulations
12C017
Advanced Concrete Technology
12C018
Maintenance and Rehabilitation of Structures
12C019
Quality Control and Assurance in Construction
12C020
Green Building
161
SEMESTER V
12C501
STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS I
3
3.5
OBJECTIVES:
To introduce the students to basic theory and concepts of structural analysis.
To create a sound background in structural analysis and design.
To understand the basic behavior of skeletal structures and their response to applied loading.
To create an emphasis on development of analytical and intuitive skills.
OUTCOMES:
perform standard analysis of structural systems by various classical methods
apply basic technical concepts to identify, analyse and solve technical problems in beams and
frames
analyse parabolic and semi-circular arches for applied loads.
determine critical stress resultants due to concentrated and distributed moving loads for
determinate and indeterminate structures.
UNIT I
BASIC CONCEPTS OF STRUCTURES
9
Definition and determination of Static and Kinematic Indeterminacy Beams, Trusses and Frames
Degrees of Freedom Equilibrium and Kinematic Stability Principle of Superposition Principle of
least work Engessors theorem Application to simple problems of statically determinate beams
trusses and frames.
UNIT II
SLOPE DEFLECTION METHOD
9
Continuous beams and rigid frames (with and without sway) Symmetry and antisymmetry
Simplification for hinged end Support displacements.
UNIT III
MOMENT DISTRIBUTION METHOD
9
Distribution and carryover of moments Stiffness and carryover factors Analysis of continuous
beams Plane rigid frames with and without sway Naylors simplification.
UNIT IV
ARCHES
9
Introduction types of Arches Analysis of two hinged, three hinged and fixed arches Parabolic and
semi-circular arches Settlement and temperature effects.
UNIT V
MOVING LOADS AND INFLUENCE LINES

9
(DETERMINATE AND INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES)
Influence lines for reactions in statically determinate structures Influence lines for member forces in
pin jointed frames Influence lines for shear force and bending moment in beam sections Calculation
of critical stress resultants due to concentrated and distributed moving loads Muller Breslaus
principle Application of Muller Breslaus principle to determinate beams and continuous beams.
TOTAL: 45 + 15
TEXT BOOK:
Sl. No
Author(s)
1.
Vaidyanathan R
Perumal P
Title of the Book

Comprehensive structural
Analysis
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Lakshmi Publications,
New Delhi (Vol I and II)
2012
Publisher
Year of
Publication
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
Negi L S
Jangid R S
Structural Analysis
Tata McGraw-Hill
Publications, New Delhi
2011
2.
Wang C K
Intermediate Structures
McGraw-Hill New Delhi
2009
3.
Perumal P
Laxmi
Comprehensive Structural
Analysis Vol. 1 and Vol. 2
162

Publishers, New Delhi
2010
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.niceindia.com/ce_1302 -_structural_analysis_-_classical_methods.pdf
http://eu.he.wiley.com/WileyCDA/HigherEdTitle/productCd0470036087,courseListingNavId-290225.html
http://www.aseegsw.org/Proceedings/40.pdf
http://www.zu.edu.eg/zusted/1rst%20term/BOOK_PDF/chapter%203%20%28slope%20Defle
ction%29.pdf
http://www.facweb.iitkgp.ernet.in/~baidurya/CE21004/online_lecture_notes/m3l21.pdf
12C502
BASIC STRUCTURAL DESIGN

3
3.5
OBJECTIVES:
To make the students be familiar with the design concepts in Concrete, Timber, Masonry and
Steel.
To enrich the students in the knowledge on design of connections in steel structures.
To design tension and compression members made up of standard steel sections
To design masonry walls as per IS code and timber sections in compression, tension and
flexure
OUTCOMES:
be familiar in the design concepts of working stress method and limit state method of design
select suitable material among concrete, timber, steel for various structures
design steel Compression and Tension members with Bolted and welded connections as per IS
code
design masonry walls and determine stability of masonry piers and walls.
UNIT I
STRUCTURE AND DESIGN CONCEPTS
9
Classification of structures Function, material, shape Different structural systems Basic structural
requirements Stability, strength and stiffness Design process Codes of practice Concept of
Working stress method and Limit state method of design Probabilistic approach to design Design
Factor Design for strength, stiffness and stability considerations Bending of beams Choice
between different structural materials Concrete, timber, masonry and steel Structural loads and
Combinations Calculation of wind load for a structure.
UNIT II
STRUCTURAL STEEL CONNECTIONS
9
Steel standard sections properties
Bolted and Riveted connections Types of bolts permissible stresses for black bolt, HSFG bolts
Resistance of a bolt in single shear and double shear and bearing Riveted connections in joints.
Welded connections Principle of welding Methods of welding Weld symbols Edge preparation
Welding Electrodes Types of welded joints Strength of fillet and butt weld Design of welded
connections for lap and butt joint.
UNIT III
TENSION MEMBER
9
Types of sections Modes of failure Net effective sections for angles and Tee in tension Design of
connections in tension members Design of tension splice.
UNIT IV
COMPRESSION MEMBER
9
Types of compression members Theory of columns Slenderness ratio Design of single section and
compound section compression members Design of lacing and battening Design of column bases
Gusseted base.
UNIT V
MASONRY AND TIMBER
9
Mix proportions Compressive strength of mortars Basic compressive stress Design of masonry
walls Eccentrically loaded walls Shape factor for masonry units Stability of piers and walls
Design as per IS Codes Timber Allowable stresses in compression, tension and flexure Types of
joints with nails and bolts.
TOTAL: 45 + 15
163
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
Arya
Structural Design in Steel,

Masonry And Timber
2.
Subramanian N
3.
Duggal S K
Limit State Design of Steel

Structures
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Nemchand and Bros.,

Roorkee
New Delhi
Tata McGraw Hill, New
Delhi
2011
2011
2011
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
1.
Ramachandra N
Design of Steel Structures Vol.

I & II
Standard publishing
house, New Delhi
2.
Punmia B C
Ashok Kumar Jain
Arunkumar Jain
Design of Steel Structures Vol.

I & II
Arhant Publications,
Bombay
3.
Dayaratnam P
Year of
Publication
2010
2010
Brick and reinforced brick

Oxford and IBH
structures
publishing house
IS: 800 2007, Code of practice for general construction in steel (Third revision)
4.
2006
WEB URLS:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.engineeringcivil.com/concrete-mix-design-as-per-indian-standard-code.html
http://www.timbersystems.com/
http://www.steelconstruction.info/Designhttp://freevideolectures.com/Course/2679/Design-Of-Steel-Structures
http://nptel.ac.in/courses/IIT-madras/design_steel_structures_1/3_connecctions.pdf
12C503
TRANSPORTATION ENGINEERING
3
OBJECTIVES:
To acquire knowledge of land use and traffic for effective transportation planning.
To understand the application of relevant softwares in transportation engineering
To describe the various characteristics of transportation planning and the models used by
transportation planners.
To understand the different parameters of Highways and Railway engineering.
To have a basic knowledge about the structures in Airports and Harbours
OUTCOMES:
do Transport planning with the considerations of travel, forecasting process
simulate and model various transportation systems.
design highway with horizontal alignment, horizontal curves etc., in economical way.
do geometrical design of railway track, grading, super elevation etc., in an effective way
design airport, harbor and docks as per the requirements considering various factors
UNIT I
TRANSPORTATION SYSTEMS
9
Systems Approach to Transport Planning Interdependence of the Land use and Traffic Stages in
Transportation Planning Transport Planning Considerations Travel Forecasting Process Statutory
Land Use Planning Process Planning Issues.
UNIT II
TRANSPORTATION MODELING
9
Conventional Modeling Computer Simulation Modeling efforts Application of relevant softwares
in Transportation Planning Transportation Simulation Transportation Assignment - GIS Application
in Transportation Planning Rigid and Flexible Pavements Components and their Functions.
164
UNIT III
HIGHWAY ENGINEERING
9
Highway cross sectional elements Right of way, Carriage way, Camber, Kerbs, Shoulders and
Footpaths Factors controlling Highway alignment Design of Horizontal Alignment Horizontal
curves, Super Elevation, Widening of Pavements on Horizontal curves and Transition curves Sight
Distances Factors affecting Sight Distances, PIEV theory, Stopping Sight Distance (SSD), Overtaking
Sight Distance (OSD), Sight Distance at Intersections, Intermediate Sight Distance and Illumination
Sight Distance.
UNIT IV
RAILWAY ENGINEERING
9
Rails, Sleepers, Ballast Rail Fixtures and Fastenings, Coning of Wheels, Creep in Rails, Defects in
Rails Geometric Design of Railway Track, Gradient, Super Elevation, Widening of Gauge on curves
Turnouts, Points and Crossings Signaling Interlocking, Track Circuiting Basic Planning for
MRTS and Suburban Railways Construction and maintenance of tracks Electric Traction.
UNIT V
AIRPORT AND HARBOUR ENGINEERING
9
Airport: Basics of Runway and taxiway design Orientation, Cross wind component, Wind rose
Diagram.
Harbour: Elements of Harbour Types of Harbours Size and Shape of harbours Planning of
Harbours and Ports.
Docks: General aspects of selection and design Piers, wharves, quay walls, jetties, dolphins, trestle,
moles, fenders and moorings, locks and lock gates.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No
Author(s)
1.
Partha
Chakroborty
2.
Subramaniam K P
3.
Bindra S P
Title of the Book

Principles of
Transportation
Engineering 1st Edition
Highway, Railway,
Airport and Harbour
engineering
Docks and Harbour
Engineering
Publisher
Year of
Publication

Limited, New Delhi
2011
Scitech publications
Pvt.Ltd, Chennai
2010
Dhanpat Rai Publications

Pvt Ltd, New Delhi
2011
Publisher
Year of
Publication
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No
Author(s)
Vazirani and
Chandola S P
Pratab
Mohapatra K J
et al.,
Lall B
Kent,Khisty C
Jotin
1.
2.
3.
Title of the Book

Transportation
Engineering Vol. 1

Delhi
2010
"Introduction to System
Dynamics Modeling
University Press, Hydrabad
2006
Transportation
Engineering: An
Introduction
Prentice-Hall, New Jersey
2011
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://ocw.mit.edu/courses/civil-and-environmental-engineering/1-221j-transportation-systems-fall2004/lecture-notes/.
http://ocw.tudelft.nl/fileadmin/ocw/courses/TransportationandSpatialModelling/res00018/trans
portation4801.pdf.
http://www.cdeep.iitb.ac.in/nptel/Civil%20Engineering/Transportation%20Engg%201/72homes/02-home.html.
http://www.auupdates.com/2013/11/ce2303-railways-airport-and-harbour.html.
http://www.studylecturenotes.com/engineering/civil-enginering/transportation-engineering.
165
12C504
SOIL MECHANICS
3
3.5
OBJECTIVES:
To introduce the basic principles of behaviour of soil.
To demonstrate skill in soil permeability, compaction measurement and skills in solution of
seepage related problems.
To study stress concepts to solve elementary geotechnical problems.
OUTCOMES:
give an engineering classification of given soil.
to calculate water flow through ground and understand the effect of seepage on the stability of
structures.
determine soil deformation parameters and calculation settlement magnitude and rate of
settlement.
gain in know on shear stress of soil and slope protection measures.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO SOIL AND PROPERITIES
9
Nature of Soil Phase relation Sieve analysis Atterberg limits Classification for engineering
purposes BIS Classification system Sedimentation analysis Soil compaction Factors affecting
compaction Field compaction methods and monitoring.
UNIT II
SOIL WATER AND WATER FLOW
9
Soil water Various forms Influence of clay minerals Capillary rise Suction Effective stress
concepts in soil Total, neutral and effective stress distribution in soil Permeability Darcys Law
Co-efficient of Permeability Quick sand condition Seepage Laplace Equation Introduction to
flow nets Properties and uses Application to simple problems.
UNIT III
STRESS DISTRIBUTION, COMPRESSIBILITY AND SETTLEMENT
9
Stress distribution in soil media Boussinesque formula Stress due to line load and Circular and
rectangular loaded area Use of influence charts Westergaard equation for point load Terzaghis
one dimensional consolidation theory Immediate and consolidation settlement Co-efficient of
consolidation methods.
UNIT IV
SHEAR STRENGTH
9
Shear strength of cohesive and cohesion less soils Mohr Coulomb failure theory Saturated soil
Strength parameters Measurement of shear strength, direct shear, Triaxial compression, UCC and
Vane shear tests Types of shear tests based on drainage and their applicability Drained and
undrained behaviour of clay and sand
UNIT V
SLOPE STABILITY
9
Slope failure mechanisms Modes Infinite slopes Finite slopes Total and effective stress analysis
Stability analysis for purely cohesive and C- soils Method of slices Swedish Circle method
Friction circle method Stability number Problems Slope protection measures.
TOTAL: 45 + 15
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Standard Publishers and
stributors, NewDelhi.
Publishers,New Delhi
1.
Arora.K R
Soil Mechanics and Foundation

Engineering
2.
Venkatramaia C
Geotechnical Engineering
Year of
Publication
2012
2011
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
1.
Author(s)
Gopal Ranjan
Rao A S R
Title of the Book

Basic and Applied Soil
Mechanics
166
Publisher
Year of
Publication
2011
2.
Punmia B C
Soil Mechanics and

Foundations
3.
Coduto D P
Geotechnical Engineering
Principles and Practices
4.
McCarthy D F
5.
Das B M
Essentials of Soil Mechanics

and Foundations Basic
Geotechniques
Principles of Geotechnical
Engineering
Laxmi Publications Pvt.

Ltd New Delhi
Private Limited New
Delhi
2011
2010
Prentice-Hall New
Jersey, Sixth Edition.
2011
Thomas Books / Cole,

Fifth edition
2010
WEB URLs:
1. http://www.icivilengineer.com/Geotechnical_Engineering/Soil_Mechanics
2. http://www.geoengineer.org/booksale/54.html
3. http://www.surechem.com.my/download/eijkelkamp/P1/P1-07e.pdf
4. http://www.aboutcivil.com/Sieve-analysis-and-soil-classification.html
5. http://www.geotechlinks.com/ln.php
12C505
DESIGN OF RC ELEMENTS
3
3.5
OBJECTIVES:
To enrich the knowledge of IS codal provisions for the various methods of design of RC
elements.
To introduce the design concept of working stress method and limit state method.
To design the flexural members for the given loading.
To design columns and footing for axial, uniaxial and biaxial bending.
OUTCOMES:
design the structures as per Indian standard codes and recommendation.
be familiar in the design concepts and methods to design RC elements.
design the basic elements of reinforced concrete structures such as beams, columns and slabs.
understand the behaviour of the structural members under shear and torsion.
design different types of columns and footings.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO BASIC CONCEPTS
9
Concept of working stress method Concept of limit state method Advantages of Limit State Method
over other methods Design codes and specifications Limit State design philosophy as detailed in IS
code Limit State of Collapse and Serviceability.
UNIT II
LIMIT STATE DESIGN OF BEAMS AND SLABS
9
Limit state design of singly, doubly reinforced beams and flanged beams Analysis and design of one
way and two way rectangular slab subjected to uniformly distributed load for various boundary
conditions and corner effects.
UNIT III
LIMIT STATE DESIGN OF BOND, ANCHORAGE, SHEAR AND TORSION 9
Behaviour of RC members in bond and Anchorage Design requirements as per current code
Behaviour of RC beams in shear and torsion Design of RC members for combined bending shear and
torsion Standard method of detailing RC beams, slabs and columns Special requirements of
detailing with reference to erection process.
UNIT IV
LIMIT STATE DESIGN OF COLUMNS
9
Types of columns Slenderness ratio Design of short column for axial load and uniaxial and biaxial
bending Design of long columns.
UNIT V
LIMIT STATE DESIGN OF FOOTING
9
Types of Footings Design of wall footing Design of isolated footing Design of combined
rectangular and trapezoidal footing for two columns only.
TOTAL: 45 + 15
167
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
Unnikrishnan Pillai S
Devdas Menon
Reinforced
Concrete Design
Tata McGraw-Hill
Publishing Company Ltd,
New Delhi
2.
Ramamrutham S
Design of
Reinforced
Concrete Structures
Dhanpat Rai Publishing

Company, New Delhi
Year of
Publication
Publisher
2012
2012
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
Dayaratnam P
Design of reinforced
concrete structures
2.
Krishna Raju N
Design of Reinforced
Concrete Structures
3.
Varghese P C
Limit State Design of

Reinforced Concrete
4.
Sinha S N
Reinforced Concrete
Design
Year of
Publication
Publisher
Oxford & IBH Pub Co, New
Delhi
CBS Publishers and
Distributors,
New Delhi
Prentice Hall of India Pvt Ltd,
New Delhi
Tata McGraw-Hill
Publishing, Company Ltd
New Delhi
2011
2010
2009
2010
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://nptel.iitm.ac.in/courses/IITMADRAS/Design_Steel_Structures_II/8_foundation_of_towers/ 7_design_procedures.pdf
http://www.sbe.napier.ac.uk/projects/piledesign/guide/index.htm
http://www.archiexpo.com/architecture-design-manufacturer/reinforced-concrete-element3328.html
http://nptel.iitk.ac.in/courses/Webcoursecontents/IIT%20Kharagpur/Design%20of%20Con%2
0Struc/pdf/m10l25.pdf
http://nptel.ac.in/courses/105105105/
12C506
WATER RESOURCES AND IRRIGATION ENGINEERING

3
3.5
OBJECTIVES:
To understand planning concepts of water resources and collection of data for water resource
development.
To know about the different sources of water and its management.
To understand about various conservation techniques and its advantages.
To understand about the water management procedures for the purpose of irrigation.
OUTCOMES:
learn about different phases in Water Resources such as planning and collection of relevant
data on water resources.
manage the surface and sub-surface water usage.
estimate the water requirement for irrigation, drinking and navigation.
implement the various techniques for water conservation and harvesting.
understand the types of irrigation methods based on water resources.
UNIT I
WATER RESOURCES PLANNING
9
Water resources Survey Direct source Indirect source Desalination process Description of Water
Resources Planning Economics of Water Resources Planning National Water Policy Collection of
Meteorological data For Water Resources Development
168
UNIT II
GROUND WATER AND SURFACE WATER MANAGEMENT
9
Ground water in different formations Ground water control Ground water quality Ground water
development and management Surface water sources Lake, pond, river, stream, wetland, tidal
waters Storm water facilities River flood control improvements Drainage management.
UNIT III
WATER CONSERVATION AND HARVESTING
9
Types and design of water conservation Water harvesting structures for different types of catchments
Rainfall pits Rainwater harvesting Catchment and roof top harvesting Harvesting structures
Soil moisture conservation Check dams Artificial recharge Farm ponds Percolation tanks.
UNIT IV
IRRIGATION
9
Introduction Need and Mode of Irrigation Duty and Delta Irrigation Efficiencies Crop and crop
seasons Types of Irrigation Methods Weirs Impounding structures Classification of canals.
UNIT V
IRRIGATION WATER MANAGEMENT
9
Need for Optimization of Water use On Farm Development Works Percolation Ponds
Participatory Irrigation Management Water users associations Performance evaluation.
TOTAL: 45 +15
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
1.
Patel A S
Shah D L
2.
Dilip Kumar
Majumdar
Title of the Book

Water Management:
Conservation, Harvesting and
Artificial Recharge
Irrigation Water Management:
Principles and Practice
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Dhanpat Rai
Publications, New
Delhi
2009
Prentice-Hall of India
Pvt.Ltd, New Delhi
2014
Publisher
Year of
Publication
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
1.
Linsley R F
Franzini J B
2.
Garg S K
3.
Sharma R K
Title of the Book

Water Resources Engineering
Irrigation Engineering and
Hydraulic Structures
Irrigation Engineering and
Hydraulic Structures
Mc Graw Hill inc,

New Delhi
Khanna Publications,
New Delhi
Oxford and IBH
Publishing, New Delhi
2009
2011
2011
WEB URLs:
1. http://web.iitd.ac.in/~chahar/Courses/CEL251/Precipitation.pdfhttp://www.irc.recommendation
.html
2. http://www.republicanrivercompact.org/v12p/html/ch08.html
3. http://www.google.co.in/#hl=enandbiw=1024andbih=578andq=ground+water+hydrologyanda
q=fandaqi
4. http://nptel.iitm.ac.in/courses/Webcoursecontents/IIT%20Kharagpur/Water%20Resource%20
Engg
5. http://www.ext.colostate.edu/pubs/garden/07239.html
12O511
SOFT SKILLS
169
12C512
SOIL MECHANICS LABORATORY

0
1.5
OBJECTIVES:
To study the tests on coarse grained and fine grained soil.
To study the tests on different parameters of soil.
To determine the physical properties of soils.
To determine the Engineering properties of soil.
OUTCOMES:
identify and classify the various soil types.
acquire the capacity to test bearing capacity of various soil types.
acquire the capacity to assess the engineering and index properties.
do hydrometer analysis for fine grained soil.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Moisture Content Determination
2. Specific Gravity and Relative Density test for sand
3. Sieve Analysis for Coarse grained soil
4. Unconfined compression test for cohesive soil
5. Consistency Limits and Indices
6. Field Density Tests Sand Replacement method and Core cutter method
7. Permeability test Constant Head method
8. Permeability test Variable Head method
9. Standard Proctors Compaction test
10. Direct Shear test
11. Vane Shear test for Cohesive soil
12. Hydrometer Analysis for Fine grained soil (Demo)
13. Triaxial Compression test (Demo)
14. Consolidation test (Demo)
12C513
COMPUTER AIDED IRRIGATION AND ENVIRONMENTAL DRAWING

0
OBJECTIVES:
To design and draw the various structures used in Irrigation.
To design and draw the various structures used in water purification plant.
To design and draw the various structures used in waste water treatment plant.
OUTCOMES:
design various components of Irrigation and Environmental Engineering structures.
plan and draw water treatment unit with sedimentation aided with coagulation.
design and draw septic tank as per the requirements.
design and draw a general layout of wastewater treatment plant.
Irrigation Engineering Drawing
1. Infiltration gallery
2. Tank surplus weir
3. Canal Drop
4. Canal regulator
5. Siphon aqueduct
Design and Drawing of Environmental Engineering
1. General layout of water and waste treatment plants
2. Sedimentation aided with coagulation
3. Slow sand filter
4. Rapid sand filter
5. Trickling filter
6. Septic tank
170
1.5
SEMESTER VI
ENGINEERING ETHICS
12C602
STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS II
3
3.5
OBJECTIVES:
To introduce the modern methods of structural Analysis.
To introduce the Matrix applications in structural analysis.
To do plastic analysis of indeterminate beams and frames
To get introduction on Finite Element Methods of analysis of structures.
OUTCOMES:
differentiate between determinate and indeterminate structures.
analyze beams and frames by matrix stiffness method.
perform analysis of space trusses using method of tension co-efficient.
perform plastic analysis of indeterminate beams and frames.
apply finite element method in the analysis of beam and truss element.
UNIT I
FLEXIBILITY METHOD FOR INDETERMINATE FRAMES
9
Equilibrium and compatibility Determinate v/s Indeterminate structures Indeterminacy primary
structure compatibility conditions Analysis of indeterminate pin jointed main frames, continuous
beams, rigid jointed plane frames (with redundancy restricted to 2)
UNIT II
MATRIX STIFFNESS METHOD
9
Elements and global stiffness matrices Analysis of continuous beams Coordinate transformations
rotation matrix transformations of stiffness matrices, load vectors and displacement vectors
Analysis of pin jointed plane frames and rigid frames (with degree of freedom restricted to 2).
UNIT III
SPACE AND CABLE STRUCTURES
9
Analysis of space trusses using method of tension coefficients Beams curved in plan suspension
cables Cables with two and three hinged stiffening girders Upper and lower bound theorems.
UNIT IV
PLASTIC ANALYSIS OF STRUCURES
9
Statically indeterminate Axial problems Beams in pure bending Plastic moment of resistance
plastic modulus Shape factor Load factor Classic hinge and mechanism Plastic analysis of
indeterminate beams and frames.
UNIT V
FINITE ELEMENT METHOD
9
Introduction Descritisation of a structure Displacement functions Truss element Beam element
Plane stress and plane strain triangular and rectangular elements.
TOTAL: 45 + 15
TEXT BOOK :
Sl.No
1.
Authors
Vaidyanathan R
Perumal P
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Comprehensive Structural
Analysis
Lakshmi Publications
New Delhi (Vol I and II)
2012
171
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No
Negi L S
Jangid R S
Gaghali A
Nebille A M
Brown T G
Vazirani V N
Ratwani M M
Pandit G S
Guptha S P
1.
2.
3.
4.
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Structural Analysis
Tata McGraw hill

publications New Delhi
2010
Structural Analysis A unified

classical and matrix approach
Spon press, London
2010
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Analysis of structures
Structural Analysis A
matrix approach
Khanna publishers,
New Delhi
Tata McGraw Hill,
New Delhi
2011
2010
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.eolss.net/ebooks/Sample%20Chapters/C05/E6-37-03-04.pdf
http://203.159.12.3/interimcodes/coursecatalog/CourseDetailInfo.cfm?Reverse=off&CCode=CE7
2.11
www.sut.ac.th/engineering/civil/courseonline/.../09_indeterminate.pdf
http://nptel.ac.in/courses/Webcoursecontents/IIT%20Kharagpur/Structural%20Analysis/pdf/m1l1.pdf
12C603
DESIGN OF STEEL STRUCTURES

3
3.5
OBJECTIVES:
To make the students be familiar with the limit state method of design of steel structures.
To design the steel connections for stability strength and serviceability.
To design industrial buildings and roof trusses with all necessary elements.
To design welded plate girder and gantry girder.
OUTCOMES:
design bolted and welded connections as per IS code.
design laterally supported and laterally unsupported beams using appropriate standards and
codes.
design industrial buildings with all necessary considerations.
design purlins and elements of trusses based on design principles for steel roof truss.
UNIT I
CONNECTIONS
9
Properties of steel Structural steel sections Metal joining methods using rivets, welding, bolting
Design of bolted and welded connections Moment Resistance Connections Eccentric connections
Efficiency of joints High Strength Friction Grip Joints.
UNIT II
BEAMS
9
Design of laterally supported beams Plastic moment carrying capacity Bending strength and shear
strength Web buckling Web crippling Built up beams Design of laterally unsupported beams
Design strength and Effective length Design of grillage beams.
UNIT III
INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS
9
Introduction Selection of Roofing and Wall materials Selection of bay width Structural framing
Purlins Grid and Eve structures Plain Trusses Floor plates End bearings Structural layout of
an Industry.
UNIT IV
PLATE GIRDER AND GANTRY GIRDER
9
Introduction Elements of plate girder General design consideration Shear buckling resistance of
web End panel design Design of welded plate girder Design of Stiffeners Gantry Girder
Profile of Gantry girder Specifications and Design principles of gantry girder.
172
UNIT V
ROOF TRUSSES
9
Design principles for steel roof truss Different shapes of trusses for Different spans Roof Trusses
Roof and side coverings Design loads, design of purlin and elements of trusses.
TOTAL: 45 + 15
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No
Author(s)
1.
Bhavikatti S S
2.
Subramanian N
Title of the Book

Design of Steel
Structures by LSD
method
Design of Steel
Structures
Publisher
Year of
Publication
I K International Pvt Ltd
2011
Oxford university Press,

United Kingdom
2008
Publisher
Year of
Publication
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
Ramachandran S
Design of Steel
Structures
2.
Gaylord E H
Gaylord N C
Stallmeyer J E
Design of Steel
Structures
3.
Dayaratnam R
Design of Steel
Structures
Khanna Publishers Vol I

and II, New Delhi
McGraw-Hill
Publications, Third
Edition, New Delhi
S.Chand and Company,
New Delhi
2010
2010
2011
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://mysite.du.edu/~jcalvert/tech/rivets.htm
http://www.inti.gob.ar/cirsoc/pdf/acero/s154content.pdf
http://elearning.vtu.ac.in/13/enotes/dss/tension%20members%20final%20--%20raviraj.s.pdf
http://grietinfo.in/projects/main/civil2012/structural%20analysis%20and%20design%20of%2
0an%20industrial%20building.pdf
http://nptel.ac.in/courses/IITMADRAS/Design_Steel_Structures_II/2_industrial_building/4_r
oof_systems.pdf
12C604
FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
3
3.5
OBJECTIVES:
To study the importance of foundation in structures.
To familiarize the students with essential steps involved in geotechnical site investigation.
To study the Exploration methods, Samplers and In-situ methods of Soil investigation.
To study design of shallow and deep foundations based on the soil conditions and loading
pattern.
To study the Earth pressure theories and Graphical methods of Retaining walls.
OUTCOMES:
investigate the site with proper sampling techniques.
assess the bearing capacity of soil at a given location in order to suggest the foundation.
design various foundations based on the soil conditions at the site.
have the knowledge of Earth pressure theories and Graphical methods for the stability of
Retaining walls.
UNIT I
SITE INVESTIGATION AND SELECTION OF FOUNDATION
9
Scope and objectives Methods of exploration Augor and boring Wash boring and percussion
Drilling - Rotatory drilling Depth of boring Spacing of bore hole Sampling Representative and
undisturbed sampling Sampling techniques Split spoon sampler, Thin tube sampler, Stationary
piston sampler Bore log report Selection of foundation based on soil condition.
173
UNIT II
SHALLOW FOUNDATION
9
Introduction Location and depth of foundation Codal provisions Bearing capacity of shallow
foundation on homogeneous deposits Terzaghis formula, BIS formula and Skemptons equation and
Meyerhoffs equation Factors affecting bearing capacity Problems Bearing Capacity from insitu
tests (SPT, SCPT,DCPT and Plate load) Allowable bearing pressure.
UNIT III
FOOTINGS AND SETTLEMNET
9
Types of foundation Contact pressure distribution below footings and raft Design of Isolated and
Combined footings Types Proportioning Design of Mat foundation Types Use Floating
foundation. Settlement Components of settlement Determination of settlement of foundations on
granular and clay deposits Allowable settlements Codal provision Methods of minimising
settlement, differential settlement.
UNIT IV
PILES
9
Types of piles and their function Factors influencing the selection of pile Load Carrying capacity of
singlepile in granular and cohesive soil Static formula Dynamic formulae (Engineering news and
Hileys) Negative skin friction Group capacity by different methods (Felds rule, Converse Labarra
formula and block failure criterion) Pile Cap Settlement of pile groups Pile load test Under
reamed piles.
UNIT V
RETAINING WALLS
9
Plastic equilibrium in soils Active and passive states Rankines theory Cohesionless and cohesive
soil - Coloumbs wedge theory Earth pressure on retaining walls of simple configurations Graphical
methods (Rebhann and Culmann Only) Stability of retaining walls.
TOTAL: 45 + 15
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No
Author(s)
1.
Venkatramaiah C
2.
Arora.K R
Title of the Book

Geotechnical
Engineering
Soil Mechanics and
Publisher
Standard Publishers and
Distributors, NewDelhi.
Year of
Publication
2011
2010
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No
Author(s)
1.
Punmia B C
2.
Das B M
3.
Varghese P C
4.
Murthy V N S
5.
Gopal Ranjan
Rao A S R
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Soil Mechanics and

Foundations
Principles of Foundation
Engineering (Fifth
edition)
Laxmi Publications Pvt. Ltd,

New Delhi
2011
Thomson Brooks / Cole,

Boston
2010
Soil Mechanics and
Basic and Applied Soil
Mechanics

Limited, NewDelhi
UBS Publishers Distribution
Ltd, New Delhi
Wiley Eastern Ltd,
New Delhi
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://nptel.iitm.ac.in/Civil_Eng/Civilpdfs/Foundation%20Engineering.pdf
www.icivilengineer.com/Engineering/Foundation_Engineering
http://infohost.nmt.edu/~Mehrdad/foundation/assets/pdf/RA01.pdf
http://www.ekt.bme.hu/ArchEng/Foundations%20%28S-D%29-s.pdf
http://www.fairfaxcounty.gov/dpwes/publications/retainingwall/details.pdf
174
2013
2010
2011
12C605
REMOTE SENSING AND GIS

3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the concepts of GIS and Remote sensing.
To understand the principles and processes of hyper spectral remote sensing for earth
resources.
To provide exposure to data models and data structures in GIS.
To introduce various Raster and Vector Analysis capabilities.
OUTCOMES:
use various Remote Sensing process and tools in a effective way.
able to develop GIS with hardware and software, using various components of GIS
apply GIS concepts to asses various natural resources.
to do simple and spatial analysis with the help of GIS.
UNIT I
EMR AND ITS INTERACTION WITH ATMOSPHERE AND

EARTH MATERIAL
9
Definition of remote sensing and its components Electromagnetic spectrum wave length regions
important to remote sensing Wave theory, Particle theory, Stefan Boltzman and Weins
Displacement Law Atmospheric scattering, absorption Atmospheric windows spectral signature
concepts Typical spectral reflective characteristics of water, vegetation and soil.
UNIT II
PLATFORMS, SENSORS AND IMAGE INTERPRETATION
9
Types of platforms Orbit types, Sun-synchronous and Geosynchronous Passive and Active sensors
Resolution concept Pay load description of important Earth Resources and Meteorological satellites
Airborne and space borne TIR and microwave sensors Types of Data Products Types of image
interpretation Basic elements of image interpretation.
UNIT III
GIS TECHNIQUE AND DATA INPUT
9
MAP Types of Maps Development of GIS Components of GIS Hardware, software,
organisation Types of data Spatial and non-spatial data Point, Line and Polygon Vector and
Raster data Database structures Files Vector and Raster data structures.
UNIT IV
DATA ANALYSIS AND DATA OUTPUT
9
Data Retrieval Query Simple Analysis Spatial Analysis Overlay Vector Data Analysis Raster
Data Analysis Data Output Types Devices used Raster and Vector Display Devices Printers
Plotters Photo write Devices.
UNIT V
GIS APPLICATIONS IN RESOURCE
9
Fields of Applications Natural Resources Agriculture Soil Water Resources Wasteland
Management Social Resources Cadastral Records LIS.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Anji Reddy M
Remote Sensing and

Geographical Information
System
B S Publications,
Hyderabad
2011
2.
Lilles T M
Kiefer R W
Chipman J W
Remote Sensing and Image

Interpretation
John Willey and

Sons (Asia), New
Delhi.
2010
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No
Authors
1.
Paul A Longley
Michael F Good child
Title of the Book

Systems
175
Publisher
John Willey and
Sons (Asia), New
Delhi.
Year of
Publication
2010
2.
Burrough P A
3.
Lo C P
Yeung A K W
Principles of GIS for Land

Resources Assessment
Concepts and Techniques of
Geographic Information
Systems
Oxford Publication,
New Delhi
2010
Prentice-Hall of
India, New Delhi
2009
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.gisdevelopment.net/tutorials
http://www.gis.com/content/what-gis
http://www.gis.com/content/learn-gis
http://www.eicinformation.org/internal.asp?id=15&type=normal&title=GIS+Data+India
http://www.innovativegis.com/basis/present/Global/global3.pdf
12C611
COMPUTER APPLICATIONS IN CIVIL ENGINEERING

0
1.5
1.5
OBJECTIVES:
To study 2D/3D analysis of various structural components using software packages.
To acquire knowledge about structural detailing of retaining wall.
To execute structural design of RC elements using package program.
OUTCOMES:
practice the software package for analysis and design.
analyze the 2D framed structures for various load combinations.
analyze the 3D framed structures for various load combinations.
design the RCC elements by using package programs and preparing excel spread sheet.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Analysis and Design of continuous beam.
2. Analysis of RCC 2D multi frame.
3. Analysis and design of 2D frame.
4. Analysis and design of 2D Steel structures.
5. Analysis of RCC 3D structures.
6. Design of RCC Columns and Footings.
7. Analysis of Truss.
8. Structural Detailing of RCC cantilever retaining wall.
9. Implementation of program for Singly Reinforced beam using Excel spread sheet.
10. Implementation of program for doubly Reinforced beam using Excel spread sheet.
11. Implementation of program for One Way Slab using Excel spread sheet.
12. Implementation of program for Two Way Slab using Excel spread sheet.
13. Concrete Mix design for M25 & M30 grade.
12C612
ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERING LABORATORY

0
OBJECTIVES:
To estimate the physical impurities present in the water/waste water.
To compute the chemical parameters present in the water/waste water.
To calculate the amount of available chlorine in bleaching powder for the given sample.
OUTCOMES:
calculate the optimum coagulant dosage for the removal of solids.
describe the bacteriological analysis of water.
analyze dissolved oxygen in water.
find suspended, volatile and fixed solids present in water.
176
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Determination of pH, turbidity and Hardness.
2. Determination of iron & fluoride in water.
3. Determination of residual chlorine in water.
4. Determination of Chlorides.
5. Determination of Alkalinity/Acidity.
6. Determination of Sulphate.
7. Determination of Optimum Coagulant Dosage.
8. Determination of available Chlorine in Bleaching powder.
9. Determination of dissolved oxygen in water.
10. Determination of suspended, volatile and fixed solids.
11. BOD test (Demo).
12. COD test (Demo).
12A651/12M651/12C651/12L651/12T651/12E651/12N651/12P651/12F651
MINI PROJECT
ELECTIVES
12C001
HYDROLOGY
3
OBJECTIVES:
To have a knowledge about rainfall and precipitation.
To know about various types of hydrographs and its derivations.
To understand about flood routing and control measures.
OUTCOMES:
measure the amount of rainfall and precipitation.
understand the concepts of hydrographs and its classification.
can able to do the monitoring and control the flood.
to identify the types of aquifers and its nature.
UNIT I
PRECIPITATION
9
Hydrologic cycle Types of precipitation Forms of precipitation Measurement of Rainfall Spatial
measurement methods Temporal measurement methods Frequency analysis of point rainfall
Intensity, duration and frequency relationship Probable maximum precipitation.
UNIT II
ABSTRACTION FROM PRECIPITATION
9
Losses from precipitation Evaporation process Reservoir evaporation Infiltration process
Infiltration capacity Measurement of infiltration Infiltration indices Effective rainfall.
UNIT III
HYDROGRAPHS
9
Factors affecting Hydrograph Base flow separation Unit hydrograph Derivation of unit hydrograph
S curve hydrograph Unit hydrograph of different deviations Synthetic Unit Hydrograph.
UNIT IV
FLOODS AND FLOOD ROUTING
9
Flood frequency studies Recurrence interval Gumbels method Flood routing Reservoir flood
routing Muskingums Channel Routing Flood control.
UNIT V
GROUND WATER HYDROLOGY
9
Types of aquifers Darcys law Dupuits assumptions Confined Aquifer Unconfined Aquifer
Recuperation test Transmissibility Specific capacity Pumping test Steady flow analysis only.
TOTAL: 45
177
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Raghunath H M
Hydrology
Wiley Eastern Ltd,

New Delhi
2013
2.
Jaya Rami Reddy P
A Text book of
Hydrology
Laxmi Publications
(P) Ltd, New Delhi
2011
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
Subramanya K
Engineering Hydrology
2.
Chow V T Maidment
Hydrology for
Engineers
Singh V P
Hydrology
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Tata McGraw-Hill
Publishing Co Ltd,
New Delhi
McGraw-Hill Inc Ltd,
New Delhi
McGraw-Hill Inc Ltd,
New Delhi
2013
2008
2009
WEB URLs:
1. http://web.iitd.ac.in/~chahar/Courses/CEL251/Precipitation.pdf
2. http://www.republicanrivercompact.org/v12p/html/ch08.html
3. http://www.google.co.in/#hl=enandbiw=1024andbih=578andq=ground+water+hydrologyanda
q=fandaqi
4. www.site.uottawa.ca/~ivan/gedir-tpds.pdf
5. www.grida.no/climate/ipcc_tar/wg2/pdf/wg2tarchap4.pdf
12C002
TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT

3
OBJECTIVES:
To know about quality aspects in various departments.
To understand about principles of quality accessible for various management system.
To study about various tools and techniques useful for quality management.
To know about various quality systems.
OUTCOMES:
implement various management tools and techniques in various projects.
use various principles of management in total quality control.
incorporate various quality systems in managing various aspects.
apply management skills and its usage in all types of projects.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Introduction Need for quality Evolution of quality Definition of quality Dimensions of
manufacturing and service quality Basic concepts of TQM Definition of TQM TQM Framework
Contributions of Deming, Juran and Crosby Barriers to TQM.
UNIT II
TQM PRINCIPLES
9
Leadership Strategic quality planning, Quality statements Customer focus Customer orientation,
Customer satisfaction, Customer complaints and Customer retention Employee involvement
Motivation, Empowerment, Team and Teamwork Recognition and Reward, Performance appraisal
Continuous process improvement PDSA cycle, 5s and Kaizen Supplier partnership Partnering,
Supplier selection and Supplier Rating.
UNIT III
TQM TOOLS AND TECHNIQUES I
9
The seven traditional tools of quality New management tools Six-sigma Concepts, methodology,
applications to manufacturing and service sector including IT Bench marking Reason to bench mark,
Bench marking process FMEA Stages, Types.
178
UNIT IV
TQM TOOLS AND TECHNIQUES II
9
Quality circles Quality Function Deployment (QFD) Taguchi quality loss function TPM
Concepts and improvement needs Cost of Quality Performance measures.
UNIT V
QUALITY SYSTEMS
9
Need for ISO 9000- ISO 9000-2000 Quality System Elements, Documentation and Quality auditing
QS 9000 ISO 14000 Concepts, Requirements and Benefits Case studies of TQM implementation in
manufacturing and service sectors including IT.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Dale H Besterfiled
Total Quality
Management
Pearson Education Asia,

New Delhi
2011
2.
Janakiraman B
Gopal R K
Total Quality
Management
Prentice hall of India (P)

Ltd, New Delhi
2010
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
James R Evans
William M Lindsay
The Management and

Control of Quality
South-Western (Thomson
Learning), Boston
2008
2.
Oakland J S
TQM Text with

Cases
Butterworth Heinemann
Ltd. Oxford, London
2010
3.
Suganthi L
Anand Samuel
Total Quality
Management
Prentice Hall (India) Pvt.

Ltd, New Delhi
2010
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://managementhelp.org/quality/tqm/tqm.htm.
http://V-lrn.com/tools-of-tqm/198.
http://www.answers.com/topic/tqm.
http://www.academia.edu/Satisfactory_prediction_of_performanc.
http://www.qualitysystems.com/support/linking-content-Australia.
12C003
HOUSING PLANNING MANAGEMENT

3
OBJECTIVES:
To study the bye laws and regulations of state and national level housing.
To understand about various housing programmes.
To study about planning and design of housing projects.
To understand about various cost effective material used for construction.
To study about housing finance and pricing.
OUTCOMES:
gain knowledge on rules and regulations in housing and its development.
understand about various housing programmes and organizations.
implement proper design aspects for housing.
use various cost effective materials for construction.
understand about various aspects of financing and pricing of housing units.
179
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO HOUSING
9
Definition of Basic Terms House, Home, Household, Apartments, Multi storied Buildings, Special
Buildings Objectives and Strategies of National Housing Policies Principle of Sustainable Housing,
Housing Laws at State level, Bye-laws at Urban and Rural Local Bodies Levels Development
Control Regulations Institutions for Housing at National State and Local levels.
UNIT II
HOUSING PROGRAMMES
9
Basic Concepts Contents and Standards for Housing Programmes Sites and Services
Neighborhoods Open Development Plots Apartments Rental Housing Co-operative Housing
Slum Housing Programmes Role of Public, Private and Non-Government Organizations.
UNIT III
PLANNING AND DESIGN OF HOUSING PROJECTS
9
Formulation of Housing Projects Site Analysis, Layout Design and Design of Housing Units (Design
Problems).
UNIT IV
CONSTRUCTION TECHNIQUES AND COST-EFFECTIVE MATERIAL
9
New Constructions Techniques Cost Effective Modern Construction Materials Building Centers
Concept, Functions and Performance Evaluation.
UNIT V
HOUSING FINANCE AND PROJECT APPRAISAL
9
Appraisal of Housing Projects Housing Finance, Cost Recovery Cash Flow Analysis, Subsidy and
Cross Subsidy Pricing of Housing Units, Rents Recovery Pattern (Problems).
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Meera Mehta
Dinesh Mehta
Metropolitan Housing
Markets
Sage Publications
Pvt Ltd, New Delhi
2011
2.
Michael J worth
Non Profit Management
Sage Publications
Pvt Ltd, New Delhi
2012
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Authors
Title of the Book
1.
Chennai
Metropolitan
Authority
Development Control Rules for

Chennai Metropolitan Area
2.
United Nations
Centre for Human
Settlements
National Experiences with

Shelter Delivery for the Poorest
Groups UNCHS (Habitat)
3.
The University of
Michigan
Housing and Planning

References
Publisher
CMA, Chennai
UNCHS, Nairobi
U.S. Department of
Housing and Urban
Development
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.rri.wvu.edu/WebBook/McBride/section3
http://www.louisvilleky.gov/planningdesign
http://www.envplan.com/epb/epb_current
http://www.sustainablebuild.co.uk
http://www.builditsolar.com/Projects/SolarHomes/construction
180
Year of
Publication
2011
2010
2010
12C004
PAVEMENT ENGINEERING
3
OBJECTIVES:
To study about types of pavements and load distribution on it.
To understand about the design of flexible and rigid pavement as per IRC guidelines.
To evaluate structural performance of pavement with maintenance.
OUTCOMES:
design flexible pavement as per latest IRC guidelines.
design rigid pavement as per latest IRC guidelines.
evaluate the structural performance of pavement.
stabilize the highway pavement with proper choice of stabilizers.
UNIT I
PAVEMENT TYPES AND STRESS DISTRIBUTION
9
Introduction Pavement as layered structure Pavement types Flexible and rigid Stress and
deflections in pavements under repeated loading.
UNIT II
DESIGN OF FLEXIBLE PAVEMENTS
9
Flexible pavement design Empirical Semi empirical and theoretical Methods Design procedure as
per latest IRC guidelines Design and specification of rural roads.
UNIT III
DESIGN OF RIGID PAVEMENTS
9
Cement concrete pavements Modified Westergard approach Design procedure as per latest IRC
guidelines Joints in rigid pavements Concrete roads and their scope in India.
UNIT IV
PERFORMANCE EVALUATION AND MAINTENANCE
9
Pavement Evaluation [Condition and evaluation surveys (Surface Appearance, Cracks, Patches and Pot
Holes, Undulations, Raveling, Roughness, Skid Resistance) Structural Evaluation by Deflection
Measurements Present Serviceability Index] Pavement maintenance. [IRC Recommendations Only]
UNIT V
STABILISATION OF PAVEMENTS
9
Stabilization with special reference to highway pavements Choice of stabilizers Testing and field
control Stabilization for rural roads in India Use of Geo-synthetics (geo-textiles and geo-grids) in
roads.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Kadiyali L R

of Highway Engineering
Khanna tech Publications,

New Delhi
2011
2.
Wright P H
Highway Engineers
John Wiley and Sons

Inc, New York
2010
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Authors
1.
Ministry of
Rural Roads
2.
Indian roads
Congress
3.
Arthur Maass
Title of the Book
Publisher
Design and
Specification of Rural
Roads (Manual)
Guidelines for the
Design of Flexible
Pavements
Ministry of rural roads

Government of India,
New Delhi
IRC:37 2001 The Indian
roads Congress, New
Delhi
Design of Water
Resources Systems
Harvard University Press,

Cambridge
181
Year of
Publication
2011
2010
2009
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://crridom.gov.in/sites/default/files/annual-report/Chapter2-2011-12.pdf
http://www.nra.co.za/content/SAPEM_Chapter_5_Jan2013.pdf
http://asphalt.org/downloads/Browns_lecture.pdf
http://satheshkumar.puzl.com/puzl/files/727/26273/510e2a9031a1d.pdf
http://ec.europa.eu/transport/road_safety/projects/doc/nr2c_final_report.pdf
12C005
GROUND IMPROVEMENT TECHNIQUES

3
OBJECTIVES:
To study about role of ground improvement in foundation engineering.
To understand about dewatering and drainage concepts.
To understand about various treatments of cohesion less and cohesive soils.
To study the concept of reinforcing earth and grouting techniques.
OUTCOMES:
implement various ground improvement techniques for foundation.
use various dewatering and drainage techniques in soil stabilization.
implement proper treatment technique for cohesive and cohesion less soils.
apply earthen reinforcement with various reinforcement materials.
use of grout techniques for stabilization of soil.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Role of ground improvement in foundation engineering Methods of ground improvement
Geotechnical problems in alluvial, laterite and black cotton soils Selection of suitable ground
improvement techniques based on soil condition.
UNIT II
DRAINAGE AND DEWATERING
9
Drainage techniques Well points Vacuum and electro osmotic methods Seepage analysis for two
dimensional flows Fully and partially penetrating slots in homogenous deposits (Simple cases only).
UNIT III
INSITU TREATMENT OF COHESIONLESS AND COHESIVE SOILS
9
In situ densification of cohesion less and consolidation of cohesive soils Dynamic compaction and
consolidation Vibroflotation Sand pile compaction Preloading with sand drains and fabric drains
Stone columns Lime piles Installation techniques only Relative merits of various methods and
their limitations.
UNIT IV
EARTH REINFORCEMENT
9
Concept of reinforcement Types of reinforcement material Applications of reinforced earth use of
Geo-textiles for filtration, drainage and separation in road and other works.
UNIT V
GROUT TECHNIQUES
9
Types of grouts Grouting equipment and machinery Injection methods Grout monitoring
Stabilization with cement, lime and chemicals Stabilization of expansive soils.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Title of the Book
Author(s)
1.
Koerner R M
Construction and
Geotechnical Methods in
McGraw-Hill, New Delhi
2010
2.
Klaus Kirsch
Bell A L
Ground Improvement
CRC press Taylor and

francies group, Florida
2012
182
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Sl. No.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.
No.
Author(s)
1.
Purushothama
Raj P
Ground Improvement
Techniques
Tata McGraw-Hill
Publishing Company New
Delhi
2010
2.
Moseley M P
Ground Improvement
Blockie Academic and
Professional,
Chapman and
Hall, Glassgow
2011
3.
Jones J E P
Earth Reinforcement and Soil

Structure
Butterworths, London
2008
Title of the Book
Year of
Publication
Publisher
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.slideshare.net/SravanMuguda/ground-improvement-techniques
http://fire.nist.gov/bfrlpubs/build95/PDF/b95041.pdf
http://www.eqc.govt.nz/sites/public_files/documents/EQC-landtrials-infographic.pdf
http://www.fmsupply.net/resources/Eldorado-Stone-Grout-Techniques
12C006 SOIL DYNAMICS AND MACHINE FOUNDATION

3
OBJECTIVES:
To study about degrees of freedom
To understand about wave propagation in an elastic homogeneous isotropic medium.
To study the Dynamic properties of soils.
To study the different design procedures for foundations under various types of machines.
OUTCOMES:
incorporate proper design considerations for foundation.
understand the waves and its propagation in different kinds of medium.
design foundations under various types of machines
implement various isolation techniques for machines.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO SOIL DYNAMICS
9
Vibration of elementary systems Vibratory motion Single degree freedom system Free and forced
vibration with and without damping.
UNIT II
WAVES AND WAVE PROPAGATION
9
Wave propagation in an elastic homogeneous isotropic medium Raleigh, shear and compression
waves-waves in elastic half space
UNIT III
DYNAMIC PROPERTIES OF SOILS
9
Elastic properties of soils coefficient of elastic, uniform and non-uniform compression shear
effect of vibration dissipative properties of soils determination of dynamic properties of soil codal
provisions
UNIT IV
DESIGN PROCEDURES
9
Design criteria dynamic loads simple design procedures for foundations under reciprocating
machines machines producing impact loads rotary type machines
UNIT V
VIBRATION ISOLATION
9
Vibration isolation technique Mechanical isolation Foundation isolation by location Isolation by
barriers Active passive isolation tests.
TOTAL: 45
183
TEXT BOOK:
Sl.No.
1.
Author(s)
Prakesh S
Puri V K
Title of the Book

Foundation for
machines
Publisher
Year of
Publication
2011
Publisher
Year of
Publication
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
1.
Srinivasulu P
Vaidyanathan
2.
Bhide A D
sunderaeson B B
3.
Swamisaran
Title of the Book

Hand book of Machine
Foundations
Solid waste
Management in
developing countries
Soil Dynamics and
Machine Foundations
2010
INSDOC, New Delhi
2009
Galgotia Publications Pvt

Ltd, New Delhi
2009
WEB URLs:
1. http://nptel.ac.in/syllabus/105101005/
2. https://www.etcg.upc.edu/docencia/postgrau/mobilitat/201112/gazetas/bibliografia/1983SDEE_F
oundationVibrationsSTATEoftheART.pdf
3. http://yoga10.org/Documents/SPVKPSERCpaper.pdf
4. http://authors.library.caltech.edu/26467/1/SML8302.pdf
5. http://home.iitk.ac.in/~vinaykg/Iset495.pdf
12C007
ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT

3
OBJECTIVES:
To assess the impact of civil engineering projects on environment.
To study the methodologies for Environmental Impact Assessment.
To predict the assessment of impact on land, water and air.
To plan for mitigation of adverse impact on environment.
OUTCOMES:
assess the impact of development projects under Civil Engineering on environment.
apply various methodologies to assess the Environmental impact.
prepare mathematical models for the prediction of impact.
address the issues related to the project affected people.
9
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO EIA
Impact of development projects under Civil Engineering on environment Environmental Impact
Assessment (EIA) Environmental Impact Statement (EIS) EIA capability and limitations Legal
provisions on EIA.
UNIT II
METHODOLOGIES
9
Methods of EIA Check lists Matrices Networks Cost-benefit analysis Analysis of Alternatives.
UNIT III
PREDICTION AND ASSESSMENT
9
Assessment of Impact on land Water and air Noise, social, cultural flora and fauna Mathematical
models Public participation Rapid EIA.
UNIT IV
ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN
9
Plan for mitigation of adverse impact on environment Options for mitigation of impact on water, air
and land, flora and fauna Addressing the issues related to the Project Affected People ISO 14000.
184
UNIT V
CASE STUDIES
9
EIA for infrastructure projects Bridges Stadium Highways Dams Multi-storey Buildings
Water Supply and Drainage Projects Waste water treatment plants.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Canter R L
Environmental Impact
Assessment
McGraw-Hill Inc
New Delhi
2011
2.
Larry W Canter
Environmental impact
assessment
McGraw-Hill Inc
New Delhi
2010
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Year of
Publication
Publisher
1.
Shukla S K
Srivastava P R
Concepts in Environmental
Impact Analysis
Common Wealth
2010
2.
John G Rau
David C Hooten
McGraw-Hill Book
Company, New Delhi
2010
3.
Judith Petts
Environmental Impact
Analysis Handbook
Handbook of Environmental
Impact Assessment Volume
I and II
Blackwell Science, New

Jersey
2009
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.cowi.com
http://www.offshore-environment.com
http://www.iaia.org
http://www.environment.act.gov.au/Environment_Management_Plan
http://www.iaia.org/publicdocuments/EIA/CaseStudies/CaseStudies.PDF
12C008
INDUSTRIAL WASTE MANAGEMENT

3
OBJECTIVES:
Introduce the students to industries and industrial pollution.
To study the waste water reclamation concepts.
To expose the various treatment technologies for industrial waste.
To acquire knowledge on hazardous waste management.
OUTCOMES:
justify the industrial effluents on streams, sewer, land and human health.
use water reclamation concepts for the effluents from major industries.
apply residue management theory in the disposal of industrial and municipal wastes.
treat hazardous wastes by solidification, incineration and secure land fills
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION INDUSTRIAL POLLUTION
9
Types of industries and industrial pollution Characteristics of industrial wastes Population
equivalent Bioassay studies Effects of industrial effluents on streams, sewer, land, sewage treatment
plants and human health Environmental legislations related to prevention and control of industrial
effluents and hazardous wastes.
UNIT II
CLEANER PRODUCTION
9
Waste management Approach Waste Audit Volume and strength reduction Material and process
modifications Recycle, reuse and byproduct recovery Applications.
185
UNIT III
POLLUTION FROM MAJOR INDUSTRIES
9
Sources Characteristics waste treatment flow sheets for selected industries such as Textiles,
Tanneries, Pharmaceuticals, Electroplating industries, Dairy, Sugar, Paper, distilleries, Steel plants,
Refineries, fertilizer, thermal power plants Wastewater reclamation concepts.
UNIT IV
TREATMENT TECHNOLOGIES
9
Equalisation Neutralisation Removal of suspended and dissolved organic solids Chemical
oxidation Adsorption Removal of dissolved inorganics Combined treatment of industrial and
municipal wastes Residue management Dewatering Disposal.
UNIT V
HAZARDOUS WASTE MANAGEMENT
Hazardous wastes Physico chemical treatment Solidification Incineration Secure landfills.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
1.
2.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Rao M N
Dutta A K
Wastewater Treatment
Oxford - IBH
Publication, New
Delhi
2009
Metcalf
Reddy
Waste water Engineering

Treatment Disposal and
Reuse
McGraw - Hill, New

Delhi
2010
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Eckenfelder W W J
Industrial Water Pollution

Control
McGraw-Hill Book
Company New
Delhi
2009
T T Shen
Springer, New York
2010
3.
Stephenson R L
Blackburn J B
Lewis Publisher,
New York
2009
Industrial Pollution
Prevention
Industrial Wastewater
Systems Hand book
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.industrial waste.com
http://www.lhwmp.org/
http://www.lenntech.com
http://www.smallbiz-enviroweb.org
http://envis.neeri.res.in/management.php
12C009
AIR POLLUTION MANAGEMENT

3
OBJECTIVES:
To study the sources and effects of air pollution.
To know about the meteorological factors and dispersion of pollutants.
To study town planning regulations of new industries, legislation and enforcement.
To study the effects of noise pollution and preventive measures.
OUTCOMES:
acknowledge effects and sources of air pollutants.
access information about pollutants and its applications.
control air pollution by proper management system.
have specific pollution control for major industries against air pollution.
assess sources and effects of noise pollution and control measures.
186
UNIT I
SOURCES AND EFFECTS OF AIR POLLUTANTS
9
Classification of air pollutants Particulates and gaseous pollutants Sources of air pollution Source
inventory Effects of air pollution on human beings, materials, vegetation, animals global warmingozone layer depletion, Sampling and Analysis Basic Principles of Sampling Source and ambient
sampling Analysis of pollutants Principles
UNIT II
DISPERSION OF POLLUTANTS
9
Elements of atmosphere Meteorological factors Wind roses Lapse rate Atmospheric stability
and turbulence Plume rise Dispersion of pollutants Dispersion models Applications.
UNIT III
AIR POLLUTION CONTROL
9
Concepts of control Principles and design of control measures Particulates control by gravitational,
centrifugal, filtration, scrubbing, electrostatic precipitation Selection criteria for equipment gaseous
pollutant control by adsorption, absorption, condensation, combustion Pollution control for specific
major industries.
UNIT IV
AIR QUALITY MANAGEMENT
9
Air quality standards Air quality monitoring Preventive measures Air pollution control efforts
Zoning Town planning regulation of new industries Legislation and enforcement Environmental
Impact Assessment and Air quality.
UNIT V
NOISE POLLUTION
Sources of noise pollution Effects Assessment Standards Control methods Prevention.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Anjaneyulu D
Air Pollution and Control

Technologies
Allied Publishers,
Mumbai
2012
2.
Rao C S
Environmental Pollution
Control Engineering
Wiley Eastern Ltd,

New Delhi
2010
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
Heumann W L
Industrial Air Pollution

Control Systems
2.
Mahajan S P
Pollution Control in
Process Industries
3.
Rao M N
Rao H V N
Air Pollution
Publisher
Year of
Publication
McGraw-Hill, New
Yark
TataMcGraw-Hill
Publishing
Company, New Delhi
Delhi
2008
2010
2009
WEB URLs:
1. http://www.sciencelearn.org.nz
2. http://nptel/atmospheric_dispersion
3. http://www.airpollutioncontrol.net
4. http://www.knovel.com/
5. http://www.awm.delaware.gov/aqm/pages/default.aspx - United States
12C010
SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT

3
OBJECTIVES:
To study the various sources and characterization of municipal solid wastes.
To know about the various effects and disposal options of the municipal solid waste.
To know the processing techniques and disposal method for managing the municipal solid
waste.
187
OUTCOMES:
identify the sources, types and characteristics of solid wastes.
choose the on-site storage methods and processing techniques.
demonstrate the health and economic aspects of storage of solid wastes.
recover resource from solid waste by composting, incineration and pyrolysis.
UNIT I
SOURCES AND TYPES OF MUNICIPAL SOLID WASTES
9
Sources and types of solid wastes Quantity factors affecting generation of solid wastes,
characteristics Methods of sampling and characterization Effects of improper disposal of solid
wastes Public health effects. Principle of solid waste management Social & economic aspects
Public awareness Role of NGOs Legislation.
UNIT II
ON-SITE STORAGE & PROCESSING
9
On-site storage methods Materials used for containers On-site segregation of solid wastes Public
health & economic aspects of storage Options under Indian conditions Critical Evaluation of
Options.
UNIT III
COLLECTION AND TRANSFER
9
Methods of Collection Types of vehicles Manpower requirement Collection routes Transfer
stations Selection of location, Operation and Maintenance Options under Indian conditions.
UNIT IV
OFF-SITE PROCESSING
9
Processing techniques and Equipment Resource recovery from solid wastes Composting,
Incineration and Pyrolysis Options under Indian conditions.
UNIT V
DISPOSAL
9
Dumping of solid waste sanitary landfills site selection, design and operation of sanitary landfills
Leachate collection & treatment
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.
No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
George Tchobanoglous
Hilary Theisen
Vigil S A
Integrated Solid Waste

Management
2.
Jayarami Reddy P
Municipal Solid Waste
Publisher
McGraw-Hill
Publishers, New
Delhi
BS Publications,
Hyderabad
Year of
Publication
2012
2011
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
1.
2.
3.
Author(s)
Bilitewski B
HardHe G
Marek K
Bhide A D
Sundaresan B B
Landreth R E
P A Rebers P A
Title of the Book

Waste Management
in Developing Countries
Municipal Solid Wastes
problems and Solutions
Publisher
Springer, New
York
INSDOC, New
Delhi
Lewis
Publishers,
London
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://en.nptel.org/wiki/municipal.solid.waste
http://www.recycle.net/waste
http://www.landfill-site.com/
http://www.wm.com/
http://www.ilrc.org/off-site-processing-of-naturalization-examinations
188
Year of
Publication
2010
2011
2009
12C011
BRIDGE ENGINEERING
3
OBJECTIVES:
To give an overview of common forms of RC and Steel bridge used in the highway
infrastructure
To examine the modeling techniques for bridges to determine internal forces and moments
To explain the basis for determining the resistance of structural members, bracing systems and
connections
Give practical guidance on material selection, connection detailing, bridge articulation and
support
OUTCOMES:
design a bridge considering all IRC recommendations.
design deck slab and girder bridges for IRC loading.
design pre-stressed concrete bridges and steel bridges.
assess the short term and long term deflection in bridges.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION BRIDGE DESIGN
9
Design of through type steel highway bridges for IRC loading Design of stringers, cross girders and
main girders Design of deck type steel highway bridges for IRC loading Design of main girders
UNIT II
STEEL BRIDGES
9
Design of pratt type truss girder highway bridges Design of top chord, bottom chord, web members
Effect of repeated loading Design of plate girder railway bridges for railway loading Wind effects
Design of web and flange plates Vertical and horizontal stiffeners.
UNIT III
REINFORCED CONCRETE SLAB BRIDGES
9
Design of solid slab bridges for IRC loading Design of kerb Design of tee beam bridges Design of
panel and cantilever for IRC loading
UNIT IV
REINFORCED CONCRETE GIRDER BRIDGES
9
Design of tee beam Courbon's theory Pigeaud's curves Design of balanced cantilever bridges
Deck slab Main girder Design of cantilever Design of articulation.
UNIT V
PRESTRESSED CONCRETE BRIDGES
9
Design of pre-stressed concrete bridges Preliminary dimensions Flexural and torsional parameters
Courbon's theory Distribution coefficient by exact analysis Design of girder section Maximum and
minimum pre-stressing forces Eccentricity Live load and dead load shear forces Cable zone in
girder Check for stresses at various sections Check for diagonal tension Diaphragms End block
Short term and long term deflections.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
1.
Johnson Victor D
2.
Chen W F
Lian Duan
Title of the Book

Essentials of Bridge
Engineering
Bridge Engineering
Handbook
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Oxford and IBH Publishing

Company, New Delhi
2011
CRC press Taylor and Francies

group, London
2012
Publisher
Year of
Publication
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
Rajagopalan N
Bridge Superstructure
Alpha Science International,

United Kingdom
2010
2.
Ponnuswamy S
Bridge Engineering
Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi
2009
189
3.
Phatak D R
Bridge Engineering
Satya Prakashan, New Delhi
2010
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://discus.steelsci.org/prizeawards/pdfs/Corus_Student_Guide_to_Steel_Bridge_Design.pdf
http://www.bridgesite.com/bridgesightsol/FILES/EmpiricalSlabDesign.pdf
http://www.fhwa.dot.gov/bridge/lrfd/fhwanhi04043.pdf
http:// www.dot.ga.gov/doingbusiness/research/projects/.../05-15.pdf
http:// igs.nigc.ir/STANDS/BOOK/HB-BRIDGE.pdf
12C012
TALL BUILDINGS
3
OBJECTIVES:
To study the problems associated with large heights of structures with respect to loads (wind
and earthquake and deflections of the structure).
Student should know the rudimentary principles of designing tall buildings as per the existing
course.
To know about the standards and design concepts of tall buildings.
OUTCOMES:
know about different types of high rise building structures.
incorporate the various load factors considerable for designing tall buildings.
learn about the structural analysis for a high rise building.
to use approximate structural analysis for tall buildings.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO TALL BULDINGS
9
The Tall Building in the Urban Context The Tall Building and its Support Structure Development of
High Rise Building Structures General Planning Considerations. Dead Loads Live Loads
Construction Loads Snow, Rain, and Ice Loads Wind Loads Seismic Loading Water and Earth
Pressure Loads Loads Loads Due to Restrained Volume Changes of Material Impact and Dynamic
Loads Blast Loads Combination of Loads.
UNIT II
THE VERTICAL STRUCTURE PLANE
9
Dispersion of Vertical Forces Dispersion of Lateral Forces Optimum Ground Level Space Shear
Wall Arrangement Behaviour of Shear Walls under Lateral Loading. The Floor Structure or Horizontal
Building Plane Floor Framing SystemsHorizontal Bracing Composite Floor Systems The High Rise
Building as related to assemblage Kits Skeleton Frame Systems Load Bearing Wall Panel Systems
Panel Frame Systems Multistory Box Systems.
UNIT III
COMMON HIGH-RISE BUILDING STRUCTURES
9
The Bearing Wall Structure The Shear Core Structure Rigid Frame Systems The Wall Beam
Structure Interspatial and Staggered Truss Systems Frame Shear Wall Building Systems Flat Slab
Building Structures Shear Truss Frame Interaction System with Rigid Belt Trusses Tubular
Systems Composite Buildings Comparison of High Rise Structural Systems Other Design
Approaches Controlling Building Drift Efficient Building Forms The Counteracting Force or Dynamic
Response.
UNIT IV
APPROXIMATE STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS AND BUILDING DESIGNS
9
Approximate Analysis of Bearing Wall Buildings The Cross Wall Structure The Long Wall Structure
The Rigid Frame Structure Approximate Analysis for Vertical Loading Approximate Analysis for
Lateral Loading Approximate Design of Rigid Frame Buildings-Lateral Deformation of Rigid Frame
Buildings The Rigid Frame Shear Wall Structure The Vierendeel Structure The Hollow Tube
Structure.
UNIT V
OTHER HIGH-RISE BUILDING STRUCTURE
9
Deep Beam Systems High-Rise Suspension Systems Pneumatic High Rise Buildings Space
Frame Applied to High Rise Buildings Capsule Architecture.
TOTAL: 45
190
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
Woltang Schueller
High - rise building

Structures
2.
David Parker
Antony Wood
The Tall Buildings

Reference Boo
Publisher
Year of
Publication

New York
CRC press Taylor &
Francis Group,
London
2011
2013
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
Bryan Stafford Smith

Alex Coull
Tall Building Structures

Analysis and Design
2.
Coull A
Smith Stafford B
Tall Buildings
LinT Y
Burry D Stotes
Structural Concepts and

Systems for Architects
and Engineers
Publisher
Year of
Publication
John
Wiley and Sons Inc,
New Jersey
Pergamon Press,
London
John
Wiley and Sons Inc,
New Jersey
2010
2009
2009
WEB URLs:
1. http://www.ctbuh.org
2. http://www.wpi.edu/Images/CMS/VF/tallbuidings3.pdf
3. http://www.tallestbuildingintheworld.com
4. http://www.jblearning.com/samples/0763751685/51685_ch12_296-346.pdf
5. http://www.iiees.ac.ir/iiees/education/Graduate/tabadol/hochhaeuser_e.pdf
12C013
PREFABRICATED STRUCTURES
3
OBJECTIVES:
To study modular construction and industrialized construction using prefabricated components.
To design some of the prefabricated elements using prefabrication design principles.
To design joints for different structural connections.
OUTCOMES:
design the various components of a prefabricated structure and its erection.
design joints with proper dimensions and detailing.
design prefabricated structure for earthquake and cyclones considering abnormal effects.
design the cross section of prefabricated structures based on efficiency of materials used.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO PREFABRICATED STRUCTURES
9
Need for prefabrication Principles Materials Modular coordination Standardization Systems
Production Transportation Erection.
UNIT II
PREFABRICATED COMPONENTS
9
Behaviour of structural components Large panel constructions Construction of roof and floor slabs
Wall panels Columns Shear walls.
UNIT III
DESIGN PRINCIPLES
9
Disuniting of structures Design of cross section based on efficiency of material used Problems in
design because of joint flexibility Allowance for joint deformation.
UNIT IV
JOINT IN STRUCTURAL MEMBERS
Joints for different structural connections Dimensions and detailing Design of expansion Joints
191
UNIT V
DESIGN FOR ABNORMAL LOADS
9
Progressive collapse Code provisions Equivalent design loads for considering abnormal effects such
as earthquakes, cyclones, etc., Importance of avoidance of progressive collapse.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
1.
Gerostiza CZ
Hendrikson C
Rehat D R
2.
Levitt M
Title of the Book

Knowledge based process
planning for construction and
manufacturing
Precast Concrete Material
Manufacture Properties and
Usage
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Academic Press Inc,

Massachusetts
2010
Applied Science
Publishers Ltd,
London
2011
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
Koncz T
Manual of precast concrete

construction Volumes I, II and III
2.
Glover C W
Structural Precast Concrete
3.
Koncz T
Manual of Precast Concrete

Construction
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Bauverlag GMBH,
Germany
Asia Publishing
House, Kolkata
Bauverlag GMBH,
Germany
2011
2009
2008
WEB URLs:
1. http://www.everestbuildingsolutions.com
2. http://www.uniconbuildingsystems.in
3. http://www.prefabricatedstructures.com
4. http://www.kotharisportablecabin.com/
5. http://www.mamce.org/e-material/notes/civil/7sem/CE1007-PS-1&2.pdf
12C014
INDUSTRIAL STRUCTURES
3
OBJECTIVES:
To study general requirements for industrial structures and planning & layout of buildings.
To study the guidelines from the factories act for lighting, ventilation and fire safety.
To design the bunkers, silos and mill buildings in steel.
To design silos, bunkers, shell roofs and folded plates in RCC
OUTCOMES:
plan the industrial structure according to the classification and requirements.
implement proper lighting, ventilation and fire safety as per the guidelines from factories act.
design bunkers, silos, crane girders and industrial roofs using standard steel sections.
design RCC structures such as bunkers, silos, shell roofs and folded plates.
UNIT I
PLANNING
9
Classification of Industries and Industrial structures General requirements for industries like cement,
chemical and steel plants Planning and layout of buildings and components.
UNIT II
FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS
Lighting Ventilation Acoustics Fire safety Guidelines from factories act.
UNIIT III
DESIGN OF STEEL STRUCTURES
Industrial roofs Crane girders Mill buildings Design of Bunkers and Silos
UNIT IV
DESIGN OF R.C. STRUCTURES
Silos and bunkers Chimneys Principles of folded plates and shell roofs
192
UNIT V
PREFABRICATION
9
Principles of prefabrication Pre-stressed precast roof trusses Functional requirements for Precast
concrete units.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
1.
Purushothaman P
Reinforced Concrete Structural

elements
Gray W S
Reinforced Concrete Water

Towers, Banks, Silos and bunkers
2.
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Lakshmi
Publications,
New Delhi
Concrete
Publications Ltd,
London
2011
2005
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Henn W
Buildings for Industry vol I and II
London Hill Books,

London
2010
2.
BIS
Handbook on Functional
Requirements of Industrial buildings
SP32 1986
Bureau of Indian
Standards, New Delhi
2009
3.
Ramchandra
Standard Book
House, New Delhi
2008
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.amblyengineering.com
http://www.afcons.com
http://www.nagalaxmiindustries.com
http://www.itdcem.co.in
http://www.nptel.iitm.ac.in/video.php?subjectId=105105105
12C015
SMART STRUCTURES
3
OBJECTIVES:
To give an insight into the latest developments regarding smart materials and their use in
structures.
To learn about various techniques of control methodology of structures.
To learn about various equipments and techniques used for measuring strain.
To learn about various applications of advanced technologies in Civil Engineering.
OUTCOMES:
use Smart materials to get smart structures.
use various measuring equipments for measuring strain.
implement control system for structures.
use smart materials in signal processing and control system.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO SMART STRUCTURES
9
Introduction to Smart Materials and Structures Instrumented structures functions and response
Sensing systems Self diagnosis Signal processing consideration Actuation systems and effectors.
UNIT II
SMART MATERIALS
9
Introduction to smart material and its construction Different types of smart materials and their specific
properties and applications Introduction to MEMs and different smart materials (Piezoelectric
materials Optical Fiber Shape Memory Alloy (SMA) Elecrorehological fluid Megnetorehological
fluid Magnetostrictive materials Spectroscopes)
193
UNIT III
MEASURING TECHNIQUES
9
Strain Measuring Techniques using Electrical strain gauges Types Resistance Capacitance
Inductance Wheatstone bridges Pressure transducers Load cells Temperature Compensation
Strain Rosettes.
UNIT IV
CONTROL OF STRUCTURES
9
Control modeling of structures Control strategies and limitations Classification of control systems:
Classical control Modern control Optimal control and Digital control Active structures in practice.
UNIT V
APPLICATIONS IN CIVIL ENGINEERING
9
Application of Shape Memory Alloys in Bridges Concept of Smart Bridges Application of ER
Fluids Application of MR Dampers in Different Structures Application of MR Dampers in Bridges
and High Rise Structures Structural Health Monitoring Application of Optical Fibres Concept of
Smart Concrete.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Srinivasan A V
Michael McFarland D
Gandhi M V
Thompson B S
1.
2.
Title of the Book

Smart Structures
Analysis and Design
Smart Materials and
Structures
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Cambridge University
Press
Chapman and Hall,
London
2012
2009
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
1.
Brain Culshaw
2.
Srinath L S
3.
Dally J W
Riley W F
Title of the Book

Smart Structure and
Materials Artech House
Experimental Stress
Analysis
Experimental Stress
Analysis
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Borton, London
2009
Tata McGraw-Hill,
London
Tata McGraw-Hill,
London
2010
2010
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.micromega-dynamics.com/smart.htm
http://www.workshop-smartmaterials.com/
http://www.dl4all.com/scu/tag/smart%2Bmateri
http://www.docstoc.com/docs/73461197/smart-materials
http:// www.eecs.mit.edu/grad-areas/area1/
12C016
CONTRACT LAWS AND REGULATIONS

3
OBJECTIVES:
To study about the different types of contracts and contract documents.
To understand about the tender documents and standards.
To know about the legal requirements by government agencies.
To know about the regulations for the welfare of labors.
OUTCOMES:
know the concept of different kinds of contracts and its documents.
follow the contract formation and standards in tenders.
know about the rules and regulations, laws and agreements in contracting.
understand about legal requirement for planning and different kinds of laws.
194
UNIT I
CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS
9
Indian Contracts Act Elements of Contracts Types of Contracts Features Suitability Design of
Contract Documents International Contract Document Standard Contract Document Law of Torts.
UNIT II
TENDERS
9
Prequalification Bidding Accepting Evaluation of Tender from Technical, Contractual and
Commercial Points of View Contract Formation and Interpretation Potential Contractual Problems
World Bank Procedures and Guidelines Transparency in Tenders Act.
UNIT III
ARBITRATION
9
Comparison of Actions and Laws Agreements Subject Matter Violations Appointment of
Arbitrators Conditions of Arbitration Powers and Duties of Arbitrator Rules of Evidence
Enforcement of Award Costs.
UNIT IV
LEGAL REQUIREMENTS
9
Insurance and Bonding Laws Governing Sale, Purchase and Use of Urban and Rural Land Land
Revenue Codes Tax Laws Income Tax Sales Tax Excise and Custom Duties and their Influence
on Construction Costs Legal Requirements for Planning Property Law Agency Law Local
Government Laws for Approval Statutory Regulations.
UNIT V
LABOUR REGULATIONS
9
Social Security Welfare Legislation Laws relating to Wages Bonus and Industrial Disputes
Labor Administration Insurance and Safety Regulations Workmens Compensation Act Indian
Factory Act Tamil Nadu Factory Act Child Labor Act Other Labor Laws.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
1.
Author(s)
Title of the Book

Laws Relating to Building
and Engineering Contracts
in India
Gajaria G T
Publisher
Year of
Publication
M.M.Tripathi
Private Ltd., Bombay
2011
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Jimmie Hinze
Construction Contracts
McGraw Hill, London
2010
2.
Joseph T
Bockrath
Contracts and the Legal

Environment for Engineers
and Architects
McGraw Hill, London
2010
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://osp.mans.edu.eg/elbeltagi/CM%20CH1%20Introduction.pdf
http://unesconigeriatve.org/download/instructional_materials/nd%20building
http://www.unb.ca/fredericton/engineering/depts/civil/
http://www.cgspllc.com/nc_construction_law_information/notes
http://mau.nic.in/Departments/labour/BOCWActrules.pdf
12C017
ADVANCED CONCRETE TECHNOLOGY

3
OBJECTIVES:
To study the properties of materials, tests and mix design for concrete.
To understand the fundamental concepts of classification, grading and testing materials.
To know the mix design, methods of concreting and special concretes.
To acquire knowledge about the advanced equipments which are useful for construction and
testing of hardened concrete.
195
OUTCOMES:
grade the aggregates based on the properties of materials.
determine the properties of fresh and hardened concrete by various testing methods.
design the concrete mix the required quality and strength.
use special concretes in the appropriate environment.
UNIT I
CONCRETE MAKING MATERIALS
9
Aggregates classification Properties Grading Specified grading Testing of aggregates Grade
of cement Chemical composition Hydration of cement Special cements Water Chemical
admixtures Mineral admixture Testing of concrete.
UNIT II
CONCRETE
9
Properties of fresh concrete Hardened concrete Creep and Shrinkage Variability of concrete
strength Durability of concrete.
UNIT III
MIX DESIGN
9
Principles of concrete mix design Methods of concrete mix design Statistical quality control
sampling and acceptance criteria.
UNIT IV
SPECIAL CONCRETE
9
Light weight concrete Fly ash concrete Fiber reinforced concrete Sulphur impregnated concrete
Polymer Concrete High performance concrete Self-compacting concrete.
UNIT V
CONCRETING METHODS
9
Process of manufacturing of concrete Methods of transportation Placing and Curing Extreme
weather concreting Special concreting methods Vacuum dewatering Underwater concrete.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Neville A M
Properties of Concrete
Prentice Hall, London
2011
2.
Shetty M S
Concrete Technology
S.Chand and Company

Ltd, Delhi
2013
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Sl.No.
Author(s)
1.
Santhakumar A R
Concrete Technology
Oxford University
Press, London
2010
2.
Gambhir M L
Concrete Technology
Tata McGraw-Hill,
Delhi
2010
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.cidc.in/new/support/qcqacc/Dr.%20S.%20A.%20Reddi/Concrete_Making_Materials.pdf
http://www.ce.memphis.edu/1101/notes/concrete/concrete_properties_slides.pdf
http://www.dot.state.mn.us/materials/manuals/concrete/Chapter3.pdf
http://www.concretecentre.com/technical_information/building_solutions/special_concrete.aspx
http://www.ce.memphis.edu/1112/notes/project_2/PCA_manual/Chap09.pdf
12C018
MAINTENANCE AND REHABILITATION OF STRUCTURES

3
OBJECTIVES:
To study the importance and maintenance of structures.
To study the procedure for evaluating the damaged structures.
196
To gain knowledge on materials and techniques for strengthening and stabilization of

structures.
OUTCOMES:
determine the causes of deterioration and aspects of maintenance.
give quality assurance for concrete construction based on properties and strength.
use model materials and techniques for the rehabilitation of structures.
repair the structure distressed due to earthquake and other natural disaster.
UNIT I
MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR STRATEGIES
9
Maintenance Repair and rehabilitation Aspect of Maintenance Importance of Maintenance
Assessment procedure for evaluating a damaged structure Causes of deterioration.
UNIT II
SERVICEABILITY AND DURABILITY OF CONCRETE
9
Quality assurance for concrete construction concrete properties Strength Permeability Thermal
properties and cracking Effects due to climate Temperature Chemicals Corrosion Effects of
cover thickness and cracking.
UNIT III
MATERIALS AND TECHNIQUES FOR REPAIR
10
Special concretes and mortar Concrete chemicals Polymer concrete Sulphur infiltrated concrete
Dry pack and vacuum concrete Gunite and Shotcrete Epoxy injection Mortar repair for cracks
Methods of corrosion protection Corrosion resistant steels and cathodic protection.
UNIT IV
REPAIRS TO STRUCTURES
9
Repair of structures distressed due to earthquake Strengthening using FRP Strengthening and
stabilization techniques for repair.
UNIT V
DEMOLITION OF STRUCTURES
Demolition Engineered demolition techniques for structures.
8
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Vidivelli B
Rehabilitation of Concrete
Structures
Standard Publishers
Distributors, New Delhi
2012
2.
Allen R T
Edwards S C
Repair of Concrete
Structures
Blakie and Sons, UK
2011
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Dayaratnam P
Rao R
Maintenance and Durability of

Concrete Structures
University Press,
New Delhi
2008
2.
Peter H Emmons
Brandon W
Ernrnons
Concrete Repair and Maintenance

Illustrated Problem Analysis,
Repair Strategy, Techniques
Galgotia
Puilications, New
Delhi
2009
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.dtic.mil/dtic/tr/fulltext/u2/a406331.pdf
http://theconstructor.org/concrete/design-of-concrete-structures-for-durability/7268/
http://library.stmarytx.edu/acadlib/acq/bkrpr.pdf
http://www.wsdot.wa.gov/publications/manuals/fulltext/M51-01/Chapter5.pdf
http://cssconstruction.biz/images/lofts/A0.1.pdf
197
12C019
QUALITY CONTROL AND ASSURANCE IN CONSTRUCTION

3
OBJECTIVES:
To study the individual responsibility in acquiring construction quality.
To know about the Quality standards and documents to be maintained for quality.
To understand the concepts of Quality control and failure aspects in quality.
To learn about the Quality improvement techniques.
OUTCOMES:
educate the guidelines needed for quality management to the civil engineering community.
implement a Quality system in construction as per standards.
inspect and control the quality of RCC, masonry and steel works on construction site.
use the techniques to improve Quality of construction with respect to the environment.
UNIT I
PROJECT QUALITY MANAGEMENT
9
Introduction Definitions and objectives Factors influencing construction quality Responsibilities
and authority Quality plan Quality Management Guidelines Quality circles.
UNIT II
QUALITY SYSTEMS
9
Introduction Quality system standard ISO 9000 family of standards Requirements Preparing
Quality System Documents Quality related training Implementing a Quality system Third party
Certification.
UNIT III
QUALITY CONTROL ON CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS
9
Quality Policy Objectives and methods in Construction industry Consumers satisfaction
Ergonomics Time of Completion Statistical tolerance Taguchis concept of quality Codes and
Standards Documents Contract and construction programming Inspection of reinforced concrete
Masonry and steel works Testing techniques and quality at reports.
UNIT IV
QUALITY ASSURANCE AND CONTROL
9
Objectives Techniques and needs of QA/QC Different aspects of quality Appraisals Factors
influencing construction quality Critical Major failure aspects and failure mode analysis Stability
methods and tools Optimum design.
UNIT V
QULAITY IMPROVEMENT TECHNIQUES
9
Selection of new materials Influence of drawings Detailing Specification Standardization Bid
preparation Construction activity Environmental safety Social and Environmental factors
Natural causes and speed of construction Life cycle costing Value engineering and value analysis.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
1.
Hutchins G
2.
James J O
Brian
Title of the Book

Comprehensive Guide to
Registration, Audit Guidelines
and Successful Certification
Construction Inspection
Handbook Total Quality
Management
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Viva Books Pvt. Ltd,

New Delhi
2010
Van
Nostrand, New Delhi
2011
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
John L Ashford
The Management of Quality

in Construction
E & F.N.Spon,
London
2010
2.
Juran Frank.J M
Gryna F M
Quality Planning and Analysis
McGraw Hill, New

Delhi
2009
198
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Sl.No.
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://preparepm.com/notes/quality.html
http://media.swf.usace.army.mil/pubdata/cqm/PDF/Module_6.pdf
http://www.nesc.wvu.edu/pdf/dw/publications/ontap/2009_tb/quality_control_DWFSOM81.p
df
http://www.roads.maryland.gov/Training/Erosion_and_Sediment/ReCertification
http://www.technologyevaluation.com/search/for/construction-management-lecture-notes.html
12C020
GREEN BUILDING
3
OBJECTIVES:
To learn green building concepts and ecological design concepts applicable to modern
buildings.
Acquaint students with the principle theories, materials, and construction techniques to create
green buildings.
To provide exposure to various national and international rating systems as compliance
requirements for green buildings.
OUTCOMES:
design a green building with necessary requirements..
have knowledge about various systems adopted for Green building.
implement and execute of Green building concept in construction.
estimate a green building for a high performance in a economical way.
UNIT I
GREEN BUILDING PROCESS AND ECOLOGICAL DESIGN
9
Conventional versus green building delivery systems Green building project execution The
integrated design process Green building documentation requirements Design versus ecological
design Historical perspective Contemporary ecological design Future ecological design Green
design to regenerative design.
UNIT II
GREEN BUILDING SYSTEMS
9
Sustainable sites and landscaping Enhancing ecosystems Building envelop Selection of green
materials Products and practices Passive design strategy Internal load reduction Indoor
environment quality Building water and waste management Relevance to LEED / IGBC standards.
UNIT III
GREEN BUILDING IMPLEMENTATION
9
Site protection planning Health and safety planning Construction and demolition waste
management Reducing the footprint of construction operations Maximizing the value of building
commissioning in HVAC System Lighting and non mechanical Systems Costs and benefits
relevance to LEED / IG BC standards.
UNIT IV
GREEN BUILDING ASSESSMENT
9
USGBC LEED building assessment standard LEED certification process Green globes building
assessment protocol International building assessment systems LEED-NC Platinum / gold / silver
building case studies Trends in building rating systems IGBC standards ECBC compliances.
UNIT V
ECONOMICS OF GREEN BUILDINGS
9
Business case for high-performance green buildings The economics of green building Benefits
Managing initial costs Cost barrier in project management Long-term environment benefits.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Jerry Yudelson
Green building A to Z,
Understanding the buildings
New Society Publishers,

Canada
2012
2.
Jerry Yudelson
Green Building through

Integrated Design
McGraw Hill, New

Delhi
2010
199
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
1.
Means R S
2.
Charles J Kibert
Title of the Book

Green building: project
planning & cost estimating
Sustainable Construction:
Green Building Design and
Delivery, 2nd Edition,
Publisher
Kingston,
Massachusetts
Wiley, New Jersey
Year of
Publication
2011
2010
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.epa.gov/statelocalclimate/documents/pdf/12_8_what_is_green_GGGC.pdf
http://www.usgbc.org/Docs/Archive/General/Docs6435.pdf
http://www.greenresourcecouncil.org/green-resources/what-green-building
http://www.epa.gov/p3/success/michigan.pdf
http://www.gsa.gov/graphics/pbs/Green_Building_Performance.pdf
200
B.E: ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
TOTAL CREDITS: 189

SEMESTER I
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Credits
Maximum Marks
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
12O101
3.5
40
60
100
40
60
100
12O103

Engineering
Technical English
3.5
40
60
100
12O104
C Programming - I
40
60
100
12L105
Electric Circuits
40
60
100
12L106
Electrical Machines
40
60
100
12G102
PRACTICAL
12O111
1.5
40
60
100
12L112
Electric Circuits Laboratory

Environmental Chemistry
Laboratory
1.5
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
18
12
25
12G113
12G114
TOTAL
SEMESTER II
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Credits
Maximum Marks
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
12L202
Linear Algebra and Fourier

Series
Physics for Electrical Sciences
12O203
40
60
100
12O204
C Programming - II
Basics of Civil and Mechanical
Engineering
Electron Devices
40
60
100
40
60
100
3.5
40
60
100
12O201
12L205
12L206
3.5
40
60
100
40
60
100
PRACTICAL
12O211
1.5
40
60
100
12H212
Physics Laboratory
1.5
40
60
100
12L213
Electron Devices Laboratory
1.5
40
60
100
12L214
Engineering Graphics
2.5
40
60
100
20
14
28
TOTAL
201
SEMESTER III
Course
Code
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Course Title
Credits
Maximum Marks
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
3
3.5
40
60
100
12L302
Transforms and Complex

Analysis
Network Analysis and Synthesis
3.5
40
60
100
12L303
Data Structures
40
60
100
12L304
Digital Electronics
3.5
40
60
100
12L305
Electronic Circuits I
3.5
40
60
100
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
18
12
26
12L301
12L306
PRACTICAL
12L311
12L312
12L313
12L314
Digital Electronics Laboratory

Electronic CircuitsI and
Simulation Laboratory
Data Structures Laboratory
Laboratory
TOTAL
SEMESTER IV
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Credits
Maximum Marks
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
12L402

Processes
Electronic Circuits II
12L403
Signals and Systems
3.5
40
60
100
12L404
Linear Integrated Circuits
40
60
100
12L405
Electromagnetic Fields
3.5
40
60
100
12L406
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
18
24
12L401
3.5
40
60
100
40
60
100
PRACTICAL
12L411
12L412
12L413
Electronics CircuitsII and

Laboratory
Laboratory
TOTAL

202
SEMESTER V
Course
Code
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Course Title
Credits
Maximum Marks
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
12L505
Measurements and
Instrumentation
Transmission Lines and
Waveguides
Digital Signal Processing
Microprocessors and
Microcontrollers
Communication Theory
12L506
Operating Systems
12L501
12L502
12L503
12L504
40
60
100
3.5
100
100
3.5
40
60
100
40
60
100
3.5
40
60
100
40
60
100
1.5
100
100
1.5
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
18
24
PRACTICAL
12O511
12L512
12L513
Soft Skills
Laboratory
Microprocessors and
Microcontrollers Laboratory
TOTAL
SEMESTER VI
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Credits
Maximum Marks
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
12L601
Digital Communication
3.5
40
60
100
12L602
40
60
100
40
60
100
12L604
Embedded Systems
Very Large Scale Integration
Design
Computer Networks
40
60
100
12L605
Control Systems
3.5
40
60
100
12Lxxx
Elective I
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
1.5
100
100
18
12
25
12L603
PRACTICAL
12L613
Analog and Digital

Laboratory
Design Laboratory
Computer Networks Laboratory
12L651
Mini Project
12L611
12L612
TOTAL
203
SEMESTER VII
Course
Code
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Course Title
Credits
Maximum Marks
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
12L702
Cellular and Mobile

Communication
Optical Communication
12L703
Microwave Engineering
3.5
40
60
100
12L704
Satellite Communication
40
60
100
12L705
Antenna and Wave Propagation
3.5
40
60
100
12Lxxx
Elective II
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
1.5
100
100
18
22
12L701
40
60
100
40
60
100
PRACTICAL
12L721
Optical and Microwave

Laboratory
Comprehension
12L751
12L711
TOTAL
SEMESTER VIII
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Credits
Maximum Marks
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
3
40
60
100
12Lxxx

Engineering Ethics
Elective III
40
60
100
12Lxxx
Elective IV
40
60
100
12
40
60
100
12
15
12L801
PRACTICAL
12L851

TOTAL

204
LIST OF ELECTIVES
Course Code
Course Title
12L001
Medical Electronics
12L002
Computer Architecture
12L003
Neural Networks
12L004
12L005
12L006
Digital Control System
12L007
Advanced Microprocessors
12L008
Java Programming
12L009
Wireless Networks
12L010
Network Processors
12L011
12L012
RF Circuit Design
12L013
12L014
Telecommunication Switching and Networks
12L015
Television and Video Engineering
12L016
Optoelectronic devices
12L017
Telecommunication System Modeling and Simulation
12L018
Radar and Navigational Aids
12L019
Remote Sensing
12L020
Network Security and Cryptography
205
SEMESTER V
12L501/12T501
MEASUREMENTS AND INSTRUMENTATION

(Common to ECE/ETE)
3
OBJECTIVES:
To learn the basic laws governing the operation of electrical & electronic instruments.
To learn the correct usage of electrical measuring instruments.
To study the importance of signal generators and signal analyzers in measuring systems.
To learn the use of computer-assisted/computer-controlled instrumentation and data acquisition
systems.
OUTCOMES:
select the proper instrumentation system for making measurements of physical quantities.
plan and carry out measurements of physical quantities using common laboratory instruments.
explain the principles of instrumentation techniques in the design of measurement systems.
describe the modern measurement techniques.
use personal computers as instrument controllers and develop simple computer programs to assist
in the collection and analysis of experimental data.
UNIT I
MEASUREMENT CONCEPTS AND INDICATING EQUIPMENTS
9
Principles of Operation and Construction of PMMC Static and dynamic characteristics Units and
standards of measurements Error analysis Moving Coil, Moving Iron meters Multimeters True RMS
meters Bridge measurements Maxwell, Kelvin, Hay, Schering, Anderson and Wien bridge Q meters
Vector meters Distortion meters RF voltage and Power measurements.
UNIT II
FUNCTION GENERATORS & ANALYZERS
9
Function generators RF signal generators Sweep generators Frequency synthesizer Wave analyzer
Harmonic distortion analyzer Spectrum analyzer Heterodyne wave analyzer Frequency counters
Time interval measurement Measurement of Voltage, Current, Phase and Frequency using CRO Special
type of CRO.
UNIT III
TRANSDUCERS
9
Classification of transducers Selecting a transducer Strain gauges Temperature transducer LVDT
Advantages and disadvantages Capacitive transducers Piezo electric transducers Optoelectronic
transducers Measurement of Pressure, Temperature and Velocity.
UNIT IV
MODERN MEASUREMENT TECHNIQUES
9
A/D and D/A Converters Elements of a digital data acquisition system Interfacing of transducers
Multiplexing Use of recorders in digital systems Digital recording system Liquid Crystal Display
Computer controlled instrumentation IEEE 488 bus Fiber optic measurements for power and system
loss Optical Time Domains Reflectometer.
UNIT V
9
Introduction Block diagram of a virtual instrument Physical quantities and analog interfaces
Hardware and software User interface Advantages over Conventional instruments Architecture of a
virtual instrument and its relation to the operating system Overview of software Lab view Graphical
User Interface Controls and Indicators Labels and texts Data types Format Data flow
programming Editing Debugging and running a virtual instrument Graphical programming palettes
and tools Front panel objects Functions and libraries.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
1.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Albert D Helfrick Modern Electronic Instrumentation

William D Cooper and Measurement Techniques
206
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Prentice Hall of
India
2003
2.
Sawney AK
Punnet Sawney

Electronic Measurement and
Instrument.
Dhanpat Rai and

Co
2011
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
1.
Ernest O Doeblin
Dhanesh N Manik
2.
Kalsi HS
3.
Garry M Johnson
4.
Sanjay Gupta
5.
Joseph J Carr
Title of the Book

Measurement Systems
Electronic
Instrumentation
LABVIEW graphical
programming
LABVIEW
Elements of Electronics
Instrumentation and
Measurement
Publisher
Year of
Publication

Delhi, Fifth Edition.
Delhi, Second edition
Delhi
Delhi
2007
2004
2006
2003
Pearson Education
2003
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
http://www.facultad.bayamon.inter.edu
http://www.allmeasurements.com
http://www.ignou.ac.in/upload/Unit-10-62.pdf
http://www.ni.com/labviewse
5. http://www.srmuniv.ac.in/sites/default/files/files/WEB-PPT3-EIE-dept%281%29.pdf
12L502/12T502
TRANSMISSION LINES AND WAVEGUIDES

(Common to ECE/ETE)
3
3.5
OBJECTIVES:
To study the effect of parasitic elements of a transmission line and to derive a suitable model of a
transmission line.
To study the variations of impedance, velocity and waveform distortions of a transmission line
under various line conditions.
To understand and analyze the propagation parameters of guided waves in parallel waveguides,
rectangular waveguides and circular waveguides using field equations.
To study various methods to excite EM energy into waveguides and study the various resonant
cavities.
OUTCOMES:
analyze the primary and secondary constants (parasitic elements) in a transmission line.
determine the Characteristic Impedance, Input and Output impedances, Wavelength, and phase
and Group velocity and Waveform distortions of a transmission line under different
circumstances.
describe the significance of Circle diagrams and Smith chart for calculating different transmission
line parameters such as Impedance, Admittance, Reflection co-efficient and SWR.
analyze the Electric and Magnetic field equations and propagation parameters of Guided waves.
design methods to excite EM waves and resonant cavities for various cutoff frequencies.
UNIT I
TRANSMISSION LINE THEORY
9
Transmission line Parameters A line of cascade of T-Sections - General Solution of the transmission line
Physical significance of the equation and the infinite line Wavelength and velocity of propagation
Waveform distortion Distortion less transmission line Input impedance of lossless lines Reflection on
a line not terminated by Zo Reflection coefficient Reflection factor and reflection loss T and
Section equivalent to lines.
207
UNIT II
THE LINE AT RADIO FREQUENCIES
9
Parameter of the open wire at high frequencies-coaxial line Voltage and current on the dissipationless line
Standing waves and standing wave ratio on a line Directional coupler- One eighth wave line The
quarter wave line and impedance matching The half wave line Input impedance of dissipationless line
Open and short circuited lines Power and impedance measurements on lines-reflection losses on the
unmatched lines Single stub matching The circle diagram for the dissipation less line The Smith
Chart Application of the Smith Chart Conversion from impedance to reflection coefficient and viceversa Impedance to admittance conversion and vice versa Single stub matching and double stub
matching using Smith Chart.
UNIT III
GUIDED WAVES
9
Waves between parallel planes of perfect conductors Transverse Electric and Transverse Magnetic waves
characteristics of TE and TM Waves Transverse Electromagnetic waves Velocities of propagation
Attenuation of TE and TM waves in parallel plane guides Wave impedances.
UNIT IV
RECTANGULAR WAVEGUIDES
9
Transverse Magnetic Waves in Rectangular Wave guides Transverse Electric Waves in Rectangular
Waveguides characteristic of TE and TM Waves Cutoff wavelength and phase velocity Impossibility
of TEM waves in waveguides Dominant mode in rectangular waveguide Attenuation of TE and TM
modes in rectangular waveguides Wave impedances Characteristic impedance Excitation of modes.
UNIT V
CIRCULAR WAVE GUIDES AND RESONATORS
9
Bessel functions Solution of field equations in cylindrical co-ordinates TM and TE waves in circular
guides Wave impedances and characteristic impedance Dominant mode in circular waveguide
excitation of modes Microwave cavities, Rectangular cavity resonators, circular cavity resonator,
semicircular cavity resonator, Q factor of a cavity resonator for TE101 mode.
TOTAL: 45+15
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Ryder J D
Networks, Lines and Fields
PHI, New Delhi, Second

edition.
2009
2.
Jordan E C
Balmain K G
Electro Magnetic Waves and

Radiating System
PHI, New Delhi

Second edition, Reprint
2006
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No
Title of the Book
David M Pozar
John Wiley
Third edition
2009
Somanathan Nair B
Transmission Lines and Wave

guides
Sanguine Technical
publishers
2007
Raju G S N
Electromagnetic field theory

and Transmission lines
Pearson Education
2006
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.techlearner.com
http://www.ece.ms state.edu.com
http://www. personal.delen.polito.it
http://www.opensources.emu.tr
http://www.faculty.ece.illinois.edu/rao/tl/index.stm
208
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Author(s)
12L503/12T503
DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING

(Common to ECE/ETE)
3
3.5
OBJECTIVES:
To learn discrete Fourier transform and its properties.
To know the characteristics of IIR and FIR filters.
To learn the design of IIR and FIR filters for removing undesired signals.
To study the architecture of digital signal processor.
To understand the concept of multirate signal processing.
OUTCOMES:
apply DFT for the analysis of discrete time signals.
design IIR and FIR filters for DSP applications.
identify the suitable structure for digital filter implementation.
apply the digital signal processor for performing signal processing tasks.
apply multirate signal processing concepts in voice and musical applications.
UNIT I
DFT AND FFT ALGORITHMS
9
Introduction to DFT Efficient computation of DFT Properties of DFT FFT algorithms Radix-2 FFT
algorithms Decimation in Time Decimation in Frequency algorithms Use of FFT algorithms in Linear
Filtering and correlation.
UNIT II
IIR FILTERS DESIGN
9
Introduction to digital filters, IIR Filters Characteristics and Design of Butterworth and Chebyshev filters
Frequency transformation in analog domain Impulse invariant, Bilinear transforms Digital IIR filters
design IIR filter structures Direct, Cascade and Parallel.
UNIT III
FIR FILTER DESIGN
9
Magnitude and phase characteristics of FIR filters Symmetric and Antisymmetric FIR filters Design of
Linear phase FIR filters Fourier series technique Gibbs phenomenon Windowing techniques
Frequency sampling technique FIR filter structures Direct, Cascade, linear phase and polyphase
structures.
UNIT IV
FINITE WORDLENGTH EFFECTS AND DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSORS 9
Fixed point and Floating point numbers representation Truncation and round off errors Quantization
noise in A/D conversion-output noise power Co-efficient quantization Limit cycle oscillation
Introduction to DSP processors Harvard Architecture MAC unit-pipelining Architecture of
TMS320C5X processor Addressing modes Special Instructions.
UNIT V
MULTIRATE DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING
9
Sampling rate conversion Decimation-Interpolation Rational Factor I/D Multistage and polyphase
representation of sampling rate conversion Sampling rate conversion of Bandpass filters Sub-band
coding Quadrature Mirror filters Musical and sound processing.
TOTAL: 45+15
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No
Author(s)
1.
John G Proakis
Dimtris G
manolakis
2.
Venkataramani B
Bhaskar M
Title of the Book

Principles, Algorithms and
Application
Digital Signal Processor
and Application
209
Publisher
Year of
Publication

Third Edition
2007
Tata McGraw-Hill
2011
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Title of the Book
Author(s)
1.
Alan V Oppenheim
Ronald W Schafer
John R Back
Discrete Time Signal

Processing

Second Edition
2007
2.
Salivahanan S
Gnanapriya
Tata McGraw-Hill
2011
3.
Mitra S K
Tata McGraw-Hill
2011
4.
Avtar singh
Srinivasan S
Thamson / Brooks cole

Publishers
2004
Digital Signal Processing- A

Computer based approach
DSP Implementation using
DSP microprocessor with
Examples from
TMS32C54XX
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Sl.No
WEB URLs:
1. http:/www.ti.com/
2. http://www.dsptutor.freeuk.com/
3. http://www.dspvalley.com/
4. http://www.dsprelated.com/
5. http://www.dspguru.com
12L504/12T504
MICROPROCESSORS AND MICROCONTROLLERS

(Common to ECE/ETE)
3
OBJECTIVES:
To learn the hardware architecture, instruction set and programming concepts of 8085, 8086
microprocessors and 8051 microcontroller.
To study the peripheral interfacing methods of microprocessors.
To know the basics of system design using 8085, 8086 microprocessors.
To understand the system design using 8051 microcontroller.
OUTCOMES:
describe the basic architecture of the 8085 & 8086 microprocessor in terms of ALU, registers,
timing and control circuitry.
write assembly language programs for the 8085, 8086 microprocessors and 8051 microcontroller.
analyze a typical I/O interface and discuss timing issues.
design application systems using 8085, 8086 microprocessors and 8051 microcontroller.
write assembly language programs for the 8051 microcontroller.
UNIT I
8085 AND 8086 PROCESSORS
9
Hardware Architecture - Interrupts - Addressing modes - Instruction set Timing diagram - Assembly
language programming - Time Delays - Memory interfacing - Interfacing I/O devices.
UNIT II
PERIPHERAL INTERFACING SYSTEMS FOR 8085 AND 8086
9
Study of Architecture and programming of ICs: Serial I/O (8251) - parallel I/O (8255) - Keyboard and
Display controller (8279) - Programmable interrupt controller (8259) - DMA Controller - Timer controller
(8253/8254) - A/D and D/A converter - interfacing the above peripherals with 8085 and 8086.
UNIT III
9
Hardware Architecture - Memory organization - I/O ports - External memory - Timers/Counters - Serial
Data I/O- Interrupts - Interfacing 8051 with external memory and 8255.
210
UNIT IV
8051 PROGRAMMING AND PERIPHERAL COMMUNICATION
9
Addressing modes - Instruction set Assembly language programming - I/O port programming - Timer and
counter programming - Serial Communication - Interrupt programming Timing diagram.
UNIT V
APPLICATIONS AND SYSTEM DESIGN USING 8085, 8086 AND 8051
9
Keyboard, Seven segment display, LCD controls using 8085, 8086 and 8051 - Temperature sensors and
indicating systems, Traffic light control system, Stepper motor control, Measurement and speed control of
DC motor using 8085, 8086 and 8051.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Ramesh S
Gaonkar
Mazidi M A
Mazidi J G
Title of the Book

Microprocessor - Architecture,
Programming and Applications with
the 8085
The 8051 microcontroller and
embedded systems
Year of
Publication
Publisher
Penram International
Publishing Private
Limited
2013
PHI/Pearson Education
2007
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl No.
Author(s)
1.
Ghosh P K
Sridhar P R
2.
Kenneth J Ayala
3.
Douclas V Hall
4.
Ajay V
Deshmukh
5.
Krishna Kant
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Title of the Book

Introduction to Microprocessors for
The 8051 Microcontroller,
Architecture, Programming and
applications
Microprocessors and Interfacing,
Programming and Hardware
Microcontrollers theory and
applications
Microprocessors and
Microcontrollers
Architecture, Programming and
System Design 8085, 8086, 8051,
8096
Year of
Publication
Publisher
2001
Thomson Delmar
Learning, Indian
Edition
2007
Tata McGraw Hill
2010
Tata McGraw Hill
2007
PHI India Pvt. Ltd.
2007
http://www.intel.com/
http://www.microprocessor-design.com/
http://www.needasample.com/dw/components/microprocessor-peripheral-ics.html
http://www.allwebhunt.com/wiki-article-lab.cfm/microprocessor
http://www.indiastudychannel.com/resources
12L505
COMMUNICATION THEORY
3
OBJECTIVES:
To familiarize with basics of communication system and bandwidth requirements.
To gain knowledge about different types of modulation and demodulation techniques.
To understand the concepts of radio transmitters and receivers.
To understand the phenomenon of noise and its effect on communication systems.
OUTCOMES:
explain the amplitude and angle modulation concepts.
apply modulation concepts in transmitters.
211
3.5
design radio transmitter and receiver systems.

analyze the effect of narrowband noise in communication systems.
analyze power and bandwidth requirements for various modulation schemes.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO COMMUNICATION THEORY AND AMPLITUDE

MODULATION
9
Basic representation of communication system Transmitter Channel noise and receiver Baseband and
band pass signal Transmission media Bandwidth and capacity Electromagnetic Spectrum
Bandwidth requirements Spectra of sinusoidal and non sinusoidal waves Analog versus Digital
communication. Need for modulation Amplitude Modulation Definition Single tone modulation
Phasor representations Power relations in AM waves Generation of AM waves Detection of AM
Waves - Double Side Band Suppressed Carrier Modulators Time domain and frequency domain
description Generation of AM SSB Modulated Wave Demodulation of SSB Waves Principles of
Vestigial side band modulation.
UNIT II
ANGLE MODULATION
9
Basic concepts Frequency Modulation: Single tone frequency modulation Spectrum Analysis of
Sinusoidal FM Wave Narrow band FM Phasor representation Wide band FM Constant Average
Power Transmission bandwidth of FM Wave Generation of FM Waves Direct and Indirect FM
Detection of FM Waves: Balanced Slope detector Foster Seeley discriminator Ratio detector Phase
locked loop method of FM detection Comparison of FM and AM.
UNIT III
RADIO TRANSMITTERS AND RECEIVERS
9
Radio Transmitter Classification of Transmitter AM Transmitter FM Transmitter Variable
reactance type and phase modulated FM Transmitter frequency stability in FM Transmitter Radio
Receiver Receiver Types Tuned radio frequency receiver Super heterodyne receiver RF section and
Characteristics Frequency changing and tracking Intermediate frequency AGC FM Receiver
Amplitude limiting Comparison with AM Receiver
UNIT IV
NARROWBAND NOISE
9
Thermal noise Shot noise Partition noise Atmospheric noise Noise figure Calculation of noise
figure Noise bandwidth Equivalent noise resistance Noise figure of cascaded stages Noise figure
measurement Noise temperature Available Noise Power Noise in Analog communication System
Noise in DSB, SSB, AM and FM System Threshold effect in FM System Pre emphasis and Deemphasis
in FM.
UNIT V
BASIC INFORMATION THEORY
9
Introduction Discrete channel Redundancy Channel capacity coding Discrete noise channels
Coding in discrete noisy channel Parity check coding - Algebraic coding Continuous signal Bandwidth S/N trade off.
TOTAL: 45+15
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
Simon Haykin
2.
Kennedy
Electronic Communication
Systems
Publisher
John Wiley and sons,
Fourth Edition
Tata McGraw hill
Fifth edition
Year of
Publication
2006
2012
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
Dennis Roddy
John Coolen
2.
Bruce Carlson
212
Publisher
Fourth Edition
McGraw-Hill
International,
Fourth Edition
Year of
Publication
2008
2002
3.
Wayne Tomasi
Systems: Fundamentals
through Advanced
Pearson Education,
Fifth Edition
4.
Lathi B P
BS Publication
5.
Anokh Singh
Principles of Communication
Engineering
S.Chand Limited
2008
2006
2006
WEB URLs:
1. http://www.complextoreal.com/chapters/mod1.pdf
2. http://www.cultsock.ndirect.uk/muhome/cshtml/index.html
3. http://www.3ebooks.com/modern-digital-and-analog-communication-systems-21674.html
4. http://www.afirstlookk.com/book
5. http://www.american hetoric.com
12L506/12T506/12E506/12N506
OPERATING SYSTEMS
(Common to ECE / ETE/EEE/EIE)

3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the main components of Operating System.
To study the operations performed by operating system as resource manager.
To implement different scheduling algorithm.
To implement different memory management Techniques.
To understand paging, segmentation and deadlocks.
To understand file management.
OUTCOMES:
understand the Operating System services.
implement the process management.
implement CPU scheduling.
develop page replacement algorithms.
implement memory management algorithms.
apply virtual memory, file management and device management concepts.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Introduction Mainframe systems Desktop systems Multiprocessor systems Distributed systems
Clustered systems Real time systems Handheld systems Hardware abstraction Hardware
protection System components Operating system services System calls System programs
Process concept Process scheduling Operations on processes Cooperating processes Interprocess communication.
UNIT II
PROCESS MANAGEMENT
9
Threads Overview Threading issues CPU scheduling Basic concepts Scheduling criteria
Scheduling algorithms Multiple Processor scheduling Real time scheduling The CriticalSection problem Synchronization hardware Semaphores Classic problems of synchronization
Critical regions Monitors.
UNIT III
MEMORY MANAGEMENT
9
System model Deadlock characterization Methods for handling deadlocks Deadlock prevention
Deadlock avoidance Deadlock detection Recovery from deadlocks Storage management
Swapping Contiguous memory allocation Paging Segmentation Segmentation with paging.
UNIT IV
VIRTUAL MEMORY AND DEVICE MANAGEMENT
9
Virtual memory Demand paging Process creation Page replacement Allocation of frames
Thrashing File concept Access methods Directory structure File system mounting File
sharing Protection Device drivers for different types of devices Configurations.
213
UNIT V
FILE SYSTEM IMPLEMENTATION
9
File system structure File system implementation Directory implementation Allocation methods
Free-space management Kernel I/O subsystems Disk structure Disk scheduling Disk
management Swap-space management Case study-The linux system Windows.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Sl.No
Author(s)
1.
Abraham Silbers chatz

Peter Baer Galvin
Greg Gagne
Operating System
Concepts
John Wiley & Sons

(ASIA) Pvt. Ltd, Sixth
Edition
2009
2.
William Stallings
Operating System

Fourth Edition
2009
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Harvey M Deitel
Operating Systems
Pearson Education Pvt.

Ltd, Second Edition
2002
2.
Pramod Chandra P
Bhatt
An Introduction to
Operating Systems,
Concepts and Practice

Ltd
2003
3.
Silberschatz
Galvin
Gagne
Operating System
Concepts
Wiley Publications
2003.
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.personal.kent.edu/~rmuhamma/opSystems/os.html
http://www.williumstallings.com/Extras/OS-Notes/Notes.html
http://www.pages.cs.wisc.edu/~bart/537.lecturenotes/titlepage.html
http://www.eecg.toronto.edu/
http://www.cs.rutgers.edu
12O511 SOFT SKILLS

12L512/12T512
DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING LABORATORY

(Common to ECE/ETE)
0
OBJECTIVES:
To study the characteristics of signals using simulations.
To implement discrete Fourier transform.
To design IIR and FIR filters for signal processing applications.
To demonstrate the real time signal generation filtering, and the concept of sampling.
To study the various addressing modes of digital signal processor.
214
1.5
OUTCOMES:
generate and analyze the various types of signals.
carry out the simulation of DSP algorithms.
implement IIR and FIR filters using digital signal processor.
apply the digital signal processor for generating signals.
implement linear convolution and circular convolution.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
USING MATLAB
1. Generation of Signals.
2. Linear and circular convolution of two sequences.
3. Sampling and effect of aliasing.
4. DFT and FFT algorithm.
5. Design of IIR filters.
6. Design of FIR filters.
USING TMS320C5X DSK
1. Generation of signals and display.
2. Study of various addressing modes of DSP using simple programming examples.
3. Convolution in FFT algorithm.
4. Linear convolution and circular convolution.
5. Implementation of IIR and FIR filters.
12L513/12T513

LABORATORY
(Common to ECE/ETE)
0
OBJECTIVES:
To perform 8085 and 8086 microprocessor programming using instruction set.
To interface the peripherals with 8085 microprocessor.
To perform assembly language programming using 8051.
To interface the peripherals with 8051 microcontroller.
OUTCOMES:
program 8085 microprocessor for performing arithmetic and sorting operations.
program 8051 microcontroller for performing arithmetic and code conversion operations.
interface 8085 with A/D converters and D/A converters.
apply 8085 and 8051 for stepper motor control.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Study of 8085, 8086 Microprocessors and 8051 Microcontroller trainer kits and identifying the
components.
2. 8085, 8086 and 8051 Assembly language programs
i. Arithmetic operation.
ii. Ascending/descending order.
iii. Finding the largest/ smallest number in an array.
iv. Square root.
3. 8085 and 8051 Assembly Language Programs for code conversion
i. BCD to binary
ii. binary to BCD
215
3 1.5
iii. Hexadecimal to ASCII

iv. ASCII to Hexadecimal
4. 8051 Assembly Language Program for timer operations.
5. Interfacing of 8 bit A/D and D/A converters using 8085 and 8051
6. Stepper motor interface using 8085 and 8051
7. Display unit interface with 8051 and 8085
SEMESTER VI
12L601/12T601
DIGITAL COMMUNICATION
(Common to ECE/ETE)
3
3.5
OBJECTIVES:
To study the processes of sampling, quantization and coding that are fundamental to the
transmission of digital signals.
To understand the transmission of digitally modulated signals over a bandpass channel.
To understand the techniques for encoding and decoding data streams.
To study the spread spectrum modulation concepts and systems.
OUTCOMES:
explain the various processing methods of digital signals for modulation.
analyze the effect of channel noise and limited channel bandwidth on the performance of digital
communication system.
explain the various digital signal modulation techniques.
analyze suitable techniques for the reliable transmission over noisy channels.
identify and design different forms of modulation schemes and to provide security and protection
against interfering signals for a specified application.
UNIT I
PULSE MODULATION
9
Sampling process PAM Other forms of pulse modulation Bandwidth and Noise trade off
Quantization process PCM Noise considerations in PCM Systems TDM Digital multiplexers
Virtues, limitation and modification of PCM Delta modulation Adaptive Delta Modulation Linear
prediction Differential pulse code modulation.
UNIT II
BASE BAND SHAPING FOR TRANSMISSION
9
Matched Filter Error Rate due to noise Intersymbol Interference Nyquists criterion for distortionless
Baseband Binary Transmission Correlative level coding Baseband M-ary PAM transmission Adaptive
Equalization Eye patterns.
UNIT III
PASSBAND DATA TRANSMISSION
9
Introduction Passband Transmission model- Generation, Detection, Signal space diagram, bit error
probability and Power spectra of BPSK, QPSK, FSK and MSK schemes Differential phase shift keying
Comparison of Digital modulation schemes using a single carrier Carrier and Symbol synchronization.
UNIT IV
ERROR CONTROL CODING
9
Discrete memory less channels Linear block codes Cyclic codes Convolutional codes Maximum
likelihood decoding of convolutional codes Viterbi Algorithm Trellis coded Modulation Turbo codes.
UNIT V
SPREAD SPECTRUM MODULATION
9
Pseudo-noise sequences A notion of spread spectrum Direct sequence spread spectrum with coherent
binary phase shift keying Signal space Dimensionality and processing gain Probability of error
Frequency hop spread spectrum Maximum length and Gold codes.
TOTAL: 45+15
216
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No
1.
2.
Author(s)
Simon Haykins
Michalel Mosher
Taub H
Schilling N L
Title of the Book

Communication
Publisher
John Wiley& sons,
Fifth Edition
Tata McGraw-Hill,
3rd Edition
Year of
Publication
2010
2008
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
Sam
Shanmugam K
Digital and analog

Communication systems
2.
John G Proakis
3.
Amitabha
Bhattacharya
Publisher
Year of
Publication
John Wiley, Reprint
2008
McGraw Hill,
Third Edition
2005
Tata McGraw Hill
2006
WEB URLs:
1. http://www.sss-mag.com/ss.html
2. http://www.ocw.usu.edu/electrical-and -computer-engineering/error-control-coding
3. http://www.eccpage.com
4. http://www.shannon.cm.nctu.edu.tw/comtheory/chap4.pdf
5. http://www.shannon.cm.nctu.edu.tw/comtheory/chap3.pdf
12L602/12T602/12E602/12N602
EMBEDDED SYSTEMS
(Common to ECE/ETE/EEE/EIE)
OBJECTIVES:
OUTCOMES:
explain and identify the embedded systems applications.
UNIT I
10
micro controllers.
217
UNIT II
8
UNIT III
10
UNIT IV
REAL TIME CONCEPTS
10
UNIT V
7
Systems (Smart cards, RFIDs, Finger Scan)
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
1.
Rajkamal
2.
Shibu K V
Title of the Book

Embedded Systems
Architecture,
Programming and
Design
Introduction to
Embedded Systems
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Tata McGraw Hill,

Second edition
2008
Tata Mc Graw Hill
2009
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
1.
Sriram V Iyer
Pankaj Gupta
2.
Frank Vahid
3.
Peter Marwedel
Title of the Book

Embedded Realtime
Systems Programming
Embedded System
design - A unified
hardware/software
introduction
Embedded system
design
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Tata McGraw Hill,

First edition
2008

Third edition
2009
Springer, Second edition
2010
WEB URLs:
New_index1.html.
218
12L603/12T603
VERY LARGE SCALE INTEGRATION DESIGN

(Common to ECE/ETE)
3
OBJECTIVES:
To study various methods of fabricating the circuits in CMOS technology.
To learn HDL programming concepts used in VLSI design techniques.
To understand various levels of design flow in VLSI circuit design process.
To learn the design and testing techniques for combinational and sequential digital circuits.
OUTCOMES:
explain the basic CMOS circuits and the CMOS process technology.
be familiar with the impact of MOS device characteristics on device performance.
model the digital system using hardware description language.
implement the transistor level physical design and other levels of design flow in chip design.
select suitable method for a specific VLSI chip testing.
UNIT I
CMOS TECHNOLOGY
9
An overview of Silicon semiconductor technology CMOS technologies Physical design of Inverter,
NAND and NOR - Layout design rules Transistors InterconnectCircuit elements Technology related
CAD issues Delay estimation Delay Power dissipation Design margin Latch up Scaling.
UNIT II
MOS TRANSISTOR THEORY
9
Introduction Ideal I-V characteristics Non-ideal I-V effects Mobility degradation Channel length
modulation Body effect Sub threshold conduction Tunneling DC transfer characteristics
Complementary CMOS inverter DC characteristics Beta ratio effects Noise Margin Pass transistor
Characteristics Transmission gate Tristate inverter.
UNIT III
SPECIFICATION USING VERILOG HDL
9
Basic Concepts VLSI Design flow Identifiers Gate primitives Value set Ports Gate delays
Structural gate level and switch level modeling Design hierarchies Behavioral and RTL modeling
Operators Timing controls Procedural assignments conditional statements Data flow modeling and
RTL Structural gate level description of decoder Equality detector Comparator Priority encoder
D-latch D-ff Half adder Full adder Ripple Carry adder.
UNIT IV
CMOS CHIP DESIGN
9
Logic design with CMOS MOSFETS as switches Basic logic gates in CMOS Muxes and latches
Design methodology Structured design techniques Microprocessor/DSP Programmable logic Gate
array and sea of gates design Cell based design Full custom design Platform based design ASIC
design flow Introduction to FPGA and its applications.
UNIT V
CMOS TESTING
9
Introduction Testers and test fixtures Test programs Logic verification principles Manufacturing test
principles Design for testability Adhoc testing Scan design Built-in Self-Test (BIST) Boundary
scan.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
1.
Neil H E Weste
David Harris
Ayan Banerjee
CMOS VLSI design
2.
Samir Palnitkar
Verilog HDL - Guide to

Digital design and synthesis
Pearson Education,
Third Edition
219
Pearson Education,
Third edition
Year of
Publication
2005
2003
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Year of
Publication
Sl.No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
1.
Smith M J S
Application Specific
integrated circuits
Pearson Education
2005
2.
Wayne Wolf
Modern VLSI Design
Pearson Education
2003
3.
Bob Zeidmin
Introduction to Verilog
2000
4.
Bhaskar J
Verilog HDL Primer
BSP
2002
5.
Roth C
Digital Systems Design Using

VHDL
Thomson Learning
2000
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.asic-world.com
http://www.cmosvlsi.com
http://www.asic-soc.blogspot.com
http://www.altera.com
http://www.xilinx.com
12L604/12T604/12E604/12N604/12P504/12F504
COMPUTER NETWORKS
(Common to ECE/ETE/EEE/EIE/CSE/IT)
3
OBJECTIVES:
To build an understanding of the fundamental concepts of computer networking.
To familiarize the basic taxonomy and terminology of the computer networking principles.
To introduce the advanced networking concepts.
To gain expertise in specific areas of networking such as the design and maintenance of individual
networks.
OUTCOMES:
introduce the concepts, terminologies and technologies used in modern data communication
and computer networking.
explain the concepts of data communications.
identify and study the layers of OSI model and TCP/IP.
build the skills of sub-netting and routing mechanisms.
familiarize with the basic protocols of computer networks and their application in network design.
UNIT I
DATA COMMUNICATIONS AND NETWORKING
9
Introduction: Data communication components Direction of Data flow Components and categories:
Network hardware Network software Physical structure Protocols and standards Reference models
The theoretical basis for data communication guided transmission media Communication satellites
The public switched telephone network The local loop: Line coding Modems RS232 Interfacing
sequences Switching.
UNIT II
DATA LINK LAYER & MEDIUM ACCESS CONTROL SUBLAYER
9
Types of Errors Error detection and correction methods Flow control and error control Elementary
data link protocols: stop and wait go back N ARQ, selective repeat ARQ Sliding window HDLC
LAN Ethernet IEEE 802.3 The binary exponential back-off algorithm Manchester coding IEEE
802.4 IEEE 802.5 IEEE 802.11 FDDI SONET Bridges Ethernet performance, Switched
ethernet, Fast Ethernet.
220
UNIT III
NETWORK LAYER
9
Internetworking and devices Network layer design issues IP addressing methods Sub-netting
Routing; routing algorithms Distance vector routing algorithm Link state routing algorithm Routers
Congestion control algorithms: Open-Loop congestion control; Leaky bucket algorithm / Token bucket
algorithm Closed-loop congestion control Congestion control for multicasting.
UNIT IV
TRANSPORT LAYER
9
Process to process delivery; The transport service Sockets User Datagram Protocol (UDP)
Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) Congestion control; Prevention policies (Retransmission policy,
out-of-order caching policy, Acknowledgement policy, Flow control policy, Timeout determination)
Quality of services (QoS); Techniques to improve QoS; Integrated services Connection management.
UNIT V
APPLICATION LAYER & MODERN TOPICS
9
The Domain Name System (DNS) Electronic Mail (E-Mail) SMTP FTP HTTP The World Wide
Web (WWW) Multimedia Network security: Cryptography, Symmetric-key algorithms, Public-Key
Algorithms Digital Signatures Modern Topics; ISDN services & ATM DSL technology Cable
Modem: Architecture & operation in brief, Wireless LAN: IEEE 802.11, Introduction to blue-tooth.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
2012
1.
Behrouz A. Forouzan
Data Communication and

Networking
Tata McGraw Hill

Higher Education
2.
AndrewS.Tanenbaum
Computer Networks
Pearson Education
2013
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No
Author(s)
1.
James F. Kurose
Keith W. Ross
2.
Larry L.Peterson
Peter S.Davie
3.
William Stallings
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Computer Networking: A
Top Down
Approach
Pearson Education
2013
Computer Networks
Harcourt Asia Pvt.

Ltd.
2011
Data and Computer

Communication
Pearson Education
2007
WEB URLs:
1. http://www.freeprogrammingresources.com/tcp.html
2. http://www.mcmcse.com/cisco/guides/osi.shtml
3. http://compnetworking.about.com/od/vpn/a/vpn_tunneling.htm
4. http://nptel.iitk.ac.in/courses/Webcoursecontents/IIT%20Kharagpur/Computer%20networks/New_in
dex1.html
5. http://compnetworking.about.com/od/workingwithipaddresses/l/blip.htm
221
12L605
CONTROL SYSTEMS
3
3.5
OBJECTIVES:
To learn the concepts to model a mechanical, electrical and electromechanical system in the form
of differential equations and transfer functions.
To understand control system components.
To study the methods to analyze systems in time and frequency domain.
To design a compensator using frequency domain analysis.
OUTCOMES:
represent and analyze the control system using block diagram and transfer function.
distinguish between time domain analysis and frequency domain analysis.
explain the use of Bode plots, Polar plots and Nichols chart in predicting the stability of a system.
identify the role of control system in various applications.
UNIT I
CONTROL SYSTEM MODELLING
9
System concept Differential equations and transfer functions Modelling of electric systems
Translational and rotational mechanical systems Simple electromechanical systems.
Block diagram representation of systems Block diagram reduction methods Closed loop transfer
function Determination of signal flow graph Masons gain formula Examples.
UNIT II
TIME DOMAIN ANALYSIS
9
Test signals Time response of first order and second order systems Time domain specifications Types
and order of systems Generalised error co-efficients Steady state errors Concepts of stability RouthHurwitz stability Root locus.
UNIT III
FREQUENCY DOMAIN ANALYSIS
9
Introduction Correlation between time and frequency response Stability analysis using Bode plots,
Polar plots, Nichols chart and Nyquist stability criterion Gain margin Phase margin.
UNIT IV
COMPENSATORS
9
Realization of basic compensators Cascade compensation in time domain and frequency domain
feedback compensation Design of lag, lead, lag-lead compensator using Bode plot and Root locus
Introduction to P, PI and PID controllers.
UNIT V
CONTROL SYSTEM COMPONENTS AND APPLICATION OF CONTROL

SYSTEMS
9
Stepper motors AC servo motor DC servo motor Synchros Sensors and encoders DC tacho
generator AC tacho generator Hydraulic controller Pneumatic controller.
TOTAL: 45+15
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
Ogata K
Modern Control Engineering
2.
Nagrath G
Gopal I J
Control System Engineering
3.
Anand kumar A
Control Systems
Publisher
Fifth Edition
Edition, Fifth Edition
PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd
Year of
Publication
2010
2010
2007
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Benjamin C Kuo
Automatic Control Systems

Seventh Edition
2002
2.
Gopal M
Control Systems
Tata McGraw-Hill
2008
222
WEB URLs:
1. http://www.web.iitd.ac.in/~janas/courses/eel301.htm
2. http://www.mathworks.in/academia/student_center/tutorials/controls-tutorial.html
3. http://www.btechguru.com/pro_one/listKeywordLevel.php?bid=5ce2686dbdecad87&sid=f3
b2d3cec0bbeea& bn=Electronics%20and%20Communication&sn=Control%20systems
4. http://www.controlsystem.co.in/
5. http://www.facstaff.bucknell.edu/mastascu/econtrolhtml/intro/intro1.html
12L611/12T611
ANALOG AND DIGITAL COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS

LABORATORY
(Common to ECE/ETE)
0
1.5
OBJECTIVES:
To understand and test AM/FM receiver circuits.
To acquire practical knowledge in Pulse modulation techniques.
To study the working of Delta modulation, line coding techniques and Digital modulation circuits.
OUTCOMES:
construct and test the AM and FM circuits and measure the parameters.
explain the sampling and multiplexing concepts used in signal processing.
gain practical knowledge in designing and analyzing PAM, PWM and PPM circuits.
construct test and analyse different digital modulation and coding techniques practically.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1 Characteristics of AM Modulator and Demodulator.
2. Characteristics of FM Modulator and Demodulator.
3. Implementation and testing of Mixers.
4. Characteristics of AM receiver (Selectivity & Sensitivity)
5. Characteristics of FM receiver (Selectivity & Sensitivity)
6. Sampling and Time Division Multiplexing.
7. Pulse modulation- PAM / PWM /PPM.
8. Pulse Code Modulation.
9. Line Coding and Decoding.
10. Delta Modulation / Differential pulse code modulation.
11. Digital Modulation ASK, PSK, QPSK, FSK.
12L612/12T612
VERY LARGE SCALE INTEGRATION DESIGN LABORATORY

(Common to ECE/ETE)
0
OBJECTIVES:
To learn Hardware Descriptive Language(Verilog/VHDL)
To learn the fundamental principles in the design of VLSI circuits.
To familiarize fusing of logical modules on FPGAs.
To provide hands on design experience with professional design platforms.
OUTCOMES:
model the digital system using simulation and synthesis tools.
write HDL code for basic as well as advanced digital circuits.
import the logic modules into FPGA Boards.
synthesize, place and route the digital circuits into a chip.
apply the VLSI design for real time applications.
223
1.5
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Study of Simulation using tools.

Study of Synthesis tools.
Place and Route and Back annotation for FPGAs.
Study of development tool for FPGAs for schematic entry and verilog.
Design of traffic light controller using verilog and above tools.
Design and simulation of pipelined serial and parallel adder to add/ subtract 8 number of size, 12
bits each in 2's complement.
7. Design and simulation of back annotated verilog files for multiplying two signed, 8 bit numbers in
2's complement. Design must be pipelined and completely RTL compliant.
8. Study of FPGA board and testing on board LEDs and switches using verilog codes.
9. Testing the traffic controller design developed in SI. NO.5 on the FPGA board.
10. Design a Real time Clock (2 digits, 7 segments LED displays each for hrs, min and secs) and
demonstrate its working on the FPGA board.
12L613/12T613/12P514/12F514
COMPUTER NETWORKS LABORATORY
(Common to ECE / ETE/CSE/IT)

0
1.5
OBJECTIVES:
To learn the basic concepts of Computer Networking and acquire practical notions of protocols
with the emphasis on TCP/IP.
To provide the required fundamental concepts in networking components.
To provide a practical approach to implement the Cross-wired cable and Straight-through cable
using clamping tool.
To provide the knowledge on practical implementation of various algorithms on routing,
congestion control, etc.
To provide the knowledge of server implementations using TCP / UDP protocols.
To understand data encryption and decryption techniques
OUTCOMES:
explain and simulate the concepts of data communications and networking.
acquire practical knowledge on Cross-wired cable and straight-through cable using clamping tool.
acquire the knowledge on implementations of routing and congestion control algorithms.
explain and implement data link layer farming methods.
expertise on Data encryption and decryption techniques.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Study of Network Components, Types of Network Cables and Network IP addresses

Simulation of OSI, TCP/IP Layers
Implementation of Data Link Layer framing methods
Implementation of Error Detection and Correction methods.
Implementation of Interior and Exterior gateway protocols
Implementation of Routing Algorithms
Implementation of Congestion Control Algorithms
Implementation of User Datagram Protocol
Implementation of Transmission Control Protocol
Implementation of Application Layer Protocols
Implementation of DNS and IP-ADDRESSING.
Implementation of Data Encryption and Decryption techniques
224
12A651/12M651/12C651/12L651/12T651/12E651/12N651/12P651/12F651
MINI PROJECT
ELECTIVES
12L001
MEDICAL ELECTRONICS
3
OBJECTIVES:
To study the concepts of bio-potentials and the methods adopted to record them.
To learn the methods followed to analyze human body conditions.
To know about the methods and instruments used in diagnostic data collection and treatment of
human body.
To update the advances in the biomedical instrumentation and to learn the safe handling of
biomedical instruments.
OUTCOMES:
identify various devices used in medical field.
utilize various devices used to diagnose and save human life.
apply bio-telemetry principles for data collection in biomedical engineering.
design and integrate various bio-medical systems and equipments.
apply recent techniques in medical instrumentation.
UNIT I
ELECTRO-PHYSIOLOGY AND BIO-POTENTIAL RECORDING
9
The origin of Bio Potentials Biopotential electrodes Biological amplifiers ECG EEG EMG
PCG EOG Lead systems Recording methods Typical waveforms Signal characteristics.
UNIT II
BIO-CHEMICAL AND NON ELECTRICAL PARAMETER MEASUREMENT 9
PH PO2 PCO2 PHCO3 Electrophoresis Colorimeter Photometer Auto analyzer Blood flow
meter Cardiac output Respiratory measurement Blood pressure Temperature Pulse Blood cell
counters.
UNIT III
ASSIST DEVICES AND BIO-TELEMETRY
9
Cardiac pacemakers DC Defibrillator Telemetry principles Frequency selection Bio-telemetry,
radio-pill Tele-stimulation.
UNIT IV
RADIOLOGICAL EQUIPMENTS
9
Ionosing radiation Diagnostic x-ray equipments Use of Radio Isotope in diagnosis Radiation
Therapy.
UNIT V
RECENT TRENDS IN MEDICAL INSTRUMENTATION
9
Thermograph Endoscopy unit Laser in medicine Diathermy units Electrical safety in medical
equipment.
TOTAL: 45
TEXTBOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Leislie Cromwell
Biomedical instrumentation
and measurement
2002
2.
Khandpur R S
Handbook of Biomedical
Instrumentation
Tata McGraw-Hill
2003
225
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Joseph J Carr
John M Brown
Introduction to Biomedical
equipment Technology
Prentice Hall
2001
Geddes
Baker
Principles of applied
Biomedical Instrumentation
John Willey 3rd edition
1989
Myer Kutz
Standard hand book of Bio

medical Engineering and
Design
Tata McGraw-Hill
2009
John G webster
Medical Instrumentation
application and Design
John Willey
2004
WEB URLs:
1. http://www.stanford.edu/class/ee202/
2. http://www.pdfsb.com/medical+electronics+tutorial
3. http://www.home-machine-shop.com/Intro_Medical_Electronics_Applications.pdf
4. http:// www.medicalelectronicsdesign.com/
5. http://www.scribd.com/doc/55780706/EC2021-Medical-Electronics
12L002
COMPUTER ARCHITECTURE
3
OBJECTIVES:
To study basic computer organization.
To learn and analyze various central processing architectures.
To learn the concepts of arithmetic processing.
To understand memory concepts and organization used in computing systems.
OUTCOMES:
develop independent learning skills about computer architectures and hardware.
specify suitable architecture, memory interfacing and performance measures in a computer
system.
apply multiprocessing strategies and their potential.
apply cache and virtual memory concepts in processors.
explain the concept of parallel processing architectures.
UNIT I
BASIC COMPUTER ORGANISATION
10
Register transfer language-register, bus and memory transfersArithmetic, logic and shift micro operations.
Instruction codes Instructions Timing and Control Instruction Cycle Fetch, Decode and Execution
Typical register and memory sequence instructions Input, Output and Interrupt Design stages.
UNIT II
CENTRAL PROCESSOR ORGANISATION
9
General register organisation Stack organisation Instruction formats Addressing modes Data
transfer and manipulation Program control Control memory Address sequencer Data path structure CISC characteristics, RISC Characteristics, RISC pipeline.
UNIT III
ARITHMETIC PROCESSING
8
Introduction Addition, Subtraction, Multiplication and Division algorithms Floating point Arithmetic
operations - BCD Arithmetic operations
226
UNIT IV
MEMORY AND INPUT/OUTPUT ORGANISATION
9
Basic concepts Memory Hierarchy Main memory Auxiliary memory Associative memory Cache
and Virtual memory concepts Input Output interface Asynchronous Data transfer Modes of transfer
Direct memory access I/O processor.
UNIT V
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
9
Parallelism in uniprocessor systems Taxonomy of architectures SISD, SIMD, MISD, MIMD modes of
Memory access - shared memory, distributed memory typical applications.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Morris Mano M
Computer System
Architecture
Prentice Hall of India , New

Delhi, Third Edition
2008
2.
William Stallings
Computer Organization and

Architecture: Designing for
Performance
Pearson Prentice Hall,

Seventh Edition
2006
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Sl.No
Author(s)
1.
Carl Hamacher V
Vranesic Z G
Zaky S G
Computer Organisation

Edition, New York, Fifth
Edition
2002
2.
Kai Hwang
Briggs F A
Computer Architecture and

Parallel Processing

Edition, New York
1985
3.
John P Hayes
4.
David A Pattern
John L Hennessy

Organization
Design

Editions, Third Edition
Morgan Kaufmann
Publications, USA
1998
2007
WEB URLs:
1. http://www.ocw.mit.edu/courses/electrical-engineering-and-computer-science/6-823-computersystem- architecture-fall-2005
2. http://www.mix.edu/courses/6.270/home.html
3. http://www.nptel.ac.in/video.php?subjectId=106102062
4. http://www.ece.eng.wayne.edu/~gchen/ece4680/lecture-notes/lecture-notes.html
5. http://www.cs.iastate.edu/~prabhu/Tutorial/title.html
12L003
NEURAL NETWORKS
3
OBJECTIVES:
To introduce the neural networks for computational learning.
To learn the basic neural network architectures.
To know the design methodologies used for artificial neural networks.
To demonstrate neural network applications on real world tasks.
OUTCOMES:
identify the architecture based on neural networks.
devise algorithms based on back propagation and BAM networks.
design neural networks based on competition and cooperation.
227
utilize ART to process and optimize the solution.

identify and apply neural network concepts to real time signal processing applications.
UNIT I
FUNDAMENTALS OF ANS AND ADAPTIVE LINEAR COMBINERS
9
Elementary Neuron physiology, Simple Neuron physiology, Synaptic junction, Neural circuits and
computation Hebbian learning Review of basic linear algebra: Concept of n-Dimension signal spaceinner product- Eucledean distance, Outer product ANS: The general processing element, vector
formulation Perceptron: The perception part 1; The Perception part 2 Adaline: The Architecture of
Adaline neural network, the steepest descent Algorithm, The LMS learning rule Madaline: The
Architecture, MRI and MR II Algorithms
UNIT II
BACK PROPAGATION AND BAM NETWORKS
9
Back propagation: Multilayer Feed-Forward Network architecture The I/P and Output relations of
Neurons, Update of output layer weights, Updates of hidden layer weights, Algorithm of multilayer NN
with Back Propagation algorithms Bidirectional associative memory: Hamming distance and its relation
with Euclidean distance, Linear associators, BAM architecture, BAM processing discrete Hopfield
memory: Architecture, Algorithm
UNIT III
NEURAL NETWORKS BASED ON COMPETITION AND CO-OPERATION
9
Competitive and cooperation subnets Maxnet and Mexican Hat Kohoneon Self- Organizing Map
Architecture and Algorithm full counter propagation nets: Architecture and Algorithm Forward- only
counter- propagation: Architecture and Algorithm
UNIT IV
ADAPTIVE RESONANCE THEORY BASED NN AND SPATIO TEMPORAL

NETWORKS.
9
ART: Basic architecture, Basic processing, ART1 architecture and algorithm, ART2 architecture and
algorithm Spatio-Temporal pattern classification networks: The formal Avalanche, architecture and
processing of Spatio- Temporal networks The sequential competitive avalanche field structure and
processing.
UNIT V
SPECIFIC APPLICATIONS
9
Function approximation Boston Housing example, Pattern recognition: True classifier example Self
organization serial killer data Mining example pulse-coupled Neural networks Image segmentation
example Echo cancellation using Adaline assessment using BPN recognition using STNs
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No
1
2
3.
Author(s)
Laurene Fausett
James A Freeman
David M Skapura
Kevin L Priddy
Paul E Keller
Title of the Book

Networks
Neural Networks
Algorithms, Applications and
Programming techniques
Artificial Neural Networks An
Introduction
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Pearson Education
2006
Pearson Education
2008
2009
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Rajasekaran S
Pai G A V
Neural Networks, Fuzzy Logic

and Genetic Algorithms
2004
2.
David M Skapura
Building Neural Networks
Addison Wesley
1996
228
3.
Bose N K
Neural Network Fundamentals

with Graphs, Algorithms and
Applications
Tata McGraw-Hill
1995
WEB URLs:
1. http://www.dsi.unifi.it/neural/w3-sites
2. http://www.eg3eclips.com/neural_networks/best-of-web.html
3. http://www.husky.if.uidaho.edu/NN/NNs_links.HTML
4. http://www.dontveter.com/otherai/otherai.html
5. http://www.geocities.com/CapeCanaveral/Lab/3765/neural.html
12L004

3
OBJECTIVES:
To learn the basic concepts of sensors used in MEMS.
To learn the various characteristics of MEMS materials.
To gain the knowledge in fabrication of MEMS ICs.
To demonstrate the knowledge of MEMS in various applications.
OUTCOMES:
illustrate the operation of MEMS sensors.
identify the materials used for MEMS devices fabrication.
apply and analyze the techniques for fabrication of MEMS ICs and devices.
explore the knowledge in MEMS device fabrication for various applications.
design the RF switches using MEMS.

UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Historical perspective Silicon microelectronics, MEMS Introduction to micro sensors MEMS
examples Application of MEMS.
UNIT II
MEMS MATERIALS
9
Metal and metal alloys Semiconductors, polymers, ceramic materials, composite materials Piezo
resistance Piezo electricity Pyro electricity Properties of thin films.
UNIT III
MICROELECTRONIC TECHNOLOGY FOR MEMS - I
9
MEMS and IC fabrication cycle: Silicon wafer fabrication Crystal growth, thin film deposition
evaporation Types, spin casting; oxidation of silicon Dry, wet.
UNIT IV
MICROELECTRONIC TECHNOLOGY FOR MEMS II
9
Lithography: Photo-resist, Pattern transfer; Etching Wet, dry; doping, metallization, bonding and
packaging Micromachining.
UNIT V
MEMS SWITCH DESIGN
9
RF MEMS switches: Introduction, switch parameters, basics of switching, and switches for RF and
microwave applications Electrostatic switching Approaches for low actuation, voltage switches
Introduction to SAW devices Bulk Acoustic Wave Filters.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
1.
Author(s)
Julian Gardner
Vijay Vardan K
Osama O A
Title of the Book

Microsensors, MEMS and
Smart Devices
229
Publisher
John wiley and sons
Year of
Publication
2002
2.
Mems and micro systems

design
Tai- Ran HSU
John wiley and sons
2008
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Fukuda T
Menz W
Micro Mechanical Systems

Principles and Technology
Elsevier
2002
2.
Rai Choudary P
MEMS and MOEMS

Technology and
Applications
2009
3.
Stephen Senthuria D
Microsystem Design
Springer
2013
4.
Vijay vardan K
Vinoy K J
Jose KA
RF MEMS and
TheirApplications
John wiley and sons
2003
5.
Gabriel M Rebeiz
RF MEMS Theory,Design
and Technology
John Wiley and sons
2003
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.memsnet.org/about/what-is.html
http://www.coventor.com/pdfs/RF_MEMS_Application.pdf
http://www.freescale.com/webapp/sps/site/overview.jsp?code=SNSMEMSOVERVIEW
https://www.mems-exchange.org/MEMS
https://www.understandingnano.com/mems.html
12L005 APPLIED SOFT COMPUTING

3
OBJECTIVES:
To familiarize with soft computing concepts.
To introduce the ideas of neural networks and fuzzy logic.
To introduce the concepts of genetic algorithm and its applications to soft computing.
To understand the basics of soft computing and its application areas particularly to intelligent
systems.
OUTCOMES:
explain the fuzzy systems and their properties.
identify the various fuzzy models.
analyze adaptive fuzzy control systems.
apply fuzzy control systems for engineering applications.
apply fuzzy classification for decision making in intelligent systems.
UNIT I
FUZZY SET THEORY
9
Introduction to Neuro Fuzzy and Soft Computing Fuzzy Sets Basic Definition and Terminology
Set-theoretic Operations Member Function Formulation and Parameterization Fuzzy Rules and Fuzzy
Reasoning Extension Principle and Fuzzy Relations Fuzzy If-Then Rules Fuzzy Reasoning Fuzzy
Inference Systems Mamdani Fuzzy Models Sugeno Fuzzy Models Tsukamoto Fuzzy Models Input
Space Partitioning and Fuzzy Modeling.
230
UNIT II
OPTIMIZATION
9
Derivative-based Optimization Descent Methods The Method of Steepest Descent Classical
Newtons Method Step Size Determination Derivative-free Optimization Genetic Algorithms
Simulated Annealing Random Search Downhill Simplex Search.
UNIT III
NEURAL NETWORKS
9
Supervised Learning Neural Networks Perceptrons Adaline Backpropagation Mutilayer Perceptrons
Radial Basis Function Networks Unsupervised Learning Neural Networks Competitive Learning
Networks Kohonen Self-Organizing Networks Learning Vector Quantization Hebbian Learning.
UNIT IV
9
Adaptive Neuro Fuzzy Inference Systems Architecture Hybrid Learning Algorithm Learning
Methods that Cross-fertilize ANFIS and RBFN Coactive Neuro Fuzzy Modeling Framework Neuron
Functions for Adaptive Networks Neuro Fuzzy Spectrum.
UNIT V
APPLICATIONS OF COMPUTATIONAL INTELLIGENCE
9
Printed Character Recognition Inverse Kinematics Problems Automobile Fuel Efficiency Prediction
Soft Computing for Color Recipe Prediction.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
1.
2.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Jang J S R
Sun C T
Mizutani E
Neuro-Fuzzy and Soft

Computing
Pearson Education
2004
Rajasekaran
Pai G A V
Neural Networks, Fuzzy

Logic and Genetic
Algorithms
PHI
2004
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Timothy J Ross
Fuzzy Logic with

Willey
2010
2.
Davis E Goldberg
Genetic Algorithms:
Search, Optimization and
Machine Learning
Addison Wesley, N.Y.
1989
3.
Eberhart R
Simpson P
Dobbins R
Computational Intelligence
- PC Tools
AP Professional,
Boston
1998
WEB URLs:
1. http://www.cs.elte.hu/~rfuller/soft-computing.pdf
2. http://www.cs.stir.ac.uk/~lss/NNIntro/InvSlides.html
3. http://www.willamette.edu/~gorr/classes/cs449/intro.html
4. http://www.engr.wisc.edu/ece/courses/ece539.html
5. http://www.facweb.iitkgp.ernet.in/~anupam/Lect_15.ppt
231
12L006
DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM

3
OBJECTIVES:
To learn the basic of state space analysis.
To understand the stability analysis of digital control system.
To gain the knowledge of digital process control design.
To learn the feedback controller concepts and devices.
OUTCOMES:
identify the control system problems in real world applications.
formulate and identify the system blocks.
comprehend and evaluate non linear systems.
predict the performance for complex control tasks.
design controllers for linear models of systems using MATLAB and SIMULINK.
UNIT I
STATE SPACE ANALYSIS
9
Introduction to state space analysis Physical variable Phase variable and Canonical variables forms
State transition matrix State space representation of discrete time systems Controllability and
observability Solution of state equation.
UNIT II
9
feedback controllers Design of reduced and full order observers PI feedback Dynamic state feedback.
UNIT III
SAMPLED DATA CONTROL SYSTEM
9
Introduction to Sample data control systems Sampling process, signal reconstruction, difference equation,
Z-transform, Z-transfer function Inverse Z transform, Z-transform analysis of sampled data control
system, Z and S domain Relationship.
UNIT IV
NON-LINEAR SYSTEMS
9
Types of non-linearity Typical examples Equivalent linearization Phase plane analysis Limit cycles
Describing functions Analysis using Describing functions.
UNIT V
STABILITY
9
Stability concepts Equilibrium points BIBO and asymptotic stability Direct method of Liapunov
Application to non-linear problems Frequency domain stability criteria Popovs method and its
extensions.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Gopal M
Digital Control and State

Variable Methods
Tata McGraw Hill

Publishing
Company Ltd.
2009
2.
Nagarth I J
Gopal M
Control Systems Engineering
Wiley Eastern Ltd.
2008
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Ogata K
Digital Control Systems

Ltd.
2010
2.
Kuo B C
Pearson Education
2007
232
3.
Gopal M
Modern Control System

Theory
Wiley Easter Ltd.
2012
4.
Manke B S
Linear Control System
Khanna Publishers
2005
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.acsmotioncontrol.com
http://www.acsatlanta.com
http://www.scribd.com/doc/50406399/Dorf-R-C-Bishop-R-H-Modern-Control-Systems
http://www.nptel.iitm.ac.in
http://www.me.umn.edu/courses/me8281/notes.htm
12L007
ADVANCED MICROPROCESSORS
3
OBJECTIVES:
To study the architecture, instruction set and programming of 80486 microprocessors.
To introduce the modular programming and its concepts.
To learn through case studies, the system design principles using 8096.
To introduce the architecture, instruction set, programming and interfacing of ARM processor.
OUTCOMES:
describe the basic architecture of the 80486 microprocessor in terms of ALU, registers, timing
and control circuitry.
write application program for 80486 processors.
describe the basic architecture of the PENTIUM processor.
write application programs for 8096 microcontroller.
design systems using ARM processors for Real time applications.
UNIT I
ADVANCED MICROPROCESSOR ARCHITECTURE
9
Internal Microprocessor Architecture 80486 - Real mode memory addressing Protected Mode Memory
addressing Memory paging Data addressing modes Program memory addressing modes Stack
memory addressing modes Data movement instructions Program control instructions- Arithmetic and
Logic Instructions.
UNIT II
MODULAR PROGRAMMING AND ITS CONCEPTS
9
Modular programming Using keyboard and Video display Data Conversions Disk files Interrupt
hooks using assembly languages with C/ C++
UNIT III
PENTIUM PROCESSORS
9
Introduction to Pentium Microprocessor Special Pentium registers Pentium memory management
New Pentium Instructions Pentium Processor Special Pentium pro features Pentium 4 processor
UNIT IV
16-BIT MICRO CONTROLLER
9
8096/8097 Architecture CPU registers RALU Internal Program and Data memory Timers High
speed Input and Output Serial Interface I/O ports Interrupts A/D converter Watch dog timer
Power down feature Instruction set External memory Interfacing External I/O interfacing.
UNIT V
RISC PROCESSORS AND ARM
9
The RISC revolution Characteristics of RISC Architecture The Berkeley RISC Register Windows
Windows and parameter passing Window overflow RISC architecture and pipelining Pipeline bubbles
Accessing external memory in RISC systems Reducing the branch penalties Branch prediction The
ARM processors ARM registers ARM instructions The ARM built-in shift mechanism ARM
branch instructions sequence control Data movement and memory reference instructions-ARM9.
TOTAL: 45
233
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Prentice Hall of
India Private
Limited, New Delhi
2003
McGraw Hill
Publishing Co Ltd,
New Delhi
2004
1.
Barry B Brey
The Intel Microprocessors 8086/8088,

80, 86, 80286, 80386 80486, Pentium,
Pentium Pro Processor, Pentium II,
Pentium III, Pentium 4, Architecture,
Programming and interfacing
2.
John Peatman
Design with Microcontroller
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Rajkamal
The concepts and feature of

micro controllers 68HC11,
8051 and 8096
S Chand Publishers,
New Delhi
2004
2.
Alan Clements
The principles of computer

Hardware
Oxford University
Press
2003
WEB URLs:
1. http://www.pdfsb.com/advanced+microprocessor+by+hall+tutorial
2. http://www.owlnet.rice.edu/~elec525
3. http://www.eastaughs.fsnet.co.uk/cpu/index.htm
4. http:// www.gtuinfo.in/Engineering-Degree/Advanced+Microprocessors.aspx
5. http:// www.ece.msstate.edu/~harden/ECE4733/notes/chap1.pdf
12L008
JAVA PROGRAMMING
3
OBJECTIVES:
To learn about basic Java language syntax and semantics write Java programs.
To be comfortable using the Java Application Programming Interface (Java API) to learn
and use an already-written Java class.
To understand the design, implementation, and debugging of graphical user interfaces

those respond to user events using Java.
To gain experience in designing, implementing applications with database connectivity and

applets.
OUTCOMES:
associate the features and elements of the java programming language with problems and
solutions.
apply and analyze the concepts of inheritance, interface and packages in java application.
write code, test and analyze input/output for programs with basic data structures using arrays, lists
and hash maps, event handling and exception handling in java.
develop applications with graphical user interface using AWT and Swing.
develop java application with database connectivity.
234
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Java Basics Introduction to Java Features of Java Comments Data types Variables Operators
Control statements Type conversion and casting. Classes and Objects: Concepts of classes and objects
Methods Constructors Static variables and methods Final keyword Access control This
keyword Garbage collection Overloading methods and constructors Parameter passing Call by
value Call by reference Arrays Strings.
UNIT II
INHERITANCE PACKAGES AND INTERFACES
9
Inheritance: Basic concepts Super classes and sub classes Member access rules Usage of super key
word Forms of inheritance Method overriding Abstract classes Dynamic method dispatch Using
final with inheritance The Object class Packages and Interfaces: Defining, creating and accessing a
Package CLASSPATH Importing packages Differences between classes and interface Defining an
interface Implementing interface Applying interfaces Variables in interface and extending interfaces.
Interfaces Interfaces vs. abstract classes Defining an interface Implementing interfaces Extending
interface Inner classes.
UNIT III
DATA STRUCTURES MANIPULATION
9
Data structures creation and manipulation in java: Introduction to Java collections Overview of Java
collection frame work Commonly used collection classes ArrayList LinkedList HashSet
HashMap TreeMap Collection interfaces Collection Set List Map Legacy collection classes
Vector Hashtable Stack Dictionary(abstract) Enumeration interface Iteration over collections
Iterator interface ListIterator interface. StringTokenizer Formatter Random Scanner Observable
Using java.util Files: Streams Byte streams Character streams Text input/output Binary
input/output Random access file operations File management using file class Using java.io.
Networking in Java Introduction, client/server Interaction with stream socket connections,
Connectionless client/server interaction with Datagrams, using java.net.
UNIT IV
EXCEPTION HANDLING AND MULTITHREADING
9
Exception handling Types of exceptions Try Catch Throw Throws and finally keywords Builtin exceptions Creating own exception sub classes Concepts of multithreading Differences between
process and thread Thread life cycle Creating multiple threads using thread class Runnable interface
Synchronization Thread priorities Inter thread communication Daemon threads Deadlocks
Thread groups.
UNIT V
GUI PROGRAMMING AND JDBC
9
Applets Concepts of Applets Applets and applications Life cycle of an applet. Event Handling,
Events AWT: Concepts of components Container Panel Window Frame Canvas Font class
Color class and graphics. AWT Controls. Swing: Introduction to Swing Swing vs. AWT MVC
architecture Swing components swing application Java Database Connectivity (JDBC) creating
connection Executing SQL statements Processing Resultset.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No
1.
2
Author(s)
Cay S. Horstmann
Gary Cornell
Herbert Schildt
Title of the Book
Publisher
Core Java: Volume I

Fundamentals
Java2:The Complete Reference
Sun Microsystems
Press
McGraw Hill
Year of
Publication
2008
2002
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No
1.
Author(s)
Arnold.K
Gosling.J
Title of the Book

The JAVA programming language
235
Publisher
Pearson Education
Year of
Publication
2000
2.
Timothy Budd
3.
C. Thomas Wu
Understanding Object- oriented

programming with Java
An introduction to Object oriented
Pearson Education
2000
Tata McGraw
Hill
2006
WEB URLs:
1. http://docs.oracle.com/javase/tutorial/java/nutsandbolts
2. http://www.javabeginner.com/learn java
3. http://docs.oracle.com/javase/tutorial/collections/intro/
4. http://www.roseindia.net/java/thread/Java Multithreading.shtml
5. http://www.tutorialspoint.com/java/java_excemptions.html
12L009
WIRELESS NETWORKS
3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the fundamental concepts of Wireless networking.
To familiarize with the basic taxonomy and terminology of the wireless networking area.
To introduce the advanced wireless communication concepts.
To gain expertise in design and maintenance of individual networks.
OUTCOMES:
describe basic wireless network technology.
explain wireless system and its components.
identify the different types of network topologies and protocols.
identify the different types of network devices and their functions within a network.
apply the skills of network planning, operation and security mechanisms in real time wireless
networks.
UNIT I
PHYSICAL AND WIRELESS MAC LAYER ALTERNATIVES
9
Wired transmission techniques: design of wireless modems power efficiency out of band radiation
applied wireless transmission techniques short distance base band transmission UWB pulse
transmission- broad band modems for higher speeds diversity and smart receiving techniques random
access for data oriented networks integration of voice and data traffic.
UNIT II
WIRELESS NETWORK PLANNING AND OPERATION
9
Wireless networks topologies cellular topology cell fundamentals signal to interference ratio
calculation capacity expansion techniques cell splitting use of directional antennas for cell sectoring
micro cell method overload cells channels allocation techniques and capacity expansion.
UNIT III
WIRELESSWAN
9
Mechanism to support a mobile environment- communication in the infrastructure IS-95 CDMA forward
channel IS 95 CDMA reverse channel packet and frame formats in IS 95 IMT 2000; forward
channel in W-CDMA and CDMA 2000 reverse channels in W-CDMA and CDMA-2000 GPRS and
higher data rates short messaging service in GPRS mobile application protocols.
UNITIV
SECURITY
9
Security policies for wireless networks Defining the SSID Encryption and Authentication: WEP
TKIP EAP and Radius.
UNIT V
WPAN AND GEOLOCATION SYSTEMS
9
IEEE 802.15 WPAN Home RF- Bluetooth - interference between Bluetooth and 802.11 wireless
geolocation - Technologies for wireless geolocation geolocation standards for E.911 service Configuring
a Wi-Fi access point Configuring a Wi-Fi card in a laptop Case studies.
TOTAL: 45
236
TEXTBOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
Kaveh Pahlavan Prashant

Krishnamoorthy
Principles of Wireless
Networks- A united
approach
2.
Mathew S Gast
802.11 Wireless Networks
3.
C Siva Ram Murthy
Ad hoc Wireless Networks
Year of
Publishing
Publisher
2009
Pearson Education
Shroff Publisher &
Distributors
Pearson Education
2006
2004
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
Jochen Schiller
Mobile Communications
Wang X Poor H V
Mallick M
Nicopolitidis P Obaidat
M S Papadimitria G I
Pomportsis A S
Wireless Communication
Systems
Mobile and Wireless design
essentials
Wireless Networks-
Publisher
Year of
Publishing
Pearson Education
2003
Pearson Education
2004
Wiley Publishing In
2003
John Wiley & Sons
2003
WEB URLs:
1. http://www.howstuffworks.com/wireless-network.html
2. http://www.compnetworking.about.com
3.http://www.documentation.netgear.com/reference/fra/wireless/WirelessNetworkingBasics-309.html
4. http://www.freebsd.org/doc/en/books/network-wireless.html
5. http://www.rejinpaul.com/Wireless-Network
12L010
NETWORK PROCESSORS
3
OBJECTIVES:
To learn the basic terminology of network processors.
To study the protocols and the layers of network processors.
To know the functions of packet processing.
To understand the architecture of network processors and their potential system applications.
OUTCOMES:
illustrate the basic terminology of network processors.
describe the protocols and the layers of network processors.
explain the functions of packet processing and the architecture of network processors.
develop applications using network processors.
program the intel IXP network processors.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION AND BASIC TERMINOLOGY
9
Network systems and the Internet Applications Packet processing Basic terminology Introduction of
Networks and packets Connection oriented and connectionless paradigms LAN and WAN
classifications Example network systems Key systems used in the Internet Monitoring and control
systems.
237
UNIT II
PROTOCOLS AND PACKET FORMATS
9
Introduction Protocols and layering Layer 1 and 2 Layer 3 Layer 4 Protocol port numbers and demultiplexing Encapsulation and transmission.
UNIT III
PACKET PROCESSING
9
Introduction Packet buffer allocation Packet buffer size and copying Protocol layering and copying
Heterogeneity and network byte order IP datagram fragmentation and reassembly IP forwarding
algorithm TCP connection recognition algorithm TCP splicing algorithm Functions Address lookup
and packet forwarding Error detection and correction Fragmentation segmentation and reassembly
frame and protocol de-multiplexing Packet classificationQueuing and packet discard Scheduling and
timing Authentication and privacy Traffic measurement and policing Traffic shaping Timer
management.
UNIT IV
NETWORK PROCESSORS
9
Introduction Motivation for embedded processors RISC Vs CISC Need for custom silicon
Definition of NP Flexibility through programmability Instruction set Scalability with parallelism and
pipelining Cause and benefits of NP NP functionality Packet processing functions Ingress and
Egress processing Parallel and distributed architecture Architectural roles of NP NP architectures
Introduction Architectural variety Primary architectural characteristics Architecture Packet flow
and clock rates Software architecture Assigning functionality to the process hierarchy Issues in
scaling an NP.
UNIT V
IXP2XXX
9
Introduction IXP2xxx Architecture Micro engines Programming Models Packet processing in a
single thread Advanced programming Applications: Switches Routers Firewall and Active Networks.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Douglas E Comer
Network Systems Design

using Network Processors,
Intel IXP version
Pearson Education,
New Delhi
2005
2.
Erik J Johnson
Aaron Kunze
IXP 2400/2800
Programming
Intel Press
2003
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
1.
2.
3.
Author(s)
Patrick Crowley
Peter Z Onufryk
Mark A Franklin
Haldun Hadimioglu
Mark A Franklin
Patrick Crowley
Haldun Hadimioglu
Peter Z Onufryk
George Varghese
Morgan kufmann
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Network Processors 2002:

Design Principles and
Practices.
Morgan Kaufmann
Publications, Volume
One
2002
Network Processor Design:

Issues and Practices
Academic Press,
Volume Two
2005
Network Algorithmics: an
inter disciplinary approach
to designing fast
networked devices
Morgan Kaufmann
Publications, Volume
One
2005
238
WEB URLs:
1. http://www.2002.org/CDROM/refereed/627/
2. http://www.cs.ucr.edu/bhuyan/cs162/LECTURE9.ppt
3. http://www.oit.umd.edu/cans/2002/Presentations/Intel.ppt
4. http://www.marvell.com/network-processors
5. http://www.ezchip.com/p_np4.html
12L011
DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING

3
OBJECTIVES:
To introduce the concepts of image processing.
To understand the fundamentals and characteristics of a digital image.
To know about image enhancement and restoration techniques.
To understand the concept of segmentation and compression process applicable to the images.
OUTCOMES:
apply transform methods for processing an image.
analyze an image and apply suitable enhancement techniques.
analyze the image degradation phenomena.
apply the knowledge in image restoration techniques for specific applications.
adopt a suitable compression technique for transmission of a digital image data.
UNIT I
DIGITAL IMAGE FUNDAMENTALS AND TRANSFORMS
9
Elements of visual perception Image sampling and quantization Basic relationship between pixels
Basic geometric transformations Introduction to Fourier Transform and DFT Properties of 2D Fourier
Transform FFT Separable Image Transforms Walsh Hadamard Discrete Cosine Transform
Haar Slant Karhunen Loeve transforms.
UNIT II
IMAGE ENHANCEMENT TECHNIQUES
9
Spatial Domain methods: Basic grey level transformation Histogram equalization Image subtraction
Image averaging Spatial filtering: Smoothing Sharpening filters Laplacian filters Frequency domain
filters : Smoothing Sharpening filters Homomorphic filtering.
UNIT III
IMAGE RESTORATION
9
Model of Image Degradation/restoration process Noise models Inverse filtering Least mean square
filtering Constrained least mean square filtering Blind image restoration Pseudo inverse Singular
value decomposition.
UNIT IV
IMAGE COMPRESSION
9
Lossless compression: Variable length coding LZW coding Bit plane coding Predictive coding
DPCM. Lossy Compression: Transform coding Wavelet coding Basics of Image compression
standards: JPEG MPEG Basics of Vector quantization.
UNIT V
IMAGE SEGMENTATION AND REPRESENTATION
9
Edge detection Thresholding Region Based segmentation Boundary representation: chain codes
Polygonal approximation Boundary segments Boundary descriptors: Simple descriptors Fourier
descriptors Regional descriptors Simple descriptors Texture.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Year of
Sl.No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Publication
Rafael C Gonzalez
Pearson education,
1.
Richard E Woods
Third Edition
2009
Chanda Dutta
Digital Image Processing and
2.
2002
Magundar
Applications
239
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
William K Pratt
John Willey,
Fourth edition
2012
2.
Millman Sonka
Vaclav hlavac
Roger Boyle
Broos colic
Thompson Learniy
Image Processing Analysis and

Machine Vision
Cengage learning,
Fourth Edition
2013
3.
Jain A K
Fundamentals of Digital Image

Processing
2010
WEB URLs:
1. http://www.videogageinc.com
2. http://www.imageproceesings.com
3. http://www.wolfram.com/products/applications/digitalimage
4. http://www.imageprocessingplace.com/
5. http://www.tutorialspoint.com/dip/
12L012
RF CIRCUIT DESIGN
3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the concepts of transmission line theory and the behavior of passive components at
high frequency.
To study the design concepts and methods used for RF sub systems such as RF filters, RF
amplifiers and RF mixers.
To learn the impedance matching networks in an RF multiport network.
To learn the fabrication of RF active components.
To design the RF amplifiers, RF oscillators and RF Mixers.
OUTCOMES:
analyze the behavior of transmission line primary (passive) and secondary parameters at radio
frequency.
design RF filter to eliminate noise at radio frequency levels.
analyze the design of perfectly matched multiport RF networks.
describe the fabrications of RF active elements like RF diode, RF-BJT and RF-FET.
design and explain the operation of RF amplifiers, oscillators and Mixers.
UNIT I
PASSIVE RF COMPONENTS AND TRANSMISSION LINE ANALYSIS
9
Importance of Radio frequency design Dimensions and units Frequency spectrum RF behavior of
passive components Transmission line analysis: General Solution for Transmission line Micro Strip
transmission line Terminated lossless transmission line Special termination Sourced and Loaded
transmission line Smith Chart: Impedance transformation Admittance transformation Calculation of
SWR and Reflection Co-efficient.
UNIT II
SINGLE AND MULTI PORT NETWORK THEORY AND RF FILTER DESIGN
9
Basic definitions Interconnecting networks Network properties and applications S parameters Basic
resonator and filter configurations Special filter realizations Filter implementation.
UNIT III
DESIGN OF MATCHING NETWORK
9
Impedance matching using discrete components Micro Strip line matching networks Amplifier and
classes of operation and biasing networks.
240
UNIT IV
RF ACTIVE COMPONENTS, MODELING AND RF AMPLIFIER DESIGN
9
Components: RF diode RF Bipolar Junction Transistor RF Field Effect Transistor Modeling: diode
model , Transistor model FET model Characteristics of Amplifiers Amplifier Power relations
Stability relations Constant gain.
UNIT V
RF OSCILLATOR AND MIXER DESIGN
Basic oscillator model High frequency oscillator Model Basic characteristics of mixers.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
1.
2.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Reinhold Ludwig
Gene Bogdanov
RF Circuit Design
Theory and Applications
Pearson
2nd edition
2011
Reinhold Ludwig
Pavel Bretchko
RF Circuit Design
Pearson Education
2011
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Behzad Razavi
RF Microelectronics
Pearson Education Asia

Publication New Delhi
2012
2.
Matthew M
Radmanesh
RF and Microwave
Design Essentials

2001
3.
Peter P Kenington
High linearity RF
Amplifier Design
Artech House Mumbai
2000
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.ssc.pe.titech.ac.jp/materials/VLSICS03_shortcourse_matsu_homepage.pdf
http://www.pesona.mmu.edu.my/~wlkung/ADS/ads.htm
http://www.circuitsage.com/
http://www. rf-circuits.info/radio/rfic-design-course-notes-lectures
http://www.smdp.iitkgp.ernet.in/PDF/TCAD/TKB.pdf
12L013

3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the Basics of Quality Management systems.
To introduce the Quality system standards.
To understand the Various TQM Principles.
OUTCOMES:
develop an understanding on quality management philosophy frameworks.
apply various tools and techniques of quality management systems.
select suitable tools and techniques in manufacturing industry for quality systems.
identify the key aspects of the quality improvement cycle, use appropriate tools, techniques for
controlling, improving and measuring quality.
critically appraise the organizational, communication and teamwork requirements for effective
quality management.
241
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Definition of Quality Dimensions of Quality Quality Planning Quality costs Analysis Techniques
for Quality Costs Basic concepts of Total Quality Management Historical Review Principles of TQM
Leadership Concepts Role of Senior Management Quality Council Quality Statements Strategic
Planning Deming Philosophy Barriers to TQM Implementation.
UNIT II
PRINCIPLES
9
Customer satisfaction Customer Perception of Quality Customer Complaints Service Quality
Customer Retention Employee Involvement Motivation Empowerment Teams Recognition and
Reward Performance Appraisal Benefits Continuous Process Improvement Juran Trilogy PDSA
Cycle 5S Kaizen Supplier Partnership Partnering Sourcing Supplier Selection Supplier Rating
Relationship Development Performance Measures Basic Concepts Strategy Performance
Measure.
UNIT III
STATISTICAL PROCESS CONTROL (SPC)
9
The Seven tools of quality Statistical Fundamentals Measures of central Tendency and Dispersion
Population and Sample Normal Curve Control Charts for variables and attributes Process capability
Concept of six sigma New seven Management tools.
UNIT IV
TQM TOOLS
9
Benchmarking Reasons to Benchmark Benchmarking Process Quality Function Deployment (QFD)
House of Quality QFD Process Benefits Taguchi Quality Loss Function Total Productive
Maintenance (TPM) Concept Improvement Needs FMEA Stages of FMEA.
UNIT V
QUALITY SYSTEMS
9
Need for ISO 9000 and Other Quality Systems ISO 9000:2000 Quality System Elements
Implementation of Quality System Documentation Quality Auditing TS 16949 ISO 14000
Concept Requirements and Benefits.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOK:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
1.
Dale H
Besterfiled etal
Title of the Book
Publisher
Third Edition, Pearson

Education
Year of
Publication
2011
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
James R Evans
William M
Lidsay
The Management and

Control of Quality
Learning)
2008
2.
Feigenbaum AV
Total Quality Control
McGraw-Hill
2009
Narayana V
Sreenivasan N S
Quality ManagementConcepts and Tasks
2005
WEB URLs:
1. http://www.tutor2u.net/business/production/quality_tqm.htm
2. http://www.moresteam.com/toolbox/statistical-process-control-spc.cfm?
3. http://www.ifm.eng.cam.ac.uk/dstools/represent/tqm.html
4. http://www.faculty.mu.edu.sa/download.php?fid
5. https://www.msu.edu/course/fsm/325/l_tqm.pdf
242
12L014
TELECOMMUNICATION SWITCHING AND NETWORKS

3
OBJECTIVES:
To establish the concepts of Frequency and Time division multiplexing.
To introduce digital multiplexing and digital hierarchy namely SONET / SDH.
To understand the importance of network synchronization.
To study the enhanced local loop systems in digital environment.
OUTCOMES:
explain the need and methods of digital multiplexing in telecommunication applications.
identify suitable switching method for a specific application.
analyze the performance of switching network.
identify the various ISDN access methods.
explain and analyze different traffic issues and provide remedies.
UNIT I
MULTIPLEXING
9
Transmission Systems FDM Multiplexing and modulation Time Division Multiplexing Digital
Transmission and Multiplexing: Pulse Transmission Line Coding Binary N-Zero Substitution Digital
Biphase Differential Encoding Time Division Multiplexing Time Division Multiplex Loops and
Rings SONET/SDH: SONET Multiplexing Overview SONET Frame Formats SONET Operations
Administration and Maintenance Payload Framing and Frequency Justification Virtual Tributaries
DS3 Payload Mapping, E4 Payload Mapping SONET Optical Standards SONET Networks SONET
Rings: Unidirectional Path-Switched Ring Bidirectional Line Switched Ring.
UNIT II
DIGITAL SWITCHING
9
Switching Functions Space Division Switching Time Division Switching Two-dimensional
switching: STS Switching, TST Switching No.4 ESS Toll Switch Digital Cross-Connect Systems
Digital Switching in an Analog Environment Elements of SSN07 signaling.
UNIT III
NETWORK SYNCHRONIZATION CONTROL AND MANAGEMENT
9
Timing: Timing Recovery Phase-Locked Loop Clock Instability Jitter Measurements Systematic
Jitter Timing Inaccuracies: Slips Asynchronous Multiplexing Network Synchronization U.S.
Network Synchronization Network Control Network Management.
UNIT IV
DIGITAL SUBSCRIBER ACCESS
9
ISDN: ISDN Basic Rate Access Architecture ISDN U Interface ISDN D Channel Protocol HighData-Rate Digital Subscriber Loops: Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line VDSL Digital Loop Carrier
Systems: Universal Digital Loop Carrier Systems: Integrated Digital Loop Carrier Systems NextGeneration Digital Loop Carrier systems Fiber in the Loop Hybrid Fiber Coax Systems Voice band
Modems: PCM Modems Local Microwave Distribution Service Digital Satellite Services.
UNIT V
TRAFFIC ANALYSIS
9
Traffic Characterization: Arrival Distributions Holding Time Distributions Loss Systems Network
Blocking Probabilities: End-to-End Blocking Probabilities Overflow Traffic Delay Systems:
Exponential service Times Constant Service Times Finite Queues.
T0TAL: 45
TEXTBOOK:
Sl.No.
1.
Author(s)
John Bellamy
Title of the Book

Digital Telephony
243
Publisher
John Wiley
Year of
Publication
2006
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Viswanathan T
Telecommunication
Switching System and
Networks

Ltd
2006
Flood J E
Telecommunication
Switching, Traffic and
Networks
Pearson Education
2006
WEB URLs:
1. http://www.coe.montana.edu/ee/rwolff/EE543-05
2. http://www.utdallas.edu/~torlak/courses/ee4367
3. http://www.internetslang.com/PSTN-meaning-definition.asp
4. http://www.scribd.com/doc/Telecommunication-Switching-and-Networks
5. http:// www.ziddu.com/1-Telecommunication-Switching-System
12L015
TELEVISION AND VIDEO ENGINEERING

3
OBJECTIVES:
To learn TV picture characteristics, composite video signal structure and camera tubes.
To understand the basic principles of monochrome television.
To study the various colour Television systems and their standards.
To study the fundamentals of digital television and High definition television.
OUTCOMES:
explain the working of video camera tubes and the structure of composite video signal.
identify various blocks of a monochrome and colour television receiver and intermediate signal
formats.
explain the international standards followed in TV broadcasting and reception.
compare digital broadcast to analogue broadcast system.
describe the operation of television transmitter and satellite TV systems.
UNIT I
FUNDAMENTALS OF TELEVISION
9
Geometry form and Aspect Ratio Image Continuity Number of scanning lines Interlaced scanning
Picture resolution Camera tubes Image orthicon Vidicon Plumbicon Silicon diode array vidicon
Solid state image scanners Monochrome picture tubes Composite video signal Video signal
dimension Horizontal sync. Composition Vertical sync Details Functions of vertical pulse train
Scanning sequence details Picture signal transmission Positive and negative modulation VSB
transmission sound signal transmission Standard channel bandwidth.
UNIT II
MONOCHROME TELEVISION TRANSMITTER AND RECEIVER
9
TV transmitter TV signal propagation Interference TV transmission Antennas Monochrome TV
receiver RF tuner UHF VHF tuner Digital tuning techniques AFT IF subsystems AGC Noise
cancellation Video and sound inter carrier detection Vision IF subsystem Video amplifiers
requirements and configurations DC re-insertion Video amplifier circuits Sync separation Typical
sync processing circuits Deflection current waveform Deflection Oscillators Frame deflection circuits
requirements Line Deflection circuits EHT generation Receiver Antennas.
244
UNIT III
ESSENTIALS OF COLOUR TELEVISION
9
Compatibility Colour perception Three colour theory Luminance Hue and saturation Colour
television cameras Values of luminance and colour difference signals Colour television display tubesDelta Gun-precision In-line and Trinitron colour picture tubes Purity and convergence Purity and
static and dynamic convergence adjustments Pincushion correction techniques Automatic degaussing
circuit Grey scale tracking Colour signal transmission Bandwidth Modulation of colour difference
signals Weighting factors Formation of chrominance signal.
UNIT IV
COLOUR TELEVISION SYSTEMS
9
NTSC colour TV system NTSC colour receiver Limitations of NTSC system PAL colour TV system
Cancellation of phase errors PAL D colour system PAL coder Pal Decolour receiver Chromo
signal amplifier Separation of U and V signals Colour burst separation Burst phase Discriminator
ACC amplifier Reference Oscillator Ident and colour killer circuits U and V Demodulators Colour
signal matrixing Merits and Demerits of the PAL system SECAM system Merits and Demerits of
SECAM system.
UNIT V
ADVANCED TELEVISION SYSTEMS
9
Satellite TV technology Cable TV VCR Video Disc recording and playback Tele Text broadcast
receiver Digital television Transmission and reception Projection Television LCD LED Flat
panel display TV receiver Stereo sound in TV HDTV 3D TV EDTV Digital equipments for TV
studios.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
1.
Gulati R R
2.
Gulati R R
Title of the Book

Monochrome Television
Practice Principles
Technology and servicing
Monochrome and colour
television
Publisher
Year of
Publication
New age International

Publishers
2004

Publishers
2003
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
1.
Dhake A M
2.
Bali S P
3.
K F Ibrahim
Title of the Book

Television and Video
Engineering
Colour Television Theory and
Practice
Technology
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Tata Mc-Graw Hill
2003
Tata Mc-Graw Hill
1994
Fourth Edition, Newnes

Publications
2003
WEB URLs:
1. http://www.ntsc-tv.com/ntsc-main-01.htm
2. http://www.transmitter.com/rflinks.html
3. http://www.hobbyprojects.com/V/video_circuits.html
4. http:// www.niceindia.com/qbank/ec1011_television_video_engineering.pdf
5. http://www.television-engineering-lectures-tv.html
12L016
OPTOELECTRONIC DEVICES
3
OBJECTIVES:
To know the basic elements of light source in relation with solid state physics.
To study the concept of photo luminescence applied in electronic display devices.
To understand the LASER action concepts along with its model and applications.
To study the operation of optical detection devices.
245
OUTCOMES:
describe the concepts of wave optics applied in real time electronics.
analyze the various photo luminescence types applied in LCDs and numeric displays.
explain the operation of LASER, LASER models, LASER classes and LASER applications.
describe the operating principle of photo detector, photo diodes and other optical detection
devices.
apply the concepts of modulation in optic modulators.
UNIT I
ELEMENTS OF LIGHT AND SOLID STATE PHYSICS
9
Wave nature of light Optical Polarization Interference Diffraction: Fraunhofer diffraction and Fresnel
diffraction Light Source Review of Quantum mechanics Review of Solid State Physics Review of
Semiconductor Physics and Semiconductor Junction devices.
UNIT II
DISPLAY DEVICES AND LASERS
9
Introduction Photo Luminescence Cathode Luminescence Electro Luminescence Injection
Luminescence LED Plasma Display Liquid Crystal Displays Numeric Displays LASER:
Operation and working Principle Absorption Radiation Emission Normal Population and Population
Inversion Optical Pumping Threshold condition Laser Modes Classes of Laser Mode Locking
Laser applications.
UNIT III
OPTICAL DETECTION DEVICES
9
Photo detector Thermal detector Photo devices Photo conductors Photo diodes Detector
performance: Brief discussion with significance.
UNIT IV
OPTOELECTRONIC MODULATOR
9
Introduction Analog and Digital modulation Electro-Optic modulators Magneto-optic Devices
Acoustoptic devices Optical, Switching and Logic Devices.
UNIT V
OPTOELECTRONIC INTEGRATED CIRCUITS
9
Introduction Hybrid and Monolithic Integration Applications of Opto-Electronic Integrated circuits
Integrated transmitters and receivers Guided wave devices Applications.
TOTAL: 45
TEXTBOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Gupta SC
Opto Electronic Devices

and Systems

Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi
2005
2.
John Wilson
John Hawkes
Opto Electronics An
Introduction

Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi
1998
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Razeghi M
Henini M
Opto Electronic Devices:IIINitrides
Elsevier
2004
2.
Jasprit Singh
Opto Electronics As
Introduction to materials
and devices
McGraw-Hill
1998
3.
Desmond Smith S
Opto Electronic Devices

Pvt., Ltd., New Delhi
1995
246
WEB URLs:
1. http://www.colorado.edu/~bart/book/book/chapter4/ch4_6.htm
2. http://www.stanford.edu/class/ee243
3. http://www.tf.uni-kiel.de/matwis/amat/semi_en/kap_5/backbone/r5_1_1.html
4. http://www.nteinc.com/optoelectronic-devices.php
5. http://www.rleweb.mit.edu/sclaser/6.973%20lecture%20notes/6.973 overview(F04).pdf
12L017
TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM MODELING AND SIMULATION

3
OBJECTIVES:
To gain knowledge in modeling of different communication systems.
To know the techniques involved in performance estimation of telecommunication systems.
To learn the use of random process concepts in telecommunication system simulation.
To study the modeling methodologies of a telecommunication system.
OUTCOMES:
apply the constituents of a telecommunication systems.
analyze various modeling methodologies and simulation techniques.
estimate the performance measures of telecommunication systems.
apply system modeling in telecommunication.
demonstrate light wave communication and satellite communication systems.
UNIT I
SIMULATION OF RANDOM VARIABLES RANDOM PROCESS
9
Generation of random numbers and sequence Gaussian and uniform random numbers Correlated random
sequences Testing of random numbers generators Stationary and uncorrelated noise Goodness of fit
test.
UNIT II
MODELING OF COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
9
Radio frequency and optical sources Analog and Digital signals Communication channel and model
Free space channels Multipath channel and discrete channel noise and interference.
UNIT III
ESTIMATION OF PERFORMANCE MEASURE FOR SIMULATION
9
Quality of estimator Estimation of SNR Probability density function and bit error rate Monte Carlo
method Importance sampling method Extreme value theory.
UNIT IV
SIMULATION AND MODELING METHODOLOGY
9
Simulation environment Modeling considerations Performance evaluation techniques Error source
simulation Validation.
UNIT V
CASE STUDIES
9
Simulations of QAM digital radio link environment - Light wave communication link - Satellite system.
TOTAL: 45
TEXTBOOK:
Sl.No.
1.
Author(s)
Jeruchim MC
Balaban P
Sam K Shanmugam
Title of the Book

Simulation of
communication Systems:
Modeling, Methodology
and Techniques
247
Publisher
Plenum press , New
York
Year of
Publication
2001
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Averill M Law
David Kelton W
Simulation Modeling and

Analysis
McGraw-Hill Inc
2000
2.
Geoffrey Gorden
System Simulation
1992
3.
Turin W
Performance Analysis of
Systems
Computer Science
Press, New York
1990
4.
Jerry banks
John S Carson
Discrete Event System

Simulation
1984
WEB URLs:
1. http://www.wirelesscafe.wordpress.com/2009/07/10/tutorial-i-basic-elements-of-digitalcommunication-system/
2. http://www.tocs.ulb.tu-darmstadt.de/56709005.pdf
3. http://www.bookos.org/book/683339
4. http://www.webopedia.com/TERM/O/optoelectronics.html
5. http://www.ece.rutgers.edu
12L018
RADAR AND NAVIGATIONAL AIDS

3
OBJECTIVES:
To familiarize with basics of radar.
To gain knowledge about the different types of Radar and their operation.
To become familiar with signal detection techniques in radar applications.
To understand the concepts of radio navigation techniques.
OUTCOMES:
identify, formulate and solve engineering problems related to object location.
apply doppler effect in radar applications.
distinguish various radio navigation methods.
explain different antennas in radar communication.
design landing systems using Radar principles.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO RADAR
9
Basic radar The simple form of the radar equation Radar block diagram Radar frequencies
Applications of radar The origins of radar the radar equation: Introduction Detection of signals in noise
Receiver noise and the Signal-to-Noise ratio Probability Density Function Probabilities of detection
and false alarm Integration of radar pulses Radar cross section of targets Radar cross section
fluctuations Transmitter power Pulse repetition frequency Antenna parameters System losses
Other radar equation considerations.
UNIT II
MTI AND PULSE DOPPLER RADAR
9
Induction to Doppler and MTI radar Delay Line cancellers Staggered pulse repetition frequencies
Doppler filter banks Digital MTI processing Pulse Doppler radar Other Doppler radar topics
Tracking with radar Mono pulse tracking Conical scan and sequential lobing Limitations to tracking
accuracy Low-angle tracking Tracking in range Other tracking radar topics Comparison of trackers
Automatic tracking with Surveillance Radars (ADT).
248
UNIT III
DETECTION OF SIGNALS IN NOISE
9
Introduction Matched Filter receiver Detection criteria Detectors Automatic detector Integrators
Constant-false Alarm rate receivers The radar operator Signal management Propagation radar
waves Atmospheric refraction Standard propagation Nonstandard propagation The radar antenna
Reflector antennas Electronically steered phased array antennas Phase shifter Frequency Scan
arrays radar transmitters- Introduction Linear beam power tubes Solid state RF power sources
Magnetron Crossed field amplifiers Other RF power sources Other aspects of radar transmitter.
radar receivers The radar receiver Receiver noise figure Super heterodyne receiver Duplexers
and receiver protectors Radar displays.
UNIT IV
RADIO NAVIGATION
9
Introduction Four methods of navigation .Radio direction finding - The loop antenna Loop input
circuits An aural null direction finder The goniometer Errors in direction finding Adcock
direction finders Direction finding at very high frequencies Automatic direction finders The
Commutated aerial direction finder Range and accuracy of direction finders radio ranges - The LF/MF
four course radio range VHF omni directional range(VOR) VOR receiving equipment Range and
accuracy of VOR Recent developments. hyperbolic systems of navigation (Loran and Decca) - Loran-A
Loran-A equipment Range and precision of standard loran Loran-C The decca navigation system
Decca receivers Range and accuracy of decca The omega system
UNIT V
DME AND TACAN
9
Distance Measuring Equipment Operation of DME TACAN TACAN equipment aids to approach
and landing Instrument landing system Ground controlled approach system Microwave landing
system(MLS) oppler navigation The doppler effect Beam configurations Doppler frequency
equations Track stabilization Doppler spectrum Components of the Doppler navigation system
Doppler range equation Accuracy of doppler navigation systems Inertial navigation Principles of
operation Navigation over the earth Components of an inertial navigation system Earth coordinate
mechanization Strapped down systems Accuracy of inertial navigation systems Satellite navigation
system The transit system Navstar Global Positioning System (GPS)
TOTAL: 45
TEXTBOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
1.
Merrill I Skolnik
2.
Nagaraja N S
Title of the Book

Introduction to Radar
Systems
Elements of Electronic
Navigation
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Tata McGraw-Hill
2003
Tata McGraw-Hill
2006
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Peyton Z Peebles
Radar Principles
John Wiley
2004
2.
Toomay J C
Principles of Radar
PHI
2004
3.
Steve Richards
Electronics, Navigational
aids and Radio theory
Bloomsbury
2013
WEB URLs:
1. http://www.wirelesscommunication.nl/reference/chaptr03/fading/doppler.htm
2. http://www.marelmar.com/html/radar_nav.htm
3. http://www.allstar.fiu.edu/aero/NAVAIDS.htm
4. http://www.niceindia.com/radar_and_navigational_aids.pdf
5. http://www.bunkerofdoom.com
249
12L019
REMOTE SENSING
3
OBJECTIVES:
To learn the components and concepts of remote sensing process.
To study the impact of Electromagnetic Radiation (EMR) on atmosphere and earth materials and
learn methods to interpret EMR data as tool in Remote sensing processing.
To learn data collection methods using satellite and Sonar systems.
To study the components, hardware and software involved in geographical information system.
OUTCOMES:
explain the key concepts and terminology used in remote sensing.
discuss the features of remote sensing for the study of the Earth environment.
describe the electromagnetic spectrum and the fundamental physical properties of radiation
suitable for use in remote sensing.
analyze the impact of visible microwave wavelength radiation on the terrestrial environment.
explain and interpret the thematic maps derived from remotely sensed data.
UNIT I
REMOTE SENSING
9
Definition Components of Remote Sensing Energy, Sensor, Interacting Body MTI and Pulse Doppler
Radar Active and Passive Remote Sensing Platforms Aerial and Space Platforms Balloons
Helicopters Aircraft and Satellites Synoptivity and Repetivity Electro Magnetic Radiation (EMR)
EMR spectrum Visible Infra Red (IR) Near IR Middle IR Thermal IR and Microwave Black
Body Radiation Plancks law Stefan-Boltzman law.
UNIT II
EMR INTERACTION WITH ATMOSPHERE AND EARTH MATERIALS
9
Atmospheric characteristics Scattering of EMR Raleigh Mie Non-selective and Raman Scattering
EMR Interaction with Water vapour and ozone Atmospheric Windows Significance of Atmospheric
windows EMR interaction with Earth Surface Materials Radiance Irradiance Incident Reflected
Absorbed and Transmitted Energy Reflectance Specular and Diffuse Reflection Surfaces Spectral
Signature Spectral Signature curves EMR interaction with water soil and Earth Surface Imaging
spectrometry and spectral characteristics.
UNIT III
OPTICAL AND MICROWAVE REMOTE SENSING
9
Satellites Classification Based on Orbits and Purpose Satellite Sensors - Resolution Description of
Multi Spectral Scanning Along and Across Track Scanners Description of Sensors in Landsat SPOT
IRS series Current Satellites Radar Speckle Back Scattering Side Looking Airborne Radar
Synthetic Aperture Radar Radiometer Geometrical characteristics Sonar remote sensing systems.
UNIT IV
GEOGRAPHIC INFORMATION SYSTEM
9
GIS Components of GIS Hardware, Software and Organizational Context Data Spatial and NonSpatial Maps Types of Maps Projection Types of Projection Data Input Digitizer Scanner
Editing Raster and Vector data structures Comparison of Raster and Vector data structure Analysis
using Raster and Vector data Retrieval Reclassification Overlaying, Buffering Data Output
Printers and Plotters
UNIT V
MISCELLANEOUS TOPICS
9
Visual Interpretation of Satellite Images Elements of Interpretation Interpretation Keys Characteristics
of Digital Satellite Image Image enhancement Filtering Classification Integration of GIS and
Remote Sensing Application of Remote Sensing and GIS Urban Applications- Integration of GIS and
Remote Sensing Application of Remote Sensing and GIS Water resources Urban Analysis
Watershed Management Resources Information Systems Global positioning system and introduction.
TOTAL: 45
250
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
1.
2.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Srinivas M G
Remote Sensing
Applications
Narosa Publishing
House
2001
Anji Reddy
Remote Sensing and

Systems
BS Publications
2001
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Jensen J R
Remote sensing of the

environment
Prentice Hall
2.
Kang - Tsung Chang
Introduction to Geograhic
Information Systems
TMH
3.
Burrough P A
Principle of GIS for land

resource assessment
Oxford
2002
4.
Floyd F Sabins
Remote sensing - Principles

and interpretation
W H Freeman and
Company
2007
2007
2013
WEB URLs:
1. http://www.gis.nic.in/
2. http://www.fas.org/irp/imint/docs/rst/Front/tofc.html
3. http://www. mdpi.com/remotesensing
4. https://www.fas.org/irp/imint/docs/rst
5. https://www. crisp.nus.edu.sg/~research/tutorial/rsmain.htm
12L020
NETWORK SECURITY AND CRYPTOGRAPHY

3
OBJECTIVES:
To learn security mechanism, architecture, types of attacks and security standards of a network
To study various cryptography methods and data encryption methods.
To understand various message authentication methods
To study the issues involved in data networks
OUTCOMES:
apply security mechanisms, security policies, security components and protection in data
networks
explain complex security concepts involved in various data networks
apply relevant standards and ethical considerations of privacy issues in designing secure networks.
explain the key management in cryptography
analyze security risks in data networks and suggest suitable solutions
UNIT I
FUNDAMENTALS OF SECURITY
9
Security services, mechanisms and attacks OSI security architecture Model for network security Plan
of attack Attacks on encryption shemes Standards and standard setting organization.
UNIT II
SYMMETRIC CRYPTOGRAPHY
9
Basic Encryption and Decryption Substitution-transposition Steganography Stream and block
Ciphers Data Encryption Standard Differential and Linear Cryptanalysis Block Cipher modes
Advance Encryption Standard Triple DES AES RC5 RC4 stream cipher.
251
UNIT III
PUBLIC KEY ENCRYPTION
9
Introduction to Number Theory RSA key management Diffie-Hellman key exchange Elliptic curve
cryptography.
UNIT IV
MESSAGE AUTHENTICATION
9
HASH functions HASH algorithm RIPMED-160-HMAC-SHA-MD5 Digital signature standards.
UNIT V
NETWORK AND SYSTEM SECURITY
9
Authentication applications E-mail Security IP security Web security Intruders Malicious
Software - Firewalls.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
1.
William Stallings
2.
Forouzan B
Title of the Book

Cryptography and Network
Security: Principles and
Practices
Security
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Prentice Hall
2013
Tata McGraw hill
2008
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
Charles P Pleeger
Security in Computing
Prentice Hall
2002
2.
Fred Simonds
Network Security
McGraw Hill
1998
3.
Derek Atkins
Internet Security
Tech media
1998
4.
Baker
Network Security
Mc Graw Hill
1996
WEB URLs:
1. http://www.interhack.net/pubs/network-security
2. http://www-cse.ucsd.edu/classes/sp99/cse207/index.html
3. http://www.utmem.edu/ephi/Firewall1-0.pdf
4. http://www. paloaltonetworks.com
5. http://www. cc.boun.edu.tr/network_security.html
252
ME:COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
SEMESTER I
TOTAL CREDITS: 67
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Credits
Maximum Marks
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
14LC11
14LC12
14LC13
Applied Mathematics for

Communication Engineers
Advanced Digital Signal
Processing
Advanced Digital Communication
Techniques
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
14LC14
Optical Communication Networks
40
60
100
14LC15
Advanced Radiation Systems
40
60
100
14LC16
Advanced Satellite Based Systems
40
60
100
40
60
100
18
20
PRACTICAL
14LC18
Laboratory I
TOTAL
Course
Code
Course Title
SEMESTER II
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Credits
Maximum Marks
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
14LC21
40
60
100
14LC22
MIC and RF System Design
40
60
100
14LC23
Multimedia Compression
Techniques
40
60
100
14LCXX
Elective I
40
60
100
14LCXX
Elective II
40
60
100
14LCXX
Elective III
40
60
100
40
60
100
18
20
PRACTICAL
14LC28
Laboratory II
TOTAL

253
SEMESTER III
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Credits
Maximum Marks
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
14LCXX
Elective IV
40
60
100
14LCXX
Elective V
40
60
100
14LCXX
Elective VI
40
60
100
12
100
100
TOTAL
12
15
PRACTICAL
14LC39
SEMESTER IV
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Credits
Maximum Marks
CIA
ESE
Total
40
60
100
PRACTICAL
14LC49
24
12
TOTAL
24
12

254
LIST OF ELECTIVES
Course Code
Course Title
14LC51
ASIC and FPGA Design
14LC52
DSP Processor Architecture and Programming
14LC53
Advanced Microprocessors and Microcontrollers
14LC54
VLSI for Wireless Communication
14LC55
Communication Protocol Engineering
14LC56
Electromagnetic Interference and Compatibility
14LC57
14LC58
Cognitive Radio
14LC59
RF MEMS
14LC60
Speech and Audio Signal Processing
14LC61
High Performance Communication Networks
14LC62
Ultra Wide Band Communication
14LC63
Advanced Digital Image Processing
14LC64
Wavelet Transforms and Applications
14LC65
Radar Signal Processing
14LC66
Network Routing Algorithms
14LC67
Digital Communication Receivers
14LC68
Communication Network Modeling and Simulation
14LC69
Internetworking Multimedia
14LC70
High Speed Switching Architectures
255
SEMESTER I
14LC11
APPLIED MATHEMATICS FOR COMMUNICATION ENGINEERS

3
OBJECTIVES:
To develop an understanding of fuzzy variables, neural networks and Genetic algorithms.
To understand several important concepts in linear algebra, including systems of linear equations
and vector spaces.
To familiarize the concept of Random Process.
To impart knowledge in decision making about the resources needed to provide a service.
OUTCOMES:
solve the problems in soft computing whose solutions are unpredictable, uncertain and between 0
and 1.
solve the problems in one dimensional wave equation.
solve the systems of linear equations and vector spaces.
apply the concepts of random process for signal processing applications.
make a decision about the resources needed to provide a service.
UNIT I

METHOD
9
Method of false position Iteration method Newton Raphson method Solution of linear system by
Gaussian elimination and Gauss Jordon methods Fuzzy variables Fuzzy relations Neural networks
Genetic algorithms (basic concepts only).
UNIT II
9
Solution of One dimensional wave equation: Characteristics Canonical transformation Periodic solution
DAlemberts solution Riemann Volterra solution Laplace transform solutions for displacement in a
long string.
UNIT III
LINEAR ALGEBRA
9
Vector spaces Definition and properties Basis and dimension Row and column spaces Rank and
nullity Finding Basis Inner Product spaces Orthonormal basis Gram schmidth Process.
UNIT IV
RANDOM PROCESSES
9
Definitions and examples First order and second order Strictly stationary Wide sense stationary and
Ergodic processes Markov process Binomial Poisson and normal or Gaussian processes Sine wave
process.
UNIT V
QUEUEING THEORY
Single and Multiple server Markovian queueing models (M / M / 1):
( / FIFO ) , (M / M / k):
( / FIFO ) , (M
Littles formula M/G/1
/ M / 1):
( N / FIFO ) ,
(M / M / k):
( N / FIFO )
queueing system P-K formula (Derivations excluded for all models).

TOTAL: 45+15
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
1.
Author(s)
Jain M K
Iyengar S R K
Jain R K
Title of the Book

Computation
256
Publisher
New Age
International
Publishers Pvt. Ltd.
Year of
Publication
2007
2.
Rajasekaran S
Neural Network : Fuzzy Logic

and Genetic Algorithm ;
Synthesis and Applications
Prentice Hall of
India
2008
3.
Sankara Rao K
Differential Equation
Prentice Hall of
India, 3rd Edition
2007
4.
Herstesin I N
Topics in Algebra
John Wiley and

Sons, 2nd edition
2006
5.
Veerarajan T
Probability ,Statistics and

Random Process
Tata McGraw Hill,

2nd edition
2008
6.
Taha H A
Operations Research
Pearson Education,
Asia, 8th edition
2007
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Sivanandam S N
Deepa S N
Jain R K
Iyengar S R K
Principles of Soft
Computing
Mathematics
3.
Sharma J N
Vashishtha A R
Linear Algebra
4.
Henry Stark
John Woods W
5.
Gross D
Harris C M
1.
2.
Year of
Publication
Publisher
Wiley India Pvt. Limited
2007
Narosa Publishers
2007
Krishna Prakasha Mandir

Fundamentals of Queuing
Theory
Pearson
edition
Education,
1981
4th
2013
John Wiley and Sons
2008
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.mathworld.wolfram.com/WaveEquation1-Dimensional.html
http://www.tutorial.math.lamar.edu/Classes/DE/TheWaveEquation.aspx
https://www.khanacademy.org/math/linear-algebra
http://www.ece.uah.edu/courses/ee385/
http://www.homepages.inf.ed.ac.uk/jeh/Simjava/queueing/
14LC12
ADVANCED DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING

3
OBJECTIVES:
To provide in depth knowledge on discrete time signal processing.
To understand the power spectrum estimation.
To understand about filtering and linear prediction.
To acquire the knowledge about various types of adaptive filters.
To learn about multirate digital signal processing.
OUTCOMES:
apply various digital signal processing techniques for signal processing.
perform spectrum estimation and analysis.
design and implement FIR and IIR Wiener filters.
design and implement adaptive filters for a given application.
design multirate DSP systems.
257
UNIT I
DISCRETE RANDOM SIGNAL PROCESSING
9
Discrete Random Processes Ensemble averages Stationary processes Autocorrelation and
Auto covariance matrices Parseval's Theorem Wiener-Khintchine Relation Power Spectral
Density Periodogram Spectral Factorization Filtering random processes Low Pass Filtering
of White Noise Parameter estimation: Bias and consistency.
UNIT II
SPECTRUM ESTIMATION
9
Estimation of spectra from finite duration signals Non-Parametric Methods Correlation Method
Periodogram Estimator Performance Analysis of Estimators Unbiased Consistent Estimators
Modified periodogram Bartlett and Welch methods Blackman Tukey method Parametric
Methods AR, MA, ARMA model based spectral estimation Parameter Estimation Yule-Walker
equations Solutions using Durbin's algorithm.
UNIT III
LINEAR ESTIMATION AND PREDICTION
9
Linear prediction Forward and backward predictions Solutions of the Normal equations
Levinson Durbin algorithms Least mean squared error criterion Wiener filter for filtering and
prediction FIR Wiener filter and Wiener IIR filter Discrete Kalman filter.
UNIT IV
ADAPTIVE FILTERS
9
FIR adaptive filters Adaptive filter based on steepest descent method Widrow-Hoff LMS adaptive
algorithm Normalized LMS Adaptive channel equalization Adaptive echo cancellation Adaptive
noise cancellation Adaptive recursive filters (IIR) RLS adaptive filters Exponentially weighted
RLS sliding window RLS.
UNIT V
MULTIRATE DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING
9
Mathematical description of change of sampling rate Interpolation and Decimation Decimation by an
integer factor Interpolation by an integer factor Sampling rate conversion by a rational factor
Filter implementation for sampling rate conversion Direct form FIR structures Polyphase filter
structures Time-variant structures Multistage implementation of multirate system Application
to sub band coding Wavelet transform and filter bank implementation of wavelet expansion of
signals.
TOTAL: 45+15
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Monson H Hayes
Statistical Digital
Signal Processing
and Modeling

Singapore
2008
2.
John G Proakis
Dimitris G Manolakis
Digital Signal
Processing
Pearson Education
2009
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
John G Proakis
Dimitris G
Manolakis
Algorithms for Statistical

Signal Processing
Pearson Education
2007
2.
Dimitris G
Manolakis
Statistical and adaptive

signal Processing
McGraw-Hill, Newyork
2005
3.
Rafael C Gonzalez
Richard E Woods
Pearson Education Inc.,

2nd Edition
2009
258
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.courses.ece.illinois.edu/ECE551/
http://www.et.byu.edu/groups/ece777web/
http://www.ee.lamar.edu/gleb/adsp/Lecture%2007%20-%20Adaptive%20filtering.pdf
http://www.users.abo.fi/htoivone/courses/sbappl/asp_chapter2.pdf
14LC13
ADVANCED DIGITAL COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUES

3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the basics of signal-space analysis and digital transmission.
To understand the coherent and non coherent receivers and its impact on different channel
characteristics.
To understand different Equalizers.
To understand different block coded and convolution coded digital communication systems.
To understand Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing.
OUTCOMES:
analyze coherent and non coherent receivers.
analyze different equalization techniques.
analyze different block coded and convolutional coded digital communication systems.
analyze the generation of OFDM signals and the processing of the signals.
simulate OFDM using open source simulators.
UNIT I
COHERENT AND NON - COHERENT COMMUNICATION
9
Coherent receivers Optimum receivers in WGN IQ modulation and demodulation Noncoherent
receivers in random phase channels MFSK receivers Rayleigh and Rician channels Partially coherent
receivers DPSK M-PSK M-DPSK BER Performance Analysis Carrier Synchronization Bit
synchronization.
UNIT II
EQUALIZATION TECHNIQUES
9
Band Limited Channels ISI Nyquist Criterion Controlled ISI Partial Response signals
Equalization algorithms Linear equalizer Decision feedback equalization Adaptive Equalization
algorithms.
UNIT III
BLOCK CODED DIGITAL COMMUNICATION
9
Architecture and performance Binary block codes Orthogonal Biorthogonal Transorthogonal
Shannons channel coding theorem Channel capacity Matched filter Concepts of Spread spectrum
communication Coded BPSK and DPSK demodulators Linear block codes Hamming Golay
Cyclic BCH Reed - Solomon codes Space time block codes.
UNIT IV
CONVOLUTIONAL CODED DIGITAL COMMUNICATION
9
Representation of codes using Polynomial State diagram Tree diagram and Trellis diagram Decoding
techniques using Maximum likelihood Sequential and Threshold methods Error probability
performance for BPSK and Viterbi algorithm Turbo Coding.
UNIT V
ORTHOGONAL FREQUENCY DIVISION MULTIPLEXING
9
Generation of sub-carriers using the IFFT Guard Time and Cyclic Extension Windowing OFDM
signal processing Peak Power Problem: PAP reduction schemes Clipping Filtering Coding and
Scrambling.
TOTAL: 45+15
259
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Simon M K
Hinedi S M
Lindsey W C
Techniques: Signal and
Detection
1995
2.
Simon Haykin
Digital Communications
John Wiley and Sons ,

1st Edition Reprint
2004
Publisher
Year of
Publication
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
Bernard Sklar
Digital Communications Pearson Education
2.
John G Proakis
Mc Graw Hill
Publication
2009
3.
Theodore Rappaport S
Wireless
Communications
Pearson Education
2002
Stephen G Wilson
Digital Modulation and

Coding
Pearson Education,
Ist Indian Reprint
2003
Richard Van Nee

Ramjee Prasad
OFDM for Multimedia

Communications
Artech House
Publication
2001
4.
5
2001
WEB URLs:
1. http://www.iet.ntnu.no/~ralf/ws/pr/boelcskei.pdf
2. http://www.argreenhouse.com/society/TaCom/papers/08-04.pdf
3. http://www.web.ee.ccu.edu.tw/~wl/wireless_class/Chapter7%20Equalization,%20Diversity,%2
0a %20Channel%20Coding.pdf
4. http://www.eee.hku.hk/~sdma/elec7073/Part2-3-Convolutional%20codes.pdf
5. http://www.csie.ntu.edu.tw/~hsinmu/courses/lib/exe/fetch.php?media=wn_11fall:ofdm_new.pdf
14LC14
OPTICAL COMMUNICATION NETWORKS

3
OBJECTIVES:
To learn the basic components required for optical networks.
To learn various optical network architectures.
To understand various wavelength routing architectures.
To study the management of various optical networks.
To learn the various standards in optical networks.
OUTCOMES:
select and design the components needed for optical networks.
implement and demonstrate various optical network standards.
analyze large scale optical network management.
implement optical multiplexing systems.
analyze various wavelength routing architectures.
UNIT I
OPTICAL SYSTEM COMPONENTS
9
Light propagation in optical fibers Loss and bandwidth System limitations Non - Linear effects
Solutions Optical Network Components Couplers Isolators and Circulators Multiplexers and Filters
Optical Amplifiers Switches Wavelength Converters.
260
UNIT II
OPTICAL NETWORK ARCHITECTURES
9
Introduction to Optical Networks SONET / SDH standards Metropoliton Area Networks Layered
Architecture Broadcast and Select Networks Topologies for Broadcast Networks Media Access
Control Protocols Testbeds for Broadcast and Select WDM Wavelength Routing Architecture.
UNIT III
WAVELENGTH ROUTING NETWORKS
9
The optical layer Node Designs Optical layer cost tradeoff Routing and Wavelength Assignment
Virtual topology design Wavelength Routing Testbeds Architectural variations.
UNIT IV
PACKET SWITCHING AND ACCESS NETWORKS
9
Photonic Packet Switching OTDM Multiplexing and Demultiplexing Synchronization Broadcast
OTDM networks Switch - based networks Access Networks Network Architecture overview
OTDM networks Optical Access Network Architectures Future Access Networks.
UNIT V
NETWORK DESIGN AND MANAGEMENT
9
Transmission System Engineering System model Power penalty Transmitter Receiver Optical
amplifiers Crosstalk Dispersion Wavelength stabilization Overall design considerations Control
and Management Network management functions Configuration management Performance
management Fault management Optical safety Service interface.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
1.
Rajiv Ramaswami
Kumar N Sivarajan
2.
Siva Ram Moorthy C

Mohan Gurusamy
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Optical Networks : A
Harcourt Asia Pvt. Ltd.
Practical Perspective
3rd Edition
WDM Optical Networks :
Concept, Design and
Algorithms
2010
2002
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
1.
2.
3.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Biswanath Mukherjee Optical Communication

Networks
McGraw-Hill
2004
Green P E
Fiber Optic Networks
Prentice Hall
2005
Vivek Alwayn
Optical Network Design

and Implementation
Pearson Education
2006
WEB URLs:
1. http://www.newport.com/Tutorial-Fiber-Optic-Basics/978863/1033/content.aspx
2. http://www.imedea.uib.es/~salvador/coms_optiques/addicional/alcatel/opt_net.pdf
3. http://www.ncsu.edu/~hp/Chapter9.pdf
4. http://www.eecs.yorku.ca/course_archive/2006 -07/W/3213/Ch7_Part_1.pdf
5. http://www.thefoa.org/tech/guides/DesG.pdf
14LC15
ADVANCED RADIATION SYSTEMS

3
OBJECTIVES:
To learn the basic radiation concepts and antenna parameters.
To study the gain of array and aperture antenna.
To learn the various antenna synthesis methods.
To learn the construction of horn, microstrip, reflector antennas.
To learn various antennas feeding methods.
261
OUTCOMES:
analyze the radiation pattern of various antennas.
analyze the parameters of array and aperture antennas.
solve the antenna synthesis problem using different methods.
analyze the construction and working of horn, microstrip and reflector antennas.
analyze various antenna feeding mechanisms.
UNIT I
CONCEPTS OF RADIATION
9
Retarded vector potentials Heuristic approach and Maxwell's equation approach Electric vector
potential F for a magnetic current source M Duality theorem The Lorentz gauge condition Vector
potential in Phasor form Fields radiated by an alternating current element and half wave dipole
Total power radiated and radiation resistance of alternating current element and half wave dipole
Power radiated in the far field Linear, elliptical and circular polarization Development of the
Poincare sphere.
UNIT II
ANTENNA ARRAYS
9
N element linear arrays Uniform amplitude and spacing Phased arrays Directivity of Broadside
and End fire arrays Three dimensional characteristics Pattern multiplication Binomial arrays and
Dolph-Tchebycheff arrays Circular array Mutual coupling in arrays Multidimensional arrays
Phased arrays and array feeding techniques.
UNIT III
ANTENNA SYNTHESIS
9
Synthesis problem Line source based beam synthesis methods Fourier transform and Woodward
Lawson sampling method Linear array shaped beam synthesis method Low side lobe Narrow
main beam synthesis methods Discretization of continuous sources Schelkunoff polynomial method
UNIT IV
APERTURE ANTENNAS
9
Radiation from apertures Huygens Principle Rectangular apertures Techniques for evaluating gain
Circular apertures and their design considerations Babinets principle Fraunhoffer and Fresnel
diffraction Complimentary screens and slot antennas Slot and dipoles as dual antennas Fourier
transform in aperture antenna theory.
UNIT V
HORN, MICROSTRIP, REFLECTOR ANTENNAS
9
E and H plane sectoral Horns Pyramidal horns Conical and corrugated Horns Multimode horns
Phase center Microstrip antennas Feeding methods Rectangular patch Transmission line model
Circular patch Parabolic Reflector antennas Prime focus and cassegrain reflectors
Equivalent focal length of Cassegrain antennas Spillover and taper efficiencies Optimum
illumination.
TOTAL : 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Balanis C A
Antenna Theory
John Wiley and sons
2005
2.
Warren L Stutzman
Gary A Thiele
Antenna theory and design
John Wiley and sons
2012
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No
1.
Author(s)
Jordan E C
Balmain K G
Title of the Book

Electromagnetic waves
and Radiating systems
262
Publisher
Prentice Hall India,
New Delhi
Year of
Publication
2003
2.
Krauss J D
Antennas
John Wiley and sons
1997
3.
Krauss J D
Fleisch D A
Electromagnetics
McGraw-Hill
1999
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.ece.rutgers.edu/~orfanidi/ewa/ch17.pdf
http://www.ece.msstate.edu/~donohoe/ece4990notes12.pdf
http://www.engr.uky.edu/~cclu/EE522/NTS522_i.pdf
http://www.antenna-theory.com/arrays/main.php
http://www.ece.rutgers.edu/~orfanidi/ewa/ch18.pdf
14LC16
ADVANCED SATELLITE BASED SYSTEMS

3
OBJECTIVES:
To study about the overview of satellite.
To learn about the Navigation, Tracking and safety systems.
To learn about Inertial Navigation and differential GPS systems.
To acquire the knowledge of remote sensing system and techniques.
To learn about various broadcast systems.
OUTCOMES:
analyze the overview of satellite systems.
analyze the Navigation, Tracking and safety systems.
analyze Navigation coordinates, error models and differential GPS systems.
analyze the performance of remote sensing system and its techniques.
analyze various broadcast systems.
UNIT I
OVERVIEW OF SATELLITE SYSTEMS, ORBITS AND SPACE SEGMENT
9
Introduction Polar Orbiting Satellites Keplers Laws Definitions of Terms for Earth - orbiting
Satellites Orbital Elements Apogee and Perigee Heights Orbital Perturbations Inclined Orbits
Near Geostationary Orbits Earth Eclipse of Satellite Sun Transit Outage Launching Orbits Power
Supply Attitude Control Station Keeping Thermal Control TT and C Subsystem Transponders
Antenna Subsystem.
UNIT II
NAVIGATION TRACKING AND SAFETY SYSTEMS
9
Global Navigation Satellite Systems Basic concepts of GPS Space segment Control segment User
segment GPS constellation GPS measurement characteristics Selective availability Anti spoofing
(AS) Applications of Satellite and GPS for 3D position Velocity Determination as function of time
Interdisciplinary applications Regional Navigation Systems Distress and Safety Cospas-SarsatInmarsat Distress System Location-Based service.
UNIT III
INERTIAL NAVIGATION AND DIFFERENTIAL GPS SYSTEMS
9
Introduction to Inertial Navigation Inertial Sensors Navigation Coordinates System Implementations
System Level Error Models Introduction to Differential GPS LADGPS WADGPS WAAS
GEO Uplink Subsystem (GUS) GEO Uplink Subsystem (GUS) Clock Steering Algorithms GEO Orbit
Determination Problems.
UNIT IV
REMOTE SENSING SYSTEMS AND TECHNIQUES
9
Introduction Commercial Imaging Digital Globe GeoEye Meteorology Meteosat Land
Observation Landsat Remote Sensing Data Sensors Overview Optical Sensors: Cameras Non
Optical Sensors Image Processing Image Interpretation System Characteristics.
263
UNIT V
BROADCAST SYSTEMS
9
Introduction Satellite Radio Systems XM Satellite Radio Inc. Sirius Satellite Radio World space
Direct Multimedia Broadcast MBCO and TU Multimedia European Initiatives Direct-to-Home
Television Implementation Issues DTH Services Representative DTH Systems Military
Multimedia Broadcasts US Global Broadcast Service (GBS) Business TV(BTV) GRAMSAT
Specialized services: E-mail Video conferencing Internet.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
1.
Mohinder S Grewal
2.
Dennis Roddy
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Global Positioning Systems,

Inertial Navigation and
Integration
John Wiley & Sons Inc.

2nd Edition
2007
Satellite Communications
McGraw-Hill
4th Edition
2006
Title of the Book
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Madhavendra
Richharia
Satellite systems for personal

Applications concepts and
Technology
John Wiley and Sons
2010
2.
Leick A
GPS Satellite Surveying
John Wiley and Sons
2004
3.
Pritchard W L
Hendri G S
Nelson R A
Systems Engineering
Prentice Hall/Pearson
2007
4.
Adams L J
Understanding GPS Principles

and Applications
Artech House
2nd Edition
2006
5.
Elbert B R
The Satellite Communication

Applications Handbook
Artech House
1997
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.palowireless.com/gps/tutorials.asp
http://www.trackstick.com/products/trackstickpro
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/20237964
http://www.crisp.nus.edu.sg/~research/tutorial/intro.htm
http://www.itu.int/itudoc/gs/iturcd/74207.pdf
14LC18
COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS LABORATORY I

0
OBJECTIVES:
To understand underlying concepts in signal processing and modulation.
To provide a comprehensive analysis of power spectral estimation.
To learn about the adaptive filtering algorithms.
To learn the basic concepts in fiber optic communication.
To provide the knowledge about radiation mechanism of various antennas.
264
OUTCOMES:
Learners should be able
analyze signal processing concepts.
implement the adaptive filtering algorithms.
design and implement optical communication systems.
analyze and estimate spectrum of various ranges.
analyze the necessity of coding for error detection and correction.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Antenna Radiation Pattern measurement.
2. Simulation of Modulation and Coding in an AWGN Communication Channel using Simulation
packages.
3. Design and implementation of multistage multirate system using DSP Processors.
4. Design and implement LMS, RLS adaptive filters and Kalman filter to remove noise.
5. Parametric/Non parametric power spectral estimation.
6. Study of Spread Spectrum Techniques.
7. Simulation of QMF using Simulation Packages.
8. Implementation of Video Link using Optical Fiber.
9. Implementation of Linear and Cyclic Codes.
10. Design of OFDM transceivers.
11. Performance evaluation of Digital Data Transmission through Fiber Optic Link.
12. Implementation of forward and backward predictors.
SEMESTER II
14LC21
WIRELESS COMMUNICATION
3
OBJECTIVES:
To introduce the concepts of wireless communication.
To make the students to know about the various propagation methods, channel models,
capacity calculations multiple antennas and multiple user techniques used in the mobile
communication.
To learn various diversity techniques.
To learn various multiple access systems.
To enhance the understanding of Wi -Fi , 3G systems and 4G networks.
OUTCOMES:
analyze various wireless channel propagation models.
analyze various diversity techniques.
analyze various wireless standards.
suggest methods to improve multiple access in wireless networks.
analyze various MIMO models.
UNIT I
WIRELESS CHANNEL PROPAGATION AND MODEL
9
Propagation of EM signals in wireless channel Reflection Diffraction and Scattering Small scale
fading Channel classification Channel models COST-231 Hata model Longley Rice Model
NLOS Multipath Fading Models: Rayleigh, Rician, Nakagami, Composite Fading Shadowing
Distributions Link power budget Analysis.
UNIT II
DIVERSITY
9
Capacity of flat and frequency selective fading channels Realization of independent fading paths
Receiver Diversity: selection combining Threshold Combining Maximum ratio Combining Equal
gain Combining. Transmitter Diversity: Channel known at transmitter Channel unknown at the
transmitter.
265
UNIT III
MIMO COMMUNICATIONS
9
Narrowband MIMO model Parallel decomposition of the MIMO channel MIMO channel capacity
MIMO Diversity Gain: Beam forming Diversity Multiplexing trade-offs Space time Modulation
and coding: STBC, STTC, Spatial Multiplexing and BLAST Architectures.
UNIT IV
MULTI USER SYSTEMS
9
Multiple Access FDMA TDMA CDMA SDMA Hybrid techniques Random Access
ALOHA SALOHA CSMA Scheduling Power control Uplink and downlink Channel capacity
Multiuser diversity MIMO MU systems.
UNIT V
WIRELESS NETWORKS
9
3G Overview Migration path to UMTS UMTS Basics Air Interface 3GPP Network Architecture
4G features and challenges Technology path IMS Architecture Introduction to wireless LANs
IEEE 802.11 WLANs Physical Layer MAC sub layer.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOK:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
1.
Andrea Goldsmith
2.
Harry R Anderson
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Wireless
Communications
Press
Fixed Broadband
John Wiley, India
Wireless System Design
2007
2003
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
Andreas F Molisch
Wireless Communications
John Wiley, India
2.
Simon Haykin
Michael Moher
Modern Wireless
Communications
Pearson Education
3.
Rappaport T S
Wireless communications
Pearson Education
2003
4.
Clint Smith. P E
Daniel Collins
3G Wireless Networks
Tata McGraw Hill,

2nd Edition
2007
5.
Garg VK
Wireless Communication and

Networking
Morgan Kaufmann
2003
2006
2007
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
http://www.wides.usc.edu/research/propagation-channel-measurement-and-modeling/
http://www.ip.eap.gr/pdf/Experimental%20Work%20Papoutsis-2_Patras.pdf
http://www.iet.ntnu.no/projects/beats/documents/mimo.pdf
http://www.ece.rice.edu/~ashu/publications/encylopedia.pdf
5. http://www.technet.microsoft.com/en-us/library/bb457019.aspx
14LC22
MIC AND RF SYSTEM DESIGN

3
OBJECTIVES:
To study about different transceiver specifications and architectures.
To have an in depth knowledge about impedance matching and amplifiers.
To study feedback systems and power amplifiers.
To learn the design of RF filters, oscillators and mixers.
To study about microstrip components.
266
OUTCOMES:
analyze various noises in transceiver and its architecture.
analyze various impedance matching network amplifiers.
design RF filters and oscillators.
design RF mixers.
analyze about microstrip antennas and its measurements.
UNIT I
CMOS PHYSICS, TRANSCEIVER SPECIFICATIONS AND ARCHITECTURES

9
CMOS: Introduction to MOSFET Physics Noise: Thermal, shot, flicker, popcorn noise Transceiver
Specifications Two port Noise theory Noise Figure THD IP2 IP3 Sensitivity SFDR Phase
noise Specification distribution over a communication link Transceiver Architectures: Receiver:
Homodyne Heterodyne Image reject Low IF Architectures Transmitter: Direct up conversion
Two step up conversion.
UNIT II
IMPEDANCE MATCHING AND AMPLIFIERS
9
S parameters with Smith chart Passive IC components Impedance matching networks Amplifiers:
Common Gate Common Source Amplifiers OC Time constants in bandwidth estimation and
enhancement High frequency amplifier design Low Noise Amplifiers: Power match and Noise match
Single ended and Differential LNAs Terminated with Resistors and Source Degeneration LNAs.
UNIT III
FEEDBACK SYSTEMS AND POWER AMPLIFIERS
9
Feedback Systems: Stability of feedback systems: Gain and phase margin Root locus techniques Time
and Frequency domain considerations Compensation Power Amplifiers: General model Class A, AB,
B, C, D, E and F amplifiers Linearization Techniques Efficiency boosting techniques ACPR metric
Design considerations.
UNIT IV
RF FILTER DESIGN, OSCILLATOR AND MIXER
9
Overview basic resonator and filter configuration Special filter realizations Filter implementation
Basic oscillator model High frequency oscillator configuration Basic characteristics of mixers Phase
locked loops RF directional couplers hybrid couplers Detector and demodulator circuits.
UNIT V
MIC COMPONENTS, ANTENNAS AND MEASUREMENT TECHNIQUES
9
Introduction to MICs Fabrication Technology Advantages and applications MIC components
Microstrip components Coplanar circuits Integrated antennas Photonic band gap antennas
Measurement techniques Test fixture measurements Probe station measurements Thermal and
cryogenic measurements Experimental field probing techniques.
TOTAL : 45+15
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Lee T
Design of CMOS RF
Integrated Circuits
Cambridge
2004
2.
Razavi B
Design of analog CMOS

Integrated Circuits
McGraw Hill
2002
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
Hoffmann K
Handbook of Microwave
Integrated Circuits
2.
Razavi B
RF Microelectronics
3.
Jan Crols
Michiel Steyaert
CMOS Wireless Transceiver

Design
267
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Artech House
1987
Pearson Education
2nd edition
Kluwer Academic
Publications
2012
1997
4.
Mathew M
Radmanesh
Radio Frequency and

Microwave Electronics
Pearson Education
Asia , 2nd Edition
5.
Rohde U L
NewKirk D P
RF / Microwave Circuit
Design
6.
Gupta K C
Amarjit singh
Microwave Integrated
Circuits

USA
Wiley Eastern
Reprint
2002
2000
2004
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.sonoma.edu/users/o/.../Chapter%202%20MOS%20Transistors.pptx
http://www.bitpipe.com/tlist/Microwave-Integrated-Circuits.html
http://www.eecs.umich.edu/dp-group/MMIC/
http://www.utdallas.edu/~rmh072000/Site/Software_and_Links_files/5A_slides.pdf
http://www.qtwork.tudelft.nl/~schouten/linkload/rfreceivers1.pdf
14LC23
MULTIMEDIA COMPRESSION TECHNIQUES

3
OBJECTIVES:
To study the fundamental concepts of digital audio, video and image.
To study the taxonomy of compression with source coding.
To learn various compression algorithms for text audio and image.
To know the concepts of video coding standards.
To understand and design the use of compression in multimedia processing applications.
OUTCOMES:
identify a suitable strategy for compression based on signal characterization and its needs.
implement compression algorithms for text and audio.
analyze various video coding standards.
analyze various image compression algorithms and its standards.
apply MATLAB and its equivalent open source environments for the design of compression
algorithms.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Special features of Multimedia Graphics and Image Data Representations Fundamental Concepts
in Video and Digital Audio Storage requirements for multimedia applications Need for
Compression Taxonomy of compression techniques Overview of source coding Source
models Scalar and vector quantization theory Evaluation techniques Error analysis and
methodologies.
UNIT II
TEXT COMPRESSION
9
Compaction techniques Huffman coding Adaptive Huffman Coding Arithmetic coding
Dictionary techniques LZW family algorithms.
UNIT III
AUDIO COMPRESSION
9
Audio compression techniques -Law and A-Law companding Frequency domain and filtering
Basic subband coding Application to speech coding G.722 Application to audio coding
MPEG audio Progressive encoding for audio Silence compression Speech compression techniques
Formant and CELP Vocoders.
UNIT IV
IMAGE COMPRESSION
9
Predictive techniques DM, PCM, DPCM Optimal Predictors and Optimal Quantization
Transform Coding JPEG Standard Sub-band coding algorithms: Design of Filter banks Wavelet
based compression: Implementation using filters EZW SPIHT coders JPEG 2000 standards
JBIG JBIG2 standards.
268
UNIT V
VIDEO COMPRESSION
9
Video compression techniques and standards MPEG Video Coding I: MPEG-1 and 2 MPEG
Video Coding II: MPEG-4 and 7 Motion estimation and compensation techniques H.261
Standard DVI technology PLV performance DVI real time compression Packet Video.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Introduction to Data
Compression
Morgan Kauffman
Harcourt India, 2nd Edition
2012
Data Compression: The

Complete Reference
Springer Verlag
New York Inc. 4th Edition
2010
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
Khalid Sayood
2.
David Salomon
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
Yun Q Shi
Huifang Sun
Image and Video Compression for

Multimedia Engineering Fundamentals, Algorithms and
Standards
2.
Mark S Drew
Ze Nian Li
Fundamentals of Multimedia
3.
Mark Nelson
Data compression
Publisher
Year of
Publication
CRC press,
2nd edition
2008
Prentice Hall,
New Jersey,
1 st Edition
BPB Publishers ,
New Delhi
2004
1998
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.intelligence.tuc.gr/~petrakis/courses/multimedia/compression.pdf
http://www.cs.princeton.edu/courses/archive/spr02/cs461/slides/multimedia.pdf
http:///www.voip-sip.org/wp-content/uploads/2011/08/A-law_vs_u-law-voip-codec- comparison.pdf
http://www.homepages.cae.wisc.edu/~ece533/project/f06/aguilera_rpt.pdf
http://www.djj.ee.ntu.edu.tw/Video_Compression_%E9%99%B3%E4%BF%A1%E6%85%A7.pdf
14LC28
COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS LABORATORY II

0
OBJECTIVES:
To provide experience in Simulation and Implementation of the Microstrip antennas.
To know the characteristics of a Microstrip coupler.
To provide the knowledge about audio signal and image processing.
To analyze the performance of CDMA system and GPS receiver.
To understand the design concepts of RF switches and phase shifters.
OUTCOMES:
implement various compression algorithms for audio, speech and image.
measure the radiation patterns of microstrip antennas.
analyze about microstrip transmission lines and their parameters.
analyze the characteristics reciprocal devices.
learn the various coplanar MICs and their applications.
design various RF switches and phase shifters.
analyze the performance of CDMA and GPS receiver.
269
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1.
Simulation of Audio and speech compression algorithms.
2.
Simulation of speech compression using DWT.
3.
Simulation of signal denoising using wavelets.
4.
Simulation of EZW / SPIHT Image coding algorithm.
5.
Simulation of Microstrip Antennas.
6.
S-parameter estimation of Microwave devices.
7.
Study of Global Positioning System.
8.
Performance evaluation of simulated CDMA System.
9.
Design and testing of a Microstrip coupler.
10. Characteristics of /4 and /2 transmission lines.
11. Design and simulation of wireless LAN networks.
12. Design and simulation of RF switches and tristate phase shifters.
ELECTIVES
14LC51
ASIC AND FPGA DESIGN

3
OBJECTIVES:
To study the design flow of different types of ASIC.
To familiarize the different types of programming technologies and logic devices.
To learn the architecture of different types of FPGA.
To gain knowledge about partitioning, floor planning, placement and routing including circuit
extraction of ASIC.
To analyze the synthesis, simulation and testing of systems.
To know about different high performance algorithms and its applications in ASICs.
OUTCOMES:
describe principal parts in programmable circuits (PLD, FPGA, ASIC) and their design
procedure.
analyze about partitioning, floor planning, placement and routing in ASIC design.
categorize different types of ASICs and explain their technology.
analyze various Filed Programmable Gate Arrays.
analyze the design issues of SOC.
UNIT I
OVERVIEW OF ASIC AND PLD
9
Types of ASICs Design flow CAD tools used in ASIC Design Programming Technologies: Antifusestatic RAM EPROM and EEPROM technology Programmable Logic Devices : ROMs and EPROMs
PLA PAL Gate Arrays CPLDs and FPGAs.
UNIT II
ASIC PHYSICAL DESIGN
9
System partition Partitioning Partitioning methods Interconnect delay models and measurement of
delay Floor planning Placement Routing: global routing, detailed routing, special routing Circuit
extraction DRC.
UNIT III
LOGIC SYNTHESIS, SIMULATION AND TESTING
9
Design systems Logic Synthesis Half gate ASIC Schematic entry Low level design language PLA
tools EDIF CFI design representation. Verilog and logic synthesis VHDL and logic synthesis Types
of simulation Boundary scan test Fault simulation Automatic test pattern generation.
270
UNIT IV
FIELD PROGRAMMABLE GATE ARRAY
9
Field Programmable gate arrays Logic blocks Routing architecture Design flow technology
mapping for FPGAs Xilinx XC4000 ALTERAs FLEX 8000/10000 ACTELs ACT-1, 2, 3 and their
speed performance Case studies: Altera MAX 5000 and 7000 Altera MAX 9000 Spartan II and Virtex
II FPGAs Apex and Cyclone FPGAs.
UNIT V
SYSTEM ON CHIP DESIGN
9
Design Methodologies Processes and Flows Embedded software development for SOC Techniques
for SOC Testing Configurable SOC Hardware / Software codesign Case studies: Digital camera
Bluetooth radio / modem SDRAM and USB.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
1.
Smith M J S
2.
Trimberger S
Title of the Book

Integrated Circuits
Field Programmable Gate
Array Technology
Publisher
Addison-Wesley
Longman Inc.
Edr- Kluwer Academic
Publications
Year of
Publication
1997
1994
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
1.
Parag K Lala
2.
Wayne Wolf
3.
Rajsuman R
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Digital System Design using

BSP
Programmable Logic
Devices
FPGA- Based System
Prentice Hall PTR
Design
System-on-a-Chip Design
CA: Artech House
and Test.
2003
2004
2000
WEB URLs:
1. http://www.ijee.ie/articles/Vol15-1/Ijee1054.pdf
2. http:www.smdp2vlsi.gov.in/smdp2vlsi/downloads/RS_trends- method-cad1.pdf
3. http://www.nptel.ac.in/courses/IIT- MADRAS/CAD_for_VLSI_Design_I/pdf/nptel -cad1-21.pdf
4. http://www.home.ewi.utwente.nl/~gerezsh/sendfile/sendfile.php/vhdl-sim-syn-soc.pdf
5. http://www.systemes -critiques.org/SECC/Paris/ST-Santana.pdf
14LC52
DSP PROCESSOR ARCHITECTURE AND PROGRAMMING

3
OBJECTIVES:
To learn the basics of Digital Signal Processors.
To learn DSP Architecture and programming skills.
To study advanced DSP architectures and its applications.
To learn the architecture of TMS320C3X processor.
To study the architecture of Motorola DSP563XX processor.
OUTCOMES:
become digital signal processor specialized engineer.
become DSP based System Developer.
write application programs using TMS320C3X processor.
design and test various application codes using Motorola DSP563XX processor.
compare the various architectures of DSP processors.
271
UNIT I
FUNDAMENTALS OF PROGRAMMABLE DSP
9
Multiplier and Multiplier accumulator (MAC) Modified Bus Structures and Memory access in
Programmable DSPs Multiple access memory Multi port memory VLIW architecture Pipelining
Special Addressing modes in P- DSPs On chip Peripherals.
UNIT II
TMS320C3X PROCESSOR
9
Architecture Data formats Addressing modes Groups of addressing modes Instruction sets
Operation Block Diagram of DSP starter kit Application Programs for processing real time signals
Generating and finding the sum of series Convolution of two sequences Filter design.
UNIT III
ADSP PROCESSORS
9
Architecture of ADSP-21XX and ADSP-210XX series of DSP Processors Addressing modes and
assembly language instructions Application programs Filter design FFT calculation.
UNIT IV
ADVANCED PROCESSORS I
9
Architecture of TMS320C54X: Pipe line operation Addressing modes and assembly language
instructions Introduction to Code Composer studio.
UNIT V
ADVANCED PROCESSORS II
9
Architecture of TMS320C6X Architecture of Motorola DSP563XX Comparison of the features of DSP
family processors.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOK:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Venkataramani B
Bhaskar M
1.
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Digital Signal Processors

and Applications
Tata McGraw- Hill

Publishing Company
Limited. New Delhi
2003
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
1.
Avtar singh
Srinivasan S
2.
Rhulph Chassaing
Donald Reay
DSP Implementation using

DSP microprocessor with Thomson and Brooks Cole
Publishers
Examples from
TMS32C54XX
DSP and Applications with
John Wiley and sons
the TMS320C6713 and
TMS320C6416 DSK
2004
2008
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.homes.esat.kuleuven.be/~iverbauw/Courses/HJ94/lectures04/HJ94slides8DSP.pdf
http://www.ti.com/lit/ug/spru194/spru194.pdf
http://www.analog.com/en/processors dsp/adsp 21xx/products/index.html
http:///www.eng.iastate.edu/ee424/labs/C54Docs/spra079.pdf
http://www.ti.com/lit/an/spra476/spra476.pdf
14LC53
ADVANCED MICROPROCESSORS AND MICROCONTROLLERS

3
OBJECTIVES:
To familiarize the fundamental concepts of RISC and CISC processor architectures.
To gain knowledge about high performance CISC and RISC architectures.
To study about 8 bit Microcontrollers viz. 68HC11 and PIC.
272
To learn Pentium architectures.

To learn Motorola 68HC11 processors.
OUTCOMES:
analyze the functions of various processor architectures.
write assembly language programs for PENTIUM , ARM, 68HC11, PIC controller.
analyze a typical I/O interface and discuss timing issues.
design application systems using PENTIUM , ARM , 68HC11, PIC controller.
design and test interfacing programs.
UNIT I
MICROPROCESSOR ARCHITECTURE
9
Instruction set Data formats Instruction formats Addressing modes Memory hierarchy
register file Cache Virtual memory and paging Segmentation Pipelining The instruction
pipeline pipeline hazards Instruction level parallelism Reduced instruction set Computer
principles RISC versus CISC RISC properties RISC evaluation On-chip register files
versus cache evaluation.
UNIT II
HIGH PERFORMANCE CISC ARCHITECTURE PENTIUM
9
The software model Functional description CPU pin descriptions RISC concepts Bus
operations Super scalar architecture Pipe lining Branch prediction The instruction and
caches Floating point unit Protected mode operation Segmentation Paging Protection
multitasking Exception and interrupts Input /Output Virtual 8086 model Interrupt
processing Instruction types Addressing modes Processor flags Instruction set
Programming the Pentium processor.
UNIT III
HIGH PERFORMANCE RISC ARCHITECTURE: ARM
9
The ARM architecture ARM assembly language program ARM organization and implementation
The ARM instruction set The thumb instruction set ARM CPU cores.
UNIT I V
MOTOROLA 68HC11 MICROCONTROLLERS
9
Instructions and addressing modes Operating modes Hardware reset Interrupt system
Parallel I/O ports Flags Real time clock Programmable timer Pulse accumulator Serial
communication interface A/D converter Hardware expansion Assembly language
Programming.
UNIT V
PIC MICRO CONTROLLER
9
CPU architecture Instruction set Interrupts Timers I/O port expansion I 2 C bus for
peripheral chip access A/D converter UART.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Daniel Tabak
McGraw-Hill,
NewYork
1995
2.
Steve Furber
ARM System-On-Chip
architecture
Addison Wesley
2000
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No
1.
Author(s)
Gene H Miller
Title of the Book

Micro Computer
Engineering
Publisher
Pearson Education
273
Year of
Publication
2003
2.
John B Peatman
3.
James L
Antonakos
4.
Barry B Breg
5.
James L
Antonakos
Design with PIC

Microcontroller
An Introduction to the
Intel family of
Microprocessors
The Intel
Microprocessors
Architecture Programming
and Interfacing
The Pentium
Microprocessor
Prentice Hall,
New Jersey
1997
Pearson Education
1999
Prentice Hall of
India,
8 th Edition
2008
Pearson Education
1997
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
http://www.nvidia.com/content/cudazone/cudau/courses/ucdavis/lectures/ilp1.pdf
http://www.hh.se/download/18.70cf2e49129168da0158000105667/1341267676450/RISC+Arc
hitectures.pdf
3. http://www.uvpce.ac.in/departments/ec/syllabus/5/501.pdf
4. http://www.nitc.ac.in/nitc/dept/ee/public_html/department.../EEU_311
5. http://www.teal.gmu.edu/~dtabak/ece611.htm
14LC54
VLSI FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION
(Common to M.E Communication Systems and VLSI Design)

3
OBJECTIVES:
To study the design concepts of low noise amplifiers.
To study the various types of mixers designed for wireless communication.
To study and design PLL and VCO.
To understand the concepts and implementation of A/D converters and Sigma-Delta Modulators in
VLSI.
To learn about the implementation of Transmitter Architectures and Multitier Wireless System.
OUTCOMES:
analyze and design low noise amplifiers and power amplifiers used in linear integrated circuits.
design analog/digital conversion as required for the digital processing of analog signals.
design the phase detectors and oscillators.
design and implement A/D converters and Sigma-Delta Modulators in VLSI.
design and implement Transmitter Architectures and Multitier Wireless System.
UNIT I
COMPONENTS AND DEVICES
9
Integrated inductors Resistors MOSFET and BJT Amplifier design Low Noise Amplifier Design
Wideband LNA Design Narrowband LNA Impedance Matching Automatic Gain Control Amplifiers
Power Amplifiers.
UNIT II
MIXERS
9
Balancing Mixer Qualitative Description of the Gilbert Mixer Conversion Gain Distortion Low
Frequency Case: Analysis of Gilbert Mixer Distortion High Frequency Case Noise A Complete
Active Mixer Switching Mixer Distortion in Unbalanced Switching Mixer Conversion Gain in
Unbalanced Switching Mixer Noise in Unbalanced Switching Mixer A Practical Unbalanced Switching
Mixer. Sampling Mixer Conversion Gain in Single Ended Sampling Mixer Distortion in Single Ended
Sampling Mixer Intrinsic Noise in Single Ended Sampling Mixer Extrinsic Noise in Single Ended
Sampling Mixer.
274
UNIT III
FREQUENCY SYNTHESIZERS
9
Phase Locked Loops Voltage Controlled Oscillators Phase Detector Analog Phase Detectors Digital
Phase Detectors Frequency Dividers LC Oscillators Ring Oscillators Phase Noise A Complete
Synthesizer Design Example (DECT Application).
UNIT IV
SUB SYSTEMS
9
Data converters in communications A/D converters Used in a Receiver : Wideband Versus Narrowband
A/D Converters Low pass Sigma-Delta modulators : First Order Modulator High Order Modulators
Band pass Sigma-Delta Modulators Implementation of Low pass and Band pass Sigma-Delta modulators
I/Q mismatch in Mixer and A/D Converters Adaptive Filters Equalizers and transceivers.
UNIT V
IMPLEMENTATIONS
9
Transmitter Architectures and Power Amplifier Transmitter Back End Quadrature LO Generator :
Single Ended RC Single Ended LC, R-C with Differential Stages Power Amplifier Design : PA
Design Issues Class A Amplifiers Class AB/B/C VLSI architecture for Multitier Wireless System
Multiuser channel estimation Fixed point implementation Dependence graph Mapping to VLSI
architecture Power savings Hardware Design Issues for a mobile unit for Next generation CDMA
System.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOK:
Sl. No.
Author
1.
Bosco H Leung
Title of the Book

VLSI for Wireless
Communication
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Springer
2011
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
1.
Razavi B
Title of the Book

RF Microelectronics
Emad N Farag
Mixed Signal VLSI Wireless
Mohamed I Elmasry Design, Circuits and Systems
The Design of CMOS RadioThomas H Lee
Frequency Integrated Circuits
Design of Analog CMOS
Behzad Razavi
Integrated Circuits
Crols J
CMOS Wireless Transceiver
Steyaert M
Design
2.
3.
4.
5.
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Prentice-Hall,
2nd Edition
Kluwer Academic
Publishers
2012
2002
Cambridge University Press
2003
McGraw- Hill
1999
Boston- Kluwer Academic

Publications
1997
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4
5
http://www.worldscientific.com
http://www.silabs.com
http://www.ee.iitm.ac.in
http://www.ee.iitm.ac.in/~skrishna/papers/jvlsifinal.pdf
http://www.ece.rice.edu/~cavallar/papers/98spie_arch.pdf
14LC55
COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL ENGINEERING

3
OBJECTIVES:
To study the fundamentals of protocol engineering, protocol specification and modeling.
To study the TCP/IP architecture and its services.
To study about SDL and SDL based protocols.
To understand protocol verification and validation method.
To learn various protocol testing methods and protocol synthesis.
275
OUTCOMES:
design high quality reusable communication software.
compile and test the software efficiently.
apply the test suite for running application and correct it interactively.
simulate and interpret CSMA/CD technique.
design and verify protocols using various tools.
UNIT I
NETWORK REFERENCE MODEL
9
Communication model Software Subsystems Protocol development methods Protocol
engineering process Layered architecture Network services and Interfaces Protocol functions OSI
model TCP/IP protocol suite.
UNIT II
PROTOCOL SPECIFICATIONS
9
Components of protocol Specifications of Communication service Protocol entity Interface
Interactions Multimedia protocol Internet protocol SDL SDL based protocol Other protocol
specification languages.
UNIT III
PROTOCOL VERIFICATION/VALIDATION
9
Protocol verification Verification of a protocol using finite state machines Protocol validation
Protocol design errors Protocol validation approaches SDL based protocol verification and
validation.
UNIT IV
PROTOCOL CONFORMANCE/PERFORMANCE TESTING
9
Conformance testing methodology and frame work Conformance test architectures Test sequence
generation methods Distributed architecture by local methods Conformance testing with TTCN
Systems with semi controllable interfaces RIP, SDL based tools for conformance testing
SDL based conformance testing of MPLS Performance testing SDL based performance testing of
TCP and OSPF Interoperability testing SDL based interoperability testing of CSMA/CD and
CSMA/CA protocol using Bridge Scalability testing.
UNIT V
PROTOCOL SYNTHESIS AND IMPLEMENTATION
9
Protocol synthesis Interactive synthesis algorithm Automatic synthesis algorithm Automatic
synthesis of SDL from MSC Protocol Re-synthesis Requirements of protocol implementation
Object based approach to protocol implementation Protocol compilers Tool for protocol
engineering.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Pallapa Venkataram
Sunilkumar S Manvi
Communication
protocol
Engineering
Eastern Economy
second Edition
2008
2.
Richard Lai
Jirachiefpattana
Communication
Protocol Specification
and Verification
Kluwer Publishers,
Boston
1998
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Plenum New York
1991
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No
1.
Author(s)
Tarnay K
Protocol Specification
and Testing
276
2.
Mohamed G Gouda
Elements of Network
Protocol Design
John Wiley and

Sons Inc.,
New York, USA
1998
3.
Ahuja V

Computer
Communication networks
McGraw-Hill,
London
1982
4.
Holtzmann G J
Design and validation of

Computer protocols
Prentice Hall,
New York
1991
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
http://www.pet.ece.iisc.ernet.in/course/E2223/Cha1.pdf
http://www.cis.udel.edu/~amer/PEL/estelle/index.html
http://www.ece.cmu.edu/~koopman/protsrvy/protocol_options.html
http://www.pet.ece.iisc.ernet.in/course/E2223/ch5.pdf
5. http://www.pet.ece.iisc.ernet.in/course/E2223/ch3.pdf
14LC56
ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE AND COMPATIBILITY

3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the basics of EMI and its sources.

To understand EMI problems and its effects.
To study about various EMI control techniques.
To study about EMI/EMC interference in PCBs.
To learn about EMI Measurements and standards.
OUTCOMES:
design an EMI free system.
reduce system level crosstalk.
analyze various EMI control techniques.
design high speed Printed Circuit Board with minimum interference.
analyze about various EMI measurement standards.
9
UNIT I
EMI/EMC CONCEPTS
EMI EMC definitions and Units of parameters Sources and victim of EMI Conducted and Radiated
EMI Emission and Susceptibility Transient EMI ESD Radiation Hazards.
UNIT II
EMI COUPLING PRINCIPLES
9
Conducted Radiated and transient coupling Common ground impedance coupling Common mode and
ground loop coupling Differential mode coupling Near field cable to cable coupling Cross talk Field
to cable coupling Power mains and Power supply coupling.
UNIT III
EMI CONTROL TECHNIQUES
9
Shielding Shielding Material Shielding integrity at discontinuties Filtering Characteristics of Filters
Impedance and Lumped element filters Telephone line filter Power line filter design Filter
installation and Evaluation Grounding Measurement of Ground resistance System grounding for
EMI/EMC Cable shielded grounding Bonding Isolation transformer Transient suppressors
Cable routing Signal control EMI gaskets.
UNIT IV
EMC DESIGN OF PCBs
EMI Suppression Cables Absorptive Ribbon cables Devices Transient protection hybrid circuits
Component selection and mounting PCB trace impedance Routing Cross talk control
Electromagnetic Pulse Noise from relays and switches Power distribution decoupling Zoning
Grounding VIAs connection Terminations.
277
UNIT V
EMI MEASUREMENTS AND STANDARDS
9
Open area test site TEM cell EMI test shielded chamber and shielded ferrite lined anechoic chamber
Tx /Rx Antennas Sensors Injectors / Couplers and coupling factors EMI Rx and spectrum analyzer
Civilian standards CISPR, FCC, IEC, EN Military standards MIL461E/462 Frequency assignment
Spectrum conversation British VDE standards Euro norms standards in Japan Comparisons EU
Emission and Susceptibility standards and Specifications.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
1.
Kodali V P
2.
Henry W Ott
Title of the Book

Engineering EMC
Principles, Measurements
and Technologies
Noise Reduction
Techniques in Electronic
Systems
Publisher
Year of
Publication
IEEE Press,
Newyork
2011
John Wiley and Sons
2008
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
1.
2.
3.
Author(s)
Paul C R
Bemhard Keiser
Don R J White
Title of the Book

Introduction to
Electromagnetic
Compatibility
Principles of
Electromagnetic
Compatibility
Handbook of EMI/EMC
Publisher
Year of
Publication
John Wiley Publications
2011
Artech house,
3rd Edition
1986
Consultant Incorporate,
Volume I-V
1988
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.nasa.gov/centers/johnson/pdf/639521main_EMIEMC_User_Test_Planning_Guide.pdf
http://www.cvel.clemson.edu/emc/
http://www.users.ece.gatech.edu/mleach/ece4391/set1ab.pdf
http://www.fda.gov/MedicalDevices/DeviceRegulationandGuidance/GuidanceDocuments/ucm077
210.htm
http://www.fda.gov/Radiation-EmittingProducts/RadiationSafety/ElectromagneticCompatibility
EMC/ucm116566.htm
14LC57
(Common to M.E Communication Systems, VLSI Design and Mechatronics)

3
OBJECTIVES:
To study the concepts of Artificial Neural Networks.
To study the concepts of Fuzzy sets and Fuzzy rules.
To study various algorithms in Neural Networks.
To learn the various fuzzy logic models.
To study the concepts of genetic algorithm and its application.
OUTCOMES:
identify and select a suitable Soft Computing method to solve the problem.
analyze various neuro-fuzzy modeling.
design and analyze supervised learning network.
278
design and analyze unsupervised learning network.

simulate various fuzzy logic algorithms.
UNIT I
9
rules Supervised learning Back propagation networks Training algorithm Practical difficulties
Advanced algorithms Adaptive network Radial basis network Modular network Applications.
UNIT II
9
networks Learning vector quantization Hebbian learning Hopfield network Content addressable
nature Binary Hopfield network Continuous Hopfield network Travelling Salesperson problem
Adaptive resonance theory Bidirectional Associative Memory Principle Component Analysis.
UNIT III
FUZZY SYSTEMS
9
Fuzzy sets Fuzzy rules: Extension principle Fuzzy relation Fuzzy reasoning Fuzzy inference
systems: Mamdani model Sugeno model Tsukamoto model Fuzzy decision making
Multiobjective Decision Making Fuzzy classification Fuzzy control methods Application.
UNIT IV
NEURO - FUZZY MODELLING
9
Adaptive Neuro Fuzzy based inference systems Classification and regression trees: Decision
trees Cart algorithm Data clustering algorithms: K means clustering Fuzzy C means
clustering Mountain clustering Subtractive clustering Rule base structure identification Neuro
fuzzy control: Feedback Control Systems Expert Control Inverse Learning Specialized Learning
Back propagation through Real -Time Recurrent Learning.
UNIT V
GENETIC ALGORITHM
9
Fundamentals of genetic algorithm Mathematical foundations Genetic modeling Survival of the
fittest Crossover Inversion and Deletion Mutation Reproduction Generational cycle Rank
method Rank space method Other derivative free optimization Simulated annealing Random
search Downhill simplex search Application.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Jang J S R
Sun CT
Mizutani E
Neuro Fuzzy and

Soft computing
Pearson education
(Singapore)
2009
2.
David E Goldberg
Genetic Algorithms in
Search, Optimization,
and Machine Learning
Pearson Education, Asia
2002
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No
Author(s)
1.
Laurene Fauseett
2.
Timothy J Ross
3.
4.
5.
Rajasekaran S
Vijayalakshmi
Pai G A
George J Klir
Bo Yuan
Deepa S N
Sivanandham S N
Title of the Book

Networks
Fuzzy Logic with
Engineering
Applications
Neural networks, Fuzzy
logics and Genetic
algorithms
Fuzzy Sets and Fuzzy
Logic
Principles of Soft
Computing
279
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Pearson Education
2010
Wiley India Pvt. Ltd.
2011
2003
Prentice Hall Inc.,

NewJersey
1995
2012
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.doc.ic.ac.uk/~nd/surprise_96/journal/vol4/cs11/report.html
http://www.cs.stir.ac.uk/~lss/NNIntro/InvSlides.html
http://www.willamette.edu/~gorr/classes/cs449/intro.html
http://www.fuzzysys.com
14LC58
COGNITIVE RADIO
3
OBJECTIVES:
To enable the student to understand the evolving paradigm of cognitive radio communication and
the enabling technologies for its implementation.
To enable the student to understand the essential functionalities and requirements in designing
software defined radios and their usage for cognitive communication.
To expose the student to the evolving next generation wireless networks and their associated
challenges.
To understand cognitive radio architectures.
To learn cross layer design in cognitive radio.
OUTCOMES:
evolve new techniques and demonstrate their feasibility using mathematical validations and
simulation tools.
analyze the performance of software defined radio architectures.
analyze about cognitive radio architectures.
analyze the performance of SDR using the metrics.
propose solutions for upper layer issues and cross layer design.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO SOFTWARE DEFINED RADIO
9
Definitions and potential benefits Hardwares: USRP RTL SDR Softwares: Open source software
Software radio architecture evolution Foundations Technology tradeoffs and architecture implications
Antenna for Cognitive Radio.
UNIT II
SOFTWARE DEFINED RADIO ARCHITECTURE
9
Essential functions of the software radio Architecture goals Quantifying degrees of programmability
Top level component topology Computational properties of functional components Interface topologies
among plug and play modules Architecture partitions.
UNIT III
INTRODUCTION TO COGNITIVE RADIOS
9
Making radio self- aware Cognition cycle Organization of congnition tasks Structuring knowledge for
cognition tasks Enabling location and environment awareness in cognitive radios Concepts
Architecture Design considerations.
UNIT IV
COGNITIVE RADIO ARCHITECTURE
9
Primary Cognitive Radio functions Behaviors Components A Priori Knowledge taxonomy
Observe Phase data structures Radio procedure knowledge encapsulation Components of orient-plan
Decide phases Act phase knowledge representation Design rules.
UNIT V
NEXT GENERATION WIRELESS NETWORKS
9
The XG Network architecture Spectrum sensing Spectrum management Spectrum mobility
Spectrum sharing Upper layer issues Cross layer design.
TOTAL: 45
280
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
1.
Biglieri E A J
Goldsmith L J
Greenstein N B
Mandayam H V Poor
2.
Alexander M Wyglinski
Maziar Nekovee
Thomas Hou Y
3.
Ian F Akyildiz
Won-Yeol Lee
Mehmet C Vuran
Shantidev Mohanty
Title of the Book

Principles of
Cognitive Radio
Cognitive Radio
Communications And
Networks Principles
And Practice
NeXt generation
/dynamic spectrum
access / cognitive radio
wireless networks: A
Survey
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Press
2013
Elsevier Inc.
2010
Elsevier
Computer Networks
2006
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Press
2013
1.
Biglieri E
Goldsmith A J
Greenstein L J
Mandayam N B
Principles of
Cognitive Radio
2.
Kwang Cheng Chen

Ramjee Prasad
Cognitive Radio Networks
3.
Jeffery H Reed
Software Radio : A Modern

approach to Radio
Engineering
Prentice Hall,
1st Edition
2002
4.
Mitola J
Cognitive Radio: An
Integrated Agent
Architecture for software
defined radio
Doctor of Technology
thesis,
Royal Inst.
Technology, Sweden
2000
5.
Khattab Ahmed
Perkins Dmitri
Bayoumi Magdy
Cognitive Radio Networks:

From
Theory to Practice
Springer Series:
Analog Circuits and
Signal Processing
2009
John Wiley and Sons
2009
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.wcsp.eng.usf.edu/cognitive_radio_links.html
http://www.gnuradio.org/redmine/projects/gnuradio/wiki
http://www.home.ettus.com/
http://www.nextgenerationtechnology.info/
http://www.radio portal.org/sdr.html
14LC59
RF MEMS
3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the concepts in RF MEMS relays and switches.
To learn design of practical RF MEMS devices.
To study high performance circuits and sub-systems using RF MEMS components.
To learn RF MEMS technology for wireless applications.
To study the design of micro machined RF filters.

281
OUTCOMES:
apply the techniques for fabrication of MEMS ICs.
analyze various techniques involved in fabrication of MEMS devices.
design and simulate MEMS devices for various applications.

UNIT I
SWITCHING
9
RF MEMS relays and switches: Switch parameters Actuation mechanisms Bistable relays and micro
actuators Dynamics of switching operation.
UNIT II
COMPONENTS I
9
MEMS inductors and capacitors: Micromachined inductor Effect of inductor layout Modeling and
design issues of planar inductor Gap tuning and area tuning capacitors Dielectric tunable capacitors.
UNIT III
COMPONENTS II
9
MEMS phase shifters: Types Limitations Switched delay lines Micromachined transmission lines
Coplanar lines Micromachined directional coupler and mixer.
UNIT IV
FILTERS
9
Micromachined RF filters: Modeling of mechanical filters Electrostatic comb drive Micromechanical
filters using comb drives Electrostatic coupled beam structures.
UNIT V
ANTENNAS
9
Micromachined antennas: Microstrip antennas Design parameters Micromachining to improve
performance Reconfigurable antennas.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Varadan V K
RFMEMS and their

Applications

New York
2006
2.
Leon H J Delos
Santos Gracia
Widjaja
RF MEMS circuit
Design for Wireless
Communications
Artech House Publication
2002
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Mathew M
Radmanesh
Radio Frequency and

Microwave Electronics

2nd Edition
2002
2.
Ulrich L
Rohde David P
NewKirk
RF / Microwave Circuit
Design
John Wiley and Sons

USA
2000
3.
Rebeiz G.M
RF MEMS: THEORY,
Design and Technology
John Wiley and Sons

Inc.
2003
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
http://www.highfrequencyelectronics.com/Archives/Feb13/1302_HFE_mems.pdf
http://www.kon.alphadimensions.net/research/00819417.pdf
http://www.microwaves101.com/downloads/NITT/RF%20MEMS%20Filters.pdf
282
4.
5.
http://www.signal.uu.se/Publications/pdf/l041.pdf
http://www.collectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk3/MWU/TC MWU 259.pdf
14LC60
SPEECH AND AUDIO SIGNAL PROCESSING

3
OBJECTIVES:
To study the basic concepts of speech and audio.
To study the analysis of various M-band filter banks for audio coding.
To learn various transform coders for audio coding.
To study the speech processing methods in time and frequency domain.
To learn transforms and reconstruction of signals.
OUTCOMES:
identify a suitable M-band filter banks for audio coding based on signal characterization and its
needs.
implement basic audio compression algorithms using MATLAB.
analyze different speech processing approaches in time and frequency domain.
analyze various audio coding techniques.
analyze the performance of VELP and CELP coders.
9
UNIT I
MECHANICS OF SPEECH AND AUDIO
Introduction Review of Signal Processing Theory Speech production mechanism Nature of Speech
signal Discrete time modeling of Speech production Classification of Speech sounds Phones
Phonemes Phonetic and Phonemic alphabets Articulatory features Absolute Threshold of Hearing
Critical Bands Simultaneous Masking Masking Asymmetry and the Spread of Masking
Nonsimultaneous Masking Perceptual Entropy Basic measuring philosophy Subjective versus
objective perceptual testing Perceptual Audio Quality Measure (PAQM) Cognitive effects in judging
audio quality.
UNIT II
TIME-FREQUENCY ANALYSIS: FILTER BANKS AND TRANSFORMS
9
Introduction Analysis Synthesis Framework for M-band Filter Banks Filter Banks for Audio Coding:
Design Considerations Quadrature Mirror and Conjugate Quadrature Filters Tree-Structured QMF and
CQF M-band Banks Cosine Modulated Pseudo QMF M-band Banks Cosine Modulated Perfect
Reconstruction (PR) M-band Banks and the Modified Discrete Cosine Transform (MDCT) Discrete
Fourier and Discrete Cosine Transform Pre-echo Distortion Pre-echo Control Strategies.
UNIT III
AUDIO CODING AND TRANSFORM CODERS
9
Lossless Audio Coding Lossy Audio Coding ISO MPEG 1A, 2A, 2A Advaned Audio Coding
Optimum Coding in the Frequency Domain Perceptual Transform Coder Brandenburg-Johnston Hybrid
Coder CNET Coders Adaptive Spectral Entropy Coding Differential Perceptual Audio Coder DFT
Noise Substitution DCT with Vector Quantization MDCT with Vector Quantization.
UNIT IV
TIME AND FREQUENCY DOMAIN METHODS FOR SPEECH PROCESSING 9
Time domain parameters of Speech signal Methods for extracting the parameters: Energy Average
Magnitude Zero crossing Rate Silence Discrimination using ZCR and energy Short Time Fourier
analysis Formant extraction Pitch Extraction using time and frequency domain methods.
HOMOMORPHIC SPEECH ANALYSIS: Cepstral analysis of Speech Formant and Pitch Estimation
Homomorphic Vocoders.
UNIT V
LINEAR PREDICTIVE ANALYSIS OF SPEECH
9
Formulation of Linear Prediction problem in Time Domain Basic Principle Auto correlation method
Covariance method Solution of LPC equations Cholesky method Durbins Recursive algorithm
lattice formation and solutions Comparison of different methods Application of LPC parameters Pitch
detection using LPC parameters Formant analysis VELP CELP.
TOTAL: 45
283
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Udo Zolzer
Digital Audio Signal

Processing
A John Wiley and sons

Ltd., 2nd Edition
2008
2.
Vijay k
Madisetti
Digital Signal processingHandbook video, speech

and audio signal processing
and associate standards
CRC Press,
Taylor and Francis group
2010
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Ken Steiglitz
A digital signal processing

Primer with applications to
digital audio and Computer
Music
2.
Rabiner L R
Schaffe R W
Digital Processing of Speech

signals
Prentice Hall
1978
3.
Ben Gold
Nelson Morgan
Speech and Audio Signal

Processing
John Wiley and Jons Inc.
2004
4.
Quatieri
Discrete time Speech Signal

Processing
Prentice Hall
2001
Prentice Hall,
1st edition
1996
WEB URLs:
1. http://www.animations.physics.unsw.edu.au/jw/speech.html
2. http://www.clas.mq.edu.au/speech/perception/psychoacoustics/chapter2.html
3. http://www.my.safaribooksonline.com/book/electrical engineering/communications
engineering/9780471791478/chapter 6 time frequency analysis filter banks and
transforms/ch006_sec008_html
4. http://www.ee.columbia.edu/~dpwe/papers/Johns88 audiocoding.pdf
5. http://www.iitg.vlab.co.in/?sub=59&brch=164&sim=616&cnt=1108
14LC61
HIGH PERFORMANCE COMMUNICATION NETWORKS

3
OBJECTIVES:
To enhance the understanding of packet switched networks.
To understand the concepts of ISDN and Broadband ISDN.
To learn the ATM signaling and switching.
To learn the Bluetooth protocol stack and interfacing.
To have an in depth knowledge in advanced network architectures.
OUTCOMES:
analyze about various packet switching networks.
simulate various Internet Protocol architectures.
implement various ATM header formats.
284
simulate and understand the performance of Wireless Access Protocol.

analyze the interfaces for Bluetooth and the telephony control protocol.
UNIT I
PACKET SWITCHED NETWORKS
9
OSI and IP models Ethernet (IEEE 802.3) Token ring (IEEE 802.5) Wireless LAN (IEEE 802.11)
FDDI DQDB SMDS: Internetworking with SMDS.
UNIT II
ISDN AND BROADBAND ISDN
9
ISDN Overview Interfaces and functions Layers and services Signaling System 7 (SS7)
Broadband ISDN architecture and Protocols.
UNIT III
ATM AND FRAME RELAY
9
ATM: Main features Addressing Signaling and routing ATM header structure Adaptation layer
Management and control ATM switching and transmission Frame Relay: Protocols and services
Congestion control Internetworking with ATM Internet and ATM Frame relay via ATM.
UNIT IV
ADVANCED NETWORK ARCHITECTURE
9
IP forwarding architectures overlay model Multi Protocol Label Switching (MPLS) Integrated services
in the Internet Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP) Differentiated services.
UNIT V
BLUE TOOTH TECHNOLOGY
9
The Blue tooth module Protocol stack Part I: Antennas Radio interface Base band The Link
controller Audio The Link Manager The Host controller interface The Blue tooth module Protocol
stack Part I: Logical link control and adaptation protocol RFCOMM Service discovery protocol
Wireless access protocol Telephony control protocol.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
William Stallings
ISDN and Broadband

ISDN with Frame
Relay and ATM
2.
Leon Gracia
Widjaja
Communication
networks
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Prentice Hall,
7th Edition
2003
Tata McGraw Hill
2004
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Jennifer Bray
Charles F Sturman
Blue Tooth
2001
2.
Sumit Kasera
Pankaj Sethi
ATM Networks
Tata McGraw Hill,

New Delhi
2002
3.
Jean Walrand
Pravin varaiya
High Performance
Communication
networks
Harcourt and Morgan

Kauffman, London,
2nd edition
2000
WEB URLs:
1. http://www.javvin.com/protocolBISDN.html
2. http://www.unu.edu/unupress/unupbooks/uu07ee/uu07ee0c.htm
3. http://www.msit2005.mut.ac.th/msit_media/1.../20070818095746r2.ppt
4. http://www.sprint.com/business/resources/SPR6859c.pdf
5. http://www.infosys.com/infosys- labs/.../new-service-discovery-protocol.pdf
285
14LC62
ULTRA WIDE BAND COMMUNICATION

3
OBJECTIVES:
To study the basic concepts of Ultra Wide Band (UWB)technologies and channel models.
To study various UWB signal processing schemes and UWB wireless locationing methods.
To study the radiation mechanism of UWB antennas and design of broad band UWB antennas.
To study the UWB regulations and applications.
To learn power consumption and security in UWB.
OUTCOMES:
determine the various parameters of the UWB Signal processing and channel models.
analyze UWB antennas.
analyze the applications and regulations of UWB Communication.
propose methods to secure UWB communication.
analyze link budget for UWB system.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO UWB
9
History Definition FCC Mask UWB features UWB Interference: IEEE 802.11.a interference
Signal to Interference ratio calculation Interference with other wireless services.
UNIT II
UWB TECHNOLOGIES AND CHANNEL MODELS
9
Impulse Radio Pulsed Multiband Multiband OFDM Features Complexity Power Consumption
Security and achievable data rate MIMO Multiband OFDM Differential multiband OFDM
Performance characterization Ultra Wide Band Wireless Channels.
Channel model: Impulse Response Modeling of UWB Wireless Channels IEEE UWB channel model
Path loss Delay profiles Time and frequency modeling.
UNIT III
UWB SIGNAL PROCESSING
9
Data Modulation schemes UWB Multiple Access Modulation BER Rake Receiver Transmit
Reference (T-R) Technique UWB Range Data Rate Performance UWB Channel Capacity UWB
Wireless Locationing: Position Locationing Methods Time of Arrival Estimation NLOS Location Error
Locationing with OFDM.
UNIT IV
UWB ANTENNAS
9
Antenna Requirements Radiation Mechanism of the UWB Antennas Types of Broad band antennas
Parameters Analysis of UWB Antennas Link Budget for UWB System Design examples of broad
band UWB antennas.
UNIT V
UWB APPLICATIONS AND REGULATIONS
9
Wireless Ad hoc Networking UWB Wireless Sensor RFID Consumer Electronics and Personal
Asset Location Medical applications UWB Regulation and standards in various countries UWB
Regulation in ITU IEEE Standardization.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOK:
Sl.No
1.
Author(s)
Homayoun Nikookar
Ramjee Prasad
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Introduction to Ultra
Wideband for Wireless
Communications
Springer Science and

Business Media , 1st Edition
2009
286
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Thomas Kaiser
Feng Zheng
Ultra Wideband Systems with

MIMO
John Wiley and Sons Ltd.,

Newyork, 1st Edition
2010
2.
Pam W
Siriwongpairat
Ray Liu K L
Ultra-Wideband
Communications
Systems:
Multiband OFDM approach
John Wiley and IEEE press,

Newyork
2008
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.gmedia.pearsoncmg.com/images/0131463268/samplechapter/0131463268_ch01.pdf
web.ee.ccu.edu.tw/~wl/ofdm/class
http://www.lup.lub.lu.se/luur/download?func=downloadFile&recordOId=1479808&fileOId=1479809
http://www.etd.dtu.dk/thesis/58603/imm2437.pdf
http://www.coe.montana.edu/ee/rwolff/EE548/EE548-S06/UWB/Intro_UWBAntennas.pdf
14LC63
ADVANCED DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING

3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the image fundamentals and mathematical transforms necessary for image
processing and to study the image enhancement techniques.
To understand the image segmentation and representation techniques.
To understand how image are analyzed to extract features of interest.
To introduce the concepts of image registration and image fusion.
To analyze the constraints in image processing when dealing with 3D data sets.
OUTCOMES:
apply image processing techniques in both the spatial and frequency (Fourier) domains.
design image analysis techniques in the form of image segmentation and to evaluate
the methodologies for segmentation.
do analysis of feature extraction techniques.
implement the concepts of image registration and image fusion.
analyze the constraints in image processing when dealing with 3D data sets and to
apply image processing algorithms in practical applications.
UNIT I
FUNDAMENTALS OF DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING
9
Elements of visual perception Brightness Contrast Hue Saturation Mach band effect 2D
image transforms DFT DCT KLT SVD Image enhancement in spatial and frequency domain
Review of morphological image processing.
UNIT II
SEGMENTATION
9
Edge detection Thresholding Region growing Fuzzy clustering Watershed algorithm Active
contour methods Texture feature based segmentation Model based segmentation Atlas based
segmentation Wavelet based Segmentation methods.
UNIT III
FEATURE EXTRACTION
9
First and second order edge detection operators Phase congruency Localized feature extraction
detecting image curvature Shape features Hough transform Shape skeletonization Boundary
descriptors Moments Texture descriptors Autocorrelation Co-occurrence features Runlength
features Fractal model based features Gabor filter wavelet features.
287
UNIT IV
REGISTRATION AND IMAGE FUSION
9
Registration Preprocessing Feature selection Points Lines Regions and templates Feature
correspondence Point pattern matching Line matching Region matching Template matching
Transformation functions Similarity transformation and Affine Transformation Resampling Nearest
Neighbour and Cubic Splines Image Fusion Overview of image fusion Pixel fusion Multiresolution
based fusion discrete wavelet transform Curvelet transform Region based fusion.
UNIT V
3D IMAGE VISUALIZATION
9
Sources of 3D Data sets Slicing the Data set Arbitrary section planes The use of color Volumetric
display Stereo Viewing Ray tracing Reflection Surfaces Multiply connected surfaces Image
processing in 3D.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
John C Russ
The Image Processing

Handbook
CRC Press
2007
2.
Mark Nixon
Alberto Aguado
Feature Extraction and

Image Processing
Academic Press
2008
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Ardeshir Goshtasby
2D and 3D Image
registration for Medical,
Remote Sensing and
Industrial Applications
2.
Rafael C Gonzalez
Richard E Woods
Digital Image
Processing'
Pearson Education Inc.,

2nd Edition
2004
3.
Anil K Jain
Fundamentals of Digital
Image Processing
Pearson Education Inc.
2002
4.
Rick S Blum
Zheng Liu
Multisensor image
fusion and its
Applications
Taylor and Francis
2006
John Wiley and Sons
2005
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.eie.polyu.edu.hk/~enyhchan/imagef.pdf
http://www.cs.bgu.ac.il/~klara/ATCS111/gonzales_10.1_10.2.pdf
http://www.lsv.uni-saarland.de/dsp_ss05_chap8.pdf
http://www.robots.ox.ac.uk/~jmb/lectures/InformaticsLecture7.pdf
http://www.radonc.uchicago.edu/chuck/fusion2002.pdf
14LC64
WAVELET TRANSFORMS AND APPLICATIONS

3
OBJECTIVES:
To study the basics of signal representation and Fourier theory.
To understand Multi Resolution Analysis and Wavelet concepts.
To study the wavelet transform in both continuous and discrete domain.
To understand the concepts of multiband wavelet transform and lifting scheme.
To understand the applications of Wavelet transform.
288
OUTCOMES:
use Fourier tools to analyze signals.
gain knowledge about MRA and representation using wavelet bases.
analyze the characteristics of various wavelet transforms.
apply wavelet transform for various signal processing applications.
apply wavelet transform for various image processing applications.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Vector Spaces Properties Dot product Basis Dimension Orthogonality and orthonormality
Relationship between vectors and signals Signal spaces Concept of Convergence
Generalized Fourier Expansion.
UNIT II
MULTI RESOLUTION ANALYSIS
9
Definition of Multi Resolution Analysis (MRA) Haar basis Construction of general orthonormal
MRA Wavelet basis Continuous time MRA interpretation for the DTWT Discrete time MRA
Basis functions for the DTWT PR QMF filter banks.
UNIT III
CONTINUOUS WAVELET TRANSFORMS
9
Wavelet Transform Definition and properties Concept of scale and its relation with frequency
Continuous Wavelet Transform (CWT) Scaling function and wavelet functions (Daubechies
Coiflet Mexican Hat Sinc Gaussian Bi-Orthogonal) Tiling of time Scale plane for
CWT.
UNIT IV
DISCRETE WAVELET TRANSFORMS
9
Filter Bank and sub band coding principles Wavelet Filters Inverse DWT computation by
Filter banks Basic Properties of Filter coefficients Choice of wavelet function coefficients
Derivations of Daubechies Wavelets Multi-band Wavelet transforms Introduction to lifting
Scheme.
UNIT V
APPLICATIONS
9
Signal Compression Image Compression techniques: EZW SPIHT Coding Image denoising
techniques: Noise estimation Shrinkage rules Shrinkage Functions Edge detection and object
Isolation Image Fusion and Object Detection.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Rao R M
Bopardikar A S
Wavelet Transforms:
Introduction to theory
and Applications

Private Limited
2000
2.
Strang G
Nguyen T
Wavelets and Filter

Banks
Wellesley Cambridge
Press
1998
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Vetterli M
Kovacevic J
Wavelets and Subband Coding
Prentice Hall
1995
2.
Mallat S
Wavelet tour of
Signal Processing
Academic Press
1996
289
3.
David C Lay
Linear Algebra and

its applications
Pearson education
2007
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.mdavis.wpi.edu/~matt/courses/wavelets/
http://www.cs.ucf.edu/courses/cap5015/Wavelets2.pdf
http://www.engineering.rowan.edu/~polikar/WAVELETS/WTtutorial.html
http://www.uwec.edu/walkerjs/primer/Ch6extract.pdf
http://www.dli.gov.in/rawdataupload/upload/insa/INSA_2/20005aab_685.pdf
14LC65
RADAR SIGNAL PROCESSING

3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the concepts of Radar Signal Processing.
To study the basic radar signal components and models.
To understand the concepts of sampling and quantization of pulsed radar signals.
To understand the basics of synthetic aperture imaging and adaptive array processing.
To learn Doppler processing to identify moving targets.
OUTCOMES:
determine the various parameters of the radar systems.
identify the suitable sampling and quantization techniques for pulsed radar signals.
analyze the radar waveforms using filters and modulation techniques.
identify moving targets using Doppler and other processing.
simulate the basic radar signal models.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO RADAR SYSTEMS
9
History and application of radar Basic radar function Elements of pulsed radar Review of signal
processing concepts and operations Preview of basic radar signal processing Radar system components
Advanced radar signal processing.
UNIT II
SIGNAL MODELS
9
Components of a radar signal Amplitude models Types of clutters Noise model and signal to noise
ratio Jamming Frequency models: Doppler shift Spatial models Spectral model.
UNIT III
SAMPLING AND QUANTIZATION OF PULSED RADAR SIGNALS
9
Domains and criteria for sampling radar signals Sampling in the fast time dimension Sampling in slow
time: Selecting the pulse repetition interval Sampling the Doppler spectrum Sampling in the spatial and
angle dimension Quantization I/Q Imbalance and Digital I/Q.
UNIT IV
RADAR WAVEFORMS
9
Introduction Waveform matched filter Matched filtering of moving targets Ambiguity function
Pulse burst waveform Frequency-modulated pulse compression waveforms Range side lobe control for
FM waveforms Stepped frequency waveform Phase-modulated pulse compression waveforms
COSTAS Frequency Codes.
UNIT V
DOPPLER PROCESSING
9
Alternate forms of the Doppler spectrum Moving target indication (MTI) Pulse Doppler processing
dwell-to-dwell stagger Pulse pair processing Additional Doppler processing issues Clutter mapping
and the moving target detector MTI for moving platforms: adaptive displaced phase center antenna
processing.
TOTAL: 45
290
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
1.
2.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Fundamentals of Radar Signal

Processing
Principles of Radar and Sonar
Francois Le Chevalier
Signal Processing
Mark A Richards
McGraw-Hill
Year of
Publication
2005
Artech House
2011
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
1.
Michael O Kolawole
2.
Skolnik
3.
4.
Title of the Book
Peyton Z Peebles
Fred E Nathanson
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Radar systems :Peak

Detection and Tracking
Introduction To Radar
Systems
Newnes,
1st Edition
2010
McGraw-Hill
2004
Radar Principles
Wiley, India
2009
Radar Design
Principles:Signal
Processing and the
environment
Prentice Hall, India
2003
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www2.le.ac.uk/departments/engineering/people/academic-staff/fernandoschlindwein/publications/Autoregressive%20spectral%20analysis%20as%20an%20alternative.
pdf
http://www.jkbeard.com/Papers_PDF/TAES_Beard_Costas_Paper_preprint.pdf
http://www.esl.eng.ohio-state.edu/~cbaker/cb_files/classes/ece5013/PDFs/1.%20Intro_2014.pdf
http://www.eecs.umich.edu/ssp2012/moses.pdf
http://www.jocoleman.info/pubs/papers/SkolnikCh25.pdf
14LC66
NETWORK ROUTING ALGORITHMS

3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the routing concepts in circuit switching networks.
To learn various routing algorithms for packet switching networks.
To learn optical networks routing and optical layer trade-offs.
To learn packet radio networks.
To study the various routing algorithms in Mobile Adhoc Networks.
OUTCOMES:
identify a suitable routing algorithm for a given network and user requirements.
analyze the performance of optical networks.
analyze about various gateway protocols.
analyze about various packet radio networks.
analyze various routing algorithms in Mobile Adhoc Networks.
UNIT I
CIRCUIT SWITCHING NETWORKS
9
AT&T's Dynamic routing network Routing in telephone network Dynamic Non-Hierarchical
routing Trunk Status Map Routing Real Time Network Routing Dynamic Alternative Routing
Distributed Adaptive Dynamic Routing Optimized Dynamic Routing.
291
UNIT II
PACKET SWITCHING NETWORKS
9
Distance vector Routing Link State Routing Inter domain Routing Classless Interdomain routing
(CIDR) Interior Gateway routing protocols (IGRP) Routing Information Protocol (RIP) Open
Shortest Path First (OSPF) Exterior Gateway Routing Protocol (EGRP) Border Gateway
Protocol (BGP) Apple Talk Routing and SNA Routing.
UNIT III
HIGH SPEED NETWORKS
9
Routing in optical networks The optical layer Node Designs Network design and operation
Optical layer cost tradeoffs Routing and wavelength assignment Architectural variations Routing
in ATM networks ATM address structure ATM Routing PNNI protocol PNNI signaling
protocol Routing in the PLANET network and Deflection Routing.
UNIT IV
MOBILE NETWORKS
9
Routing in Cellular Mobile Radio Communication networks Mobile Network Architecture
Mobility management in cellular systems Connectionless Data service for cellular systems Mobility
and Routing in Cellular Digital Packet Data (CDPD) network Packet Radio Routing DARPA packet
radio network Routing algorithms for small,medium and large sized packet radio networks.
UNIT V
MOBILE AD-HOC NETWORKS
9
Internet based mobile ad-hoc networking Communication strategies Routing algorithms Tabledriven routing Destination Sequenced Distance Vector (DSDV) Source initiated On-demand
routing Dynamic Source Routing (DSR) Ad-hoc On-demand Distance Vector (AODV)
Hierarchical based routing Cluster head Gateway Switch Routing (CGSR) and Temporally Ordered
Routing Algorithm (TORA) Quality of Service.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No
Author(s)
1.
Steen Strub M
2.
William Stallings
Title of the Book

Routing in
Communication
networks
ISDN and Broadband
ISDN with Frame
Relay and ATM
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Prentice Hall
International,
Newyork
1995
Prentice Hall,
NewJersey
2004
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
2007
1.
Behrouz A Forouzan
Data Communications and

Networking
TMH
3rd Edition
2.
William Stallings
High Speed Networks

TCP/IP and ATM Design
Principles
Prentice
Hall International,
New York
1998
3.
Mohammad Ilyas
The Handbook of Ad hoc

Wireless Networks
CRC Press
2002
4.
Vijay K Garg
Wireless Network
Evolution: 2G to 3G
Pearson Education,
ND
2003
5.
Rajiv Ramaswami
Kumar N Sivarajan
Optical Networks
Morgan Kaufmann
Publishers
2009
292
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.cisco.com/univercd/cc/td/doc/cisintwk/ito_doc/
http://www.moment.cs.ucsb.edu
http://www.cisco.com/univercd/cc/td/doc/cisintwk/ito_doc/
http://www.cs.jhu.edu/~goodrich/cgc/pubs/routing.pdf
http://www.sparrow.ece.cmu.edu/group/ad-hoc-net.html
14LC67
DIGITAL COMMUNICATION RECEIVERS

3
OBJECTIVES:
To know the basic digital communication techniques.
To learn about optimum receivers.
To study the receivers for various types of fading channels.
To learn the use of synchronization techniques for digital communication.
To have an understanding of various adaptive equalization algorithms.
OUTCOMES:
analyze about various digital communication techniques.
design optimum receivers for AWGN channels.
analyze the performance of optimal receivers for fading channels.
analyze about various synchronization techniques.
implement and test the performance of various adaptive equalization algorithms.
UNIT I
REVIEW OF DIGITAL COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUES
9
Base band and band pass communication Signal space representation Linear and nonlinear modulation techniques Spectral characteristics of digital modulation.
UNIT II
OPTIMUM RECEIVERS FOR AWGN CHANNEL
9
Correlation demodulator Matched filter Maximum likelihood sequence detector
Optimum receiver for CPM signals M-ary orthogonal signals Envelope detectors for
M-ary and correlated binary signals.
UNIT III
RECEIVERS FOR FADING CHANNELS
9
Characterization of fading multiple channels Statistical models Slow fading
Frequency selective fading Diversity technique RAKE demodulator Coded waveform for
fading channel.
UNIT IV
SYNCHRONIZATION TECHNIQUES
9
Carrier and symbol synchronization Carrier phase estimation PLL Decision
directed loops Symbol timing estimation Maximum likelihood and non-decision
directed timing estimation Joint estimation.
UNIT V
ADAPTIVE EQUALIZATION
9
Zero forcing algorithm LMS algorithm Adaptive decision Feedback equalizer and
equalization of Trellis coded signals Kalman algorithm Blind equalizers Stochastic
gradient algorithm Echo cancellation.
TOTAL 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
1.
Author(s)
Heinrich Meyer
Mare Moeneclacy
Stefan A Fechtel
Title of the Book

Digital communication
receivers
293
Publisher
New York
Year of
Publication
1997
Mengali U
Aldo N D Andrea
2.
Synchronization
Techniques for Digital
Receivers
Plenum Press, Newyork
1997
Publisher
Year of
Publication
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
John.G Proakis
McGraw-Hill
2001
2.
Lee E A
Messerschmitt D G
Allied Publishers,
New Delhi
1994
3.
Simon Marvin
over fading channel: An
unified approach to
performance Analysis

New York
2000
4.
Meyr H
Ascheid G
Synchronization in
Digital Communications

New York
1990
5.
Gallager R G
Communication
Press
2008
WEB URLs:
1. http://www.dea.brunel.ac.uk/cmsp/home_saeed_vaseghi/chapter16-echocancellation.pdf
2. http://www.win.ce.ncu.edu.tw/winlab_tw/modules/course/DigitalComm/Slide/ch4_v1.pdf
3. http://www.dspace.cc.tut.fi/dpub/bitstream/handle/123456789/107/hamila.pdf?sequence=1
4. http://www.alcatel-lucent.com/bstj/vol45-1966/articles/bstj45-2-255.pdf
5. http://www.eecs.berkeley.edu/~dtse/mud_fading.pdf
14LC68
COMMUNICATION NETWORK MODELING AND SIMULATION

3
OBJECTIVES:
To learn the basic simulation tools and methods for network simulation.
To study the Monte Carlo simulation.
To learn the channel mobility and mobility modeling.
To study the modeling of network topologies.
To learn various network layer modeling algorithms.
OUTCOMES:
select the proper tools and methods for network simulation.
perform a case study of performance estimation of wireless systems.
analyze about the channel and mobility modeling.
simulate the network topologies.
analyze the performance of various network layer modeling algorithms.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO MODELING AND SIMULATION
9
Introduction Discrete Event Simulation Modeling for Computer Simulation Tools and Methods
for Network Simulation The Simulation Platform Simulation Framework Tools and Modeling
Approaches for Simulating Hardware.
UNIT II
MONTE CARLO SIMULATION
9
Fundamental concepts Application to communication systems Monte Carlo integration Semi analytic
techniques Case study: Performance estimation of a wireless system.
294
UNIT III
LOWER LAYER AND LINK LAYER WIRELESS MODELING
9
Physical Layer Modeling Description of the Main Components of the PHY Layer Accurate Simulation
of Physical Layers Physical Layer Modeling for Network Simulations Link Layer Modeling Medium
Access Control (MAC) Protocols Logical Link Control Forward Error Detection and Correction
Backward Error Detection and Correction Queueing and Processing Delay.
UNIT IV
CHANNEL MODELING AND MOBILITY MODELING
9
Channel Modeling :The Physics of Radiation The Nature of Electromagnetic Radiation Classification
of Propagation Models Deterministic Approaches by Classical Field Theory Deterministic Geometric
Optical Approaches Empirical Path Loss Approaches Stochastic Shadowing Models Stochastic
Fading Models MIMO Channel Models.
Mobility modeling :Categorization of Mobility Models Mobility Models Random Walk Model
Random Waypoint Model Random Direction Model Gauss Markov Model Manhattan Model
Column Model Pursue Model Nomadic Community Model Selection of Appropriate Mobility
Models.
UNIT V
HIGHER LAYER MODELING & MODELING THE NETWORK TOPOLOGY 9
Higher Layer Modeling :Modeling the Network Layer and Routing Protocols Components of a Routing
Protocol Metrics Virtual Routing on Overlays Modeling Transport Layer Protocols Modeling
Application Traffic Modeling the Network Topology : Abstraction of Network Topologies by Graphs
Characterizing Graphs Common Topology Models Geometric Random Graphs The Waxman Model
Hierarchical Topologies Preferential Linking The Barabasi-Albert Model Modeling the Internet.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
1.
Wehrie Gunes K
Gross J
2.
Irene Karzela
Title of the Book
Publisher
Modeling and Tools for Network

Springer
simulation
Modeling and Simulating
Prentice Hall India
Communications Networks
Year of
Publication
2010
1998
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
1.
2.
3.
Author(s)
William.H.Tranter
Sam Shanmugam K
Theodore S Rappaport
Kurt L Kosbar
Jeruchim M C
Balaban P
Sam Shanmugam K
Nejat
Bragg
Arnold
Title of the Book

Principles of Communication
Systems Simulation
Simulation of Communication
Systems: Modeling,
Methodology and Techniques
Recent Advances in Modeling
and Simulation Tools for
Communication
Networks and Services
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Pearson
Education Pvt.
Ltd., Singapore
2004
Plenum Press,
New York
2001
Springer
2007
WEB URLs:
1. http://www.palisade.com/risk/monte_carlo_simulation.asp
2. http://www.inf.utfsm.cl/~hallende/download/Simul-22002/Introduction_to_Modeling_and_Simulation.pdf
3. http://www.lkn.ei.tum.de/forschung/publikationen/dateien/Nagel2008EfficientandRealisticMobilit
y.pdf
4. http://www.barabasilab.neu.edu/networksciencebook/download/network_science_december_ch
5_2013.pdf
5. http://www.delab.csd.auth.gr/~dimitris/courses/mpc_fall05/papers/location_management/0127
5705.pdf
295
14LC69
INTERNETWORKING MULTIMEDIA
3
OBJECTIVES:
To learn the basics of multimedia networking.
To study the broadband networking technologies required for multimedia communication.
To learn the reliable transport protocol and video over IP.
To learn the various multimedia communication standards.
To study the performance of multimedia communication via wireless networks.
OUTCOMES:
analyze the multimedia characteristics and network requirement for multimedia data.
analyze the performance of Internet Protocol for throughput, delay and jitter.
analyze the issues in multimedia communication across the internet.
analyze the real time transfer protocol for live transmissions across networks.
analyze multimedia transports across wireless networks.
UNIT I
MULTIMEDIA NETWORKING
9
Digital sound Video and graphics Basic multimedia networking Multimedia characteristics
Evolution of Internet services model Network requirements for audio/ video transform Multimedia
coding and compression for text, image, audio and video.
UNIT I I
BROADBAND NETWORK TECHNOLOGY
9
Broadband services ATM, IP and IPV6 High speed switching Resource reservation Buffer
management Traffic shaping Caching Scheduling Policing Throughput Delay and jitter
performance Storage and media services Voice and video over IP MPEG -2 over ATM/IP Indexing
synchronization of requests Recording and remote control.
UNIT III
RELIABLE TRANSPORT PROTOCOL AND APPLICATIONS
9
Multicast over shared media network Multicast routing and addressing Scaling multicast and NBMA
networks Reliable transport protocols TCP adaptation algorithm RTP RTCP MIME Peer-toPeer computing Shared application Video conferencing Centralized and distributed conference
control Distributed virtual reality Lightweight session philosophy.
UNIT IV
MULTIMEDIA COMMUNICATION STANDARDS
9
Objective of MPEG-7 standard Functionalities and systems of MPEG-7 MPEG-21 Multimedia
Framework Architecture Content representation Content Management and usage Intellectual property
management Audio visual system H322: Guaranteed QOS LAN systems MPEG-4 video Transport
across internet.
UNIT V
MULTIMEDIA COMMUNICATION ACROSS NETWORKS
9
Packet Audio/video in the network environment Video transport across Generic networks Layered
video coding Error Resilient video coding techniques Scalable Rate control Streaming video across
Internet Multimedia transport across ATM networks and IP network Multimedia across wireless
networks.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Jon Crowcroft
Mark Handley
Ian Wakeman
Internetworking
Multimedia
Harcourt Asia Pvt. Ltd.,

Singapore
1998
2.
Szuprowicz B O
Multimedia Networking
McGraw-Hill,
Newyork
1995
296
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Tay Vaughan
Multimedia: Making it
to work
Tata McGraw Hill,

2000
2.
Rao K R
Zoran S Bojkovic
Dragorad A
Milovanovic
Multimedia
Communication systems
2003
WEB URLs:
1. http://www.cs.odu.edu/~cs778/crowcroft/book/book.html
2. http://www.multimedia.ece.uic.edu/04- 8.pdf
3. http://www.cs.wfu.edu/syllabus/Spring2007/391_691Fulp.pdf
4. http://www.corning.com/docs/opticalfiber/wp6321.pdf
5. http://www.cnp3book.info.ucl.ac.be/transport/principles/
14LC70
HIGH SPEED SWITCHING ARCHITECTURES

3
OBJECTIVES:
To learn the high speed switching technologies.
To study the various types of ATM switching architectures.
To learn the various types of queuing technologies in ATM networks.
To study the architectures of packet switching.
To understand various IP switching architectures.
OUTCOMES:
have an insight into the various high speed switching technologies.
perform a case study of performance estimation of ATM switching architectures.
analyze the queue models used in ATM switches.
simulate the ATM switching architecture and analyze its performance.
implement IP switching and test its performance.
UNIT I
LAN SWITCHING TECHNOLOGY
9
Switching Concepts Switch forwarding techniques Switch path control LAN Switching Cut through
forwarding Store and forward Virtual LANs.
UNIT I I
ATM SWITCHING ARCHITECTURE
9
Blocking networks Basic and enhanced banyan networks Sorting networks Merge sorting Rearrangable networks Full and partial connection networks Non blocking networks Recursive network
construction Comparison of non-blocking network Switching with deflection routing Shuffle switch
Tandem banyan switch.
UNIT III
QUEUES IN ATM SWITCHES
9
Internal Queueing Input, output and shared queueing Multiple queueing networks Combined Input,
output and shared queueing Performance analysis of Queued switches.
UNIT IV
PACKET SWITCHING ARCHITECTURES
9
Architectures of Internet Switches and Routers Buffer less and buffered Crossbar switches Multi-stage
switching Optical Packet switching Switching fabric on a chip Internally buffered Crossbars.
UNIT V
IP SWITCHING
9
Addressing model IP Switching types flow driven and topology driven solutions IP over ATM
address and next hop resolution Multicasting Ipv6 over ATM.
TOTAL: 45
297
TEXT BOOK:
Sl.No
Author(s)
1.
Achille Pattavina
2.
Christopher Y Metz
Title of the Book

Switching Theory: Architectures
and performance in Broadband
ATM networks
Switching protocols and
Architectures
Publisher
Year of
Publication
John Wiley and Sons

Ltd., New York
1998
McGraw-Hill
NewYork
1998
Publisher
Year of
Publication
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No
Author(s)
1.
Elhanany M Hamdi
2.
John A.Chiong
3.
Rainer Handel
Manfred N Huber
Stefan Schroder
Title of the Book

High Performance
Packet Switching
architectures
Internetworking ATM
for the internet and
enterprise networks
ATM Networks:
Concepts Protocols
Applications
Springer Publications
2007
McGraw Hill, New

York
1998
Addison Wesley,
New York, 3rd Edition
1999
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.cs.virginia.edu/~itlab/book/pdf/Ch5.pdf
http://www.docwiki.cisco.com/wiki/Asynchronous_Transfer_Mode_Switching
http://www.cse.ust.hk/~hamdi/Publications_pdf/Analysis%20of%20Nonblocking%20ATM%20Switches%20with%20Multiple%20Input%20%20%20Queues.pdf
http://www.cs.virginia.edu/~cs757/slidespdf/757-08 -switcharchp2.pdf
http://www.cse.wustl.edu/~jain/cis788- 97/ftp/ip_switching.pdf
298
ME: VLSI DESIGN
SEMESTER I
TOTAL CREDITS: 67
Course
Code
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Course Title
Credits
Maximum Marks
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
14LV11
14LV12
14LV13
14LV14
14LV15
14LV16
Applied Mathematics for VLSI

Engineers
Advanced Digital System
Design
VLSI Design Techniques
Integrated Circuits
Testing of VLSI Circuits
Advanced Computer
Architecture and Parallel
Processing
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
PRACTICAL
14LV18
VLSI Design Laboratory I

TOTAL
18
20
SEMESTER II
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Credits
Maximum Marks
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
14LV23
Analysis and Design of

Analog Integrated Circuits
Computer Aided Design for
VLSI Circuits
VLSI Signal Processing
14LVXX
Elective I
40
60
100
14LVXX
Elective II
40
60
100
14LVXX
Elective III
40
60
100
40
60
100
14LV21
14LV22
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
PRACTICAL
14LV28
VLSI Design Laboratory II

TOTAL
18
20

299
ME: VLSI DESIGN
SEMESTER III
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Credits
Maximum Marks
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
14LVXX
Elective IV
40
60
100
14LVXX
Elective V
40
60
100
14LVXX
Elective VI
40
60
100
100
100
PRACTICAL
14LV39

TOTAL
12
12
15
SEMESTER IV
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Credits
Maximum Marks
CIA
ESE
Total
40
60
100
PRACTICAL
14LV49

TOTAL
24
12
24
12

300
ME: VLSI DESIGN
LIST OF ELECTIVES
Course Code
Course Title
14LV51
Solid State Device Modeling and Simulation
14LV52
Genetic Algorithm For VLSI Design
14LV53
Low Power VLSI Design
14LV54
Analog VLSI Design
14LV55
VLSI Device and Process Simulation
14LV56
Design of Semiconductor Memories
14LV57
ASIC Design
14LV58
MEMS and NEMS
14LV59
Submicron VLSI Design
14LV60
VLSI for Wireless Communication
14LV61
Nano Scale Devices and Circuit Design
14LV62
Signal Integrity for High Speed Devices
14LV63
Electromagnetic Interference and Compatibility in System Design
14LV64
Physical Design of VLSI Circuits
14LV65
System on Chip
14LV66
Analog and Mixed Mode VLSI Design
14LV67
Reconfigurable Computing
14LV68
Advanced Embedded Systems
14LV69
14LV70
RISC Processor Architecture and Programming
301
ME: VLSI DESIGN
SEMESTER I
14LV11
APPLIED MATHEMATICS FOR VLSI ENGINEERS

3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the numerical solutions of equations and soft computing methods.
To learn about the concepts of special functions that appear as solutions of differential
equations or integrals of elementary functions.
To familiarize the concept of Random Process.
To import the knowledge in graph theory.
OUTCOMES:
solve the problems in soft computing whose solutions are unpredictable, uncertain and
between 0 and 1.
solve the problems in one dimensional wave equations.
solve the higher order ordinary differential equations.
apply the concepts of random process for signal processing applications.
represent networks of communication, data organization using graph theory.
UNIT I

METHODS
9
Method of false position Iteration method - Newton Raphson method Solution of linear system by
Gaussian elimination and Gauss-Jordon methods Fuzzy variables Fuzzy relations Neural
networks Genetic algorithms (basic concepts only).
UNIT II
9
Solution of One dimensional wave equation Characteristics Canonical transformation Periodic
solutiuon DAlemberts solution Riemann Volterra solution Laplace transform solutions for
displacement in a long string.
UNIT III
SPECIAL FUNCTIONS
9
Bessels equation Bessel Functions Recurrence relations Generating functions and orthogonal
property of Bessel functions Legendres equation Legendre polynomials Rodrigues formula
Recurrence relations Generating functions and orthogonal property of Legendre Polynomials.
UNIT IV
RANDOM PROCESSES
9
Definitions and examples First order and second order Strictly stationary Wide sense stationary
and Ergodic processes Markov process Binomial Poisson and normal or Gaussian processes Sine
wave process.
UNIT V
FUNDAMENTALS OF GRAPHS
9
Graphs Subgraphs Graph Isomorphism Vertex degree Eulerian Graphs Planar graphs
Hamiltonian paths.
TOTAL: 45+15
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Jain M K
Iyengar S R K
Jain R K

Computation
New Age
International
Publishers Pvt Ltd,
4th edition
2007
2.
Rajasekaran S
Neural Network, Fuzzy

Logic and Genetic
Algorithm, Synthesis and
Applications
Prentice Hall of
India,
2008
302
ME: VLSI DESIGN
3.
Sankara Rao K
4.
Grewal B S
5.
Veerarajan T
6.
Bondy J A
Murthy USR
Differential Equation
Higher Engineering
Mathematics
Probability, Statistics and
Random Process
Graph Theory and
Applications
Prentice Hall of
India, 3rd Edition
Fortieth Edition
Tata McGraw Hill,
2nd edition
2007
Mc Millan Press Ltd
1982
2011
2008
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
1.
Sivanandam S N
Deepa S N
2.
Grewal B S
3.
Jain R K
Iyengar S R K
4.
Henry Stark
John Woods W
5.
Narshing Deo
Title of the Book

Principles of Soft Computing
Higher Engineering
Mathematics
Mathematics
GraphTheorywith
ApplicationforEngineering
andComputerScience
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Wiley India Pvt.

Limited, 1st edition
Fortieth Edition
2007
2007
Narosa Publishers
2007
Pearson Education,
4th edition
2013
Prentice-Hall
1979
WEB URLs:
1. http://mathworld.wolfram.com/WaveEquation1-Dimensional.html
2. http://homepages.inf.ed.ac.uk/pkoehn/publications/gann94.pdf
3. http://macosa.dima.unige.it/mat/calculus/index.html
4. http://www.ece.uah.edu/courses/ee385/
5. http://www.maths.lse.ac.uk/Personal/jozef/LTCC/Graph_Theory_Bondy_Murty.pdf
14LV12
ADVANCED DIGITAL SYSTEM DESIGN

3
OBJECTIVES:
To learn about the design of synchronous sequentialcircuits.
To learn about the design of asynchronous sequentialcircuits.
To study symmetric functions.
To understand the implementation of combinational and sequential circuits in PLD.
To study design of digital circuits using VHDL.
OUTCOMES:
design sequential synchronous circuits.
design a asynchronous sequential circuits.

design a circuit using symmetric function.
implement the circuit using Programmable Devices.
write VHDL code for combinational and sequential circuits.
UNIT I
SEQUENTIAL CIRCUIT DESIGN
9
Analysis of Clocked Synchronous Sequential Networks (CSSN) Modeling of CSSN State Stable
Assignment and Reduction Design of CSSN Design of Iterative Circuits ASM Chart ASM
Realization.
UNIT II
ASYNCHRONOUS SEQUENTIAL CIRCUIT DESIGN
9
Analysis of Asynchronous Sequential Circuit (ASC) Flow Table Reduction Races in ASC State
Assignment Problem and the Transition Table Design of ASC Static and Dynamic Hazards
Essential Hazards Data Synchronizers Designing Vending Machine Controller Mixed Operating
Mode Asynchronous Circuits.
303
ME: VLSI DESIGN
UNIT III
SYMMETRIC FUNCTIONS
9
Elementary symmetric functions Partially symmetric and totally symmetric functions Mc Cluskey
decomposition method Unity ratio symmetric ratio functions Synthesis of symmetric function by
contact networks.
UNIT IV
SYNCHRONOUS DESIGN USING PROGRAMMABLE DEVICES
9
EPROM to Realize a Sequential Circuit Programmable Logic Devices Designing a Synchronous
Sequential Circuit using a GAL EPROM Realization of State machines using PLD FPGA
Xilinx FPGA Xilinx 3000 Xilinx 4000.
UNIT V
SYSTEM DESIGN USING VHDL
9
VHDL Description of Combinational Circuits Arrays VHDL Operators Compilation and
Simulation of VHDL Code Modeling using VHDL Flip Flops Registers Counters Sequential
Machine Combinational Logic Circuits VHDL Code for Serial Adder, Binary Multiplier Binary
Divider Design of a Simple Microprocessor Function Procedures Packages.
TOTAL: 45+15
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Donald G Givone
Digital principles and

Design
Tata McGraw Hill
2002
2.
John M Yarbrough
Digital Logic applications

and Design
Thomson Learning
2001
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Nripendra N
Biswas
Logic Design Theory
2001
2.
Charles H Roth Jr
Fundamentals of Logic design
Thomson Learning
2004
3.
Parag K Lala
Digital System design using

PLD
BS Publications
2003
4.
Nelson V P
Nagale H T
Carroll B D
Irwin J D
Digital Logic Circuit Analysis

and Design
Prentice Hall
International
1995
5.
Dueck R K
Digital Design with CPLD

applications and VHDL
Thomson Learning
2001
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http: //www .arunet.co.uk/tkboyd/ele1bd.htm

http: //www.engr.sjsu.edu/caohuut/EE270/Documents/Lecture05.pdf
http: //www.eecg.toronto.edu/~ece1767/notes/pect1.pdf
http: //www. ee.sharif.edu/~logic_circuits_t/readings/PLD.pdf
http: //www.engr.uconn.edu/~tehrani/teaching/ece3401/lec01.pdf
14LV13
VLSI DESIGN TECHNIQUES

3
OBJECTIVES:
To study basic concepts of VLSI design process and MOS transistors.
To study DC characteristics of inverters and transmission gates.
To learn the circuit performance estimation.
To study designing of Combinational Logic Circuits, Sequential Logic Circuits, Arithmetic
Building Blocks, Memory and Array Structures.
To study Verilog HDL language.
304
ME: VLSI DESIGN
OUTCOMES:
analyze the different VLSI design process and layout style.
do the stick diagram of MOS circuits.
analyze the circuit components estimation.
design VLSI sub system.
write verilog code for different combinational and sequential circuits.
UNIT I
BASICS OF VLSI DESIGN
9
VLSI Design Process Architectural Design Logical Design Physical Design Layout Styles Full
custom, Semicustom approaches. NMOS and PMOS transistors, Threshold voltage Body effect
Design equations Second order effects, MOS models and small signal AC characteristics, Basic
CMOS technology.
UNIT II
INVERTERS AND LOGIC GATES
9
NMOS and CMOS Inverters Stick diagram Inverter ratio DC and transient characteristics,
Switching times Super buffers Driving large capacitance loads CMOS logic structures,
Transmission gates Static CMOS design Dynamic CMOS design.
UNIT III
CIRCUIT CHARACTERISATION AND PERFORMANCE ESTIMATION

9
Resistance estimation Capacitance estimation Inductance Switching characteristics Transistor
sizing Power dissipation and design margining Charge sharing Scaling.
UNIT IV
VLSI SYSTEM COMPONENTS CIRCUITS
9
Multiplexers Decoders comparators priority encoders Shift registers Arithmetic circuits
Ripple carry adders Carry look ahead adders High speed adders Multipliers.
UNIT V
VERILOG HARDWARE DESCRIPTION LANGUAGE
9
Overview of digital design with Verilog HDL Hierarchical modelling concepts Modules and port
definitions Gate level modelling Data flow modelling Behavioural modelling Task & functions
Verilog and logic synthesis Simulation Design examples Ripple carry adders, Carry Look ahead
adders, Multiplier, ALU, Shift Registers, Multiplexer, Comparator, Test Bench.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
Jan M Rabaey
Digital Integrated Circuits
Prentice Hall of
India
2002
2.
Sung Mo Kang
Yusuf Leblebici
CMOS Digital Integrated Circuits

Analysis and Design
Tata McGraw Hill
2003
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
1.
Neil H E Weste
Kamran
Eshraghian
Principles of CMOS VLSI Design
Pearson Education
2000
2.
John P Yemura
Introduction to VLSI Circuits and

Systems
John Wiley and

Sons
2002
3.
Samir Palnitkar
Verilog HDL
Pearson Education
2004
4.
Eugene D
Fabricius
Introduction to VLSI Design
McGraw Hill
International
1990
5.
Bhasker J
A Verilog HDL Primer
B S Publications
2001
305
ME: VLSI DESIGN
6.
Wayne Wolf
Modern VLSI Design System on

chip
Pearson Education
2002
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http: //www.cs.unc.edu/~montek/teaching/spring 05/lecture 0.ppt

http: //www.vlsitechnology.org
http: //www.cmosvlsi.com/lect3.pdf
http: //www.ee.ncu.edu.tw/~jfli/vlsi2/lecture 02/ch07.pdf
http: //www.asic world.com/verilog/veritut.html
14LV14
DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING INTEGRATED CIRCUITS

3
OBJECTIVES:
To study the procedural flow of system design in DSP and Integrated circuit.
To analyse the frequency response and transfer function of DSP systems.
To understand the design concepts of FIR and IIR filters.
To study the architectures for DSP system.
To study the different number system and layout for VLSI circuits.
OUTCOMES:
familiarize the different VLSI processes.
implement different signal processing algorithms.
design FIR and IIR filters.
do analysis and synthesis of DSP architectures.
familiarize different number systems and arithmetic unit design in ICs.
UNIT I
DSP INTEGRATED CIRCUITS AND VLSI CIRCUIT TECHNOLOGIES 9
Standard digital signal processors Application specific ICs for DSP DSP systems DSP system
design Integrated circuit design MOS transistors MOS logic VLSI process technologies
Trends in CMOS technologies.
UNIT II
9
Digital signal processing Sampling of analog signals, Selection of sample frequency Signal
processing systems Frequency response, Transfer functions, Signal flow graphs Filter structures
Adaptive DSP algorithms, DFT The Discrete Fourier Transform, FFT The Fast Fourier Transform
Algorithm Image coding Discrete cosine transforms.
UNIT III
DIGITAL FILTERS AND FINITE WORD LENGTH EFFECTS
9
FIR filters FIR filter structures, FIR chips IIR filters, Specifications of IIR filters Mapping of
analog transfer functions Mapping of analog filter structures Multiratesystems, Interpolation with
an integer factor L Sampling rate change with a ratio/M Multirate filters Finite word length
effects parasitic oscillations Scaling of signal levels, Round off noise Measuring round off noise,
Coefficient sensitivity, Sensitivity and noise.
UNIT IV
DSP ARCHITECTURES AND SYNTHESIS
9
DSP system architectures Standard DSP architecture, Ideal DSP architectures Multiprocessors and
multicomputers Systolic and Wave front arrays Shared memory architectures Mapping of DSP
algorithms onto hardware Implementation based on complex PEs Shared memory architecture
with Bit serial PEs.
UNIT V
ARITHMETIC UNITS AND INTEGRATED CIRCUIT DESIGN
9
Conventional number system Redundant Number system Residue Number System Bit-parallel
and Bit-Serial arithmetic, Basic shift accumulator, Reducing the memory size, Complex multipliers,
Improved shift-accumulator Layout of VLSI circuits FFT processor DCT processor and
Interpolator as case studies.
TOTAL: 45
306
ME: VLSI DESIGN
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Lars Wanhammer
1.
DSP Integrated Circuits
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Academic press
1999
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.N
o.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Oppenheim A V
Discrete time Signal Processing
Pearson education
2000
2.
Emmanuel C Ifeachor
Barrie W Jervis
Digital signal processing A

practical approach
Pearson education
2001
3.
Keshab K Parhi
VLSI digital Signal Processing

Systems design and
Implementation
John Wiley and

Sons
1999
4.
Bayoumi and
Magdy A
VLSI Design Methodologies for

Architectures
B S Publications
2000
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http: //www.bitpipe.com/.../Digital Signal Processing Integrated Circuits.html

http: //www.dsprelated.com
http: //www dsp.ee.ncu.edu.tw/course/VDSP_99/lecture/ch1.pdf
http: //www.eda.org/rassp/modules/m21/m21_03_00.ppt
http: //www .bwrcs.eecs.berkeley.edu/Classes/IcBook/SLIDES/slides7.ppt
14LV15
TESTING OF VLSI CIRCUITS

3
0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To know the various types of faults and simulation.
To know the test pattern generation.
To study about the different types of testing.
To study the test pattern generation and testing method for BIST and RAM.
To understand the fault diagnosis methods.
OUTCOMES:
analyze and simulate the different types of faults.
generate the test pattern to test the circuit.
design testable circuits.
test the RAM structure.
diagnosis the fault in a circuit.
UNIT I
TESTING AND SIMULATION
9
Introduction to Testing Faults in digital circuits Modeling of faults Logical Fault Models Fault
detection Fault location Fault dominance Logic Simulation Types of simulation Delay models
Gate level and Event driven simulation.
UNIT II
FAULT SIMULATION TECHNIQUES
9
Introduction Fault Table, Boolean difference Path sensitization, D algorithm Sequential circuits
Random test vectors, Serial and Single fault propagation, Deductive, Parallel and Concurrent
Simulation.
307
ME: VLSI DESIGN
UNIT III
TESTABILITY
9
Design for Testability Ad hoc design Generic scan based design Classical scan based design
System level DFT approaches.
UNIT IV
TEST PATTERN GENERATION AND ALGORITHMS
9
Built In Self Test Test pattern generation for BIST Circular BIST BIST Architectures Testable
Memory Design Test algorithms Test generation for Embedded RAMs.
UNIT V
CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS
9
Logic Level Diagnosis Diagnosis by UUT reduction Fault Diagnosis for Combinational Circuits
Self checking design System Level Diagnosis.
TOTAL: 45+15
TEXT BOOK:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Abramovici M,
Breuer M A
Friedman A D
1.
Title of the Book

Digital Systems and
Testable
Design
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Jaico Publishing
House
2002
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Lala P K
Digital Circuit Testing and

Testability
Academic Press
2002
2.
Bushnell M L
Agrawal V D
Essentials of Electronic Testing for

Digital,Memory and Mixed
Signal VLSI Circuits
Kluwar Academic
Publishers
2002
3.
Crouch A L
Design for Test for Digital IC's

and Embedded Core Systems
Prentice Hall
International
2002
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http: //www.serc.iisc.ernet.in/seminar/viren research CDTL.ppt

http: //www.ee.duke.edu/~krish/teaching/ECE269/Fault_simulation.pdf
http: //www.ece.uc.edu/~wjone/intro.pdf
http: //www.csee.umbc.edu/~cpatel2/links/418/lectures/chap7_lect08_atpg.pdf
http: //www.faculty.sdmiramar.edu/faculty/sdccd/wnorth/109c/AMT109Cseven.pdf
14LV16
ADVANCED COMPUTER ARCHITECTURE AND PARALLEL

PROCESSING
3 0 0
OBJECTIVES:
To know about the basic concepts of Parallel processing.
To learn the vector processor architecture.
To learn the array processor architecture.
To study the Multiprocessor systems.
To study the concept of data flow in a computer architecture.
OUTCOMES:
apply parallel processing and pipelining concepts for system design.
analyze the architecture and functioning of vector processor.
analyze the architecture and functioning of array processor.
design systems using multiprocessors
gain knowledge about data flow computer architecture.
308
ME: VLSI DESIGN
UNIT I
PRINCIPLES OF PARALLEL PROCESSING
9
Introduction Trends towards Parallel Processing Uniprocessor Architecture Overview Basic
Uniprocessor Architecture Parallel Processing Mechanism Balancing of subsystems Bandwidth
Multiprogramming and Time sharing Styles of Architecture Multiplicity of Instruction Data
Structures, Serial versus Parallel Processing Parallelism versus Pipelining Parallel Processing
Applications.
UNIT II
VECTOR PROCESSORS
9
Principles of Vector Processing Pipelined Vector Processing methods The Architecture of CRAY1 Architecture of CYBER 205, Vector Processing in CYBER 205.
UNIT III
ARRAY PROCESSORS
9
SIMD Computer Organizations Masking and Data Routing mechanisms Statics versus Dynamic
Networks Mesh-connected Iliac Networks Cube Interconnection Networks SIMD Matrix
Multiplication.
UNIT IV
MULTIPROCESSOR SYSTEMS
9
Loosely coupled Multiprocessors Tightly coupled Multiprocessors Processor characteristics for
Multiprocessing Time Shared or Common Buses Crossbar switch and Multi port memories
Classification of Multiprocessor Operating Systems Software Requirements for Multiprocessors
Operating System Requirements Language features to exploit parallelism Detection of Parallelism
in programs.
UNIT V
DATA FLOW COMPUTER ARCHITECTURES
9
Control Flow versus Data Flow Computers Data Flow Graphs and Languages Advantages and
Potential Problems Static Data Flow Computers Dynamic Data Flow Computers Data Flow
Design Alternates.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
1.
Smith M J S
Hwang Kai
2.
Sajjan G Shiva
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication

Parallel Processing
McGraw Hill Inc
1985
Pipelined and Parallel Computer

Architecture
Prentice Hall Inc
1996
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
1.
2.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
William
Stallings

Architecture
Kai Hwang
Advanced Computer
Architecture
Publisher
Pearson education
Tata McGraw Hill
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http: //www .3.nd.edu/~zxu2/acms60212 40212 S12/Lec 05.pdf

http: //www.cs.berkeley.edu/~pattrsn/252S98/Lec06 vector.pdf
http: //www.dauniv.ac.in/downloads/.../CompArchCh07L05ArrayProcessor.pdf
http: //www.cs.vu.nl/~ast/books/mos2/sample 8.pdf
http: //www .cse.yeditepe.edu.tr/~gkucuk/courses/cse533/Dataflow.pdf
309
Year of
Publication
1990
2001
ME: VLSI DESIGN
14LV18
VLSI DESIGN LABORATORY I

0
OBJECTIVES:
To design digital circuits using Verilog HDL and VHDL.
To design and verify the combinational and sequential logic circuits with various levels of
modeling using EDA Tools.
To gain knowledge of Xilinx EDA Tool and implementation.
To gain knowledge of implementation in DSP Processors.
To gain knowledge of electronics involved in the design of MOS circuits.
OUTCOMES:
write and simulate programs in VHDL and Verilog for modeling combinational circuits and
simulate it.
write and simulate programs in VHDL and Verilog for modeling sequential circuits and
simulate it.
implement the circuits in FPGA Platforms.
implement algorithms in DSP Processors.
make models of transistor circuits and simulate them for various operational requirements.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Simulation of 4-bit adder and multiplexer using VHDL
2. Simulation of magnitude comparator and code converters using VHDL
3. Simulation of flip-flops using Verilog HDL
4. Simulation of shift registers using Verilog HDL
5. Simulation of ALU using Packages and Functions
6. Simulation of MAC unit using Packages and Procedures
7. DC and Transient analysis of MOS inverters using Tanner
8. Implementation Using Schematic Entry Tool in Xilinx
9. Implementation of State Diagram Using State Cad in Xilinx
10. Implementation of Shift registers in FPGA
11. Implementation of up-down counter unit in FPGA
12. Implementation of FFT processor in DSP
SEMESTER II
14LV21
ANALYSIS AND DESIGN OF ANALOG INTEGRATED CIRCUITS

3
OBJECTIVES:
To learn about modeling of active devices.
To study the circuit configuration using BJT and FET.
To learn about the analysis of OPAMP.
To study the operation of analog multiplier and PLL.
To learn about designing of analog circuit using MOS devices.
OUTCOMES:
analyze the different models of integrated circuit active devices.
analyze different configurations of BJT and FET.
design and analyze the OPAMP circuits.
design and analyze the analog multiplier and PLL.
analyze different MOS OPAMP circuits.
310
0 0 3
ME: VLSI DESIGN
UNIT I
MODELS FOR INTEGRATED CIRCUIT ACTIVE DEVICES
9
Depletion region of a PN junction Large signal behavior of bipolar transistors Small signal model
of bipolar transistor Large signal behavior of MOSFET Small signal model of the MOS transistors
Short channel effects in MOS transistors Weak inversion in MOS transistors Substrate current flow
in MOS transistor.
UNIT II
CIRCUIT CONFIGURATION FOR LINEAR ICs
9
Current sources, Analysis of difference amplifiers with active load using BJT and FET Supply and
temperature independent biasing techniques Output stages Emitter follower, Source follower and
Push pull output stages.
UNIT III
ANALYSIS OF OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIERS
9
Analysis of operational amplifier circuits Slew rate model and high frequency analysis Frequency
response of integrated circuits Single stage and multistage amplifiers Operational amplifier noise.
UNIT IV
ANALOG MULTIPLIER AND PLL
9
Analysis of four quadrants and variable transconductance multipliers Voltage controlled oscillator
Closed loop analysis of PLL Monolithic PLL design in integrated circuits Sources of noise Noise
models of Integrated circuit Components Circuit Noise Calculations Equivalent Input Noise
Generators Noise Bandwidth Noise Figure and Noise Temperature.
UNIT V
ANALOG DESIGN WITH MOS TECHNOLOGY
9
Two stage MOS Operational Amplifiers with Cascode MOS Telescopic Cascode Operational
Amplifier MOS Folded Cascode and MOS Active Cascode Operational Amplifiers Switched
Capacitor applications Amplifiers.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOK:
Sl.No.
1.
Author(s)
Paul R Gray
Title of the Book

Analysis and design of Analog
ICs
Publisher
Wiley International,
Forth Edition
Year of
Publication
2002
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Behzad Razavi

Integrated Circuits
S Chand and
company
2000
2.
Nandita Dasgupata
Amitava Dasgupta
Semiconductor
Devices,Modelling and
Technology
Prentice Hall of
India
2004
3.
Alan B Grebene
Bipolar and MOS Analog

Integrated circuit design
John Wiley and

sons,Inc.
2003
4.
Phillip E Allen
Douglas R Holberg
CMOS Analog Circuit Design
Oxford
University Press
2003
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http: //www.allaboutcircuits.com/vol_6/chpt_6/index.htm
http: //www.ulb.tu darmstadt.de/tocs/212596276.pdf
http: //www ece.ut.ac.ir/Classpages/S86/ECE089/Chapter1_4in1.pdf
http: //www.aicdesign.org/scnotes/2002notes/Chapter02 2UP(8_13_02).pdf
http: //www.granitesemi.com/analogdesign.pdf
311
ME: VLSI DESIGN
14LV22
COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN FOR VLSI CIRCUITS

3
OBJECTIVES:
To study the Physical design cycle and methodologies of VLSI.
To learn the different design rules, placement and partitioning algorithm.
To learn the different floor planning and routing algorithm.
To study the different types of simulation and low level synthesis.
To learn the high level synthesis and automation.
OUTCOMES:
analyze different VLSI design methodologies.
apply different design rules, partitioning, placement algorithm based on requirement.
apply different floor planning and routing algorithm based on requirement.
analyze different levels of simulation and synthesis.
Perform high level synthesis and Physical Design Automation.
UNIT I
VLSI DESIGN METHODOLOGIES
9
Introduction to VLSI Design methodologies Review of Data structures and algorithms Review of
VLSI Design automation tools Algorithmic Graph Theory and Computational Complexity Tractable
and Intractable problems General purpose methods for combinatorial optimization.
UNIT II
DESIGN RULES, PLACEMENT AND PARTITIONING
9
Layout Compaction Design rules Problem formulation Algorithms for constraint graph
compaction Placement and partitioning Circuit representation Placement algorithms
Partitioning.
UNIT III
FLOOR PLANNING AND ROUTING
9
Floor planning concepts Shape functions and floor plan sizing Types of local routing problems
Area routing Channel routing Global routing Algorithms for global routing.
UNIT IV
SIMULATION AND LOW LEVEL SYNTHESIS
9
Simulation Gate level modeling and simulation Switch level modeling and simulation
Combinational Logic Synthesis Binary Decision Diagrams Two Level Logic Synthesis.
UNIT V
MODELLING, HIGH LEVEL SYNTHESIS AND AUTOMATION
9
High level Synthesis Hardware models Internal representation Allocation Assignment and
scheduling Simple scheduling algorithm Assignment problem High level transformations
Physical Design Automation of FPGAs MCMs.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOK:
Sl.No.
1.
Author(s)
Sherwani N A
Title of the Book

Algorithms for VLSI Physical
Design Automation
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Kluwar Academic
Publishers
2002
Publisher
Year of
Publication
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Gerez S H
Algorithms for VLSI Design

Automation
John Wiley and

Sons
2002
2.
Drechsler R
Evolutionary Algorithms for

VLSI CAD
Kluwer Academic
Publishers, Boston
1998
3.
Hill D
Shugard J Fishburn
Keutzer K
Algorithms and Techniques for

VLSI Layout Synthesis
Kluwer Academic
Publishers Boston
1999
1.
312
ME: VLSI DESIGN
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http: //www.rulabinsky.com/cavd/
http: //www.ee.ncu.edu.tw/~jfli/vlsi21/lecture/ch01.pdf
http: //www.eecg.toronto.edu/~brown/papers/fpl02 manohararajah.pdf
http: //www. csg.csail.mit.edu/6.375/6_375.../L14 Placement and Routing.ppt
http: //www .151.100.120.244/personale/pisa/CIRCUITI.../VARIE/RF.../8cad1.pdf
14LV23
VLSI SIGNAL PROCESSING

3
1 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the various digital signal processing, DFG representation, parallel and
pipelining concept.
To study the retiming, folding and unfolding of DFG.
To learn about fast convolution.
To study the bit level architecture and different types of multiplier.
To learn about programmable digital signal processor.
OUTCOMES:
design architectures for DSP algorithms.
optimize design in terms of area, speed and power.
use the fast convolution concept in DSP algorithms.
design an optimum architecture with a suitable multiplier.
design DSP based system for wireless and multimedia applications.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO DSP SYSTEMS
9
Introduction To DSP Systems Typical DSP computation Convolution, correlation, Adaptive
filtering, DCT Representation of DSP algorithms, Iteration Bound Data flow graph representations
loop bound and iteration bound Longest path Matrix algorithm Minimum mean cycle algorithm,
Pipelining and parallel processing Pipelining of FIR digital filters, Parallel processing, Pipelining and
Parallel processing for low power.
UNIT II
RETIMING, FOLDING AND UNFOLDING
9
Retiming Definitions and properties, solving systems of inequalities, retiming for clock period
minimization Word level and bit level processing Retiming techniques Unfolding An algorithm
for Unfolding, properties of unfolding, sample period reduction and parallel processing application.
Folding Folding transformation.
UNIT III
FAST CONVOLUTION
9
Fast convolution Cook Toom algorithm Modified Cook-Took algorithm Winograd Algorithm,
Iterated Convolution Cyclic Convolution Parallel FIR filters Polyphase decomposition Fast
FIR algorithms in efficient single /multichannel Interleaving Efficient single channel pipelining,
Efficient multichannel interleaving Pipelining in first order IIR digital filters Pipelined LMS
adaptive filter.
UNIT IV
BIT LEVEL ARITHMETIC ARCHITECTURES
9
Bit-Level Arithmetic Architectures Parallel multipliers with sign extension, Parallel carry-ripple
array multipliers, Parallel carry-save multiplier, 4x 4 bit Baugh Wooley carry-save multiplication
Tabular form and implementation Design of Lyons bit-serial multipliers using Horners rule Bitserial FIR filter CSD representation, CSD multiplication using Horners rule for precision
improvement.
UNIT V
PROGRAMMABLE DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSORS
9
Synchronous, Wave and asynchronous pipelining Synchronous pipelining and clocking styles
Clock skew in edge-triggered single phase clocking, Two phase clocking Wave pipelining,
Asynchronous pipelining bundled data versus dual rail protocol. Programmable Digital Signal
Processors Important features, DSP processor for wireless and multimedia applications.
TOTAL: 45+15
313
ME: VLSI DESIGN
TEXT BOOK:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
1.
Keshab K Parhi
Title of the Book

VLSI Digital Signal Processing
systems, Design and
implementation
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Wiley, Inter
Science
2008
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Gary Yeap
Practical Low Power Digital

VLSI Design
Kluwer Academic
Publishers
1998
2.
Mohammed Isamail
Terri Fiez
Analog VLSI Signal and

Information Processing
McGraw Hill Inc
1994
3.
Kung S Y
White H J
House Kailath T
VLSI and Modern Signal

Processing
Prentice Hall
1985
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http: //www.elin.ttu.ee/~olev/lect1.pdf
http: //www.drshoabkhan.com/_assets/chapter_8.pdf
http: //www.ece.umn.edu/users/parhi/SLIDES/chap8.pdf
http: //www.ece.umn.edu/users/parhi/SLIDES/chap13.pdf
http: //www.freevideolectures.com Electrical Engineering IIT Kharagpur
14LV28
VLSI DESIGN LABORATORY II

0
OBJECTIVES:
To generate analog waveforms using HDL.
To design and simulate FIR filter using HDL
To gain in-depth knowledge in Xilinx tool
To gain knowledge of analog and digital design flow in Cadence Tool
To design and implement embedded systems
OUTCOMES:
write VHDL and Verilog HDL programs for analog waveform generation and simulate it.
implement the circuits in FPGA Platforms
analyze the area ,power and timing of given circuit
generate GDSII file for chip manufacturing.
implement embedded systems using ARM
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Generation of Analog waveforms using Modelsim Simulator
2. Design and simulation of FIR filter using HDL
3. FPGA Implementation of arithmetic circuits using Xilinx System generator Tool
4. Transient analysis, dc analysis, ac analysis of source follower using Cadence
5. Transient analysis of CMOS gates using Cadence
6. Layout generation of Inverter using Cadence
7. DC and Transient analysis of differential amplifier
8. Determination of Area, power and timing of MAC unit using Cadence
9. Determination of Area, power and timing of 4 Bit sliced processor using Cadence
10. Implementation of Elevator controller using Embedded Microcontroller.
11. Implementation of stepper motor controller using Embedded Microcontroller.
12. Implementation of RTC using Embedded Microcontroller.
314
ME: VLSI DESIGN
ELECTIVES
14LV51
SOLID STATE DEVICE MODELLING AND SIMULATION

3
0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To learn the concepts of semiconductor physics.
To study the BJT modelling.
To learn about MOSFET modelling.
To learn the opto-electronic device modelling.
To study about the different parameter measurement in BJT and MOSFET.
OUTCOMES:
simulate the Semiconductor devices using SPICE model.
model BJTs.
model MOSFETs.
measure BJT and MOSFET parameters.
model opto-electronic devices.
UNIT I
BASIC SEMICONDUCTOR PHYSICS
9
Quantum Mechanical Concepts Carrier Concentration, Transport Equation, Band gap, Mobility and
Resistivity, Carrier Generation and Recombination, Avalanche Process Noise Sources Diodes
Forward and Reverse biased junctions Reverse bias breakdown Transient and AC conditions
Static and Dynamic behaviorSmall and Large signal models SPICE model for a Diode
Temperature and Area effects on Diode Model Parameters.
UNIT II
BIPOLAR DEVICE MODELING
9
Transistor Models BJT Transistor Action Minority carrier distribution and Terminal currents
Switching Eber-Molls and Gummel Poon Model, SPICE modeling Temperature and area effects.
UNIT III
MOSFET MODELING
9
MOS Transistor NMOS, PMOS MOS Device equations Threshold Voltage Second order
effects Temperature Short Channel and Narrow Width Effect Models for Enhancement Depletion
Type MOSFET CMOS Models in SPICE.
UNIT IV
PARAMETER MEASUREMENT
9
Bipolar Junction Transistor Parameter Static Parameter Measurement Techniques Large signal
parameter measurement Techniques, Gummel Plots, MOSFET Long and Short Channel Parameters,
Measurement of Capacitance.
UNIT V
OPTOELECTRONIC DEVICE MODELLING
9
Static and Dynamic Models Rate Equations Numerical Technique Equivalent Circuits
Modeling of LEDs Diode and Photo detectors.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Ben G Streetman
Solid State Devices

6th Edition,
2005
2.
Giuseppe Massobrio
Paolo Antogentti
Semiconductor Device
Modeling with SPICE
McGraw Hill Inc
1998
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
1.
Author(s)
Tyagi M S
Title of the Book

Introduction to Semiconductor
Devices
315
Publisher
John Wiley and
sons
Year of
Publication
2008
ME: VLSI DESIGN
2.
Sze S M
Semiconductor Devices
Physics and Technology
John Wiley and

sons
1998
3.
Mohammed Ismail
Terri Fiez
Analog VLSI Signal and

Tata McGraw
Hill
2001
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http: //www.eecs.berkeley.edu/~hu/Chenming Hu_ch8.pdf

http: //www.uotechnology.edu.iq/dep eee/lectures/1st/.../3.pdf
http: //www web.cs.mun.ca/~paul/transistors/node3.html
http: //www .3.imperial.ac.uk/pls/portallive/docs/1/2475915.PDF
http: //www.ocw.nctu.edu.tw/upload/classbfs120901431113349.pdf
14LV52
GENETIC ALGORITHM FOR VLSI DESIGN

3
OBJECTIVES:
To study the basics of Genetic Algorithm.
To learn the use of Genetic Algorithm in VLSI layout and test automation.
To study the partitioning and cell placement using Genetic Algorithm.
To learn about the routing and test pattern generation using Genetic Algorithm.
To measure the power in VLSI circuit after applying Genetic Algorithm.
OUTCOMES:
demonstrate Genetic Algorithm concepts for VLSI circuit design.
generate layout and test patterns using Genetic Algorithm.
do partitioning and cell placement using Genetic Algorithm.
apply the GA for getting optimum routing.
design power optimized circuits using Genetic Algorithm.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
Introduction, GA Terminology Steady State Algorithm Fitness Scaling Inversion.
UNIT II
LAYOUT DESIGN AND TEST AUTOMATION
9
GA for VLSI Design, Layout and Test automation Partitioning Automatic placement, routing
technology, Mapping for FPGA Automatic test generation Partitioning algorithm Taxonomy
Multiway Partitioning.
UNIT III
PARTIONING AND CELL PLACEMENT
9
Hybrid genetic Genetic encoding Local improvement WDFR Comparison of Cas Standard cell
placement GASP algorithm Unified algorithm.
UNIT IV
FPGA TECHNOLOGY MAPPING
9
Global routing FPGA technology mapping Circuit generation Test generation in GA frame work
Test generation procedures.
UNIT V
POWER ESTIMATION AND STANDARD CELL PLACEMENT
9
Power estimation Application of GA Standard cell placement GA for ATG Problem encoding
Fitness function GA Vs Conventional algorithms.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOK:
Sl.No.
1.
Author(s)
Pinaki Mazumder
Rudnick E M
Title of the Book

Genetic Algorithm for VLSI
Design, Layout and test
Automation
316
Publisher
Prentice Hall of
India
Year of
Publication
1999
ME: VLSI DESIGN
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Randy L
Haupt Sue
Ellen Haupt
Ricardo Sal Zebulum
Macro Aurelio Pacheco
Marley Maria B R Vellasco
Marley Maria Bernard
Vellasco
John R Koza
Forrest H Bennett
David Andre
Morgan Kufmann
1.
2.
3.
Title of the Book

Practical Genetic
Algorithms
Evolution Electronics
Automatic Design of
electronic Circuits and
Systems Genetic
Algorithms
Genetic Programming
Automatic programming
and Automatic Circuit
Synthesis
Publisher
Year of
Publication
WileyInterscience
2004
CRC press, First

Edition
2001
CRC press, First

Edition
1999
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http: //www.svn d1.mpi inf.mpg.de/AG1/.../ebook fuzzy mitchell 99.pdf

http: //www.rennard.org/alife/english/gavintrgb.html
http: //www.gbv.de/dms/ilmenau/toc/252876911.PDF
http: //www. jiri.ocenasek.com/papers/mendel00.pdf
http: //www.cse.iitd.ac.in/~kolin/Teaching/2011/EE728/.../techMapping.pdf
14LV53
LOW POWER VLSI DESIGN

3
OBJECTIVES:
To know the sources of power consumption in CMOS circuits.
To understand the various power reduction techniques.
To learn the different power estimation methods.
To learn sub micron concepts.
To study about energy recovery circuits.
OUTCOMES:
estimate different sources of power dissipation.
apply the different power optimization techniques to obtain low power.
design a Low power VLSI circuit .
estimate and optimize the power in SRAM architecture.
design energy recovery circuits and low power latches.
UNIT I
SIMULATION POWER ANALYSIS
9
Need for Low Power VLSI chips Charging and Discharging Capacitance Short circuit Current
Leakage Current Static Current Basic Principles of Low Power Design Gate Level Logic
Simulation Architecture Level Analysis.
UNIT II
CIRCUIT AND LOGIC LEVEL POWER ESTIMATION
9
Transistor and Gate Sizing Equivalent Pin Ordering Network Restructuring and Reorganization
Gate reorganization Signal Gating Logic Encoding State Machine Encoding Pre-computation
Logic Power Reduction in Clock Networks CMOS Floating Node Low Power Bus Delay
Balancing.
UNIT III
POWER ESTIMATION
9
Modeling of Signals Signal Probability Calculation Probabilistic Techniques for Signal Activity
Estimation Statistical Techniques Estimation of glitching Power.
317
ME: VLSI DESIGN
UNIT IV
CIRCUIT DESIGN TECHNIQUES AND SRAM ARCHITECTURE
9
Circuit Design style Leakage Current in Deep sub-micrometer Transistors Deep Sub micrometer
Device Design Issues Low Voltage Circuit Design Techniques Multiple Supply Voltages MOS
Static RAM Memory Cell Banked SRAM Reducing Voltage Swing on Bit Lines Reducing
Power in the Write Driver and Sense Amplifier Circuits.
UNIT V
ENERGY RECOVERY AND LOW POWER LATCHES AND FLIP FLOPS 9
Energy Recovery Circuit Design Design with Partially Reversible Logic Need for Low power
Latches and Flip flops Evolution of Latches and Flip flops Quality Measures for Latches and Flip
flops.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Gary Yeap
Practical low power digital

VLSI design
Kluwer Academic
1998
2.
Kaushik Roy
Prasad S C
Low Power CMOS VLSI

Circuit Design
Wiley
International
2009
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Dimitrios Soudris
Chirstian Pignet
Costas Goutis
Designing CMOS Circuits

For
Low Power
Kluwer Academic
2009
2.
Kuo J B
Lou J H
Low voltage CMOS VLSI

Circuits
Wiley
International
1999
3.
Chandrakasan A P
Broadersen R W
Low power digital CMOS

design
Kluwer Academic
1995
4.
Abdellatif Bellaouar
Mohamed I Elmasry
Low power digital VLSI

design
Kluwer Academic
1995
5.
James B Kuo
Shin chia Lin
Low voltage SOI CMOS

VLSI Devices and
Circuits
John Wiley and

sons Inc.
2001
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http: //www.cse.unt.edu/~smohanty/.../Fall2011_ATV03_Power_Dissipation.pd
http: /www.smdp.iitkgp.ernet.in/PDF%5CLowpowerPDF%5CIEP_PPT_asd.pdf
http: //www users.ece.utexas.edu/~adnan/vlsi 05 backup/lec18LowPower.ppt
http: //www.smdp.iitkgp.ernet.in/PDF/TCAD/AP.pdf
http: //www.cecs.uci.edu/~papers/compendium94 03/papers/2001/.../05a_1.pdf
14LV54
ANALOG VLSI DESIGN

3
OBJECTIVES:
To study the concepts of CMOS analog circuits.
To study the concepts of BiCMOS analog circuits.
To understand the concepts of A/Dconvertors and analog integrated sensors.
To understand the testing concepts in analog VLSI circuits.
To study the statistical device modelling and simulation.
318
ME: VLSI DESIGN
OUTCOMES:
model and design different CMOS circuits.
model and design Bi CMOS circuits.
design A/D converter and sensor in analog domain.
test the analog design using different methods.
apply the statistical concepts to design analog circuit
UNIT I
BASIC CMOS CIRCUIT TECHNIQUES, CONTINUOUS TIME AND LOW

VOLTAGE SIGNAL PROCESSING
9
Mixed Signal VLSI Chips Basic CMOS Circuits Basic Gain Stage Gain Boosting Techniques
Super MOS Transistor Primitive Analog Cells Linear Voltage Current Converters MOS
Multipliers and Resistors CMOS, Bipolar and Low Voltage BiCMOS OpAmp Design
Instrumentation Amplifier Design Low Voltage Filters.
UNIT II
BASIC BICMOS CIRCUIT TECHNIQUES, CURRENT MODE SIGNAL

PROCESSING AND NEURAL INFORMATION PROCESSING
9
Continuous Time Signal Processing Sampled Data Signal Processing Switched Current Data
Converters Practical Considerations in SI Circuits, Biologically Inspired Neural Networks Floating
Gate, Low Power Neural Networks MOS Technology and Models, Design Methodology, Networks
Contrast Sensitive Silicon Retina.
UNIT III
SAMPLED DATA ANALOG FILTERS, OVER SAMPLED A/D

CONVERTERS AND ANALOG INTEGRATED SENSORS
9
First Order and Second SC Circuits Bilinear Transformation Cascade Design Switched Capacitor
Ladder Filter Synthesis of Switched Current Filter Nyquist rate A/D Converters Modulators for
Over sampled A/D Conversion First and Second order and Multibit Sigma-Delta Modulators
Interpolative Modulators Cascaded Architecture Decimation Filters Mechanical, Thermal,
Humidity and Magnetic sensors Sensor Interfaces.
UNIT IV
DESIGN FOR TESTABILITY AND ANALOG VLSI INTERCONNECTS
9
Fault modeling and Simulation Testability Analysis Technique Ad Hoc Methods and General
Guidelines Scan Techniques Boundary Scan Builtin Self Test Analog Test Buses Design for
Electron Beam Testability Physics of Interconnects in VLSI Scaling of Interconnects A Model for
Estimating Wiring Density A Configurable Architecture for Prototyping Analog Circuits.
UNIT V
STATISTICAL MODELING AND SIMULATION, MIXED ANALOG
9
DIGITAL LAYOUT
Review of Statistical Concepts Statistical Device Modeling Statistical Circuit Simulation
Automation Analog Circuit Design Automatic Analog Layout CMOS Transistor Layout Resistor
Layout Capacitor Layout Analog Cell Layout Mixed Analog Digital Layout.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOK:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
1.
Malcom R Haskard
Lan C May
Title of the Book

Analog VLSI Design
NMOS and CMOS
Publisher
Prentice Hall
Year of
Publication
1998
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
Mohammed Ismail
Terri Fiez
Analog VLSI signal and

2.
Randall L Geiger
Phillip E Allen
VLSI Design Techniques for

Analog and Digital Circuits
319
Publisher
McGrawHill
International
Editon
McGraw Hill
International
Company
Year of
Publication
1994
1990
ME: VLSI DESIGN
Jose E France
Yannis Tsividis
3.
Design of AnalogDigital
VLSI Circuits for
Telecommunication and
signal Processing
Prentice Hall
1994
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http: //www.springerlink.com/index/tp04g8411488t142.pdf
http: //www.ifi.uio.no/infneuro/Gamle/H2002/.../vlsi/index.html
http: //www. s3.amazonaws.com/zanran_storage/www.ewh.ieee.../1297520372.pdf
http: //www.digitimer.com/pdf/bruxton/DataAcquisition.pdf
http: //www.idc online.com/technical_references/.../rutenbar procieee00.pdf
14LV55
VLSI DEVICE AND PROCESS SIMULATION

3
OBJECTIVES:
To study the basics of simulation tools and to learn the device equation.
To learn the mathematical model behind VLSI Devices.
To learn the analytical model of VLSI devices.
To learn about the Monte Carlo simulation.
To study the different simulation concepts.
OUTCOMES:
formulate mathematical equations for a device.
analyze the device and parameters
design an efficient VLSI device
simulate the designed device using Monte Carlo simulation
simulate the designed device using quantum model and different dimensional simulations.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Overview of MOS device Scaling and CMOS process flow Introduction to device and process
CAD Hierarcy of simulation tools Formulation of device and process equations Ion
implantation.
UNIT II
EQUIVALENT CIRCUIT MODELS AND CARRIER TRANSPORT

EQUATIONS
9
DC, Smal Signal models and Large Signal models Boltzmann transport equation Drift, diffusion
approximation, Classical Semiconductor equations Modeling generation and recombination
Thermal characteristics.
UNIT III
ANALYTICAL DEVICE MODELS AND HOT ELECTRON AND QUANTUM

MODELS
9
Closed form analytical models of semiconductor devices PN junction MOSFET, JFET MESFETs
and HEMTs.
UNIT IV
NUMBER SOLUTION AND MONTE CARLO SIMULATIONS
9
Finite difference method Finite element method Monte Carlo simulation of semiconductor
materials and devices Processing and interpretation of Monte Carlo results Device modeling using
Monte Carlo simulations.
UNIT V
HOT ELECTRON,QUANTUM MODELS AND CASE SIMULATION
STUDIES
9
Semi classical semiconductor equations Ballistic transport, Quantum mechanical effects, One
dimensional, Two dimensional and Three dimensional simulations.
TOTAL: 45
320
ME: VLSI DESIGN
TEXT BOOK:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
1.
Snowden C M
Title of the Book

Introduction to Semiconductor
Device Modeling
Publisher
Year of
Publication
World Scientific
Press, Singapore
1998
REFERENCES:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
1.
Robert W Dutton
Zhiping Yu
2.
Selberherr S
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Technology CAD Computer

Simulation of IC processes and
devices
Kluwer Academic
Publishers
1993
Analysis and Simulation of

Semiconductor devices
Springer
1984
Title of the Book
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http: //www.csee.umbc.edu/~cpatel2/links/315/lectures/chap1_lect00_intro.pdf
http: //www.asianscientist.com/books/wp content/uploads/.../6157_chap01.pdf
http: //www.lle.rochester.edu/media/publications/lle.../87_04_HotElectron.pdf
http: //www.jhuapl.edu/ISSO/PDF txt/MSMC_Intro1_000.ppt
http: //www . ee.eng.buffalo.edu/faculty/mitin/Papers/196.pdf
14LV56
DESIGN OF SEMICONDUCTOR MEMORIES

3
OBJECTIVES:
To study the architectures for SRAM and DRAM.
To know about various non-volatile memories.
To study the fault modelling and testing of memories for fault detection.
To lean the radiation hardening process and issues for memory.
To learn about various packaging technologies.
OUTCOMES:
design random access memories.
design various non volatile memories.
locate the faults in memory and testing the memory.
analyze radiation effects.
learn different packaging technologies.
UNIT I
RANDOM ACCESS MEMORY TECHNOLOGIES
9
Static Random Access Memories (SRAMs) SRAM Cell Structures MOS SRAM Architecture
MOS SRAM Cell and Peripheral Circuit Operation Bipolar SRAM Technologies Silicon On
Insulator (SOl) Technology Advanced SRAM Architectures and Technologies Application Specific
SRAMs Dynamic Random Access Memories (DRAMs) DRAM Technology Development
CMOS DRAMs DRAMs Cell Theory and Advanced Cell Structures ICMOS DRAMs Soft
Error Failures in DRAMs Advanced DRAM Designs and Architecture Application Specific
DRAMs.
UNIT II
NONVOLATILE MEMORIES
9
Masked Read Only Memories (ROMs) High Density ROMs Programmable ROMs Bipolar
PROMs CMOS PROMs Erasable (UV) Programmable EPROMs Floating Gate EPROM Cell
One-time Programmable (OTP) EPROMs Electrically Erasable PROMs (EEPROMs) EEPROM
Technology And Architecture Nonvolatile SRAM Flash Memories (EPROMs or EEPROM)
Advanced Flash Memory Architecture.
321
ME: VLSI DESIGN
UNIT III
MEMORY FAULT MODELING, TESTING, AND MEMORY DESIGN FOR

TESTABILITY AND FAULT TOLERANCE
9
RAM Fault Modeling Electrical Testing Pseudo Random Testing Megabit DRAM Testing
Nonvolatile Memory Modeling and Testing IDDQ Fault Modeling and Testing Application
Specific Memory Testing Advanced BIST and Built in self repair architecture DFT and BIST for
ROMs and Embedded memory Memory fault tolerance designs.
UNIT IV
SEMICONDUCTOR MEMORY RELIABILITY AND RADIATION EFFECTS

9
General Reliability Issues RAM Failure Modes and Mechanism Nonvolatile Memory Reliability
Reliability Modeling and Failure Rate Prediction Design for Reliability Reliability Test Structures
Reliability Screening and Qualification Radiation Effects Single Event Phenomenon (SEP)
Radiation Hardening Techniques Radiation hardening process and Design issues Radiation
Hardened Memory Characteristics Radiation Hardness Assurance and Testing.
UNIT V
ADVANCED MEMORY TECHNOLOGIES AND PACKAGING

TECHNOLOGIES
9
Ferroelectric Random Access Memories(FRAMs) Gallium Arsenide (GaAs) FRAMs Analog
Memories Magneto resistive Random Access Memories (MRAMs) Experimental Memory Devices
Memory Hybrids and MCMs(2D) Memory Stacks and MCMs (3D) Memory MCM Testing and
Reliability Issues Memory Cards High Density Memory Packaging Future Directions.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOK:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
1.
Ashok K Sharma
Year of
Publication
Title of the Book
Publisher
Semiconductor Memories
Technology, Testing, and
Reliability
WileyIEEE
Press
2002
Publisher
Year of
Publication
WileyIEEE Press
2003
Prentice Hall of
India
2013
WileyIEEE Press
2000
Wiley
1999
REFERENCES:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
1.
Ashok K Sharma
2.
Ashok K Sharma
3.
Brent Keeth and

Jacob Baker R
4.
Betty Prince
Title of the Books

Semiconductor Memories,
TwoVolume Set
Semiconductor MemoriesTechnology, Testing, and
Reliability
DRAM Circuit Design A
Tutorial
High Performance MemoriesNew Architecture DRAMs and
SRAMs Evolution and
Function
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
https: //www.courses.cs.washington.edu/courses/cse467/11wi/.../Memories.pdf
https: //www.britannica.com/EBchecked/.../semiconductor memory
https: //www.ece.ucsb.edu/~parhami/pres.../f33 ft computing lec06 testing.ppt
https: //www.coe.montana.edu/ee/rmaher/barnacle_docs/00983199.pdf
https: //www.ptiusa.com/
322
ME: VLSI DESIGN
14LV57
ASIC DESIGN
3
OBJECTIVES:
To study the design flow of different types of ASICs.
To familiarize the programming technologies and FPGAs.
To study the various FPGA interconnects.
To gain knowledge about simulation, synthesis and testing of ASICs.
To learn real time ASICs.
OUTCOMES:
design different types of programmable ASIC.
select FPGA architecture for a particular application
interface ASICs with different I/O devices.
perform simulation, synthesis and testing
design ASICs for real time applications.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO ASICs
9
Types of ASICs Design flow CMOS transistors, CMOS Design rules Combinational Logic
Cell Sequential logic cell Data path logic cell Transistors as Resistors Transistor Parasitic
Capacitance Logical effort Library cell design Library architecture.
UNIT II
PROGRAMMABLE ASICs
9
Anti fuse Static RAM EPROM and EEPROM technology PREP benchmarks Actel ACT
Xilinx LCA Altera FLEX Altera MAX DC and AC inputs and outputs Clock and Power
inputs Xilinx I/O blocks.
UNIT III
INTERCONNECTS AND DESIGN TOOLS
9
Actel ACT Xilinx LCA Xilinx EPLD Altera MAX 5000 and 7000 Altera MAX 9000
Altera FLEX Design systems Logic Synthesis Half gate ASIC Schematic entry Low level
design language PLA tools EDIF CFI design representation.
UNIT IV
LOGIC SYNTHESIS, SIMULATION AND TESTING
9
Verilog and logic synthesis VHDL and logic synthesis Types of simulation Boundary scan test
Fault simulation Automatic test pattern generation.
UNIT V
DESIGN OF ASIC SYSTEMS
9
Application specific standard products(ASSPs) System On chips ASICs Vs ASSPs Viterbi
Decoder High performance ASICs for battery management Controller for an automobile engine
ASICs in industrial Environment ASICs for audio signal processing Transceivers GPS
Receivers.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Smith M J S
Integrated Circuits
Pearson
Education
2008
2.
Farzad Nekoogar
Faranak Nekoogar
From ASICs to SOCs

A Practical Approach
Prentice Hall
2003
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Baskar J
VHDL Primer
Prentice Hall of
India
2005
2.
Wayne Wolf
FPGA Based System

Design
Prentice Hall PTR,
2009
323
ME: VLSI DESIGN
WEB URLs:
1. https: //www .csit sun.pub.ro/resources/asic/CH01.pdf
2. https: //www .vlsi.ee.hacettepe.edu.tr/tutorials/tutorial_yildirim/tutorial.htm
3. https: //www .iroi.seu.edu.cn/books/asics/Book2/CH12/CH12.htm
4. https: //www .dropzone.tamu.edu/~wshi/475/Physical_Design.ppt
14LV58
MEMS AND NEMS

3
OBJECTIVES:
To introduce the concepts of micro electromechanical devices.
To know the fabrication process of Microsystems.
To know the design concepts of micro sensors.
To know the design concepts of micro actuators.
To learn about nanosystem and quantum mechanics.
OUTCOMES:
analyze the MEMS devices.
analyze the MEMS device Fabrication Technologies.
analyze and design MEMS sensors.
analyze and design Micro Actuators.
analyze various Nano structures
UNIT I
OVERVIEW AND INTRODUCTION
9
New trends in Engineering and Science Micro and Nanoscale systems Introduction to Design of
MEMS and NEMS Overview of Nano and Microelectromechanical Systems Applications of
Micro and Nanoelectromechanical systems Microelectromechanical systems Devices and
structures definitions Materials for MEMS Silicon, silicon compounds, polymers, metals
UNIT II
MEMS FABRICATION TECHNOLOGIES
9
Microsystem fabrication processes Photolithography Ion Implantation Diffusion Oxidation.
Thin film depositions LPCVD Sputtering Evaporation Electroplating Etching techniques
Dry and wet etching Electrochemical etching Micromachining Bulk Micromachining Surface
Micromachining, High Aspect Ratio (LIGA and LIGA) Technology.
UNIT III
MICRO SENSORS
9
MEMS Sensors Design of Acoustic wave sensors Resonant sensor Vibratory gyroscope
Capacitive and Piezo Resistive Pressure sensors Engineering mechanics behind Microsensors
Case study Piezo-resistive pressure sensor
UNIT IV
MICRO ACTUATORS
9
Design of Actuators Actuation using thermal forces Actuation using shape memory Alloys
Actuation using piezoelectric crystals Actuation using Electrostatic forces (Parallel plate, Torsion
bar, Comb drive actuators) Micromechanical Motors and pumps. Case study Comb drive actuators
UNIT V
NANOSYSTEMS AND QUANTUM MECHANICS
9
Atomic Structures and Quantum Mechanics Molecular and Nanostructure Dynamics Schrodinger
Equation and Wavefunction Theory Density Functional Theory Nanostructures and Molecular
Dynamics Molecular Wires and Molecular Circuits
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
1
Author(s)
Tai Ran Hsu
Title of the Book

324
Publisher
Tata Mcraw
Hill
Year of
Publication
2002
ME: VLSI DESIGN
Sergey Edward
Lyshevski
MEMS and NEMS Systems,

Devices, and Structures
CRC Press
2002
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Marc Madou
Fundamentals of
Microfabrication
3rd Edition, CRC press
2011
2.
Stephen D Senturia
Micro system Design
Kluwer Academic
Publishers
2001
Chang Liu
Foundations of MEMS
Pearson education India

limited
2006
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
https: //www .cense.iisc.ernet.in/research/mems_nems.htm

https: //www kuytam.ku.edu.tr/MEMS
https: //www mspde.usc.edu/inspiring/resource/sensor/Microsensors.pdf
https: //www.lpa.uni saarland.de/pdf/a2 1.pdf
https: //www.uio.no/studier/emner/matnat/fys/FYS4410/.../nanosystems.pdf
14LV59
SUBMICRON VLSI DESIGN

3
OBJECTIVES:
To introduce the concepts of Silicon realization of ASIC and CMOS devices at deep
submicron level.
To study the issues related to low power design.
To design a circuit with reliability.
To study and apply the deep submicron concepts to design CMOS devices.
To study about CMOS devices.
OUTCOMES:
design a circuit in different levels.
analyze circuit power in different levels.
implement a circuit in different levels.
design a circuit with high reliability.
design a circuit in submicron technologies with less power.
UNIT I
SILICON REALIZATION OF ASIC
9
Introduction Handcrafted layout implementation Bit-slice layout implementation Cell based
layout implementation Gate array layout implementation Hierarchical design approach The
choice of layout implementation form.
UNIT II
LOW POWER DESIGN
9
Sources of CMOS power consumption Technology options for low power Reduction of leakage
Power by technological measures Reduction of dynamic power by technology measure
Reduction of dynamic power by reduced voltage process Design options for low power
Computing power Vs chip power Scaling perspectives.
UNIT III
DESIGN FOR RELIABILITY
9
Introduction Latch up in CMOS circuits Electrostatics discharge and its protection Electro
migration Hot carrier degradation design for signal integrity Clock distribution and critical timing
issues Clock generation and synchronization in different domain on a chip Influence of
interconnection Design organization
325
ME: VLSI DESIGN
UNIT IV
DEEP SUB MICRON
9
RF CMOS Transistor downsizing limitations RF basic blocks layout implementation Submicron
technology and layout dependent effects Input output interfacing Bonding pad, the pad ring,
electrostatic discharge prevention.
UNIT V
CMOS DEVICES
9
Clamp CMOS devices, zener diode Input structure Output structure Pull up- pull down I/O pad,
Power clamp Core/pad limitation I/O Pad description using Ibis Connecting to the package
Signal propagation between integrated circuits.
OTAL: 45
TEXT BOOK:
Sl.No.
1.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Nebel W
Jean P Mermet
Low Power Design in Deep

Submicron Electronics
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Springer
1997
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
1.
2.
Title of the Book
Harry J M Veendrick
Deep Submicron CMOS ICs

From Basics to ASICs
Springer, 2nd
Editon
2000
Low Power Deep SubMicron

CMOS Logic Subthreshold
Current Reduction
Springer
2004
Van Der Meer P R

Arie van Staveren
Arthur H M van
Roermund
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Author(s)
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
https: //www.http: //www.ece.rutgers.edu/332_482

https: //www .hed.cengage.co.in/...design submicron vlsi.../9788131501955
https: //www .asmddc.hanyang.ac.kr/.../SOI CMOS%20Device%20Technology.pdf
https: //www infotech enterprises.com/.../ASIC_Design_Methodology.pdf
https: //www .ftp //arith.stanford.edu/tr/FHR99.pdf
14LV60
VLSI FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION
(Common to M.E Communication Systems and VLSI Design)

3
OBJECTIVES:
To study the design concepts of low noise amplifiers.
To study the various types of mixers designed for wireless communication.
To study and design PLL and VCO.
To understand the concepts and implementation of A/D converters and Sigma-Delta
Modulators in VLSI
To learn about the implementation of Transmitter Architectures and Multitier Wireless
System.
OUTCOMES:
analyze and design low noise amplifiers and power amplifiers used in linear integrated
circuits.
design analog/digital conversion as required for the digital processing of analog signals.
design the phase detectors and oscillators.
design and implement A/D converters and Sigma-Delta Modulators in VLSI
design and implement Transmitter Architectures and Multitier Wireless System.
326
ME: VLSI DESIGN
UNIT I
COMPONENTS AND DEVICES
9
Integrated inductors, resistors, MOSFET and BJT Amplifier design Low Noise Amplifier Design
Wideband LNA Design Narrowband LNA Impedance Matching Automatic Gain Control
Amplifiers Power Amplifiers.
UNIT II
MIXERS
9
Balancing Mixer Qualitative Description of the Gilbert Mixer Conversion Gain Distortion Low
Frequency Case Analysis of Gilbert Mixer Distortion High Frequency Case Noise A
Complete Active Mixer Switching Mixer Distortion in Unbalanced Switching Mixer Conversion
Gain in Unbalanced Switching Mixer Noise in Unbalanced Switching Mixer A Practical
Unbalanced Switching Mixer Sampling Mixer Conversion Gain in Single Ended Sampling Mixer
Distortion in Single Ended Sampling Mixer Intrinsic Noise in Single Ended Sampling Mixer
Extrinsic Noise in Single Ended Sampling Mixer.
UNIT III
FREQUENCY SYNTHESIZERS
9
Phase Locked Loops Voltage Controlled Oscillators Phase Detector Analog Phase Detectors
Digital Phase Detectors Frequency Dividers LC Oscillators Ring Oscillators Phase Noise
A Complete Synthesizer Design Example (DECT Application).
UNIT IV
SUB SYSTEMS
9
Data converters in communications A/D converters Used in a Receiver Wideband Versus
Narrowband A/D Converters Low Pass Sigma- Delta Modulators First Order Modulator, High
Order Modulators Band pass Sigma Delta Modulators Implementation of Low pass and Band pass
Sigma Delta modulators I/Q mismatch in Mixer and A/D Converters Adaptive Filters
Equalizers and transceivers
UNIT V
IMPLEMENTATIONS
9
Transmitter Architectures and Power Amplifier Transmitter Back End Quadrature LO Generator
Single Ended RC, Single Ended LC , R C with Differential Stages Power Amplifier Design PA
Design Issues, Class A Amplifiers, Class AB/B/C VLSI architecture for Multitier Wireless System
Multiuser channel estimation Fixed point implementation Dependence graph Mapping to VLSI
architecture Power savings Hardware Design Issues for a mobile unit for Next generation CDMA
System.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOK:
Sl. No.
1.
Author(s)
Bosco H Leung
Title of the Book

VLSI for Wireless
Communication
Publisher
Springer
Year of
Publication
2011
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
1.
Razavi B
2.
Emad N Farag
Mohamed I Elmasry
3.
Thomas H.Lee
4.
Behzad Razavi
5.
Crols J
Steyaert M
Title of the Book
Publisher
RF Microelectronics
Mixed Signal VLSI
Wireless Design Circuits
and Systems
The Design of CMOS
Radio Frequency
Integrated Circuits
Integrated Circuits
CMOS Wireless
Transceiver Design
Prentice Hall,2nd edition

Kluwer Academic
Publishers
2000
Press
2003
McGraw Hill
1999
Boston, Kluwer
Academic Pub.
1997
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
https: //www .en.wikipedia.org/wiki/VLSI_For_Wireless_Communication

https: //www.eecs.lehigh.edu/~caar/vlsi wireless comm..ps
327
Year of
Publication
2012
ME: VLSI DESIGN
3.
4.
5.
https: //www.worldscientific.com
https: //www.silabs.com
https: //www.ee.iitm.ac.in
14LV61
NANOSCALE DEVICES AND CIRCUIT DESIGN

3
OBJECTIVES:
To learn about leakage current and its reduction techniques in CMOS devices.
To know the scaling and scattering theory of MOSFETs.
To familiarize the low power design and voltage scaling issues in Nano scale devices.
To study about various nanoscale devices.
To design CMOS circuit using non classical devices.
OUTCOMES:
design a device with less leakage current.
scale the device dimension.
design nanoscale devices.
do optimized nanoscale CMOS design
design nanoscale circuits.
UNIT I
CMOS SCALING CHALLENGES IN NANOSCALE REGIMES
9
Leakage current mechanisms in nanoscale CMOS, leakage control and reduction techniques Process
variations in devices and interconnects Device technologies for sub 100nm CMOS Silicidation and
Cu low k interconnects Strain silicon Biaxial stain and process induced strain, Metal, high k gate,
Emerging CMOS technologies at 32nm scale and beyond FINFETs, surround gate nano wire
MOSFETs, hetero Structure (III V) and Si- Ge MOSFETs.
UNIT II
DEVICE SCALING AND BALLISTIC MOSFET
9
Two dimensional scaling theory of single and multigate MOSFETs Generalized scale length,
quantum confinement and tunneling in MOSFTEs Velocity saturation Carrier back scattering and
injection velocity effects Scattering theory of MOSFETs.
UNIT III
EMERGING NANOSCALE DEVICES
9
Si and heterostructure Nanowire MOSFETs Carbon nanotube MOSFETs Quantum wells
Quantum wires and quantum dots Single electron transistors Resonant tunneling devices.
UNIT IV
NANOSCALE CMOS DESIGN
9
CMOS logic power and performance Voltage scaling issues Introduction to low power design
Performance optimization for data paths.
UNIT V
NANOSCALE CIRCUITS
9
Statistical circuit design Variability reduction Design for manufacturing and design optimization
Sequential logic circuits, registers, timing and clock distribution IO circuits and memory design and
trends. Non classical CMOS CMOS circuit design using Non-classical devices FINFETs,
nanowire, carbon nanotubes and tunnel devices.
TOTAL : 45
TEXT BOOK:
Sl.No.
1.
Author(s)
Lundstrom M
Title of the Book

Nanoscale Transport Device
Physics, Modeling, and
Simulation
328
Publisher
Springer
Year of
Publication
2000
ME: VLSI DESIGN
REFERENCES BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Maiti C K
Chattopadhyay S
Bera L K
Strained Si and Hetrostructure

Field Effect Devices
Taylor and
Francis
2007
2.
Hanson G W
Fundamentals of
Nanoelectronics
Pearson, India
2008
Nano CMOS Circuit and

Physical Design
John Wiley &

Sons
2004
EDA for IC Implementation

Circuit Design and Process
Technology
Taylor and
Francis
2005
Wong B P
Mittal A
Cao Y
Starr G
Lavagno L
Scheffer L
Martin G
3.
4.
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
https: //www.ece.umd.edu/~vlg/muri2001%204 10 01.ppt

https: //www smdp2vlsi.gov.in/smdp2vlsi/downloads/PresentationIISC.ppt
https: //www.mes.tu darmstadt.de/media/...systeme/ppt.../lugli_slides.ppt
https: //www videos.dac.com/44th/slides/6_2.ppt
https: //www.eecs.berkeley.edu/Pubs/TechRpts/2008/EECS 2008 20.pdf
14LV62
SIGNAL INTEGRITY FOR HIGH SPEED DEVICES

3
OBJECTIVES:
To learn the fundamental and importance of signal integrity.
To analyze and minimize cross talk in unbounded conductive media.
To study about the different types of Dielectric materials.
To learn about differential cross talk.
To study the CMOS based transmission line model.
OUTCOMES:
analyze the paths of signal integrity.
design a circuit with minimum cross talk during transmission.
design a circuit with better CMRR.
select suitable dielectric materials during fabrication.
UNIT I
FUNDAMENTALS OF SIGNAL INTEGRITY
9
The importance of signal integrity New realm of bus design Electromagnetic fundamentals for
signal integrity Maxwell equations, common vector operators Wave propagations Electrostatics
Magneto statics Power flow and the poynting vector Reflections of electromagnetic waves.
UNIT II
CROSS TALK
9
Introduction Mutual inductance and capacitance Coupled wave equation Coupled line analysis
Modal analysis Cross talk minimization, signal propagation in unbounded conductive media
Classic conductor model for transmission model.
UNIT III
DI-ELECTRIC MATERIALS
9
Polarization of Dielectric Classification of Dielectric material Frequency dependent dielectric
material Classification of Dielectric material, Fiber Weave effect Environmental variation in
dielectric behavior, Transmission line parameters for lossy dielectric and realistic conductors.
UNIT IV
DIFFERENTIAL SIGNALING
9
Removal of common mode noise Differential Cross talk Virtual reference plane Propagation of
model voltages common terminology Drawbacks of differential signaling.
329
ME: VLSI DESIGN
UNIT V
PHYSICAL TRANSMISSION LINE MODEL
9
Introduction Non ideal return paths Vias Input Output design consideration Push-pull
transmitter CMOS receivers ESSD protection circuits On chip Termination.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOK:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Stephen H Hall
Howard L Heck
1.
Title of the Book
Publisher
Advanced Signal Integrity for High

Speed Digital Designs
Year of
Publication
Wiley
2009
REFERENCE BOOK:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
1.
James Edgar
Buchanan
2.
Johnson H W
Graham M
3.
Douglas Brooks
4.
Hall S
Hall G
McCal J
Title of the Book

Signal and power integrity in
digital systems TTL, CMOS, and
BiCMOS
High-Speed Digital Design: A
Handbook of Black Magic
Signal Integrity Issues and Printed
Circuit Board Design
High-Speed Digital System Design:
A Handbook of Interconnect
Theory and Design Practices,.
Publisher
Year of
Publication
McGraw Hill Inc.,

US
1996
Prentice Hall
1993.
Prentice Hall PTR
2003
Wiley Interscience
2000
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
https: //www.tid.uio.no/kurs/fys4260/High_Speed_Course.ppt
https: //www.download.intel.com/education/highered/signal/.../Class01_Introduction.ppt
https: //www.pesona.mmu.edu.my/~wlkung/ADS/HSPCB_EMI/Part5.pdf
https: //www. classes.usc.edu/engr/ee s/680/ irgi.pdf
https: //www.magneticsgroup.com/pdf/p18 25%20Dielectr.pdf
14LV63
ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE AND COMPATIBILITY IN

SYSTEM DESIGN
3
OBJECTIVES:
To learn about the effect of Electro Magnetic Interference(EMI).
To study the principles of EMI standards.
To study the principles of EMI coupling.
To learn different standards and measurement methods for EMI/EMC.
To impart the knowledge of EMI control technique.
OUTCOMES:
analyze the effect of Electro Magnetic Interference.
analyze the EMI coupling.
implement EMI standards.
measure the EMI parameters.
do PCB design for a circuit with less Electro Magnetic Interference.
330
ME: VLSI DESIGN
UNIT I
EMI ENVIRONMENT
9
Architecture Features Resets Memory Organisations Program Memory, Data Memory
Instruction set EMI/EMC concepts and definitions Sources of EMI, conducted and radiated EMI
Transient EMI, Time domain Vs Frequency domain EMI Units of measurement parameters,
Emission and immunity concepts, ESD.
UNIT II
EMI COUPLING PRINCIPLES
9
Conducted, Radiated and Transient Coupling Common Impedance Ground Coupling Radiated
Common Mode and Ground Loop Coupling Radiated Differential Mode Coupling Near Field
Cable to Cable Coupling, Power Mains and Power Supply coupling.
UNIT III
EMI/EMC STANDARDS AND MEASUREMENTS
9
Civilian standards FCC,CISPR,IEC,EN,Military standards MIL STD 461D/462 EMI Test
Instruments /Systems EMI Shielded Chamber Open Area Test Site TEM Cell
Sensors/Injectors/Couplers Test beds for ESD and EFT Military Test Method and Procedures.
UNIT IV
EMI CONTROL TECHNIQUES
9
Shielding,Filtering, Grounding, Bonding Isolation Transformer Transients, Suppressors, Cable
Routing, Signal Control Component Selection and Mounting
UNIT V
EMC DESIGN OF PCBs
9
PCB Traces Cross Talk Impedance Control Power Distribution Decoupling Zoning
Motherboard Design Propagation Delay Performance Models
TOTAL:45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Ott Henry W
Noise Reduction Techniques in

Electronic Systems
John Wiley and

Sons
2009
2.
Paul C R
Introduction to Electromagnetic
Compatibility
John Wiley
Publications
2011
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
IEEE Press, Newyork
2001
Artech House
Dedham
1987
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
1.
Kodali V P
2.
Bernhard Keiser E
Engineering EMC
Principles, Measurements
and Technologies
Principles of
Electromagnetic
Compatibility
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
https: //www.ursi.org/Proceedings/ProcGA05/pdf/EC.3(0567).pdf
https: //www .en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Electromagnetic compatibility
https: //www.eng.auburn.edu/~agrawvd/COURSE/FULL/lec16a.ppt
https: //www .bears.ece.ucsb.edu/class/ece224b/Lecture3mixedtest.ppt
http://www.webbooks.net/freestuff/EMCDesignGuideforPCB.pdf
14LV64
PHYSICAL DESIGN OF VLSI CIRCUITS

3
OBJECTIVES:
To study the layout rules and methodologies in VLSI.
To import the knowledge of placement and partition.
To learn the routing algorithm for VLSI.
331
ME: VLSI DESIGN
To study the issues related to circuit layout.

To gain the knowledge of single layer routing and compaction.
OUTCOMES:
perform partitioning , floorplanning for the circuits.
design a circuit with optimum placement.
route the interconnection for proper output.
design a better performance circuit after knowing the issues related to layout.
design a circuit with optimum area, power and timing.
UNIT I
LAYOUT RULES AND METHODOLOGIES IN VLSI
9
Layout Rules Circuit abstraction, Cell generation using programmable logic array, transistor chaining
Wein Berger arrays and gate matrices Layout of standard cells, gate arrays and sea of gates Field
programmable gate array(FPGA) Layout methodologies Packaging Computational Complexity
Algorithmic Paradigms.
UNIT II
PLACEMENT USING TOPDOWN APPROACH
9
Partitioning Approximation of Hyper Graphs with Graphs Kernighan Lin Heuristic Ratio cut
partition with capacity and I/O constraints Floor planning Rectangular dual floor planning
Hierarchical approach Simulated annealing Floor plan sizing Placement Cost function Force
directed method placement by simulated annealing, partitioning placement Module placement on a
resistive network Regular placement Linear placement.
UNIT III
ROUTING USING TOP DOWN APPROACH
9
Fundamentals Maze Running Line searching Steiner trees Global Routing Sequential
Approaches Hierarchical approaches Multicommodity flow based techniques Randomized
Routing One Step approach Integer Linear Programming Detailed Routing Channel Routing
Switch box routing Routing in FPGA Array based FPGA Row based FPGAs.
UNIT IV
PERFORMANCE ISSUES IN CIRCUIT LAYOUT
9
Delay Models Gate Delay Models Models for interconnected Delay Delay in RC trees Timing
Driven Placement Zero Stack Algorithm Weight based placement Linear Programming Approach
Timing Driving Routing Delay Minimization Click Skew Problem Buffered Clock Trees
Minimization constrained via Minimization unconstrained via Minimization Other issues in
minimization.
UNIT V
SINGLE LAYER ROUTING, CELL GENERATION AND COMPACTION

9
Planar subset problem(PSP) Single Layer Global Routing Single Layer detailed Routing Wire
length and bend minimization technique Over The Cell (OTC) Routing Multiple chip
modules(MCM) Programmable Logic Arrays Transistor chaining Wein Burger Arrays Gate
matrix Layout 1D compaction and 2D compaction.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOK:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
1.
Majid Sarrafzadeh
Wong C K
Title of the Book

An Introduction to VLSI
Physical Design
Publisher
McGraw Hill
International
Edition
Year of
Publication
1996
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
1.
Author(s)
Preas M
Lorenzatti
Title of the Book

Physical Design and
Automation of VLSI systems
332
Publisher
Year of
Publication
The Benjamin
Cummins Publishers
1998
ME: VLSI DESIGN
2.
3.
Ban Wong
Anurag Mittal,
Yu Cao
Greg Starr
Naveed A
Sherwani
4.
Sadiq M Sait
Habib Youssef
5.
Bryan T Preas
Nano CMOS Circuit and

Physical Design
Wiley, John and

Sons, Incorporated
2004
Algorithm for VLSI Physical

Design Automation
VLSI Physical Design
Automation, Theory and
Practice
Kluwer Academic
Publishers
2002
World Scientific
Publishing Company
1999
Michael Lorenzetti
publisher, Benjamin
Cummings Pub. Co.
1998
Physical Design Automation

of VLSI system
WEB URLs:
1. https: //www .citeseer.ist.psu.edu/lienig97physical.html
2. https: //www.cs.virginia.edu/pd_top10/
3. https: //www.facweb.iitkgp.ernet.in/~isg/CAD/.../06 VLSI design styles.pdf
4. https: //www.ti.com/lit/ml/sloa089/sloa089.pdf
5. https: //www.cs.virginia.edu/~robins/papers/fpd_camera.pdf
14LV65
SYSTEM ON CHIP
3
OBJECTIVES:
To learn about the design combinational logic networks.
To learn about the design of sequential logic networks.
To learn optimization of power in combinational and sequential logic machines.
To learn about the VLSI sub system.
To learn various floor-planning methods for system design.
OUTCOMES:
design combinational circuits on SOC.
design sequential circuits on SOC.
design combinational circuits and sequential circuits (system) with optimum power.
design subsystems.
design circuit with better floor planning and routing.
UNIT I
LOGIC GATES
9
Introduction Combinational Logic Functions Static Complementary Gates, Switch Logic,
Alternative Gate Circuits LowPower Gates Delay Through Resistive Interconnect Delay Through
Inductive Interconnect
UNIT II
COMBINATIONAL LOGIC NETWORKS
9
Introduction Standard Cell Based Layout Simulation, Combinational Network Delay Logic and
interconnect Design Power Optimization Switch Logic Networks Combinational Logic Testing.
UNIT III
SEQUENTIAL MACHINES
9
Introduction, Latches and Flip-Flops Sequential Systems and Clocking Disciplines Sequential
System Design Power Optimization Design Validation Sequential Testing
UNIT IV
SUBSYSTEM DESIGN
9
Introduction Subsystem Design Principles Combinational Shifters, Adders, ALUs, Multipliers,
High Density Memory Field Programmable Gate Arrays Programmable Logic Arrays Problems.
UNIT V
FLOORPLANNING
9
Introduction Floor planning Methods Block Placement and Channel Definition Global Routing,
switchbox Routing Power Distribution, Clock Distributions Floor planning Tips Design
Validation Off Chip Connections Packages, I/O Architecture, PAD Design.
TOTAL : 45
333
ME: VLSI DESIGN
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
1.
Wayne Wolf
2.
Rochit Rajsunah
Title of the Book

Modern VLSI Design
IP based Design
System on a chip
Design and Test
Publisher
Prentice Hall, 4th Edition
Artech House
Year of
Publication
2008
2007
REFERENCE BOOK:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
Wayne Wolf
2.
Youn Long Steve Lin
Modern VLSI Design

System on Chip
Design
Essential Issues in
SOC Design:
Designing Complex
Systems-on-Chip
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Prentice Hall, 3rd Edition
2008
Springer
2006
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
https: //www .es.elfak.ni.ac.rs/Files/SoC.ppt

https: //www .ce.sharif.edu/courses/84 85/.../B2 Embedded%20System%20Design.ppt
https: //www .cc.ee.ntu.edu.tw/~ywchang/Courses/PD/EDA_floorplanning.pdf
https: //www.ee.ncu.edu.tw/~jfli/vlsi21/lecture/ch02.pdf
https: www.csit-sun.pub.ro/courses/vlsi/Modern_VLSI_Design.pdf
14LV66
ANALOG AND MIXED MODE VLSI DESIGN

3
0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To study the concepts of MOS large signal model and small signal model.
To impart the knowledge of submicron design.
To understand the concepts of D/A conversion methods and their architectures.
To learn about the SNR in Data converters.
To study about the switched capacitor circuits.
OUTCOMES:
design a circuit considering submicron issues.
design efficient ADCs and DACs.
design filters for ADC and DAC.
design a switched capacitor filter.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION AND BASIC MOS DEVICES
9
Challenges in analog design Mixed signal layout issues MOSFET structures and characteristics of
large signal model Small signal model Single stage Amplifier Source follower Common gate
stage Cascode Stage.
UNIT II
SIBMICRON CIRCUIT DESIGN
9
Submicron CMOS process flow Capacitors and resistors Current mirrors Digital Circuit Design
Delay Elements Adders OP Amp parameters and Design.
UNIT III
DATA CONVERTERS
9
Characteristics of Sample and Hold Digital to Analog Converters Architecture Differential Non
linearity Integral Non linearity Voltage Scaling Cyclic DAC Pipeline DAC Analog to
Digital Converters Architecture Flash ADC Pipeline ADC Differential Non linearity Integral
Non linearity.
334
ME: VLSI DESIGN
UNIT IV
SNR IN DATA CONVERTERS
9
Overview of SNR of Data Converters Clock Jitters Improving SNR using Averaging Decimating
Filters for ADC Band pass and High Pass Sinc Filters Interpolating Filters for DAC.
UNIT V
SWITCHED CAPACITOR CIRCUITS
9
Resistors First order low pass Circuit Switched capacitor Amplifier Switched Capacitor Integrator
circuits.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book

Analog and Mixed Mode
Design
1.
Jeya Gowri
David A Johns
Ken Martin
Analog Integrated Circuit

Design
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Sapna publishing House
2011
John Wiley & Sons,
2002
REFERENCE BOOK:
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Sl.No.
Author(s)
1.
Vineetha P Gejji
Analog and Mixed Mode

Design
Prentice Hall, 1st Edition
2011
2.
Jacob Baker
CMOS: Mixed Signal Circuit

Design
John Wiley and Sons
2008
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
https: //www.et.tu dresden.de/etit/fileadmin/.../SEMICON2010_Talk_Mayr.pdf

https: //www.ece.sunysb.edu/~vsdlab/web/SBU072811_short.ppt
https: //www.ee.ucla.edu/~brweb/teaching/AIC_Ch12.pdf
https: //www elearning.vtu.ac.in/12/enotes/Ana_log_Mix_Mod.../Unit4VPG..pdf
https: //www.csit sun.pub.ro/courses/vlsi/Carte_VLSI/bookch0.pdf
14LV67
RECONFIGURABLE COMPUTING
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the need for reconfigurable computing.
To expose the students to various device architectures.
To examine the various reconfigurable computing systems .
To expose the students to the various placement and routing protocols .
To develop applications with FPGAs .
OUTCOMES:
develop reconfigurable architecture for different applications .
generate bitstream for a given application.
Implement HDL language program in FPGA.
UNIT I
DEVICE ARCHITECTURE
General purpose computing Vs Reconfigurable computing Simple programmable logic devices
Complex programmable logic devices FPGAs Device architecture Case Studies.
UNIT II
RECONFIGURABLE COMPUTING ARCHITECTURES AND SYSTEMS 9
Reconfigurable processing Fabric architectures RPF integration into traditional computing systems
Reconfigurable computing systems Case studies Reconfiguration management.
335
ME: VLSI DESIGN
UNIT III
PROGRAMMING RECONFIGURABLE SYSTEMS
9
Compute Models Programming FPGA Applications in HDL Compiling C for spatial computing
Operating system support for reconfigurable computing.
UNIT IV
MAPPING DESIGNS TO RECONFIGURABLE PLATFORMS
The design flow Technology mapping FPGA placement and routing Configuration bit stream
generation Case studies with appropriate tools.
UNIT V
APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT WITH FPGAS
9
Development of automatic washing machine Automatic vending machine Automatic photo copier
in FPGA System on a programmable chip (SOPC) designs.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOK:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book

Reconfigurable Computing
Accelerating Computation with Field
Programmable Gate Arrays
Maya B Gokhale
Paul S Graham
1.
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Springer
2005
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Scott Hauck
Andre Dehon
(Eds.)
Elsevier /
Morgan
Kaufmann
2008
2.
Christophe Bobda
Reconfigurable Computing The

Theory and Practice of FPGA
Based Computation
Introduction to Reconfigurable
Computing Architectures,
Algorithms and Applications
Springer
2010
Sl.No.
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
https: //www.inst.eecs.berkeley.edu/~cs61c/sp06/.../16.../reconfigurable_computing.ppt
https: //www.seas.upenn.edu/~andre/courses/CS294F98/slides/Day1.ppt
https: //www.ece.lsu.edu/vaidy/raw03/SLIDES/R_Hartenstein.ppt
https: //www.asim.csail.mit.edu/redmine/attachments/.../135/2012 08 LEAP MIT.pdf
https: //www.ece.wisc.edu/~kati/Publications/Compton_ReconfigIntro.pdf
14LV68
ADVANCED EMBEDDED SYSTEMS

3
0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the need for Embedded Hardware.
To expose the students to various embedded architectures.
To examine the various embedded Communication protocols.
To understand different types of embedded tools.
To expose the students to RTOS programming and familiarize with the development
environment.
OUTCOMES:
design for a particular embedded platform
develop embedded applications.
configure the communication protocol based on application.
work with the various embedded tools.
develop RTOS based applications.
336
ME: VLSI DESIGN
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION AND REVIEW OF EMBEDDED HARDWARE
9
Terminology Gates Timing diagram Memory Microprocessor buses Direct memory access
Interrupts Built interrupts Interrupts basis Shared data problems Interrupt latency Embedded
system evolution trends Round Robin Round Robin with interrupt function Rescheduling
architecture algorithm.
UNIT II
EMBEDDED DESIGN LIFE CYCLE
9
Product specification Hardware / Software partitioning Detailed hardware and software design
Integration Product testing Selection Processes Microprocessor Vs Micro Controller
Performance tools Bench marking RTOS Micro Controller Performance tools Bench marking
RTOS availability Tool chain availability Other issues in selection processes.
UNIT III
EMBEDDED COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS
9
Embedded Networking Introduction Serial/Parallel Communication Serial communication
protocols RS232 standard RS485 Synchronous Serial Protocols Serial Peripheral Interface
(SPI) Inter Integrated Circuits (I2C) PC Parallel port programming ISA/PCI Bus protocols
Firewire.
UNIT IV
EMBEDDED TOOLS
9
Embedded Software development tools Host and target machines Linkers / Locators for Embedded
Software Debugging techniques Instruction set simulators Laboratory tools Practical example
Source code.
UNIT V
REAL TIME OPERATING SYSTEM
9
Task and Task states Task and data Semaphore and shared data operating system services
Message queues timing functions Events Memory management Interrupt routines in an RTOS
environment Basic design using RTOS.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Arnold S Berger
Embedded System Design
CMP books, USA
2002
2.
David E Simon
An Embedded Software
Primer
Pearson
Education
2003
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Frank Vahid, Givargis
Embedded Systems Design A

Unified Hardware/Software
Introduction
Wiley
Publications,
Second Edition
2005
Steve Heath
Embedded System Design
Elserien,
Second Edition
2005
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
https: //www.ece.mtu.edu/faculty/shiyan/.../RealTimeEmbeddedSystem.ppt
https: //www.cse.iitb.ac.in/~ramesh/IT 606 ramesh L1.ppt
https: //www segmento.tur.br/hardware and 86297 software ppt
https: //www.philadelphia.edu.jo/academics/.../Introduction%20to%20ES.ppt
https: //www.cse.iitd.ernet.in/~suban/csl373/rtos.ppt
337
ME: VLSI DESIGN
14LV69
(Common to M.E Communication Systems/VLSI Design/Mechatronics)

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To study the concepts of Artificial neural networks.
To Study the concepts of Fuzzy sets and fuzzy rules.
To study various algorithms for Neural networks.
To learn the various neuro fuzzy logic models.
To study the concepts of genetic algorithm and its applications.
OUTCOMES :
identify and select a suitable Soft Computing technology to solve the problem construct a
solution and implement a Soft Computing solution.
integrate the soft computing techniques and tools into both everyday and advanced
applications.
design and analyze supervised learning networks.
design and analyze unsupervised learning networks.
simulate various fuzzy logic algorithms.
UNIT I
9
rules Supervised learning Back propagation networks Training algorithm , Practical
difficulties, Advanced algorithms Adaptive network Radial basis network Modular network
Applications
UNIT II
9
networks Learning vector quantization Hebbian learning Hopfield network Content
addressable nature Binary Hopfield network, Continuous Hopfield network Travelling
Salesperson problem Adaptive resonance theory Bidirectional Associative Memory Principle
component Analysis.
UNIT III
FUZZY SYSTEMS
9
Fuzzy sets Fuzzy rules Extension principle, Fuzzy relation Fuzzy reasoning Fuzzy
inference systems Mamdani model, Sugeno model Tsukamoto model Fuzzy decision
making Multiobjective Decision Making Fuzzy classification Fuzzy control methods
Applications.
UNIT IV
NEURO FUZZY MODELLING
9
Adaptive Neuro Fuzzy based inference systems Classification and regression trees
Decision tress, Cart algorithm Data clustering algorithms K means clustering, Fuzzy C
means clustering, Mountain clustering, Subtractive clustering Rule base structure
identification Neuro fuzzy control Feedback Control Systems, Expert Control, Inverse
Learning, Specialized Learning, Back propagation through Real Time Recurrent Learning.
UNIT V
GENETIC ALGORITHM
9
Fundamentals of genetic algorithm Mathematical foundations Genetic modeling Survival of
the fittest Crossover Inversion and Deletion Mutation Reproduction Generational cycle
Rank method Rank space method Other derivative free optimization Simulated annealing,
Random search, Downhill simplex search Application.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No
1.
Author(s)
Jang J S R
Sun CT
Mizutani E
Title of the Book

computing
338
Publisher
Pearson education
(Singapore)
Year of
Publication
2009
ME: VLSI DESIGN
2.
David E Goldberg
Genetic Algorithms in
Search, Optimization, and
Machine Learning
Pearson Education
2002
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No
Author(s)
1.
Laurene Fauseett
2.
Timothy J Ross
Rajasekaran S
Vijayalakshmi
Pai G A
George J Klir
Bo Yuan
Deepa S N
Sivanandham S N
3.
4.
5.
Title of the Book

Networks
Fuzzy Logic with
Neural networks,Fuzzy
logics,and Genetic
algorithms
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Pearson Education
2010
2011
2003
Fuzzy Sets and Fuzzy Logic
Prentice Hall Inc., New

Jersey
1995
Principles of Soft
Computing
2012
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
https: //www.doc.ic.ac.uk/~nd/surprise_96/journal/vol4/cs11/report.html
https: //www.cs.stir.ac.uk/~lss/NNIntro/InvSlides.html
https: //www.willamette.edu/~gorr/classes/cs449/intro.html
https: //www.fuzzysys.com
https: //www.engr.wisc.edu/ece/courses/ece539.html
14LV70
RISC PROCESSOR ARCHITECTURE AND PROGRAMMING

3
0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the architecture of AVR Microcontroller.
To get exposure to various Peripherals with the AVR architectures.
To understand the architecture of ARM Microcontroller.
To get exposure to various application development using the ARM architectures.
To understand different types of design models for ARM architectures.
OUTCOMES:
program AVR microcontroller for a given design.
program ARM Microcontroller for a given design.
interface with AVR microcontroller and ARM Microcontroller.
develop ARM based on applications.
develop AVR based on applications.
UNIT I
AVR MICROCONTROLLER ARCHITECTURE
9
Architecture memory organization addressing modes instruction set programming techniques
Assembly language and C programming Development Tools Cross Compilers Hardware Design
Issues.
UNIT II
PERIPHERAL OF AVR MICROCONTROLLER
I/O Memory EEPROM I/O Ports SRAM Timer UART Interrupt Structure
Communication with PC ADC/DAC Interfacing .
9
Serial
UNIT III
ARM ARCHITECTURE AND PROGRAMMING
9
Arcon RISC Machine Architectural Inheritance Core and Architectures Registers Pipeline
Interrupts ARM organization ARM processor family Co-processors, Instruction set Thumb
instruction set Instruction cycle timings The ARM Programmers model ARM Development tools
ARM Assembly Language Programming and C compiler programming.
339
ME: VLSI DESIGN
UNIT IV
ARM APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT
9
Introduction to DSP and ARM FIR Filter IIR Filter Discrete Fourier transform Exception
Handling Interrupts Interrupt handling schemes Firmware and bootloader Example
Standalone Embedded Operating Systems Fundamental Components Example Simple little
Operating System.
UNIT V
DESIGN WITH ARM MICROCONTROLLERS
9
Integrated development environment Standard I/O Libraries User Peripheral Devices Application
of ARM processors Wireless Sensor Networks Robotics.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Steve Furber
ARM system on chip

architecture
Addison
Wesley
2000
2.
Andrew N Sloss
Dominic Symes
Chris Wright
John Rayfield
ARM System Developers

Guide Designing and Optimizing
System Software
Elsevier
2007
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Trevor Martin
Title of the Book
Publisher
The Insider's Guide To The

Philips ARM7 Based
Microcontrollers, An Engineer's
Introduction To The LPC2100
Series
Hitex (UK) Ltd
ARM Architecture Reference Manual
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http: //www.cs.sjsu.edu/.../Sherwin%20Chan%20 %20RISC%20Architecture.ppt

http: //www.eng.auburn.edu/~agrawvd/COURSE/E6200.../armcores.ppt
http: //www.freescale.com/files/training.../WBNR_KINETISOVERVIEW.pdf
http: //www.eng.auburn.edu/~nelson/courses/elec5260.../ARM_AssyLang.pdf
http: //www.atmel.com/Images/doc32099.pdf
340
BE: ELECTRONICS AND TELECOMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
TOTAL CREDITS: 186

SEMESTER I
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Credits
Maximum Marks
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
10O101
3.5
50
50
100
10G102
Applied Physics
50
50
100
10G103
Applied Chemistry
50
50
100
10O104
Technical English
3.5
50
50
100
10T105
Electric Circuits
3.5
50
50
100
10T106

Engineering
50
50
100
PRACTICAL
10G111
Physics Laboratory
1.5
50
50
100
10G112
Chemistry Laboratory
1.5
50
50
100
10T113
1.5
50
50
100
10G114
1.5
50
50
100
19
12
26.5
TOTAL
SEMESTER II
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Credits
Maximum Marks
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
10O201
10G202
10G203
10O204
10G205
10T206

Series
Material Science
Engineering
Communication Skills
Problem Solving and C
Programming
Electron Devices
3.5
50
50
100
50
50
100
50
50
100
50
50
100
50
50
100
3.5
50
50
100
PRACTICAL
10G211
2.5
50
50
100
10T212
1.5
50
50
100
10G213
Programming Laboratory
1.5
50
50
100
19
24.5
TOTAL
341
SEMESTER III
Course
Code
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Course Title
Credits
Maximum Marks
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
3
3.5
50
50
100
50
50
100
10T303

Analysis
Electromechanical Energy
Conversion
Data Structures and Algorithms
50
50
100
10T304
Pulse and Digital Electronics
3.5
50
50
100
10T305
Analog Electronics-I
3.5
50
50
100
3.5
50
50
100
1.5
50
50
100
1.5
50
50
100
1.5
50
50
100
18
24.5
10O301
10T302
10T306
PRACTICAL
10T311
10T312
10T313
Pulse and Digital Electronics

Laboratory
Analog Electronics-I Laboratory
Data Structures and Algorithms
Laboratory
TOTAL
SEMESTER IV
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Credits
Maximum Marks
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
10T401
3.5
50
50
100
3.5
50
50
100
10T403
Analog Electronics-II
Microprocessors and Micro
controllers
Signals and Systems
3.5
50
50
100
10T404
3.5
50
50
100
10T405
Electro Magnetic Fields
3.5
50
50
100
10T406
Electronic Instrumentation
50
50
100
1.5
50
50
100
1.5
50
50
100
1.5
50
50
100
18
25
10T402
PRACTICAL
10T411
10T412
10T413
Analog Electronics-II
Laboratory
Matlab and its applications
Laboratory
Communication System
laboratory
TOTAL

342
SEMESTER V
Course
Code
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Course Title
Credits
Maximum Marks
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
10T501
10T502
10T503
10T504
10T505
10T506

Design
Engineering
Tele Communications switching
Techniques
Control Systems
Waveguides
50
50
100
3.5
50
50
100
3.5
50
50
100
50
50
100
3.5
50
50
100
50
50
100
1.5
50
50
100
1.5
50
50
100
1.5
50
50
100
18
24
PRACTICAL
10G511
10T512
10T513
Communication Skills and

Personality Development
controllers Laboratory
Laboratory
TOTAL
SEMESTER VI
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Credits
Maximum Marks
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
10O601
10T602
10T603
10T604
10T605
10T606

Engineering Ethics
Computer Network and Data
Communication
Data Compression Techniques
Radio Frequency and
50
50
100
3.5
50
50
100
50
50
100
3.5
50
50
100
3.5
50
50
100
50
50
100
1.5
50
50
100
1.5
50
50
100
18
22.5
PRACTICAL
10T611
10T612
10T613
Presentation Skills and

Technical Seminars
Digital Communication and
Design Laboratory
TOTAL

343
SEMESTER VII
Course
Code
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Course Title
Credits
Maximum Marks
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
10T701
10TXXX

Cellular and Mobile
Communication
Satellite and Space
Communication
Elective I
10TXXX
Elective II
10T702
10T703
10T704
3.5
50
50
100
3.5
50
50
100
50
50
100
50
50
100
50
50
100
50
50
100
PRACTICAL
10T711
1.5
50
50
100
1.5
50
50
100
10T721

Laboratory
Comprehension
10T751
Project Work preliminaries
1.5
100
100
18
23.5
10T712
TOTAL
SEMESTER VIII
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Credits
Maximum Marks
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
10T801
Wireless Networks
3.5
50
50
100
10TXXX
Elective III
50
50
100
10TXXX
Elective IV
50
50
100
12
100
100
200
12
15.5
PRACTICAL
10T851
Project Work
TOTAL

344
LIST OF ELECTIVES
Course Code
Course Title
10T001
Medical Electronics
10T002
Bluetooth Technology
10T003
Bioelectronics and Biosensors
10T004
10T005
Nanoelectronics
10T006
Broadband Communication
10T007
High Speed Networks
10T008
Embedded Systems
10T009
RF Circuit Design
10T010
Cognitive Radio
10T011
10T012
Optoelectronic Devices
10T013
10T014
Adaptive Signal Processing
10T015
Remote Sensing
10T016
Network Security
10T017
Microwave Integrated Circuits Design
10T018
Secure Communication
10T019
345
SEMESTER VII
10T701

3
3.5
UNIT I
9
Radar system Simple form of radar equation Radar block diagram Radar frequencies Applications
of radar Detection of signals in noise Receiver noise and the signal-to-noise ratio Probabilities of
detection and false alarm Integration of radar pulses Transmitter power Pulse repetition frequency
Antenna parameters System losses.
UNIT II
CW AND FREQUENCY MODULATED RADAR
9
Doppler Effect CW radar Simple CW radar Intermediate frequency CW radar Frequency
modulated CW radar Frequency modulated CW altimeter Multiple frequency CW radar
Airborne doppler navigation.
UNIT III
9
Induction to doppler and MTI radar Delay lines and cancellers Blind speed Multiple and staggered
pulse repetition frequencies Limitations to MTI performance Non Coherent MTI Pulse doppler
radar Pulse doppler spectrum Basic configuration Pulse doppler clutter Types of pulse doppler
clutter.
UNIT IV
INTRODUCTION TO RADIO NAVIGATION
9
Introduction Four methods of navigation Radio direction finding The loop antenna Loop input
circuits An aural null direction finder The Goniometer Errors in direction finding Adcoh direction
finders Direction finding at Very High Frequencies Automatic direction finders The commutated
aerial direction finder Range and accuracy of direction finders Hyperbolic systems of navigation.
UNIT V
NAVIGATIONAL AIDS
9
Distance measuring equipment DME indicator DME interrogator Enhanced DME Scanning DME
DME ground station TACAN TACAN equipment aids to approach and landing Instrument landing
system (ILS) Instrument landing system errors Microwave Landing System (MLS) Comparison of
ILS and MLS Satellite navigation Basic satellite theory Global positioning system Differential
GPS GLONASS Galileo.
TOTAL: 45 +15
TEXTBOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Albert Helfrick
Principles of Avionics
Avionics Communication INC
2012
2.
Merrill I Skolnik
Systems
Tata McGraw-Hill
2003
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Peyton Z Peebles
Radar Principles
John Wiley
2004
2.
Toomay J C
Principles of Radar
2004
346
3.
Navigation
Nagaraja N S
Tata McGraw-Hill
2001
WEB URLs:
1. http://radionavlab.ae.utexas.edu/
2. http://www.marelmar.com/html/radar_nav.html
3. http://www.allstar.fiu.edu/aero/NAVAIDS.html
4. http://www.ee.fju.edu.tw/pages/032_faculty/sclin/lecture/Rada_System_Design/Chapter14.pdf
5. http:// www.bunkerofdoom.com
10L702/10T702
CELLULAR AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION
(Common to ECE/ETE)
vide Electronics and Communication Engineering
10L703/10T703
OPTICAL COMMUNICATION
(Common to ECE/ETE)
10T704
SATELLITE AND SPACE COMMUNICATION

3
UNIT I
SATELLITE ORBIT
9
Satellite orbits: Keplers laws Earth orbiting satellite terms Orbital elements Orbital perturbations
Inclined Orbits Sun synchronous orbit Constellation: Geo stationary satellites Non geostationary
constellation Launching of Geostationary satellites.
UNIT II
LINK DESIGN
9
EIRP Transmission losses Power budget equation System noise Carrier to noise ratio Uplink
Downlink Effects of rain Inter modulation Noise.
UNIT III
SPACE AND EARTH SEGMENT
9
Space segment: Power supply Altitude control Station keeping Thermal Control TT&C
Subsystems Antenna subsystem Transponders Wideband receiver Earth segment: receive only home
TV system Community antenna TV system.
UNIT IV
SATELLITE ACCESS
9
Single access Pre assigned FDMA Demand assigned FDMA SPADE system TWT amplifier
operation Downlink analysis TDMA Reference bursts Preamble Postamble Carrier recovery
Network synchronization Pre assigned TDMA Assigned CDMA introduction.
UNIT V
BROADCAST AND SERVICES
9
Broadcast: DBS Orbital spacing Power ratings Frequency and polarization Transponder capacity
Bit rate MPEG Forward error correction ODU IDU Downlink analysis Uplink Satellite mobile
services: VSAT GPS.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
1.
Author(s)
Dennis Roddy
Title of the Book

Satellite Communications
347
Publisher
McGraw Hill
Publications
Year of
Publication
2009
2.
Richaria M
Systems Design Principles
Pearson Publications
1999
3.
Raja Rao K N
Fundamental of Satellite
Communication
2006
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
WilburL Prichard
Henry G Suyerhood
Ropert A Nelson
Pratt
Timothy
Charles W Bostian
Satellite
Communication
System Engineering
Pearson education
1993
Satellite
Communication

New York
2003
3.
Dharma Raj Cheruku
4.
Bruce R Elbert
Satellite
Communication
Introduction to
Satellite
Communication
1.
2.
I.K.International
Publishing House Pvt.
Ltd
2009
Artech House Inc,

USA
2008
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.arrl.org/space-communiction.com
http://www.radio-electronics.com
http://www.intelsat.com
http://www.comsoc.org
http://www.rohde-schwarz.com
10T711

0
1.5
1. PC to PC communication
2. Parallel communication using 8 bit parallel cable
3. Serial communication using RS 232C
4. Ethernet LAN protocol
5. To create scenario and study the performance of CSMA/CD protocol ethernet simulation
6. Token bus and token ring protocols
7. To create scenario and study the performance of token bus and token ring protocols through
simulation
8. Wireless LAN protocols
9. To create scenario and study the performance of network with CSMA / CA protocol and
compare with CSMA/CD protocols.
10. Implementation and study of stop and wait protocol
11. Implementation and study of Go back-N and selective repeat protocols
12. Implementation of distance vector routing algorithm
13. Implementation of link state routing algorithm
14. Implementation of data encryption and decryption
15. Transfer of files from PC to PC using windows / UNIX socket processing
348
10L712/10T712
OPTICAL AND MICROWAVE LABORATORY
(Common to ECE/ETE)
10A721/10M721/10C721/10L721/10T721/10E721/10N721/10P721/10F721
COMPREHENSION
(Common to AUTO/MECH/CIVIL/ECE/ETE/EEE/EIE/CSE/IT)
10A751/10M751/10C751/10L751/10T751/10E751/10N751/10P751/10F751
PROJECT WORK PRELIMINARIES
SEMESTER VIII
10T801
WIRELESS NETWORKS
3
3.5
UNIT I
9
Wired transmission techniques: Design of wireless modems power efficiency out of band radiation
Applied wireless transmission techniques Short distance base band transmission UWB pulse
transmission Broad Modems for higher speeds Diversity and smart receiving techniques Random
access for data oriented networks Integration of voice and data traffic.
UNIT II
9
Wireless networks topologies Cellular topology Cell fundamentals Signal to interference ratio
calculation Capacity expansion techniques Cell splitting Use of directional antennas for cell
sectoring Micro cell method Overload cells Channels allocation techniques and capacity expansion.
UNIT III
WIRELESS WAN
9
Mechanism to support a mobile environment Communication in the infrastructure IS-95 CDMA
forward channel IS-95 CDMA reverse channel Packet and frame formats in IS-95 IMT-2000
Forward channel in W-CDMA and CDMA 2000 Reverse channels in W-CDMA and CDMA-2000
GPRS and higher data rates Short messaging service in GPRS mobile application protocols.
UNIT IV
SECURITY
9
Security policies for wireless networks Defining the SSID Encryption and authentication: WEP
TKIP EAP and radius.
UNIT V
9
IEEE 802.15 WPAN Home RF Bluetooth Interface between bluetooth and 802.11 Wireless
geolocation Technologies for wireless geolocation Geolocation standards for E.911 service
Configuring a Wi-Fi access point Configuring a Wi-Fi card in a laptop Case studies.
TOTAL: 45+15
349
TEXT BOOKS:
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publishing
Sl.No.
Author(s)
1.
Kaveh Pahlavan
Prashant Krishnamoorthy
Networks- A united
approach
Pearson Education
2.
Mathew S Gast
Shroff Publisher &

Distributors
2006
3.
Siva Ram Murthy C
Pearson Education
2004
2009
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
Jochen Schiller
2.
Wang X
Poor H V
3.
Mallick M
Systems
essentials
4.
Nicopolitidis P
Obaidat M S
Papadimitria G I
Pomportsis A S
Wireless Networks
Publisher
Year of
Publishing
Pearson Education
2003
Pearson Education
2004
Wiley Publishing In
2003
John Wiley & Sons
2003
WEB URLs:
3. http://documentation.netgear.com/reference/fra/wireless/WirelessNetworkingBasics-3-09.html
4. http://www.techhive.com/article/192803/geolo.html
5. http://www.networkcomputing.com/netdesign/wireless1.html
10A851/10M851/10C851/10L851/10T851/10E851/10N851/10P851/10F851
PROJECT WORK
350
ELECTIVES
10T001
MEDICAL ELECTRONICS
3
UNIT I
9
The origin of Biopotentials Biopotential electrodes Biological amplifiers ECG EEG EMG PCG
EOG Lead systems Recording methods Typical waveforms Signal characteristics.
UNIT II
PH PO2 PCO2 PHCO3 Electrophoresis Colorimeter Photometer Auto analyzer Blood flow
counters.
UNIT III
9
Cardiac pacemakers DC defibrillator Telemetry principles Frequency selection Bio-telemetry
Radio Pill Tele-stimulation.
UNIT IV
9
Ionizing radiation Diagnostic X-ray equipments Use of Radio isotope in diagnosis Radiation therapy.
UNIT V
9
equipment.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
1.
2.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Leislie Cromwell
and measurement
2007
Khandpur R S
Instrumentation
Tata McGraw-Hill
2003
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Joseph J Carr
John M Brown
Prentice Hall
2004
2.
John G webster
John Willey
2004
WEB URLs:
1. http://www.wisegeek.com/what-are-the-different-types-of-radiology-equipment.html
2. http://www.arrownac.com/services-tools/design/whitepapers/ti_trends_in_med_devices.pdf
3. http://mx.nthu.edu.tw/~yucsu/3271/p07.pdf
4. http://www.nc3rs.org.uk/category.asp?catID=37
351
10T002
BLUETOOTH TECHNOLOGY
3
UNIT I
THE BLUETOOTH MODULE
8
Introduction Overview The bluetooth module Antennas Base band Introduction to bluetooth
device address Masters, slaves, and pico nets System timing Physical links Bluetooth packet
structure Logical channels Frequency hopping.
UNIT II
THE LINK CONTROLLER
10
The link controller Link control protocol Link controller operation Pico net, scatter net operation
Master/Slave role switching Base band/Link controller architectural overview Link manager The host
controller interface.
UNIT III
THE BLUETOOTH HOST
10
The bluetooth host Logical link control and adaptation protocol RFCOMM The service discovery
protocol The wireless access protocol OBEX and IrDA telephony control protocol.
UNIT IV
CROSS LAYER FUNCTIONS
8
Cross layer functions Encryption and security Low power operations Controlling low power modes
Hold mode Sniff mode Park mode Quality of service Managing bluetooth devices.
UNIT V
ZIGBEE NETOWRKS
9
Zigbee communication basics Zigbee network layers and their functions Zigbee MAC series MAC
frame format Transceiver building block Receiver sensitivity 2.4 GHz and 868/915 MHz operation
FCC regulations Applications Home automation Healthcare Industrial automation.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOK:
SI.NO
1.
Author(s)
Jennifer Bray
Charles F Sturman
Title of the Book

Bluetooth: Connect
Without Cables
Publisher
Pearson
Education
Year of
Publication
2002
REFERENCE BOOKS:
SI.NO
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Jennifer Bray
Brain Senese
Gordon McNutt
Bill Munday
Bluetooth
Application Developers Guide
Syngress Media
2001
2.
Micheal Mille
Discovering Bluetooth
Sybex
Incorporation
2001
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.techradar.com
http://www.askville.amazon.com/Bluetooth-technology
http://www.mashable.com
http://www.msdn.microsoft.com
http://www.swedetrack.com
352
10T003
BIOELECTRONICS AND BIOSENSORS

3
UNIT I
BIOMEDICAL SIGNALS
9
Nature of Biomedical signals Types Action potential Electrocardiogram (ECG) Electromyogram
(EMG) Electroencephalogram (EEG) Electroneurogram (ENG) Event related potentials
Electrogastrogram (EGG) Phonocardiogram (PCG) Speech signals.
UNIT II
SENSORS, TRANSDUCERS AND AMPLIFIERS
9
Resistive Capacitive Inductive Piezoelectric Thermocouple Thermistors Fiber Optic Sensors
Radiation sensors Smart sensors Electro chemical sensors Electrical fibrosensors Blood-Glucose
sensors Operational amplifiers Inverting Non inverting Differential Instrumentation amplifiers
Pre amplifiers Isolation amplifiers Active filters.
UNIT III
ANALYSIS OF NON STATIONARY SIGNALS AND PATTERN

CLASSIFICATION
9
Characterization of non-stationary signals and dynamic systems Fixed segmentation Adaptive
segmentation Supervised Unsupervised pattern classification Probabilistic models and statistical
decision Regression analysis EEG rhythms and waves.
UNIT IV
MODELING BIOMEDICAL SYSTEMS
9
Parametric system modeling Autoregressive or All-pole modeling Pole-zero modeling
Electromechanical models of signal generation Application Heart rate variability Spectral modeling
and analysis of ECG signals.
UNIT V
COMPRESSION OF DIGITAL BIOMEDICAL SIGNALS
9
Fourier Transform and time frequency analysis (Wavelet) of biomedical signals Processing of random
and stochastic signals Spectral estimation Properties and effects of noise in biomedical instruments
Filtering in biomedical instruments Direct digital compression techniques Transformation compression
techniques.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
S. No.
Author(s)
1.
Reddy D C
2.
John G Webster
3.
Rangayyan
Title of the Book

Biomedical Signal
Processing, Principles and
Techniques
Biomedical Signal
Analysis
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Tata McGraw-Hill
2005
John Wiley & Sons
2001
Wiley
2002
REFERENCES BOOKS:
S. No.
Author(s)
1.
Rangaraj M
Rangayyan
2.
Joseph D Bronzino
3.
Kenneth E Banner
Gonzalo R Arce
4.
Khandpur R S
Title of the Book

Biomedical Signal
Analysis
The Biomedical
Engineering Handbook
Nonlinear Signal & Image
Processing Theory
methods & Applications
Instrumentation
353
Publisher
A case study
Approach, IEEE
Press
CRC Press, IEEE
Press
Year of
Publication
2002
2000
CRC Press, New

York
2003
Tata McGraw Hill,

New Delhi
2003
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.nanobiosensors.org
http:// www.see.ed.ac.uk
http:// www.diva-portal.org
http:// www.gwent.org
http://www.ornl.gov
10T004
ADVANCED MICROPROCESSORS
3
UNIT I
ADVANCED MICROPROCESSOR ARCHITECTURE
9
Internal microprocessor architecture-8486 Real mode memory addressing Protected mode memory
addressing Memory paging Data addressing modes Program memory addressing modes Stack
memory addressing modes Data movement instructions Program control instructions Arithmetic and
logic instructions.
UNIT II
MODULAR PROGRAMMING AND ITS CONCEPTS
9
Modular programming Using keyboard and video display Data conversions Disk files Interrupt
hooks using assembly languages with C/ C++.
UNIT III
PENTIUM PROCESSORS
9
Introduction to pentium microprocessor Special pentium registers Pentium memory management
New pentium instructions Pentium processor Special pentium pro features Pentium 4 processor.
UNIT-IV
16-BIT MICRO CONTROLLER
9
8096/8097 architecture CPU registers RALU Internal program and Data memory timers High speed
input and output Serial interface I/O ports Interrupts A/D converter Watch dog timer Power
down feature Instruction set External memory interfacing External I/O interfacing.
UNIT V
RISC PROCESSORS AND ARM
9
The RISC revolution Characteristics of RISC Architecture The Berkeley RISC Register windows
Windows and parameter passing Window overflow RISC architecture and pipelining Pipeline
bubbles Accessing external memory in RISC systems Reducing the branch penalties Branch
prediction The ARM processors ARM registers ARM instructions The ARM built-in shift
mechanism ARM branch instructions Sequence control Data movement and memory reference
instructions ARM9.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
Barry B Brey
The Intel Microprocessors

8086/8088, 80, 86, 80286,
80386 80486, Pentium,
Pentium Pro Processor,
Pentium II, Pentium III,
Pentium 4, Architecture,
Programming and interfacing
2.
John Peatman
Design with Microcontroller
354
Publisher
Year of
Publication

Private Limited, New
Delhi
2008
McGraw Hill
Publishing Co Ltd,
New Delhi
2004
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
1.
Rajkamal
2.
Alan Clements
Title of the Book

The concepts and feature of
micro controllers 68HC11,
8051 and 8096
The principles of computer
Hardware
Year of
Publication
Publisher
S Chand Publishers,
New Delhi
2004
Oxford University
Press
2003
WEB URLs:
1. http:// www.futureelectronics.com/en/microcontrollers/16-bit-microcontroller.aspx
2. http://www.owlnet.rice.edu/~elec525
3. http://www.eastaughs.fsnet.co.uk/cpu/index.html
4. http://arstechnica.com/features/2004/07/pentium-1/
5. http://www.engineersgarage.com/articles/arm-advanced-risc-machines-processors
10T005
NANOELECTRONICS
3
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO NANOTECHNOLOGY
9
Background to nanotechnology: Types of nanotechnology and nanomachines Periodic table Atomic
structure Molecules and phases Energy Molecular and atomic size Surface and dimensional space
Top down and bottom up Molecular nanotechnology: Electron microscope Scanning electron
microscope Atomic force microscope Scanning tunnelling microscope Nanomanipulator
nanotweezers Atom manipulation Nanodots Self assembly Dip pen nanolithography
Nanomaterials: Preparation Plasma arcing Chemical vapor deposition Sol-gels Electrodeposition
Ball milling Applications of nanomaterials.
UNIT II
FUNDAMENTALS OF NANOELECTRONICS
9
Fundamentals of logic devices: Requirements Dynamic properties Threshold gates Physical limits to
computations Concepts of logic devices: Classifications Two terminal devices Field effect devices
Coulomb blockade devices Spintronics Quantum cellular automata Quantum computing DNA
computer Performance of information processing systems: Basic binary operations Measure of
performance processing 48 capability of biological neurons Performance estimation for the human
brain Ultimate computation Power dissipation limit Dissipation in reversible computation The
ultimate computer.
UNIT III
SILICON MOSFETS AND QUANTUM TRANSPORT DEVICES
9
Silicon MOSFETS Novel materials and alternate concepts: Fundamentals of MOSFET devices Scaling
rules Silicon-dioxide based gate dielectrics Metal gates Junctions and contacts Advanced MOSFET
concepts Quantum transport devices based on resonant tunneling Electron tunneling Resonant
tunneling diodes Resonant tunneling devices Single electron devices for logic applications Single
electron devices Applications of single electron devices to logic circuits.
UNIT IV
CARBON NANOTUBES
9
Carbon Nanotube: Fullerenes Types of nanotubes Formation of nanotubes Assemblies Purification
of carbon nanotubes Electronic properties Synthesis of carbon nanotubes Carbon nanotube
interconnects Carbon nanotube FETs Nanotube for memory applications Prospects of all carbon
nanotube nanoelectronics.
UNIT V
MOLECULAR ELECTRONICS
9
Electrodes and contacts Functions Molecular electronic devices First test systems Simulation and
circuit design Fabrication Future applications: MEMS Robots Random access memory Mass
storage devices.
TOTAL: 45
355
TEXT BOOK:
SI.NO
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Michael Wilson
Kamali Kannangara
Geoff Smith
Michelle Simmons Burkhard
Raguse
Nanotechnology: Basic
Science and Emerging
Technologies
Chapman
and Hall /
CRC
2002
REFERENCE BOOKS:
SI.NO
Author(s)
Pradeep T
Rainer Waser
Title of the Book

NANO: The Essentials
Understanding Nanoscience and
Nanotechnology
Nanoelectronics and Information
Technology: Advanced
Electronic Materials and Novel
Devices
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Tata Mc-Graw Hill
2007
VCH
2003
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.nano.iisc.ernet.in/inup
http://www.egr.msu.edu
http:// www.cense.iisc.ernet.in/research/nanoelectronics
http://www.src.org/program/nri
http://www.neno-tech-views.com
10T006
BROADBAND COMMUNICATION
3
UNIT I
ISDN
9
Switching techniques Principles of ISDN Architecture ISDN standards I-series recommendations
Transmission structure User network interface ISDN protocol architecture ISDN connections
Addressing Interworking.
UNIT II
B-ISDN ARCHITECTURE AND STANDARDS, B-ISDN SERVICES
B-ISDN Standards Broadband services B-ISDN architecture B-ISDN protocol reference model
B-ISDN physical layer SONET/SDH SONET Requirement.
UNIT III
FRAME RELAY
9
Frame relay protocols and services Background Frame-mode protocol architecture Frame-mode call
control Frame relay congestion control Congestion in frame relay network Approach to congestion
control Traffic rate management Explicit congestion avoidance Implicit congestion control.
UNIT IV
ATM OVERVIEW, VIRTUAL CHANNELS
9
Virtual paths VP and VC switching ATM cells Header format Generic flow control Header
error control Transmission of ATM cells Adaptation layer AAL services and protocols
Requirements for ATM traffic and congestion control Cell-Delay variation ATM service categories.
UNIT V
ATM SWITCHING, TRAFFIC AND CONGESTION CONTROL
9
ATM switching building blocks ATM cell processing in a switch Matrix type switch, input,output
buffering Central buffering Performance aspects of buffering switching networks Traffic and
congestion control framework Traffic control Congestion control.
TOTAL: 45
356
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Erwin Kreyszig
ISDN and Broadband ISDN

with Frame Relay and ATM
William Satllings
PHI pub
2009
2.
Cajetan M
Akujuobi
Matthew N O
Sadiku
Introduction to Broadband
Taylor & Francis
2008
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Balajikumar
Broadband Communications
Mac-Graw Hill
1998
2.
Danny H K
Tsang
Paul J Khn
Broadband Communications:
Convergence of Network
Technologies
Kulwer Academic
Publisher
2000
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.slideshare.net/adeeb 550/broadband-communication
http://www.cortina-system.com
http://www.webopedia.com/term/B/broadband.html
http://www.sandvine.com
http:// www.hughesnetbroadband.in
10T007
HIGH SPEED NETWORKS

3
UNIT I
HIGH SPEED NETWORKS
9
Frame relay networks Asynchronous transfer mode ATM protocol architecture ATM logical
connection ATM cell ATM service categories AAL High speed LANs Fast ethernet Gigabit
ethernet Fiber channel Wireless LANs Applications Requirements Architecture of 802.11
UNIT II
CONGESTION AND TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT
9
Queuing analysis Queuing models Single server queues Effects of congestion Congestion control
Traffic management Congestion control in packet switching networks Frame relay congestion control.
UNIT III
TCP AND ATM CONGESTION CONTROL
9
TCP flow control TCP congestion control Retransmission Timer management Exponential RTO
backoff KARNs algorithm Window management Performance of TCP over ATM Traffic and
congestion control in ATM Requirements Attributes Traffic management frame work Traffic
control ABR traffic management ABR rate control RM cell formats ABR capacity allocations
GFR traffic management.
UNIT IV
INTEGRATED AND DIFFERENTIATED SERVICES
9
Integrated services architecture Approach Components Services Queuing discipline FQ PS
BRFQ GPS WFQ Random early detection Differentiated services
UNIT V
PROTOCOLS FOR QOS SUPPORT
9
RSVP Goals and characteristics Data flow RSVP operations Protocol mechanisms Multiprotocol
label switching Operations Label stacking Protocol details RTP Protocol architecture Data
transfer protocol RTCP.
TOTAL: 45
357
TEXT BOOK:
Sl.No.
1.
Author(s)
William Stallings
Title of the Book

High Speed Networks And
Internet
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Pearson Education
2002
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
1.
2.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Warland
Pravin Varaiya
High Performance
Communication Networks
Jean Harcourt Asia Pvt.

Ltd
Irvan Pepelnjk
Jim Guichard
Jeff Apcar
MPLS and VPN

architecture
Cisco Press, Volume 1

and 2
Year of
Publication
2001
2003
WEB URLs:
1. http://www.comp.nus.edu.sg/~cs5224
2. http://www.sterbenz.org/jpgs/tutorials/hsn
3. http://www.cs.umbc.edu/~jhsn
4. http://www.cse.wustl.edu/~jain/cis788-99/ftp/qos_protocols/
5. http://www.cse.wustl.edu/~jain/cis788-95/ftp/atm_cong.pdf
10T008
EMBEDDED SYSTEMS
3
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Introduction to embedded systems hardware needs Typical and advanced Timing diagrams
Memories (RAM- ROM- EPROM) tristate devices Buses DMA UART and PLDs Built-ins on
the microprocessor Interrupts basics ISR Context saving Shared data problem Atomic and
critical section Interrupt latency.
UNIT II
SOFTWARE ARCHITECTURES
9
Survey of software architectures Round robin Function queue scheduling architecture Use of real
time operating system RTOS Tasks Scheduler Shared data reentrancy Priority inversion
mutex binary semaphore and counting semaphore ARM Microprocessor Architecture and
programming ARM assembly programming.
UNIT III
TASK COMMUNICATION
9
Inter task communication Message queue Mailboxes and pipes Timer functions Events interrupt
routines in an RTOS environment GDB Make-Buffer management File format (ELF, COFF) Map
file.
UNIT IV
SYSTEM SOFTWARE DESIGN
9
Embedded system software design using an RTOS hard real-time and soft real time system principles
Task division Need of interrupt routines Shared data.
UNIT V
EMBEDDED SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT
9
Embedded software development tools Host and target systems Cross compilers Linkers Locators
for embedded systems Getting embedded software in to the target system Debugging techniques
Testing on host machine Instruction set emulators Logic analyzers in circuit emulators and monitors.
TOTAL: 45
358
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
1.
David A Simon
2.
Steve Furber
Title of the Book

An Embedded Software
Primer
ARM System On-Chip
Architecture
Year of
Publishing
Publisher
Pearson Education
2006
Pearson Education
2005
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
1.
Daniel W Lewis
2.
Philip A Laplante
Title of the Book

Fundamentals of Embedded
Software Where C and
Assembly Meet
Real time System Design
and Analysis
Publisher
Year of
Publishing
Pearson Education
2009
Wiley India Pvt Ltd
2006
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/ee658098.aspx
http://www.ece.cmu.edu/~koopman/embedded.html
http://www.on-time.com/rtos-32-docs/rtkernel-32/programming-manual/tasking/inter-taskcommunications.html
4. http://www.cs.colorado.edu/~kena/classes/5828/s10/presentations/softwaredesign.pdf
5. http://www.altera.com/devices/processor/nios2/tools/ni2-development_tools.html
10T009
RF CIRCUIT DESIGN
3
UNIT I
9
Importance of radio frequency design Dimensions and units Frequency spectrum RF behavior of
passive components Transmission line analysis: General transmission line equation Micro strip
transmission line Terminated lossless transmission line Special termination Sourced and loaded
transmission line Smith chart Impedance transformation Admittance transformation.
UNIT II
SINGLE AND MULTI PORT NETWORK THEORY AND RF FILTER DESIGN 9
Basic definitions Interconnecting networks Network properties and applications S parameters Basic
resonator and filter configurations Special filter realizations Filter implementation.
UNIT III
9
Impedance matching using discrete components Micro strip line matching networks Amplifier and
UNIT IV
9
Components: RF Diode RF bipolar junction transistor RF field effect transistor Modeling: Diode
model Transistor model FET model Characteristics of amplifiers Amplifier power relations
stability relations Constant gain.
UNIT V
Basic oscillator model High frequency oscillator model Basic characteristics of mixers.
TOTAL: 45
359
TEXT BOOK:
Sl.No.
1.
Author(s)
Reinhold Ludwig
Pavel Bretchko
Publisher
Year of
Publication

2001
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Title of the Book

RF Circuit Design
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
1.
Matthew M
Radmanesh
Radio Frequency and Microwave

Electronics illustrated

2001
2.
Peter P Kenington
High linearity RF Amplifier

Design
Artech House Mumbai
2002
WEB URLs:
1. http://www.ssc.pe.titech.ac.jp/materials/VLSICS03_shortcourse_matsu_homepage.pdf
2. http://pesona.mmu.edu.my/~wlkung/ADS/ads.html
3. http://ee.eng.usm.my/eeacad/mandeep/EEE436/chp%203.pdf
4. http://ece.wpi.edu/RF_Circuit_Design/chapter4.html
5. http://www.qsl.net/va3iul/RF%20Mixers/RF_Mixers.pdf
10T010
COGNITIVE RADIO
3
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO COGNITIVE RADIOS
9
Marking radio self-aware The cognition cycle Organization of cognition tasks Structuring knowledge
for cognition tasks Enabling location and environment awareness in cognitive radios Concepts
architecture Design considerations.
UNIT II
COGNITIVE RADIO ARCHITECTURE
9
Primary cognitive radio functions Behaviors Components Priori knowledge taxonomy Observe
phase data structures Radio procedure knowledge encapsulation Components of orient, plan, decide
phases Act phase knowledge representation Design rules.
UNIT III
INTRODUCTION TO SDR
9
Definitions and potential benefits Software radio architecture evolution Foundations Technology
tradeoffs and architecture implications Antenna for cognitive radio.
UNIT IV
SDR ARCHITECTURE
9
Essential functions of the software radio Architecture goals Quantifying degrees of programmability
Top level component topology Computational properties of functional components Interface topologies
among plug and play modules Architecture partitions.
UNIT V
NEXT GENERATION WIRELESS NETWORKS
9
The XG network architecture Spectrum sensing Spectrum management Spectrum mobility
Spectrum sharing Upper layer issues Cross-layer design.
TOTAL: 45
360
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No
1.
2.
3.
4.
Author(s)
Alexander M
Wyglinski
Maziar Nekovee
Thomas Hou Y
Biglieri E Goldsmith
A J Greenstein L
Mandayam N B
Poor H V
Kwang-Cheng Chen
Ramjee Prasad
Khattab
Ahmed,Perkins
Dmitri,Bayoumi
Magdy
Title of the book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Cognitive Radio
Communications and NetworksPrinciples and Practice
Elsevier Inc.
2010
Principles of Cognitive Radio
Press
2013
Cognitive Radio Networks
John Wiley and

Sons,Ltd
2009
Cognitive Radio Networks-From

Theory to Practice
Springer Series:Analog
Circuits and Signal
Processing
2009
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No
Author(s)
1.
Mitola J
2.
Simon Haykin
3.
Ian F Akyildiz
Won Yeol Lee
Mehmet C
Vuran Shantidev
Mohanty
Title of the book

Cognitive Radio: An
Integrated Agent
Architecture for software
defined radio
Cognitive Radio: Brain
empowered wireless
communications
Next generation /dynamic
spectrum access /
cognitive radio wireless
networks: A Survey
Publisher
Year
Doctor of Technology thesis,

Royal Inst. Technology
2000
IEEE Journal on selected

areas in communications
2005
Elsevier Computer Networks
2006
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.radio-electronics.com/info/rf-technology-design/cognitive-radio-cr/technologytutorial.php
http://4g-portal.com/introduction-to-cognitive-radio-tutorial.
http://mil-embedded.com/articles/evolving-technology-sdr-cognitive-radio/
http://www.wirelessinnovation.org/assets/documents/tut-SDR_Architectures.pdf
http://www.xgtechnology.com/Technology/network-architecture.html
10T011

3
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Historical perspective Silicon microelectronics MEMS Introduction to micro sensors MEMS
examples Application of MEMS
UNIT II
MEMS MATERIALS
9
Metal and metal alloys Semiconductors, polymers, ceramic materials, composite materials Piezo
361
UNIT III
9
MEMS and IC fabrication cycle: Silicon wafer fabrication Crystal growth Thin film deposition
Evaporation Types Spin casting Oxidation of silicon Dry,Wet.
UNIT IV
9
Lithography: Photo-resist Pattern transfer Etching Wet ,dry doping , metallization , bonding and
packaging Micromachining.
UNIT V
MEMS SWITCH DESIGN
9
RF MEMS switches: Introduction Switch parameters Basics of switching Switches for RF and
microwave applications Electrostatic switching Approaches for low actuation Voltage switches
Introduction to SAW devices Bulk acoustic wave filters.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOK:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Julian Gardner
Vijay Vardan K
Osama O A

Smart Devices
John wiley and sons
2002
2.
Tai Ran Hsu
Mems and Microsystems

Design
Tata McGraw-Hill
2002
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
Fukuda T
Menz W

MEMS and MOEMS
Technology and
Applications
2.
Rai Choudary P
3.
Stephen Senthuria D
4.
Vijay vardan K
Vinoy K J
Jose KA
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Elsevier
2002
SPIE Press
2000
Microsystem Design
Kluwer Academic
Publishers
2002
RF MEMS and
TheirApplications
John wiley and sons
2003
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.memsnet.org/about/what-is.html
http://www.coventor.com/pdfs/RF_MEMS_Application.pdf
http://www.freescale.com/webapp/sps/site/overview.jsp?code=SNSMEMSOVERVIEW
https://www.mems-exchange.org/MEMS
https://www.understandingnano.com/mems.html
10T012
3
UNIT I
9
Wave nature of light Polarization Interference Diffraction Light source Review of quantum
mechanical concept Review of solid state physics Review of semiconductor physics and semiconductor
junction device.
362
UNIT II
9
Introduction Photo luminescence Cathode luminescence Electro luminescence Injection
luminescence LED Plasma display Liquid crystal displays Numeric displays Laser emission
Absorption Radiation Population inversion Optical feedback Threshold condition Laser modes
Classes of laser Mode locking Laser applications.
UNIT III
9
performance.
UNIT IV
9
Introduction Analog and digital modulation Electro optic modulators Magneto optic devices
Acoustoptic devices Optical Switching and logic devices.
UNIT V
OPTOELECTRONIC INTEGRATED CIRCUITS
9
Introduction Hybrid and monolithic integration Application of optoelectronic integrated circuits
Integrated transmitters and receivers Guided wave devices.
TOTAL: 45
TEXTBOOK:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Wilson J
Haukes J
1.
Title of the Book

Opto Electronics An
Introduction
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1998
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Bhattacharya
Semiconductor Opto
Electronic Devices
2004
2.
Jasprit Singh
Opto Electronics As
and devices
Tata McGraw-Hill
1998
WEB URLs:
1. http://ece-www.colorado.edu/~bart/book/book/chapter4/ch4_6.html
2. http://www.lastek.co.kr/updata/f11625189561.pdf
3. http://solid.fizica.unibuc.ro/cursuri/solid_en/curs_solid_EN.pdf
4. http://hyperphysics.phy-astr.gsu.edu/hbase/optmod/qualig.html
5. http://www.tpub.com/neets/tm/111-1.html
10T013

3
UNIT I
SIMULATION OF RANDOM VARIABLES RANDOM PROCESS
9
Generation of random numbers and sequence Gaussian and uniform random numbers Correlated
random sequences Testing of random numbers generators Stationary and uncorrelated noise
Goodness of fit test.
UNIT II
9
Radio frequency and optical sources Analog and digital signals Communication channel and model
Free space channels Multipath channel Discrete channel noise and interference.
363
UNIT III
9
method Importance sampling method Extreme value theory.
UNIT IV
9
UNIT V
CASE STUDIES
9
Simulations of QAM digital radio link environment Light wave communication link Satellite system.
TOTAL: 45
TEXTBOOK:
Sl.No.
1.
Author(s)
Jeruchim MC
Balaban P
Sam K Shanmugam
Title of the Book

Simulation of
and Techniques
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Plenum press , New

York
2002
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Averill M Law
David Kelton W

Analysis
Tata McGraw-Hill
2006
2.
Geoffrey Gorden
System Simulation
1998
3.
Turin W
Computer Science
Press, New York
1990
4.
Jerry banks
John S Carson
2005
Systems
Simulation
WEB URLs:
4. http:// www.webopedia.com/TERM/O/optoelectronics.html
5. http:// www.ece.rutgers.edu
10T014
ADAPTIVE SIGNAL PROCESSING

3
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Need for adaptation Areas of application Open and closed loop adaptation An adaptive linear
combiner Input signals Weight vectors Desired response and error Performance function gradient
and minimum mean squared error Decorrelation of error and input with optimum weights.
UNIT II
ADAPTATION THEORY
9
Input correlation matrix Eigen values and eigen vectors and their geometric significance Methods of
searching the performance surface Gradient search methods Stability Rate of convergence The
learning curve.
364
UNIT III
NEWTONS METHOD AND STEEPEST DESCENT ALGORITHMS
9
Newtons method (Multi dimensional space) and method of steepset descent for gradient search
Comparison of learning curves Gradient estimation from measurement derivatives Performance
penalty with multiple weights Variance of gradient estimate and its effect on weight vector solution
Time constants and misadjustment Comparison of newtons method and method of steepest descent.
UNIT IV
ADAPTIVE ALGORITHMS AND STRUCTURES
9
The least mean square (LMS) algorithm Convergence of weight vector Learning curve Noise in
weight vector solution Misadjustment Performance Expressing performance function in terms of
transfer function H(z) of the adaptive system and the signal Power spectra The ideal LMS / Newtons
algorithm and its properties The sequential regression algorithm Advantages and disadvantages of
adaptive recursive filters LMS algorithm for recursive filters Random search algorithms Lattice
predictor Adaptive filters with orthogonal signals.
UNIT V
APPLICATIONS OF ADAPTIVE SIGNAL PROCESSING
9
Adaptive modelling of multipath communication channels Adaptive equalisation of telephone channels
Adaptive interference cancellation 50Hz interference in ECG Maternal ECG in Foetal
Electrocardiography Noise in speech signals, echoes in long distance telephone circuits Adaptive arrays
and adaptive beam forming Side lobe cancellation.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Bernard Widrow
Samuel D Streams
Prentice Hall
1985
Simon Haykin
Adaptive Filter Theory
Pearson
Education
2008
Monson H Hayes
Statistical Digital Signal

Processing
and Modeling
John Wiley and

Sons, Singapore
2002
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No
Author(s)
1.
John G Proakis
2.
Title of the Book

Digital Signal
Processing
Statistical and adaptive
signal Processing
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Pearson Education,
Prentice Hall India
2002
Tata McGraw Hill
2000
WEB URLs:
1. http://www-isl.stanford.edu/~widrow/papers/c1993adaptivesignal.pdf
2. http://isl-www.stanford.edu/~widrow/papers/c1959adaptivesampled.pdf
3. http://people.maths.ox.ac.uk/cartis/papers/cgt36.pdf
4. http://www.ee.iitb.ac.in/student/~sudheer/ASP_ECG.pdf
5. http://www.eit.lth.se/fileadmin/eit
10T015
REMOTE SENSING
3
UNIT I
REMOTE SENSING
9
Definition Components of remote sensing Energy Sensor Interacting body MTI and pulse doppler
radar Active and passive remote sensing Platforms Aerial and space platforms Balloons
Helicopters Aircraft and satellites Synoptivity and repetivity Electro Magnetic Radiation (EMR)
EMR spectrum Visible Infra Red (IR) Near IR Middle IR Thermal IR and microwave Black
body radiation Plancks law Stefan-Boltzman law.
365
UNIT II
9
Atmospheric characteristics Scattering of EMR Raleigh Mie Non-selective and raman scattering
EMR interaction with water vapour and ozone Atmospheric windows Significance of atmospheric
windows EMR interaction with earth surface materials Radiance Irradiance Incident Reflected
Absorbed and transmitted energy Reflectance Specular and diffuse reflection surfaces Spectral
signature Spectral signature curves EMR interaction with water Soil and earth surface Imaging
UNIT III
9
Satellites Classification Based on orbits and purpose Satellite sensors Resolution Description of
multi spectral scanning Along and Across track scanners Description of sensors in landsat SPOT
IRS series Current satellites Radar Speckle Back Scattering Side looking airborne radar
Synthetic aperture radar Radiometer Geometrical characteristics Sonar remote sensing systems.
UNIT IV
9
GIS Components of GIS Hardware, software and organizational context Data Spatial and nonSpatial Maps Types of maps Projection Types of projection Data input Digitizer Scanner
Editing Raster and vector data structures Comparison of raster and vector data structure Analysis
using raster and vector data Retrieval Reclassification Overlaying Buffering Data output
Printers and plotters.
UNIT V
9
Visual interpretation of satellite images Elements of interpretation Interpretation keys characteristics of
digital satellite image Image enhancement Filtering Classification Integration of GIS and remote
sensing Application of remote sensing and GIS Urban applications Water resources Urban analysis
Watershed management Resources information systems Global positioning system introduction.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
1.
2.
Author(s)
Srinivas M G
Anji Reddy
Title of the Book

Remote Sensing
Applications
Remote Sensing and
Systems
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Narosa Publishing
House
2001
BS Publications
2001
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Jensen J R

environment
Prentice Hall
2.
Kang - Tsung Chang
Information Systems
Tata Mcgraw-Hill
3.
Lillesand T M
Kiefer RW

Interpretation
John Wiley and Sons, Inc

New York
1987
4.
Janza F J
Blue H M
Johnston J E
Manual of Remote Sensing
American Society of
Photogrammetry, Virginia
USA, Volume I
1975
5.
Burrough P A

resource assessment
Oxford
2002
1.
366
2000
2002
WEB URLs:
1. http://education.nationalgeographic.co.in/education/encyclopedia/geographic-informationsystem-gis/?ar_a=1
3. http://jan.ucc.nau.edu/~geog-p/geog/RemoteSensing/
5. http://www.iki.rssi.ru/asp/pub_sha1/pub_sha1.html
10T016
NETWORK SECURITY
3
UNIT I
FUNDAMENTALS OF SECURITY
9
Security services, mechanisms and attacks OSI security architecture Model for network security Plan
of attack Attacks on encryption shemes Standards and standard setting organization.
UNIT II
SYMMETRIC CRYPTOGRAPHY
9
Basic encryption and decryption Substitution Transposition Steganography Stream and block
ciphers Data Encryption Standard Differential and linear cryptanalysis Block cipher modes
Advance Encryption Standard Triple DES AES RC5 RC4 stream cipher.
UNIT III
9
Introduction to number theory RSA Key management Diffie-Hellman key exchange Elliptic curve
cryptography.
UNIT IV
MESSAGE AUTHENTICATION
HASH functions HASH algorithm RIPMED-160-HMAC-SHA-MD5 Digital signature standards.
UNIT V
NETWORK AND SYSTEM SECURITY
9
Authentication applications E-mail Security IP security Web security Intruders Malicious
Software Firewalls.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOK:
Sl.No.
1.
Author(s)
William Stallings
Title of the Book

Practices
Publisher
Pearson Education
Year of
Publication
2005
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Title of the Book
Author(s)
1.
Charles P Pleeger
Security in Computing
Prentice Hall of
India
2003
2.
Simands
Network Security
Tata McGraw Hill
1998
3.
Derek Atkins
Internet Security
Techmedia
1998
4.
Baker
Network Security
Tata McGraw Hill
1996
5.
Forouson B
Cryptography and Network Security:

Tata McGraw hill
2008
367
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Sl.No.
WEB URLs:
1. http://www.interhack.net/pubs/network-security
2. http://www-cse.ucsd.edu/classes/sp99/cse207/index.html
3. http://cseweb.ucsd.edu/~mihir/cse207/w-mac.pdf
4. http://pic.dhe.ibm.com/infocenter/tpfhelp/current/index.jsp?topic=%2Fcom.ibm.ztpfztpfdf.doc_put.cur%2Fgtps7%2Fs7symm.html
5. http://cryptome.org/2013/09/infosecurity-cert.pdf
10T017
MICROWAVE INTEGRATED CIRCUITS DESIGN

3
UNIT I
MICROSTRIP LINES - DESIGN AND ANALYSIS
9
Introduction Types of MICs and their technology Advantages and applications Propagating models
Analysis of MIC by conformal transformation Numerical analysis Hybrid mode analysis Losses in
microstrip Characteristic parameters of strip Introduction to slot line and coplanar waveguide Hybrid
MICs Monolithic MIC technology.
UNIT II
COUPLED MICROSTRIPS-DIRECTIONAL COUPLERS AND LUMPED

ELEMENTS FOR MICS
9
Introduction to coupled microstrip Even and odd mode analysis Directional couplers Branch line
couplers design and fabrication of lumped elements for MICs Comparison with distributed circuits.
UNIT III
NONRECIPROCAL COMPONENTS FOR MICS
9
Nonreciprocal components for MICs Microstrip on ferrimagnetic substrates Microstrip circulators
Isolators and phase shifters Microwave transistors Parametric diodes and amplifiers PIN diodes
Microwave transistor circuits Design of microstrip circuits High power and low power circuits.
UNIT IV
MICROSTRIP CIRCUIT DESIGN AND APPLICATIONS
9
Introduction Impedance transformers Filters Lumped constant microstrip circuits Filters High
power circuits Low power circuits MICs in satellite and radar.
UNIT V
MMIC TECHNOLOGY
9
Fabrication process of MMIC Hybrid MICs Configuration Dielectric substances Thick and thin
film technology Hybrid MICs Testing methods Encapsulation and mounting devices.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
1.
Gupta KC
Amarjit Singh
2.
Hoffman R K
3.
Ramesh Garg
Inder Bahl
Maurizio Bozzi
Title of the Book

Microwave
Integrated circuits
Handbook of
Microwave
Integrated Circuits
Microstrip Lines
and Slotlines
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Wiley Eastern
2011
Artech House,
Boston
1987
Artech House,
Boston
2013
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
1.
Author(s)
Ravender Goyal
Title of the Book

Monolithic MIC;
Technology Design
368
Publisher
Artech House
Year of
Publication
1989
2.
Leo Young
Advances in Microwaves
Academic Press
2000
3.
Bharathi Bhat
Koul S K
Stripline-like transmission
lines for microwave
integrated circuits
New age
international
2007
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://ee.sharif.edu/~mmic/notes/Overview.pdf
http://www.prof-robertson.com/index_files/MICROSTRIP.pdf http://www.microsoft.com/sql
http://examcrazy.com/Engineering/ElectronicsCommunication/Coupled_Line_and_Lange_Directi
onal_Couplers.asp
http://www.site.uottawa.ca/~rhabash/MEMS4
http://www.ittc.ku.edu/~jstiles/723/handouts/section_10_5_Microwave_Integrated_Circuits_packa
ge.pdf
10T018
SECURE COMMUNICATION
3
0 3
UNIT I
COMMUNICATION SECURITY AND CONVENTIONAL ENCRYPTION
10
Introduction Threats and solutions Technical threats to communication security Conventional
encryption model Data Encryption Standard Block cipher Encryption algorithms Confidentiality
Key distribution.
UNIT II
PUBLIC KEY ENCRYPTION AND HASH & MAC ALGORITHMS
9
Principles of public key cryptosystems RSA algorithm Diffie-Hellman key exchange Elliptic curve
cryptology Message authentication and hash functions Hash and MAC algorithms Digital signatures
and digital signature standard.
UNIT III AUTHENTICATION SERVICES AND E-MAIL SECURITY
8
Kerberos X.509 directory service Pretty good privacy Secure multipurpose internet mail extension.
UNIT IV
IP SECURITY AND WEB SECURITY
9
IP security overview IP security architecture Authentication header Encapsulating security payload
Security associations Key management Web security requirements Secure sockets layer
Transport layer security Secure electronic transaction layer Dual signature.
UNIT V
SYSTEM SECURITY
9
Intruders Intrusion detection techniques Malicious software Viruses and antivirus techniques
Digital immune systems Firewalls Design goals Limitations Types and configurations Trusted
systems.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
SI.NO
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
Roger J Sutton
Secure
Communications:
Applications and
Management
2.
William Stallings
Cryptography and
network security
369
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Wiley
2002
Prentice Hall
of India
2006
REFERENCE BOOKS:
SI.NO
Author(s)
1.
Atul Kahate
2.
Eric Maiwald
Title of the Book

Security
Fundamentals of Network
Security
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Tata McGraw-Hill
2003
Tata McGraw-Hill
2003
WEB URLs:
1. http://studynet-work.blogspot.in/2011/09/encryption-for-data-on-network-security.html
2. http://www.thestudymaterial.com/presentation-seminar/electronics-presentation/53-cryptographypresentation.html?start=5
3. http://www.cisco.com/web/about/security/intelligence/nextgen_crypto.html
4. http://www.garykessler.net/library/crypto.html
5. http://www.cisco.com/web/about/ac123/ac147/ac174/ac197/about_cisco_ipj_archive_article09186
a00800c830b.html
10T019

3
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Definition of quality Dimensions of quality Quality planning Quality costs Analysis techniques for
quality costs Basic concepts of total quality management Historical review Principles of TQM
Leadership Concepts Role of senior management Quality council Quality statements Strategic
planning Deming philosophy Barriers to TQM implementation.
UNIT II
PRINCIPLES
9
Customer satisfaction Customer perception of quality Customer complaints Service quality
Customer retention Employee involvement Motivation Empowerment Teams Recognition and
reward performance appraisal Benefits Continuous process improvement Juran trilogy PDSA
Cycle-5S Kaizen Supplier partnership Partnering Sourcing Supplier selection Supplier rating
Relationship development Performance measures Basic concepts Strategy Performance measure.
UNIT III
9
The Seven tools of quality Statistical fundamentals Measures of central tendency and dispersion
Population and sample Normal curve Control charts for variables and attributes Process capability
Concept of six sigma New seven management tools.
UNIT IV
TQM TOOLS
9
Benchmarking Reasons to benchmark Benchmarking process Quality Function Deployment (QFD)
House of quality QFD Process Benefits Taguchi quality loss function Total productive maintenance
(TPM) Concept Improvement needs FMEA Stages of FMEA.
UNIT V
QUALITY SYSTEMS
9
Need for ISO 9000 and other quality systems ISO 9000:2000 quality system Elements
Implementation of quality system Documentation Quality auditing TS 16949 ISO 14000
Concept Requirements and benefits.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOK:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
1.
Dale H
Besterfiled etal
Title of the Book
Publisher

370
Pearson Education
Year of
Publication
2011
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
James R Evans
William M Lidsay
The Management and

Control of Quality
Learning)
2008
2.
Feigenbaum AV
Tata McGraw-Hill
2009
3.
Oakland J S
Butterworth Hcinemann
Ltd Oxford
2003
4.
Narayana V
Sreenivasan N S
Quality Management Concepts and Tasks
2005
WEB URLs:
1. http://www.tutor2u.net/business/production/quality_tqm.html
2. http://www.moresteam.com/toolbox/statistical-process-control-spc.cfm?
3. http://www2.ifm.eng.cam.ac.uk/dstools/represent/tqm.html
4. http://www. faculty.mu.edu.sa/download.php?fid
5. https://www.msu.edu/course/fsm/325/l_tqm.pdf
371
372
B.E: ELECTRONICS AND TELECOMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
TOTAL CREDITS: 189

SEMESTER I
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Credits
Maximum Marks
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
12O101
3.5
40
60
100
40
60
100
12O103

Engineering
Technical English
3.5
40
60
100
12O104
C Programming - I
40
60
100
12T105
Electric Circuits
40
60
100
12T106
Electrical Machines
40
60
100
12G102
PRACTICAL
12O111
1.5
40
60
100
12T112

Laboratory
1.5
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
2.5
40
60
100
19
12
26
12G113
12T114
TOTAL
SEMESTER II
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Credits
Maximum Marks
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
12T202

Series
12O203
40
60
100
12O204
C Programming - II
Engineering
Electron Devices
40
60
100
40
60
100
3.5
40
60
100
12O201
12T205
12T206
3.5
40
60
100
40
60
100
PRACTICAL
12O211
1.5
40
60
100
12H212
Physics Laboratory
1.5
40
60
100
12T213
1.5
40
60
100
12H214
1.5
40
60
100
19
14
27
TOTAL
373
SEMESTER III
Course
Code
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Course Title
Credits
Maximum Marks
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
12T302

Analysis
12T303
Data Structures
40
60
100
12T304
Digital Electronics
3.5
40
60
100
12T305
Analog Electronics - I
3.5
40
60
100
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
18
12
26
12T301
12T306
3.5
40
60
100
3.5
40
60
100
PRACTICAL
12T311
12T312
12T313
12T314

Analog Electronics - I and
Laboratory
TOTAL
SEMESTER IV
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Credits
Maximum Marks
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
12T402

Processes
Analog Electronics - II
12T403
Signals and Systems
3.5
40
60
100
12T404
40
60
100
12T405
3.5
40
60
100
12T406
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
18
24
12T401
3.5
40
60
100
40
60
100
PRACTICAL
12T411
12T412
12T413
Analog Electronics - II and

Laboratory
Laboratory
TOTAL

374
SEMESTER V
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Credits
Maximum Marks
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
12T505
Measurements and
Instrumentation
Waveguides
Microprocessors and
Microcontrollers
Control Systems
12T506
Operating Systems
12T501
12T502
12T503
12T504
40
60
100
3.5
100
100
3.5
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
1.5
100
100
1.5
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
18
23.5
PRACTICAL
12O511
12T512
12T513
Soft Skills
Laboratory
controllers Laboratory
TOTAL
SEMESTER VI
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Credits
Maximum Marks
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
12T601
3.5
40
60
100
12T602
40
60
100
40
60
100
12T604
Embedded Systems
Design
Computer Networks
40
60
100
12T605
3.5
40
60
100
12Txxx
Elective I
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
1.5
100
100
18
12
25
12T603
PRACTICAL
12T613
Analog and Digital

Laboratory
Design Laboratory
12T651
Mini Project
12T611
12T612
TOTAL
375
SEMESTER VII
Course
Code
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Course Title
Credits
Maximum Marks
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
12T701
12T702
12T703
12T704
12T705
12Txxx
Radio Frequency and

Satellite and Mobile
Communication Network
Security
Tele Communications Switching
Techniques
Elective II
3.5
40
60
100
40
60
100
3.5
40
60
100
40
60
100
3.5
40
60
100
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
1.5
100
100
18
22.5
PRACTICAL
12T721

Laboratory
Comprehension
12T751
12T712
TOTAL
SEMESTER VIII
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Credits
Maximum Marks
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
3
40
60
100
12Txxx

Engineering Ethics
Elective III
40
60
100
12Txxx
Elective IV
40
60
100
12
40
60
100
12
15
12T801
PRACTICAL
12T851

TOTAL

376
LIST OF ELECTIVES
Course Code
Course Title
12T001
Medical Electronics
12T002
12T003
12T004
12T005
Nanoelectronics
12T006
Broadband Communication
12T007
High Speed Networks
12T008
12T009
RF Circuit Design
12T010
Wireless Networks
12T011
12T012
12T013
12T014
12T015
Remote Sensing
12T016
Secure Communication
12T017
12T018
12T019
Java Programming
12T020
377
SEMESTER V
12L501/12T501
(Common to ECE/ETE)
12L502/12T502
TRANSMISSION LINES AND WAVEGUIDES
(Common to ECE/ETE)
12L503/12T503

(Common to ECE/ETE)
12L504/12T504

(Common to ECE/ETE)
12T505
CONTROL SYSTEMS
3
OBJECTIVES:
To model a mechanical, electrical and electromechanical system in the form of differential
equations and transfer functions.
To analyze a system in time and frequency domain.
To design a compensator using frequency domain analysis.
To describe a control system components.
OUTCOMES:
model a system
design and analyze a system in time domain.
design and analyze a system in frequency domain.
design a compensator based on the requirement
identify the role of control system in various applications.
UNIT I
CONTROL SYSTEM MODELLING
9
System concept Differential equations and transfer functions Modelling of electrical systems
Translational and rotational mechanical systems Simple electromechanical systems Block diagram
representation of systems Block diagram reduction methods Closed loop transfer function
Determination of signal flow graph Masons gain formula Examples.
UNIT II
TIME DOMAIN ANALYSIS
9
Test signals Time response of first order and second order systems Time domain specifications Types
and order of systems Generalised error co-efficients Steady state errors Concepts of stability RouthHurwitz stability Root locus.
UNIT III
FREQUENCY DOMAIN ANALYSIS
9
Introduction Correlation between time and frequency response Stability analysis using Bode plots,
Polar plots, Nichols chart and Nyquist stability criterion Gain margin Phase margin.
378
UNIT IV
COMPENSATORS
9
Realization of basic compensators Cascade compensation in time domain and frequency domain and
feedback compensation Design of lag, lead, lag-lead compensator using Bode plot and root locus
Introduction to P, PI and PID controllers.
UNIT V
CONTROL SYSTEM COMPONENTS AND APPLICATION OF CONTROL

SYSTEMS
9
Stepper motors AC servo motor DC servo motor Synchros Sensors and encoders DC tacho
generator AC tacho generator Hydraulic controller Pneumatic controller .
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No
1.
2.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Ogata K
Nagrath G
Gopal I J
Publisher

Control System Engineering

Edition
Year of
Publication
2003
2002
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
2.
Benjamin C Kuo
Gopal M

Control Systems

Tata McGraw-Hill
Year of
Publication
2002
2008
3.
Anand kumar A
Control Systems
PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd
2007
Sl.No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
WEB URLs:
1. http://www.facstaff.bucknell.edu/mastascu/eControlHTML/Freq/Nyquist3.html.
2. http://www.chem.mtu.edu/~tbco/cm416/freqexcel.html.
3. http://www.flightgear.org/Docs/XMLAutopilot/node2.html.
4. http:// www.globalspec.com
5. http:// www.sc.iitb.ac.in
12L506 / 12T506/12E506/12N506
OPERATING SYSTEMS

12O511
SOFT SKILLS
(Common to all branches)
12L512/12T512
DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING LABORATORY
(Common to ECE/ETE)
12L513/12T513

LABORATORY
(Common to ECE/ETE)
379
SEMESTER VI
12L601/12T601
DIGITAL COMMUNICATION
(Common to ECE/ETE)
12L602/12T602/12E602/12N602
EMBEDDED SYSTEMS
12L603/12T603
VERY LARGE SCALE INTEGRATION DESIGN
(Common to ECE/ETE)
12L604/12T604/12E604/12N604/12P504/12F504
COMPUTER NETWORKS
12T605
ANTENNA AND WAVE PROPAGATION

3
3.5
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the various Electromagnetic parameters of an antenna.
To understand and analyze the different radiation patterns of an antenna.
To understand the various antenna apertures.
To analyze the fields of a half-wave dipole antenna and to understand how the length of any linear
antenna is approximated with respect to the wavelength.
OUTCOMES:
analyze and sketch the different radiation patterns of an antenna.
describe the vector effective lengths and vector effective areas of an antenna.
demonstrate the magnetic vector potential concepts at far field approximations.
analyze the fields and radiation resistance of a short herzian dipole.
explain the ground effects occurred in horizontal and vertical antennas along with the current
distribution in dipole and loop antennas.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO ANTENNAS AND ANTENNA EM PARAMETERS
9
Brief on radiation mechanism Current distribution on a thin wire antenna and classification of antenna
radiation pattern Isotropic Directional Omni directional and principal patterns Pattern lobes Field
regions Concepts of radians and stredian Power density Radiation intensity Directivity Gain
Antenna efficiency Beam width Beam efficiency Bandwidth Review of EM polarization
Antenna polarization Polariziation loss factor Polarization efficiency Reciprocity of patterns
Fundamental problems.
UNIT II
ANTENNA CIRCUIT PARAMETERS AND HERTIZIAN DIPOLE
9
Input impedance Antenna radiation efficiency Antenna vector effective length and equivalent areas
Maximum directivity and maximum effective area Friis transmission equation and radar range equation
Antenna temperature Reciprocity of input impedance and effective lengths Fundamental problems
Concept of vector potential Hertzian diplole: Derivation and analysis of fields of a Hertizian dipole
Derivation for power radiated, radiation resistance and directivity of Hertizian dipole.
380
UNIT III
LINEAR ANTENNAS AND LOOP ANTENNAS
9
Linear antennas Current distribution of centre-fed linear antennas Derivation of field intensities of a
linear antenna of any length using hertizian field expression Analysis of field from various lengths with
special importance to / 2 antenna Antenna radiation resistance of / 2 and / 4 antenna and
practical implication Effect of ground on horizontal and vertical antennas Loop antennas Derivation
for power radiated and radiation resistance Loop antennas with uniform current and non-uniform Current.
UNIT IV ANTENNA ARRAYS
9
Various forms of antenna array Multiplication of patterns Linear arrays of N isotropic point sources of
equal amplitude and spacing Broadside and ordinary end-fire array with directions of pattern maxima and
minima Yagi-Uda array Phased arrays Frequency scanning Retro and adaptive antenna array
systems Binomial array Chebyshev arrays Brief discussion on broadside non-uniform arrays.
UNIT V SPECIFIC ANTENNAS, MEASUREMENTS AND WAVE PROPAGATION
9
Log Periodic dipole antenna Parabolic reflector antennas and their feed systems Fundamental horn (E,
H and Pyramid) antennas Shaped beam antennas Babinets principle Descriptions of Whip Ferrite
rod Turnstile and notch and microstrip antennas Measurement Drawbacks in measurements of
antenna parameters Some accurate measurement methods Antenna ranges Pattern measurements
Gain Directivity Radiation efficiency Impedance and polarization measurements Propagation
Ground wave propagation Space wave propagation Sky wave propagation(no derivations).
TOTAL: 45+15
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No
1.
2.
3.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Constantine A.Balanis
John D Kraus
Ronalatory Marhefka
Jordan E C
Balmain
Publisher
Antenna Theory
Analysis and Design
Antennas
Electro Magnetic waves and
radiating system
John Wiley and

sons
Tata McGraw
Hill
Prentice Hall of
India
Year of
Publication
2009
2007
2009
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No
Author(s)
1.
Prasad K D
2.
Raju G S N
3.
Collins R E
Title of the Book

Antenna and Wave
Propagation
Antennas and Wave
Propagation
Antennas and Radio
Propagation
Publisher
Sathya Prakasham,New
delhi
Pearson education
Tata McGraw Hill
Year of
Publication
2012
2012
2007
WEB URLs:
1. http://www.ycars.org
2. http:// www.cebik.com
3. http://geocities.com/ptupapers/awp.html
4. http://www.hamuniverse.com/anttheory1.html
5. http://www.educypedia.be/electronics/antennas.html
12L611/12T611
ANALOG AND DIGITAL COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS

LABORATORY
(Common to ECE/ETE)
381
12L612/12T612
VERY LARGE SCALE INTEGRATION DESIGN LABORATORY

(Common to ECE/ETE)
12L613/12T613/12P514/12F514
12A651/12M651/12C651/12L651/12T651/12E651/12N651/12P651/12F651 MINI PROJECT

ELECTIVES
12T001
MEDICAL ELECTRONICS
3
OBJECTIVES:
To study the concepts of bio-potentials and the methods adopted to record them.
To learn the methods followed to analyze human body conditions.
To know about the methods and instruments used in diagnostic data collection and treatment of
human body.
To update the advances in the biomedical instrumentation and to learn the safe handling of
biomedical instruments.
OUTCOMES:
identify various devices used in medical field.
utilize various devices used to diagnose and save human life.
apply bio-telemetry principles for data collection in biomedical engineering.
design and integrate various bio-medical systems and equipments.
apply recent techniques in medical instrumentation.
UNIT I
9
The origin of Bio-potentials Biopotential electrodes Biological amplifiers ECG EEG EMG PCG
EOG Lead systems Recording methods Typical waveforms Signal characteristics.
UNIT II
PH PO2 PCO2 PHCO3 Electrophoresis Calorimeter Photometer Auto analyzer Blood flow
counters.
UNIT III
9
Cardiac pacemakers DC defibrillator Telemetry principles Frequency selection Bio-telemetry,
radio-pill Tele-stimulation.
UNIT IV
9
Ionosing radiation Diagnostic X-ray equipments Use of radio isotope in diagnosis Radiation Therapy.
UNIT V
9
equipment.
TOTAL: 45
382
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
1.
2.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Leislie Cromwell
and measurement
2007
Khandpur R S
Instrumentation
Tata McGraw-Hill
2003
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Joseph J Carr
John M Brown
Prentice Hall
2001
2.
Geddes Baker
Principles of applied
John Willey
1989
3.
Myer Kutz
Standard hand book of Bio

medical Engineering and
Design
Tata McGraw-Hill
2009
4.
John G webster
John Willey
2004
WEB URLs:
1. http://www.wisegeek.com/what-are-the-different-types-of-radiology-equipment.html
2. http://www.arrownac.com/services-tools/design/whitepapers/ti_trends_in_med_devices.pdf
3. http://mx.nthu.edu.tw/~yucsu/3271/p07.pdf
4. http://www.nc3rs.org.uk/category.asp?catID=37
12T002
BLUETOOTH TECHNOLOGY
3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the GSM networks, architecture and various telephone network standards.
To understand the CDMA standard and various CDMA channels and technical differences
between GSM and CDMA.
To understand the how Bluetooth devices operate in the frequency band where other devices
operate including wireless LAN, microwave ovens, Cordless telephones, and Wireless video
cameras.
To understand the concept of Bluetooth host.

OUTCOMES:
identify, formulate and solve engineering problems.
design a system, component or process as per needs and specifications.

visualize and work on laboratory and multi- disciplinary tasks.
use modern engineering tools, softwares and equipment to analyze problems.
analyze the concept of Zigbee protocol
383
UNIT I
THE BLUETOOTH MODULE
9
Introduction Overview Bluetooth module Antennas Base band Introduction to bluetooth device
address Masters Slaves Pico nets System timing Physical links Bluetooth packet structure
Logical channels Frequency hopping.
UNIT II
THE LINK CONTROLLER
9
The link controller link control protocol Link controller operation Pico net, scatter net operation
Master/slave role switching Base band/link controller architectural overview Link manager The host
controller interface.
UNIT III
THE BLUETOOTH HOST
9
The bluetooth host Logical link control Adaptation protocol RFCOMM The service discovery
protocol The wireless access protocol OBEX and IrDA telephony control protocol.
UNIT IV
CROSS LAYER FUNCTIONS
9
Cross layer functions Encryption and security Low power operations Controlling low power modes
Hold mode Sniff mode Park mode Quality of service Managing bluetooth devices.
UNIT V
ZIGBEE NETOWRKS
9
Zigbee communication basics Zigbee network layers and their functions Zigbee MAC series MAC
frame format Transceiver building block Receiver sensitivity 2.4 GHz and 868/915 MHz operation
FCC regulations Applications Home automation Healthcare Industrial automation.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOK:
SI. No
1.
Author(s)
Jennifer Bray Charles F
Sturman
Title of the Book

Bluetooth: Connect
Without Cables
Publisher
Pearson
Education
Year of Publication
2002
REFERENCE BOOKS:
SI. No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Jennifer Bray
Brain Senese
Gordon McNutt
Bill Munday
Bluetooth Application
Developers Guide
Syngress Media
2001
2.
Micheal Mille
Discovering Bluetooth
Sybex Incorporation
2001
WEB URLs:
1. http://www.techradar.com
2. http://www.askville.amazon.com/Bluetooth-technology
3. http://www.mashable.com
4. http://www.msdn.microsoft.com
5. http://www.wirelessdesignonline.com
12T003
BIOELECTRONICS AND BIOSENSORS

3
OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge and understanding of ECG,EEG and EGG.
To impart knowledge and understanding of sensors.
To impart knowledge and understanding of non stationary signals and pattern classification.
To understand about modeling of Biomedical system.
To understand about compression of digital biomedical signals.
384
OUTCOMES:
demonstrate various devices used in medical field.
explain about different types of sensors and transducers.
describe the electro mechanical models of signal generation.
be model biomedical systems.
analyze of digital compression technique.
UNIT I
BIOMEDICAL SIGNALS
9
Nature of biomedical signals Types Action potential Electrocardiogram (ECG) Electromyogram
(EMG) Electroencephalogram (EEG) Electroneurogram (ENG) Event related potentials
Electrogastrogram (EGG) Phonocardiogram (PCG) Speech signals.
UNIT II
SENSORS, TRANSDUCERS AND AMPLIFIERS
9
Resistive Capacitive Inductive Piezoelectric Thermocouple Thermistors Fiber Optic sensors
Radiation sensors Smart sensors Electro chemical sensors Electrical Fibrosensors Blood -Glucose
sensors Operational amplifiers Inverting Non inverting Differential Instrumentation amplifiers
Preamplifiers Isolation amplifiers Active filters.
UNIT III
ANALYSIS OF NON STATIONARY SIGNALS AND PATTERN

CLASSIFICATION
9
EEG rhythms and waves Characterization of non-stationary signals and dynamic systems Fixed
segmentation Adaptive segmentation Supervised Unsupervised pattern classification Probabilistic
models and statistical decision Regression analysis.
UNIT IV
MODELING BIOMEDICAL SYSTEMS
9
Parametric system modeling Autoregressive or all-pole modeling Pole-zero modeling
Electromechanical models of signal generation Application Heart rate variability Spectral modeling
and analysis of ECG signals.
UNIT V
COMPRESSION OF DIGITAL BIOMEDICAL SIGNALS
9
Fourier transform and time frequency analysis (Wavelet) of biomedical signals Processing of random and
stochastic signals Spectral estimation Properties and effects of noise in biomedical instruments
Filtering in biomedical instruments Direct Digital Compression Techniques Transformation
Compression Techniques.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
S. No.
Author(s)
1.
Reddy D C
2.
John G.Webster
3.
Rangayyan
Title of the Book

Biomedical Signal
Processing, Principles and
Techniques
application and Design,
Biomedical Signal
Analysis
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Tata McGraw-Hill
2005
John Wiley & Sons
2001
Wiley
2002
REFERENCE BOOKS:
S. No.
Author(s)
1.
Rangaraj M
Rangayyan
2.
Joseph D Bronzino
Title of the Book

Biomedical Signal
Analysis
The Biomedical
Engineering Handbook
385
Publisher
Year of
Publication
A case study
Approach, IEEE Press
2002
CRC Press, IEEE Press
2000
3.
Kenneth E Banner
Gonzalo R Arce
4.
Khandpur R S
Nonlinear Signal and

Image Processing
Theory methods and
Applications
Instrumentation
CRC Press, New York
2003

Delhi
2003
WEB URLs:
1. http://www.nanobiosensors.org
2. http:// www.see.ed.ac.uk
3. http:// www.diva-portal.org
4. http:// www.gwent.org
5. http://www.ornl.gov
12T004
TELEVISION AND VIDEO ENGINEERING

3
OBJECTIVES:
To learn TV picture characteristics, composite video signal structure and camera tubes.
To understand the basic principles of monochrome television.
To study the various colour Television systems and their standards.
To study the fundamentals of digital television and High definition television.
OUTCOMES:
explain the working of video camera tubes and the structure of composite video signal.
identify various blocks of a monochrome and colour television receiver and intermediate signal
formats.
explain the international standards followed in TV broadcasting and reception.
compare digital broadcast to analogue broadcast system.
describe the operation of television transmitter and satellite TV systems.
UNIT I
FUNDAMENTALS OF TELEVISION
9
Geometry form and aspect ratio Image continuity Number of scanning lines Interlaced scanning
Picture resolution Camera tubes Image orthicon Vidicon Plumbicon Silicon diode array vidicon
Solid state image scanners Monochrome picture tubes Composite video signal Video signal
dimension Horizontal sync-composition Vertical sync-details Functions of vertical pulse train
Scanning sequence details Picture signal transmission Positive and negative modulation VSB
transmission Sound signal transmission Standard channel bandwidth.
UNIT II
MONOCHROME TELEVISION TRANSMITTER AND RECEIVER
9
TV transmitter TV signal propagation Interference TV transmission antennas Monochrome TV
receiver RF tuner UHF VHF tuner Digital tuning techniques AFT IF subsystems AGC Noise
cancellation Video and sound inter carrier detection Vision IF subsystem Video amplifiers
requirements and configurations DC re-insertion Video amplifier circuits Sync separation Typical
sync processing circuits Deflection current waveform Deflection oscillators Frame deflection circuit
requirements Line Deflection circuits EHT generation receiver antennas.
UNIT III
ESSENTIALS OF COLOUR TELEVISION
9
Compatibility Colour perception Three colour theory Luminance Hue and saturation Colour
television cameras Values of luminance and colour difference signals Colour television display tubes
Delta Gun-precision In-line and trinitron colour picture tubes Purity and convergence Purity and
static and dynamic convergence adjustments Pincushion correction techniques Automatic degaussing
circuit Grey scale tracking Colour signal transmission Bandwidth Modulation of colour difference
signals Weighting factors Formation of chrominance signal.
386
UNIT IV
COLOUR TELEVISION SYSTEM
9
NTSC colour TV system NTSC colour receiver Limitations of NTSC system PAL colour TV system
Cancellation of phase errors PAL D colour system PAL coder Decolour receiver Chromo signal
amplifier Separation of U and V signals Colour burst separation Burst phase discriminator ACC
amplifier Reference oscillator Ident and colour killer circuits U and V demodulators Colour signal
matrixing Merits and demerits of the PAL system SECAM system Merits and demerits of SECAM
system.
UNIT V
ADVANCED TELEVISION SYSTEMS
9
Satellite TV technology Cable TV VCR Video disc recording and playback Tele text broadcast
receiver Digital television Transmission and reception Projection television LCD LED Flat
panel display TV receiver Stereo sound in TV HDTV 3D TV EDTV Digital equipments for TV
studios.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
1.
Gulati R R
2.
Dhake A M
Title of the Book

Monochrome Television
Practice Principles
Technology and servicing
Engineering
Publisher
Year of
Publication

Publishers
2005
Tata Mc-Graw Hill
2006
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
1.
Gulati R R
2.
Bali S P
Title of the Book

Monochrome and colour
television
Colour Television Theory and
Practice
Publisher
Year of
Publication

Publishers
2007
Tata Mc-Graw Hill
2007
WEB URLs:
1. http://www.ntsc-tv.com/ntsc-main-01.html
2. http://www.transmitter.com/rflinks.html
3. http://williamson-labs.com/480-tv.html
4. http://www.axis.com/files/whitepaper/wp_axis_hdtv_33947_en_0812_lo.pdf
5. http://www.cybercollege.com/tvp042.html
12T005
NANOELECTRONICS
3
OBJECTIVES:
To perform simple analysis of nanoelectronic device.
To understand the electrical properties nano device.
To understand the effects of nanoscaling in a device.
To understand the manufacturing of carbon nanotubes.
OUTCOMES:
elaborate different types of microscopes which uses nanotechnology.
describe the fundamentals of nanotechnologies.
explain the MOSFETS of nanosize.
analyze the carbon nanotubes.
demonstrate the applications of molecular electronics.
387
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO NANOTECHNOLOGY
9
Background to nanotechnology Types of nanotechnology and nanomachines Periodic table Atomic
structure Molecules and phases Energy Molecular and atomic size Surface and dimensional space
Top-down and bottom-up Molecular Nanotechnology Electron microscope Scanning electron
microscope Atomic force microscope Scanning tunnelling microscope Nanomanipulator
Nanotweezers Atom manipulation Nanodots Self assembly Dip pen nanolithography
Nanomaterial Preparation Plasma arcing Chemical vapor deposition Sol-gels Electrodeposition
Ball milling Applications of nanomaterials.
UNIT II
FUNDAMENTALS OF NANOELECTRONICS
9
Fundamentals of logic devices Requirements Dynamic properties Threshold gates Physical limits to
computations Concepts of logic devices Classifications Two terminal devices Field effect devices
Coulomb blockade devices Spintronics Quantum cellular automata Quantum computing DNA
computer Performance of information processing systems Basic binary operations Measure of
performance processing 48 capability of biological neurons Performance estimation for the human brain
Ultimate computation Power dissipation limit Dissipation in reversible computation The ultimate
computer.
UNIT III
SILICON MOSFETS AND QUANTUM TRANSPORT DEVICES
9
Silicon MOSFETS Novel materials and alternate concepts Fundamentals of MOSFET devices
Scaling rules Silicon-dioxide based gate dielectrics Metal gates Junctions and contacts Advanced
MOSFET concepts Quantum transport devices based on resonant tunneling Electron tunneling
Resonant tunneling diodes Resonant tunneling devices Single electron devices for logic applications
Single electron devices Applications of single electron devices to logic circuits.
UNIT IV
CARBON NANOTUBES
9
Carbon Nanotube Fullerenes Types of nanotubes Formation of nanotubes Assemblies Purification
of carbon nanotubes Electronic properties Synthesis of carbon nanotubes Carbon nanotube
interconnects Carbon nanotube FETs Nanotube for memory applications Prospects of all carbon
nanotube nanoelectronics.
UNIT V
MOLECULAR ELECTRONICS
9
Electrodes and contacts Functions Molecular electronic devices First test systems Simulation and
circuit design Fabrication Future applications MEMS Robots Random access memory Mass
storage devices.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOK:
SI.NO
1.
Author(s)
Michael Wilson,
Kamali Kannangara,
Geoff Smith,
Michelle Simmons
Burkhard Raguse
Title of the Book
Publisher
Nanotechnology: Basic
Science and Emerging
Technologies
Chapman &
Hall / CRC
Year of
Publication
2002
REFERENCE BOOKS:
SI.NO
1.
2.
Author(s)
Pradeep T
Rainer Waser
Title of the Book

NANO: The Essentials
Understanding Nanoscience and
Nanotechnology
Nanoelectronics and Information
Technology: Advanced
Electronic Materials and Novel
Devices
388
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Tata Mc-Graw Hill
2007
VCH
2003
WEB URLs:
1. http://www.nano.iisc.ernet.in/inup
2. http://www.egr.msu.edu
3. http:// www.cense.iisc.ernet.in/research/nanoelectronics
4. https://www.src.org/program/nri
5. http://www.neno-tech-views.com
12T006
BROADBAND COMMUNICATION
3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand about ISDN.
To understand the technique involved to support real-time traffic and congestion control.
To analyze about the knowledge of ATM.
To be provided with a knowledge of B-ISDN architecture and standards.
OUTCOMES:
explain the basics of ISDN.
describe the next generation internet and to face the challenges and problems..
realize the knowledge of Broadband.
apply the concepts in Real time communication over Internet.
demonstrate the ATM switching, traffic and congestion control.
UNIT I
ISDN
9
Switching techniques Principles of ISDN Architecture ISDN standards I-series recommendations
Transmission structure User network interface ISDN protocol architecture ISDN connections
Addressing Interworking.
UNIT II
B-ISDN ARCHITECTURE AND STANDARDS, B-ISDN SERVICES
9
B-ISDN standards Broadband services B-ISDN architecture B-ISDN protocol reference model BISDN physical layer SONET/SDH SONET Requirement.
UNIT III
FRAME RELAY
9
Frame relay protocols and services Background Frame-mode protocol architecture Frame-Mode call
control Frame relay congestion control Congestion in frame relay network Approach to congestion
control Traffic rate management Explicit congestion avoidance Implicit congestion control.
UNIT IV
ATM-OVERVIEW, VIRTUAL CHANNELS
9
Virtual paths VP and VC switching ATM cells Header format Generic flow control Header error
control Transmission of ATM cells Adaptation layer AAL services and protocols Requirements for
ATM Traffic and Congestion control Cell-delay Variation ATM service categories.
UNIT V
ATM SWITCHING, TRAFFIC AND CONGESTION CONTROL
9
ATM switching building blocks ATM cell processing in a switch Matrix type switch Input and output
buffering Central buffering Performance aspects of buffering switching networks Traffic and
Congestion control framework Traffic control Congestion control.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
1.
Author(s)
Erwin Kreyszig
Title of the Book

ISDN and Broadband ISDN
with Frame Relay and
ATM
389
Publisher
William Satllings
PHI pub
Year of
Publication
2009
2.
Cajetan M Akujuobi
Matthew N O
Sadiku
Introduction to Broadband
Taylor & Francis
2008
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Balajikumar
Broadband Communications
Tata Mac-Graw Hill
1998
2.
Danny H K Tsang
Paul J Khn
Broadband Communications:
Convergence of Network
Technologies
Kulwer Academic
Publisher
2000
WEB URLs:
1. http://www.slideshare,net/adeeb 550/broadband-communication
2. http://www.cortina-system.com
3. http://www.webopedia.com/term/B/broadband.html
4. http://www.sandvine.com
5. http:// www.hughesnetbroadband.in
12T007
HIGH SPEED NETWORKS

3
OBJECTIVES:
To introduce about ATM and Frame relay.
To obtain up to date survey of developments in High Speed Networks.
To support real time traffic and congestion control.
To analyze the different level of quality of service to different application.
OUTCOMES:
explain the basics of high speed networking technology.
demonstrate the knowledge of network planning and optimization.
realize the concept learnt in this course to optimize and troubleshoot high-speed network.
design and configure network that have outcome characteristics needed to support a specified set
of applications.
describe the congestion and traffic management.
UNIT I
HIGH SPEED NETWORKS
9
Frame Relay Networks Asynchronous transfer mode ATM protocol architecture ATM logical
connection ATM Cell ATM service categories AAL High speed LANs Fast ethernet Gigabit
ethernet Fiber channel Wireless LANs Applications Requirements Architecture of 802.11
UNIT II
CONGESTION AND TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT
9
Queuing analysis Queuing models Single server queues Effects of congestion Congestion control
Traffic management Congestion control in packet switching networks Frame relay congestion control.
UNIT III
TCP AND ATM CONGESTION CONTROL
9
TCP flow control TCP congestion control Retransmission Timer management Exponential RTO
backoff KARNs algorithm Window management Performance of TCP over ATM Traffic and
congestion control in ATM Requirements Attributes Traffic management frame work Traffic
control ABR traffic management ABR rate control RM cell formats ABR capacity allocations
GFR traffic management.
UNIT IV
INTEGRATED AND DIFFERENTIATED SERVICES
9
Integrated services architecture Approach Components Services Queuing discipline FQ PS
BRFQ GPS WFQ Random early detection Differentiated services
390
UNIT V
PROTOCOLS FOR QOS SUPPORT
9
RSVP Goals and characteristics Data flow RSVP operations Protocol mechanisms Multiprotocol
label switching Operations Label stacking Protocol details RTP Protocol architecture Data
transfer protocol RTCP.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
William Stallings
High Speed Networks And

Internet
Pearson Education
2002
2.
Kaveh Pahlavan,
Prashant Krishnamurthy
Principles of wireless
networks
Prentice Hall PTR
2002
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
1.
2.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Warland
Pravin Varaiya
High Performance
Jean Harcourt Asia Pvt.

Ltd
Irvan Pepelnjk
Jim Guichard
Jeff Apcar
MPLS and VPN

architecture
Cisco Press, Volume

One and Two
Year of
Publication
2001
2003
WEB URLs:
1. http://www.comp.nus.edu.sg/~cs5224
2. http://www.sterbenz.org/jpgs/tutorials/hsn
3. http://www.cs.umbc.edu/~jhsn
4. http://www.cse.wustl.edu/~jain/cis788-99/ftp/qos_protocols/
5. http://www.cse.wustl.edu/~jain/cis788-95/ftp/atm_cong.pdf
12T008
COMPUTER ARCHITECTURE
3
OBJECTIVES:
To study basic computer organization.
To learn and analyze various central processing architectures.
To learn the concepts of arithmetic processing.
To understand memory concepts and organization used in computing systems.
OUTCOMES:
develop independent learning skills about computer architectures and hardware.
specify suitable architecture, memory interfacing and performance measures in a computer
system.
apply multiprocessing strategies and their potential.
apply cache and virtual memory concepts in processors.
explain the concept of parallel processing architectures.
UNIT I
BASIC COMPUTER ORGANISATION
10
Register transfer language Register Bus and memory transfers Arithmetic Logic and shift micro
operations Instruction codes Instructions Timing and control Instruction cycle Fetch Decode
and execution Typical register and memory sequence instructions Input Output and interrupt
Design stages.
391
UNIT II
CENTRAL PROCESSOR ORGANISATION
9
General register organisation Stack organisation Instruction formats Addressing modes Data
transfer and manipulation Program control Control memory Address sequencer Data path structure
CISC characteristics RISC Characteristics RISC pipeline.
UNIT III
ARITHMETIC PROCESSING
8
Introduction Addition Subtraction Multiplication Division algorithms Floating point arithmetic
operations BCD arithmetic operations
UNIT IV
MEMORY AND INPUT/OUTPUT ORGANISATION
9
Basic concepts Memory hierarchy Main memory Auxiliary memory Associative memory Cache
and virtual memory concepts Input Output interface Asynchronous data transfer Modes of transfer
Direct memory access I/O processor.
UNIT V
INTRODUCTION TO PARALLEL PROCESSING
9
Parallelism in uniprocessor systems Taxonomy of architectures SISD SIMD MISD MIMD modes
of memory access Shared memory Distributed memory Typical applications.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOK:
Sl. No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
Morris Mano M
Computer System Architecture
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Prentice Hall of India ,

New Delhi
2008
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Sl. No
Author(s)
1.
Carl Hamacher
V Vranesic Z G
Zaky S G
Computer Organisation

Edition, New York
2002
2.
Kai Hwang
Briggs F A

Parallel Processing

Edition, New York
1985
3.
John P Hayes

Editions
1998
4.
William Stallings
Pearson Prentice Hall
2006
5.
David A Pattern
John L Hennessy

Organization
Architecture: Designing for
Performance
Design
Morgan Kaufmann
Publications, USA
2007
6.
Andrew S
Tanenbaum
Structured Computer
Organization
1999
WEB URLs:
1. http://www.amazon.com/computer-architecture-Quantitative-approachEdition/dp/1558605967#reader-15558605967
2. http://ocw.mit.edu/courses/electrical-engineering-and-computer-science/6-823-computersystem- architecture-fall-2005
3. http:// www.hughesnetbroadband.in
4. http://www.csi.ucd.ie
5. http://compnetworking.about.com/od/basiccomputerarchitecture
392
12T009
RF CIRCUIT DESIGN
3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the concepts of transmission line theory and the behavior of passive components at
high frequency.
To study the design concepts and methods used for RF sub systems such as RF filters, RF
amplifiers and RF mixers.
To learn the impedance matching networks in an RF multiport network.
To learn the fabrication of RF active components.
To design the RF amplifiers, RF oscillators and RF Mixers.
OUTCOMES:
analyze the behavior of transmission line primary (passive) and secondary parameters at radio
frequency.
design RF filter to eliminate noise at radio frequency levels.
analyze the design of perfectly matched multiport RF networks.
describe the fabrications of RF active elements like RF diode, RF-BJT and RF-FET.
design and explain the operation of RF amplifiers, oscillators and Mixers.
UNIT I
9
Importance of radiofrequency design Dimensions and units Frequency spectrum RF Behavior of
passive components Transmission line analysis: General transmission line equation Micro strip
transmission line Terminated lossless transmission line Special termination Sourced and loaded
transmission line Smith Chart Impedance transformation Admittance transformation.
UNIT II
SINGLE AND MULTI PORT NETWORK THEORY AND RF FILTER DESIGN 9
Basic definitions Interconnecting networks Network properties and applications S parameters
Basic resonator and filter configurations Special filter realizations Filter implementation.
UNIT III
9
Impedance matching using discrete components Micro strip line matching networks Amplifier and
UNIT IV
9
Components: RF diode RF bipolar junction transistor RF field effect transistor Modeling: Diode
model Transistor model FET model Characteristics of amplifiers Amplifier power relations
Stability relations Constant gain.
UNIT V
Basic oscillator model High frequency oscillator model Basic characteristics of mixers.
9
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOK:
Sl.No.
1.
Author(s)
Reinhold Ludwig
Pavel Bretchko
Title of the Book

RF Circuit Design
Publisher
Pearson Education
Year of
Publication
2001
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Matthew M
Radmanesh
Radio Frequency and Microwave

Electronics illustrated
Pearson Education
2001
2.
Peter P Kenington
High linearity RF Amplifier

Design
Artech House Mumbai
2002
393
WEB URLs:
1. http://www.ssc.pe.titech.ac.jp/materials/VLSICS03_shortcourse_matsu_homepage.pdf
2. http://pesona.mmu.edu.my/~wlkung/ADS/ads.html
3. http://ee.eng.usm.my/eeacad/mandeep/EEE436/chp%203.pdf
4. http://ece.wpi.edu/RF_Circuit_Design/chapter4.html
5. http://www.qsl.net/va3iul/RF%20Mixers/RF_Mixers.pdf
12T010
WIRELESS NETWORKS
3
OBJECTIVES
To understand the fundamental concepts of Wireless networking.
To familiarize with the basic taxonomy and terminology of the wireless networking area.
To introduce the advanced wireless communication concepts.
To gain expertise in design and maintenance of individual networks.
OUTCOMES:
describe basic wireless network technology.
explain wireless system and its components.
identify the different types of network topologies and protocols.
identify the different types of network devices and their functions within a network.
apply the skills of network planning, operation and security mechanisms in real time wireless
networks.
UNIT I
9
Wired transmission techniques: Design of wireless modems power efficiency out of band radiation
Applied wireless transmission techniques Short distance base band transmission UWB pulse
transmission Broad modems for higher speeds Diversity and smart receiving techniques Random
UNIT II
9
Wireless networks topologies Cellular topology Cell fundamentals signal to interference ratio
calculation Capacity expansion techniques Cell splitting Use of directional antennas for cell sectoring
Micro cell method Overload cells Channels allocation techniques and capacity expansion.
UNIT III
WIRELESS WAN
9
Mechanism to support a mobile environment- communication in the infrastructure IS-95 CDMA forward
channel IS-95 CDMA reverse channel Packet and frame formats in IS-95 IMT-2000 Forward
channel in W-CDMA and CDMA 2000 Reverse channels in W-CDMA and CDMA-2000 GPRS and
higher data rates Short messaging service in GPRS mobile application protocols.
UNIT IV
SECURITY
Security policies for wireless networks Defining the SSID
TKIP EAP and radius.
9
Encryption and authentication: WEP
UNIT V
9
IEEE 802.15 WPAN Home RF Bluetooth Interface between Bluetooth and 802.11 Wireless
geolocation Technologies for wireless geolocation Geolocation standards for E.911 service
Configuring a Wi-Fi access point Configuring a Wi-Fi card in a laptop Case studies.
TOTAL: 45
394
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
Kaveh Pahlavan
Prashant Krishnamoorthy
Networks- A united
approach
2.
Mathew S Gast
3.
Siva Ram Murthy C
Publisher
Year of
Publishing
2009
Pearson Education
Shroff Publisher &
Distributors
Pearson Education
2006
2004
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
Jochen Schiller
2.
Wang X
Poor H V
3.
Mallick M
Systems
essentials
4.
Nicopolitidis P
Obaidat M S
Papadimitria G I
Pomportsis A S
Wireless Networks
Publisher
Pearson Education
Year of
Publishing
2003
Pearson Education
2004
Wiley Publishing In
2003
John Wiley & Sons
2003
WEB URLs:
3. http://documentation.netgear.com/reference/fra/wireless/WirelessNetworkingBasics-3-09.html
4. http://www.techhive.com/article/192803/geolo.html
5. http://www.networkcomputing.com/netdesign/wireless1.html
12T011

3
OBJECTIVES:
To learn the basic concepts of sensors used in MEMS.
To learn the various characteristics of MEMS materials.
To gain the knowledge in fabrication of MEMS ICs.
To demonstrate the knowledge of MEMS in various applications.
OUTCOMES:
apply and analyze the techniques for fabrication of MEMS ICs and devices.
explore the knowledge in MEMS device fabrication for various applications.

design the RF switches using MEMS.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Historical perspective Silicon microelectronics MEMS Introduction to micro sensors MEMS
examples Application of MEMS.
395
UNIT II
MEMS MATERIALS
9
Metal and metal alloys Semiconductors Polymers Ceramic materials Composite materials Piezo
UNIT III
9
MEMS and IC fabrication cycle: Silicon wafer fabrication Crystal growth Thin film deposition
evaporation Types spin casting: oxidation of silicon Dry, wet.
UNIT IV
9
Lithography: Photo-resist Pattern transfer Etching Wet Dry Doping Metallization Bonding
and packaging Micromachining.
UNIT V
MEMS SWITCH DESIGN
9
RF MEMS switches: Introduction Switch parameters Basics of switching and switches for RF and
microwave applications Electrostatic switching Approaches for low actuation Voltage switches
Introduction to SAW devices Bulk acoustic wave filters.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOK:
Sl.No.
1.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Julian Gardner
Vijay Vardan K
Osama O A

Smart Devices
Publisher
Year of
Publication
John wiley and sons
2002
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
Fukuda T
Menz W

MEMS and MOEMS
Technology and Applications
2.
Rai Choudary P
3.
Stephen Senthuria D
4.
5.
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Elsevier
2002
SPIE Press
2000
Microsystem Design
Kluwer Academic
Publishers
2002
Vijay vardan K
Vinoy K J
Jose KA
RF MEMS and
TheirApplications
John wiley and

sons
2003
Tai Ran Hsu
Mems and Microsystems

Design
Tata McGraw-Hill
2002
WEB URLs:
1. http://www.memsnet.org/about/what-is.html
2. http://www.coventor.com/pdfs/RF_MEMS_Application.pdf
3. http://www.freescale.com/webapp/sps/site/overview.jsp?code=SNSMEMSOVERVIEW
4. https://www.mems-exchange.org/MEMS
5. https://www.understandingnano.com/mems.html
12T012
3
OBJECTIVES:
To know the basic elements of light source in relation with solid state physics.
To study the concept of photo luminescence applied in electronic display devices.
To understand the LASER action concepts along with its model and applications.
To study the operation of optical detection devices.
396
OUTCOMES:
describe the concepts of wave optics applied in real time electronics.
analyze the various photo luminescence types applied in LCDs and numeric displays.
explain the operation of LASER, LASER models, LASER classes and LASER applications.
describe the operating principle of photo detector, photo diodes and other optical detection
devices.
apply the concepts of modulation in optic modulators.
UNIT I
9
Wave nature of light Polarization Interference Diffraction Light source Review of quantum
mechanical concept Review of solid state physics Review of semiconductor physics and semiconductor
junction device.
UNIT II
9
Introduction Photo luminescence Cathode luminescence Electro luminescence Injection
luminescence Injection luminescence LED Plasma display Liquid crystal displays Numeric
displays Laser Emission Absorption Radiation Population inversion Optical feedback Threshold
condition Laser modes Classes of laser Mode locking Laser applications.
UNIT III
9
performance.
UNIT IV
9
Introduction Analog and digital modulation Electro-optic modulators Magneto-optic Devices
Acoustoptic devices Optical switching and logic devices.
9
UNIT V
OPTOELECTRONIC INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
Introduction Hybrid and monolithic integration Application of optoelectronic integrated circuits
Integrated transmitters and receivers Guided wave devices.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOK:
Sl.No.
1.
Author(s)
Wilson J
Haukes J
Title of the Book

Opto Electronics An
Introduction
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1998
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Bhattacharya
Semiconductor Opto
Electronic Devices

Pvt., Ltd., New Delhi
2004
2.
Jasprit Singh
Opto Electronics As
and devices
Tata McGraw-Hill
1998
WEB URLs:
1. http://ece-www.colorado.edu/~bart/book/book/chapter4/ch4_6.html
2. http://www.lastek.co.kr/updata/f11625189561.pdf
3. http://solid.fizica.unibuc.ro/cursuri/solid_en/curs_solid_EN.pdf
4. http://hyperphysics.phy-astr.gsu.edu/hbase/optmod/qualig.html
5. http://www.tpub.com/neets/tm/111-1.html
397
12T013

3
OBJECTIVES:
To gain knowledge in modeling of different communication systems.
To know the techniques involved in performance estimation of telecommunication systems.
To learn the use of random process concepts in telecommunication system simulation.
To study the modeling methodologies of a telecommunication system.
OUTCOMES:
apply the constituents of a telecommunication systems.
analyze various modeling methodologies and simulation techniques.
estimate the performance measures of telecommunication systems.
apply system modeling in telecommunication.
demonstrate light wave communication and satellite communication systems.
UNIT I
SIMULATION OF RANDOM VARIABLES AND RANDOM PROCESS
9
Generation of random numbers and sequence Gaussian and uniform random numbers Correlated
random sequences Testing of random number generators Stationary and uncorrelated noise Goodness
of fit test.
UNIT II
9
Radio frequency and optical sources Analog and digital signals Communication channel and model
Free space channels Multipath channel and discrete channel Noise and interference.
UNIT III
9
method Importance of sampling method Extreme value theory.
UNIT IV
9
UNIT V
CASE STUDIES
9
Simulations of QAM digital radio link in environment Light wave communication link and satellite
system.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOK:
Sl.No.
1.
Author(s)
Jeruchim M C
Balaban P
Sam K Shanmugam
Title of the Book

Simulation of
and Techniques
Publisher
Plenum press , New
York
Year of
Publication
2002
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Averill M Law
David Kelton W

Analysis
McGraw-Hill Inc
2006
2.
Geoffrey Gorden
System Simulation
1998
3.
Turin W
Systems
Computer Science
Press, New York
1990
398
4.
Jerry banks
John S Carson

Simulation
2005
WEB URLs:
4. http:// www.webopedia.com/TERM/O/optoelectronics.html
5. http:// www.ece.rutgers.edu
12T014
ADAPTIVE SIGNAL PROCESSING

3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the problems, algorithms and solutions for processing signals in a manner that is
responsive to a changing environment.
To study the need for adaptation which take the advantage of statistical properties of the received
signals.
To study about Newtons algorithm, Steepest Descent algorithm and to analyse their performance.
To design and analyze the performance of adaptive filters and its application.
OUTCOMES:
elaborate the concept of adaptation and also about the uses in wider field of applications.
identify applications in which it would be possible to use the different adaptive filtering
approaches.
model based estimation methods for signals and systems whose properties change in time.
do troubleshooting.
describe the different filtering approaches.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Need for adaptation Areas of application Open and closed loop adaptation An adaptive linear
combiner Input signals Weight vectors Desired response and error Performance function gradient
and minimum mean squared error Decorrelation of error and input with optimum weights.
UNIT II
ADAPTATION THEORY
9
Input correlation matrix Eigen values and eigen vectors and their geometric significance Methods of
searching the performance surface Gradient search methods Stability Rate of convergence The
learning curve.
UNIT III
NEWTONS METHOD AND STEEPEST DESCENT ALGORITHMS
9
Newtons method (Multi dimensional space) and method of steepset descent for gradient search
Comparison of learning curves Gradient estimation from measurement derivatives Performance
Penalty with multiple weights Variance of gradient estimate and its effect on weight vector solution
Time constants and misadjustment Comparison of Newtons method and method of steepest descent.
UNIT IV
ADAPTIVE ALGORITHMS AND STRUCTURE
9
The least mean square (LMS) algorithm Convergence of weight vector Learning curve Noise in
weight vector solution Misadjustment Performance Expressing performance function in terms of
transfer function H(z) of the adaptive system and the signal Power spectra The ideal LMS / Newtons
algorithm and its properties The sequential regression algorithm Advantages and disadvantages of
adaptive recursive filters LMS algorithm for recursive filters Random search algorithms Lattice
predictor Adaptive filters with orthogonal signals.
399
UNIT V
APPLICATIONS OF ADAPTIVE SIGNAL PROCESSING
9
Adaptive modeling of multipath communication channels Adaptive equalisation of telephone channels
Adaptive interference cancellation 50Hz interference in ECG Maternal ECG in Foetal
Electrocardiography Noise in speech signals Echoes in long distance telephone circuits Adaptive
arrays and adaptive beam forming Side lobe cancellation.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No
Author(s)
2.
Bernard Widrow
Samuel D.Streams
Simon Haykin
3.
Monson H Hayes
1.
Title of the Book
Year of
Publication
Publisher
Prentice Hall
1985

Statistical Digital Signal
Processing
and Modeling
Pearson Education
2008

Singapore
2002
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No
1.
2.
3.
Author(s)
Simon Haykin
John G Proakis
Dimitris G
Manolakis
Dimitris G
Manolakis
Prentice Hall India
Year of
Publication
2002
Digital Signal
Processing
Pearson Education
2002
Statistical and Adaptive

Signal Processing
Tata McGraw Hill
2000
Title of the Book
Publisher
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
http://www-isl.stanford.edu/~widrow/papers/c1993adaptivesignal.pdf
http://isl-www.stanford.edu/~widrow/papers/c1959adaptivesampled.pdf
http://people.maths.ox.ac.uk/cartis/papers/cgt36.pdf
http://www.ee.iitb.ac.in/student/~sudheer/ASP_ECG.pdf
5. http://www.eit.lth.se/fileadmin/eit
12T015
REMOTE SENSING
3
OBJECTIVES:
To learn the components and concepts of remote sensing process.
To study the impact of Electromagnetic Radiation (EMR) on atmosphere and earth materials and
learn methods to interpret EMR data as tool in Remote sensing processing.
To learn data collection methods using satellite and Sonar systems.
To study the components, hardware and software involved in geographical information system.
OUTCOMES:
explain the key concepts and terminology used in remote sensing.
discuss the features of remote sensing for the study of the Earth environment.
describe the electromagnetic spectrum and the fundamental physical properties of radiation
suitable for use in remote sensing.
analyze the impact of visible microwave wavelength radiation on the terrestrial environment.
explain and interpret the thematic maps derived from remotely sensed data.
400
UNIT I
REMOTE SENSING
9
Definition Components of remote sensing Energy Sensor Interacting body MTI and pulse doppler
Radar Active and passive remote sensing Platforms Aerial and space platforms Balloons
Helicopters Aircraft and satellites Synoptivity and repetivity Electro Magnetic Radiation (EMR)
EMR spectrum Visible Infra red (IR) Near IR Middle IR Thermal IR and Microwave Black
Body Radiation Plancks law Stefan-Boltzman law.
UNIT II
9
Atmospheric characteristics Scattering of EMR Rayleigh Mie Non-selective and Raman scattering
EMR Interaction with water vapour and ozone Atmospheric windows Significance of atmospheric
windows EMR interaction with earth surface materials Radiance Irradiance Incident Reflected
Absorbed and transmitted energy Reflectance Specular and diffuse reflection surfaces Spectral
signature Spectral signature curves EMR interaction with water Soil and earth surface Imaging
UNIT III
9
Satellites Classification Based on orbits and purpose Satellite sensors Resolution Description of
Multi Spectral Scanning Along and Across track scanners Description of sensors in landsat SPOT
IRS series Current satellites Radar Speckle Back scattering Side looking airborne radar
Synthetic aperture radar Radiometer Geometrical characteristics Sonar remote sensing systems.
UNIT IV
9
GIS Components of GIS Hardware Software and organizational context Data Spatial and nonSpatial Maps Types of maps Projection Types of projection Data input Digitizer Scanner
editing Raster and vector data structures Comparison of raster and vector data structure Analysis
using raster and vector data Retrieval Reclassification Overlaying Buffering Data Output
Printers and Plotters.
UNIT V
9
Visual Interpretation of satellite images Elements of interpretation Interpretation keys Characteristics
of Digital Satellite Image Image enhancement Filtering Classification Integration of GIS and
remote sensing Application of remote sensing and GIS Urban applications Water resources Urban
analysis Watershed management Resources information systems Global positioning system
introduction.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
1.
2.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Srinivas M G
Remote Sensing
Applications
Narosa Publishing
House
2001
Anji Reddy
Remote Sensing and

Systems
BS Publications
2001
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
1.
Jensen J R

environment
Prentice Hall
2.
Kang - Tsung Chang
Information Systems
Tata Mcgraw-Hill
401
Year of
Publication
2000
2002
3.
Lillesand T M
Kiefer RW

Interpretation

Inc New York
1987
4.
Burrough P A

resource assessment
Oxford
2002
WEB URLs:
1. http://education.nationalgeographic.co.in/education/encyclopedia/geographic-informationsystem-gis/?ar_a=1
3. http://jan.ucc.nau.edu/~geog-p/geog/RemoteSensing/
5. http://www.iki.rssi.ru/asp/pub_sha1/pub_sha1.html
12T016
SECURE COMMUNICATION
3
OBJECTIVIES:
To enhance and extend the crisp understanding of fundamental concepts and technologies related
to the security of modern communication systems.
To analyse various Encryption, Authentication and Digital Signature Algorithms.
To deal with different purpose and application specific Security Protocols and Techniques.
To understand the issues related to the misuse of system security.
OUTCOMES:
identify, comprehend, and analyze vulnerabilities, threats, and attacks against a variety of modern
networked systems.
state clearly security properties and requirements of various algorithms such as RSA, HASH and
MAC for communication systems security solutions
analyze authentication services, mechanisms, and architectures that safeguard the network
operation against attacks
analyze qualitatively the overhead of security mechanisms, and refine their designs, in order to
ensure the effectiveness and efficiency of the secured communication systems
analyse and design a trusted system for secured communication.
UNIT I
COMMUNICATION SECURITY AND CONVENTIONAL ENCRYPTION
10
Introduction Threats and solutions Technical threats to communication security Conventional
Encryption Model Data Encryption Standard Block cipher Encryption algorithms Confidentiality
Key distribution.
UNIT II
PUBLIC KEY ENCRYPTION AND HASH AND MAC ALGORITHMS
9
Principles of public key cryptosystems RSA algorithm Diffie-Hellman key exchange Elliptic curve
cryptology Message authentication and hash Functions Hash and MAC Algorithms Digital signatures
and Digital signature standard.
UNIT III
AUTHENTICATION SERVICES AND E-MAIL SECURITY
8
Kerberos X.509 directory service Pretty good privacy Secure multipurpose internet mail extension.
UNIT IV
IP SECURITY AND WEB SECURITY
9
IP security overview IP security architecture Authentication header Encapsulating security payload
Security associations Key management Web security requirements Secure sockets layer Transport
layer security Secure electronic transaction layer Dual signature.
402
UNIT V
SYSTEM SECURITY
9
Intruders Intrusion detection techniques Malicious software Viruses and antivirus techniques
Digital immune systems Firewalls Design goals Limitations Types and configurations Trusted
systems.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS
SI.NO
Author(s)
1.
Roger J Sutton
2.
William Stallings
Title of the Book
Publisher
Secure Communications:
Applications and Management
Cryptography and network
security
Wiley
International
Prentice Hall
of India
Year of
Publication
2002
2006
REFERENCE BOOKS:
SI.NO
Author(s)
1.
Atul Kahate
2.
Eric Maiwald
Title of the Book

Security
Fundamentals of Network
Security
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Tata McGraw-Hill
2003
Tata McGraw-Hill
2003
WEB URLs:
1. http://studynet-work.blogspot.in/2011/09/encryption-for-data-on-network-security.html
2. http://www.thestudymaterial.com/presentation-seminar/electronics-presentation/53-cryptographypresentation.html?start=5
3. http://www.cisco.com/web/about/security/intelligence/nextgen_crypto.html
4. http://www.garykessler.net/library/crypto.html
5. http://www.cisco.com/web/about/ac123/ac147/ac174/ac197/about_cisco_ipj_archive_article09186
a00800c830b.html
12T017
MICROWAVE INTEGRATED CIRCUITS DESIGN

3
OBJECTIVIES:
To understand about the multiport and hybrid networks.
To understand about the analysis and fabrication of Couplers.
To understand about the different Microstrip lines and devices.
To understand about the fabrication technology of MICs.

OUTCOMES:
describe the basics of microstrip lines.
analyze the difference between the conventional tubes and the microwave tubes for the
analyze the microstrip lines and its circuit components.
explain the technologies that are used to manufacture microstrip lines.
describe the applications of the microwaves for today generation.
UNIT I
MICROSTRIP LINES - DESIGN AND ANALYSIS
9
Introduction Types of MICs and their technology Advantages and applications Propagating models
Analysis of MIC by conformal transformation Numerical analysis Hybrid mode analysis Losses in
microstrip Characteristic parameters of strip Introduction to slot line and coplanar waveguide Hybrid
MICs Monolithic MIC technology.
403
UNIT II
COUPLED MICROSTRIPS-DIRECTIONAL COUPLERS AND LUMPED

ELEMENTS FOR MICS
9
Introduction to coupled microstrip Even and odd mode analysis Directional couplers Branch line
couplers Design and fabrication of lumped elements for MICs Comparison with distributed circuits.
UNIT III
NONRECIPROCAL COMPONENTS FOR MICS
9
Nonreciprocal components for MICs Microstrip on ferrimagnetic substrates Microstrip circulators
Isolators and phase shifters Microwave transistors Parametric diodes and amplifiers PIN diodes
Microwave transistor circuits Design of microstrip circuits High power and low power circuits.
UNIT IV
MICROSTRIP CIRCUIT DESIGN AND APPLICATIONS
9
Introduction Impedance transformers Filters Lumped constant microstrip circuits Filters High
power circuits Low power circuits MICs in satellite and radar.
UNIT V
MMIC TECHNOLOGY
9
Fabrication process of MMIC Hybrid MICs Configuration Dielectric substances Thick and thin film
technology Hybrid MICs Testing methods Encapsulation and mounting devices.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Gupta KC
Amarjit Singh
Microwave Integrated circuits
Wiley Eastern
2011
2.
Hoffman R K
Handbook of Microwave Integrated

Circuits
Artech House,
Boston
1987
3.
Ramesh Garg
Inder Bahl
Maurizio Bozzi
Microstrip Lines and Slotlines
Artech House,
Boston
2013
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Ravender
Goyal
Monolithic MIC; Technology & Design
Artech House
1989
2.
Leo Young
Advances in Microwaves
Academic Press
2000
3.
Bharathi
Bhat
Koul S K
Stripline-like transmission lines for

microwave integrated circuits
New age
international
2007
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://ee.sharif.edu/~mmic/notes/Overview.pdf
http://www.prof-robertson.com/index_files/MICROSTRIP.pdf http://www.microsoft.com/sql
http://examcrazy.com/Engineering/ElectronicsCommunication/Coupled_Line_and_Lange_Directi
onal_Couplers.asp
www.site.uottawa.ca/~rhabash/MEMS4
http://www.ittc.ku.edu/~jstiles/723/handouts/section_10_5_Microwave_Integrated_Circuits_packa
ge.pdf
404
12T018

3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the Basics of Quality Management systems.
To introduce the Quality system standards.
To understand the Various TQM Principles.
OUTCOMES:
develop an understanding on quality management philosophy frameworks.
apply various tools and techniques of quality management systems.
select suitable tools and techniques in manufacturing industry for quality systems.
identify the key aspects of the quality improvement cycle, use appropriate tools, techniques for
controlling, improving and measuring quality.
critically appraise the organizational, communication and teamwork requirements for effective
quality management.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Definition of quality Dimensions of quality Quality planning Quality costs Analysis techniques for
quality costs Basic concepts of total quality management Historical review Principles of TQM
Leadership Concepts Role of senior management Quality council Quality statements Strategic
planning Deming philosophy Barriers to TQM implementation.
UNIT II
PRINCIPLES
9
Customer satisfaction Customer perception of quality Customer complaints Service quality
Customer retention Employee involvement Motivation Empowerment Teams Recognition and
reward performance appraisal Benefits Continuous process improvement Juran triology PDSA
Cycle 5S Kaizen Supplier partnership Partnering Sourcing Supplier selection Supplier rating
Relationship development Performance measures Basic concepts Strategy Performance measure.
UNIT III
9
The Seven tools of quality Statistical fundamentals Measures of central tendency and dispersion
Population and sample Normal curve Control charts for variables and attributes Process capability
Concept of six sigma New seven management tools.
UNIT IV
TQM TOOLS
9
Benchmarking Reasons to benchmark Benchmarking process Quality function deployment (QFD)
House of quality QFD process Benefits Taguchi quality loss function Total productive maintenance
(TPM) Concept Improvement needs FMEA Stages of FMEA.
UNIT V
QUALITY SYSTEMS
9
Need for ISO 9000 and other quality systems ISO 9000:2000 quality system Elements
Implementation of quality system Documentation Quality auditing TS 16949 ISO 14000
Concept Requirements and benefits.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOK:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
1.
Dale H
Besterfiled etal
Title of the Book
Publisher
405
Pearson Education
Year of
Publication
2011
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
James R Evans
William M Lidsay
The Management and

Control of Quality
Learning)
2008
2.
Feigenbaum AV
Tata McGraw-Hill
2009
3.
Oakland J S
Butterworth Hcinemann
Ltd Oxford
2003
4.
Narayana V
Sreenivasan N S
Quality ManagementConcepts and Tasks
2005
5.
Zeiri

for Engineers
Wood Head Publishers
1992
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://tutor2u.net/business/production/quality_tqm.html
http://www.moresteam.com/toolbox/statistical-process-control-spc.cfm?
http://www2.ifm.eng.cam.ac.uk/dstools/represent/tqm.html
http://www. faculty.mu.edu.sa/download.php?fid
https://www.msu.edu/course/fsm/325/l_tqm.pdf
12T019
JAVA PROGRAMMING
3
OBJECTIVES:
To learn about basic Java language syntax and semantics write Java programs.
To be comfortable using the Java Application Programming Interface (Java API) to learn
and use an already-written Java class.
To understand the design, implementation, and debugging of graphical user interfaces

those respond to user events using Java.
To gain experience in designing, implementing applications with database connectivity and

applets.
OUTCOMES:
associate the features and elements of the java programming language with problems and
solutions.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Java basics Introduction to Java Features of Java Comments Data types Variables Operators
Control statements Type conversion and casting Classes and Objects: Concepts of classes and objects
Methods Constructors Static variables and methods Final keyword Access control This keyword
Garbage collection Overloading methods and constructors Parameter passing Call by value Call by
reference Arrays Strings.
406
UNIT II
9
final with inheritance The object class Packages and Interfaces: Defining, creating and accessing a
package CLASSPATH Importing packages Differences between classes and interface Defining an
interface Implementing interface Applying interfaces Variables in interface and extending interfaces
Interfaces Interfaces vs abstract classes Defining an interface Implementing interfaces Extending
UNIT III
9
Data structures creation and manipulation in Java: Introduction to Java collections Overview of Java
collection frame work Commonly used collection classes Array List Linked List Hash Set Hash
Map Tree Map Collection interfaces Collection Set List Map Legacy collection classes
Vector Hash table Stack Dictionary(abstract) Enumeration interface Iteration over collections
Iterator interface List iterator interface String tokenizer Formatter Random Scanner Observable
input/output Random access file operations File management using file class Using java.io
Networking in Java : Introduction Client/server Interaction with stream socket connections,
Connectionless client/server interaction with Datagrams using java.net.
UNIT IV
9
Thread groups.
UNIT V
9
Applets Concepts of Applets Applets and applications Life cycle of an applet Event Handling
Color class and graphics AWT Controls Swing: Introduction to swing Swing vs AWT MVC
architecture Swing components Swing application Java Database Connectivity (JDBC) Creating
connection Executing SQL statements Processing result set.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No
1.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
2008
Cay S. Horstmann
Gary Cornell
Core Java: Volume I

Fundamentals
Sun Microsystems
Press
Herbert Schildt
McGraw Hill
2002
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No
Author(s)
Pearson Education
Year of
Publication
2000

Pearson Education
2000
An introduction to Object
oriented programming with Java
Tata McGraw
Hill
2006
Title of the Book
1.
Arnold.K
Gosling J
The JAVA programming

language
2.
Timothy Budd
3.
Thomas Wu C
407
Publisher
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://docs.oracle.com/javase/tutorial/java/nutsandbolts
http://www.javabeginner.com/learn java
http://docs.oracle.com/javase/tutorial/collections/intro/
http://www.roseindia.net/java/thread/Java Multithreading.html
http://www.tutorialspoint.com/java/java_excemptions.html
12T020

3
OBJECTIVES:
To familiarize with basics of radar.
To gain knowledge about the different types of Radar and their operation.
To become familiar with signal detection techniques in radar applications.
To understand the concepts of radio navigation techniques.

OUTCOMES:
identify, formulate and solve engineering problems related to object location.
apply doppler effect in radar applications.
distinguish various radio navigation methods.
explain different antennas in radar communication.
design landing systems using Radar principles.

UNIT I
9
Radar system Simple form of radar equation Radar block diagram Radar frequencies Applications
of radar Detection of signals in noise Receiver noise and the Signal-to-Noise ratio Probabilities of
detection and false alarm Integration of radar pulses Transmitter power Pulse repetition frequency
Antenna parameters System losses.
UNIT II
CW AND FREQUENCY MODULATED RADAR
9
Doppler effect CW Radar Simple CW radar Intermediate frequency CW radar Frequency
modulated CW radar Frequency modulated CW altimeter Multiple frequency CW radar
Airborne doppler navigation.
UNIT III
Induction to doppler and MTI Radar Delay lines and cancellers Blind speed Multiple and staggered
pulse repetition frequencies Limitations to MTI performance Non coherent MTI Pulse Doppler radar
Pulse doppler spectrum Basic configuration Pulse doppler clutter Types of pulse doppler clutter.
UNIT IV
INTRODUCTION TO RADIO NAVIGATION
9
Introduction Four methods of navigation Radio direction finding The Loop antenna Loop input
circuits An aural null direction finder The Goniometer Errors in direction finding Adcoh
Direction finders Direction finding at very high frequencies Automatic direction finders The
commutated aerial direction finder Range and accuracy of direction finders Hyperbolic systems of
navigation.
UNIT V
NAVIGATIONAL AIDS
9
Distance measuring equipment DME indicator DME interrogator Enhanced DME Scanning DME
DME ground station TACAN TACAN equipment aids to approach and landing Instrument landing
system Instrument landing system errors(ILS) Microwave landing system(MLS) Comparison of ILS
and MLS Satellite navigation Basic satellite theory Global positioning system Differential GPS
GLONASS Galileo.
TOTAL: 45
408
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Albert Helfrick
Principles of Avionics
Avionics
Communication INC
2012
2.
Merrill I Skolnik
Systems
Tata McGraw-Hill
2003
3.
Nagaraja N S
Navigation
Tata McGraw-Hill
2001
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Peyton Z Peebles
Radar Principles
John Wiley
2004
2.
Toomay J C
Principles of Radar
PHI
2004
WEB URLs:
1. http://radionavlab.ae.utexas.edu/
2. http://www.marelmar.com/html/radar_nav.html
3. http://www.allstar.fiu.edu/aero/NAVAIDS.html
4. http://www.ee.fju.edu.tw/pages/032_faculty/sclin/lecture/Rada_System_Design/Chapter14.pdf
5. http:// www.bunkerofdoom.com
409
410
BE: ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING
TOTAL CREDITS: 190

SEMESTER I
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
12O101
3.5
40
60
100
12E102
40
60
100
12O103
Technical English
3.5
40
60
100
12O104
C Programming I
Engineering
Fundamentals of Electrical Sciences
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
12E105
12E106
PRACTICAL
12O111
1.5
40
60
100
12G112
Physics Laboratory
1.5
40
60
100
12E113
2.5
40
60
100
12G114
1.5
40
60
100
TOTAL
20
12
27
SEMESTER II
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
12O201
3.5
40
60
100
40
60
100
12O203

Engineering
40
60
100
12O204
C Programming II
40
60
100
12E205
Electric Circuits
3.5
40
60
100
12E206
Electronic Devices
40
60
100
12H202
PRACTICAL
12O211
1.5
40
60
100
12E212
1.5
40
60
100
12H213
1.5
40
60
100
12E214
Electronic Devices Laboratory
1.5
40
60
100
18
14
26
TOTAL

411
SEMESTER III
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
12E301
3.5
40
60
100
12E302
Data Structures
40
60
100
12E303
Electromagnetic Theory
40
60
100
12E304
DC Machines and Transformers
3.5
40
60
100
12E305
3.5
40
60
100
12E306
Electronic Circuits
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
18
24
PRACTICAL
12E311
12E312
12E313

Laboratory
Electronic Circuits Laboratory
TOTAL
SEMESTER IV
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
12E401
3.5
40
60
100
12E402
40
60
100
12E403
3.5
40
60
100
40
60
100
12E405
Control Systems
Generation, Transmission and
Distribution
Synchronous and Induction Machines
40
60
100
12E406
Digital Electronics
40
60
100
12E404
PRACTICAL
12E411
AC Machines Laboratory
1.5
40
60
100
12E412
Control Systems Laboratory
1.5
40
60
100
12E413

Laboratory
TOTAL
1.5
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
18
12
25
12E414

412
SEMESTER V
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
12E502
Power System Protection and

Switchgear
Microprocessors and Microcontrollers
12E503
40
60
100
12E504
3.5
40
60
100
12E505
3.5
40
60
100
12E506
Operating Systems
40
60
100
1.5
100
100
1.5
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
18
12
25.5
12E501
40
60
100
3.5
40
60
100
PRACTICAL
12O511
Soft Skills
Microprocessors and Microcontrollers
Laboratory
Laboratory
Linear Integrated Circuits Laboratory
12E512
12E513
12E514
TOTAL
SEMESTER VI
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
12E601
Power System Operation and Control
3.5
40
60
100
12E602
Embedded Systems
40
60
100
12E603
40
60
100
12E604
Computer Networks
40
60
100
12E605
Power Electronics
3.5
40
60
100
12Exxx
Elective I
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
1.5
100
100
18
23.5
PRACTICAL
12E612

Laboratory
Power Electronics Laboratory
12E651
Mini Project
12E611
TOTAL

413
SEMESTER VII
Course
Code
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Course Title
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
12E701
Communication Engineering
40
60
100
12E702
Electric Drives and Control
3.5
40
60
100
12E703
Electrical Machine Design
3.5
40
60
100
12E704
Power System Analysis and Stability

Electric Energy Utilization and
Conservation
Elective II
3.5
100
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
12E705
12Exxx
PRACTICAL
12E711
Power System Simulation Laboratory
1.5
40
60
100
12E712
Design Laboratory
1.5
40
60
100
12E721
Comprehension
12E751
1.5
100
100
TOTAL
18
24
SEMESTER VIII
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
12Exxx

Engineering Ethics
Elective III
12Exxx
Elective IV
12E801
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
12
40
60
100
TOTAL
12
15
PRACTICAL
12E851

414
LIST OF ELECTIVES
Course Code
Course Title
12E001
High Voltage Engineering
12E002
Power Quality Engineering
12E003
Renewable Energy Sources
12E004
Power System Economics
12E005
Special Electrical Machines and Controllers
12E006
HVDC and FACTS
12E007
Java Programming
12E008
Computer Aided Analysis and Design of Electrical Machines
12E009
VLSI Design
12E010
12E011
12E012
12E013
PLC, SCADA and DCS
12E014
Energy Auditing and Management
12E015
Digital System Design
12E016
12E017
MEMS and its Applications
12E018
Advanced Control Systems
12E019
12E020
415
SEMESTER V
12E501
POWER SYSTEM PROTECTION AND SWITCHGEAR

3
OBJECTIVES:
To analyze the causes of abnormal operating conditions (faults, lightning and switching
surges) of the apparatus and system.
To determine the characteristics, functions and protection schemes of relays.
To impart knowledge on apparatus protection.
To recognize the functioning of circuit breakers.
OUTCOMES:
acquire knowledge of protective schemes in power system.
identify the various types of protection relays and circuit breakers.
expertize in protection system against over voltages in power system.
have awareness about contemporary issues in power system.
familiarize with various faults in power system.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Principles and need for protective schemes Nature and causes of faults Types of fault Effects of
faults Essential qualities of protection Per unit representation Analysis of symmetrical fault
CTs, PTs and their applications in protective schemes.
UNIT II
PROTECTIVE RELAYS
9
Definition Requirement of relays Construction and characteristics of relays Non directional and
directional over current relays Distance relays: impedance, mho and reactance relays Differential
relays Negative sequence relays Introduction to static relays Digital and numerical protective
relay.
UNIT III
APPARATUS AND LINE PROTECTION
9
Alternator, transformer, bus bar and motor protection using relays Feeder protection Time graded
over current protection Differential pilot wire protection Distance protection Power system
earthing Solid, resistance, reactance and earthing Arc suppression coil Earthing transformers.
UNIT IV
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
9
Functions of switchgear Elementary principles of arc extinction Arc control devices Recovery
voltage and restriking voltage Current chopping and capacitance current breaking Air blast, air
break, oil, vacuum, SF6 circuit breakers MCB,MCCB and RCCB Rating, testing and selection of
circuit breakers.
UNIT V
PROTECTION AGAINST OVER VOLTAGES
9
Causes of over voltages Mechanism of lightning discharge and its harmful effects Methods of
protection against over voltages: ground wires, peterson coil, surge absorbers, surge diverters Basics
of insulation coordination Basic impulse insulation level.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.
No.
Author(s)
1.
Wadhwa C L
2.
Sunil S Rao
Title of the Book

Electrical Power
Systems
Switchgear and
Protection
Publisher
New Age
International Ltd
Khanna
Publication
Year of
Publication
2013
2007
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.
No.
1.
Author(s)
Stanley H Horowitz
Arun G Phadke
Title of the Book

Power System Relaying
Fourth edition
416
Publisher
Year of
Publication
John Willy & Sons

Ltd.
2014
2.
Paithankar Y G
Bhide S R
3.
Badri Ram
4.
Rao T S M
Fundamentals of Power
System Protection
Power System Protection
and Switchgear
Power System Protection:
Static Relays with
Microprocessor
Applications
Prentice - Hall of
India Ltd
2013
Tata McGraw Hill
2011
Tata McGraw Hill
2009
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.ieee.org/circuit breakers
http://www.nptel.ac.in/courses.php?disciplineId=108
http://www.cdeep.iitb.ac.in/nptel
http://www.ocw.mit.edu/courses/electrical-engineering-and-computer-science
http://forum.jntuworld.com/showthread.php
12E502/12N502

(Common to EEE / EIE)
3
3.5
OBJECTIVES:
To explain about hardware architecture and instruction set of 8085 microprocessor and 8051
microcontroller.
To illustrate about interrupts and programming of 8085 microprocessor and 8051
microcontroller.
To impart knowledge on the memory and peripheral interfacing with 8085 microprocessor and
8051 microcontroller.
To memorize the timers/counters, serial ports and power control of 8051 microcontroller.
OUTCOMES:
get an exposure to architecture and programming of 8085.
acquire knowledge of memory and peripheral interfacing.
understand the architecture and Programming of 8051 microcontroller.
identify, formulate and design the program for simple application using 8085 and 8051.
UNIT I
ARCHITECTURE AND PROGRAMMING OF 8085 MICROPROCESSOR 9
Introduction to microprocessor Von Neumann and Harvard architecture 8085 microprocessor
architecture Instruction formats Addressing modes Instruction set Machine cycles and timing
diagrams Development of assembly language programs.
UNIT II
INTERRUPTS AND MEMORY INTERFACING
9
Need for interrupts Types of interrupts Interrupt structure Multiple interrupt requests and their
handling Memory interfacing: interface requirements Address space partitioning Memory control
signals Typical EPROM and RAM interfacing.
UNIT III
9
Architecture Memory organization Addressing modes Instruction set Simple programs
Interrupt structure Timer, serial ports and power control: features and modes.
UNIT IV
PERIPHERAL INTERFACING
9
Memory mapped I/O scheme I/O mapped I/O scheme Study of architecture of ICs and interfacing
with 8085 and 8051: 8255 PPI, 8259 PIC, 8237 DMA controller, 8279 key board display controller,
8253 timer, A/D and D /A converter.
UNIT V
8051 MICROCONTROLLER APPLICATIONS
9
Stepper motor control Speed control of dc motor Measurement of frequency, phase angle and
power factor Temperature control Traffic light control Washing machine control Data
acquisition system.
TOTAL: 45 + 15
417
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.
No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Ramesh S Goankar
Microprocessor
architecture: programming
and Applications with 8085
Wiley Eastern
Ltd, New Delhi
2013
Kenneth J Ayala
8051 Microcontroller
Cengage
Publications,
New Delhi
2011
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.
No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Kenneth L Short
Microprocessors and
Programmed Logic
Pearson
Education/PHI
Pearson
Education India
Muhammed Ali Mazidi

Janice Gillispie Mazidi
The 8051 Microcontroller

and Embedded Systems
Krishna Kant
Microprocessors and
Microcontrollers
and System Design
8085,8086,8051,8096
Prentice Hall of
India
2011
Ajay V Deshmukh
Microcontrollers (Theory
and Applications)
Tata McGraw
Hill Education
Private Limited
2012
2004
2013
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.intel.com/en_AP/Consumer/Learn/Processors/index.htm
http://www.cpu-world.com/CPUs/8085
12E503/12N503

(Common to EEE / EIE)
3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand database concepts and structure and impart analysis, design through ER model
To explore theoretical and practical concept of SQL queries.
To build an effective database with high security.
To allow the students to develop background knowledge as well as core expertise in
developing database.
To gain entire sources of database and ability to design database to meet daily needs.
OUTCOMES:
learns the basic information about database management system and effective drawing of ER
diagram.
write SQL queries and improves logical hinking.
learns the different storage technologies.
discuss the concept of Transaction, Recovery, Concurrency and Security of DBMS.
learn the recent updates and advanced concepts of DBMS.
UNIT I
9
418
UNIT II
RELATIONAL MODEL
9
SQL Data definition Queries in SQL Updates Views Integrity and security Relational
database design Functional dependences and normalization for relational databases (up to BCNF).
UNIT III
9
Record storage and primary file organization Secondary storage devices Operations on files Heap
file Sorted files Hashing techniques Index structure for files Different types of indexes B-tree
B+tree Query processing.
UNIT IV
9
Transaction processing Introduction Need for concurrency control Desirable properties of
transaction Schedule and recoverability Serializability and schedules Concurrency control
Types of locks Two phases locking Deadlock Time stamp based concurrency control Recovery
techniques Concepts Immediate update Deferred update Shadow paging.
UNIT V
CURRENT TRENDS
9
Types of data bases Object oriented databases Need for complex data types OO data model
Nested relations Complex types Inheritance reference types Distributed databases Homogenous
and heterogenous Distributed data storage XML Structure of XML Data XML document
Schema Querying and transformation Data mining and data warehousing Introduction to business
intelligence.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.
No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Year of
Publication
Publisher
1.
Henry F Korth
Sudarshan S
Database System Concepts
McGraw-Hill
2010
2.
Ramez Elmasri
Shamkant B Navathe
Fundamental Database
Systems
Pearson Education
2003
Publisher
Year of
Publication
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.
No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
Raghurama Krishnan
Data base Management

System
Tata McGraw-Hill
Publishing
Company
2003
2.
Hector GarciaMolina
Jeffrey D Ullman
Jennifer Widom
Database System
Implementation
Pearson Education
2000
3.
Peter Rob
Corlos Coronel
Database System, Design,

Implementation and
Management
Thompson
Learning Course
Technology
2003
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.cn.wikipedia.org/wiki/Database_Management_Systems
http://www.oracle.com
http://www.microsoft.com/sql
http://www.quackit.com
http://www.nptel.ac.in/video.php?subjectId=106106093
12E504

3
OBJECTIVES:
To identify and analyze signals and systems.
To understand the various transformation techniques & their computation.
To impart knowledge on various filters.
To recognize the DSP architecture and functioning.
419
3.5
OUTCOMES:
understand the basic classification of signals and systems.
acquire knowledge of digital signal processor architecture and functioning.
develop DFT and FFT algorithms for transformation techniques in modern engineering.
familiarize with various types of filters.
UNIT I
SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS
9
Basic signals Classification of signals Classification of systems Linear time invariant systems Convolution sum Cross correlation and autocorrelation Sampling Sample and Hold circuit A/D
and D/A converters.
UNIT II
DFT AND FFT ALGORITHMS
9
Introduction to DFT Efficient computation of DFT Properties of DFT FFT algorithms Radix2
FFT algorithms Decimation in time Decimation in frequency algorithms Use of FFT algorithms
in linear filtering and correlation.
UNIT III
IIR FILTER DESIGN
9
Introduction to digital filters and IIR Filters Characteristics and design of Butterworth and Chebyshev
filters Frequency transformation in analog domain Impulse invariant, bilinear transforms Digital
IIR filters design IIR filter structures Direct, cascade and parallel.
UNIT IV
FIR FILTER DESIGN
9
Magnitude and phase characteristics of FIR filters Symmetric and antisymmetric FIR filters
Design of linear phase FIR filters Fourier series technique Gibbs phenomenon Windowing
techniques Frequency sampling technique FIR filter structures Direct, cascade, linear phase and
poly phase structures.
UNIT V
DSP PROCESSORS AND APPLICATIONS
9
Introduction to DSP processors Harvard Architecture MAC unit Pipelining Architecture of
TMS320C5X processor Addressing modes Speech enhancement and filtering DTMF generator
and detector Echo cancellation, ECG interference cancellation using adaptive filters.
TOTAL: 45 + 15
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.
No.
Author(s)
1.
John G Proakis
Dimitris K
Manolakis
2.
Venkataramani B
Bhaskar M
Title of the Book

Principles Algorithms and
Application
Digital Signal Processor
Architecture Programming and
Application
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Prentice Hall of
India,
Third Edition
2006
Tata McGraw Hill,

Second Edition
2011
Publisher
Year of
Publication
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.
No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
Alan V Oppenheim
Ronald W Schafer
John R Back
Discrete Time Signal Processing
Prentice Hall of
India, Third
Edition
2009
2.
Mitra S K
Digital Signal Processing A

Computer based approach
Tata McGraw Hill,

Fourth Edition
2010
3.
Avtar Singh
Srinivasan S
DSP Implementation using DSP

microprocessor with Examples
from TMS32C54XX
Thamson Brooks
cole Publishers
2006
4.
Li Tan

Fundamentals and Applications
Elsevier
2013
420
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
http:/www.ti.com
http://nptel.ac.in/video.php?subjectId=117102060
http://ocw.mit.edu/courses/electrical-engineering-and-computer-science
12E505
LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUITS

3
3.5
OBJECTIVES:
To determine the characteristics of operational Amplifier.
To analyze linear and non linear applications of operational Amplifier.
To recognize the internal functional blocks of special ICs like Timers and PLL circuits.
To discuss about the functional blocks of voltage regulators and ADC/DAC circuits.
OUTCOMES:
understand and analyze the linear integrated circuits using operational Amplifier.
identify the internal functional blocks of special ICs like Timers and PLL circuits.
analyze about voltage regulators and ADC/DAC circuits.
get familiar with linear and non linear applications of operational Amplifier.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER
9
Functional block diagram Symbol, characteristics of an ideal operational amplifier, schematic circuit
of IC 741, open loop gain, CMRR Input bias and offset currents Input and output offset voltages
Offset compensation techniques Frequency response characteristics Stability, limitations, frequency
compensation, slew rate Transfer characteristics.
UNIT II
LINEAR APPLICATIONS OF OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIERS
9
Inverting and non-inverting amplifiers Voltage follower, summing amplifier, differential amplifier,
instrumentation amplifier, integrator and differentiator Practical considerations: voltage to current
and current to voltage converters, phase changers, sinusoidal oscillators, active filters Design of low
pass, high pass, wide band pass and band stop butterworth filters, narrow band pass and notch filters.
UNIT III
NON LINEAR APPLICATIONS OF OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIERS
9
Comparator Regenerative comparator Zero crossing detector Sample and hold circuit Precision
diode Half and full wave rectifiers Active peak detector Clipper and clamper Logarithmic and
exponential amplifiers Multiplier and divider Square and triangular waveform generators.
UNIT IV
SPECIAL FUNCTION ICs
9
555 timer functional block diagram and description Monostable and astable operation, applications,
566 voltage controlled oscillator, analog multiplier, comparator ICs PLL functional block diagram
Principle of operation, building blocks of PLL, characteristics, derivations of expressions for lock and
capture ranges, applications: frequency synthesis, AM and FM detection, motor speed control.
UNIT V
IC VOLTAGE REGULATORS AND DATA CONVERTERS
9
IC Voltage regulators: block diagram of 723 general purpose voltage regulator Circuit configurations,
Current limiting schemes, Output current boosting, fixed and adjustable three terminal regulators,
switching regulators, low drop out regulators Digital to analog converters: binary weighted and R-2R
ladder types Analog to digital converters: continuous, counter ramp, successive approximation, single
slope, dual slope and parallel types.
TOTAL: 45 + 15
TEXT BOOK:
Sl.
No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
Gayakwad A R
Op-Amps and Linear

Integrated Circuits
2.
Roy Choudhury
Shail Jain
Linear Integrated
Circuits
Publisher
Pearson Education,
New Delhi,
Fourth Edition
Limited, Third Edition
421
Year of
Publication
2009
2010
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.
No.
Author(s)
1.
Title of the Book

Operational Amplifiers and
Linear ICs
David A Bell
Robert F Coughlin
Fredrick F Driscoll
Adel S Sedra Kenneth
C Smith
2.
3.
4.
Somanathan Nair B
Publisher
Op-amp and Linear ICs

Microelectronic Circuits
Analysis Design &
Applications
Year of
Publication
Prentice Hall of
India,
Second Edition
PHI Learning, 6th
edition
Oxford University
Press, 5th Edition
2013
2012
2004
Wiley India Private

Ltd, 1st Edition
2009
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
http://nptel.ac.in/courses/117106030/nptel-aic/analogicdesign-intro.pdf
http://dspace.mit.edu/bitstream/handle/1721.1/75002/6-01-fall-2009/contents/lecturenotes/MIT6_01F09_lec07.pdf
12L506/12T506/12E506/12N506
OPERATING SYSTEMS
12O511
SOFT SKILLS
12E512/12N612

LABORATORY
(Common to EEE/EIE)
0
OBJECTIVES:
To examine assembly language programming using instruction set of 8085 microprocessor
and 8051 microcontroller.
To interface peripheral devices with 8085 microprocessor / 8051 microcontroller.
OUTCOMES:
perform arithmatic operations in assembly language using 8085 and 8051.
interface ADC, DAC with 8085.
interface keyboard displaywith 8085.
Interface stepper motor with 8051.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. 8 bit - addition and subtraction using 8085 microprocessor.
2. 8 bit - multiplication and division using 8085 microprocessor.
3. Multi byte addition and subtraction using 8085 microprocessor.
4. BCD addition and subtraction using 8085 microprocessor.
5. Hexa / ASCII / BCD code conversions using 8085 microprocessor.
6. Sorting of n numbers using 8085 microprocessor.
7. Finding largest and smallest of n numbers using 8085 microprocessor.
8. Interfacing with 8085
ADC 0801 A/D Converter
DAC 0800 D/A Converter
Square wave generation using 8253.
9. Interfacing of 8085 with 8279- key board display controller.
422
1.5
10. Addition and subtraction in 8051 microcontroller.

11. Multiplication and division in 8051 microcontroller.
12. Interfacing stepper motor with 8051.
12E513/12N514
DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS LABORATORY

(Common to EEE/EIE)
0
1.5
OBJECTIVES:
To provide a strong formal foundation in database concepts and technology.
To give a good formal foundation on the relational model of data.
To present SQL and procedural interfaces to SQL comprehensively.
To give an introduction to systematic database design approaches covering conceptual design,
logical design and an overview of physical design.
To introduce the concepts of transactions and transaction processing.
To present the issues and techniques relating to concurrency and recovery in multi-user
database environments.
OUTCOMES:
allow different user application programs to concurrently access the same database.
control data access, enforcing data integrity and managing concurrency control.
recover the database after failures and restoring it from backup files, as well as maintaining
database security.
analyze the redundancy in the database.
analyze the consistency of database, especially the use of referential constraints.
develop applications using normalization
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Data definition language (DDL) commands in RDBMS

Data Manipulation language(DML) and Data Control language(DCL) commands in RDBMS
High-level language extension with cursors
High-level language extension with triggers
Procedures and functions
Embedded SQL
Database design using E-R model and normalization
Design and Implementation of payroll processing system
Design and Implementation of banking system.
Design and Implementation of library information system
12E514
LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUITS LABORATORY

0
OBJECTIVES:
To verify various applications of Op-Amp.
To design timer and voltage controlled oscillator circuits.
To design and verify ADC and DAC circuits using Op-Amp.
OUTCOMES:
design and analyze the characteristics of Op-Amp.
design and examine the performance of active filters.
generate triangular wave and sine wave using Op-Amp.
design DAC and ADC using Op-Amp.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Characteristics of Op-Amp.
2. Applications of Op-Amp.
3. Design of Astable multivibrator using Op-Amp.
4. Triangular wave and Sine wave generation using Op-Amp.
5. Design of Active Filters.
6. 555 Timer IC applications.
423
1.5
7.
8.
9.
10.
566 Voltage Controlled Oscillator.

Characteristics of 565 PLL IC.
Design of Digital to Analog Converter using Op-Amp.
Design of Analog to Digital Converter using Op-Amp.
SEMESTER VI
12E601
POWER SYSTEM OPERATION AND CONTROL

3
3.5
OBJECTIVES:
To illustrate the essentials of power system operation and control.
To analyze the real power frequency control in power system.
To describe the reactive power voltage control in power system.
To acquire knowledge about the economic operation of power system.
OUTCOMES:
familiarize with the various stipulations in load curves.
have awareness about the contemporary issues of power system operation and control.
acquire knowledge in unit commitment and economic despatch problems.
understand the various functions in computerised control of power system.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
System load characteristics, load curves Daily, weekly and annual load-duration curve, load factor
and diversity factor Types of reserves Load forecasting Unit commitment Load dispatching
Governor control: LFC, EDC, AVR System voltage control Security control.
UNIT II
REAL POWER-FREQUENCY CONTROL
9
Fundamentals of speed governing mechanism and modeling Speed-load characteristics Load
sharing between two synchronous machines in parallel Concept of control area LFC of a single area
system Static and dynamic analysis of uncontrolled and controlled cases Economic dispatch control
Multi area systems Two area system modeling Static analysis, uncontrolled case Tie line with
frequency bias control of two area system.
UNIT III
REACTIVE POWER-VOLTAGE CONTROL
9
Typical excitation system, modeling, static and dynamic analysis, stability compensation Generation
and absorption of reactive power Relation between voltage, power and reactive power at a node
Method of voltage and reactive power control Numerical problems.
UNIT IV
UNIT COMMITMENT AND ECONOMIC DISPATCH
9
Statement of Unit Commitment (UC) problem Constraints in UC: spinning reserve, thermal unit
constraints, hydro constraints, fuel constraints and other constraints UC solution methods: Prioritylist methods, Forward dynamic programming approach List method using full-load average
production cost Incremental cost curve Coordination equations without loss and with loss Base
point and participation factors Economic dispatch controller added to LFC.
UNIT V
COMPUTER CONTROL OF POWER SYSTEMS
9
Energy control centre: functions Monitoring Data acquisition and control system hardware
configuration SCADA and EMS functions Network topology determination State estimation
Security analysis and control Various Operating States: Normal, Alert, Emergency, in extremis and
restorative State transition diagram.
TOTAL: 45+15
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.
Year of
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
No.
Publication
Allen J Wood
Power Generation,
1.
John Wiley and Sons Inc
2013
Bruce F Wollenberg Operation and Control
Electric Energy Systems
2008
2.
Olle I Elgerd
Theory An Introduction Delhi, Second Edition
424
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.
No.
Author(s)
1.
Grigsby L L
2.
Ramana N V
3.
Kundur P
4.
Kothari D P
Nagrath I J
Title of the Book
Publisher
The Electric Power

Engineering Hand Book
Power System operation and
Control
Power System Stability and
Control
CRC Press & IEEE

Press
Pearson Education
India
McGraw Hill
Publications, USA
Tata McGraw Hill,
New Delhi, Third
Edition
Modern Power System

Analysis
Year of
Publication
2012
2011
2008
2003
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
http://www.impowerg.iitb.ac.in
http://www.nptel.iitm.ac.in/video.php?subjectId=108104052
12L602/12T602/12E602/12N602
EMBEDDED SYSTEMS
12E603

3
OBJECTIVES:
To identify the classifications and calibration of instrumentation.
To discuss about potentiometers, bridges and shielding-grounding techniques.
To impart knowledge on the ADC techniques and various transducers in measuring system.
To recognize the storage, display devices and data acquisition system.
OUTCOMES:
understand the various essentials of measurement system.
model and analyze electrical apparatus and their application to power system.
acquire knowledge about potentiometers, bridges and transducers.
understand and analyze data acquisition system and storage of data.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Classification and essential requirements of an instrument Functional elements of an instrument
Static and dynamic characteristics Errors in measurement Statistical evaluation of measurement
data Standards and calibration.
UNIT II
ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS INSTRUMENTS
9
Moving coil and moving iron instruments Electrodynamometer type instruments Voltmeters and
ammeters: basic type, multi-range Electronic and digital multimeter Single phase and three phase
energy meters Measurement of power using CT and PT Measurement of magnetic flux density
Measurement of Iron loss: wattmeter, potentiometer and bridge method Frequency meter: vibrating
reed type, weston type Power factor meter Phase sequence meter.
UNIT III
COMPARISON METHODS OF MEASUREMENTS
9
D.C and A.C potentiometers, D.C and A.C bridges: Maxwells, Anderson, Hays, Scherings and
Wien bridges Transformer ratio bridges Self-balancing bridges Shielding Grounding
techniques.
UNIT IV
TRANSDUCERS
9
Classification of transducers Selection of transducers Types of transducers: resistive, inductive and
capacitive Piezoelectric, photo emissive, photo conductive, photo voltaic, temperature, velocity, level
and torque transducers.
425
UNIT V
STORAGE, DISPLAY DEVICES AND DATA ACQUISITION
9
Signal generator Signal conditioning Magnetic disk and tape Recorders, digital plotters and
printers digital CRO PC based data acquisition Configuration of typical on board DAQ card.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.
No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Gupta J B
A Course in Electronic and

S. K. Kataria & Sons
2013
2.
Sawhney A K
Puneet Sawhney

Electronic Measurements
and Instrumentation
Dhanpat Rai and Co
2010
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.
No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book

and Measurements
Transducers and
Instrumentation
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Oxford University
Press, Second Edition
2013
2010
1.
David A Bell
2.
Moorthy D V S
3.
Kalsi H S
Tata McGraw Hill
4.
Doebelin E O
Dhanesh N Manik
Measurement Systems
Tata McGraw Hill
2012
2011
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
http://nptel.iitm.ac.in/courses/Webcourse-contents/IIT
http://fetweb.ju.edu.jo/staff/ee/gsukkar/Measurement
12L604/12T604/12E604/12N604/12P504/12F504
COMPUTER NETWORKS
12E605
POWER ELECTRONICS
3
3.5
OBJECTIVES:
To realize the construction and performance of power semiconductor devices.
To illustrate the switching characteristics of power semiconductor devices.
To recognize the operational behaviour of controlled rectifiers and DC choppers.
To impart the concepts of inverters and cycloconverters.
To categorize various protection and cooling methods of power semiconductor devices.
OUTCOMES:
familiarize with the fundamental concepts and characteristics of various power semiconductor
devices.
understand and analyze the controlled rectifiers, choppers, inverters and cycloconverters.
get an exposure to various protection and cooling methods of power semiconductor devices.
UNIT I
POWER SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES
9
Structure, operation and characteristics of SCR, TRIAC, power transistor, MOSFET, IGBT, IGCT and
GTO Switching characteristics of SCR, power transistor, MOSFET, IGBT and GTO Gate
triggering circuit.
426
UNIT II
CONTROLLED RECTIFIERS [QUALITATIVE STUDY ONLY]
9
Single phase half controlled and fully controlled thyristor bridge converters: circuit operation,
estimation of average, RMS load voltage and load current for continuous current operation for R, RL,
RLE loads Three phase half and fully controlled thyristor converters for R, RL and RLE loads Dual
converters.
UNIT III
CHOPPERS AND ITS APPLICATIONS
9
Introduction Operation of step-up and step-down choppers Time ratio control and current limit
control Switching mode regulators: buck, boost, buck-boost and cuk converters.
UNIT IV
INVERTERS AND CYCLOCONVERTER
9
Single phase and three phase (both 1200 mode and 1800 mode) inverters Voltage and harmonic
control PWM techniques: sinusoidal PWM, modified sinusoidal PWM and multiple PWM Series
resonant inverter Current source inverters Cycloconverters (single phase to single phase, three
phase to single phase) AC voltage controllers.
UNIT V
PROTECTION AND COOLING OF POWER SWITCHING DEVICES
9
Introduction Over voltage condition and protection: naturally commutated circuits and forced
commutated circuits Over current fault condition and protection Gate protection Thyristor
mounting circuits Heat sinks.
TOTAL: 45 + 15
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.
No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Singh M D
Khanchandani L
Power Electronics
Tata McGraw Hill,

Second Edition (Third
Reprint)
2008
2.
Bimbhra P S
Power Electronics
Khanna Publishers,
New Delhi.
2012
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.
No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Year of
Publication
Publisher
1.
Rashid M H
Power Electronics
Circuits, Devices and
Applications
Pearson Education
(Singapore) Pvt. Ltd
2013
2.
Ned Mohan
Undeland Robbins
Power Electronics Converters,

John Wiley and sons

(Asia)
2009
3.
Vedam Subrahmanyam
Power Electronics
4.
Philip T Krein
Elements of Power
Electronics
New Age
International (P)
Limited
Oxford University
Press, Inc
2004
2005
WEB URLs:
1.
http://www.iitm.ac.in/nptel
2.
http://www.services.eng.uts.edu.au
3.
http://ocw.mit.edu/courses/electrical-engineering-and-computer-science
4.
12E611
MEASUREMENTS AND INSTRUMENTATION LABORATORY

0
1.5
OBJECTIVES:
To develop hands on experience with DC and AC bridges to measure different electrical
parameters like resistance, inductance, and capacitance.
To expertise in measuring power factor, power and energy.
427
OUTCOMES:
understand and analyze DC and AC bridges in the measuring of various parameters.
apply knowledge in measuring of active power, reactive power and energy in electrical
industry.
familiarize with operation of transducers in the measuring system.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Calibration of Linear Variable Displacement transducers.
2. Measurement of Inductance and Capacitance using AC bridges.
3. Measurement of Resistance using DC bridges.
4. Instrumentation amplifiers.
5. Transient Response of RL, RC and RLC Circuits.
6. Measurement of Energy using single-phase energy meter.
7. Measurement of three phase power and power factor.
8. Displacement and pressure transducers using LabVIEW.
9. A/D converters using LabVIEW.
10. D/A converters using LabVIEW.
12E612
POWER ELECTRONICS LABORATORY

0
1.5
OBJECTIVES:
To observe experimentally the characteristics of power semiconductor devices.
To design, simulate and analyze the operational characteristics of controlled rectifiers,
choppers and inverters using MATLAB.
To analyze the operational characteristics of controlled rectifiers, choppers and inverters using
prototype boards.
OUTCOMES:
understand and analyze the characteristics of power semiconductor devices.
design and analyze controlled rectifiers, choppers and inverters.
design, simulate and analyze controlled rectifiers, choppers and inverters using MATLAB
software.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Electrical Characteristics of SCR and TRIAC.
2. Electrical Characteristics of MOSFET and IGBT.
3. Transient characteristics of SCR and MOSFET.
4. AC to DC half controlled converter.
5. AC to DC fully controlled converter.
6. Step down and step up MOSFET based choppers.
7. IGBT based three phase PWM inverter.
8. AC Phase Control using SCR and TRIAC.
9. Resonant DC to DC converter.
10. Design of 1 full bridge diode rectifier using MATLAB.
11. Design of 1 fully controlled converter using MATLAB.
12. Design of Buck Boost Converter using MATLAB.
13. Design of 1 Inverter using MATLAB.
12A651/12M651/12C651/12L651/12T651/12E651/12N651/12P651/12F651
MINI PROJECT
428
ELECTIVES
12E001
HIGH VOLTAGE ENGINEERING

3
OBJECTIVES:
To discuss about various causes of over voltages in power system.
To review generation and measurement of different high range voltages.
To know about nature of breakdown mechanism in solid, liquid and gaseous dielectrics.
To recognize the testing of power apparatus and insulation coordination.
OUTCOMES:
know about various causes of abnormal voltage and breakdown in the electrical systems.
understand the various methods of high voltage generation and its measuring methods.
understand and analyze high voltage testing of electrical power apparatus.
UNIT I
OVER VOLTAGES IN ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS
9
Natural causes of over voltages Lightning phenomena Over voltages due to switching surges
System faults and other abnormal conditions Traveling waves on transmission lines (lines terminated
with open end, short circuited end, apparatus and cables) Insulation coordination.
UNIT II
ELECTRICAL BREAKDOWN IN GASES, SOLIDS AND LIQUIDS
9
Properties of insulating gases Townsend's criterion for breakdown Mechanism of spark
Breakdown voltage characteristics in uniform and non uniform fields Penning effect Time lag for
breakdown Corona discharges Paschen's law Solid breakdown mechanism Treeing and
Tracking Breakdown in liquids.
UNIT III
GENERATION OF HIGH VOLTAGES AND HIGH CURRENTS
9
Generation of high DC voltages Cockroft -Walton voltage multiplier circuit Electrostatic generator
Van de graff generator Generation of high AC voltages Transformers in cascade Generation of
impulse voltages and currents Construction of marx impulse generator Tripping and control of
impulse generators.
UNIT IV
MEASUREMENT OF HIGH VOLTAGES AND HIGH CURRENTS
9
Measurement of high DC voltages, high AC voltages and impulse voltages Measurement of high
DC currents, high AC currents and impulse currents CRO for impulse voltage and current
measurement Digital techniques in high voltage measurement Surge test oscilloscope.
UNIT V
HIGH VOLTAGE TESTING OF ELECTRICAL POWER APPARATUS
9
Testing: insulators, bushings, isolators, circuit breakers, cables, transformers and surge arresters Tan
delta measurement Polarization index value Partial discharge measurement Radio interference.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.
No.
Author(s)
1.
Naidu M S
Kamaraj V
2.
Wadhwa C L
Title of the Book

High Voltage
Engineering
High Voltage
Engineering
Publisher
Tata McGraw Hill,
Fifth Edition
(P) Ltd
Year of
Publication
2013
2010
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.
No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
2002
1.
Ravindra Arora
Wolfgang Mosch
High Voltage Insulation

Engineering

(P) Ltd
2.
Kuffel E
Zaengl W S
Kuffel J

Fundamentals
Newnes: An imprint of
Butterworth-Heinmann
429
2005
3.
Rakosh Das
Begamudre
Extra High Voltage AC

Transmission Engineering

(P) Ltd
2006
4.
Subir ray
An Introduction to High
Voltage Engineering
2013
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
http://www.nptel.iitm.ac.in/courses/Webcourse-contents/IITKANPUR/HighVoltageEngg/ui
TOC.htm
http://hve.iisc.ernet.in
12E002
POWER QUALITY ENGINEERING

3
OBJECTIVES:
To discuss about power quality and overvoltage problems.
To educate on the causes of voltage sags, transients and its controlling methods.
To study the sources and effect of harmonics in power system.
To impart knowledge on various methods of power quality monitoring.
OUTCOMES:
understand the various power quality issues and interruptions in power system.
familiarize with transients and distortions problems in power system.
have knowledge of contemporary issues in power system due to harmonics.
understand and analyze the power quality monitoring and solutions.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Definitions Power quality, voltage quality Power quality issues Short duration voltage variations
Long duration voltage variations Transients and waveform distortion Voltage imbalance
Voltage fluctuation Power frequency variations Sources and effects of power quality problems
Power quality terms IT / IC Curves.
UNIT II
SHORT AND LONG INTERRUPTIONS
9
Short Interruptions: Introduction Origin of short interruptions Voltage magnitude events due to reclosing, Voltage during the interruption Monitoring and Prediction of short interruptions Influence
on induction and Synchronous motors Single phase tripping Voltage and Current during fault and
post fault period Long Interruptions: Definition Failure Outage Interruption Principles of
regulating the voltage Voltage regulating devices Applications.
UNIT III
VOLTAGE SAG AND TRANSIENTS
9
Voltage Sag: Introduction Definition Magnitude Duration Causes of Voltage Sag
Load influence on voltage sags on power electronics loads, sensitive loads Stochastic assessment of
voltage sags Overview of mitigation methods Transients: Definition Power system transient
model Principles of over voltage protection Types and causes of transients Devices for over
voltage protection Capacitor switching transients Lightning transients Transients from load
switching Grounding and guard rings.
UNIT IV
WAVEFORM DISTORTION
9
Introduction Definition and terms Harmonics, harmonics indices, inter harmonics Notching
Voltage Vs current distortion Harmonics Vs Transients Sources and effects of harmonic distortion
System response characteristics Principles of controlling harmonics IEEE Harmonic Standards.
UNIT V
POWER QUALITY SOLUTIONS
9
Introduction Power quality monitoring Need for power quality monitoring, Evolution of power
quality monitoring, deregulation effect on power quality monitoring Brief introduction to power
quality measurement equipments and power conditioning equipments Planning Conducting and
analyzing power quality survey Mitigation and control techniques.
TOTAL: 45
430
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.
No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Roger C Dugan,
Mark F McGranaghan
Wayne H Beaty
Electrical Power Systems

Quality
McGraw-Hill,
New York
2012
2.
Barry W Kennedy
Power Quality Primer
McGraw-Hill,
New York
2000
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.
No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
John Wiley and

Sons
CRC Press,
Washington D.C.
2008
1.
Angelo Baggini
Handbook of Power Quality
2.
Sankaran C
Power Quality
3.
Math H J Bollen
Understanding Power Quality

Problems: Voltage Sags and
Interruptions
IEEE Press,
New York.
2000
4.
Arrillaga J
Watson N R
Chen S
Power System Quality

Assessment
John Wiley and

Sons Ltd,
England.
2000
2002
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.nptel.iitm.ac.in/courses/108106025
http://www.nelsonmartins.com/roadmap/present.php?lang=eng
http://www.thompsonrd.com/Teaching
12E003
RENEWABLE ENERGY SOURCES

3
OBJECTIVES:
To provide knowledge about the solar and photovoltaic energy sources.
To analyze the various basic components of wind electric conversion systems.
To understand about fuel cells in chemical energy sources.
To impart knowledge on basic principles and component of tidal and geothermal power plants.
OUTCOMES:
acquire knowledge about the solar and photovoltaic energy sources.
identify the various basic components of wind electric conversion systems.
understand the construction and operation of fuel cells in chemical energy sources.
have knowledge on the basic principles and component of tidal and geothermal power plants.
UNIT I
SOLAR ENERGY
9
Introduction to solar energy: solar radiation, availability, measurement and estimation Solar thermal
conversion devices and storage Solar cells and photovoltaic conversion PV systems MPPT
Applications of PV Systems Solar energy collectors and storages.
UNIT II
WIND ENERGY
9
Introduction Basic principles of wind energy conversion Wind data and energy estimation Site
selection consideration Basic components of wind energy conversion system Types of wind
machines Basic components of wind electric conversion systems Schemes for electric generations
Generator control, load control, energy storage Applications of wind energy Inter connected
systems.
431
UNIT III
CHEMICAL ENERGY SOURCES
9
Introduction Fuel cells Design and principles of operation of a fuel cell Classification of fuel cells
Types of fuel cells Conversion efficiency of fuel cells Types of electrodes, work output and emf
of fuel cell, applications of fuel cells Hydrogen energy: Introduction Hydrogen production
Electrolysis, thermo chemical methods, westing house, electro-chemical thermal sulphur cycle Fossil
fuel methods Hydrogen storage, Utilization of hydrogen gas.
UNIT IV
ENERGY FROM OCEANS
9
Introduction: ocean thermal electric conversion (OTEC), methods of ocean thermal electric power
generation, open cycle OTEC system, closed OTEC cycle Energy from tides: Basic principles of tidal
power, component of tidal power plants, operation methods of utilization of tidal energy, site
requirements, storage, advantages and limitations of tidal power generation Ocean waves, energy and
power from the waves, wave energy conversion devices.
UNIT V
GEOTHERMAL ENERGY
9
Introduction, estimation of geothermal power, nature of geothermal fields, Geothermal sources, inter
connection of geothermal fossil systems, prime movers for geo thermal energy conversion
Application of geothermal energy Energy from biomass: Introduction, Biomass conversion
technologies, photosynthesis, classification of biogas plants Biomass Energy conversion, Energy
from waste.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.
No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Rajput R K
Non-conventional Energy
Sources and Utilization
(Energy Engineering)
S. Chand and Co. Ltd,
2012
2.
Khan B H
Non-conventional Energy
sources
Tata McGraw-hill
Publishing Company,
New Delhi
2009
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.
No.
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Geothermal Power Plants:

Principles, Applications, Case
Studies and Environment
aspects
Butterworth-Heinemann
Third edition
2012
Wind Electrical Systems
2005
Variable Speed Generators

Non conventional energy
sources
Taylor & Francis group
2006
Khanna publishes
2011
Author(s)
1.
Ronald DiPippo
3.
Bhadra S N
Kastha D
Banerjee S
Ion Boldea
4.
Rai G D
2.
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.apricus.com/html/solar_typesofsolar.htm
http://www.fuelcellsworks.com/Typesoffuelcells.html
http://www.world.org/weo/energy
12E004
POWER SYSTEM ECONOMICS

3
OBJECTIVES:
To familiarize with various power forecasting techniques.
To understand the role of forecasting in planning.
To get an exposure about the fundamental economic analysis.
To study about the different financing options for the power sector.
432
OUTCOMES:
understand and analyze various power forecasting techniques.
familiarize with the role of forecasting in planning.
posses knowledge about the fundamental economic analysis.
understand the different financing options for the power sector.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Forecasting: needs, uses and current status of forecasting Fundamentals of quantitative forecasting
Explanatory and time serious forecasting Least square estimates Peak load forecasting Accuracy
of forecasting methods Regression methods Box Jenkins time serious methods.
UNIT II
FORECASTING TECHNIQUES
9
Problems in electrical industry Long term forecasting techniques Methods of long term forecasting
Spatial load forecasting Multivariate procedures Short term forecasting techniques.
UNIT III
PLANNING
9
Forecasting and planning The Role of forecasting in planning Comparison and selection of
forecasting methods The accuracy of forecasting methods Pattern of the data and its effects on
individual forecasting methods Time horizon effects on forecasting methods.
UNIT IV
ANALYSIS
9
Generation planning Fundamental economic analysis Generation planning optimized according to
generating unit categories Distribution and transmission system planning.
UNIT V
POWER SYSTEM ECONOMICS-DIFFERENT COST STRUCTURES
9
Typical cost components and cost structure of the power sector Different methods of comparing
investment options Concept of life cycle cost, annual rate of return Methods of calculations of
Internal Rate of Return (IRR) and Net Present Value (NPV) of project Short term and long term
marginal costs Different financing options for the power sector .
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.
No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
1.
Olle I Elgerd
Electric Energy Systems

Theory-An Introduction
2.
Allen J Wood
Bruce F Wollenberg
Power Generation,
Operation and Control
Tata McGraw Hill

Publishing Company
Ltd, New Delhi,
John Wiley and
Sons
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
2008
2012
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.
No.
Author(s)
Forecasting Methods and

Application
Modern Power Systems
Analysis
John Wiley and Sons
Year of
Publication
2008
1.
Makridakis Spyros
2.
Xi-Fan Wang
Yong-Hua Song
Malcolm Irving
3.
Kothari D P
Nagrath I J
Modern Power System

Analysis
McGraw Hill
2011
4.
Sullivan
Power System Planning
McGraw Hill
2012
McGraw Hill
2010
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
http://www.impowerg.iitb.ac.in
http://www.slashdocs.com/ximtq/power-system-economics-unilag-lecture-notes-3-autosaved.html
4. http://www.ocw.mit.edu/courses/electrical-engineering-and-computer-science
5. http://forum.jntuworld.com/showthread.php
433
12E005
SPECIAL ELECTRICAL MACHINES AND CONTROLLERS

3
OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge on construction, principle of operation and performance of ac
commutator motors.
To understand the construction, principle of operation, control and performance of
stepper motors.
To posses knowledge on the construction, principle of operation, control and
performance of switched reluctance motors.
To impart knowledge on the construction, principle of operation, control and
performance of permanent magnet motors.
To know the construction, principle of operation and performance of linear motors.
OUTCOMES:
understand the basic principles, performances and applications of special electrical machines.
have knowledge on different mode of excitation and its characteristics AC commutator motor
and stepper motor.
understand and analyze the power controllers of various special electrical motors.
UNIT I
AC COMMUTATOR MOTORS
9
Principle of operation Equivalent circuit Phasor diagram Performance of repulsion motor and
universal motor Applications.
UNIT II
STEPPER MOTORS
9
Constructional features Principle of operation Variable reluctance motor Single and multi stack
configurations Permanent magnet stepper motor Hybrid stepper motor Different modes of
Excitation Theory of torque predictions Linear and non-linear analysis Characteristics Drive
circuits Applications.
UNIT III
SWITCHED RELUCTANCE MOTORS
9
Constructional features Principle of operation Torque prediction Power controllers Nonlinear
analysis Microprocessor based control Characteristics Computer control Applications.
UNIT IV
PERMANENT MAGNET MOTORS
9
Principle of operation Types Magnetic circuit analysis EMF and torque equations Power
Controllers Motor characteristics and control of PMDC, PMSM, Servo motors and BLDC motors
Applications.
UNIT V
LINEAR MOTORS
9
Linear induction motor (LIM) classification Construction Principle of operation Concept of
current sheet Goodness factor DC Linear motor (DCLM) types Circuit equation DCLM control
applications Linear synchronous motor(LSM) Types Performance equations Applications.
TOTAL : 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.
No.
Author(s)
1.
Venkataratnam K
Krishnan R
2.
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Special Electrical Machines
CRC Press, New York
2009
Switched Reluctance Motor

Drives - Modeling, Simulation,
Analysis, Design and
Application
CRC Press, New York
2001
Title of the book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Title of the book
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.
No.
Author(s)
1.
Janardanan E G
Special Electrical Machines

434
PHI learning Private

Limited, Delhi
2014
2.
Theodore Wildi
3.
Athani V V
4.
Rajput R K
Electrical Machines, Drives and

Power Systems
Stepper Motors
Fundamentals Applications and
Design
Electrical Machines
Pearson New
International
2013
2010
Laxmi Publications
2006
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
http://emsa.gastli.net/Chapter5/stepper_motor.pdf
http://www.pittman-motors.com
12E006
HVDC AND FACTS

3
OBJECTIVES:
To review the concept and planning of DC power transmission and comparison with AC
Power transmission.
To analyze HVDC converters and to study about the HVDC system control.
To analyze harmonics and design of filters and to model and analyze the DC systems.
To introduce the reactive power control techniques and different FACTS controllers.
OUTCOMES:
gain knowledge about existing problems in HVDC and DC links.
understand and analyze thyristor based converters in HVDC transmission system.
get exposed to the issues of reactive power in transmission system.
acquire knowledge of FACTS controllers.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Historical development of HVAC and DC links Types of DC links HVDC projects in India and
across the world Disadvantages of HVDC transmission Applications of DC transmission
Economic factors Development of power devices for HVDC transmission: Thyristors, light activated
thyristors, MOS controlled thyristors (MCTs) Switching and steady state characteristics.
UNIT II
THYRISTOR CONVERTERS
9
Three phase fully controlled thyristor bridge converters Operation as rectifiers and line commutated
inverters Converter equivalent circuits Parameters and characteristics of rectifiers and inverters
Series and parallel arrangement of thyristors Multi-bridge converters.
UNIT III
CONTROL OF CONVERTERS AND REACTIVE POWER CONTROL
9
Gate control Basic means of control and modes of operation Power reversal Desired features of
control Control characteristics Constant current control Constant extinction angle control
Stability of control Tap changer control Power control and current limits Reactive power
requirements Reactive power control during steady state and transients.
UNIT IV
INTRODUCTION TO FACTS CONTROLLERS
9
Principles of reactive power control in load and transmission line Compensation Series and shunt
compensation Concepts of FACTS Basic concepts of static VAR compensator, resonance damper,
thyristor controlled series capacitor, static condenser and phase angle regulator.
UNIT V
STATIC VAR COMPENSATION
9
Basic concepts Thyristor Controlled Reactor (TCR) Thyristor Switched Reactor (TSR) Thyristor
Switched Capacitor (TSC) Saturated Reactor (SR) Fixed Capacitor (FC) Introduction to Unified
Power Flow Controller (UPFC).
TOTAL: 45
435
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.
No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Chan-Ki Kim
Vijay K Sood
Gil-Soo Jang
Seong-Joo Lim
HVDC Transmission: Power

Conversion Applications in
Power Systems
John Wiley and Sons

(Asia) pvt Ltd
2009
2.
Narin G
Hingorani
High Power Electronics and

Flexible AC Transmission
Systems
IEEE Power
Engineering Review,
Eighth Volume
2011
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.
No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
Kory B J
High Voltage Direct Current

Converters and Systems
2.
Padiyar K R
FACTS Controllers for Power

Transmission and Distribution
3.
4.
Jos Arrillaga
Y H Liu
Neville R Watson
Xiao Ping Zang
Christian Rehtanz
Bikash Pal
Flexible Power Transmission:

The HVDC Options
Flexible AC Transmission
System: Modelling and Control
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Mc Donald and Co
2009
New Age
International
Publishers
John Wiley and
Sons (Asia) pvt.
Ltd
2007
2007
Springer
2012
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.ipst.org/TechPapers/2001/IPST01Paper205.pdf
http://www.springerlink.com/index/N70Q451123Q7658W.pdf
http://media.wiley.com/product_data/excerpt/31/04712064/0471206431-1.pdf
12E007
JAVA PROGRAMMING
3
OBJECTIVES:
To know about basic Java language syntax and semantics.
To use the Java Application Programming Interface (Java API) for application development.
To design the graphical user interfaces that respond to user events using Java.
To understand the database connectivity.
To know the concept of Applet.
OUTCOMES:
design the features and elements of the java programming language with problems.
write code, test and analyze input/output for programs with basic data structures using arrays,
lists and hash maps, event handling and exception handling in java.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Java Basics Introduction to Java Features of Java Comments Data types Variables
Operators Control statements Type conversion and casting Classes and Objects: Concepts of
classes and objects Methods Constructors Static variables and methods Final keyword Access
control This keyword Garbage collection Overloading methods and constructors Parameter
passing Call by value Call by reference Arrays Strings.
436
UNIT II
9
Inheritance: Basic concepts Super classes and sub classes Member access rules Usage of super
key word Forms of inheritance Method overriding Abstract classes Dynamic method dispatch
Using final with inheritance The Object class Packages and Interfaces: Defining, creating and
accessing a Package CLASSPATH Importing packages Differences between classes and interface
Defining an interface Implementing interface Applying interfaces Variables in interface and
extending interfaces Interfaces Interfaces vs abstract classes Defining an interface
Implementing interfaces Extending interface Inner classes.
UNIT III
9
Data structures creation and manipulation in java: Introduction to Java collections Overview of
Java collection frame work Commonly used collection classes ArrayList LinkedList HashSet
HashMap TreeMap Collection interfaces Collection Set List Map Legacy collection
classes Vector Hashtable Stack Dictionary(abstract) Enumeration interface Iteration over
collections Iterator interface ListIterator interface StringTokenizer Formatter Random
Scanner Observable Using java util Files: Streams Byte streams Character streams Text
input/output Binary input/output random access file operations File management using file class
Using java io Networking in Java Introduction, client/server Interaction with stream socket
connections, Connectionless client/server interaction with Datagrams, using java.net.
UNIT IV
9
Exception handling Types of exceptions Try Catch Throw Throws and finally keywords
Built- in exceptions Creating own exception sub classes Concepts of multithreading Differences
between process and thread Thread life cycle Creating multiple threads using thread class
Runnable interface Synchronization Thread priorities Inter thread communication Daemon
threads Deadlocks Thread groups.
UNIT V
9
Applets Concepts of Applets Applets and applications Life cycle of an applet Event Handling,
Color class and graphics AWT Controls Swing: Introduction to Swing Swing vs AWT MVC
architecture Swing components swing application Java Database Connectivity (JDBC) creating
connection Executing SQL statements Processing Resultset.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.
No.
Author(s)
1.
Cay S Horstmann
Gary Cornell
Herbert Schildt
Title of the Book

Core Java: Volume I
Fundamentals
Java2:The Complete
Reference
Publisher
Sun Microsystems
Press
McGraw Hill
Year of
Publication
2008
2002
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.
No.
Author(s)
1.
Arnold K
Gosling J
2.
Timothy Budd
3.
Thomas C Wu
Title of the Book

The JAVA programming
language
Understanding Objectoriented programming with
Java
oriented programming with
Java
Publisher
Pearson Education
2000
Pearson Education
2000
Tata McGraw Hill
2006
WEB URLs:
1. http://docs.oracle.com/javase/tutorial/java/nutsandbolts
2. http://www.javabeginner.com/learn java
3. http://docs.oracle.com/javase/tutorial/collections/intro/
4. http://www.roseindia.net/java/thread/Java Multithreading.shtml
5. http://www.tutorialspoint.com/java/java_excemptions.html
437
Year of
Publication
12E008
COMPUTER AIDED ANALYSIS AND DESIGN OF ELECTRICAL

MACHINES
3
OBJECTIVES:
To introduce the importance of computer aided design method.
To know the basic electromagnetic field equations and the problem formulation for CAD
applications.
To get familiarized with finite element method as applicable for electrical engineering.
To introduce the organization of a typical CAD package.
OUTCOMES:
understand the Computer Aided Design tools and advantages.
model and analyze the electrical machines using computer Aided Design tools.
analyze about finite element method for design of different electrical apparatus.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
Conventional design methodology Computer aided design aspects Advantages.
UNIT II
ELECTROMAGNETICS AND ELECTROSTATICS
9
Basic field equations Calculation of field distribution Flux linkages Voltage induced Inductance
Capacitance Force and Torque.
UNIT III
CAD PACKAGES
9
Recent developments Preprocessing Modeling Boundary conditions Material characteristics
Problem formulation Solution Post processing.
UNIT IV
FINITE ELEMENT ANALYSIS
9
Mathematical formulation Discretisation Shape functions Stiffness matrix Solution techniques
Post processing.
UNIT V
DESIGN EXAMPLES
9
Design of actuator Solenoid Transformer Induction motor Switched reluctance motor Stepper
motor PM machines.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.
No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Lowther D A
Silvester P P
Computer Aided Design in

Magnetics
Springer London Ltd.
2011
2.
Vishnu Murthy K M
Computer-Aided Design of
Electrical Machines
BS Publications
2010
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.
No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Zienkiewicz O C
Taylor R L
The Finite Element Method:

Its Basis and Fundamentals
Elsevier ButterworthHeinemann, Seventh

Edition
2013
2.
Upadhyay K G
Design of Electrical
Machines
2008
Electrical Machines Design

Data Book
2009
Machine Design: A CAD

Approach
John Wiley & Sons
2001
3.
4.
Shanmugasundaram
A
Palani R
Andrew D.
Dimarogonas
438
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.springerlink.com/index/J5387R079712515V.pdf
http://www.transformersdesign.nic.ac.in
http://www.inductionmachines_design.org/123.pdf
http://www.uptu.ac.in/highlights/pdf_old_q_paper/v-2060-26.pdf
12E009
VLSI DESIGN
3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the electrical properties of MOS and CMOS circuits.
To get an exposure to the architectural choices and performance tradeoffs involved in
designing and realizing the circuits in CMOS technology.
To know about the subsystem design process.
To gain knowledge on PLA, PAL, CPLD and FPGA.
OUTCOMES:
understand and analyze about the MOS and CMOS circuit design process.
gain knowledge about the subsystem design process.
Analyze the VLSI design methodology in relevant applications.
have knowledge about programmable logic devices like PLA, PAL, CPLD and FPGA.
UNIT I
BASIC ELECTRICAL PROPERTIES OF MOS AND CMOS CIRCUITS
9
MOS Transistor Threshold voltage Pass transistor Transmission gate Basic DC equations
Second order effects MOS modules Small signal AC characteristics nMOS inverter Steered
input to an nMOS inverter Depletion mode and enhancement mode pull ups CMOS inverter DC
characteristics Inverter delay Power consumption in CMOS gates Static dissipation Dynamic
dissipation.
UNIT II
OVERVIEW OF VLSI DESIGN METHODOLOGY
9
VLSI design process Architectural design Logical design Physical design Layout styles Full
custom Semi custom approaches.
UNIT III
MOS AND CMOS CIRCUIT DESIGN PROCESSES
9
Layer representations Stick diagrams nMOS design style CMOS design style Design rules
Need for design rules Mead Conway design rules for the silicon gate nMOS process CMOS n well /
p well lambda based design rules Simple layout examples Sheet resistance Resistance estimation
Capacitance estimation Driving large capacitive loads.
UNIT IV
SUBSYSTEM DESIGN PROCESS
9
General arrangement of a 4-bit arithmetic processor Design of a 4 bit shifter Design of a ALU
subsystem Implementation of ALU functions with an adder Carry look ahead adder Multipliers
Serial parallel multipliers Pipelined multiplier array.
UNIT V
PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC DEVICES
9
Read Only Memory (ROM) PLA PAL Complex Programmable Logic Devices (CPLD) Field
Programmable Logic Devices (FPGA) Xilinx 4000 series FPGA CLB I/O Blocks FPGA Design
Flow.
TOTAL : 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.
No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Douglas A Pucknell
Kamran Eshraghian
Basic VLSI design
Prentice Hall India
2004
2.
Neil Weste H E
Kamran Eshranghian
Principle of CMOS VLSI

design: A System
Perspective
Pearson Education
2013
439
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.
No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Wayne Wolf
Modern VLSI Design:

Systems on Silicon
Pearson Education
Indian Reprint,
New Delhi
2008
2.
Jan M Rabaey
Chandrakasan A
Nikolic B
Digital Integrated Circuits
Prentice Hall India
2008
3.
Sung Mo Kang
Yusuf Leblebici
CMOS digital Integrated

Circuits Analysis and design
Randall L Geiger
Phillip E Allen
Noel R Strader
VLSI Design Techniques for

analog and digital circuits
Tata McGraw Hill

publishing private
limited, New Delhi
Tata McGraw Hill
publishing private
limited, New Delhi
2009
2010
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.viit.ac.in/UNIT1_ghongade.pdf
http://conf05.iitkgp.ac.in/avlsi/
http://www.kokanastha.com/career_guide/introduction_VLSI.html
12E010
BIOMEDICAL INSTRUMENTATION
3
OBJECTIVES:
To study about the components used in the medical instruments.
To impart knowledge on the transducers in-built with bio-medical instruments.
To understand the various process in bio medical instruments.
To know the various computer techniques utilized in the bio-medical instruments.
OUTCOMES:
familiarize with the components used in the medical instruments.
gain knowledge about transducers used in bio-medical instruments.
understand the various stages of data processing in bio-medical instruments.
understand the computerized data processing in bio-medical instruments
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Cell structure Electrode Electrolyte interface Electrode potential Resting and action potential
Electrodes for their measurement ECG,EEG,EOG,EMG Machine description Methods of
measurement Equipment failures and trouble shooting.
UNIT II
TRANSDUCERS FOR BIOMEDICAL INSTRUMENTATION
9
Basic transducer principles Source of bioelectric potentials Resistive, inductive, capacitive, fiberoptic, photoelectric and chemical transducers Their description and feature applicable for biomedical
instrumentation.
UNIT III
SIGNAL CONDITIONING, RECORDING AND DISPLAY
9
Input isolation DC amplifier Power amplifier and differential amplifier Electrometer amplifier
Carrier amplifier Oscillographic, galvanometric and XY magnetic recorders Storage oscilloscopes
Electron microscope PMMC writing systems.
UNIT IV
CARDIAC MEASUREMENTS
9
Electrocardiograph measurements Blood pressure measurement by ultrasonic method
Plethysmography Blood flow measurement by electromagnetic flow meter Cardiac output
measurement by dilution method Phonocardiography Vector cardiography Heart lung machine
Artificial ventilator Anesthetic machine CT scanner Bio-telemetry Cardiac pacemaker.
440
UNIT V
COMPUTERS IN BIOMEDICAL INSTRUMENTATION
9
Introduction Computers in medicine Basics of signal conversion and digital filtering Data
reduction technique Time and frequency domain technique ECG Analysis.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.
No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Mandeep Singh
Introduction to Bio medical

Instrumentation
Prentice Hall India
2010
2.
Leslie Cromwell
Fred J Weibell
Erich A Pfeiffer
and Measurements
Prentice Hall India
2011
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.
No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Nandini K Jog
Electronics in medicine and

biomedical instrumentation
PHI learning pvt ltd
2013
2.
Shakthi Chaterjee
Aubert Miller
systems
Cengage Learning
2010
3.
Webster J
John Wiley and

Sons
2009
4.
Khandpur R S
Hand book of Biomedical

Instrumentation and
Measurements
Tata McGraw-Hill
2003
WEB URLs:
1. http://www.nptel.iitm.ac.in
2. http://lecturenotes.in/notes/engg/paper/biomedical/page1.html
3. http://biomedikal.in/2011/02/lecture-notes-on-biomedical-instrumentation-systems
12E011
3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the architecture of a virtual instrument and its relation to the operating system.
To familiarize the programming structure of virtual instrumentation.
To gain a thorough understanding of LabVIEW software and its applications.
To acquire and analyze the analog and digital signals.
OUTCOMES:
have knowledge in the field of virtual Instrumentation.
understand the fundamental concepts and applications of LabVIEW software.
analyze modern power system controllers using virtual instrumentation.
understand about the interface and monitor of real time varying system.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
General functional description of a digital instrument Block diagram of a virtual instrument
Physical quantities and analog interfaces Hardware and software User interfaces Advantages of
virtual instruments over conventional instruments Architecture of a virtual instrument and its relation
to the operating system.
UNIT II
SOFTWARE OVERVIEW
9
LabVIEW Graphical user interfaces Controls and indicators G programming Labels and text
Shape Size and color Owned and free labels Data types Format Precision and representation
Data flow programming Editing Debugging and running a Virtual instrument Graphical
programming palettes and tools Front panel objects Functions and libraries.
441
UNIT III
PROGRAMMING STRUCTURE
9
FOR loops WHILE loops CASE structure Formula nodes Sequence structures Arrays and
clusters Array operations Bundle Bundle/Unbundle by name Charts and graphs String and file
I/O High level and low level file I/O's Attribute modes local and global variables.
UNIT IV
OPERATING SYSTEM AND HARDWARE OVERVIEW
9
PC architecture Current trends Operating system requirements Drivers Interface Buses PCI
Bus Interface cards Specification Analog and digital interfaces Power Speed and timing
considerations Installing hardware Installing drivers Configuring the hardware Addressing the
hardware in LabVIEW Digital and analog I/O function Data Acquisition Buffered I/O Real time
data acquisition.
UNIT V
LabVIEW APPLICATIONS
9
IMAQ Motion Control General applications Feedback devices Motor Drives Instrument
connectivity GPIB Serial Communication General, GPIB hardware and software specifications
PX1 / PC1 Controller and chassis configuration and installation.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.
No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Jovitha Jerome
with LabVIEW
Prentice Hall Inc, New

Jersey
2010
2.
Sanjay Gupta
Joseph John
Using LabVIEW
Tata McGraw-Hill, First

Edition
2010
Publisher
Year of
Publication
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.
No.
Author(s)
1.
Bitter R Mohiuddin T
Nawrocki M
LabVIEW Advanced
Programming
Techniques
CRC Press, Second

Edition
2007
2.
Leonard Sokoloff
Application of
LabVIEW

New Delhi
2003
3.
Jeffery Travis
Jim Kring
LabVIEW for Everyone
Dorling Kindersley
(India) Pvt. Ltd.
2005
4.
Sumathi S
Surekha P
LabVIEW based
Advanced
Instrumentation Systems
Springer
2007
Title of the Book
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.ni.com/India/LabVIEW
http://www.ni.com/India/DAQ
http://www.eeherald.com/section/designguide/dgni100003.html
http://labviewwiki.org/LabVIEW_tutorial
http://www.cipce.rpi.edu/programs/remote_experiment/labview
12E012
ADVANCED MICROPROCESSORS AND MICROCONTROLLERS

3
OBJECTIVES:
To study the hardware architecture, instruction set and timing diagrams of 8086, 80286,
80386 microprocessors and PIC microcontroller.
To illustrate about the interrupts and programming of 8086, 80286, 80386 microprocessors
and PIC microcontroller.
To impart knowledge about the Pentium microprocessor.
To impart knowledge about the ARM processor.
442
OUTCOMES:
familiarize with 8086, 80286 and 80386 microprocessors.
have knowledge in Pentium microprocessor controls.
gain knowledge about PIC microcontroller.
analyze and develop various algorithm for ARM processor.
UNIT I
8086 MICROPROCESSOR
9
Architecture Pin description Operating modes Registers Interrupts Bus cycle Addressing
modes Typical configuration of 8086 system Overview of instruction set.
UNIT II
80286 AND 80386 MICROPROCESSORS
9
80286 processor Functional block diagram Modes of operation Real and protected mode
Registers Memory management and protection features 80386 processor Functional block
diagram Programming model Addressing modes and instruction set overview Address translation
Modes of operation.
UNIT III
PENTIUM MICROPROCESSOR
9
Introduction Architecture Pentium pro processors Special pentium registers Memory
management.
UNIT IV
PIC MICROCONTROLLER
9
Architecture Memory structure Register File Addressing modes Interrupts Timers Modes
of operation PWM output Analog to digital converter UART Watchdog timer RESET
Alternatives Power down mode I2C Bus operation.
UNIT V
ARM PROCESSORS
9
ARM architecture ARM Assembly Language Program ARM Organization and implementation
ARM instruction set Thumb instruction set ARM CPU Cores.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.
No.
1.
2.
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Ajay V Desmukh
Microcontrollers [Theory and

Applications]
Tata McGraw Hill

education Pvt Ltd,
New Delhi
2012
Barry B Brey
The Intel Microprocessor

8086/8088, 80186/80188,
80286, 80386, 80486
Pentium and Pentium Pro
processor Architecture,
Programming and Interfacing
Prentice Hall of
India, Eight
Edition/Pearson
Education
2009
Author(s)
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.
No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Ajay Kumar Rai

Kishor M Bhurchandi
Advanced microprocessor and

peripherals
2.
Mohamed Ali mazidi

Rolind D Makinlay
Danny Causey
PIC Microcontroller and

Embedded system using
assembly and C for PIC18
Tata McGraw
Hill education Pvt
Ltd,
New Delhi
Pearson
Education
incorporation
3.
Steve Furber
ARM Systemon Chip

Architecture
Addison Wesley,
Second Edition
2001
4.
Mohammed
Rafiquzzamal
Microprocessor and
Microcomputer based system
Design
CRC Press
2010
443
2012
2009
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.Intel.com/Pentium processors
http://www.microchip.com
12E013
PLC, SCADA AND DCS

3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the architecture and programming of PLC.
To impart knowledge about the architecture and application of SCADA.
To acquire knowledge about the distributed control system architecture.
To know the communication and interfaces.
OUTCOMES:
understand about the automation and PLC.
gain knowledge about the architecture and designing of a SCADA system.
familiarize with the distributed control system.
understand and analyze the communication and interfaces in Distributed control system.
UNIT I
PLC AND ITS PROGRAMMING
9
Need for Automation Basics of PLC Types of PLC Architecture of PLC I/O devices
Advantages and disadvantages of PLC Types of Programming Simple process control programs
using relay ladder logic
UNIT II
SCADA
9
Need for SCADA system general definition and SCADA components hardware and software
architecture creating a SCADA project: GUI design, tag substitution, dynamic process mimic,
dynamic and historic trend, alarms and events communication with PLC comparison of SCADA
and DCS.
UNIT III
APPLICATIONS OF SCADA
9
SCADA in power system: Modeling of SCAD in power generation, power distribution and power grid
SCADA in process control: control modes in closed loop control cascade control feed-forward
control automatic feed-forward control overcoming process dead time.
UNIT IV
DISTRIBUTED CONTROL SYSTEMS ARCHITECTURE
9
Introduction and historical background microprocessor based architecture functional blocks
hardware design issues Applications.
UNIT V
LOCAL CONTROL UNIT
9
Architecture languages: requirements and alternatives problem oriented languages high-level
languages process interfacing issues: security requirements, process input/output design issues.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.
No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
Frank D Petruzella
Programmable logic
controllers
2.
Stuart A Boyer
SCADA: Supervisory
Control And Data
Acquisition
444
Publisher
Tata McGraw-Hill
Education, Third
Edition
International society on
Automation, fourth
edition
Year of
Publication
2010
2010
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.
No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Peng Zhang
Advanced Industrial Control

Technology
William Andrew
2010
2.
Priyanka Verma
Sumit Verma
GIS SCADA integration:

An approach for power
system distribution
Lambert academic
publishing
2012
3.
Stuart G McCrady
Designing SCADA
application software: A
practical approach
Elsevier Inc
2013
4.
Krishnaswamy K
Process Control
2007
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.pacontrol.com
http://www.automation.com
http://www.eeci-institute.eu/pdf/M010/L5_distributed.pdf
12E014
ENERGY AUDITING AND MANAGEMENT

3
OBJECTIVES:
To get exposure to the principle of energy audit concept.
To get familiar on energy management and energy efficiency.
To impart knowledge on power factor improvement and energy instruments.
To understand economic aspects and analysis.
OUTCOMES:
familiarize with the energy auditing system in industries.
understand the energy management and energy efficiency.
have knowledge in power factor improvement and energy instruments.
get an exposure about the economic aspects and analysis.
UNIT I
BASIC PRINCIPLES OF ENERGY AUDIT
9
Energy audit definition, concept, type of audit, energy index, cost index, pie charts, Sankey diagrams,
load profiles, Energy conservation schemes Energy audit of industries Energy saving potential,
energy audit of process industry, thermal power station, building energy audit.
UNIT II
ENERGY MANAGEMENT
9
Principles of energy management, organizing energy management program, initiating, planning,
controlling, promoting, monitoring, reporting Energy auditor and energy manager Eligibility,
qualification and functions Questionnaire and check list for top management.
UNIT III
ENERGY EFFICIENT MOTORS
9
Factors affecting efficiency Energy efficient motors: constructional details, characteristics Variable
speed, variable frequency drives Voltage variation Voltage unbalance Over motoring Motor
energy audit.
UNIT IV
POWER FACTOR IMPROVEMENT, LIGHTING AND ENERGY

INSTRUMENTS
9
Power factor Methods of improvement, location of capacitors, power factor with non linear loads,
effect of harmonics on power factor Energy efficient lighting system design and practice Lighting
control Measuring Instruments: wattmeter, data loggers, thermocouples, pyrometers, lux meters,
tongue tester.
445
UNIT V
ECONOMIC ASPECTS AND ANALYSIS
9
Economics analysis Depreciation Methods, time value of money, rate of return, present worth
method, replacement analysis, life cycle costing analysis Calculation of simple payback method and
net present worth method.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.
No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Year of
Publication
Publisher
1.
Murphy W R G
Mckay Butterworth
Energy Management
Heinemann
Publications
2007
2.
Moncef Krarti
Energy Audit of
Building Systems: An
Engineering Approach
CRC Press, Taylor and

Francis Group
2012
Publisher
Year of
Publication
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.
No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
Paul O Callagham
Energy Management
Mc-Graw Hill Book

Company, First
Edition
1998
2.
John C Andreas
Energy Efficient Electric

Motors
Marcel Dekker Inc

Ltd, Third Edition
2005
3.
Yogi Goswami D Frank

Kreith
Energy Management and

Conservation Handbook
CRC Press, Taylor and

Francis Group
2007
4.
Turner W C
Steve Doty
Energy Management
Handbook

Seventh Edition
2009
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
http://www.pacontrol.com http://www.enercon.gov.pk/images/pdf/1ch3.pdf
http://www.energymanagertraining.com/Journal/04102006/EnergyConservation,Efficiency&
EnergyAudit.pdf
3. http://www.bsr.org/reports/bsr-energy-management-handbook.pdf
4. http://www.kmwsa.gov.in/o-m_manual/Chapter-16.pdf
12E015
DIGITAL SYSTEM DESIGN

3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the structure of standard PLDs and complex PLDs (CPLDs).
To familiarize with the programming of field programmable gate arrays (FPGAs).
To gain a thorough knowledge of VHDL Design.
To know the various configurations of VHDL coding.
OUTCOMES:
have knowledge in the field of PLDs and complex PLDs (CPLDs).
understand the programming of field programmable gate arrays (FPGAs).
gain knowledge about VHDL Design.
familiarize with VHDL programming and testing methods.
UNIT I
SYSTEM DESIGN USING PLDs AND CPLDs
9
Structure of standard PLDs and complex PLDs (CPLDs) Design of combinational and sequential
circuits using PLDs and CPLDs Design of state machines using algorithmic state machines (ASM)
chart as a design tool.
446
UNIT II
INTRODUCTION TO FIELD PROGRAMMABLE GATE ARRAYS (FPGAs)
9
Types of FPGA Xilinx XC3000 series Logic cell array Configurable logic blocks
Input/Output Blocks Programmable interconnection points Introduction to ACT 2 family and
FPGAs: Xilinx, SPARTAN and VIRTEX Design examples.
UNIT III
INTRODUCTION TO VHDL
9
Digital System Design process Levels of abstraction VHDL Design: entities, Architectural body,
Data types, Scalar types, Composite types, Access types, File types Operators and expressions Data
objects Concurrent and sequential statements Concurrent signal assignment Conditional signal
assignment Signal drivers Inertial, transport and delta delays Sequential control Wait If
Case Loop Next Exit Null process Component instantiation Block Generics Assert.
UNIT IV
SUBPROGRAMS, PACKAGES AND CONFIGURATIONS
9
Functions Procedure Package Package declarations Sub program declaration Package body
Libraries Predefined attributes Configuration Behavioral, dataflow and Structural modeling of
digital circuits Simple VHDL codes.
UNIT V
TESTING IN DIGITAL CIRCUITS AND DESIGN FOR TESTABILITY
9
Detection and location of faults in combinational logic circuits Stuck-at-fault model Path
sensitizing method Boolean difference method Fault detection and location in synchronous
sequential circuits Design for testability Adhoc techniques Scan registers Level Sensitive Scan
Design Boundary Scan Built-in-self test.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.
No.
Author(s)
1.
Mark Znolinski
2.
Chang
Title of the Book

Digital System Design with
VHDL
Digital Systems Design With
VHDL And Synthesis: An
Integrated Approach
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Pearson Education
2004
John Wiley & Sons
2007
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.
No.
Publisher
Year of
Publication
High Speed Digital System

Design Volume 1
Digital Systems Design using
VHDL
Morgan and
claypool publishers
2006
Thomson Asia
2007
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
Justin Davis
2.
Roth C H
3.
Bhasker J
A VHDL Primer
Prentice Hall India
2006
Ian Grout
Digital Systems Design with

FPGAs and CPLDs
Elsevier Ltd
2008
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://users.ece.utexas.edu/~roth/book/book.htm
http://www.filecrop.com/Digital-Systems-Design-Using-VHDL.html
http://coep.vlab.co.in/?sub=29&brch=88&sim=228&cnt=1
http://www.ece.ubc.ca/~edc/464/lectures/lec6.pdf
12E016

3
OBJECTIVES:
To expose the students to the concepts of Artificial Intelligence.
To impart knowledge on Neural network and Fuzzy systems.
To give an overview about genetic algorithm.
To know the applications of NN, FS and GA.
447
OUTCOMES:
have knowledge about Artificial intelligence.
understand the Neural Network and its applications.
gain knowledge on Fuzzy logic system and its applications.
develop and analyze Genetic Algorithms for certain applications.
UNIT I
ARCHITECTURES
9
Introduction Biological neuron Artificial neuron Neuron modeling Learning rules Single layer
Multi layer feed forward network Back propagation Learning factors.
UNIT II
NEURAL NETWORKS FOR CONTROL
9
Feedback networks Discrete time hop field networks Transient response of continuous time
networks Applications of artificial neural network Process identification Neuro controller for
inverted pendulum.
UNIT III
FUZZY SYSTEMS
Classical sets Fuzzy sets Fuzzy relations Fuzzification Defuzzification Fuzzy rules.
UNIT IV
FUZZY LOGIC CONTROL
9
Membership function Knowledge base Decisionmaking logic Optimization of membership
function using neural networks Adaptive fuzzy system Introduction to Genetic Algorithm.
UNIT V
APPLICATION OF FLC AND GA
9
Fuzzy logic control Inverted pendulum Image processing Home heating system Blood pressure
during anesthesia Introduction to neuro fuzzy controller Applications of Genetic Algorithm.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.
No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
1.
Jacek M Zurada
Neural Systems
Jaico Publishing home
2.
Timothy J Ross
Fuzzy Logic with

John Wiley and Sons.

Third Edition
Year of
Publication
2002
2010
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.
No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Shigeo Abe
Neural Networks and Fuzzy

systems : Theory and
Applications
2.
Hung T Nguyen
Prasad N R
A First Course in Fuzzy and

Neural Control
CRC Press, Florida
2003
3.
Simon Haykin
Neural Networks
Pearson Education,
New Delhi
2003
4.
John Yen
Reza Langari
Fuzzy Logic Intelligence

Control and Information
Pearson Education,
New Delhi
2003
1.
Springer, London
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.mitpress.mit.edu/bookhome.tcl
http://www.electricalres.com/neuralnetworkandfuzzysystem
http://www.doi.ieeecomputersociety.org
448
2012
12E017
MEMS AND ITS APPLICATIONS

3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the fundamentals of MEMS.
To familiarize about smart transducers.
To know the transducer modelling techniques.
To gain a thorough knowledge of micromachining.
OUTCOMES:
acquire knowledge in fundamental of Micro Electro Mechanical Systems.
familiarize with smart transducers and modelling.
gain knowledge on micromachining.
understand the applications of MEMS.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO MEMS
9
Intrinsic Characteristics of MEMS Energy Domains and Transducers Sensors and actuators
Introduction to micro fabrication Silicon based MEMS processes Review of electrical and
mechanical concepts in MEMS.
UNIT II
TRANSDUCER MODELLING
9
Electronic Techniques Bridge circuits Amplifiers Data conversion Noise: recovery of signal
from noise Sensor Networks and Protocols.
UNIT III
SMART TRANSDUCERS
9
Concepts Software and Hardware structures Fundamentals and limitations of photolithography
Pattern transfer with etching techniques Pattern transfer with other physical and chemical techniques.
UNIT IV
MICROMACHINING
9
Bulk micromachining Surface micromachining Other micromachining techniques Packaging
techniques micro scaling considerations.
UNIT V
APPLICATIONS
9
Applications in automotive industry Applications in biomedical industry DNA sensors, electronic
noise Future developments Nanotechnology Carbon Nano Tube (CNT).
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.
No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Tai Ran Hsu

TMH, Seventh Reprint
2012
2.
Chang Liu
Foundations of MEMS
Prentice Hall
2006
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.
No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Richard C Jaeger
Introduction to
Microelectronic Fabrication
Addison- Wesley
2002
2.
Gad El Hak
MEMS Handbook
CRC Press
2006
3.
Nguyen N T
Wereley S
Fundamentals and
Applications of Micro
fluidics
Artech House
2002
4.
Nitaigour
Premchand
Mahalik
MEMS
TMH, Second Reprint
2008
449
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.public.iastate.edu/~e_m.350/Transducer.pdf
http://www-old.me.gatech.edu/jonathan.colton/me4210/micromachining.pdf
http://www.cns.cornell.edu/documents/PhotolithographyI.pdf
http://www.stanford.edu/group/cpima/education/nanotube_lesson.pdf
12E018
ADVANCED CONTROL SYSTEMS

3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the state space variables and analysis.
To familiarize with the state space design and its feedback.
To gain a thorough understanding of non linear systems.
To know the stability issues in control system.
OUTCOMES:
analyze different state space representation of discrete time systems
understand the state space design and feedback system.
gain knowledge on sample data control systems and sampling process.
understand and analyze the stability issues in advance control system
UNIT I
9
Introduction to state space analysis Physical variable Phase variable and canonical variables forms
State transition matrix State space representation of discrete time systems Controllability and
observability Solution of state equation.
UNIT II
9
feedback controllers Design of reduced and full order observers PI feedback Dynamic state
feedback.
UNIT III
SAMPLED DATA CONTROL SYSTEM
9
Introduction to sample data control systems Sampling process, signal reconstruction, difference
equation, z-transform, z-transfer function Inverse z transform, z-transform analysis of sampled data
control system, z and s domain Relationship.
UNIT IV
NON-LINEAR SYSTEMS
9
Types of non-linearity Typical examples Equivalent linearization Phase plane analysis Limit
cycles Describing functions Analysis using describing functions.
UNIT V
STABILITY
9
Stability concepts Equilibrium points BIBO and asymptotic stability Direct method of Liapunov
Application to non-linear problems Frequency domain stability criteria Popovs method and its
extensions.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.
No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Ogata K
Digital Control
Systems

Ltd.
2010
2.
Nagarth I J
Gopal M
Control Systems
Engineering
Wiley Eastern Ltd.
2008
450
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.
No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Gopal M
Digital Control and

State Variable Methods
Tata McGraw Hill

Publishing Company Ltd.
2009
2.
Kuo B C
Automatic Control
Systems
Pearson Education
2007
3.
Gopal M
Modern Control
System Theory
Wiley Easter Ltd.
2012
4.
Manke B S
Linear Control System
Khanna Publishers
2005
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.acsmotioncontrol.com
http://www.acsatlanta.com
http://nptel.iitm.ac.in
http://www.me.umn.edu/courses/me8281/notes.htm
12E019

3
OBJECTIVES:
To familiarize with artificial intelligent agents
To know the fundamentals of knowledge and reasoning.
To understand the basis of planning and learning of neuro systems.
To impart the features of an expert system.
OUTCOMES:
have knowledge on various strategies in artificial intelligent systems.
familiarize with the fundamentals of knowledge and reasoning.
understand the basis of planning and learning of neuro systems.
analyze the features of an expert system.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Introduction to AI: Intelligent agents Perception Natural language processing Problem Solving
agents Searching for solutions Uniformed search strategies Informed search strategies.
UNIT II
9
Adversarial search Optimal and imperfect decisions Alpha, Beta pruning Logical agents:
Propositional logic, First order logic Syntax and semantics Using first order logic Inference in
first order logic.
UNIT III
UNCERTAIN KNOWLEDGE AND REASONING
9
Uncertainty Acting under uncertainty Basic probability notation Axioms of probability Bayes
rule Probabilistic reasoning Making simple decisions.
UNIT IV
PLANNING AND LEARNING
9
Planning: Planning problem Partial order planning Planning and acting in non-deterministic
domains Learning Learning decision trees Knowledge in learning Neural networks
Reinforcement learning Passive and active.
UNIT V
EXPERT SYSTEMS
9
Definition Features of an expert system Organization Characteristics Prospector Knowledge
Representation in expert systems Expert system cases MYCIN EMYCIN Introduction to LISP.
TOTAL: 45
451
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.
No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Year of
Publication
Publisher
1.
Stuart Russel
Peter Norvig
Artificial Intelligence A
Modern Approach
Pearson Education,
Fourth Edition
2011
2.
Donald A Waterman
A Guide to Expert
Systems
Pearson Education.
2009
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.
No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Year of
Publication
Publisher
1.
George F Luger
Structures and Strategies
for Complex Problem
Solving
2.
Rajendra Akerkar
Intelligence
PHI Pvt Ltd
2005
3.
Janakiraman
Sarukesi K
Foundations of Artificial
Intelligence and Expert
Systems
Macmillan Series in
Computer science
2005
4.
Ela Kumar
I.K.International
Ltd
2008
Pearson Education
sixth Edition
2014
Pvt
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
http://braeview.ea.dundeecity.sch.uk/Computing/Course.pdf
http://www.kinindia.com/university/artificial-intelligence-anna-university-notes-cs2351-ainotes
3. http:// www.cs.cmu.edu/~reids/planning/schedule.html
4. http://forum.jntuworld.com/showthread.php?5672-Artificial-Intelligence
12E020
DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING

3
OBJECTIVES:
To expose the students to the concepts of digital image processing systems.
To impart knowledge on image transforms and enhancements.
To give an overview about image restoration, recognition and compression.
To know various image compression techniques.
OUTCOMES:
understand the digital image processing systems.
acquire knowledge about image transforms and enhancements.
familiarize with different concepts of image restoration and recognition.
analyze and apply various image compression techniques.
UNIT I
DIGITAL IMAGE FUNDAMENTALS
9
Elements of digital image processing systems Elements of Visual perception Image sampling and
quantization Matrix and singular value representation of discrete images.
UNIT II
IMAGE TRANSFORMS
9
1D DFT 2D DFT Cosine Sine Hadamard Haar Slant KL SVD transform and their
properties.
452
UNIT III
IMAGE ENHANCEMENT
9
Histogram Modification and specification techniques Image smoothing Image sharpening,
generation of spatial masks from frequency domain specification Nonlinear filters Homomorphic
filtering False color Pseudocolor and color image processing.
UNIT IV
IMAGE RESTORATION AND RECOGNITION
9
Image degradation models Unconstrained and Constrained restoration Inverse filtering Least
mean square filter Pattern Classes Optimal statistical classifiers Neural networks and associated
training methods and use of neural networks in image processing.
UNIT V
IMAGE COMPRESSION
9
Runlength Huffman coding Shift codes Arithmetic coding Bit plane coding Transform
coding JPEG Standard Wavelet transform Predictive techniques Block truncation coding
schemes Facet modeling.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.
No.
Author(s)
Jayaraman S
Esakkirajan S
Veerakumar T
Rafael C Gonzalez
Richard E Woods
1.
2.
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Tata McGraw Hill
2011
Pearson Education,
New Delhi
2008
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.
No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Bhabatosh Chanda
Dwijesh Dutta
Majumden

and Analysis

Ltd
2004
2.
Jonathan M Blackledge
Digital Image Processing:

Mathematical and
Computation Methods
Harwood Publishing
2005
3.
Ghosh S K
Alpha Science
International Ltd
2012
4.
Sridhar
OUP India
2011
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.nptel.iitm.ac.in/video.php
http://www.comp.dit.ie/bmacnamee/materials/dip/lectures/ImageProcessing1-Introduction.ppt
http://eeweb.poly.edu/~onur/lectures/lectures.html
453
454
BE: ELECTRONICS AND INSTRUMENTATION ENGINEERING
TOTAL CREDITS: 190

SEMESTER I
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
12O101
3.5
40
60
100
12N102
40
60
100
12O103
Technical English
3.5
40
60
100
12O104
C Programming I
40
60
100
12N105
Electronic Devices
Fundamentals of Electronics and
Instrumentation Engineering
40
60
100
40
60
100
12N106
PRACTICAL
12O111
1.5
40
60
100
12G112
Physics Laboratory
1.5
40
60
100
12N113
2.5
40
60
100
12N114
Electronic Devices Laboratory
1.5
40
60
100
19
12
26
TOTAL
SEMESTER II
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
12O201
12H202
12O203
12O204
12N205
12N206

Engineering
C Programming II
Engineering
Circuit Theory
3.5
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
3.5
40
60
100
PRACTICAL
12O211
1.5
40
60
100
12N212
1.5
40
60
100
12H213
1.5
40
60
100
12H214
1.5
40
60
100
19
14
27
TOTAL
455
SEMESTER III
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
12N301
3.5
40
60
100
12N302
Electronic Circuits
40
60
100
12N303
Electrical Machines
3.5
40
60
100
12N304
3.5
40
60
100
12N305
Digital Electronics
3.5
40
60
100
12N306
Data Structures
40
60
100
PRACTICAL
12N311
Electronic Circuits Laboratory
1.5
40
60
100
12N312
Electrical Machines Laboratory
1.5
40
60
100
12N313
1.5
40
60
100
18
24.5
TOTAL
SEMESTER IV
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
12N401
3.5
40
60
100
12N402
40
60
100
12N403
3.5
40
60
100
12N404
3.5
40
60
100
12N405
40
60
100
12N406
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
18
24.0
PRACTICAL
Transducer and Measurements
12N411
Laboratory
12N412
Objected Oriented Programming
12N413
Laboratory
TOTAL
456
SEMESTER V
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
12N501
3.5
40
60
100
3.5
40
60
100
12N503
Control Systems
Microprocessors and
Microcontrollers
40
60
100
12N504
Industrial Instrumentation I
3.5
40
60
100
12N505
Power Electronics
3.5
40
60
100
12N506
Operating Systems
40
60
100
1.5
100
100
1.5
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
18
12
26
12N502
PRACTICAL
12O511
12N512
12N513
12N514
Soft Skills
Control System and Simulation
Laboratory
Laboratory
Laboratory
TOTAL
SEMESTER VI
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
12N601
Analytical Instruments
3.5
40
60
100
12N602
Embedded Systems
40
60
100
12N603
Process Control
3.5
40
60
100
12N604
Computer Networks
40
60
100
12N605
Industrial Instrumentation II
40
60
100
12N606
Elective I
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
0
0
0
0
3
3
1.5
1.5
40
100
60
-
100
100
18
12
25
PRACTICAL
12N611
12N612
12N613
12N651
Process Control Laboratory

Microprocessors and
Industrial Instrumentation Laboratory
Mini Project
TOTAL

457
SEMESTER VII
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
12N701
40
60
100
12N702
Computer Control of Process
3.5
40
60
100
12N703
3.5
100
100
3.5
40
60
100
12N705

PLC and Distributed Control
Systems
40
60
100
12Nxxx
Elective II
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
1.5
100
100
TOTAL
18
22.5
12N704
PRACTICAL
12N711
Laboratory
12N721
Comprehension
12N751
SEMESTER VIII
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
3
40
60
100
12Nxxx

Engineering Ethics
Elective III
40
60
100
12Nxxx
Elective IV
40
60
100
12
40
60
100
TOTAL
12
15
12N801
PRACTICAL
12N851

458
LIST OF ELECTIVES
Course Code
Course Title
12N001
Advanced Control Theory
12N002
Instrumentation System Design
12N003
12N004
Instrumentation and Control in Petrochemical Industries
12N005
Power Plant Instrumentation
12N006
12N007
Instrumentation and Control in Paper Industries
12N008
Autotronix
12N009
Instrumentation and Control in Iron and Steel Industries
12N010
Telemetry and Telecontrol
12N011
Optimal Control Theory
12N012
Adaptive Control
12N013
Aircraft Instrumentation
12N014
Robotics and Automation
12N015
12N016
Mechatronics
12N017
Industrial Instrumentation Practices
12N018
Ultrasonic Instrumentation
12N019
VLSI Design
12N020
JAVA Programming
12N021
Fiber Optics and Laser Based Instruments
459
SEMESTER V
12N501
CONTROL SYSTEMS
3
3.5
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the fundamental concepts of control systems, its components and the mathematical
modeling of various systems.
To know the time response of I and II order systems and to understand the closed loop controllers.
To understand the frequency response of the system analytically and graphically.
To provide knowledge about the stability analysis of the systems.
To know the compensators are used for unstable systems.
OUTCOMES:
describe the fundamentals of control system and its components.
analyze the time response of I and II order system for various inputs.
draw the frequency response analysis plot graphically.
analyze the stability the stable and unstable systems.
design compensator for any stable and unstable systems.
UNIT I
SYSTEMS AND THEIR REPRESENTATION
9
Basic elements in control systems Open and closed loop systems Feedback characteristic of control
systems Electrical analogy of mechanical systems Transfer function Properties of transfer function
Synchros AC and DC servomotors Block diagram and reduction techniques Signal flow graphs.
UNIT II
TIME RESPONSE ANALYSIS
9
Time response Time domain specifications Types of test input First and second order system response
Error coefficients Generalized error series Steady state error.
UNIT III
FREQUENCY RESPONSE ANALYSIS
9
Frequency response Frequency domain specifications Bode plot Polar plot Constant M and N
circles Nichols chart Determination of closed loop response from open loop response Correlation
between frequency domain and time domain specifications.
UNIT IV
STABILITY OF CONTROL SYSTEM
9
Characteristics equation Location of roots in S-plane for stability Routh Hurwitz criterion Root locus
construction Effect of pole, zero addition Gain margin and phase margin Nyquist stability criterion.
UNIT V
COMPENSATOR DESIGN
9
Introduction to P, PI and PID controllers Performance criteria Lag, lead and lag-lead networks
Compensator design using frequency response method.
TOTAL: 45+15
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.
No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Nagrath I J
Gopal M
Control Systems
Engineering

Pvt. Ltd. Reprint
2008
2.
Benjamin C Kuo
Automatic Control
Systems
PHI Learning Private Ltd.
2010
460
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.
No.
Author(s)
1.
Katsuhiko Ogata
2.
3.
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of Publication
Modern Control
Engineering
PHI Learning Private Ltd.,

5th Edition
2011
Richard C Dorf
Robert H Bishop
Modern Control Systems
Education Pearson, Third

Impression
2009
Benjamin C Kuo
Farid Golnaraghi
Automatic Control
Systems
John Wiley and Sons
2007
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.iannauniversity.com/2012/07/ee2253-control-systems-lecture-notes.html
http://www4.hcmut.edu.vn/~hthoang/cstd/FundCtrlSys_Chapter1.pdf
http://www.roymech.co.uk/Related/Control/Frequency_Response.html
http://www.control.tkk.fi/Kurssit/AS0.2230/tyo11/Instructions.pdf
12E502/12N502

(Common to EEE/EIE)
vide Electrical and Electronics Engineering
12E503/12N503
(Common to EEE/EIE)
12N504
INDUSTRIAL INSTRUMENTATION I
3
3.5
OBJECTIVES:
To study the different types of industrial instruments for measuring various parameters such as
pressure, temperature, force, etc.
To have an adequate knowledge about various accelerometer pick-ups, vibrometers and

densitometers.
OUTCOMES:
measure the various industrial parameters such as pressure, temperature, force etc.,
select the instruments to measure vibrations and accelerations for industrial applications.
measure density of the given substance using suitable techniques.
measure the industrial parameters in real time applications.

UNIT I
MEASUREMENT OF FORCE, TORQUE AND VELOCITY
9
Basic force measuring devices Electric balance Different types of load cells Hydrostatic, pneumatic,
bonded strain gauge, magneto elastic and piezoelectric load cell Different methods of torque
measurements Strain gauge and relative angular twist, reluctance bridge Speed measurement Tacho
generators Capacitive tacho, drag-cup type tachometer and stroboscope.
461
UNIT II
MEASUREMENT OF VIBRATION, DENSITY AND ACCELERATION
9
Vibrometers Relative motion measurement Absolute motion measurement Calibration of vibration
pickups - Units of density and specific gravity, baume scale and API scale Density Measurement
Pressure head type densitometers, float type densitometers, ultrasonic densitometer and bridge type gas
densitometer Accelerometers Piezo-electric, LVDT, strain gauge and variable reluctance type
accelerometer Seismic instruments as an accelerometer.
UNIT III
PRESSURE AND VACUUM MEASUREMENT
9
Units of pressure Manometers Types Elastic type pressure gauges, bourdon tube, bellows and
diaphragms Electrical types Elastic elements with LVDT and strain gauges, capacitive type pressure
gauge Bridgman Gauge Measurement of vacuum Mechanical type McLeod gauge Electrical type
Pirani gauge, thermal conductivity gauges and ionization gauges Cold cathode type and hot cathode
type Differential pressure transmitter Testing and calibration of pressure gauges Dead weight tester.
UNIT IV
LOW TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT
9
Definitions and standards Primary and secondary fixed points Calibration of thermometers Different
types of filled in system thermometers Sources of errors in filled in systems and their compensation
Bimetallic thermometers Electrical methods of temperature measurement Signal conditioning of RTDs
and their characteristics 3 lead and 4 lead RTDs.
UNIT V
HIGH TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT
9
Thermocouples types Laws of thermocouple Fabrication of industrial thermocouples Series and
parallel connections of thermocouples Signal conditioning Isothermal block reference junctions Cold
junction compensation High temperature Measurement Radiation methods of temperature measurement
Total radiation and selective radiation pyrometers Optical pyrometer Two colour radiation
pyrometers.
TOTAL: 45+15
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Doeblin E O
Measurement Systems
International Student Edition
McGraw Hill Publishing

Company Ltd., 6th Edition
2010
2.
Patranabis D
Principles of Industrial
Instrumentation
Tata McGraw Hill

Publishing Company Ltd.,
New Delhi, 3rd Edition.
2010
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.
No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Liptak B G
Instrumentation Engineers
Handbook Measurement
CRC Press
2005
2.
Murthy D V S
Transducers and
Instrumentation

Ltd., New Delhi.
2007
3.
Singh S K
Industrial Instrumentation
and Control
Tata McGraw-Hil,
New Delhi.
2011
DhanpatRai and Co
2011
Khanna Publishers,
New Delhi.
1999
3.
Sawheny A K
4.
Jain R K
A course in Mechanical
Measurements and
Instrumentation and
Control
Mechanical and Industrial
Measurements
462
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.ivt.ntnu.no/imt/courses/tmr7/lecture/Instrumentation.pdf
http://www.hep.ph.ic.ac.uk/~hallg/Instrumentation/Lectures/
http://www.ftp://ftp.unicauca.edu.co%20Industrial%20Instrumentation.pdf
http://utubersity.com/lectures/business-2-2-5/tubepress_page=2
http://www.nptel.ac.in/syllabus/syllabus.php?subjectId=108106074
12N505
POWER ELECTRONICS
3
3.5
OBJECTIVES:
To expose about the different types of power semi-conductor devices and their characteristics.
To understand the operation, characteristics and performance parameters of controlled rectifiers.
To study the operation, switching techniques and basic topologies of DC-DC switching regulators.
To learn the different modulation techniques of pulse width modulated inverters.
To get adequate knowledge in the operation of AC voltage controller and matrix converter.
OUTCOMES:
describe the operation of various power semiconductor devices.
design the switching circuits.
analyze the principle of rectifiers, inverters and chopper circuit.
handle AC/AC converter circuits.
UNIT I
POWER SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES
9
Study of switching devices SCR, TRIAC, BJT, IGBT, MOSFET Driver and snubber circuit -Turn-on
and turn-off characteristics Switching losses Commutation circuits for SCR.
UNIT II
PHASE-CONTROLLED CONVERTERS
9
2-pulse, 3-pulse and 6-pulse converters Effect of source inductance performance parameters Reactive
power control of converters Dual converters Battery charger.
DC TO DC CONVERTER
9
UNIT III
Step-down and step-up chopper Time ratio control and current limit control buck, boost, buck-boost
converter, cuk converter Concept of resonant switching SMPS.
UNIT IV
INVERTERS
9
Single phase and three phase (both 1200 mode and 1800 mode) inverters PWM techniques Sinusoidal
PWM Modified sinusoidal PWM Multiple PWM Voltage and harmonic control Series resonant
inverter Current source inverter.
UNIT V
AC TO AC CONVERTERS
9
Single phase AC voltage controllers Two stage sequence control Single and three phase cycloconverters
Introduction to integral cycle control and power factor control Matrix converters.
TOTAL: 45 + 15
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.
No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Rashid M H
Power Electronics Circuits

Devices and Applications
Pearson Education, PHI,

New Delhi
2013
2.
Bimbra P S
Power Electronics
Khanna Publishers
2014
463
3.
Singh M D
Khanchandani K B
Power Electronics
Tata McGraw Hill
2009
4.
Amos Gilat
Matlab: An Introduction With

Applications
Wiley India Pvt. Ltd.,

4th Edition
2012
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.
No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Year of
Publication
Publisher
1.
Ashfaq Ahmed
Power Electronics for

Technology
Pearson Education,
First Impression
2006
2.
Ned Mohan
Tore M Undeland
William P Robbins
Power Electronics Converters

John Wiley and sons

third Edition
2003
3.
Philip T Krein
Elements of Power Electronics
Oxford University
Press
Edition
2004
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.iitm.ac.in/nptel
http://www.services.eng.uts.edu.au
http://www.powerelectronics.com
http://www.elektra-ku.lt/attachments/File/Studentams/The_Power_Electronics_Handbook.pdf
12L506 / 12T506/12E506/12N506
OPERATING SYSTEMS

12O511
SOFT SKILLS
12N512
CONTROL SYSTEM AND SIMULATION LABORATORY

0
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the concept of controller parameters.
To understand tools for system analysis including differential equations and transfer functions.
To train students about the use of MATLAB for system design and simulation for the system.
To train students about the classical control design including compensators and PID controller.
To understand the concept of open and closed loop speed and position control system.
OUTCOMES:
perform designing with various control tools using MATLAB computer simulation toolboxes.
simulate the first order and second-order control systems.
design and simulate the compensator for the given system.
describe the concept of PI and PID controller design.
execute the real time speed and position control system.
464
1.5
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Open loop and closed loop position control system.
2. Open loop and closed loop speed control system.
3. Transfer function of field controlled DC motor.
4. Transfer function of armature controlled DC motor.
5. Transfer function of separately excited DC generator.
6. Simulation of mechanical translational system with dead time.
7. Time response of second order system.
8. Simulation of interacting and non-interacting system.
9. Obtain the Root locus plot, bode plot for system transfer function.
10. Design of digital position control system.
11. Design and Simulation of LAG compensators.
12. Design and Simulation of LEAD compensators.
12N513
LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUITS LABORATORY

0
OBJECTIVES:
To understand characteristics and applications of Op-Amp.
To understand and design various filters using Op-Amp.
To characterize the output waveform for various applications using Op-Amp and 555 timer.
To design and implement voltage regulators and converter circuits using ICs.
To design signal conditioning circuits for thermocouple and resistance temperature detector
OUTCOMES:
conduct suitable experiments and plot the characteristics of Op-Amp.
design the different types of filters for various applications using of Op-Amp.
implement and verify the working principle of different types of regulators and multivibrators
using Op-Amp and 555 timer.
obtain the different waveforms on required shape by using different types of wave shaping
circuits.
design signal conditioning circuits for thermocouple and resistance temperature detector
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Characteristics of Op-Amp.
2. Applications of Op-Amp.
i. Inverting and non-inverting amplifier
ii. Integrator and differentiator
3. Design of instrumentation amplifier using Op-Amp.
4. Design of active filter circuits using Op-Amp.
5. Wave generation circuits using Op-Amp.
6. Astable, monostable, schmitt trigger circuits using i) Op-Amp, ii) 555 timer
7. Design of current to voltage and votage to current converters
8. Design of regulated power supply using LM 723
9. Design of Digital to Analog Converter
10. Design of Analog to Digital Converter
11. Implementation of signal conditioning circuit for thermocouple
12. Implementation of signal conditioning circuit for resistance temperature detector
12E513/12N514
DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS LABORATORY

(Common to EEE/EIE)
465
1.5
SEMESTER VI
12N601 ANALYTICAL INSTRUMENTS

3
3.5
OBJECTIVES:
To provide the various methods of spectrum analysis.
To give an unique methods of separation of closely similar materials using chromatography.
To study the important methods of analysis of industrial gases.
To know about the working of different electrodes as well as biosensors.
To give knowledge about the most important resonance techniques.
OUTCOMES:
apply the spectral analysis tools in research laboratories.
describe the various analytical separation techniques.
relate the role of instrumentation in chemical plants/industries etc.
select and apply the appropriate electrodes in industrial processes.
analyse the chemicals based on radiation techniques and microscopic methods.
SPECTROPHOTOMETRY AND CALORIMETRY
9
UNIT I
Spectral methods of analysis Beer-Lambert law Calorimeter UV-Visible spectrophotometers Single
beam and double beam instruments IR spectrophotometers: Sources and Detectors FTIR spectrometers
Atomic absorption spectrophotometers Flame emission spectrophotometers: Sources of flame
photometry Applications.
UNIT II
CHROMATOGRAPHY
9
Gas chromatography Liquid chromatography principles, types and applications High Pressure Liquid
Chromatography Detectors and applications .
UNIT III
INDUSTRIAL GAS ANALYSER AND POLLUTION MONITORING
9
Oxygen analyser CO monitor NOx analyser H2S analyser Dust and smoke measurement Thermal
conductivity type Thermal analyser Industrial analysers.
pH METERS AND DISSOLVED COMPONENT ANALYSERS
9
UNIT IV
Principle of pH measurement Types of electrodes: glass electrodes, hydrogen electrodes, reference
electrodes, selective ion electrodes, ammonia electrodes Applications Biosensors Dissolved oxygen
analyser Sodium analyser Silicon analyser.
UNIT V
NUCLEAR MAGNETIC RESONANCE AND RADIATION TECHNIQUES
9
Nuclear radiations Detectors: GM counter, proportional counter, solid state detectors Gamma cameras
X-Ray spectrometers Diffractometers Absorption meters NMR spectrometer: Basic principles, types
Applications Mass spectrometers Different types Applications.
TOTAL: 45+15
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Willard H H
Merrit L L
Dean J A
Seattle F L
Instrumental Methods
of Analysis
CBS Publishing and

Distribution
1995
2.
Robert D Braun
Introduction to
Instrumental Analysis
McGraw Hill
2006
466
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
1.
Author(s)
Ewing G W
Nakra B C
2.
Chaudary K K
Title of the Book
Year of
Publication
Publisher
Instrumental Methods of
Analysis
Mc Graw Hill
2004
Instrumentation
Measurement and Analysis
Tata McGraw Hill

Publishing Ltd
2004
3.
Khandpur R S
Handbook of Analytical
Instruments
Tata McGraw Hill

publishing Co. Ltd.
2003
4.
James keeler
Understanding NMR
Spectroscopy
John Wiley and Sons
2010
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.thermo.com
http://www.oxford-instruments.com
http://www.testolimited.com/c/108/flue-gas-analysers
http://www.indiamart.com/authenticsystems-technologies/process-analytical-solutions.html
12L602/12T602/12E602/12N602
EMBEDDED SYSTEMS
12N603
PROCESS CONTROL
3
3.5
OBJECTIVES:
To introduce dynamics of various processes.
To get adequate knowledge about the characteristics of various controller modes, tuning
techniques of controllers.
To introduce the concept of multi loop control techniques.
To impart knowledge on the final control elements.
To study about the selected unit operations and their control schemes.
OUTCOMES:
identify and model the given process.
select controller for typical process and design the controller parameters.
work with various types of control valves.
design the multiloop control schemes for given process.
describe the various unit operations in industries.
UNIT I
PROCESS DYNAMICS
9
Need for process control Process variables Process characteristics of liquid systems, gas systems and
thermal systems Mathematical model of liquid, gas and thermal process Higher order process
Interacting and non-interacting systems Dead time Continuous and batch processes Self-regulation
Servo and regulatory operations.
467
UNIT II
CONTROLLER CHARACTERISTICS AND TUNING
9
Basic control actions Characteristics of on-off, proportional, integral and derivative control modes
Composite control modes Auto/manual transfer Reset windup Practical forms of PID controller
Evaluation criteria IAE, ISE, ITAE and decay ratio Tuning methods Process reaction curve method
Ziegler Nichols method Damped oscillation method.
UNIT III
FINAL CONTROL ELEMENT
9
I/P converter Pneumatic and electric actuators Valve positioner Control valve characteristics Types
of control valves Control valve sizing Cavitation and flashing Control valve selection.
UNIT IV
MULTILOOP CONTROL
9
Feed forward control Ratio control Cascade control Selective control Adaptive control Inferential
control Split range control Introduction to multivariable control Interaction of control loops
Introduction to plant wide control
UNIT V
UNIT OPERATIONS
9
Mixing Evaporation and control Drying process Heat exchanger Case study of binary distillation
column Control schemes.
TOTAL: 45+15
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Wayne Bequette B
Process Control: Modeling,

Design, and Simulation
Prentice Hall
Professional
2003
2.
George Stephanopoulos
Chemical Process Control
Prentice-Hall of
India
2008
Publisher
Year of
Publication
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
Harriott P
Process Control
Tata McGraw Hill

Publishing Company
1991
2.
Liptak B G
Process Control
Chilton Book Company
1994
3.
Curtis D Johnson
Process Control
Instrumentation Technology
Pearson
Education, 8th Edition
2006
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.cse.dmu.ac.uk/~bb/Teaching/ProcessControl/ProcessControl.html
http://www.iseinc.com/what%20is%20pid.htm
http://www.ocw.mit.edu/courses/chemical-engineering/pdf
http://www.elearning.vtu.ac.in/P8/e-notes/06IT64/Unit1-MSH.pdf
http://www.nptel.ac.in/courses/103105064/6
12L604/12T604/12E604/12N604/12P504/12F504
COMPUTER NETWORKS
468
12N605
INDUSTRIAL INSTRUMENTATION II
3
OBJECTIVES:
To study about mechanical flow meters, mass flow meters and electrical type flow meters.
To understand different techniques for solid and liquid level measurements.
To get adequate knowledge about viscosity , humidity and moisture measurements.
OUTCOMES:
select the flow meter for flow measurement according to the application.
select the appropriate method for level measurement in real time applications.
measure the viscosity ,humidity and moisture in real time applications.
UNIT I
CONSTANT AREA, VARIABLE-PRESSURE-DROP FLOW METERS
9
Types of flow Reynolds number Variable Pressure drop flow meters Orifice plate, venturi tube, flow
nozzle and dall tube Installation of variable pressure drop flow meters Pitot-static tube.
UNIT II
QUANTITY METERS, CONSTANT-PRESSURE-DROP, VARIABLE-AREA

METERS AND MASS FLOW METES
9
Positive displacement flow meters Nutating disc, reciprocating piston, oval gear , piston type and Helix
type flow meters Inferential meter Turbine flow meter Constant-pressure-drop, variable-area meters
Rotameter Operating theory and installation, design constraints Mass flow meters Angular
momentum, thermal and Coriolis Calibration of flow meters Dynamic weighing methods.
UNIT III
ELECTRICAL TYPE FLOW METERS
9
Principle and constructional details of Electromagnetic flow meter Drag force flow meters Ultrasonic
flow meters Laser Doppler anemometer Vortex shedding flow meter Target flow meter Guidelines
for selection of flow meter Open channel flow measurement Solid flow rate measurement Nuclear,
weighting with servo derive method.
UNIT IV
LEVEL MEASUREMENT
9
Level measurement Float, displacer type and bubbler system Electrical level gauge Resistance and
capacitance Nuclear radiation and ultrasonic types Boiler drum level measurement Differential
Pressure method and hydra step method Solid level measurement.
UNIT V
MEASUREMENT OF VISCOSITY, HUMIDITY AND MOISTURE
9
Viscosity Say bolt viscometer and rotameter type viscometer Consistency meters Dry and wet bulb
psychrometers Hot wire electrode type hygrometer, dew cell and electrolysis type hygrometer
Commercial type dew point meter Moisture measurement Different methods of moisture measurements
and application of moisture measurement
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Doeblin E O
Measurement Systems
International Student Edition
McGraw Hill Publishing

Company Ltd., 6th Edition
2010
2.
Patranabis D
Principles of Industrial
Instrumentation
Tata McGraw Hill

2010
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.
No
1.
Author(s)
Liptak B G
Title of the Book

Instrumentation Engineers
Handbook Measurement
469
Publisher
CRC Press
Year of
Publication
2005
2.
Industrial Instrumentation
and Control
Singh S K
3.
Sawheny A K
4.
Jain R K
A course in Mechanical
Measurements and
Instrumentation and
Control
Mechanical and Industrial
Measurements
Tata McGraw-Hil,
New Delhi.
2011
DhanpatRai and Co
2011
Khanna Publishers,
New Delhi.
1999
WEB URLs:
1. http://lecturenotes.in/notes/engg/paper/industrial_instrumentation/note1/page10.html
2. http://ebookbrowsee.net/in/industrial-instrumentation-notes-pdf#.U0OHRvuo4_4
3. http://freevideolectures.com/Course/2347/Industrial-Instrumentation
4. http://ftp.unicauca.edu.co/Facultades..../Instrumentacion%20Industrial/20Instrumentation.pdf
5. http://nptel.dce.edu/section/EE/ii.php
12N611
PROCESS CONTROL LABORATORY

0
OBJECTIVES:
To study the responses of different order systems.
To study about the closed loop responses of various processes such as level, flow, temperature,
pressure etc.,
To understand the characteristics and responses of PID controller.
To get adequate knowledge about control valve characteristics.
To understand complex control schemes.
OUTCOMES:
analyze various systems with and without transportation lag.
obtain the closed loop response of level, flow, pressure and temperature processes.
select the control valve for a process.
identify the characteristics of controller modes and design the controller practically.
design a complex control schemes for a process.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Responses of first and second order processes with and without transportation lag
2. Determine the transfer function of interacting and non-interacting systems.
3. Tuning methods of PID controller
4. Design of on-off and P+I+D controller for level control process
5. Characteristics of control valve with and without positioner
6. Operation of on-off controlled thermal process
7. Closed loop response of flow control loop
8. Closed loop response of level control loop
9. Closed loop response of temperature control loop
10. Closed loop response of pressure control loop
11. Design of feed forward, cascade control and ratio control.
12. Design of PID controller for MIMO system.
12E512/12N612

LABORATORY
(Common to EEE/EIE)
470
1.5
12N613
INDUSTRIAL INSTRUMENTATION LABORATORY

0
OBJECTIVES:
To determine discharge co-efficient of orifice plate and venturi meter.
To know about the various measurement techniques of pH, conductivity, level, moisture,
viscosity.
To study the chararcterics of I/P and P/I converters.
To understand the characteristics of temperature transmitter.
To get adequate knowledge about calibration of devices.
To understand the operation of smart transmitter and smart valve positioner.
OUTCOMES:
measure the flow rate through orifice and venturi meter.
measure the level, moisture, humidity and viscosity.
obtain the chararcterics of I/P, P/I converters and temperature transmitter.
calibration pressure measuring device .
describe the operation of smart transmitter and smart valve positioner.
analyze characteristics of given test solution.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Determination of discharge coefficient of orifice plate and venturi meter.
2. Characteristics of P/I and I/P Converters.
3. Measurement of absorbance and transmittance using UV-spectrophotometer.
4. Measurement of pH and conductivity
5. Level measurement using DP transmitter.
6. Calibration of pressure gauge using dead weight tester.
7. Measurement of temperature using RTD based Temperature transmitter
8. Determination of transfer function model of thermocouple.
9. Determination of viscosity using saybolts viscometer.
10. Measurement of temperature using IR Thermometer.
11. Measurement of humidity using hygrometer.
12. Study of smart transmitter and smart valve positioner.
12A651/12M651/12C651/12L651/12T651/12E651/12N651/12P651/12F651
MINI PROJECT
471
1.5
ELECTIVES
12N001
ADVANCED CONTROL THEORY

3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the concepts of dynamic systems.
To brief about the concepts and mathematical models of the systems.
To get a knowledge about the state space analysis.
To impart knowledge on stability analysis.
To have an adequate knowledge about robust PID control.
OUTCOMES:
review the concepts of dynamic systems.
deal with mathematical models of systems.
analyze the controller and estimators.
solve various stability constraints.
work with robust PID control strategies.
UNIT I
MODELING OF DYNAMIC SYSTEMS
9
Definition of System Mathematical modeling State space representation of system Centrifugal
governor Ground vehicle Permanent Magnet stepper motor Inverted Pendulum.
UNIT II
ANALYSIS OF MATHEMATICAL MODELS
9
State space method Phase plane Isoclines Numerical methods Taylor series Eulers method
Predictor corrector method Runge-Kutta method Principle of linearization of differential Equation.
UNIT III
9
Reachability and controllability Observability and constructability Companion forms Controller /
Observer form State feed-back control State estimator Full order and reduced order Estimator
Combined controller estimator compensator.
UNIT IV
STABILITY OF NONLINEAR SYSTEM
9
Stability of nonlinear system Lyapunov stability theorems Lyapunov function for nonlinear system
Krasovskiis method Variable gradient method Phase plane analysis, singular points, constructing phase
portraits Limit cycle Describing function analysis.
UNIT V
ROBUST PID CONTROL
9
Introduction to robust control PID Tuning Modifications of PID control scheme Two degrees of
freedom Control Design consideration of robust Control.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Nagrath I J
Gopal M
Control Systems Engineering

Publishers
2007
2.
Ogata K
Pearson Education
2005
472
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
Benjamin C Kuo
2.
AshishTewari
3.
4.
Publisher
Year of
Publication

Pvt. Ltd.
2003
Modern control Design with

Matlab and Simulink
John Wiley
2002
John W Webb
Ronald A Resis
Programmable Logic
Controller

Pvt. Ltd.
1999
Michael P Lukas
Distributed Control Systems
Van Nostrand Reinhold

Company, New York
1995
WEB URLs
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.advancedcontrol.com/
http://www.acs.com.tw/en/program/inner/inner.asp?topicid=1001
http://www.controlglobal.com
http://www.control.com/thread/941648158
12N002
INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM DESIGN

3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the concepts of industrial measurements and process parameters such as flow,
temperature, pressure and level.
To brief about the control valves, pumps and their designing.
To introduce about he system design concepts with microcontroller.
OUTCOMES:
work with the measurement of process parameters such as flow, temperature, pressure and level.
deal with various designing concepts of pumps and control valves.
design the system based on the requirements with microcontrollers.
UNIT I
FLOW AND TEMPERATURE
9
Orifice meter Design of orifice plate based on flow condition Design of rotameter Design of RTD
measuring circuit Design of cold junction compensation circuit for thermocouple Transmitters Zero
and span adjustment in D/P transmitters and temperature transmitters.
UNIT II
PRESSURE AND LEVEL
9
Bourdon gauges Factors affecting sensitivity Design of bourdon tube Design of air purge system for
level measurement.
UNIT III
CONTROLVALVES
9
Control valves Design of actuators and positioners Types of valve bodies Valve characteristics
Materials for body and trim Sizing of control valves Selection criteria Cavitations and flashing
Valve body materials Characteristics of control valves for typical applications.
UNIT IV
PUMPS
9
Types of pumps Pump performance Pipe work calculation Characteristics of different pumps Pump
operation Maintenance Instruments used in pumping practice Pump noise and vibration Selection of
pumps Electronic P, PI and PID controllers design Adjustment of set point, bias and controller settings.
473
UNIT V
MICROPROCESSOR BASED DESIGN
9
Design of logic circuits for alarm and annunciator circuits Interlocks Design of microprocessor based
system for data acquisition Design of microprocessor based P+I+D controller.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
1.
Anderson N A
2.
Considine D M
Title of the Book

Instrumentation for
Process Measurement and
Control
Process Instruments and
Controls Handbook
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Chilton Company
1980
McGraw-Hill
1993
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Johnson C D
Process Control
2009
2.
Tattamangalam R
Padmanabhan
Industrial Instrumentation:
Springer
2003
3.
Ernest O Doebelin
Instrumentation Design
Studies
Taylor and Francis

Group
2010
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www. industrialinstruments.com
http://www. fundamentals-of-industrial-instrumentation-and-process-control-ebook.html
http://www.fisher.com/
http://www.phindia.com/bookdetail.php?isbn=978-81-203-1501-3
http://www.nptel.ac.in/syllabus/syllabus_pdf/103105064.pdf
12N003
3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the concepts of Virtual Instrumentation.
To brief about the concepts of programming in Virtual Instrumentation using Lab VIEW.
To know about the data acquisition in Lab VIEW.
To impart knowledge on various instrument drivers and interfacing the system.
To understand the basic applications in Lab VIEW.
OUTCOMES:
describe the concepts of Virtual Instrumentation.
program in Lab VIEW with various tools.
deal with various data acquisition methods in Lab VIEW.
interface the system with the external device using communication methods and instrument
drivers.
work with various applications in Lab VIEW.
474
UNIT I
FUNDAMENTALS OF VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION
9
Historical perspective Review of VI Concept Need Definition Architecture Merits Traditional
instruments versus VI Conventional and graphical Programming Lab VIEW and VI Role of hardware
and software Development of VI using Lab VIEW Components of Lab VIEW Front panel and block
diagram Data flow programming and GUI.
UNIT II
PROGRAMMING IN VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION
9
Palettes Modular programming Editing and debugging VI Sub VI Data types Structures Case
and sequence structures Loops and charts Graphs Arrays and clusters String and file input and
output Formula nodes Shift registers Local and global variables State machine.
UNIT III
DATA ACQUISITION IN Lab VIEW
9
Concepts of data acquisition Signals Types Signal conditioning Grounding and measurements
Hardware and software Configuration Analog and digital I/O Timers and counters DAQ assistant
DAQmx Concept of universal DAQ.
UNIT IV
INSTRUMENT DRIVERS AND INTERFACING
9
GPIB IEEE 488 bus Hardware and software Instrument I/O assistant VISA Driver VI Serial port
communication Interface buses USB PCI PXI PCIX PCMCIA SCXI VXI LXI
Developing own instrument driver.
UNIT V
APPLICATIONS AND CASE STUDIES IN Lab VIEW
9
Inter process communication Filtering Power spectrum Windowing Time and frequency domain
analysis Signal generation and processing.
Case Studies: Digital stop watch BCD to seven segment decoder PID controller.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
Jovitha Jerome
Using Lab VIEW
2010
2.
Leonard Sokoloff
Applications in Lab VIEW
2003
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Sanjay Gupta
Joseph John
Virtual Instrumentation Using

Lab VIEW
Tata McGraw Hill
2006
2.
Robert H Bishop
Learning with Lab VIEW
2003
3.
Surekha P
Sumathi P
Virtual Instrumentation Using

Lab VIEW
Acme Learning
2010
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.ni.com/academic/labview_academy.html
http://www.ni.com/academic/students/learn
http://www.ni.com/electronics
http://www.ni.com/data-acquisition/multifunction
http://www.nptel.ac.in/syllabus/112106152/
475
12N004
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL IN PETROCHEMICAL

INDUSTRIES
3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the concepts of petroleum refining and various operations in petroleum industries.
To introduce about various chemicals from petroleum products and measurements in industry.
To understand the control loops in petroleum industries.
OUTCOMES:
analyze petroleum processing and its operations.
describe about various chemicals and measurement techniques in petroleum industry.
control the loop operation in petroleum industry.
UNIT I
PETROLEUM PROCESSING
9
Petroleum exploration Recovery techniques Oil and Gas separation Processing wet gases Refining
of crude oil.
UNIT II
OPERATIONS IN PETROLEUM INDUSTRY
9
Thermal cracking Catalytic cracking Catalytic reforming Polymerisation Alkylation Isomerization
Production of ethylene, acetylene and propylene from petroleum.
UNIT III
CHEMICALS FROM PETROLEUM PRODUCTS
9
Chemicals from petroleum Methane derivatives Acetylene derivatives Ethylene derivatives
Propylene derivatives Other products.
UNIT IV
MEASUREMENTS IN PETROCHEMICAL INDUSTRY
9
Parameters to be measured in refinery and petrochemical industry Selection and maintenance of
measuring instruments Intrinsic safety of instruments.
UNIT V
CONTROL LOOPS IN PETROCHEMICAL INDUSTRY
9
Process control in refinery and petrochemical industry Control of distillation column Control of
catalytic crackers and pyrolysis unit Automatic control of polyethylene production Control of vinyl
chloride and PVC production.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No
Author(s)
1.
Waddams
2.
Balchan J G
Mumme K I
Title of the Book

Chemicals from
Petroleum
Process Control
Structures and
Applications
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Butter and Janner Ltd. 4th

Edition
1978
Van Nostrand Reinhold

Company
1988
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
1.
Stephanopoulas G
2.
Eckman D P
3.
Austin G T Shreeves
Title of the Book

Chemical Process
Control
Automatic Process
Control
Chemical Process
Industries
476
Publisher
Year of
Publication

New Delhi
2008
Wiley Eastern Ltd.
1993
McGraw Hill
International Student
Edition
1985
4.
Instrumentation in
Process Industries
Liptak B G
Chilton Book Company
1994
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.instrumentation.co.za
http://www.springer.com/chemistry
http://www.oiljobs411.com
http://www.petro-online.com
http://www.nptel.ac.in/courses/103107082/module1/lecture3/lecture3.pdf
12N005
POWER PLANT INSTRUMENTATION

3
OBJECTIVES:
To gain the knowledge about various sources of power generation

To measure the electrical and non-electrical quantities in power plants.
To study about the various analyzers used in power plants.
To study the control loops in boilers.
To study various methods of turbine monitoring and control.
OUTCOMES:
describe the methods of power generation.
design the instruments required for the measurement of physical quantities in power plant.
work on analyzers for improved performance of various power plants.
control the various parameters of the boiler.
monitor and implement control techniques for a turbine.
UNIT I
OVERVIEW OF POWER GENERATION
9
Brief survey of methods of power generation Hydro, nuclear, solar wind and wave power Importance of
instrumentation in power generation Thermal power plants Block diagram Details of boiler Processes
P&I diagram of boiler Cogeneration.
UNIT II
MEASUREMENTS IN POWER PLANTS
9
Electrical measurements Current, voltage, power, frequency, power factor Reactive power Non- with
correction factor for temperature and pressure Drum level measurement Radiation detector Smoke
density measurement Dust monitor.
UNIT III
ANALYZERS IN POWER PLANTS
9
Flue gas oxygen analyser Analysis of impurities in feed water and steam Dissolved oxygen analyser
Chromatography pH meter Conductivity cell Fuel analyzer Pollution monitoring instruments
Spectrum analyser.
UNIT IV
CONTROL LOOPS IN BOILER
9
Combustion control Air/Fuel ratio control Furnace draft control Drum level control Main steam and
reheat steam temperature control Super heater control Air temperature Deaerator control Distributed
control system in power plants Interlocks in boiler operation.
UNIT V
TURBINE MONITORING AND CONTROL
9
Speed, vibration, shell temperature monitoring and control Steam pressure control Lubricant oil
temperature control Cooling system.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Year of
Sl. No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Publication
The Control of
International Society of
1.
Sam G Dukelow
2008
Boilers
Automation
477
2.
Arora S
Domkundwar S
Domkundwar A V
A course in Power
Plant Engineering
Dhanpat Rai and Co. Pvt. Ltd.

Fifth revised and enlarged
edition
2006
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Stephanopoulas G
Chemical Process
Control

New Delhi
1990
2.
Eckman D P
Automatic Process
Control
Wiley Eastern Ltd.
1993
3.
Elonka S M
Kohal, AL
Standard Boiler
Operations
Tata McGraw Hill,

New Delhi
1994
4.
Wakil E A
Power Plant
Engineering
Tata McGraw Hill
1984
5.
Nag P K
Power Plant
Engineering
Tata McGraw Hill
2001
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.powerplant-instrumentation.webs.com/detailsofpowerplant.html
http://www.infinityturbine.com
http://www.powerplantpro.com
http://www.nprcet.org/EE2252%20-%20Power%20Plant%20Engineering.pdf
http://www.nptel.ac.in/courses/IIT-MADRAS/Industrial_Instrumentation/index.php
12N006

3
OBJECTIVES
To understand the concepts of artificial intelligence and its languages.
To provide basic knowledge in the concepts of reasoning and perceptions based on knowledge
database.
To brief out the planning and learning concepts with applications.
To impart knowledge on expert systems.
OUTCOMES
review the concepts of artificial intelligence.
describe the concepts of knowledge and reasoning.
deal with planning and learning concepts.
explain the concepts of expert systems.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Introduction to artificial intelligence Intelligent agents Perception Natural language processing
Problem Solving agents Searching for solutions Uniformed search strategies Informed search
strategies.
UNIT II
9
Adversarial search Optimal and imperfect decisions Alpha, Beta pruning Logical agents
Propositional logic First order logic Syntax and semantics Using first order logic Inference in first
order logic.
478
UNIT III
UNCERTAIN KNOWLEDGE AND REASONING
9
Uncertainty Acting under uncertainty Basic probability notation Axioms of probability Bayes rule
Probabilistic reasoning Making simple decisions.
UNIT IV
PLANNING AND LEARNING
9
PLANNING: Planning problem Partial order planning Planning and acting in non-deterministic
domains.
LEARNING: Learning decision trees Knowledge in learning Neural networks Reinforcement learning
Passive and active.
UNIT V
EXPERT SYSTEMS
9
Definition Features of an expert system Organization Characteristics Prospector Knowledge
representation in expert systems Expert system tools MYCIN EMYCIN.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Stuart Russel
Peter Norvig
Artificial Intelligence - A
Modern Approach
Pearson
Education
2003
2.
Donald A Waterman
A Guide to Expert Systems
Pearson
Education
2007
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
George F Luger
Structures and Strategies for
Complex Problem Solving
Pearson
Education
2002
2.
Elain Rich Kevin

Knight
Tata McGraw
Hill
1995
3.
Patterson W
Intelligence and Expert Systems
Prentice Hall
of India
2003
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.wtec.org/loyola/kb/c1_s1.htm
http://www.slideshare.net/poerslide/lecture5-expert-systems-and-artificial-intelligence
http://www.perfectlogic.com/Articles/AI/ExpertSystems/ExpertSystems.html
http://www.expertsystem.net/
12N007
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL IN PAPER INDUSTRIES

3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the concepts instrumentation in paper industry.
To introduce about the paper manufacturing process.
To know the measurement techniques in paper industry.
To impart knowledge on unit operations in the industry.
To understand the control loops in paper industry.
479
OUTCOMES:
describe the basic processing in paper industry.
measure various parameter in paper industry.
deal with various unit operations in paper industry.
explain the paper manufacturing process and its instrumentation.
work with various control loops in paper industry.
UNIT I
PAPER MAKING PROCESS RAW MATERIALS
9
Pulping Preparation Screening Bleaching Cooking Chemical addition Approach system Paper
machine Drying section Calendars Drive Finishing After treatment processes Coating
Properties of paper Physical Electrical Optical Chemical properties
UNIT II
WET END INSTRUMENTATION
9
Conventional measurements at wet end Pressure Vacuum Temperature Liquid density Specific
gravity Level Flow Consistency measurement pH ORP measurement Freeness measurement
UNIT III
DRY END INSTRUMENTATION
9
Conventional measurements Moisture Basis weight Caliper Coat thickness Optical variables
Measurement of length Speed Digester Rotary Batch type
UNIT IV
CONTROL ASPECTS
9
Blow tank controls Techniques Digester liquor feed pump controls Brown stock watcher level control
Stock chest level control Basic weight control Dry temperature control Density control
UNIT V
PUMPS AND CONTROL VALVES
9
Flow box Wet end variables Evaporator feedback Feed forward control Lime mud density control
Stock proportioning system Refiner control instrumentation Basic pulper instrumentation Head box
Rush/drag control Instrumentation for size preparation Coating preparation Coating weight control
Batch digester K/Kappa number control Bleach plant chlorine stage control.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Liptak B G
Instrumentation in the
Processing Industries
Chilton book
company
2005
2.
Considine D M
Handbook of Applied
Instrumentation
Tata McGraw
Hill
1993
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Howar P Kallen
Handbook of Instrumentation
and Control
Tata McGraw Hill
1984
2.
Jupton Jr
Computer Controlled Industrial

Machine Process and Robots
Prentice Hall of
India
1986
3.
Robert H Perry
Green DW
Maloney J O
Chemical Engineers Handbook
Tata McGraw Hill
1998
480
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.paperforrecycling.eu/uploads/Modules/Publications/Guidelines-155634A.pdf
http://nzic.org.nz/ChemProcesses/forestry/4C.pdf
http://www.ndc.com/moisture-measurement-and-moisture-analysis.aspx
http://www.hach.com/pulppaperguide
12N008
AUTOTRONIX
3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the different strategies in automotives.
To introduce conventional control systems in automotives.
To impart knowledge on different instrumentation systems in automotives.
To understand the application of electronics and instrumentation in automotive industry.
OUTCOMES:
describe the concepts of automotives control.
familiarize in the concepts of control systems in automotives.
deal with instrumentation systems in automotives.
apply instrumentation techniques in automotive industry.
UNIT I
FUNDAMENTALS OF AUTOMOTIVE ELECTRONICS
9
Electronic engine management system Components Open and closed loop control strategies PID
control Look Up tables Introduction Modern control strategies like Fuzzy logic and adaptive control
Controlled parameters SI and CI engines.
UNIT II
SENSORS AND ACTUATORS
9
Introduction Basic sensor arrangement Types of sensors Hall effect sensor Hot wire anemometer
Thermistor Piezo-electric sensor Piezo-resistive sensors Oxygen concentration sensor Lambda
sensor Crankshaft angular position sensor Cam position sensor Mass air flow (MAF) rate Manifold
absolute pressure (MAP) Throttle plate angular position Engine oil pressure sensor Vehicle speed
sensor Stepper motors Relays Detonation sensor Emission sensors.
UNIT III
SPARK IGNITION ENGINE MANAGEMENT
9
Feedback carburetor system Throttle body injection Multi point fuel injection system Injection system
controls Advantage of electronic ignition systems Three way catalytic converter Conversion
efficiency versus lambda Group and sequential injection techniques Fuel system components
Advantages of electronic ignition systems Solid state ignition systems Principle of operation Types
Contact less electronic ignition system Electronic spark timing control.
UNIT IV
COMPRESSION IGNITION ENGINE MANAGEMENT
9
Fuel injection system Parameters affecting combustion Noise and emissions in ci engines Pilot, main,
advanced Post injection and retarded post injection Electronically controlled unit injection system
Layout of the common rail fuel injection system Fuel injector Fuel pump Rail pressure limiter Flow
limiter Working principle EGR valve control in electronically controlled systems.
UNIT V
DIGITAL ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
9
Open loop and closed loop control system Engine cooling and warm up control Idle speed control
Acceleration and full load enrichment Deceleration fuel cut-off fuel control maps Open loop control
of fuel injection Closed loop lambda control Exhaust emission control On board diagnostics:
diagnostics future automotive electronic systems electronic dash board instruments onboard diagnosis
system.
TOTAL: 45
481
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No
Author(s)
1.
Arthur Primrose
Young
Leonard Griffiths
2.
William Ribbens
Title of the Book
Publisher

Electronic Equipment, Theory and
Practice for Students, Designers,
Automobile Electricians and
Motorists
Understanding
Automotive
Electronics: An Engineering
Perspective
Year of
Publication
London
Butterworths
1986
2013
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Allan Bonnick
Automotive Computer
Controlled Systems
Taylor and Francis
2001
2.
Tom Denton

Electronics Systems
2004
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http:// www.aestereo.com
http:// www.autoshop101.com
http://www.awesomeauto.ca
https://www.conti-online.com/www/automotive_de_en
http://www.nptel.ac.in/courses/108108031/module1/Lecture03.pdf
12N009
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL IN IRON AND STEEL INDUSTRIES

3
OBJECTIVES:
To know the basic requirements of the iron and steel making process.
To provide the basics about types of furnace.
To understand the concept of different measurement techniques.
To introduce the different control systems used in the industries.
OUTCOMES:
provide he basic requirements of the iron and steel making process.
review on the basics of different types of furnace.
deal with different measurement techniques pertaining to the application.
use different control system techniques in industries.
deal with computers for applications pertaining to the process.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO FURNACE
9
Flow diagram and description of the processes Raw materials preparation Iron making Blast furnaces
Stoves Raw steel making Basic oxygen furnace Electric furnace Open hearth furnace.
UNIT II
CASTING AND ROLLING
9
Quality of steel Impurities present and allowed limits for usable steel Waste recycling Continuous
casting and batch casting of steel Primary and secondary rolling Features of cold rolling Steel
finishing operations.
482
UNIT III
MEASUREMENTS
9
Measurement of level, pressure, density, temperature, flow, weight, thickness and shape Graphic
displays and alarms.
UNIT IV
CONTROL AND SYSTEMS
9
Blast furnace stove combustion control system Gas and water controls in BOF furnace Sand casting
mold control.
UNIT V
COMPUTER APPLICATIONS
9
Model calculation and logging Rolling mill control Annealing process control Utilities
ma n age men t wi th computer system.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Liptak B G
Instrumentation in the Processing

Industries
Chilton Publishers
1973
2.
Tupkary R H
Introduction to Modern Steel

Making
KhannaPublishers
1989
3.
Fu K S
Gonzalez R C
Lee C S G
Robotics
Tata McGraw-Hill
2008
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Liptak B G
Instrument Engineers Handbook

Volume II
CRC press
1995
2.
Considine D M
Process/ Industrial Instruments and

Control Handbook
McGraw Hill
1993
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
https://www.yokogawa.com/instruments-and-solution-for-iron-steel
https://www.automation.siemens.com/industries/steel-iron
https://www.spminstrument.com/Solutions/Industries/Iron-and-steel/
https://www.books.google.co.in/books?isbn=9221175359
https://www.nptel.ac.in/video.php?subjectId=108105064
12N010
TELEMETRY AND TELECONTROL

3
OBJECTIVES
To know the basic principles on telemetry and telecontrol.
To explore more in detail about the different telemetry systems.
To understand the concept of different telecontrol methods.
OUTCOMES
distinguish between the different telecontrol systems.
realize the standards of telemetry system.
483
describe the different types of telemetry techniques.

use the computers for different telecontrol methods.
UNIT I
TELEMETRY FUNDAMENTALS CLASSIFICATION
9
Fundamental concepts Significance Principle Functional blocks of telemetry and telecontrol system
Methods of telemetry Electrical Pneumatic Hydraulic Optical telemetry State of the art-telemetry
standards.
UNIT II
LANDLINE TELEMETRY
9
Electrical telemetry Current systems Voltage systems Synchro systems Frequency systems Position and pulse systems Example of a landline telemetry system.
UNIT III
RADIO TELEMETRY
9
Block diagram of a radio telemetry system Transmitting and receiving techniques AM,FM,PM,
multiplexing and de multiplexing Transmitting and receiving techniques Digital coding methods
Advantages of PCM,PWM,PPM and FSK Delta modulation Coding and decoding equipment
Example of a radio telemetry system
UNIT IV
OPTICAL TELEMETRY
9
Optical fibres for signal transmission Sources for fiber optic transmission Optical detectors Trends in
fibre optic device development Example of an optical telemetry system
UNIT V
TELE CONTROL METHODS
9
Analog and digital techniques in telecontrol Telecontrol apparatus Remote adjustment-guidance and
regulation Telecontrol using information theory Example of a telecontrol system.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Patranabis D
Telemetry Principles
Tata McGrawHill
1999
2.
Swoboda G
Telecontrol Methods and Applications of

Telemetry and Remote Control
Reinhold
Publishing Corp
1991
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Gruenberg L
Handbook of telemetry and remote

control
Tata McGraw-Hill
1987
2.
Young R E
Telemetry Engineering
Little Books Ltd
1988
3.
Housley T
Data communication and

teleprocessing system
Prenctice Hall
International
1987
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.automation.siemens.com/mcms/
http://www.controlstar.com
http://www.telemetry-europe.org/
http://www.environmental-expert.com/
484
12N011
OPTIMAL CONTROL THEORY

3
OBJECTIVES:
To provide a basic knowledge of the theoretical foundations of optimal control.
To introduce the need to design controllers using available optimal control theory and software.
To provide an adequate knowledge in optimization methods for robust control.
OUTCOMES:
design and implement system identification experiments.
utilize the input-output experimental data for identification of mathematical dynamical models.
use singular value techniques to analyze the robustness of control systems.
incorporate frequency-domain-based robustness specifications into multivariable control system
designs.
deal with the H-infinity methods to design robust controllers.
describe the advantages and disadvantages of robust control relative to other control approaches.
UNIT I
OPTIMAL CONTROL PROBLEMS
9
Statement of optimal control problem Problem formulation and types of optimal control Selection of
performance measures General model of feedback control systems Transient performance analysis
Tracking performance analysis Disturbance rejection analysis Cost functions and norms Mathematical
preliminary to optimal control.
UNIT II
CALCULUS OF VARIATION AND HAMILTON FORMULATION
9
Fundamental concepts Extremum functionals involving single and several independent functions
Piecewise smooth extremals Variation of functionals with fixed and free terminal time constrained
extrema Pontryagin's minimum principle State inequality constraints The Weierstrass Erdmann corner
conditions Solution of Bolza problem Partial differential equation for cost function Hamilton Jacobi
equation Principle of optimality Solution of Hamilton Jacobi equation Matrix Riccati equation
Optimal control law.
UNIT III
LINEAR QUADRATIC CONTROL PROBLEMS
9
Optimal control by Liapunov method Parameter optimization Quadratic performance index Optimal
control of systems Matrix Riccati equation Solution methods of state regulator and discrete systems
Choice of weighting matrices Linear Quadratic Guassian control Kalman filter H2 and H Control and
Optimal estimation.
UNIT IV
DYNAMIC PROGRAMMING
9
Principle of optimality Recurrence relation of dynamic programming for optimal control problem
Combinational procedure for solving optimal control problem.
UNIT V
DISCRETE TIME SYSTEMS
9
Solution of general discrete optimization problem Discrete time linear quadratic regulator Suboptimal
feedback Regulator problem with functions of final state fixed Time optimal and fuel optimal control
problems Minimum time control problem Uniqueness of control Bang-bang control Case study
Aero-space applications Fuel optimal systems.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Kirk D E
Optimal Control Theory: An

Introduction
Prentice Hall, New

Jersey
2008
2.
Frank L
Lewis
Optimal Control
John Wiley and

Sons, New York
1986
485
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
Brian D O Anderson
John B Moore
Optimal Control - Linear

Quadratic Methods
PrenticeHall of India Pvt Ltd.,
1991
2.
Jeffrey B Burl
Linear Optimal Control
Addison-Wesley, California
1999.
3.
Gopal M
Modern Control System

Theory
Wiley Eastern, New Delhi
1993
4.
Michael Athens
Optimal Control

Company Ltd
1996
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.people.stfx.ca/tleo/AdvMacroLec3.pdf
http://www.math.ucdavis.edu/~hunter/m280_09/ch3.pdf
http://www.me.umn.edu/courses/Chapter%206%20LQ%20Control.pdf
http://www.codechef.com/wiki/tutorial-dynamic-programming
12N012
ADAPTIVE CONTROL
3
OBJECTIVES:
To give an introduction and an overview about the theoretical approach in adaptive control.
To have an adequate knowledge in adaptive control design, analysis, and application of a wide
variety of algorithms.
To give the knowledge on implementation of adaptive controllers.
To introduce the student in research in adaptive control that can be used to manage dynamical
systems with unknown parameters.
OUTCOMES:
design and implement system identification experiments.
use input-output experimental data for identification of mathematical dynamical models.
use system identification methods to design adaptive controllers.
explain the advantages and disadvantages of adaptive control relative to other control
approaches.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO ADAPTIVE CONTROL
9
Development of adaptive control problem The role of Index performance (IP) in adaptive systems
Development of IP measurement process model.
UNIT II
SYSTEM RESPONSE IDENTIFICATION
9
Identification by Cross correlation Synthesis techniques for flat spectrum Pseudo random signals Quasi
linearization Impulse response expansion Identification using matched filter Adaptive control using
steepest descent.
UNIT III
PERTURBATION SYSTEMS
9
Single and multi-dimensional adaptive systems Stability analysis of sinusoidal perturbation adaptive
controllers Formulation of signal synthesis system.
486
UNIT IV
SELF TUNING REGULATORS (STR) AND MODEL REFERENCE ADAPTIVE

SYSTEMS
9
Introduction Pole placement design Indirect self-tuning regulators Continuous time self-Tuners
Direct self-tuning regulators Linear quadratic self-tuning regulators Adaptive predictive control The
MIT rule Determination of adaptation Gain Design of MRAS using Liapunov theory BIBO Stability
Applications of adaptive control Model free adaptive control.
UNIT V
GAIN SCHEDULING
9
Principle Design of gain scheduling controllers Nonlinear transformations of second order systems
Applications of gain scheduling Case study ABB Adaptive Controllers Satt Control ECA40.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Sl. No.
Author(s)
1.
Karl J Astrom
Wittenmark
Adaptive Control
Pearson education Inc., New

Delhi
2008
2.
Shankar Sastry
Marc Bodson,
Adaptive Control Stability,

Convergence and Robustness
Prentice Hall, Englewood Cliffs,

New Jersey
1989
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
1.
Ljung L
2.
Chalam V V
Kumpathi S Narendra
Romeo Ortega
Peder Dorator
Petros A Ioannov
Jing Sun
3.
4.
Title of the Book

System Identification: Theory
for the user
Adaptive Control Systems
Techniques and Applications
Advances in Adaptive Control
Robust Adaptive Control
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Prentice Hall,
Englewood Cliffs
Marcel Dekkar Inc.,
NewJersey
1999
1987
IEEE Press, NewJersey
1991
Prentice Hall Inc.,
1996
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://web.iitd.ac.in/.../IEEE_WorkShop_Slides_Lavretsky_Adaptive_Control
http://engineering.purdue.edu/.../365%20system%20identification.pdf
http://www.dtic.mil/dtic/tr/fulltext/u2/a254994.pdf
http://noppa.aalto.fi/noppa/kurssi/as-74.../AS-74_3125_chap_2.pdf
12N013
AIRCRAFT INSTRUMENTATION
3
OBJECTIVES:
To have an adequate knowledge about the structures and operations of different airplane
To know about aircraft and the display equipment.
To study the sensors to be used in the flight.
To analyze gyroscopic instruments and engine instruments
487
OUTCOMES:
demonstrate the structures and operations of different airplane components and evaluate their
performances, including engines, airfoils, airframes, electronic instruments and other essential
systems and equipment.
use aircraft and the display equipment.
select the sensors to be used in the flight.
analyze gyroscopic instruments and engine instruments.
UNIT I
AIRPLANE CONTROL SYSTEMS
9
Conventional Systems Power assisted and fully powered flight controls Power actuated systems
Engine control systems Push, pull rod system flexible push pull rod system Components modern
control systems Digital fly by wire systems Auto pilot system-active control technology
Communication and navigation systems Instrument landing systems VOR CCV case studies.
UNIT II
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
9
Hydraulic systems Study of typical workable system Components Hydraulic system controllers
Modes of operation Pneumatic systems Advantages Working principles Typical air pressure system
Brake system Typical pneumatic power system Components Landing gear systems Classification
Shock absorbers Retractive mechanism.
UNIT III
ENGINE SYSTEMS
9
Fuel systems for piston and jet engines Components of multi engines Lubricating systems for piston
and jet engines Starting and ignition systems Typical examples for piston and jet engines
UNIT IV
AUXILLIARY SYSTEM
9
Basic air cycle systems Vapour cycle systems Boost Strap air cycle system Evaporative vapour cycle
systems Evaporative air cycle systems Oxygen systems Fire protection systems Deicing and antiicing systems.
UNIT V
AIRCRAFT INSTRUMENTS
9
Flight Instruments and navigation Instruments Gyroscope Accelerometers Air speed indicators TAS
EAS Mach meters Altimeters Principles and operation Study of various types of engine
instruments Tachometers Temperature gauges Pressure gauges Operation and principles.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
McKinley J L
Bent R D
Aircraft Maintenance
and Repair
McGraw Hill
1993
2.
U.S. Dept. of
Transportation, Federal
Aviation Administration
General Hand Books of

Airframe and Powerplant Mechanics
The English Book

Store
1995
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
McKinley J L
Bent R D
Aircraft Power Plants
McGraw Hill
1993
2.
Pallet E H J
Aircraft Instruments
Pearson Publication
2009
3.
Treager S
Gas Turbine Technology
McGraw Hill
1997
488
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.aircraftinstrumentsltd.co.uk
http://www.faa.gov/regulations_policies/.../aircraft/amt.../ama_Ch10.pdf
http://www.faa.gov/.../aviation/.../PHAK%20-%20Chapter%2007.pdf
http://www.navair.navy.mil/ranges/AVMI/.../aircraft_instrumentation_Jan09.p.
12N014
ROBOTICS AND AUTOMATION

3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the concepts of robotics and its role in automation.
To brief about the concepts of sensors, sources and vision systems.
To brief out the concepts of path planning and construction of robot.
To impart knowledge on programming techniques and various applications of robotics
OUTCOMES:
review the concepts of robotics and their role in automation.
describe the concepts of sensors, sources and vision systems.
deal with path planning concepts and construction of robot.
review the concepts of programming and applications of robots in automation.
UNIT I
BASIC CONCEPTS OF ROBOTICS
9
Robotics Origin and generation Definition Laws of robotics Field of robotics Automation Types
Robot anatomy Classification of robots by configuration and control Basic components of robot
system degree of freedom Work volume.
UNIT II
POWER SOURCES, SENSORS AND VISION SYSTEM
9
Power sources Sensing, range, proximity, position, velocity, acceleration, touch, force, torque, optical and
laser sensors Micro machines in robotics Machine vision Introduction Image acquisition techniques
Illumination techniques Image conversion Image processing and analysis Segmentation Object
recognition.
UNIT III
ROBOT MOTION ANALYSIS AND PATH PLANNING
9
Introduction to manipulator kinematics Forward and inverse kinematics Homogeneous transformation
DH representation Robot dynamics Properties of robot dynamic equations Path versus trajectory
Path planning, joint space versus Cartesian space trajectory.
UNIT IV
MANIPULATORS, ACTUATORS AND GRIPPERS
9
Construction of manipulators Manipulator dynamics and force control Electronic and pneumatic
manipulator control circuits Hydraulic, pneumatic and electric drives End effectors Grippers Types
Design considerations.
UNIT V
ROBOT PROGRAMMING AND APPLICATIONS
9
Methods of programming Lead through programming Motion interpolation Weight, signal and delay
commands Branching capabilities Robot programming examples for pick and place application using
VAL Application of robots in material handling , processing operations, assembly and inspection
Future applications.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No
1.
Author(s)
Mikell P
Weiss G M
Nagel R N
Odraj N G
Title of the Book

Industrial Robotics
Publisher
Tata McGraw-Hill
489
Year of
Publication
2008
2.
Ghosh
Control in Robotics and

Automation: Sensor Based
Integration
Allied Publishers
Chennai
1998
3.
Fu K S
Gonzalez R C
Lee C S G
Robotics
Tata McGraw-Hill
2008
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Deb S R
Robotics technology and

flexible Automation
John Wiley USA
1992
2.
Klafter R D
Chimielewski T A
Negin M
Robotic Engineering An
integrated approach
Prentice Hall of
India, New Delhi
1994
3.
Saeed B Niku
Introduction to Robotics
Pearson Education
2002
4.
Siciliano B
Modelling and Control of

Robot manipulators
Tata McGraw-Hill
1996
WEB URLs:
1. http://www.robotautomation.com.au
2. http://www.roboticsindia.com
3. http://www.kvka-robotics.com
4. http://www.robotsrule.com
12N015
RENEWABLE ENERGY SOURCES

3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the concepts of energy sources.
To have an adequate knowledge about solar, wind, biomass and geothermal sources.
To study the applications of solar and wind energy sources.
To learn about biomass, geothermal, ocean and hydro energy.
To understand the energy storage devices and hybrid system configurations.
OUTCOMES:
analyze the concepts of energy sources.
deal with renewable energy sources and its applications.
explain the wind energy conversion system and their importance with grid connection.
review the concepts of biomass and geothermal energy sources.
describe the energy storage devices and hybrid system combinations.
UNIT I
ENERGY SCENARIO
9
Classification of energy sources Energy resources: Conventional and non-conventional Energy needs of
India Energy consumption patterns Worldwide Potentials of these sources Energy efficiency Energy
security Energy and its environmental impacts Global environmental concern Factors favoring and
against renewable energy sources IRP.
UNIT II
SOLAR ENERGY
9
Solar thermal Systems Types of collectors Collection systems Efficiency calculations Applications
Photo Voltaic (PV) technology Present status Solar cells Cell technologies Characteristics of PV
systems Equivalent circuit Array design Building integrated PV system and its components Sizing
and economics Peak power operation Standalone and grid interactive systems.
490
UNIT III
WIND ENERGY
9
Wind Energy Wind speed and power relation Power extracted from wind Wind distribution and wind
speed predictions Wind power systems System components Types of Turbine Turbine rating
Choice of generators Turbine rating Electrical load matching Variable speed operation Maximum
power operation Control systems System design features Stand alone and grid connected operation.
UNIT IV
OTHER ENERGY SOURCES
9
Biomass Various resources Energy contents Technological advancements Conversion of biomass in
other form of energy solid, liquid and gases Gasifiers Biomass fired boilers Co firing Generation
from municipal solid waste Issues in harnessing these sources Hydro energy Feasibility of small, mini
and micro hydel plants: scheme, layout and economics Tidal and wave energy Geothermal and OceanThermal Energy Conversion (OTEC) systems Schemes, feasibility and viability.
UNIT V
ENERGY STORAGE AND HYBRID SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS
9
Energy storage Battery Types Equivalent circuit Performance characteristics Battery design
Charging and charge regulators Battery management Fly wheel energy relations Components
Benefits over battery Fuel cell energy Storage systems Ultra capacitors.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No
Author(s)
1.
Rai G D
2.
Rao S
Paruklekar
3.
4.
Diner
brahim
ZamfirescuCalin
Michaelides E
Fstathios E
Title of the Book

Non Conventional Energy
sources
Energy Technology-Non
Conventional, Renewable and
Conventional
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Dhanpat Rai and

Sons
1998
Khanna Publishers
1999
Sustainable Energy Systems

and Applications
Springer, Germany
2012
Alternative Energy Sources
Springer, Germany
2012
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Openshaw
Taylor E
Utilisation of Electric Energy in SI Units
Orient Longman
Ltd.
2007
2.
Uppal S L
Electric Power
Khanna
Publishers
1997
3.
Mukund R Patel
Wind and Solar Power Systems
CRC Press LLC
1999
WEB URLs
1.
http://www.nrdc.org/energy/renewables/
2. http://www.extension.psu.edu/natural-resources/energy
3.
http://www.energy.gov/science-innovation/energy-sources/renewable-energy
4. http://www.ucsusa.org/clean_energy
5.
491
12N016
MECHATRONICS
3
OBJECTIVES:
To learn the basic definitions and introduction of mechatronics.
To study about different sensors and transducers in mechatronic applications.
To study about different types of actuation systems.
To understand the different controlling techniques in control systems and PLC programming.
To know the recent advances in industries.

OUTCOMES:
describe the techniques and skills necessary to design and control electro-mechanical systems.
design the amplifier and logic network using flip flop and ICs.
deal with the actuator systems and PLC programming.
implement the design of mechatronics systems and control.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Mechatronics Definition and key issues Evolution Elements Mechatronics approach to modern
engineering design.
UNIT II
SENSORS AND TRANSDUCERS
Types Displacement Position Proximity and velocity sensors Signal processing Data display.
UNIT III
ACTUATION SYSTEMS
Mechanical types Applications Electrical types Applications Pneumatic and hydraulic
systems Applications Selection of actuators.
UNIT IV
CONTROL SYSTEMS
9
Types of controllers Programmable logic controllers Applications Ladder diagrams Microprocessor
applications in mechatronics Programming interfacing Computer applications.
UNIT V
RECENT ADVANCES
9
Manufacturing mechatronics Automobile mechatronics Automobile mechatronics Medical
mechatronics Office automation Case studies.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Bulton N
Mechatronics Electronic Control

system for Mechanical and
Longman
1995
2.
Dradly D A
Dawson D
Burd N C
Loader A J
Mechatronics: Electronics in
Products and Processes
Chapman and
Hall
1993
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of Publication
1.
Galip Ulsoy A
Devires W R
Microcomputer Applications in
Manufacturing
John wiley
1989
2.
James Harter
Electromechanics: Principles,
Concepts and Devices
Prentice Hall
1995
492
3.
Robert H Bishop
Mechatronics: An Introduction
CRC Press
2010
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.mechatronic.me/1-what-is-mechatronics
http://www.mechatronics.colostate.edu/figures/index.html
http://www.linear.com/docs/4194
http://www.plcsensors.com/
12N017
INDUSTRIAL INSTRUMENTATION PRACTICES

3
0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To explain the concepts of process parameter measurements.
To understand the concepts of data sheets and design of measuring units.
To the computer based controllers.
To impart knowledge on smart instrumentation systems.
OUTCOMES:
describe the concepts of process parameter measurements.
familiarize in the concepts of measurements and data sheet usage.
deal with computer based controllers.
review the concepts of smart instrumentation systems.
UNIT I
DESIGN OF FLOW AND TEMPERATURE SENSORS
9
Orifice meter Design of orifice for given flow conditions Design of rotameter RTD Measuring
circuit Design of cold junction compensation circuit for thermocouple Transmitters Zero and span
adjustment in D/P transmitters and temperature transmitters.
UNIT II
FLOW SHEET DESIGN
9
Types of flow sheets Flow sheet presentation Flow sheet symbols Line symbols Designation
Process flow diagram Synthesis of steady state flow sheet Flow sheeting software.
UNIT III
DESIGN OF PRESSURE SENSORS
9
Bourdon gauges Factors affecting sensitivity Design of bourdon gauge Design of air purge system
Electrical methods for measurement of pressure and level.
UNIT IV
COMPUTER BASED CONTROLLERS
9
Design of computer controlled system Software design Single program approach Multi testing
approach Structured development for real time systems Distributed computerized control.
UNIT V
SMART INSTRUMENTATION
9
Introduction to intelligent sensors Smart sensors for temperature and pressure Smart transmitters for
measurement of differential pressure, flow and temperature Self-diagnosis and remote calibration
features.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No
1.
Author(s)
Considine D M
Title of the Book

Process Instruments and
Controls Handbook
493
Publisher
McGraw Hill Book
Co. Ltd.
Year of
Publication
2005
2.
Process Control
Johnson C D
Prentice Hall Inc.
2007
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Liptak B G
Process Measurement and Analysis
Chilton Book
Company, USA
1995
2.
Bentley J P
Principles of measurement systems
Longman Inc.,
2002
3.
Considine DM
Ross S D
Handbook of Applied Instrumentation
McGraw Hill
2003
4.
Balchan JG
Mumme G
Process Control Structures and

Applications
Van Nostrand
Renhold Co.,
New York
2000
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.industrialinstruments.com
http://www.directindustry.com
http://www.process-control.com
http://www.instrumentation.co.za
12N018
ULTRASONIC INSTRUMENTATION
3
OBJECTIVES:
To have an adequate knowledge about the properties of ultrasonic wave and the method of
generation.
To know about the testing of ultrasonic waves.
To study the measurements and applications of ultrasonic waves.
OUTCOMES:
demonstrate properties and characteristics of ultrasonic wave.
generate and test ultrasonic waves using different methods.
measure the properties of ultrasonic wave and apply to various real time applications
analyze Gyroscopic Instruments and engine Instruments.
UNIT I
ULTRASONIC WAVES CHARACTERISTICS
9
Ultrasonic waves Principle and propagation of various waves Characterization of ultrasonic
transmission Reflection and transmission coefficients Intensity and attenuation of sounds beam Power
level Medium parameters.
UNIT II
ULTRASONIC WAVE GENERATION
9
Generation of ultrasonic waves Magnetostrictive and piezoelectric effects Search unit types
Construction and characteristics
UNIT III
ULTRASONIC TEST METHODS
9
Ultrasonic test methods Pulse echo Transit time Resonance Direct contact and immersion type
Ultrasonic methods of flaw detection.
494
UNIT IV
ULTRASONIC MEASUREMENTS
9
Ultrasonic measurements Ultrasonic methods of measuring thickness, depth and flow Variables
affecting ultrasonic testing in various applications.
UNIT V
ULTRASONIC APPLICATIONS
9
Ultrasonic applications Ultrasonic applications in medical diagnosis and therapy, acoustical holography.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
1.
David J
Cheeke N
2.
Dale Ensminger
Title of the Book

Fundamentals and
Applications of Ultrasonic
Waves
Ultrasonic: Fundamentals,
Technology, Applications
Publisher
Year of
Publication
CRC Press
2002
CRC press
1988
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No
Author(s)
1.
Baldev Raj
Palanichamy P
Rajendran V
2.
Emmanuel P Papadakis
Title of the Book

Science And Technology
Science And Technology Of
Ultrasonic
Ultrasonic Instruments and
Devices: Reference for
Modern Instrumentation,
Techniques, and Technology
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Alpha Science
2004
Academic Press
1999
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.dentistryiq.com/topics/ultrasonic-instrumentation.htm
http://www.umn.edu/perio/dds6112/09a-Ultrasonic.pdf
http://onlinelibrary.wiley.com/doi/10.1002/0471497398.mm830/pdf
http://www.lm-dental.com/products/ultrasonic-instrumentation
12N019
VLSI DESIGN
3
OBJECTIVES:
To explain the concepts of MOS technology and its design process
To get adequate knowledge about the concepts of digital circuits and systems
To study about the concepts of VHDL programming
OUTCOMES:
describe the concepts of MOS technology and the designing of circuits
familiarize in the concepts of digital circuits and systems
deal with VHDL programming
UNIT I
MOS TECHNOLOGY
9
MOS transistor Modes of operation NMOS and CMOS fabrication Process parameters for NMOS and
CMOS Pass transistor NMOS and CMOS inverter Pull up and pull down ratio Electrical properties
of MOS circuits and device modeling.
495
UNIT II
DESIGN PROCESS
9
MOS Layers Stick diagram Design rules of layout diagram Metal Polysilicon Micron based
CMOS process Switching logic Gate logic Combinational and sequential circuits diagram Scaling
and MOS circuits.
UNIT III
DIGITAL CIRCUITS AND CIRCUIT SYSTEMS
9
Finite state machine Programmable logic array Arithmetic logic unit Parallel multipliers Memories
and registers.
UNIT IV
CMOS CIRCUIT AND LOGIC DESIGN
9
Introduction CMOS logic gate design Basic physical design of simple logic gates CMOS logic
structure Clocking strategies I/O Structures.
UNIT V
CIRCUIT DESIGN USING VHDL
9
EDA Tools VHDL code structures Data types Concurrent code Sequential code Signal and
variables Simple design examples.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Pucknell D A
Eshraghian K
Basic VLSI Design

Systems and Circuits
Prentice Hall India
2000
2.
Neil H E
Weste Eshraghian
Principles of CMOS
VLSI Design
Pearson
Education
2001
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Charles H Roth
Digital System Design Using

VHDL
PWS Publishing
Company
2003
2.
Amar Mukherjee
Introduction to nMOS and

CMOS VLSI system design
Prentice HallUSA
1986
3.
Wayne Wolf
Modern VLSI Design:

Systems on Silicon
Eugene D
Fabricus
Introduction to VLSI Design
Pearson Education
Indian Reprint New
Delhi
McGraw Hill
International Edition
2006
1990
WEB URLs:
1. http://www.tams-http://www.informatik.uni-hamburg.de/applets/cmos/
2. http://www.angelfire.com/electronic/in/vlsi/vhdl.html
3. http://www.scale.engin.brown.edu/classes/EN1600S08
4. http://www.asicworld.com
5. http://www.nptel.ac.in/video.php?subjectId=117106092
12N020
JAVA PROGRAMMING
3
OBJECTIVES:
496
OUTCOMES:
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Control statements Type conversion and casting Classes and Objects: Concepts of classes and
objects Methods Constructors Static variables and methods Final keyword Access control This
UNIT II
INHERITANCE - PACKAGES AND INTERFACES
9
final with inheritance the Object class Packages and Interfaces: Defining, creating and accessing a
Package CLASSPATH Importing packages Differences between classes and interface Defining an
interface Implementing interface Applying interfaces Variables in interface and extending interfaces.
Interfaces Interfaces vs. abstract classes Defining an interface Implementing interfaces Extending
UNIT III
9
collection frame work Commonly used collection classes Array List Linked List Hash Set Hash
Map Tree Map Collection interfaces Collection Set List Map Legacy collection classes
Vector Hash table Stack Dictionary(abstract) Enumeration interface Iteration over collections
Iterator interface List Iterator interface String Tokenizer Formatter Random Scanner Observable
Using java util Files: Streams Byte streams Character streams Text input/output Binary
input/output random access file operations File management using file class Using java.io
Networking in Java Introduction, client/server Interaction with stream socket connections,
connectionless client/server interaction with datagrams, using java.net.
UNIT IV
9
Thread groups.
UNIT V
9
Applets Concepts of applets Applets and applications Life cycle of an applet Event handling
Color class and graphics AWT Controls Swing: Introduction to Swing Swing vs. AWT MVC
architecture Swing components Swing application Java database connectivity (JDBC) Creating
connection Executing SQL statements Processing Result set.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No
1.
Author(s)
Cay S Horstmann
Gary Cornell
Title of the Book

Core Java: Volume I
Fundamentals
497
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Sun Microsystems
Press
2008
Herbert Schildt
McGraw Hill
2002
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
2000
1.
Arnold K
Gosling J
Pearson Education
2.
Timothy Budd

Pearson Education
2000
3.
C Thomas Wu
oriented programming with Java
Tata McGraw
Hill
2006
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.docs.oracle.com/javase/tutorial/java/nutsandbolts
http://www.docs.oracle.com/javase/tutorial/collections/intro/
http://www.roseindia.net/java/thread/Java Multithreading.shtml
http://www.tutorialspoint.com/java/java_excemptions.html
12N021
FIBER OPTICS AND LASER BASED INSTRUMENTS

3
OBJECTIVES:
To expose the basic concepts of optical fibers and their industrial applications.
To provide basic concepts and industrial applications of lasers.
To provide knowledge about industrial application of holography and medical applications of

lasers.
OUTCOMES:
describe the concepts and applications of optical fibers.
familiarize in the concepts and applications of lasers.
deal with holography and medical applications of lasers.
UNIT I
OPTICAL FIBRES AND THEIR PROPERTIES
9
Principles of light propagation through a fibre Different types of fibres and their properties, fibre
characteristics Absorption losses Scattering losses Dispersion Connectors and splicers Fibre
termination Optical sources Optical detectors.
UNIT II
INDUSTRIAL APPLICATION OF OPTICAL FIBRES
9
Fibre optic sensors Fibre optic instrumentation system Different types of modulators Interferometric
method of measurement of length Moire fringes Measurement of pressure, temperature, current,
voltage, liquid level and strain.
UNIT III
LASER FUNDAMENTALS
9
Fundamental characteristics of lasers Three level and four level lasers Properties of laser Laser modes
Resonator configuration Q-switching and mode locking Cavity damping Types of lasers Gas
lasers, solid lasers, liquid lasers, semiconductor lasers.
498
UNIT IV
INDUSTRIAL APPLICATION OF LASERS
9
Laser for measurement of distance, length, velocity, acceleration, current, voltage and atmospheric effect
Material processing Laser heating, welding, melting and trimming of material Removal and
vaporization.
UNIT V
HOLOGRAM AND MEDICAL APPLICATIONS
9
Holography Basic principle and methods Holographic interferometry and application Holography for
non-destructive testing Holographic components Medical applications of lasers, laser and tissue
interactive Laser instruments for surgery, removal of tumors of vocal cards, brain surgery, plastic surgery,
gynaecology and oncology.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No
Author(s)
1.
Khare R P
Senior J M
Title of the Book
Publisher
Fiber Optics and

Optoelectronics
Optical Fibre Communication
Oxford university
press
Prentice Hall of
India
Year of
Publication
2008
1985
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Fiber Optic Technology Applications to

commercial, Industrial, Military and
Space Optical systems
Optical Fibre Communication and
Sensors
Anuradha
Agencies
2002
John F Read
Industrial Applications of Lasers
Academic Press
1978
Wilson J
Hawkes J F B
Introduction to Opto Electronics
Prentice Hall of
India
2001
1.
Asu Ram Jha
2.
Arumugam M
3.
4.
PHI learning
Private limited
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Year of
Publication
2009
http://www.kayelaby.npl.co.uk/general_physics/2_5/2_5_12.html
http://www.comm.bfioptilas.co.uk/Optical+Fibre+Analysers-97.htm
http://www.fas.org/man/dod-101/navy/docs/laser/fundamentals.htm
http://web.phys.ksu.edu/vqm/laserweb/Apps/Ap_ind.htm
http://www.cdeep.iitb.ac.in/nptel/Mechanical/.../Course_home14.1.html
499
500
B.E: COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
TOTAL CREDITS: 187

SEMESTER I
Course
Code
Instruction
Hours/Week
Course Title
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
12O101
3.5
40
60
100
12P102
40
60
100
12O103
Technical English
3.5
40
60
100
12O104
C Programming I
40
60
100
12P105

Engineering
40
60
100
12P106
Fundamentals of Computers
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
PRACTICAL
12O111
12G112
Physics Laboratory
1.5
40
60
100
12P113
2.5
40
60
100
12G114
1.5
40
60
100
TOTAL
20
12
27
SEMESTER II
Course
Code
Course Title
THEORY
12O201
12H202
Engineering
12O203
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
3.5
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
12O204
C Programming II
40
60
100
12P205
Basics of Electrical Engineering
40
60
100
12P206
Electronic Devices and Circuits
3.5
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
PRACTICAL
12O211
12P212
Electrical Engineering Laboratory
1.5
40
60
100
12H213
1.5
40
60
100
12P214
Electronics Laboratory
1.5
40
60
100
18
14
26
TOTAL
501
SEMESTER III
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
12P301
Discrete Mathematics
3.5
40
60
100
12P302
40
60
100
12P303
System Software
40
60
100
12P304
Digital Systems Design
40
60
100
12P305
Data Structures I
40
60
100
12P306
40
60
100
Digital Laboratory
1.5
40
60
100
12P312
Data Structures Laboratory I
1.5
40
60
100
12P313

Laboratory
1.5
40
60
100
18
23
PRACTICAL
12P311
TOTAL
SEMESTER IV
Course
Code
THEORY
12P401
12P402
12P403
Course Title
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
Probability and Queuing Theory
3.5
40
60
100
Data Structures II
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
3.5
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
18
12
25
12P405
Microprocessors and
Microcontrollers
Operating Systems
12P406
12P404
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
PRACTICAL
12P411
12P412
12P413
12P414
Data Structures Laboratory II

Laboratory
Microprocessors and
Operating Systems Laboratory
TOTAL

502
SEMESTER V
Course
Code
THEORY
12P501
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
Principles of Compiler Design
40
60
100
12P502
Java programming
40
60
100
12P503
Software Engineering
100
100
12P504
Computer Networks
40
60
100
12P505
Design and Analysis of Algorithms
40
60
100
12P506
Data Warehousing and Data Mining
40
60
100
PRACTICAL
12O511
Soft Skills
1.5
100
100
12P512
Compiler Design Laboratory
1.5
40
60
100
12P513
Java Programming Laboratory
1.5
40
60
100
12P514
1.5
40
60
100
18
14
25
TOTAL
SEMESTER VI
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
12P602

Engineering Ethics
Advanced Java Programming
12P603
XML and Web Services
40
60
100
12P604
Unix and Shell Programming
40
60
100
12P605
Mobile Application Development
3.5
40
60
100
Elective I
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
1.5
100
100
18
23
12P601
12PXXX
PRACTICAL
12P611
Laboratory
12P612
Laboratory
12P651
Mini Project
TOTAL
40
60
100
40
60
100

503
SEMESTER VII
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
12P701
Object Oriented Analysis and Design
40
60
100
12P702
Cryptography and Network Security
3.5
40
60
100
12P703
Computer Graphics and Multimedia

Software Quality Assurance and
Testing
Mobile and Pervasive Computing
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
Elective II
40
60
100
12P704
12P705
12PXXX
PRACTICAL
12P711
CASE Tools Laboratory
1.5
40
60
100
12P712

Laboratory
1.5
40
60
100
12P721
Comprehension
12P751
1.5
100
100
TOTAL
18
23
SEMESTER VIII
Course
Code
THEORY
12P801
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
Grid Computing
40
60
100
12PXXX
Elective III
40
60
100
12PXXX
Elective IV
40
60
100
12
40
60
100
TOTAL
12
15
PRACTICAL
12P851

504
LIST OF ELECTIVES
Course Code
Course Title
12P001
Advanced Database Management Systems
12P002
Embedded Systems
12P003
Cloud Computing
12P004
Web Programming
12P005
E - Commerce Technology
12P006
High Speed Networks
12P007
Virtual Private Networks
12P008
Distributed Systems
12P009
Open Source Technologies
12P010
Middleware Technologies
12P011
Soft Computing
12P012
Software Project Management
12P013
Mainframe Computing
12P014
Enterprise Applications
12P015
12P016
Information Storage and Management
12P017
Advanced Operating Systems
12P018
Data Science and Big Data Analysis
12P019
Green Computing
12P020
Service Oriented Architecture
505
SEMESTER V
12P501
PRINCIPLES OF COMPILER DESIGN

3
OBJECTIVES:
To learn the basic concepts of Automata theory.
To know the basic concepts of compilers.
To learn the functions of Lexical Analyzer and Syntax Analyzer.
To understand the process of Intermediate Code Generation.
To understand the concepts of Code Generation and Code Optimization.
OUTCOMES:
apply automata theory concepts in real time applications.
design a compiler.
implement a parser such as a bottom up SLR parser without using YACC.
implement semantic rules into a parser.
implement code generator and code optimizer.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO AUTOMATA
9
Finite Automata (FA) Deterministic Finite Automata (DFA) Non deterministic Finite Automata (NFA)
Finite Automata with epsilon transitions Regular expressions FA and regular expressions.
UNIT II
INTRODUCTION TO COMPILERS
9
Compilers Phases of a compiler Cousins of the compiler Compiler construction tools Lexical
Analysis Input buffering Tokens specification.
UNIT III
LEXICAL ANALYSIS AND SYNTAX ANALYSIS
9
Recognition machine A typical lexical analyzer generator Parsing Role of the parser Context Free
Grammars Top down parsing Recursive descent parsing Predictive parsing Bottom-up parsing
Shift reduce parsing Operator precedent parsing LR parsers SLR parser Canonical LR parser
LALR parser.
UNIT IV
INTERMEDIATE CODE GENERATION
9
Intermediate languages Declarations Assignment Statements Boolean Expressions Case Statements
Back patching.
UNIT V
CODE GENERATION AND CODE OPTIMIZATION
9
Introduction Issues in the design of code generator The target machine A simple Code generator
DAG representation of Basic Blocks Introduction to code optimization Principal Sources of
Optimization.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Year of
Publication
1.
Hopcroft J E
Motwani R
Ullman J D
Introduction to Automata Theory

Languages and Computations
Pearson Education
2006
2.
Alfred Aho
Ravi Sethi
Jeffrey D Ullman
Compilers Principles Techniques

and Tools
Pearson Education
2009
506
Publisher
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Lewis H R
Papadimitriou C H
Fischer C N
LeBlanc R J
1.
2.
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Elements of The theory of

Computation
Pearson Education
2004
Crafting a compiler with C
Benjamin Cummings
2003
3.
Bennet J P
Introduction to Compiler
Techniques
Tata McGraw Hill
2003
4.
Kenneth C Louden
Compiler Construction Principles

and Practice
Thompson Learning
2003
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
https://www.cs.wmich.edu/elise/courses/cs480/
http://www.cse.iitd.ernet.in/~sak/courses/cdp/slides.pdf
http://www.cs.nyu.edu/courses/fall06/G22.2130 001/class notes.html
http://www.cs.bilkent.edu.tr/~ilyas/Courses/CS416/
http://www.nptel.ac.in/courses/Webcourse-contents/IIT-KANPUR/30Oct/sanjeev/powersystem/ui/About-Faculty.html
12P502/12F502
JAVA PROGRAMMING
(Common to CSE/IT)
3
OBJECTIVES:
OUTCOMES:
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Control statements Type conversion and casting. Classes and Objects: Concepts of classes and objects
Methods Constructors Static variables and methods Final keyword Access control This
UNIT II
9
final with inheritance Object class. Packages and Interfaces: Defining, creating and accessing a Package
CLASSPATH Importing packages Differences between classes and interface Defining an interface
Implementing interface Applying interfaces Variables in interface and extending interfaces
Interfaces Interfaces VS abstract classes Defining an interface Implementing interfaces Extending
507
UNIT III
9
collection frame work Commonly used collection classes ArrayList LinkedList HashSet
HashMap TreeMap Collection interfaces Collection Set List Map Legacy collection classes
Vector Hashtable Stack Dictionary(abstract) Enumeration interface Iteration over collections
Iterator interface ListIterator interface StringTokenizer Formatter Random Scanner Observable
input/output Random access file operations File management using file class Using java.io.
Networking in Java Introduction Client/server Interaction with stream socket connections
Connectionless client/server interaction with Datagrams,using java.net.
UNIT IV
9
Thread groups.
UNIT V
9
Applets Concepts of Applets Applets and applications Life cycle of an applet. Event Handling, Events
AWT: Concepts of components Container Panel Window Frame Canvas Font class Color
class and graphics. AWT Controls. Swing: Introduction to Swing Swing vs. AWT MVC architecture
Swing components swing application Java Database Connectivity (JDBC) creating connection
Executing SQL statements Processing Resultset.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Cay S Horstmann
Gary Cornell
Herbert Schildt
1.
2
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Sun Microsystems
Press
2008
Tata McGraw Hill
2002
Title of the Book

Core Java: Volume I
Fundamentals
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
1.
Arnold.K
Gosling.J
Pearson Education
2.
Timothy Budd
Understanding Object Oriented

Pearson Education
2000
3.
C Thomas Wu
An introduction to Object Oriented

Tata McGraw Hill
2006
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://docs.oracle.com/javase/tutorial/java/nutsandbolts
http://docs.oracle.com/javase/tutorial/collections/intro/
http://www.roseindia.net/java/thread/Java Multithreading.shtml
http://www.tutorialspoint.com/java/java_exceptions.htm
508
Year of
Publication
2000
12P503/12F503
SOFTWARE ENGINEERING
(Common to CSE/IT)
3
OBJECTIVES:
To provide information about wider engineering issues that form the background to develop
complex, evolving (software intensive) systems.
To plan a software engineering process to account for quality issues and nonfunctional
requirements.
To employ a selection of concepts and techniques to complete a small scale analysis and design
in mini projects.
To impart knowledge to translate requirement specifications into a design, and then realize that
design practically, all using an appropriate software engineering methodology.
To provide basic knowledge about software project management.
OUTCOMES:
identify and build an appropriate process model for a given project.
analyze the principles at various phases of software development.
translate a specification into a design, and identify the components to build the architecture for a
given problem, all using an appropriate software engineering methodology.
define a Project Management Plan and tabulate appropriate Testing Plans at different levels during
the development of the software.
understand the software project estimation models and estimate the work to be done, resources
required and the schedule for a software project
UNIT I
SOFTWARE PROCESS
9
Introduction S/W engineering paradigm Life cycle models (water fall, incremental, spiral, WINWIN
spiral, evolutionary, prototyping, object oriented) System engineering Computer based system
Verification Validation Life cycle process Development process System engineering hierarchy
Agile Methodologies Scrum.
UNIT II
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
9
Functional and non-functional user system requirement engineering process Feasibility studies
Requirements Elicitation Validation and management Software prototyping Prototyping in the
software process Rapid prototyping techniques User interface prototyping S/W document. Analysis
and modeling Data, functional and behavioral models Structured analysis and data dictionary.
UNIT III
DESIGN CONCEPTS AND PRINCIPLES
9
Design process and concepts Modular design Design heuristic Architectural design Software
Architecture Data design Component level design User interface design User interface design
principles. Real time systems Real time software design System design Real time executives Data
acquisition system Monitoring and control system. SCM Need for SCM Version control
Introduction to SCM process Software configuration items.
UNIT IV
TESTING
9
Taxonomy of software testing levels test activities types of s/w test black box testing testing
boundary conditions structural testing test coverage criteria based on data flow mechanisms
regression testing testing in the large. S/W testing strategies strategic approach and issues unit testing
integration tests validation testing system testing and debugging.
UNIT V
SOFTWARE PROJECT MANAGEMENT
9
Measures and measurements S/W complexity metrics Size measure Data and logic structure measure
Information flow measure. Software cost estimation Function point models COCOMO model
Delphi method Defining a Task Network Scheduling Earned Value Analysis Error Tracking
Software changes Management Program evolution dynamics Software maintenance Architectural
evolution. Taxonomy of CASE tools.
CASE STUDY Payroll System, ATM System.
TOTAL: 45+30
509
The following procedure should be followed for the case studies during practical class
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Introduction and Project definition

Software process overview
Project Planning
Software requirements specification
Introduction to UML and use case diagrams
System modeling
Flow of events and activity diagram
Object Oriented analysis: discovering classes
Interaction diagrams
Software diagrams
Software design and State transition diagram
Component and deployment
Software testing
Software document
Tools used
1. MS source safe
2. MS project
3. Rational Rose
4. Rational Requisite Pro
5. Junit
TEXT BOOK:
Sl.No.
1.
Author(s)
Roger S Pressman
Title of the Book

Software engineering
A practitioners
Approach
Publisher
Tata McGraw Hill
Year of
Publication
2010
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
1.
Ian Sommerville
2.
Pankaj Jalote
3.
James F Peters
Witold Pedryez
Title of the Book

Software engineering
An Integrated
Approach to Software
Engineering
Software Engineering An Engineering
Approach
Publisher
Pearson education
Year of
Publication
2000
2008
Narosa Publications
John Wiley and Sons
2000
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.project management podcast.com/

http://codebetter.com/darrellnorton/2005/02/02/lean software development overview/
http://www.sei.cmu.edu/productlines/frame_report/req_eng.htm
http://www.careervarsity.com/careertools/softwaretesting.ppt
http://nptel.ac.in/courses/Webcourse-contents/IIT%20Kharagpur/Soft%20Engg/New_index1.html
12L604/12T604/12E604/12N604/12P504/12F504
COMPUTER NETWORKS

510
12P505/12F604
DESIGN AND ANALYSIS OF ALGORITHMS

(Common to CSE/IT)
3
OBJECTIVES:
To learn the basic concepts of algorithm, its analysis and notations.
To study and analyze algorithms mathematically.
To analyze the known algorithms and its complexity.
To study about the pattern matching algorithms and analyze principles of parallelism.
To study about NP completeness and its approximation algorithms.
OUTCOMES:
understand the basic notations and introduction to algorithms.
analyze algorithms mathematically.
analyze the known algorithms efficiently.
implement pattern matching and parallelism algorithms.
analyze the NP- completeness problems efficiently.
UNIT I
BASIC CONCEPTS OF ALGORITHM ANALYSIS
9
Introduction to algorithm Notion of algorithm Reduction of algorithm to curve Growth rate analysis
Asymptotic analysis Asymptotic notations Recurrence relations Solving recurrence equation
Strassens matrix multiplication Convex hull .
UNIT II
MATHEMATICAL ASPECTS OF ALGORITHM DESIGN
9
Divide and Conquer Analysis of recursive and Non-recursive algorithms Greedy approach General
method Knapsack Minimum spanning trees Huffman coding Single source shortest path Dynamic
programming Principle of optimality All pairs shortest path Travelling salesman problem Longest
common subsequence.
UNIT III
ANALYSIS OF SEARCHING AND SORTING ALGORITHMS
9
Searching and sorting Sequential search Brute force Selection sort, Bubble sort, Merge sort, Quick
sort Tree Algorithms Binary tree BST AVL tree Heaps Heap sort Optimal BST Graph
algorithms Floyd Warshalls algorithm Prims algorithm Kruskals algorithm Dijkstras algorithm.
UNIT IV
PATTERN MATCHING AND PARALLELISM
9
Simple string Matching KMP string matching algorithm Boyer Moore string matching Parallel
algorithms Introduction to PRAM model Prefix computation List ranking Max finding Sorting
Odd- even merge sort Sorting on a mesh Bitonic sort.
UNIT V
NP- COMPLETENESS AND APPROXIMATION
9
NP-completeness Polynomial time verification Theory of reducibility Circuit Satisfiability Proofs to
NP-completeness NP-Examples Vertex cover Hamiltonian cycle Travelling Salesman problem
Approximation algorithms Approximation algorithm to vertex cover Travelling salesman problem.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
1.
2.
3.
Author(s)
Cormen T H
Leiserson C E
Rivest R L
Stein C
Aho A V
Hopcroft J E
Ullman J D
Anany Levitin
Title of the Book

Introduction to Algorithms
Pearson Education
The Design and Analysis of

Computer Algorithms
Pearson Education
Introduction to the Design

and Analysis of Algorithm
511
Publisher
Pearson Education
Year of
Publication
2009
2006
2011
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Sara Baase
Allen Van Gelder
Introduction to the Design

and Analysis
Pearson Education
1999
2.
Dasgupta
Algorithms
Tata McGraw Hill
2006
3.
Kenneth A Berman
Jerome L Paul
Algorithms
Cengage learning
2004
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.studysphere.com
http://www.algorist.com
http://www.fit.edu
http://www.cse.unl.edu/~ylu/raik283/notes/Algorithm-Analysis.ppt
http://www .nptel.ac.in/courses/106101060/
12P506/12F506
DATA WAREHOUSING AND DATA MINING

(Common to CSE/IT)
3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the primary task of data mining process
To learn the components of Data warehouse
To know in detail about the association rule mining and classification methods
To understand the clustering algorithms.
To study latest data mining applications.
OUTCOMES:
implement the data mining functionalities.
perform preprocessing task over a sample data set for data mining process.
formulate association rule to find out the frequent items from the given data set.
implement the clustering algorithm to identify the pattern over a given data set.
analyze the web data.
UNIT I
DATA WAREHOUSING
9
Need for Data Warehousing - Data Warehouse Architecture Multi Dimensional Data Model OLAP
Technology Categorization of OLAP Servers Data Cube computation.
UNIT II
DATA MINING AND PREPROCESING
9
Motivation Data Mining Functionalities Steps in Data Mining Process Architecture of Typical Data
Mining Systems Classification of Data Mining Systems Data Preprocessing: Data Cleaning Integration
Transformation Reduction Discretization Concept Hierarchies.
UNIT III
ASSOCIATION AND CLASSIFICATION
9
Frequent item set mining: Apriori algorithm using candidate generation Mining various kinds of
Association Rules Classification: Issues Decision Tree Induction Bayesian Classification.
UNIT IV
CLUSTER ANALYSIS
9
Types of Data in Cluster Analysis Clustering Methods: Partitioning Methods Hierarchical Methods
Density based method Outlier Analysis.
512
UNIT V
MINING APPLICATIONS
9
Spatial data mining Multimedia data mining Text mining Time series mining Mining the World
Wide Web.
.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Jiawei Han
Micheline Kamber
Data Mining Concepts

and Techniques
Elsevier Science
India Pvt Ltd
2007
2.
Alex Berson
Stephen J Smith
Data Warehousing, Data

Mining and OLAP
Tata McGraw Hill
2004
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Margaret Dunham
Data Mining: Introductory and

Advanced Topics
Pearson Education
2007
2.
Rajan Chattamvelli
Data Mining Methods
Alpha Science Intl

Ltd
2009
WEB URLs:
1. http://www.cs.gsu.edu/~cscyqz/courses/dm/
2. http://www-db.standford.edu/`ullman/mining/mining.html
3. http:// www.kdnuggets.com
4. http://www.eecs.wsu.edu/~cook/dm
5.http://ocw.mit.edu/courses/sloan- school- of- management/15- 062- data- mining- spring2003/lecture- notes/
12O511
SOFT SKILLS
12P512
COMPILER DESIGN LABORATORY

0
OBJECTIVES:
To implement Lexical Analyzer using C and LEX tool.
To implement Recursive Decent Parser using C.
To implement parser using LEX and YACC.
To implement Calculator functions like addition and multiplication using YACC.
To implement front end of the compiler by means of generating Intermediate codes
using C.
To implement Directed Acyclic Graph (DAG) using C.
To implement LR Parser using C.
OUTCOMES:
apply the knowledge of LEX tool & YACC tool to develop a scanner & parser
and calculator.
write program for Recursive Decent Parser.

513
1.5
design and implement a front end of the compiler.

develop program for Directed Acyclic Graph (DAG).
write program for LR parser.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Implementation of lexical analyzer in C.
2. Implementation of lexical analyzer using LEX tool.
3. Implementation of the recursive descent parser for an expression grammar that generates
arithmetic expressions with digits, + and *.
4. Implementation of a parser for the same grammar as given in problem using YACC and LEX.
5. Write semantic rules to the YACC program in problem 5 and implement a calculator that
takes an expression with digits, + and * and computes and prints its value.
6. Implementation of the front end of a compiler that generates the three address code for a
simple language with: one data type integer, arithmetic operators, relational operators,
variable declaration statement, one conditional construct, one iterative construct and
assignment statement.
7. Implementation of DAG using C.
8. Implementation of LR parsing using C.
12P513/12F513
JAVA PROGRAMMING LABORATORY

(Common to CSE/IT)
0
1.5
OBJECTIVES:
To develop software development skills in java programming.
To learn how to compile and execute them under the Sun Microsystems, Inc. Java 2 Platform.
Standard Edition, or other Integrated Development Environments (IDEs) such as Net Beans.
To write programs using data types, flow of control, classes, methods, objects, arrays, exception
handling, recursion, and graphical user interfaces (GUIs).
To develop applets for potential inclusion in web pages.
To understand how such applets may access enterprise data bases.
OUTCOMES:
develop projects using OO Concepts ,AWT, and JDBC in java programming.
design java objects, basic input/output methods and their use.
develop application using object inheritance.
develop an application using java applets..
implement the various system libraries for application development.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Program to illustrate class, objects and constructors.
2. Creation of classes and use of method and constructor overloading.
3. Program to implement string-handling functions.
4. Program to implement Collection classes.
5. Program to illustrate packages and interfaces
6. Design a Vehicle class hierarchy in Java. Write a test program to demonstrate polymorphism.
7. Programs using IO streams.
8. Programs using file operations.
9. Program to implement Thread based applications and Exception Handling.
10. Developing a simple paint like program using applet.
11. Design a scientific calculator using event-driven programming paradigm of Java.
12. Programs using JDBC.
12L613/12T613/12P514/12F514
514
SEMESTER VI
ENGINEERING ETHICS
12P602/12F602
ADVANCED JAVA PROGRAMMING

(Common to CSE/IT)
3
OBJECTIVES:
To discuss basic principles of HTML, Java Script and XML
To understand the core principles of the Java Language.
To gain knowledge to develop standalone applications.
To gain knowledge to develop dynamic Web applications.
To introduce tools, technologies and framework hence Java Beans, Servlets, JSP, EJB and struts
are introduced to enhance web development skills.
OUTCOMES:
develop an application using script concepts.
demonstrate applications using servlet.
design dynamic Web applications using JSP.
demonstrate Java Beans, EJB for web development.
design an application using struts.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO HTML, JAVA SCRIPT AND XML
9
HTML common tags List Tables Images Forms Frames Cascading Style sheets Introduction
to Java Scripts Objects in Java Script Dynamic HTML with Java Script XML Document type
definition XML Schemas Document Object Model Presenting XML Using XML processors
DOM and SAX.
UNIT II
SERVLET
9
Introduction to servlets Need for dynamic content Java servlet technology Servlet API and lifecycle
Servlet API Servlet Config interface Servlet Request and Servlet Response Interfaces Generic Servlet
Class Servlet Input Stream and Servlet Output Stream Classes Request Dispatcher Interface Http
Servlet Class Http Servlet Request and Http Servlet Response Interfaces Http Session Interface
Servlet Lifecycle Working with servlets Organization of a web application Creating a web
application (using net beans) Creating a servlet Compiling and building the web application JDBC
Design of JDBC JDBC configuration Executing SQL statement Query execution Scrollable and
updatable result sets row sets metadata Transaction.
UNIT III
JSP
9
Introduction to JSP Problem with servlet Anatomy of a JSP page JSP processing JSP application
design with MVC Setting up and JSP Environment Installing the Java Software Development Kit
Tomcat server & Testing Tomcat JSP application development Generating dynamic content Using
scripting elements implicit JSP objects Conditional processing Displaying values using an expression to
set an attribute Declaring variables and methods Error handling and debugging Sharing data Between
JSP pages Requests and users passing control and date between pages Sharing session and application
data Memory usage considerations.
UNIT IV
JAVA BEANS AND EJB
9
Java Beans Introduction to Java Beans Advantages of Java Beans BDK Introspection Using bound
properties Bean info interface Constrained properties persistence Customizers Java Beans API
EJB Enterprise bean architecture Benefits of enterprise bean Type of beans Accessing beans
Packaging beans Creating web applications Creating enterprise bean Creating web client Creating
JSP file Building and running web application.
515
UNIT V
JSF, HIBERNATE, STRUTS
9
Java Server Faces Need of MVC Components of JSF JSF as an application JSF lifecycle JSF
configuration JSF web applications (login form, JSF pages).HIBERNATE Introduction Writing the
application Application development approach Creating database and tables in MySQL Creating a
web application Adding the required library files creating a Java bean class creating hibernate
configuration and mapping file Adding a mapping resource Creating JSPs STRUTS Introduction,
Struts framework core components Installing and setting up struts Getting started with struts.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Deitel
Nieto
Sharanam Shah
Vaishali Shah
Sharanam Shah
Vaishali Shah
1.
2.
3.
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Internet and World Wide Web

How to program
Pearson
Education.
2008
Java EE 6 for Beginners
Shroff
2011
Java EE Project using EJB3

JPA and struts 2 for beginners
Shroff
2011
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Harwani B M
1.
Title of the Book

Java Server Faces A practical
Approach for beginners
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Eastern Economy
Edition
2009
O'Reilly
2005
2.
Bill Siggelkow S P D
O'Reilly
Jakarta Struts Cookbook
3.
Pekowsky
Javaserver Pages
Pearson Education
2004
4.
Harwani B M
Java Server Faces A practical

Approach for beginners
Eastern Economy
Edition
2009
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.w3schools.com/xml/default.asp
http://www.tutorialspoint.com/servlets/
http://www.oracle.com/technetwork/java/javaee/jsp/index.html
http://www.oracle.com/technetwork/java/javaee/ejb/index.html
http://www.tutorialspoint.com/jsf/
12P603
XML AND WEB SERVICES

3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the fundamental concepts of Web services.
To understand the fundamental concepts of XML Technology.
To design Web service Architecture.
To Study Building Blocks of Web services.
To understand the XML security issues.
OUTCOMES:
identify fundamental elements in Web Technology and XML services.
design the Architecture of Web Services.
implement building blocks for SOAP.
516
identify the key technologies for Web Services.

analyze security in XML.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Role of XML XML and the web XML language basics SOAP Web services Revolutions of
XML Service Oriented Architecture (SOA).
UNIT II
XML TECHNOLOGY
9
XML Name spaces Structuring with schemas and DTD Presentation techniques Transformation
XML infrastructure XML Query XML Data model.
UNIT III
SOAP
9
Overview of SOAP HTTP XML-RPC SOAP-Protocol Message structure Intermediaries
Actors Design patterns and faults SOAP with attachments.
UNIT IV
WEB SERVICES
9
Overview Architecture Key technologies UDDI WSDL ebXML SOAP and web services in
E- Com Overview of .NET and J2EE AJAX Client side persistence dataset.
UNIT V
XML SECURITY
9
Security overview Canonicalization XML security framework XML encryption XML digital
signature XKMS structure Guidelines for signing XML documents XML in practice.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Frank P Coyle
XML Web Services And

The Data Revolution
Pearson Education
2002
2.
Ramesh Nagappan
Robert Skoczylas
Rima Patel Sriganesh
Developing Java Web

Services
Wiley
2004
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
1.
Sandeep Chatterjee
James Webber
Developing Enterprise
Web Services
Pearson Education
2004
2.
James McGovern
Java Web Services

Architecture
Morgan Kaufmann
Publishers
2005
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://msdn.microsoft.com/en us/library/ms996507.aspx
http://www.xml.com/pub/rg/Web_Services_Tutorials
http://www.cis.upenn.edu/~mkse212/slides
http://www.cs.colorado.edu/~kena/classes/7818/f06/lectures
http://www.andrew.cmu.edu/course/95 702/slides
517
Year of
Publication
12P604/12F501
UNIX AND SHELL PROGRAMMING

(Common to CSE/IT)
3
OBJECTIVES:
To know the Linux environment.
To understand the processes and filters.
To know the fundamentals of shell scripting/programming.
To understand the system programming.
To know source code management system.
OUTCOMES:
design the Unix/Linux environment.
write programs using filter.
implement shell scripts to automate various tasks.
write system programs.
design source code management design system.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
History of UNIX The UNIX philosopy GUI Introduction to UNIX The Shell Executing
commands and command options Interactive features: job control, history The UNIX file system
File Utilities (cp, mv, rm, etc.) comm, cmp, diff Tree walking find, xargs.
UNIT II
PROCESSES, FILTERS AND REGULAR EXPRESSIONS
9
UNIX Processes Pipes Signals Process utilities (ps, kill, wait, sleep) Filters: cat, head, tail, sort,
uniq Regular Expressions Xargs Grep, fgrep, egret Sed part I Sed part II Awk.
UNIT III
SHELL SCRIPTING
9
Shell Commands Shell Operations Scripting Variables Loops Functions Quoting Here
documents Arithmetic expressions Parsing Command History Job control Command Execution
Restricted shells Built in commands.
UNIT IV
SYSTEMS PROGRAMMING
9
System calls and Library routines Error handling Regular file management Unix internals Kernel
basics Unix file system Kernel processes and user processes Input/Output Interprocess
communication Unix system administration Maintaining the file system Maintaining user accounts
Installing software Peripheral devices Network interface.
UNIT V
SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT
9
Source code management system Usage models Unix source code management systems RCS
Overview of commands Basic operations Specification CVS Command- line syntax and options
CVS dot files Environment variables CVSROOT variables SVC Obtaining and Using SVC
GNU Make Utility Writing manual pages.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Graham Glass
King Ables
Unix For Programmers And

Users
Pearson Education
2003
2.
Arnold Robins
UNIX in a nutshell
Orielly
2005
REFERENCE BOOK:
Sl.No.
1.
Author(s)
Stephen G Kochan
Title of the Book

Unix Shell Programming
518
Publisher
Sams Publishing
Year of
Publication
2003
WEB URLs:
1. http://www.ee.surrey.ac.uk/Teaching/Unix/
2. http://www.cs.bu.edu/teaching/
3. http://www.elearning.vtu.ac.in/CS36.html
4. http://www.grymoire.com/Unix/Awk.html
5. http://www.unix.org/
12P605
MOBILE APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT

3
3.5
OBJECTIVES:
To develop knowledge about mobile application development.
To understand the building blocks of mobile apps.
To gain knowledge about graphics and animations in mobile apps.
To know about testing of mobile apps.
To understand more about how to distribute apps on mobile market place.

OUTCOMES:
analyze the mobile apps environment.
analyze the building blocks of mobile applications.
design graphics and animation in mobile applications.
test the mobile applications.
develop the mobile applications for e-marketing .
UNIT I
GETTING STARTED WITH MOBILITY
9
Mobility landscape Mobile platforms Mobile apps development Overview of android platform
Setting up the mobile app development environment along with an emulator A case study on mobile app
development.
UNIT II
BUILDING BLOCKS OF MOBILE APPS
10
App user interface designing Mobile UI resources (Layout,UI elements,Draw-able, Menu) Activity
States and life cycle Interaction amongst activities App functionality beyond user interface Threads,
Async task Services States and lifecycle Notifications Broadcast receivers Telephony and SMS
APIs Native data handling On-device file I/O, Shared preferences Mobile databases such as SQLite,
and enterprise data access (via Internet/Intranet).
UNIT III
SPRUCING UP MOBILE APPS
9
Graphics and animation Custom views Canvas Animation APIs Multimedia Audio/video
playback and record Location awareness and native hardware access (sensors such as accelerometer and
gyroscope).
UNIT IV
TESTING MOBILE APPS
Debugging mobile apps White box testing Black box testing Test automation of mobile apps
JUnit for Android, Robotium, MonkeyTalk.
UNIT V
TAKING APPS TO MARKET
Versioning Signing and packaging mobile apps Distributing apps on mobile market place.
TOTAL: 45+15
519
TEXT BOOK:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
1.
Anubhav Pradhan
Anil V Deshpande
Title of the Book

Mobile Apps Development
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Wiley
2014
REFERENCE BOOK:
Sl. No.
1.
Author(s)
Barry Burd
Title of the Book

Android Application
Development All in one for
Dummies
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Wiley
2011
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.impetus.com/mobility
http://www.harding.edu/fmccown/introduction to mobile computing.pptx
http://www.diva portal.org/smash/get/diva2:626531/FULLTEXT01.pdf
http://www.law.fsu.edu/library/databases/ppt/Androidapps.ppt
http://www.ibm.com/mobile_app_testing
12P611/12F611
ADVANCED JAVA PROGRAMMING LABORATORY

(Common to CSE/IT)
0
1.5
OBJECTIVES:
To familiar with the main uses of the Internet as the primary modern technology for online
communication.
To create simple web pages using HTML and CSS.
To write simple programs using JavaScript and JSF.
To have in- depth knowledge in JavaBeans.
To develop application using Hibernate and Struts.
OUTCOMES:
create web pages using HTML, Java Script.
code simple programs using JSF.
implement real time applications using JavaBeans.
implement programs using Hibernate.
implement programs using Struts.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Develop web pages (using HTML) of an online Bookstore application.

Validate the Registration, user login, user profile and payment by credit card pages using
JavaScript.
Create and save an XML document at the server, which contains 10 users information. Write a
program, which takes User Id as an input and returns the user details by taking the user
information from the XML document.
Simple Servlet Question Answer Application to demonstrate use of HttpServletRequest and
HttpServletResponse interfaces.
Implementation of basic Calculator using ServletInputStream and ServletOutputStream.
JSP Application to Authenticate User Login as per the registration details.
520
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
JSP Application to accept Registration Details form user and Store it into the database table.
Develop a web application to add items in the inventory using JSF.
Implementation of Room Reservation System Application Using Enterprise Java Beans.
Hibernate application to store Feedback of Website Visitor in MySQL Database.
Develop a simple Struts Application to Demonstrate 3 page Website of Teaching Classes which
passes values from every page to another.
12P612/12F512
UNIX AND SHELL PROGRAMMING LABORATORY

(Common to CSE/IT)
0
OBJECTIVES:
To provide knowledge of Unix concepts.
To know the functionality of a multi user operating system.
To provide the skills needed to develop and customize UNIX shell programs.
To know process management and system operation.
To understand security management in UNIX.
OUTCOMES:
write program using advanced Linux commands.
implement text processing utilities like grep, sed and awk in UNIX.
write shell programming.
implement process management and system operation of UNIX.
design security management in UNIX.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Execution of Advanced Linux commands.
2. Simple shell script for basic arithmetic and logical calculations.
3. Shell scripts to check various attributes of files and directories.
4. Shell scripts to perform various operations on given strings.
5. Shell scripts to explore system variables such as PATH, HOME etc.
6. Shell scripts to check and list attributes of processes.
7. Execution of various system administrative commands.
8. Write awk script that uses all of its features.
9. Use seed instruction to process /etc/password file.
10. Write a shell script to display list of users currently logged in.
11. Write a shell script to delete all the temporary files.
12. Write a shell script to search an element from an array using binary searching.
12A651/12M651/12C651/12L651/12T651/12E651/12N651/12P651/12F651
MINI PROJECT
521
1.5
ELECTIVES
12P001
ADVANCED DATABASE MANAGEMNT SYSTEMS

3
OBJECTIVES:
To know the modeling and design of databases.
To understand parallel and distributed databases and its applications.
To know the usage of advanced data models.
To understand complex queries.
To know object database.
OUTCOMES:
design relational databases and skills to optimize database performance in practice.
develop distributed database application.
write recursive queries.
design faster algorithms in solving practical database problems.
implement intelligent databases and various data models.
UNIT I
PARALLEL AND DISTRIBUTED DATABASES
9
Inter and intra query parallelism Architecture Query evaluation Optimization Distributed
architecture Storage Catalog Management Query processing Transactions Recovery Large scale
data analytics in the internet context MapReduce Paradigm Run-time system for supporting scalable
and fault-tolerant execution-paradigms: Pig Latin and Hive Parallel databases versus Map Reduce.
UNIT II
ACTIVE DATABASES
9
Syntax and semantics (Starburst, Oracle, DB2) Taxonomy Applications Integrity management
Workflow management Business Rules Design Principles Properties Rule Modularization Rule
debugging IDEA methodology Open problems.
UNIT III
TEMPORAL AND OBJECT DATABASES
9
Overview Data types Associating Facts Temporal query language TSQL2 Time ontology
Language constructs Architecture Temporal Support Object database and Change management
Change of schemaImplementing database updates in O2 Benchmark database updates Performance
Evaluation.
UNIT IV
COMPLEX QUERIES AND REASONING
9
Logic of query languages Relational calculi Recursive rules Syntax and semantics of data log Fix
point semantics Implementation rules and recursion Rule rewriting methods Compilation and
optimization Recursive queries in SQL Open issues.
UNIT V
SPATIAL, TEXT AND MULTIMEDIA DATABASES
9
Traditional indexing methods (Secondary keys, Spatial access methods) Text retrieval Multimedia
indexing 1D Time Series 2D Color images Sub pattern matching Open issues Uncertainties.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Year of
Publication
1.
Ramakrishnan
Gehrke
Database Management System
Tata Mc Graw
Hill
2008
2.
Carlo Zaniolo
Stefano Ceri
Advanced Database Systems
Morgan
Kauffmann
2004
522
Publisher
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Raghu Ramakrishnan
Tata McGraw Hill
2008
2.
Hector GarciaMolina
Jeffrey D Ullman
Jennifer Widom
Database System
Implementation
Pearson Education
2012
3.
Peter Rob
Corlos Coronel
Database System Design

Implementation and
Management
Thompson
Learning Course
Technology
2012
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.w3schools.com
http://www.blinkvid.com/video
http://www.learnerstv.com/course.php?cat=Computers
http://www.studyyaar.com/index.php/learning program/7 advanced database management
system
http://www.cs.uiuc.edu/class/fa06/cs511/schedule.html
12P002
EMBEDDED SYSTEMS
3
OBJECTIVES:
OUTCOMES:
UNIT I
10
micro controllers.
UNIT II
8
523
UNIT II
10
UNIT IV
REAL TIME CONCEPTS
10
UNIT V
7
Systems (Smart cards, RFIDs, Finger Scan).
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
1.
Author(s)
Rajkamal
2.
Shibu K V
Title of the Book

Embedded Systems Architecture
Programming and
Design
Introduction to
Embedded Systems
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Tata McGraw Hill
2008
Tata Mc Graw Hill
2009
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
1.
Sriram V Iyer
Pankaj Gupta
2.
Frank Vahid
3.
Peter Marwedel
Title of the Book

Embedded Realtime
Systems Programming
Embedded System
design - A unified
hardware/software
introduction
Embedded system
design
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Tata McGraw Hill
2008
Willey
2009
Springer
2010
WEB URLs:
1. http:/www./nptel.ac.in/courses/Webcourse-contents/IIT%20Kharagpur/Embedded%20systems/
New_index1.html.
12P003
CLOUD COMPUTING
3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the fundamentals of cloud computing.
To know the cloud computing services.
To understand cloud computing for community.
524
To understand web mail services.

To know cloud storage.
OUTCOMES:
discover cloud services.
design the cloud computing services.
use cloud computing for community.
design the web mail services.
analyze the cloud storage.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Cloud computing introduction From collaboration to cloud Working of cloud computing pros and cons
Benefits Developing cloud computing services Cloud service development Discovering cloud
services.
UNIT II
CLOUD COMPUTING FOR EVERYONE
9
Centralizing email communications Cloud computing for community Collaborating on schedules
Collaborating on group projects and events Cloud computing for corporation Mapping schedules
managing projects Presenting on road.
UNIT III
USING CLOUD SERVICES
9
Collaborating on calendars Schedules and task management Exploring on line scheduling and planning
Collaborating on event management Collaborating on contact management Collaborating on project
management Collaborating on word processing Spreadsheets and databases.
UNIT IV
OUTSIDE THE CLOUD
9
Evaluating web mail services Evaluating instant messaging Evaluating web conference tools
Creating groups on social networks Evaluating on line groupware Collaborating via blogs and wikis
UNIT V
STORING AND SHARING
9
Understanding cloud storage Evaluating on line file storage Exploring on line book marking services
Exploring on line photo editing applications Exploring photo sharing communities Controlling it with
web based desktops.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Mahmood
Zaigham
Cloud Computing for

Enterprise Architectures
Hill Richard
2011
George Reese
Cloud Application
Architectures
Shroff/O' Reilly
2009
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
1
Author(s)
Michael Miller
Haley Beard
Michael Miller
Title of the Book

Cloud Computing
Cloud Computing Best
Practices for Managing and
Measuring Processes for on
demand Computing
Web Based Applications That
Change the Way You Work
and Collaborate Online
525
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Pearson Education
2009
Emereo Pvt Limited
2008
Que
2008
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
https://www.ibm.com/.../chapter_13_cloud_computing_reference.
https://www.ibm.com/cloud computing/us/en/.
https://www.europarl.europa.eu/committees/en/studiesdownload.html
http://www.w3.org/community/cloud/
http://www.csrc.nist.gov/publications
12P004
WEB PROGRAMMING
3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand basic knowledge of .NET framework.
To learn object oriented programming concepts in C#.
To know the applications of windows based programming.
To understand the advanced features of C# like serializing objects, reflection and multithreading.
To study the basics ADO.NET.
OUTCOMES:
develop simple .NET Framework application.
implement programs in object oriented programming in C#.
apply windows based programming.
analyze advanced features of C#.
implement the applications using ADO.NET.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO .NET FRAMEWORK AND XML
9
Knowledge of .NET framework .NET features and .NET development platform Understanding
advantages of .NET framework Comparing .Net with Java and PHP, XML in .NET Framework.
UNIT II
INTRODUCTION TO C#
9
Objected oriented concepts using C# Language Review of object oriented programming Advanced
concepts in OOP Relationship Inheritance Abstract classes Polymorphism Object Oriented design
methodology Approach Best practices UML class diagrams Interface Common base class
.NET components Assemblies App domains Contexts Reflection Remoting.
UNIT III
SQL SERVER 2008
9
Design and develop Database using SQL Server 2008 Introduction to features and architecture of SQL
Server 2008 Introduction to Database Engine and storage Engine Creating Tables, Temporary tables,
and Integrity rules Coding in Batches Writing Stored Procedures/Functions Error Handling
Transaction in SQL server.
UNIT IV
ADO.NET
9
Data Access programming using ADO.NET Understanding data access in building internet applications
Concept of common data access programming model Using ADO.NET components for application
development Configuring and executing various objects Understanding connected and disconnected
models for data access.
UNIT V
DEVELOPING ASP.NET APPLICATIONS
9
Web Application Development using ASP.NET Review on HTML, CSS Basics of ASP.NET Page
Object and Dynamic Compilation Model ASP.NET controls Understand Data Binding and various Data
Sources in ASP.NET Understanding the creation of Master Pages and themes Understanding
configuration of web applications IIS configurations State management in ASP.NET.
TOTAL: 45
526
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
John Sharp
Microsoft Visual C# 2005

Step by Step
Microsoft Press
2005
Andrew Troelsen
C# and the .NET Platform
Microsoft Press
2005
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
David Sceppa
Doug Lowe
Joel Murach
Bryan syverson
Joel Murach
Title of the Book

Programming Microsoft
ADO.NET 2.0 Core
Reference
Murachs ASP.NET 2.0
Up-graders guide
Murachs SQLSERVER
2008 for developers
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Microsoft Press
2006
Mike Murach and

Associates Inc
2005
Mike Murach and

Associates Inc
2009
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.msdn2.microsoft.com/en-us/vstudio/default.aspx
http://www.c-sharpcorner.com/
http://www.gotdotnet.com/
http://www.microsoft.com/net
http://www.netfx3.com
12P005
E - COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY
3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand an overview of various E- commerce applications.
To know the fundamentals of various E- commerce types like ERP, EDI, and CRM.
To understand the process of Supply Chain Management, Online Advertising and Online
Marketing.
To learn the concepts of Resource Discovery, Information search, Retrieval and Filtering.
To understand the usage of multimedia data in E- commerce applications.
OUTCOMES:
apply knowledge of E- commerce framework to various applications.
analyze different types of Electronic payment systems.
apply the techniques for Intra and internal Commerce, Automation, Supply chain Management,
Corporate Digital Library, Advertising and Marketing.
analyze the concept of Information search, Retrieval, Filtering and discovery of Resources.
implement the concepts of Multimedia data processing like Digital video processing, Desktop
video conferencing in E Commerce applications.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Electronic commerce Framework Anatomy of E-Commerce applications E-Commerce consumer
applications E-Commerce organization applications Consumer oriented electronic commerce
Mercantile process models.
527
UNIT II
TYPES OF E-COMMERCE SYSTEM
9
Electronic payment systems Digital token based smart cards Credit cards Risks in electronic payment
systems Inter organizational commerce EDI EDI implementation Value added networks CRM
ERP ELM Workflow.
UNIT III
SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT
9
Intra organizational commerce Work flow Automation customization and internal commerce Supply
chain management Corporate digital library Document library Digital document types Corporate
data warehouses Advertising and marketing Information based marketing Advertising on internet
Online marketing process Market research.
UNIT IV
SEARCHING TECHNIQUES
9
Consumer search and resource discovery Information search and retrieval Commerce catalogues
Information filtering.
UNIT V
MULTIMEDIA AND ECOMMERCE
9
Multimedia Key multimedia concepts Digital video and electronic commerce Desktop video
processing Desktop video conferencing.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOK:
Sl.No.
1.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Kalakata Whinston
Frontiers of electronic
commerce
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Pearson Education
2011
Publisher
Year of
Publication
REFERENCE BOOK:
Sl.No.
1.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Hendry Chan
Raymond Lee
Tharam Dillon
Ellizabeth Chang
John Wiley
E- Commerce
fundamentals and
Applications
Wiley
2008
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.ecommerce-digest.com/tut.html
http://www.webdevelopersjournal.com/columns/ecommerce1.html
http://www.jan.newmarch.name/ecommerce/tutorial.html
http://www.scribd.com/doc/16390705/ECommerce-Lecture-Notes
http://www.aect.cuhk.edu.hk/~ect7010
12P006
HIGH SPEED NETWORKS

3
OBJECTIVES:
To learn the fundamentals of networking and protocols.
To know ATM concepts.
To know techniques involved to support network modeling and queuing analysis.
To understand the real time traffic, congestion and flow control techniques.
To know the concept about quality of service to different applications.
528
OUTCOMES:
design the basic operations of protocols.
analyze the frame relay networks and ATM.
analyze the network modeling and queuing analysis techniques.
apply the concept of real time traffic, congestion and flow control techniques.
demonstrate the quality of service to different applications.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Network history Speed and quality of service Advanced TCP/IP and ATM networks TCP/IP protocol
architecture OSI model Internetworking TCP UDP IP IPv6.
UNIT II
HIGHSPEED NETWORKS
9
Packet switching networks Frame relay network ATM protocol architecture ATM logical connection
ATM cells ATM service categories AAL High-speed LANs and wireless LAN.
UNIT III
NETWORK MODELING
9
Introduction to probability Random variable Stochastic process Introduction to queues Queuing
analysis for computer network Queuing models Single and multiple server queues Queues with
priorities Network of queues Other queuing models estimating model parameter Self similar traffic.
UNIT IV
CONGESTION FLOW AND ERROR CONTROL
9
Effects of congestion Congestion and control Traffic management Congestion control in packet
switching network Frame relay congestion control Need of flow control Link control mechanism
ARQ performance TCP flow control TCP congestion control Performance of TCP over ATM
Traffic and congestion control in ATM network.
UNIT V
QOS IN IP NETWORK
9
Integrated service architecture (ISA) Queuing discipline Random early detection Differentiated
Service RSVP MPLS RTP.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOK:
Sl.No.
1.
Author(s)
William Stallings
Title of the Book

High Speed networks and
Internets Performance and
QoS
Publisher
Pearson Education
Year of
Publication
2012
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
1.
Author(s)
Warland
Pravin Varaiya
Irvan Pepelnjk Jim
Guichard
Jeff Apcar
2.
Title of the Book
Publisher
High Performance
Jean Harcourt Asia

Pvt. Ltd
MPLS and VPN architecture
Cisco Press Volume

1 and 2
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
http://www.sterbenz.org/jpgs/tutorials/hsn
http://www.networktutorials.info/index.html
http://www.tnlearner.net/lecture-notes/
http://www.highspeedns.com
5. http://www.pages.cpsc.ucalgary.ca/~carey/CPSC641/archive/Sept2005/project.html
529
Year of
Publication
2012
2007
12P007
VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORKS

3
OBJECTIVES:
To describe the basic concepts and technologies of VPN.
To study the protocols and the features of VPN.
To explore the configuration and testing of layer connections.
To learn the implementation of Altavista Tunnel.
To learn the configuration and installation of Altavista Tunnel.
OUTCOMES:
analyze the VPN technologies and security issues.
identify different protocols and their functionalities.
describe the configuration of different layer connections.
implement the Altavista Tunnel.
configure and testing methodologies of Altavista Tunnel.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
VPN Security risks of the internet Internet security issues VPN solutions Basic VPN technologies
Firewall deployment Encryption and authentication VPN protocols Methodologies for compromising
VPNs.
UNIT II
WIDE AREA REMOTE ACCESS AND THE VPN
9
General WAN RAS VPN concepts VPN versus WAN VPN versus RAS Implementing layer 2
connections Point to point tunneling protocol Layer 2 forwarding and the layer 2 tunneling protocol
Differences between PPTP L2F and L2TP How PPTP works Features of PPTP.
UNIT III
CONFIGURING AND TESTING LAYER 2 CONNECTIONS
9
Installing and configuring PPTP on a windows NT RAS server Configuring PPTP for dial up networking
on a windows NT client Configuring PPTP for dial up networking on a windows 95 or 98 client
Enabling PPTP on remote access switches Making the calls Troubleshooting problems.
UNIT IV
IMPLEMENTING THE ALTAVISTA TUNNEL
9
Advantages of the altavista tunnel system Altavista tunnel limitations Working of altavista VPNs and
altavista.
UNIT V
CONFIGURING AND TESTING THE ALTAVISTA TUNNEL
9
Installing the altavista tunnel Configuring the altavista telecommuter client Creating a VPN with the
unix secure shell Building and installing SSH SSH components Creating a VPN with PPP and SSH
A performance evaluation.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOK:
Sl.No.
1.
Author(s)
Charlie Scott
Paul Wolfe
Mike Erwin
Title of the Book

Virtual Private
Networks
Publisher
Year of
Publication
OReilly
1998
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
1.
Ruixi Yuan
Timothy Strayer W
2.
James Henry Carmouche
Title of the Book

Virtual Private
Networks
IPsec VPN
Fundamentals
530
Publisher
Addison Wesley
CISCO Press
Year of
Publication
2001
2006
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.technet.microsoft.com/en us/library/bb742566.aspx
http://www.vpnc.org
http://www.vpnd.dotsrc.org
http://www.intranetjournal.com
http://www.wkmn.com/newsite/vpn.html
12P008
DISTRIBUTED SYSTEMS
3
OBJECTIVES:
To provide understanding of distributed systems and their characteristics, and the developments in
distributed systems.
To investigate problems of timing and event ordering.
To gain experience in naming of objects, and distribution of objects.
To develop a familiarity with distributed file systems.
To understand fault tolerance can be enhanced with concurrency control mechanisms and
replication of services.
OUTCOMES:
analyze concept of distributed system.
analyze the problems of timing and event ordering.
carryout the experience in naming of objects, and distribution of objects.
apply the concept of distributed file systems.
demonstrate the concurrency control mechanisms and replication of services.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Characteristics of distributed systems Examples of distributed systems Resource sharing and the web
Challenges System models Architectural models Internet protocols Networking and communication
Networking and internetworking Interprocess communication The APIs for the internet protocols
Client server communication Group communication.
UNIT II
TIME AND GLOBAL STATES
9
Introduction Clock events and process states Synchronizing physical clocks Logical Time and
logical clocks Global states Distributed debugging Coordination Agreement Introduction
Distributed mutual exclusion Election Multicast communication Consensus and related problems
Transactions Nested transactions Locks Optimistic concurrency control Timestamp ordering
Comparison of methods for concurrency control.
UNIT III
DISTRIBUTED OBJECTS AND REMOTE INVOCATION
9
Communication between distributed object Remote procedure calling Events and notifications Java
RMI Operating system support Security introduction Operating system layer Protection
Processes and threads Overview of security techniques Cryptographic algorithms Digital signature
Cryptographic pragmatics.
UNIT IV
DISTRIBUTED FILE SYSTEMS
9
Introduction File service architecture Recent advances Name services and domain name systems
Directory and discovery services.
UNIT V
TRANSACTIONS AND CONCURRENCY CONTROL
9
Introduction Flat and nested distributed transactions Atomic commit protocols Concurrency control
in distributed transactions Distributed deadlocks Transaction recovery Characteristics of multimedia
data Quality of service management Resource management Stream adaptation.
TOTAL: 45
531
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
1.
2.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
George Coulouris Jean

Dollimore
Tim Kindberg
Distributed Systems
Concept and Design
Pearson Education
Andrew S Tanenbaum
Maarten van Steen
Distributed Systems
Principles and Paradigms
Prentice Hall of
India
Year of
Publication
2008
2011
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Emmerich
1.
2.
Title of the Book

Engineering Distributed
Objects
Component Software
Beyond Object- Oriented
Programming
Szyperski
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Springer
2001
Pearson Edition
2004
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.distributed.net
http://www.globus.org
http://www.lsd.uoc.gr/lectures.html
http://www.cs.stevens.edu/~badri/CS649/Syllabus.html
http://www.cse.cuhk.edu.hk/~cslui/csc4160_lecture.html
12P009
OPEN SOURCE TECHNOLOGIES

3
OBJECTIVES:
To introduce technological, social, and pragmatic aspects of developing open source software.
To learn to use the tools, techniques, and strategies of open source developers.
To understand how to use a version control system and to interface with version control systems
used by development communities.
To able to contribute software and interact with Free and Open Source Software development
projects.
To understand the open source languages and databases.
OUTCOMES:
install and run open source operating systems.
gather information about Free and Open Source Software projects from software releases and from
sites on the internet.
build and modify one or more Free and Open Source Software packages.
develop an application using python .
write software that integrates and interacts with existing open source systems.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Introduction to open sources Need to open sources Advantages of open sources Application of open
sources Open source operating systems: LINUX: Introduction General overview Kernel Mode and
User Mode Process Advanced Concepts Scheduling Personalities Cloning Signals
Development with Linux.
532
UNIT II
OPEN SOURCE DATABASE
9
My SQL: Introduction Setting up account Starting, terminating and writing your own SQL programs
Record Selection Technology Working with Strings data and Time Sorting Query Results
Generating Summary Working with metadata Using Sequences My SQL and web.
UNIT III
OPEN SOURCE PROGAMMING LANGUAGES
9
PHP: Introduction Programming in web environment variables constants data types operators
Statements Functions Arrays OOP String Manipulation and regular expression File handling and
data storage PHP and SQL database PHP and LDAP Connectivity Sending and receiving
E mails debugging and error handling Security Templates.
UNIT IV
PYTHON
9
Syntax and style Python objects Numbers Sequences Strings Lists and tuples Dictionaries
Conditionals and loops Files Input and Output Errors and exceptions Functions Modules
Classes and OOP Execution Environment.
UNIT V
OPEN SOURCE TOOLS AND TECHNOLOGIES
9
Web server: Apache Web server Working with web server configuring and using apache web services
MDA: Introduction to MDA Genesis of MDA Meta Object facility UML UML Profiles MDA
Applications.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOK:
Sl.No.
1
Author(s)
Venkateshwarlu N B
Title of the Book

Introduction to Linux
Installation and
Programming
Publisher
Year of
Publication
B S Publishers
2002
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Matt Welsh
MattiasKalle Daileimer
Terry Dawson
Lar Kaufman
Carla Schroder
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Running Linux
OReaily
2002
Linux Cookbook
OReaily
2004
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.oreilly.com/catalog/opensources/book/toc.html
http://www.dsl.org/cookbook/cookbook_toc.html
http://www.tldp.org/guides.html
http://www.network theory.co.uk/docs/gccintro/
http://www.sources.redhat.com/autobook/
12P010
MIDDLEWARE TECHNOLOGIES
3
OBJECTIVES:
To give an overview of Client Server concepts, middleware and RPC.
To evaluate the overview of EJB architecture and its roles.
To give the students an overview of EJB, beans and building an EJB application.
To describe about CORBA, architecture, object model and IDL.
To understand applications using COM and .NET framework.
533
OUTCOMES:
design client-server architecture and its impact on all walks of the network based computing.
analyze middleware technologies for developing distributed applications.
build practical distributed systems using EJB technology.
design distributed systems using CORBA.
implement the concept of COM and .Net for real world application.
UNIT I
CLIENT / SERVER CONCEPTS
9
Client Server File server Database server Group server Object server Web server Middleware
General middleware Service specific middleware Client server building blocks RPC Messaging
Peer to peer.
UNIT II
EJB ARCHITECTURE
9
EJB EJB Architecture Overview of EJB software architecture View of EJB Conversation Building
and deploying EJBs Roles in EJB.
UNIT III
EJB APPLICATIONS
9
EJB session beans EJB entity beans EJB clients EJB deployment Building an application with EJB
using tools.
UNIT IV
CORBA
9
CORBA Distributed systems Purpose Exploring CORBA alternatives Architecture overview
CORBA and networking model CORBA object model IDL ORB Building an application with
CORBA.
UNIT V
COM
9
COM Data types Interfaces Proxy and stub Marshalling Implementing server client Interface
pointers Object creation Invocation Destruction Comparison COM and CORBA Introduction to
.NET Overview of .NET architecture Marshalling Remoting.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Robert Orfali Dan

Harkey
Jeri Edwards
The Essential Client/

Server Survival Guide
Golgotha Publications
Pvt. Ltd.
2002
2.
Tom Valesky
Enterprise Java Beans
Pearson Education
2002
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
1.
Mowbray
Inside CORBA
Pearson Education
2002
2.
Jason Pritchard
COM and CORBA side by

side
Addison Wesley
2000
3.
Jesse Liberty
Programming C#
O Reilly
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
http://www.roseindia.net/ejb/
http://www.indiastudychannel.com/resources/10803 EJB FAQ.aspx
http://www.publib.boulder.ibm.com/
534
Year of
Publication
2010
4.
5.
http://www.middlewares.wordpress.com/2008/05/02/ejb %e2%80%93 two marks q a/

http://www.middlewares.wordpress.com/2008/05/12/what is moniker
12P011
SOFT COMPUTING
3
OBJECTIVES:
To learn fundamentals of fuzzy sets, fuzzy logic and fuzzy inference system.
To understand basics of genetic algorithms and their applications in optimization and planning.
To understand neural networks and learning methods for neural networks.
To develop skills thorough understanding of the theoretical and practical aspects of Soft
computing.
To understand different uses of Soft Computing in various areas.
OUTCOMES:
apply fuzzy logic and reasoning to handle uncertainty and solve engineering problems.
apply genetic algorithms to optimization problems.
apply neural networks to pattern classification and regression problems.
evaluate and compare solutions of various soft computing approaches for a given problem.
analyze soft computing techniques and their roles in building intelligent machines.
UNIT I
FUZZY SET THEORY
9
Introduction to neuro Fuzzy and soft computing Fuzzy sets Basic definition and terminology Settheoretic operations Member function formulation and parameterization Fuzzy rules and fuzzy
reasoning Extension principle and fuzzy relations Fuzzy if then rules Fuzzy reasoning Fuzzy
inference systems Mamdani fuzzy models Sugeno fuzzy models Tsukamoto fuzzy models Input
space partitioning and fuzzy modeling.
UNIT II
OPTIMIZATION
9
Derivative based optimization Descent methods The method of steepest descent Classical newtons
method Step size determination Derivative free optimization Genetic algorithms Simulated
annealing Random search Downhill simplex search.
UNIT III
NEURAL NETWORKS
9
Supervised learning neural networks Perceptrons Adaline Backpropagation mutilayer perceptrons
Radial basis function networks Unsupervised learning neural networks Competitive learning networks
Kohonen self organizing networks Learning vector quantization Hebbian learning.
UNIT IV
9
Adaptive neuro fuzzy inference systems Architecture Hybrid learning algorithm Learning methods
that cross fertilize ANFIS and RBFN Coactive neuro fuzzy modeling Framework neuron functions for
adaptive networks Neuro fuzzy spectrum.
UNIT V
APPLICATIONS OF COMPUTATIONAL INTELLIGENCE
9
Printed character recognition Inverse kinematics problems Automobile fuel efficiency prediction Soft
computing for color recipe prediction.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOK:
Sl.No.
1.
Author(s)
Jang J S R
Sun C T
Mizutani E
Title of the Book

Computing
535
Publisher
Prentice Hall India
Year of
Publication
2009
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
1.
Timothy J Ross
2.
Davis E Goldberg
3.
Eberhart R
Simpson P
Dobbins R
Title of the Book

Fuzzy Logic with
Genetic Algorithms: Search
Optimization and Machine
Learning
Computational Intelligence
PC Tools
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Tata McGraw Hill
2011
Addison Wesley
2002
AP Professional
Boston
2004
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.softcomputing.net/tutorial.html
http://www.wsc12.softcomputing.org/tutorials.html
http://www.soft computing.de/jin.html
http://www.soft computing.de/ieee_ecidue.html
http://www.softcomputing.tripod.com/pub.html
12P012

3
OBJECTIVES:
To train in the fundamentals of software project Management and various steps.
To impart the steps involved in the evaluating of a project.
To learn the concept of software project analysis and activity planning.
To understand the concepts of monitoring and control software project.
To know the concepts of organizational behaviors.
OUTCOMES:
analyze the activities involved in software project management and stepwise project planning.
carryout the cost benefit analysis for a project.
design activity plan for estimating the duration of a project.
develop steps involved the progress of the project using continual monitoring report which
includes weekly time sheet, activity assessment sheet.
implements the concepts of organizational behaviors.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO SOFTWARE PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Project definition Contract management Activities covered by software
management Overview of project planning Stepwise project planning.
9
project
UNIT II
PROJECT EVALUATION
9
Strategic assessment Technical assessment Cost benefit analysis Cash flow forecasting Cost Benefit
evaluation techniques Risk evaluation.
UNIT III
ACTIVITY PLANNING
9
Objectives Project schedule Sequencing and scheduling activities Network
planning models Forward pass Backward pass Activity float Shortening project
duration Activity on arrow networks Risk management Nature of risk Types of risk Managing risk
Hazard identification Hazard analysis Risk planning and control.
UNIT IV
MONITORING AND CONTROL
9
Creating framework Collecting the data Visualizing progress Cost monitoring
Earned value Prioritizing monitoring Getting project back to target Change
control Managing contracts Introduction Types of contract Stages in contract
placement Typical terms of a contract Contract management Acceptance.
536
UNIT V
MANAGING PEOPLE AND ORGANIZING TEAMS
9
Introduction Understanding behavior Organizational behaviour A background
Selecting the right person for the job Instruction in the best methods Motivation The oldman
Hackman job characteristics model Working in groups Becoming a team Decision making
Leadership Organizational structures Stress Health and safety Case studies.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOK:
Sl.No.
1.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Tata McGraw Hill
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Ramesh
Gopalaswamy
Royce
Managing Global Projects
Tata McGraw Hill
Jalote
Software Project Management in

Practice
Pearson Education
Pvt. Ltd
Pearson Education
Pvt. Ltd
Bob Hughes
Mikecotterell
Year of
Publication
2011
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
1.
2.
3.
Year of
Publication
2009
2013
2002
WEB URLs:
1. http://www.at web1.comp.glam.ac.uk/staff/dwfarthi/projman.htm
2. http://www.projectminds.com/
3. http://www.searchcio.bitpipe.com/tlist/Software Project Management.html
4. http://www.phindia.com/rajibmall/chapters/LECTURE12.ppt
5.http://www.forum.jntuworld.com/showthread.php?3989-Software-Project-management-(SPM)Notes
12P013
MAINFRAME COMPUTING
3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the basics and operating mechanisms of mainframe systems.
To learn the various features of Z/OS.
To know the basic syntax rules and a few basic concepts of JCL.
To understand the structure and execution mechanism of COBOL Programming.
To understand the basic concepts of DB2.
OUTCOMES:
analyze the classification of computers and concepts of address space.
develop the Z- operating system and its features.
implement the job control language.
basic knowledge for COBOL program.
design the mainframe application development.
UNIT I
MAINFRAME HARDWARE, OS AND TERMINOLOGY
9
Overview of computer architecture Classification of computers Micro, mini, mainframes and super
computer Mainframe computer Key features Benefits Evolution of mainframes Different
hardware systems Operating systems on mainframes Batch processing versus online processing
Mainframe operating system Evolution Concepts of address space Buffer management Virtual
storage Paging Swapping Dataset management in mainframes.
537
UNIT II
Z/OS AND ITS FEATURES
9
Z operating system (Z/OS) Virtual storage Paging process Storage managers Program execution
modes Address space Multiple virtual system(MVS) MVS address space Z/OS address space
Dataset Sequential and partial dataset Direct access storage(DASD) Access methods Record
formats Introduction to virtual storage access methods (VSAM) Catalog VTOC.
UNIT III
INTRODUCTION TO JCL
7
Introduction to job control language Job processing Structure of JCL statements Various statements in
JCL JOB statement EXEC statement DD statement JCL procedures and IBM utility programs.
UNIT IV
COBOL PROGRAMMING
10
Introduction History Evolution and features COBOL program structure Steps in executing COBOL
Language fundamentals divisions Sections Paragraphs Sections Sentences and statements
Character set Literals Words Figurative constants Rules for forming user defined words COBOL
coding sheet Data division Data names level numbers PIC and VALUE clause REDEFINES
RENAMES and USAGE clause Procedure division Input/output verbs INITIALIZE VERB Data
movement verbs Arithmetic verbs Sequence control verbs File processing Field Physical/logical
records File File organization(sequential, indexed and relative) and access mode FILE CONTROL
paragraph FILE SECTION File operations File handling verbs OPEN READ WRITE
REWRITE CLOSE Table processing Definition declaration Accessing elements Subscript and
index SET statement SEARCH verb SEARCH ALL verb Comparison Miscellaneous verbs
COPY CALL SORT MERGE STRING UNSTRING verbs.
UNIT V
OVERVIEW OF DB2 AND MAINFRAME APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT

GUIDELINES
10
Introduction to DB2 System service component Database service component Looking service
component Distributed data facility services component Stored procedure component Catalogs and
optimizer DB2 objects and data types DB2 objects hierarchy Storage groups Database Table
space Table Index Clustered index Synonyms and aliases Views Data types DB2 SQL
programming Types of SQL statements DCL DDL DML SPUFI utility Embedded SQL
programming Host variable DECLGEN utility SQLCA Single/multiple row manipulation Cursors
Scrollable cursors COBOL coding standards Relation between a COBOL file handling program and
JCL Different types of ABEND codes COBOL DB2 program precompilation DBRM (Database
Request Module) Application plan/packages Program execution methods(EDIT JCL Foreground and
background modes).
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Nancy stern
Robert A Stern
Structured COBOL Programming
John Wiley and

sons
2011
2.
Craig S Mullins
DB2 Developers Guide
Sams
2004
IBM Manual : DB2 SQL Reference

IBM Manual: DB2 application Programming and SQL guide
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
1.
Author(s)
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Wiley India dream

tech
2002
Title of the Book
Gary Deward Brown JCL Programming Bible (with z/OS)
COBOL Language Reference IBM Redbook

COBOL Programming Guide IBM Redbook
538
WEB URLs:
1. http://www.ibm.com/support/docview.wss?uid=pub1sa22759706
2. http://www.publibz.boulder.ibm.com/cgibin/bookmgr_os390/books/iea2b600/CCONTENTS.
3. http://www.publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/db2v71uw/index.jsp
4. http://www.princeton.edu/~achaney/tmve/.../Mainframe_computer.html
5. http://www.mainframegurukul.com/ibm/what is/mainframe computer.html
12P014
ENTERPRISE APPLICATIONS
3
OBJECTIVES:
To describe the life cycle methodologies of enterprise application.
To study the business modeling and non functional requirements.
To explore the enterprise architecture and data representations.
To learn the construction maps and code analysis concepts.
To evaluate the application using different testing methodologies.
OUTCOMES:
design enterprise application architecture.
identify different views and viewpoints of enterprise.
implement enterprise applications for various organizations.
analyze the user requirements and develop use case diagrams.
implement testing methodologies for real time applications
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO ENTERPRISE APPLICATIONS
6
Introduction to enterprise applications and its types Software engineering methodologies Life cycle of
raising an enterprise application Introduction to skills required to build an enterprise application Key
determinant of successful enterprise applications Measuring the success of enterprise applications.
UNIT II
ENTERPRISE ANALYSIS
9
Inception of enterprise applications Enterprise analysis Business modeling Requirements elicitation
Use case modeling Prototyping Non functional requirements Requirements validation Planning and
estimation.
UNIT III
ENTERPRISE ARCHITECTURE
12
Concept of architecture Views and viewpoints Enterprise architecture Logical architecture
Technical architecture Design Different technical layers Best practices Data architecture and design
Relational XML and other structured data representations Infrastructure architecture and design
elements Networking Internetworking and communication protocols IT hardware and software
Middleware Policies for infrastructure management Deployment strategy Documentation of
application architecture and design.
UNIT IV
CONSTRUCTION OF ENTERPRISE APPLICATIONS
9
Construction readiness of enterprise applications Defining a construction plan Defining a package
structure Setting up a configuration management plan Setting up a development environment
Introduction to the concept of software construction maps Construction of technical solution layers
Methodologies of code review Static code analysis Build and testing Dynamic code analysis Code
profiling and code coverage.
UNIT V
TESTING
9
Types and methods of testing an enterprise application Testing levels and approaches Testing
environments Integration testing Performance testing Penetration testing Usability testing
Globalization testing and interface testing User acceptance testing Rolling out an enterprise application.
TOTAL: 45
539
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
Anubhav Pradhan
Satheesh B Nanjappa
Senthil K Nallasamy
Veerakumar Esakimuthu
2.
Brett McLaughlin
Raising Enterprise
Applications A Software
Engineering Perspective
Building Java Enterprise
Applications
Publisher
Year of
Publication
John Wiley
2009
OReilly
2002
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Soren Lauesen
Software Requirements
Styles & Techniques
Addison Wesley
Professional
2002
2.
Brian Berenbac Daniel J

Paulish Juergen
Kazmeier
Arnold Rudorfer
Software Systems
Requirements Engineering:
In Practice
McGraw Hill/Osborne
Media
2009
3.
Vasudeva Varma
Pearson Education
2009
4.
Naresh Chauhan
Oxford University
Press
2010
Software Architecture A
Case Based Approach
Software Testing Principles
and Practices
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.java.sun.com/blueprints/guidelines/designing_enterprise_applications_2e/
http://www.brahms.st.informatik.tu darmstadt.de/ead12
http://www.cis.ait.asia/course_offerings/49/lecture_notes
http://www.cs.colorado.edu/~kena/classes/7818/f06/lectures/05
http://www.softwaretestingmentor.com/types of testing/globalization testing/
12P015
BUSINESS INTELLIGENCE
3
OBJECTIVES:
To learn the BI infrastructure components.
To understand the need for data integration.
To identify the goal and primary task of multidimensional modeling.
To know in detail about the enterprise reporting.
To study the metrics for business applications.
OUTCOMES:
identify the components of BI.
implement data integration using SSIS.
perform multidimensional modeling.
design enterprise report using SSRS.
implement real time business scenario.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO BUSINESS INTELLIGENCE
4
Introduction to OLTP and OLAP BI definitions and concepts Business applications of BI BI
framework Role of data warehousing in BI BI infrastructure components BI Process BI technology
BI roles and responsibilities.
540
UNIT II
12
integration approaches Introduction to ETL using SSIS Introduction to data quality Data profiling
concepts and applications.
UNIT III
6
Introduction to data and dimension modeling Multidimensional data model ER modeling versus
multidimensional modeling Concepts of dimensions Facts Cubes Attribute Hierarchies Star and
snowflake schema Introduction to business metrics and KPIs Creating cubes using SSAS.
UNIT IV
BASICS OF ENTERPRISE REPORTING
12
Introduction to enterprise reporting Concepts of dashboards Balanced scorecards Introduction to
SSRS Architecture Enterprise reporting using SSRS.
UNIT V
APPLICATIONS
Case studies Real time business scenarios Identify the metrics Indicators Business goals.
11
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOK:
Sl.No.
1.
Author(s)
David Loshin
Title of the Book

Publisher
Year of Publication
Morgan Kaufmann
Publishers
2012
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
Mike Biere
For The Enterprise
2.
Lynn Langit
Foundations of SQL
Server 2005 Business
Intelligence
Publisher
Prentice Hall
Apress
Year of
Publication
2003
2007
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.learnbi.com
http://www.techrepublic.com
http://www.nepbusinessdirectory.com
http://www.cio.com / Applications /Business Intelligence (BI)/ Tutorial
http://www.assystinternational.com
12P016
INFORMATION STORAGE AND MANAGEMENT

3
OBJECTIVES:
To evaluate storage architectures and key data center elements.
To understand physical and logical components of a storage infrastructure.
To describe storage networking technologies such as FC SAN, IP SAN.
To understand and articulate business continuity solutions.
To explore key characteristics, services, deployment models, and infrastructure components.
OUTCOMES:
describe leading storage technologies that provides cost effective IT solutions.
design, analyze and manage clusters of resources.
identify and install various storage virtualization technologies.
541
develop project teams to install, administer and upgrade popular storage solutions based on the
features.
analyze advanced security issues and technologies to store and secure the database.
UNIT I
STORAGE SYSTEMS
9
The value of information and data creation to a business Overview of Data Center infrastructure elements
and their requirements Role of ILM strategy Physical and logical components of host, connectivity
and storages Disk drive architecture and performance RAID , Different RAID levels ( RAID
0,1,3,5,0+1/1+0 and 6) Overview of Intelligent Storage System (ISS) Components of ISS
Implementation of ISS as storage arrays.
UNIT II
STORAGE NETWORKING TECHNOLOGIES
9
Das Implementation Overview of SCSI Architecture, Components, Topologies : FC, SCAN , NAS ,IPSAN Overview of CAS Object based storage system Application: long term archiving solution .
UNIT III
VIRTUALIZATION
9
Block level and File level storage virtualization technologies processes Overview of emerging
technologies: cloud storage Virtual Provisioning Unified storage FCOE FAST.
UNIT IV
BUSINESS CONTINUITY
9
Information Availability Measurement Downtime: causes consequences RTO RPO Storage
infrastructure: Single point of failure and solution Backup/Recovery: Purpose, Architecture, Topologies
Local and remote replication: Technologies, Operation Emerging Technologies: Duplication, Offsite
Backup.
UNIT V
STORAGE SECURITY AND MANAGEMENT
9
Introduction to information security Critical security attributes for information system describe the
elements of a shared storage model and security extensions Define storage security domains List and
analyze the common threats in each domain Identify different virtualization technologies Block level
and file level virtualization technologies.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
S.No.
Author(s) Name
1.
Robert Spalding
2.
EMC Corporation
Title of the Book
Publisher
Storage Networks: The

Complete Reference
Information storage and
Management
Tata McGraw Hill

Willey
Year of
Publication
2003
2006
REFERENCE BOOKS:
S.No.
Author(s) Name
Title of the Book
Publisher
1.
Marc Farley
Building Storage Networks
Tata McGraw Hill
2.
Meeta Gupta
3.
Thejendra B S
Storage Area Network

Fundamentals
Disaster
Recovery
Business Continuity
Pearson Education
Limited
Shroff
and
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.emc.com
http://www.education.emc.com/ismbook
http://www.cse.unr.edu/~mgunes/cpe401/cpe401sp12/lect15_cloud.ppt
http://www.siglpu.files.wordpress.com/2010/09/ism_book_abridged.pdf
http://www.metalab.uniten.edu.my/~./ezanee/CSNB393/notes/Chapter%201.ppt
542
Year of
Publication
2001
2002
2006
12P017
ADVANCED OPERATING SYSTEMS

3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the basics of Distributed operating systems.
To learn the various features Distributed file systems.
To study the basic concepts of fault tolerance.
To know the various Protection and security mechanism.
To understand the basics of Database operating systems.
OUTCOMES:
understand various aspects of Distributed operating systems.
analyze the performance of Distributed file systems.
analyze the basic knowledge for fault tolerance.
analyze different security technique.
design concurrent control algorithms edge for an applications.
UNIT I
DISTRIBUTED OPERATING SYSTEMS
9
Distributed operating systems Architectures of distributed systems Distributed mutual exclusion
Distributed deadlock detection Agreement protocols.
UNIT II
DISTRIBUTED FILE SYSTEMS
9
Distributed resource management Distributed file systems Distributed shared memory Distributed
scheduling.
UNIT III
FAULT TOLERANCE
Failure recovery and fault tolerance Case study AMOEBA.
UNIT IV
SECURITY
9
Protection and security Resource security and protection Access and flow control Multiprocessor
operating systems Multiprocessor system architectures Multiprocessor operating systems.
UNIT V
DATABASE OPERATING SYSTEMS
9
Database operating systems Introduction to database operating systems Concurrency control
Theoretical aspects Concurrency control algorithms.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
1.
2.
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Mukesh Singhal
Niranjan G
Shivaratri
Advanced Concepts in
Operating Systems Distributed
Database and Multiprocessor
Operating Systems
Tata McGraw Hill
2001
Andrew S Tanenbaum
Modern Operating Systems
Prentice Hall India
2009
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Author(s)
REFERENCE BOOK:
Sl.No.
1.
Author(s)
Mary S Gorman
Todd S Stubbs
Title of the Book

Introduction to Operating
Systems A survey course
543
Course
Technology
2003
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.cs.gsu.edu/~cscyqz/courses/aos/aoslectures.html
http://www.gost.isi.edu/555/fall2012/lectures/usc csci555 f12 part1.pdf
http://www.slideshare.net/anirudhanchikku/advanced operating system lecture notes
http://www.gama.vtu.lt/biblioteka/Operating_systems/Operating_systems.pdf
http://www.ebookmaterials.blogspot.in/2011/07/advanced operating systems lecturer.html
12P018
DATA SCIENCE AND BIG DATA ANALYSIS

3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the practical foundation level training.
To establish a baseline of skills to enhance additional training.
To introduce big data analytics technology and tools.
To impart knowledge on statistical data analysis techniques utilized in business decision
making.
To know about the cutting edge tools and technologies to analyze Big Data.
OUTCOMES:
develop the appropriate modeling technique, build the model, check validity of the model.
design the various project management technique.
develop program using R for analysis of data.
analyze the testing strategies and to choose the best strategy according to the data input.
apply ethical practices and make well reasoned ethical business.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO BIG DATA ANALYTICS
9
Big data overview State of the practice of analytics Big data analytics in industry verticals Overview
of data analytics lifecycle Discovery Data preparation Model planning Model building
Communicating results Findings Operationalizing.
UNIT II
USING R FOR INITIAL ANALYSIS OF THE DATA
9
Using R Initial Exploration: Introduction Analysis of the Data Using R Basic Data Visualization basic
data analytics Reporting and basic data visualization techniques Basic analytics methods: distributions
Statistical tests Summary operations Statistically sound vs. statistically significant results Null and
alternative hypothesis.
UNIT III
ADVANCED ANALYTICS AND STATISTICAL MODELING FOR BIG DATA

THEORY AND METHODS
9
Analytic needs Initial hypotheses The data's structure and volume Commonly used methods:
Analytics solutions Algorithms and the technical foundations Environment (use case) that provide the
most value diagnostic methods to validate the models created Use R and in database analytical functions
to fit Score and evaluate models.
UNIT IV

TECHNOLOGY AND TOOLS
9
Analytics on unstructured data using Map Reduce Programming paradigm Hadoop HDFS HIVE
PIG Other products in the Hadoop ecosystem for unstructured data analytics Effectively use advanced
SQL functions Greenplum extensions in database analytics MAD lib to solve analytics problems indatabase.
UNIT V
ENDGAME OPERATIONALIZING AN ANALYTICS PROJECT
9
Three tasks to operationalize an analytics project Four deliverables of an analytics lifecycle project
Framework for creating final presentations Evaluate a data visualization and ways to improve it.
TOTAL: 45
544
TEXT BOOK:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Soumendra Mohanty
Title of the Book

Analytics in Practice
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Tata McGraw Hill
2011
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
1.
Ken W Collier
2.
Donald Miner
Title of the Book

Agile Analytics: A Value
Driven Approach to
Business Intelligence and
Data Warehousing
MapReduce Design
Patterns
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Pearson Education
2012
O' Reilly
2012
WEB URLs:
1. http://www.slideshare.net/larsga/introduction-to- big- datamachine-learning
2. http://www.cran.r project.org/doc/contrib/usingR.pdf
3. http://www.kdnuggets.com/.../statistical-community-big data disconnect discus.
4. http://www.tdwi.org/.../the intersection of big data and advanced analytics.
5. http://www.training.gte india.com/index.php?option=com_training&view.
12P019
GREEN COMPUTING
3
OBJECTIVES:
To learn the fundamental knowledge about green computing.
To get an idea about assets and business process management.
To know the knowledge about the roles and framework.
To understand the technologies, future and compliance of green computing.
To understand real time applications of green computing.
OUTCOMES:
analyze the fundamentals of green computing.
demonstrate the green computing assets and modeling.
apply the roles and framework for green computing.
analyze the green computing technologies, future and compliance.
implement green computing for an application.
UNIT I
FUNDAMENTALS
9
Green IT Fundamentals: Business, IT, and the environment Green computing: carbon foot print, scoop on
power Green IT strategies: Drivers, Dimensions, and goals Environmentally responsible business:
Policies, Practices, and metrics.
UNIT II
GREEN ASSETS AND MODELING
9
Green Assets: Buildings, Data centers, Networks, and devices Green business process management:
Modeling, Optimization, and collaboration Green enterprise architecture Environmental intelligence
Green supply chains Green information systems: Design and development models.
UNIT III
GRID FRAMEWORK
9
Virtualizing of IT systems Role of electric utilities, Telecommuting, teleconferencing and teleporting
Materials recycling Best ways for green PC Green data center Green grid framework.
545
UNIT IV
GREEN COMPLIANCE
9
Socio cultural aspects of Green IT Green enterprise transformation roadmap Green compliance:
Protocols, Standards, and audits Emergent carbon issues: Technologies and future.
UNIT V
CASE STUDIES
9
CASE STUDIES Applying green IT strategies and applications to a home, Hospital, Packaging industry
and Telecom Sector.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOK:
Sl.No.
1.
Author(s) Name
Bhuvan
Unhelkar
Title of the Book

Green IT Strategies and
Applications Using
Environmental
Intelligence
Year of
Publication
Publisher
CRC Press
2011
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
1.
Author(s) Name
Alin Gales
Michael Schaefer
Mike Ebbers
John Lamb
2.
Title of the Book
Year of
Publication
Publisher
Green Data Center: steps for

the Journey
IBM rebook
The Greening of IT
Pearson Education
2011
2009
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http:// www.ncomputing.com/company/green computing

http:// www.citi.umass.edu/ghpc/GHPCC green computing
http://www.computerweekly.com
http://www.techopedia.com
http://www.cs.grinnell.edu
12P020
SERVICE ORIENTED ARCHITECTURE

3
OBJECTIVES:
To know the key distinctions for Service Oriented Architecture (SOA).
To understand the Web Services Security Frame.
To know the key security requirements.
To understand the key principles and patterns for building secure services
To understand the web services security and transaction management.
OUTCOMES:
design various web services.
demonstrate skills in designing and developing the web services.
describe real world scenarios involving web services
describe the need for a platform independent service contract (WSDL)
describe the need for a platform independent messaging format (SOAP).
UNIT I
FUNDAMENTALS OF SOA
9
Introduction Defining SOA Evolution of SOA Service Oriented Enterprise Comparing SOA to
client-server and distributed internet architectures Basic SOA architecture concepts Key service
characteristics Technical benefits Business benefits.
546
UNIT II
COMBINING SOA AND WEB SERVICES
9
Web services Service descriptions Messaging with SOAP Message exchange patterns Web service
platform Service contract Service level data model Service Discovery Service level security
Service Level Interaction Patterns Atomic and composite services Service enabling legacy system
Enterprise service bus pattern.
UNIT III
MULTI CHANNEL ACCESS AND WEB SERVICES COMPOSITION
9
SOA for Multi-Channel access Business benefits Tiers Business process management Web service
composition BPEL RESTFUL Services Comparison of BPEL and RESTFUL services.
UNIT IV
JAVA WEB SERVICES
9
SOA support in J2EE Java API for XML- based web services (JAX-WS) Java architecture for XML
binding (JAXB) Java API for XML Registries(JAXR) Java API for XML based RPC(JAX-RPC)
Web Services interoperability SOA support in .NET ASP.NET web services Case Studies Web
Services Enhancements (WSE).
UNIT V
WEB SERVICES SECURITY AND TRANSACTION
9
Meta data management Advanced messaging Addressing Reliable messaging Policies WS
Policy Security Notification and even ting Transaction management.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOK:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Eric Newcomer
Lomow
1.
Title of the Book

Understanding SOA with Web
Services
Publisher
Pearson Education
Year of
Publication
2005
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
1.
JamesMcGovern
Sameer Tyagi
Michael E Stevens
Sunil Mathew
Java Web
Services Architecture
Elsevier
2.
Thomas Erl
Pearson Education
3.
Sandeep Chatterjee
James Webber
Developing Enterprise Web

Services
Pearson Education
Year of
Publication
2003
2005
2005
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.contrib.andrew.cmu.edu/~mm6/95 843/
http://www.sunset.usc.edu/classes/cs510_2011
http://www.sunset.usc.edu/classes/cs510_2011/ECs_2011/USC_SOA_1102_11_CS510.pdf
http://www.comp.nus.edu.sg/~seer/book/2e/Ch10.%20Service%20Oriented%20Architecture.pdf
http://www.nxstud.blogspot.in/2012/06/it2401-service-oriented-architecture_13.html
547
548
B.TECH: INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY
TOTAL CREDITS: 187

SEMESTER I
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Credits
Maximum Marks
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
12O101
3.5
40
60
100
12F102
40
60
100
12O103
Technical English
3.5
40
60
100
12O104
C Programming - I
Engineering
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
12F105
12F106
PRACTICAL
12O111
1.5
40
60
100
12G112
Physics Laboratory
1.5
40
60
100
12F113
2.5
40
60
100
12G114
1.5
40
60
100
20
12
27
TOTAL
SEMESTER II
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Credits
Maximum Marks
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
12O203

Series
Engineering
12O204
C Programming - II
40
60
100
12F205
40
60
100
12F206
3.5
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
18
14
26
12O201
12H202
3.5
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
PRACTICAL
12O211
12F212
12H213
12F214
Laboratory
Laboratory
TOTAL

549
SEMESTER III
Course
Code
Course Title
THEORY
12F301
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Credits
Maximum Marks
CIA
ESE
Total
3.5
40
60
100
12F302
40
60
100
12F303
System Software
40
60
100
12F304
Digital Systems Design
40
60
100
12F305
Data Structures - I
40
60
100
12F306
40
60
100
PRACTICAL
12F311
Digital Laboratory
1.5
40
60
100
12F312
Data Structures Laboratory - I

Laboratory
TOTAL
1.5
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
18
23
12F313
SEMESTER IV
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Credits
Maximum Marks
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
12F401
12F402
12F403
12F404
12F405
12F406
Probability and Queueing

Theory
Data Structures - II
Microprocessors and
Microcontrollers
Operating Systems
Communication
3.5
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
3.5
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
18
12
25
PRACTICAL
12F411
12F412
12F413
12F414
Data Structures Laboratory - II

Laboratory
Microprocessors and
TOTAL

550
SEMESTER V
Course
Code
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Course Title
Credits
Maximum Marks
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
12F501
40
60
100
12F502
Java Programming
40
60
100
12F503
100
100
12F504
Computer Networks
40
60
100
12F505
Information Coding Techniques

Data Warehousing and Data
Mining
40
60
100
40
60
100
1.5
100
100
1.5
40
60
100
12F513
Soft Skills
Laboratory
1.5
40
60
100
12F514
1.5
40
60
100
18
14
25
12F506
PRACTICAL
12O511
12F512
TOTAL
SEMESTER VI
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Credits
Maximum Marks
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
12F601
12F602
12F603

Engineering Ethics
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
12F605
Component Based Technology

Algorithms
Mobile Computing
3.5
40
60
100
12Fxxx
Elective I
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
1.5
100
100
18
23
12F604
PRACTICAL
12F611
12F612
12F651

Laboratory
Component Based Technology
Laboratory
Mini Project
TOTAL

551
SEMESTER VII
Course
Code
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Course Title
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
12F703
Object Oriented Analysis and

Design
Computer Graphics and
Multimedia
Information Security
12F704
40
60
100
12F705
3.5
40
60
100
12Fxxx
Elective II
40
60
100
12F701
12F702
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
PRACTICAL
12F711
1.5
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
12F721
Case Tools Laboratory

Computer Graphics And
Multimedia Laboratory
Comprehension
12F751
1.5
100
100
TOTAL
18
23
12F712
SEMESTER VIII
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Credits
Maximum Marks
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
12F801
High Speed Networks
40
60
100
12Fxxx
Elective III
40
60
100
12Fxxx
Elective IV
40
60
100
12
40
60
100
12
15
PRACTICAL
12F851

TOTAL

552
LIST OF ELECTIVES
Course Code
Course Title
12F001
12F002
Web Programming
12F003
Embedded Systems
12F004
12F005
12F006
Data Science and Big data Analysis
12F007
Mainframe Computing
12F008
Backup Recovery Systems and Architecture
12F009
12F010
Software Quality Assurance and Testing
12F011
12F012
12F013
12F014
Ethical Hacking
12F015
Engineering Ethics
12F016
Middleware Technologies
12F017
Wireless Networks
12F018
Green Computing
12F019
Cloud Infrastructure and Services
12F020
Cloud Computing
553
SEMESTER V
12P604/12F501
UNIX AND SHELL PROGRAMMING
(Common to CSE/IT)
vide Computer Science Engineering
12P502/12F502
JAVA PROGRAMMING
(Common to CSE/IT)
12P503/12F503
SOFTWARE ENGINEERING
(Common to CSE/IT)
12L604/12T604/12E604/12N604/12P504/12F504
COMPUTER NETWORKS
12F505
INFORMATION CODING TECHNIQUES

3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the errorcontrol coding.
To understand encoding and decoding of digital data streams.
To introduce methods for the generation of these codes and their decoding techniques.
To know about the compression and decompression techniques.
To impart knowledge on the concepts of multimedia communication.
OUTCOMES:
analyze the principles of data compression.
compute entropy and mutual information of random variables.
implement and analyze basic coding and compression algorithms.
develop the key theorems that quantify essential limitations on compression.
apply the basic concepts regarding communications over noisy channels.
UNIT I
INFORMATION ENTROPY FUNDAMENTALS
9
Uncertainty Information and entropy Source coding theorem Huffman coding Shannon Fano coding
Discrete memory less channels Channel capacity Channel coding theorem Channel capacity
theorem.
UNIT II
DATA AND VOICE CODING
9
Differential pulse code modulation Adaptive differential pulse code modulation Adaptive sub-band
coding Delta modulation Adaptive delta modulation Coding of speech signal at low bit rates
Vocoders and LPC.
UNIT III
ERROR CONTROL CODING
9
Linear block codes Syndrome decoding Minimum distance consideration Cyclic codes Generator
polynomial Parity check polynomial Encoder for cyclic codes Calculation of syndrome
Convolutional codes.
554
UNIT IV
COMPRESSION TECHNIQUES
9
Principles Text compression Static Huffman coding Dynamic Huffman coding Arithmetic coding
Image compression Graphics interchange format Tagged image file format Digitized documents
Introduction to JPEG standards.
UNIT V
AUDIO AND VIDEO CODING
9
Linear predictive coding Code excited LPC Perceptual coding MPEG audio coders Dolby audio
coders Video compression Principles Introduction to H.261 and MPEG video standards.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Simon Haykin
John Wiley and Sons
2009
Bose R
Information Theory, Coding

and Crptography
TMH Edition
2007
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Simon Haykin
Wiley India Pvt. Ltd
2013
Mark Nelson
Data Compression Book
BPB Publication
2008
David Salomon
A Concise Introduction To
Data Compression
Springer-Verlag
London Ltd
2008
Arijit Saha
Nilotpal Manna
Surajith Mandal
Information Theory, Coding

and Cryptography
Pearson Education
2013
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.nprcet.org/e%20content/it/ICT.pdf
http://www.chamilo2.grenet.fr/inp/courses/PHELMAA3SIC5PMSCSF0/document/M2R_SIPT/Inf
o_ThChIIIIII.pdf
http://www.vidyarthiplus.com/vp/Thread-IT2302-Information-Theory-and-Coding-NPR-LectureNotes#.UzKA1fs0qho
http://www.haverford.edu/cmsc/slindell/Classes/235/235.html
http://www.cl.cam.ac.uk/teaching/0809/InfoTheory/InfoTheoryLectures.pdf
12P506/12F506

(Common to CSE/IT)
vide Computer Science and Engineering
12O511
SOFT SKILLS

555
12P612/12F512
UNIX AND SHELL PROGRAMMING LABORATORY

(Common to CSE/IT)
12P513 /12F513
JAVA PROGRAMMING LABORATORY
(Common to CSE/IT)
12L613/12T613/12P514/12F514
SEMESTER VI
ENGINEERING ETHICS
12P602/12F602
ADVANCED JAVA PROGRAMMING

(Common to CSE/IT)
12F603
COMPONENT BASED TECHNOLOGY

3
OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge on developing Software components using IDE's.
To understand the use of CORBA and Java technologies.
To understand modern applications of distributed and decentralized enterprise platforms.
To identify the use of component technologies.
OUTCOMES:
apply the basics of software component and its properties.
develop the Java based component technologies.
know the component Framework and development.
design the .NET based Component technologies.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Software Components Objects Fundamental properties of Component technology Modules
Interfaces Callbacks Directory services Component architecture Components and middleware.
UNIT II
JAVA BASED COMPONENT TECHNOLOGIES
9
Threads Java Beans Events and connections Properties Introspection JAR files Reflection
Object serialization Enterprise Java Beans Distributed object models RMI and RMI-IIOP.
556
UNIT III
CORBA COMPONENT TECHNOLOGIES
9
Java and CORBA Interface Definition language Object request broker System object model
Portable object adapter CORBA services CORBA component model Containers Application server
Model driven architecture.
UNIT IV
.NET BASED COMPONENT TECHNOLOGIES
9
COM Distributed COM Object reuse Interfaces and versioning Dispatch interfaces Connectable
objects OLE containers and servers Active-X controls .NET components Assemblies Appdomains
Contexts Reflection Remoting
UNIT V
COMPONENT FRAMEWORKS AND DEVELOPMENT
9
Connectors Contexts EJB containers CLR contexts and channels Black box component framework
Directory objects Cross-development environment Component-oriented programming Component
design and implementation tools Testing tools Assembly tools.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book

Component Software:
Beyond Object-Oriented
Programming
Component Based
Technology
Clemens Szyperski
1
2
Sudha Sadasivam G
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Pearson Education
publishers
2011
Wiley India
2008
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No
1
Author(s)
Dale Rogerson
Ed Roman
Scott Ambler
Tyler jewell
Thoma Mowbray J
William Ruh A
2
3
Wayne Freeze S
Ash Rofail
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Inside Com Microsoft's

Component Object
Model
Dreamtech Press
2011
Mastering Enterprise
Java Beans
Wiley and Sons Inc.
2006
Inside CORBA
Pearson Education
2006
Visual Basic
Development Guide for
COM and COM+
BPB Publication
2006
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.ccs.neu.edu/home/lorenz/com3240.html
http://www.atp.nist.gov/press/9706cbs.html
http://www.componentsoftware.com
http://www.peterindia.net/ComponentOverview.html
http://www.jisc.ac.uk/uploaded_documents/Component%20Frameworks
12P505/12F604
DESIGN AND ANALYSIS OF ALGORITHMS

(Common to CSE/IT)
557
12F605
MOBILE COMPUTING
3
3.5
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the challenges of wireless communication and the solutions those are in use.
To study about various types of wireless data networks and wireless voice networks.
To realize the role of wireless protocols in shaping the future Internet.
To impart knowledge on mobile applications.
To introduce the enabling technologies of pervasive computing.
OUTCOMES:
implement the technologies behind mobile phones, smart phones, and tablets and mobile
computing.
analyze the use of mobile networking applications.
apply the concepts of mobile applications.
develop applications with secure Internet and mobile electronic transactions .
apply the knowledge of privacy and information security.
UNIT I
WIRELESS COMMUNICATION
9
Challenges of Wireless Transmission Multi-carrier modulation Spread Spectrum Satellite
Communication Broadcast systems Multiplexing FDMA TDMA and CDMA Cellular
organization of mobile telephone networks Operation of cellular networks Frequency Reuse
Tessellation Handoff - Capacity Improvement.
UNIT II
WIRELESS NETWORKS
9
IEEE 802.11 Wireless LAN Architecture Modes of Operation CSMA/CA and its variants Wireless
LAN security Bluetooth networks Generation of cellular networks Overview of GSM GPRS
Network Architecture and Operations UMTS and IMT 2000 Packet Switching Domain Core Network
Radio Access Network LTE Control Plane User Plane.
UNIT III
WIRELESS PROTOCOLS
9
Mobile IP Mobility features in IPv6 Proactive and reactive adhoc routing protocols DSDV DSR and
AODV Limitations of Traditional TCP in wireless networks TCP improvements for Wireless Networks
Indirect TCP Snoop TCP Mobile TCP Security issues in network layer and transport layer.
UNIT IV
MOBILE COMPUTING PLATFORM
9
PDA Device characteristics and Software components Smart Phone Convergence of Mobile devices
J2ME Modes Data store GUI support HTTP Connection Interface Push Registry Application
development using Android APIs Palm OS Architecture and Program Development Overview of other
mobile Operating Systems.
UNIT V
MOBILE INTERNET
9
WAP WAP Gateways WML Voice XML Mobile Messaging Multimedia Messaging Service
Synchronized Multimedia Integration Language Application Servers Internet portals Device
management Synchronization Models Communication to Servlet and Web Services Location aware
Mobile computing IP Multimedia Subsystem.
TOTAL: 45 +15
TEXT BOOK:
Sl.No.
1
Author(s)
Asoke Talukder
Hasan Ahmed
Rupa Yavagal
Title of the Book

Mobile Computing:
Technology, Applications and
Services Creation
558
Publisher
Mcgraw-Hill
Education
Year of
Publication
2010
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
William Stallings
Wireless Communication and

Networks
Jochen Schiller
Raj Kamal
Mobile Computing
Azzedine
Boukerche
Algorithms and Protocols for

Wireless, Mobile Ad Hoc Networks
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Pearson
Education
Pearson
Education
Oxford
University Press
2009
2009
2011
Wiley-Blackwell
2008
WEB URLs:
1. http://www.books.google.co.in/books/isbn=0070144575
2. http://www.courses.csail.mit.edu/6.885/spring06/notes.html
3. http://www.cgi.csc.liv.ac.uk/~trp/comp327.html
4 .http:// www.4shared.com/office/.../wireless_communication_and_net.html
5. http://www.icta.ufl.edu/projects/publications/InternetAgents.pdf
12P611/12F611
ADVANCED JAVA PROGRAMMING LABORATORY

(Common to CSE/IT)
12F612
COMPONENT BASED TECHNOLOGY LABORATORY

0
1.5
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the tools used for test automation.
To describe the software tool that meets the precise requirements.
To know the processes and quality system components.
To explain the documentation and effective presentation on software components.
OUTCOMES:
apply the input and deliverables of the design process.
analyze, test and automate the elements of software quality assurance.
apply the principles of software engineering for the design and implementation of software
systems.
develop software components using all the server side technologies.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. COM COMPONENT: Development of simple com components in VB and use them in
applications.
2. Development of simple component for converting the currency values using COM / .NET
3. ENTERPRISE JAVA BEANS: Deploying EJB for simple arithmetic operator.
4. RMI: Deploying RMI for client server applications.
5. Creation of DLL Using VB and Deploy it in Java
6. Naming Services In CORBA
7. DSI, DII in CORBA.
8. Inter ORB in Communication [IIOP, IOR] Jac ORB and Visi broker ORB
9. Study of J2EE Server.
10. Simple application using CORBA
559
12A651/12M651/12C651/12L651/12T651/12E651/12N651/12P651/12F651
MINI PROJECT
ELECTIVES
12F001
ADVANCED DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS

3
OBJECTIVES:
To know the modeling and design of databases.
To understand parallel and distributed databases and its applications.
To know the usage of advanced data models.
To understand complex queries.
To know object database.
OUTCOMES:
design relational databases and skills to optimize database performance in practice.
develop distributed database application.
write recursive queries.
design faster algorithms in solving practical database problems.
implement intelligent databases and various data models.
UNIT I
PARALLEL AND DISTRIBUTED DATABASES
9
Inter and Intra Query Parallelism Architecture Query evaluation Optimization Distributed
Architecture Storage Catalog Management Query Processing Transactions Recovery Large-scale
Data Analytics in the Internet Context Map Reduce Paradigm Run-time system for supporting scalable
and fault-tolerant execution paradigms: Pig Latin and Hive and parallel databases versus Map Reduce.
UNIT II
ACTIVE DATABASES
9
Syntax and Semantics (Starburst, Oracle, DB2) Taxonomy Applications Integrity Management
Workflow Management Business Rules Design Principles Properties Rule Modularization Rule
Debugging IDEA methodology Open Problems.
UNIT III
TEMPORAL AND OBJECT DATABASES
9
Overview Data types Associating Facts Temporal Query Language TSQL2 Time Ontology
Language Constructs Architecture Temporal Support Object Database and Change Management
Change of Schema Implementing Database Updates in O2 Benchmark Database Updates Performance
Evaluation.
UNIT IV
COMPLEX QUERIES AND REASONING
9
Logic of Query Languages Relational Calculi Recursive rules Syntax and semantics of Data log Fix
point semantics Implementation Rules and Recursion Rule rewriting methods Compilation and
Optimization Recursive Queries in SQL Open issues.
UNIT V
SPATIAL, TEXT AND MULTIMEDIA DATABASES
9
Traditional Indexing Methods (Secondary Keys, Spatial Access Methods) Text Retrieval Multimedia
Indexing 1D Time Series 2D Color images Sub pattern Matching Open Issues Uncertainties.
TOTAL: 45
560
TEXT BOOK:
Sl.No
Author (s)
Title of the Book
Elmasri R
Navathe S B
Fundamentals of Database
Systems
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Pearson Education
2011
Publisher
Year of
Publication
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
1.
2.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Henry F Korth
Sudharshan S
Hector Garcia Molina
Jeffrey D Ullman
Jennifer Widom
3.
Peter Rob
Corlos Coronel
Thomas M Connolly
Carolyn E Begg
Database System Concepts
McGraw Hill, 6th

Edition
2011
Database System
Implementation
Pearson Education
2012
Thompson Learning
Course Technology
2012
Pearson Education, 4th

Edition
2008
Database System Design,

Implementation and
Management
Database Systems: A
Practical Approach to
Design, Implementation
and Management
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.w3schools.com
http://www.blinkvid.com/video
http://www.learnerstv.com/course.php?cat=Computers
http://www.studyyaar.com/index.php/learning program/7 advanced database management
system
http://www.cs.uiuc.edu/class/fa06/cs511/schedule.html
12F002
WEB PROGRAMMING
3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the basic knowledge of .NET framework.
To learn the object oriented programming concepts in C#.
To know the applications of windows based programming.
To understand the advanced features of c# like serializing objects, reflection, multithreading.
To study the basics ADO.NET.
OUTCOMES:
develop simple .NET Framework application.
implement programs in object oriented programming in C#.
apply the windows based programming.
analyze the advanced features of C#.
implement the applications using ADO.NET.
561
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO .NET FRAMEWORK AND XML
9
Knowledge of .NET framework .NET features and .NET development platform Understanding
advantages of .NET framework Comparing .Net with Java and PHP, XML in .NET Framework.
UNIT II
INTRODUCTION TO C#
9
Objected oriented concepts using C# Language Review of object oriented programming Advanced
concepts in OOP Relationship Inheritance Abstract classes Polymorphism Object Oriented design
methodology Approach Best practices UML class diagrams Interface Common base class .NET
components Assemblies Appdomains Contexts Reflection Remoting.
UNIT III
SQL SERVER 2008
9
Design and develop Database using SQL Server 2008 Introduction to features and architecture of SQL
Server 2008 Introduction to Database Engine and storage Engine Creating Tables, Temporary tables,
and Integrity rules Coding in Batches Writing Stored Procedures/Functions Error Handling
Transaction in SQL server.
UNIT IV
ADO.NET
9
Data Access programming using ADO.NET Understanding data access in building internet applications
Concept of common data access programming model Using ADO.NET components for application
development Configuring and executing various objects Understanding connected and disconnected
models for data access.
UNIT V
DEVELOPING ASP.NET APPLICATIONS
9
Web Application Development using ASP.NET Review on HTML, CSS Basics of ASP.NET Page
Object and Dynamic Compilation Model ASP.NET controls Understand Data Binding and various Data
Sources in ASP.NET Understanding the creation of Master Pages and themes Understanding
configuration of web applications IIS configurations State management in ASP.NET.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publishing
John Sharp
Microsoft Visual C# 2005

Step by Step
Microsoft Press
2005
Andrew Troelsen
C# and the .NET Platform
Microsoft Press
2005
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Year of
Publishing
David Sceppa
Programming Microsoft
ADO.NET 2.0 Core Reference
Microsoft Press
2006
Doug Lowe
Joel Murach
Murachs ASP.NET 2.0

Up-graders guide
Mike Murach and

Associates Inc
2005
Bryan syverson
Joel Murach
Murachs SQLSERVER 2008

for developers
Mike Murach and

Associates Inc
2009
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Publisher
http://www.msdn2.microsoft.com/en-us/vstudio/default.aspx
http://www.c-sharpcorner.com/
http://www.gotdotnet.com/
http://www.microsoft.com/net
http://www.netfx3.com
562
12F003
EMBEDDED SYSTEMS
3
OBJECTIVES:
OUTCOMES:
UNIT I
10
techniques Architecture of embedded systems Introduction to ARM 7 instruction set Addressing
processor DSP features of ARM Core Digital signal controllers DSC differences with conventional
micro controllers.
UNIT II
8
SCI SPI Timing generation and measurements Analog interfacing and data acquisition hardware
Interrupts: Various C ISR declaration syntaxes Interrupt Vectors Priorities and Nesting Tick timer
interrupt as heart-beat of embedded system 7-Seg LED Segment-LCD Alphanumeric LCD Graphic
UNIT III
10
Assembly language and high level language C programming C program elements: Header and source
files and preprocessor directives Program elements: Macros and functions Program elements: Data
types Data structures Modifiers Statements Loops and pointers Queues Stacks Lists and
ordered lists Embedded programming in C++ C program compiler and cross compiler Source code
UNIT IV
REAL TIME CONCEPTS
10
Tasks/Threads/Process Multitasking Task scheduling Task management Inter-task communication
and synchronization Device drivers How to choose an RTOS.
UNIT V
7
Program modelling tools Testing and debugging methodologies Applications of embedded Systems:
case studies Consumer and Home Industrial and automation Medical Robotics Access control
systems (Smart cards, RFIDs, Finger Scan)
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Year of
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Publication
Embedded Systems
Tata McGraw Hill,
1.
Rajkamal
2008
2nd Edition
and Design
563
2.
Shibu K V
Introduction to Embedded
Systems
Tata Mc Graw Hill
2009
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
Sriram V Iyer Embedded Realtime Systems

Pankaj Gupta Programming
2.
Frank Vahid
3.
Peter
Marwedel
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Tata McGraw Hill,

1st Edition
2008
Embedded System design - A

unified hardware/software
introduction

3rd Edition
2009
Embedded system design
Springer, 2nd Edition
2010
WEB URLs:
New_index1.html.
12F004
ENTERPRISE APPLICATIONS
3
OBJECTIVES:
To describe the life cycle methodologies of enterprise application.
To study the business modeling and non functional requirements.
To explore the enterprise architecture and data representations.
To learn the construction maps and code analysis concepts.
To evaluate the application using different testing methodologies.
OUTCOMES:
design enterprise application architecture.
identify different views and viewpoints of enterprise.
implement enterprise applications for various organizations.
analyze the user requirements and develop use case diagrams.
implement testing methodologies for real time applications
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO ENTERPRISE APPLICATIONS
6
Introduction to enterprise applications and its types Software engineering methodologies Life cycle of
raising an enterprise application Introduction to skills required to build an enterprise application Key
determinant of successful enterprise applications Measuring the success of enterprise applications.
UNIT II
ENTERPRISE ANALYSIS
9
Inception of enterprise applications Enterprise analysis Business modeling Requirements elicitation
Use case modeling Prototyping Non functional requirements Requirements validation Planning and
estimation.
564
UNIT III
ENTERPRISE ARCHITECTURE
12
Concept of architecture Views and viewpoints Enterprise architecture Logical architecture
Technical architecture Design Different technical layers Best practices Data architecture and design
Relational-XML and other structured data representations Infrastructure architecture and design
elements Networking Internetworking and communication protocols IT hardware and software
Middleware Policies for infrastructure management Deployment strategy Documentation of
application architecture and design.
UNIT IV
CONSTRUCTION OF ENTERPRISE APPLICATIONS
9
Construction readiness of enterprise applications Defining a construction plan Defining a package
structure Setting up a configuration management plan Setting up a development environment
Introduction to the concept of software construction maps Construction of technical solution layers
Methodologies of code review Static code analysis Build and testing Dynamic code analysis Code
profiling and code coverage.
UNIT V
TESTING
9
Types and methods of testing an enterprise application Testing levels and approaches Testing
environments Integration testing Performance testing Penetration testing Usability testing
Globalization testing and interface testing User acceptance testing Rolling out an enterprise application.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOK:
Sl.No.
1.
Author(s)
Anubhav Pradhan
Satheesh B Nanjappa
Senthil K Nallasamy
Veerakumar
Esakimuthu
Title of the Book

Raising Enterprise Applications:
A Software Engineering
Perspective
Publisher
John Wiley
Year of
Publication
2010
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Sl.No.
Author(s)
1.
Brian Berenbac Daniel

J Paulish Juergen
Kazmeier
Arnold Rudorfer
Software Systems Requirements

Engineering: In Practice
McGraw
Hill/Osborne
Media
2009
2.
Vasudeva Varma
Software Architecture: A Case

Based Approach
Pearson
Education
2009
3.
Naresh Chauhan
Software Testing Principles and

Practices
Oxford University
Press
2010
4.
Seth Ladd
Bram Smeets
Building Spring 2 Enterprise

Applications
Apress
2007
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.java.sun.com/blueprints/guidelines/designing_enterprise_applications_2e/
http://www.brahms.st.informatik.tu darmstadt.de/ead12
http://www.cis.ait.asia/course_offerings/49/lecture_notes
http://www.cs.colorado.edu/~kena/classes/7818/f06/lectures/05
http://www.softwaretestingmentor.com/types of testing/globalization testing/
565
12F005
INFORMATION STORAGE AND MANAGEMENT

3
OBJECTIVES:
To evaluate storage architectures and key data center elements.
To understand physical and logical components of a storage infrastructure.
To describe storage networking technologies such as FC SAN, IP SAN.
To understand and articulate business continuity solutions.
To explore key characteristics, services, deployment models, and infrastructure components.
OUTCOMES:
describe leading storage technologies that provides cost effective IT solutions.
design, analyze and manage clusters of resources.
identify and install various storage virtualization technologies.
develop project teams to install, administer and upgrade popular storage solutions based on the
features.
analyze advanced security issues and technologies to store and secure the database.
UNIT I
STORAGE SYSTEMS
9
The value of information and data creation to a business Overview of Data Center infrastructure elements
and their requirements Role of ILM strategy Physical and logical components of host, connectivity and
storages Disk drive architecture and performance RAID, Different RAID levels ( RAID 0 6)
Overview of Intelligent Storage System (ISS) Components of ISS Implementation of ISS as storage
arrays.
UNIT II
STORAGE NETWORKING TECHNOLOGIES
9
Das Implementation Overview of SCSI Architecture, Components, Topologies: FC-SCAN NAS IPSAN Overview of CAS Object based storage system Application: long term archiving solution .
UNIT III
VIRTUALIZATION
9
Block level and File Level storage virtualization technologies processes Overview of Emerging
technologies Cloud Storage Virtual Provisioning Unified Storage FCOE FAST.
UNIT IV
BUSINESS CONTINUITY
9
Information Availability Measurement Downtime: causes, consequences RTO RPO Storage
infrastructure : Single point of failure and solution Backup/Recovery : Purpose Architecture
Topologies Local and Remote Replication Technologies Operation Emerging Technologies
Duplication Offsite Backup.
UNIT V
STORAGE SECURITY AND MANAGEMENT
9
Introduction to information security Critical security attributes for information system Describe the
elements of a shared storage model and security extensions Define storage security domains List and
analyze the common threats in each domain Identify different virtualization technologies Block level
and file level virtualization technologies.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
1
Author(s)
Somasundaram G
Alok Shrivastava
Title of the Book

Information Storage and
Management
Publisher
Wiley
Year of
Publication
2012
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
1
Author(s)
Marc Farley
Title of the Book

Building Storage Networks
566
Publisher
Tata McGraw Hill
Year of
Publication
2002
Robert Spalding
Thejendra B S
EMC Corporation
Storage Networks: The

Complete Reference
Disaster Recovery and
Business Continuity
Information storage and
Management
Tata McGraw Hill
2008
Shroff Publishers
and distributors
2006
Willey
2006
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.emc.com
http://www.education.emc.com/ismbook
https://www.education.emc.com/guest/training/learning_paths/stf.aspx
http://www.tutorialspoint.com/management_information_system/management_information_syste
m.htm
http://www.tutorialspoint.com/management_information_system/mis_tutorial.pdf
12F006
DATA SCIENCE AND BIG DATA ANALYSIS

3
OBJECTIVES:
making.
OUTCOMES:
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO BIG DATA ANALYTICS
9
Big Data Overview State of the Practice of Analytics Big Data Analytics in Industry Verticals
Overview of Data Analytics Lifecycle Discovery Data Preparation Model Planning Model Building
Communicating Results Findings Operationalizing.
UNIT II
USING R FOR INITIAL ANALYSIS OF THE DATA
9
Using R Initial Exploration: Introduction Analysis of the Data Using R Basic Data Visualization basic
data analytics Reporting and basic data visualization techniques Basic analytics methods: distributions
Statistical tests Summary operations Statistically sound vs. statistically significant results Null and
alternative hypothesis
UNIT III

THEORY AND METHODS
9
Analytic needs Initial hypotheses The data's structure and volume Commonly used methods:
Analytics solutions Algorithms and the technical foundations Environment (use case) that provide the
most value diagnostic methods to validate the models created Use R and in-database analytical functions
to fit Score and evaluate models.
567
UNIT IV

TECHNOLOGY AND TOOLS
9
Analytics on unstructured data using Map Reduce Programming paradigm Hadoop HDFS HIVE
PIG Other products in the Hadoop ecosystem for unstructured data analytics Effectively use advanced
SQL functions Greenplum extensions in database analytics MAD lib to solve analytics problems in
database
UNIT V
ENDGAME - OPERATIONALIZING AN ANALYTICS PROJECT
9
Three tasks to operationalize an analytics project Four deliverables of an analytics lifecycle project
Framework for creating final presentations Evaluate a data visualization and ways to improve it.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOK:
Sl.No.
1
Author(s)
Soumendra
Mohanty
Title of the Book

Analytics in Practice
Year of
Publication
Publisher
Tata Mcgraw Hill
Education
2011
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Year of
Publication
Publisher
1.
Ken W Collier
Agile Analytics: A Value-Driven

Approach to Business Intelligence
and Data Warehousing
Pearson Education
2012
2.
John Murray
Big Data : A Revolution That Will

Transform How We Live, Work and
Think
Hodder and
Stoughton
2013
3.
OReilly
Big Data Now
OReilly
2012
4.
Donald Miner
MapReduce Design Patterns
O'Reilly
2012
WEB URLs:
1. http://www.slideshare.net/larsga/introduction to big datamachine learning
2. http://www.cran.r project.org/doc/contrib/usingR.pdf
3. http://www.kdnuggets.com/statistical community big data disconnect discus.
4. http://www.tdwi.org/the intersection of big data and advanced analytics.
5. http://www.training.gte india.com/index.php?option=com_training&view.
12F007
MAINFRAME COMPUTING
3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the basics and operating mechanisms of mainframe systems.
To learn the various features of Z/OS.
To know the basic syntax rules and a few basic concepts of JCL.
To understand the structure and execution mechanism of COBOL Programming.
To understand the basic concepts of DB2.
OUTCOMES:
analyze the classification of computers and concepts of address space.
develop the Z operating system and its features.
568
implement the job control language.

basic knowledge for COBOL program.
design the mainframe application development.
UNIT I
MAINFRAME HARDWARE, OS AND TERMINOLOGY
9
Overview of computer architecture Classification of computers Micro, mini, mainframes and super
computer Mainframe computer Key features Benefits Evolution of mainframes Different
hardware systems Operating systems on mainframes Batch processing versus online processing
Mainframe operating system Evolution Concepts of address space Buffer management Virtual
storage Paging Swapping Dataset management in mainframes.
UNIT II
Z/OS AND ITS FEATURES
9
Z-operating system (Z/OS) Virtual storage Paging process Storage managers Program execution
modes Address space Multiple virtual system(MVS) MVS address space Z/OS address space
Dataset Sequential and partial dataset Direct access storage(DASD) Access methods Record
formats Introduction to virtual storage access methods (VSAM) Catalog VTOC.
UNIT III
INTRODUCTION TO JCL
7
Introduction to job control language Job processing Structure of JCL statements Various statements in
JCL JOB statement EXEC statement DD statement JCL procedures and IBM utility programs.
UNIT IV
COBOL PROGRAMMING
10
Introduction History Evolution and features COBOL program structure Steps in executing COBOL
Language fundamentals divisions Sections Paragraphs Sections Sentences and statements
Character set Literals Words Figurative constants Rules for forming user defined words COBOL
coding sheet Data division Data names level numbers PIC and VALUE clause REDEFINES
RENAMES and USAGE clause Procedure division Input/output verbs INITIALIZE VERB Data
movement verbs Arithmetic verbs Sequence control verbs File processing Field Physical/logical
records File File organization(sequential, indexed and relative) and access mode FILE-CONTROL
paragraph FILE SECTION File operations File handling verbs OPEN READ WRITE
REWRITE CLOSE Table processing Definition declaration Accessing elements Subscript and
index SET statement SEARCH verb SEARCH ALL verb Comparison Miscellaneous verbs
COPY CALL SORT MERGE STRING UNSTRING verbs.
UNIT V
OVERVIEW OF DB2 AND MAINFRAME APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT

GUIDELINES
10
Introduction to DB2 System service component Database service component Looking service
component Distributed data facility services component Stored procedure component Catalogs and
optimizer DB2 objects and data types DB2 objects hierarchy Storage groups Database Table
space Table Index Clustered index Synonyms and aliases Views Data types DB2 SQL
programming Types of SQL statements DCL DDL DML SPUFI utility Embedded SQL
programming Host variable DECLGEN utility SQLCA Single/multiple row manipulation Cursors
Scrollable cursors COBOL coding standards Relation between a COBOL file handling program and
JCL Different types of ABEND codes COBOL DB2 program precompilation DBRM (Database
Request Module) Application plan/packages Program execution methods(EDIT JCL Foreground and
background modes).
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
1.
Author(s)
Nancy stern
Robert A Stern
Title of the Book

Structured COBOL Programming
Publisher
John Wiley and
sons
IBM Manual : DB2 SQL Reference

IBM Manual: DB2 application Programming and SQL guide
569
Year of
Publication
2011
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Gary Deward Brown JCL Programming Bible (with z/OS)
Wiley India dream

tech
2006
2.
Craig S Mullins
Sams Publication
2012
DB2 Developers Guide
COBOL Language Reference IBM Redbook

COBOL Programming Guide IBM Redbook
WEB URLs:
1. http://www.1.ibm.com/support/docview.wss?uid=pub1sa22759706
2. http://www.publibz.boulder.ibm.com/cgibin/bookmgr_os390/books/iea2b600/CCONTENTS.
3. http://www.publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/db2v71uw/index.jsp
4. http://www.princeton.edu/~achaney/tmve/.../Mainframe_computer.html
5. http://www.mainframegurukul.com/ibm/what is/mainframe computer.html
12F008
BACKUP RECOVERY SYSTEMS AND ARCHTIECTURE

3
OBJECTIVES:
To describe backup and recovery terminology.
To explain the backup and recovery operations.
To elaborate about various types of storage systems, concepts and components.
To know about the major sources of backup data.
OUTCOMES:
apply the terminologies and operations in backup and recovery process.
analyze all the storage systems and its concepts.
identify the major sources of backup data directly.
retrieve the data that has been stored and can also be recovered.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Introduction Host Nomenclature Backup Topology Backup Levels Backup Retention Strategies
Recovery Strategies.
UNIT II
INFORMATION STORAGE CONCEPTS
9
Storage Systems Protecting Disks in Arrays Intelligent Storage Systems Direct-Attached Storage
SCSI Architecture Storage Area Networks Network Attached Storage Protecting Data in External
Storage Continuous Data Protection .
UNIT III
BACKUP CLIENT
9
Protecting Data in File Systems vs. Applications Databases Microsoft Volume Shadow Copy Service
File Servers Virtualization Client and Remote Office Backups Backup Considerations and
Challenges.
UNIT IV
BACKUP STORAGE NODE
9
Storage Node Components Protocols Backup to Physical Tape Backup to Disk Backup to Virtual
Tape Deduplication Systems Cloud Storage .
570
UNIT V
BACKUP AND RECOVERY PLANNING
9
Planning Management and Testing Disaster Recovery Considerations Concepts in Practice EMC
Backup Technologies.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOK:
Sl. No.
1.
Author(s)
Preston de Guise
Title of the Book

Enterprise systems Backup and
Recovery A corporate Insurance
policy
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Auerbach
Publications
2009
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book

Pro Data Backup and Recovery
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Apress
Publication
2011
Wiley Publication
2009
1.
Steven Nelson
2.
Somasundara G
Alok Shrivastava
3.
Curtis Preston W
Backup & Recovery: Inexpensive Backup OReilly

Solutions for Open Systems
Publications
2007
4.
David B
Chapa A
Little David
Implementing Backup and Recovery: The

John Wiley and
Readiness Guide for the Enterprise
Sons
(VERITAS)
2003
Information storage and Management
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.whatis.techtarget.com/reference/Backup-and-Recovery-Guides-and-Tutorials
http://www.searchdatabackup.techtarget.com/tutorial/Data-backup-and-recovery-technologytutorials
http://www.paragon-software.com/home/br-free/download_manual.html
http://www.docs.mongodb.org/manual/administration/backup/
http://www.siteground.com/tutorials/cpanel/backup_restore.htm
12F009
BUSINESS INTELLIGENCE
3
OBJECTIVES:
To learn the BI infrastructure components.
To understand the need for data integration.
To identify the goal and primary task of multidimensional modeling.
To know in detail about the enterprise reporting.
To study the metrics for business applications.
OUTCOMES:
identify the components of BI.
implement data integration using SSIS.
perform multidimensional modeling.
design enterprise report using SSRS.
implement real time business scenario.
571
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO BUSINESS INTELLIGENCE
6
Introduction to OLTP and OLAP BI definitions and concepts Business applications of BI BI
framework Role of data warehousing in BI BI infrastructure components BI Process BI technology
BI roles and responsibilities
UNIT II
10
integration approaches Introduction to ETL using SSIS Introduction to data quality Data profiling
concepts and applications
UNIT III
6
Introduction to data and dimension modeling Multidimensional data model ER modeling versus
multidimensional modeling Concepts of dimensions Facts Cubes Attribute Hierarchies Star and
snowflake schema Introduction to business metrics and KPIs Creating cubes using SSAS.
UNIT IV
BASICS OF ENTERPRISE REPORTING
12
Introduction to enterprise reporting Concepts of dashboards Balanced scorecards Introduction to
SSRS Architecture Enterprise reporting using SSRS.
UNIT V
APPLICATIONS
Case studies Real time business scenarios Identify the metrics Indicators Business goals.
11
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOK:
Sl.No.
1.
Author(s)
David Loshin
Title of the Book
Publisher
Morgan Kaufmann
Publishers
Year of
Publication
2012
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Prentice Hall
Year of
Publication
1.
Mike Biere
Business Intelligence For The

Enterprise
2.
Lynn Langit
Foundations of SQL Server 2005

Apress
2007
3.
Efraim Turban
Aronson E
Decision Support Systems and

Intelligent Systems
Pearson Education
2008
4.
Carlo Vercellis
Business Intelligence: Data

Mining and Optimization for
Decision Making
Wiley
2013
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.learnbi.com
http://www.techrepublic.com
http://www.nepbusinessdirectory.com
http://www.cio.com / Applications /Business Intelligence (BI)/ Tutorial
http://www.assystinternational.com
572
2003
12F010
SOFTWARE QUALITY ASSURANCE AND TESTING

3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the concepts, techniques and metrics for quality assurance in software development.
To impart knowledge on techniques for management of testing projects.
To describe the software testing methods to practice-oriented software testing projects.
To understand software test automation problems and solutions.
To know the use modern software testing tools to support software testing projects.
OUTCOMES:
design and conduct experiments, as well as to analyze and interpret data.
design a system, component or process to meet desired needs.
identify, formulate and solve engineering problems.
develop an understanding of professional and ethical responsibility.
analyze the impact of engineering solutions in a global/societal context.
UNIT I
TESTING PRINCIPLES
9
Need of testing Basic concepts Errors Faults Defects Failures Test bed Unit testing
Integration testing system System testing Regression testing Alpha Beta and acceptance testing
Functional testing Performance testing Recovery testing White box testing Black box testing
Verification and validation.
UNIT II
TEST MANAGEMENT
9
Testing Life Cycle Roles and activities Test Planning Forming a test team Develop test plan review
Test cases design strategies black box approach: random testing Equivalence class partitioning and
boundary value analysis White box approach: test adequacy criteria Coverage and control flow graphs
Paths Loop testing Mutation testing Test execution: build test data Life cycle of defect Defect
tracking Defect detection stages defect detection stages Defect types Defect severity
Defect analysis and prevention.
UNIT III
SOFTWARE METRICS
9
Scope of software metrics Classifying software measures Measurement basics Representational
theory Scales Meaningfulness What to measure GOM technique Control flow structure Product
quality metrics MTTF Defect density Customer problems Customer satisfaction Function point
Metrics for software maintenance In-process quality metrics.
UNIT IV
QUALITY ASSURANCE
9
Quality concepts Quality Quality control Quality assurance Cost of quality Software quality
assurance SQA activities Software reviews Inspections Audits Software reviews Inspections
Audits Software reliability Quality Attributes: correctness Reliability Usability Integrity
Portability Maintainability, interoperability Ishikawas Seven basic tools.
UNIT V
QUALITY STANDARDS
Basic concepts of standards ISO 9000 & 9001 CMM Six sigma.
9
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOK:
Sl.No.
1.
Author(s)
Kshirasagar Naik
Title of the Book

Software testing and quality
assurance
573
Publisher
Wiley
Year of
Publication
2010
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Year of
Publication
Publisher
1.
Jeff Tian
Software Quality
Engineering: Testing,
Quality Assurance and
Quantifiable Improvement
2.
Milind Limaye
Software Quality Assurance
Tata McGraw Hill

Education
2011
3.
Pankaj Jalote
An Integrated Approach to
Narosa Publishing
House, 3rd
Edition
2011
Murali Chemuturi
Mastering Software Quality

Assurance: Best Practices,
Tools and Techniques for
Software developers
J Ross Publishers
2011
4.
John Wiley
2005
WEB URLs:
1. http://www.mobbu.com/blog/software-testing-principles-on-a-post-it-note/
2. http://www.cs.bham.ac.uk/~exc/.../STesting/.../15.%20Test%20management.pdf
3. http://www.ocw.mit.edu/courses/aeronautics-and...software...notes/cnotes7.pdf
4. http://www.scqf.org.uk/.../QA_Model_Guidance_Notes_FINAL_for_website.pdf
5. http://www.atilim.edu.tr/~dmishra/compe550/chapter-8.ppt
12F011

3
OBJECTIVES:
To train in the fundamentals of software project Management and various steps.
To impart the steps involved in the evaluating of a project.
To learn the concept of software project analysis and activity planning.
To understand the concepts of monitoring and control software project.
To know the concepts of organizational behaviors.
OUTCOMES:
analyze the activities involved in software project management and stepwise project planning.
carryout the cost benefit analysis for a project.
design activity plan for estimating the duration of a project.
develop steps involved the progress of the project using continual monitoring report which
includes weekly time sheet, activity assessment sheet.
implements the concepts of organizational behaviors.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO SOFTWARE PROJECT MANAGEMENT
9
Project definition Contract management Activities covered by software project management
Overview of project planning Stepwise project planning.
UNIT II
PROJECT EVALUATION
9
Strategic assessment Technical assessment Cost benefit analysis Cash flow forecasting Cost
Benefit evaluation techniques Risk evaluation.
574
UNIT III
ACTIVITY PLANNING
9
Objectives Project schedule Sequencing and scheduling activities Network planning models
Forward pass Backward pass Activity float Shortening project duration Activity on arrow networks
Risk management Nature of risk Types of risk Managing risk Hazard identification Hazard
analysis Risk planning and control.
UNIT IV
MONITORING AND CONTROL
9
Creating framework Collecting the data Visualizing progress Cost monitoring Earned value
Prioritizing monitoring Getting project back to target Change control Managing contracts
Introduction Types of contract Stages in contract placement Typical terms of a contract Contract
management Acceptance.
UNIT V
MANAGING PEOPLE AND ORGANIZING TEAMS
9
Introduction Understanding behavior Organizational behavior A background Selecting the right
person for the job Instruction in the best methods Motivation The Oldman-Hackman job
characteristics model Working in groups Becoming a team Decision making Leadership
Organizational structures Stress Health and safety Case studies.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOK:
Sl.No.
1.
Author(s)
Bob Hughes
Mikecotterell
Title of the Book

Publisher
Tata McGraw Hill
Year of
Publication
2011
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Ramesh
Gopalaswamy
Tata McGraw Hill, 5th

Edition
2009
2.
Royce

Ltd, 1st Edition
2013
3.
Jalote

in Practice

Ltd, 1st Edition
2002
4.
Kelkar S A
Software Project
Management: A Concise
Study
PHI
2009
WEB URLs:
1. http://www.at web1.comp.glam.ac.uk/staff/dwfarthi/projman.htm
2. http://www.projectminds.com/
3. http://www.searchcio.bitpipe.com/tlist/Software Project Management.html
4. http://www.phindia.com/rajibmall/chapters/LECTURE12.ppt
5. http://www.forum.jntuworld.com/showthread.php?3989-Software-Project-management-(SPM)-Notes
575
12F012
CRYPTOGRAPHY AND NETWORK SECURITY

3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the mathematics behind Cryptography.
To understand the standard algorithms used to provide confidentiality, integrity and authenticity.
To impart knowledge on various security practices applied in the field of information technology.
To introduce general design decisions that should be made when constructing secure systems.
OUTCOMES:
apply the basic security algorithms required by any computing system.
analyze the Number theory concepts and public cryptography.
Implement the network security designs using available secure solutions.
apply the advanced security issues and technologies to secure the system.
UNIT I
SYMMETRIC CIPHERS
9
Overview: Services, mechanisms and attacks The OSI security architecture A model of network
security Classical encryption techniques: Symmetric cipher model Substitution techniques
Transposition techniques Steganography Block cipher and the data encryption standard: The data
encryption standard The Strength of DES Symmetric ciphers: Triple DES Confidentiality using
Conventional encryption: Placement of encryption function Traffic confidentiality Key distribution
Random number generation.
UNIT II
FINITE FIELD AND NUMBER THEORY
9
Group Ring Field Modular arithmetic Divisor Finding inverses Polynomial arithmetic Euclid
algorithm Number theory: Prime numbers Formats and Eulers Theorems Testing for Primality.
UNIT III
ASYMMETRIC CIPHERS
9
Public Key Cryptography and RSA: Principles of Public-Key cryptosystems The RSA algorithm Key
Management Diffie Hellman Key exchange Message authentication: Authentication requirements
Authentication functions Message authentication codes MD5 message Digest algorithm Digital
Signature and authentication protocols: Digital signatures Authentication protocols Digital signature
standard.
UNIT IV
NETWORK SECURITY
9
Authentication applications: Kerberos X.509 directory authentication service Electronic mail security:
Pretty good privacy IP Security: Overview IP Security architecture Web security: Web security
requirements Secure sockets layer and transport layer security Secure electronic transaction.
UNIT V
SYSTEM SECURITY
9
Intruders: Intruders Malicious software: Viruses and related threats Counter measures Firewalls:
Firewall design principles CNS tools HID NID.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOK:
Sl.No.
1.
Author(s)
William Stallings
Title of the Book

Security
Publisher
Pearson Education,
5th Edition
Year of
Publication
2011
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
1.
Charlie Kaufman
Radia Perlman
Mike Speciner
Title of the Book

Network Security: Private
communication in a Public World
576
Publisher
Pearson Education
Year of
Publication
2011
2.
Taha H A
3.
Atul Kahate
4.
Gill P S
Operations Research-An
Introduction
Security
Security
Pearson Education
2012
McGraw Hill,
3rd Edition
2013
Macmillan Publishers
India
2011
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.herongyang.com/crypto/
http://www.cryptographyworld.com/what.htm
http://www.cryptography-tutorial.com
http://www.web2.aabu.edu.jo/tool/course_file/lec_notes/902480_ch17.ppt
http://www.williamstallings.com/Crypt-Tut/Crypto%20Tutorial%20-%20JERIC.html
12F013

3
OBJECTIVES:
To know the key distinctions for Service Oriented Architecture (SOA).
To understand the Web Services Security Frame.
To know the key security requirements.
To understand the key principles and patterns for building secure services
To understand the web services security and transaction management.
OUTCOMES:
design various web services.
demonstrate skills in designing and developing the web services.
describe real world scenarios involving web services
describe the need for a platform independent service contract (WSDL)
describe the need for a platform independent messaging format (SOAP).
UNIT I
FUNDAMENTALS OF SOA
9
Introduction Defining SOA-Evolution of SOA Service Oriented Enterprise Comparing SOA to client
Server and distributed internet architectures Basic SOA Architecture-concepts Key Service
characteristics Technical Benefits Business Benefits.
UNIT II
COMBINING SOA AND WEB SERVICES
9
Web services Service descriptions Messaging with SOAP Message exchange Patterns Web Service
Platform-Service Contract Service Level Data Model Service Discovery Service Level Security
Service Level Interaction Patterns Atomic and Composite Services Service Enabling Legacy System
Enterprise Service Bus Pattern.
UNIT III
MULTI CHANNEL ACCESS AND WEB SERVICES COMPOSITION
9
SOA for Multi-Channel Access Business Benefits Tiers-Business Process Management Web Service
Composition BPEL-RESTFUL Services Comparison of BPEL and RESTFUL Services.
UNIT IV
JAVA WEB SERVICES
9
SOA support in J2EE Java API for XML-based web services (JAX-WS) Java Architecture for XML
binding (JAXB) Java API for XML Registries(JAXR) Java API for XML based RPC(JAX-RPC)
Web Services interoperability SOA support in .NET ASP.NET web services Case Studies Web
Services Enhancements (WSE) .
577
UNIT V
WEB SERVICES SECURITY AND TRANSACTION
9
Meta Data Management Advanced Messaging Addressing Reliable Messaging Policies WSPolicy Security Notification and Even ting Transaction Management.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOK:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Eric Newcomer
Lomow
1.
Title of the Book

Understanding SOA with
Web Services
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Pearson Education
2005
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
1.
Author(s)
Guido Schmutz Peter
Welkenbach Daniel
Liebhart
2.
Thomas Erl
3.
Sandeep Chatterjee
James Webber
4.
Eric A. Marks
Michael Bell
Title of the Book

Service-Oriented
Architecture: An Integration
Blueprint
Service Oriented
Architecture
Services
Service Oriented
Architecture (SOA): A
Planning and
Implementation Guide for
Business and Technology
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Packt Publishing
Limited
2010
2006
Pearson Education
Pearson Education
2005
Wiley
2008
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.contrib.andrew.cmu.edu/~mm6/95 843/
http://www.sunset.usc.edu/classes/cs510_2011
http://www.sunset.usc.edu/classes/cs510_2011/ECs_2011/USC_SOA_1102_11_CS510.pdf
http://www.comp.nus.edu.sg/~seer/book/2e/Ch10.%20Service%20Oriented%20Architecture.pdf
http://www.nxstud.blogspot.in/2012/06/it2401-service-oriented-architecture_13.html
12F014
ETHICAL HACKING
3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the use of hacking techniques used by malicious, black hat hackers.
To know the best defense from malicious, black hat hackers.
To know how to use the same hacking techniques to perform a white-hat, ethical hack.
To identify the security controls to prevent hackers gaining access to operating systems.
OUTCOMES:
evaluate where information networks are most vulnerable.
apply the penetration tests into secure networks for evaluation purposes.
design security plans against attacks from the Internet.
develop an ongoing security strategy.
578
UNIT 1
INTRODUCTION TO ETHICAL HACKING
9
Networking and Basics Understanding the Ethical hacking terminology Identifying different types of
hacking technologies Foot printing and social engineering Scanning and enumeration
UNIT II
SYSTEM HACKING
9
Understanding password cracking techniques Different types of passwords Key loggers and other
spyware technologies Stegnography technologies Trojans, Backdoors, Viruses and worms Sniffers
Denial of Service and Session Hacking.
UNIT III
WEB HACKING
9
Hacking web servers Web Application vulnerabilities Web based password cracking techniques SQL
Injection and Buffer overflows.
UNIT 1V
WIRELESS HACKING
9
Overview of WEP and WPA Authentication Mechanisms Overview of Wireless sniffers MAC
Spoofing Rogue Access points Wireless Hacking Techniques
UNIT V
PENETRATION TESTING
9
Penetration Testing Reconnaissance Scanning Exploitation Web based exploitation
Maintaining access with back doors and root kits Wrapping up the penetration tests
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOK:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Steven DeFino
Barry Kaufman
Nick Valenteen
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Official Certified Ethical

Hacker Review Guide
Delmar Cengage
Learning,Pap/Psc
edition
2012
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
1.
Michael T Simpson
Kent Backman
James Corley
2.
Patrick Engebretson
3.
Allen Harper
4.
Ankit Fadia
Title of the Book

Hands On Ethical
Hacking and Network
Defense
Ethical Hacking and
Penetration Testing
Made Easy
Gray Hat Hacking:
The Ethical Hackers
Handbook
ETHICAL Hacking
Publisher
Year of Publication
Course Technology
CENGAGE Learning
2012
Syngress Basics
Series
2011
Tata Mcgraw Hill, 3rd

Edition
2011
Macmillian India Ltd
2006
WEB URLs:
1. http://www.ethicalhacking.com
2. http://www.eccouncil.org/Certification/certified-ethical-hacker
3. http://www.breakthesecurity.com
4. http:// www.vasco.com
5. http://www.hacking-tutorial.com/#sthash.u4qxFCYs.dpbs
579
12F015
ENGINEERING ETHICS
3
OBJECTIVES:
To know the moral issues through predominant theories.
To understand the code of ethics as well as the industry standards.
To know the use of ensuring safety and reducing the risk.
To know the Rights and Responsibilities of individuals.
OUTCOMES:
analyze the theoretical tools of moral evaluation.
develop a system or systems for appraising difficult moral situations.
develop the appropriate code of ethics for their field.
develop a position on the relation between personal morality and professional codes.
UNIT I
HUMAN VALUES
9
Morals, values and Ethics Integrity Work ethic Service learning Civic virtue Respect for others
Living peacefully Caring Sharing Honesty Courage Valuing time Cooperation Commitment
Empathy Self confidence Character Spirituality.
UNIT II
ENGINEERING ETHICS
9
Senses of Engineering Ethics Variety of moral issues Types of inquiry Moral dilemmas Moral
Autonomy Kohlbergs theory Gilligans theory Consensus and Controversy Models of professional
roles Theories about right action Self-interest Customs and Religion Uses of Ethical Theories.
UNIT III
ENGINEERING AS SOCIAL EXPERIMENTATION
9
Engineering as Experimentation Engineers as responsible Experimenters Codes of Ethics A Balanced
Outlook on Law The Challenger Case Study.
UNIT IV
SAFETY, RESPONSIBILITIES AND RIGHTS
9
Safety and Risk Assessment of Safety and Risk Risk Benefit Analysis and Reducing Risk The Three
Mile Island and Chernobyl Case Studies Collegiality and Loyalty Respect for Authority Collective
Bargaining Confidentiality Conflicts of Interest Occupational Crime Professional Rights
Employee Rights Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) Discrimination
UNIT V
GLOBAL ISSUES
9
Multinational Corporations Environmental Ethics Computer Ethics Weapons Development
Engineers as Managers Consulting Engineers Engineers as Expert Witnesses and Advisors Moral
Leadership Sample Code of Conduct.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOK:
Sl.No.
1.
Author
Charles E Harris
Michael S Pritchard
Michael J Rabins
Title of the Book

Engineering Ethics Concepts and Cases
Publisher
Thompson Wadsworth, A
Division of Thomson
Learning Inc
Year of
Publication
2013
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
1.
Author(s)
John R Boatright
Title of the Book
Publisher
Ethics and the

Conduct of Business
Pearson Education
580
Year of
Publication
2011
2.
Edmund G Seebauer
Robert L Barry
Fundametals of
Ethics for Scientists
and Engineers
2007
3.
Mike W Martin
Roland Schinzinger
Ethics in Engineering
Tata McGraw Hill
2004
4.
Govindarajan M
Engineering Ethics
PHI Learning
2009
WEB URLs:
1. http:// www.onlineethics.org
2. http:// www.nspe.org
3. http:// www.globalethics.org
4. http:// www.ethics.org
5. http://www.ocw.mit.edu/courses/engineering-systems-division/esd-932-engineering-ethics-spring2006/syllabus/
12F016
MIDDLEWARE TECHNOLOGIES
3
OBJECTIVES:
To give an overview of Client Server concepts, middleware and RPC.
To evaluate the overview of EJB architecture and its roles.
To give the students an overview of EJB, beans and building an EJB application.
To describe about CORBA, architecture, object model and IDL.
To understand applications using COM and .NET framework.
OUTCOMES:
design client server architecture and its impact on all walks of the network based computing.
analyze middleware technologies for developing distributed applications.
build practical distributed systems using EJB technology.
design distributed systems using CORBA.
implement the concept of COM and .Net for real world application.
UNIT I
CLIENT / SERVER CONCEPTS
9
Client Server File Server Database server Group server Object server Web server Middleware
General middleware Service specific middleware Client server building blocks RPC Messaging
Peer to peer.
UNIT II
EJB ARCHITECTURE
9
EJB EJB Architecture Overview of EJB software architecture View of EJB Conversation Building
and deploying EJBs Roles in EJB.
UNIT III
EJB APPLICATIONS
9
EJB session beans EJB entity beans EJB clients EJB deployment Building an application with EJB
using tools.
UNIT IV
CORBA
9
CORBA Distributed systems Purpose Exploring CORBA alternatives Architecture overview
CORBA and networking model CORBA object model IDL ORB Building an application with
CORBA.
581
UNIT V
COM
9
COM Data types Interfaces Proxy and stub Marshalling Implementing server client Interface
pointers Object creation Invocation Destruction Comparison COM and CORBA Introduction to
.NET Overview of .NET architecture Marshalling Remoting.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOK:
Sl.No.
1.
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
The Essential
Client/Server Survival
Guide
Wiley India Pvt. Ltd,

3rd Edition
2007
Author(s)
Robert Orfali
Dan Harkey
Jeri Edwards
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Qusay H Mahmoud
Middleware for
Communications
John wiley
Publications
2004
2.
Chris Britton
Peter Eye
IT Architecture and
Middleware
Pearson Education,
2nd Edition
2004
3.
Jesse Liberty
Programming C#
4.
Tanenbaum A Maarten
Van Steen
Distributed Systems
:Principles and
paradigms
O Reilly Press
2010
Pearson Education,
2nd Edition
2008
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.roseindia.net/ejb/
http://www.indiastudychannel.com/resources/10803-EJB-FAQ.aspx
http://www.publib.boulder.ibm.com/
http://www.middlewares.wordpress.com/2008/05/02/ejb-%e2%80%93-two-marks-q-a/
http://www.middlewares.wordpress.com/2008/05/12/what-is-moniker
12F017
WIRELESS NETWORKS
3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand physical as wireless MAC layer alternatives techniques.
To learn planning and operation of wireless networks.
To study various wireless LAN and WAN and security concepts.
To understand WPAN and geo-location systems.

OUTCOMES:
analyze the basic mobile network architecture.
develop some basic technologies and its operations.
design critical assessment of mobile systems
analyze and propose broad solutions for a range of mobile scenarios
582
UNIT I
9
Wired transmission techniques Design of wireless modems Power efficiency Out of band radiation
Applied wireless transmission techniques Short distance base band transmission VWB pulse
transmission Broad modems for higher speeds Diversity and smart receiving techniques Random
UNIT II
9
Wireless networks topologies Cellular topology Cell fundamentals signal to interference ratio
calculation Capacity expansion techniques Cell splitting Use of directional antennas for cell sectoring
Micro cell method Overload cells Channels allocation techniques and capacity expansion.
UNIT III
WIRELESS WAN
9
Mechanism to support a mobile environment Communication in the infrastructure IS-95 CDMA
forward channel IS 95 CDMA reverse channel Pallert and frame formats in IS-95 IMT-2000 Forward
channel in W-CDMA and CDMA 2000 Reverse channels in W-CDMA and CDMA-2000 GPRS and
higher data rates Short messaging service in GPRS mobile application protocols.
UNIT IV
SECURITY
9
Security policies for wireless networks Defining the SSID Encryption and authentication WEPTKIP
EAP and radius.
UNIT V
9
IEEE 802.15 WPAN Home RF Bluetooth Interface between bluetooth and 802.11 Wireless
geolocation technologies for wireless geolocation Geolocation standards for E.911 service Configuring
a Wi-Fi access point Configuring a Wi-Fi card in a laptop Case studies.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOK:
Sl.No.
1.
Author(s)
Mathew S Gast
Title of the Book

802.11n :A Survival Guide
Publisher
Shroff /OReilly
1st Edition
Year of
Publication
2012
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Jochen Schiller
Pearson Education
2nd Edition
2008
Martyn Mallick
Mobile and Wireless

design essentials
Wiley India Pvt.Ltd
2003
Nicopolitidis P
Obaidat M S
Papadimitria G I
Pomportsis A S
Wireless Networks
Wiley India Pvt.Ltd
2009
4.
Kaveh Pahlavan
Prashant
Krishnamoorthy
Networking
Fundamentals:Wide,Local
and Personal Area
Communications
Willey-Blackwell
2009
WEB URLs:
1. http://www.howstuffworks.com/wireless-network.htm
3.http://www.documentation.netgear.com/reference/fra/wireless/WirelessNetworkingBasics-309.html
4. http://www.dummies.com/how-to/content/configuring-a-wireless-access-point.html
5. http://www.mcit.ucsd.edu/documents/help/wireless/CWNA_Study_Guide.pdf
583
12F018
GREEN COMPUTING
3
OBJECTIVES:
making.
OUTCOMES:
UNIT I
FUNDAMENTALS
9
Green IT Fundamentals: Business, IT, and the Environment Green computing: carbon foot print, scoop
on power Green IT Strategies Drivers Dimensions Goals Environmentally Responsible Business
Policies Practices Metrics.
UNIT II
GREEN ASSETS AND MODELING
9
Green Assets Buildings Data Centers Networks Devices Green Business Process Management:
Modeling Optimization Collaboration Green Enterprise Architecture Environmental Intelligence
Green Supply Chains Green Information Systems Design and Development Models.
UNIT III
GRID FRAMEWORK
9
Virtualizing of IT systems Role of electric utilities, Telecommuting, teleconferencing and teleporting
Materials recycling Best ways for Green PC Green Data center Green Grid framework.
UNIT IV
GREEN COMPLIANCE
9
Socio-cultural aspects of Green IT Green Enterprise Transformation Roadmap Green Compliance
Protocols Standards and Audits Emergent Carbon Issues Technologies and Future.
UNIT V
CASE STUDIES
9
CASE STUDIES Applying Green IT Strategies and Applications to a Home Hospital Packaging
Industry and Telecom Sector.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOK:
Sl.No.
1.
Author(s)
Bhuvan
Unhelkar
Title of the Book

Green IT Strategies and
Applications Using Environmental
Intelligence
Publisher
CRC Press
Year of
Publication
2011
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
1.
Author(s)
Alin Gales
Michael
Schaefer
Mike Ebbers
Shoff
Title of the Book

Green Data Center: steps for the
Journey
584
Publisher
IBM rebook
Year of
Publication
2011
2.
John Lamb
The Greening of IT
Pearson Education
2009
3.
Jason Harris
Green Computing and Green IT Best

Practices
Emereo Publishing
2008
Green Computing with Emerging

Memory
Springer
2012
Takayuki
Kawahara
Hiroyuki Mizuno
4.
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http:// www.ncomputing.com/company/green computing

http:// www.citi.umass.edu/ghpc/GHPCC green computing
http://www.computerweekly.com
http://www.techopedia.com
http://www.cs.grinnell.edu
12F019
CLOUD INFRASTRUCTURE AND SERVICES

3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the phases of transition from classic data center to virtual data center and then to
the Cloud.
To study the virtualization technology at computer, storage, network, desktop.
To describe the business continuity solutions in a VDC environment.
To know the Cloud infrastructure components and service management processes.
To introduce the Cloud security concerns and the key considerations for migration to the Cloud.
OUTCOMES:
Learners can be able to
configure and deploy Advanced IP services such as NAT, PAT and DHCP.
implement and configure network, access, resource monitoring and data protection tasks.
design, create and manage virtualized environments.
implement storage architectures, processes, components.
design, partially implement and report on a small scale cloud infrastructure project.
UNIT I
JOURNEY TO THE CLOUD
9
Introduction to cloud Phases of journey to the Cloud Business drivers for Cloud computing
Definition of Cloud computing Characteristics of Cloud computing as per NIST Steps involved in
transitioning from Classic data center to Cloud computing environment cloud applications cloud
services.
UNIT II
CLASSIC DATA CENTER
9
Key elements of CDC Compute, storage, and network on business continuity data center management
Application, DBMS, Compute, Storage and Networking Object based and Unified storage technologies
Business continuity overview and backup Replication technologies CDC Management.
9
UNIT III
VIRTUALIZED DATA CENTER
Virtualized Data Center (VDC) Compute, Storage, Network virtualization techniques Block and file
level storage virtualization Virtual provisioning and automated storage tiering Virtual LAN (VLAN)
and Virtual SAN (VSAN) and their benefits Key network traffic management techniques in VDC
Backup and recovery of Virtual Machines (VMs) VM replication and migration technologies Recovery
options from total site failure due to a disaster.
585
UNIT IV
CLOUD COMPUTING AND INFRASTRUCTURE
9
Cloud infrastructure Characteristics of Cloud Computing Cloud services models Cloud deployment
models Economics of Cloud Cloud infrastructure components Cloud service creation processes
Cloud service management processes .
UNIT V
CLOUD SECURITY AND MIGRATION TO CLOUD
9
Key security concerns and threats in cloud Security concerns and counter measures in a VDC and Cloud
environment, Governance, Risk Compliance aspects in Cloud Cloud security best practices Cloud
models suitable for different categories of users Considerations for choosing applications suitable for
Cloud Different phases to adopt the Cloud Migration to Cloud.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOK:
Sl.No.
1.
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Cloud Computing: A Practical

Approach
Tata McGraw
Hill
2009
Title of the book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Velte T
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Author(s)
Halper Fern
Kaufman Marcia
Bloor Robin
Hurwit Judith
Kris Jamsa
Rajkumar Buyya James
Broberg Andrzej
Goscinski
Thomas Erl Ricardo
Puttini Zaigham
Mahmood
Cloud Computing For

Dummies
Wiley India
2009
Cloud Computing: SaaS, PaaS,

IaaS, Virtualization, Business
Models, Mobile, Security
Jones and
Bartlett
Learning
2013
Cloud Computing: Principles

and Paradigms
Wiley India
Pvt. Ltd.
2013
Cloud Computing: Concepts,

Technology & Architecture
Prentice Hall
2013
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.safecomputing.umich.edu/protect-um-data/cloud-security.php
http://www.cisco.com/c/en/us/solutions/data-center-virtualization/cloud-infrastructure/index.html
http://www.cloud.cio.gov/topics/cloud-computing-deployment-models
http://www.datacenterknowledge.com/archives/2013/09/09/optimizing-physical-infrastructure-toget-more-from-virtualization-and-the-cloud/.
http://www.tutorialspoint.com/cloud_computing/index.htm
12F020
CLOUD COMPUTING
3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the fundamentals of cloud computing.
To know the cloud computing services.
To understand cloud computing for community.
To understand web mail services.
To know cloud storage.
586
OUTCOMES:
describe basic idea about cloud computing.
design the cloud computing services.
use cloud computing for community.
design the web mail services.
analyze the cloud storage.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Cloud computing introduction From collaboration to cloud Working of cloud computing pros and cons
Benefits Developing cloud computing services Cloud service development Discovering cloud
services.
UNIT II
CLOUD COMPUTING FOR EVERYONE
9
Centralizing email communications Cloud computing for community Collaborating on schedules
Collaborating on group projects and events Cloud computing for corporation Mapping schedules
managing projects Presenting on road.
UNIT III
USING CLOUD SERVICES
9
Collaborating on calendars Schedules and task management Exploring on line scheduling and planning
Collaborating on event management Collaborating on contact management Collaborating on project
management Collaborating on word processing Spreadsheets and databases.
UNIT IV
OUTSIDE THE CLOUD
9
Evaluating web mail services Evaluating instant messaging Evaluating web conference tools
Creating groups on social networks Evaluating on line groupware Collaborating via blogs and wikis
UNIT V
STORING AND SHARING
9
Understanding cloud storage Evaluating on line file storage Exploring on line book marking services
Exploring on line photo editing applications Exploring photo sharing communities Controlling it with
web based desktops.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publishing
Mahmood
Zaigham
Cloud Computing for

Enterprise Architectures
Hill Richard
2011
George Reese
Cloud Application
Architectures
Shroff/O' Reilly
2009
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
1
Author(s)
Michael Miller
Haley Beard
Michael Miller
Title of the Book

Cloud Computing
Cloud Computing Best
Practices for Managing and
Measuring
Processes for On demand
Computing
Web Based Appli
cations That Change the Way
You Work and Collaborate
Online
587
Publisher
Year of
Publishing
Pearson Education
2009
Emereo Pvt
Limited
2008
Que Publishing
2008
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
https://www.ibm.com/.../chapter_13_cloud_computing_reference.
https://www.ibm.com/cloud computing/us/en/.
https://www.europarl.europa.eu/committees/en/studiesdownload.html
http://www.w3.org/community/cloud/
http://www.csrc.nist.gov/publications
588
MASTER OF COMPUTER APPLICATIONS
TOTAL CREDIT: 113

SEMESTER I
Course
Code
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Course Title
Credits
Maximum Marks
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
13Z101
13Z102
13Z103
Digital Fundamentals and

Computer Organization
Data Structures
Problem Solving and Programming
in C
3.5
40
60
100
40
60
100
3.5
40
60
100
13Z104
40
60
100
13Z105
Business Process and Technologies
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
1.5
100
100
15
20.5
PRACTICAL
13Z111
13Z112
13Z113
Programming and Data Structures

Laboratory
Laboratory
Soft Skills Laboratory
TOTAL
SEMESTER II
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Credits
Maximum Marks
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
3
3.5
40
60
100
13Z202
Mathematical Foundations of
Computer Science
40
60
100
13Z203
Operating System
40
60
100
13Z204
3.5
40
60
100
13Z205
Open Source Technology
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
15
20.5
13Z201
PRACTICAL
13Z211
13Z212
13Z213
Operating System Laboratory

Laboratory
Open Source Technology
Laboratory
TOTAL

589
SEMESTER III
Course
Code
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Course Title
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
13Z301
System Software
40
60
100
13Z302
Computer Networks
40
60
100
13Z303
Software Testing
40
60
100
13Z304
Web Applications using JAVA
3.5
40
60
100
13Z305
E-Commerce
40
60
100
PRACTICAL
13Z311
1.5
40
60
100
13Z312
Software Testing Laboratory

Web Applications using JAVA
Laboratory
TOTAL
1.5
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
15
20
13Z313
SEMESTER IV
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Credits
Maximum Marks
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
13Z401
13Z402
13Z403
13Z404
13ZXXX

Design
Web Technology
Visual Programming
Mining
Elective - I
40
60
100
40
60
100
3.5
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
PRACTICAL
13Z411
1.5
40
60
100
13Z412
Web Technology Laboratory

Visual Programming
Laboratory
TOTAL
1.5
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
15
20
13Z413

590
SEMESTER V
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Credits
Maximum Marks
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
13Z501
Mobile Computing
40
60
100
13Z502
3.5
40
60
100
40
60
100
13ZXXX

Multimedia
Elective - II
40
60
100
13ZXXX
Elective - III
40
60
100
1.5
100
100
1.5
40
60
100
1.5
40
60
100
15
20
13Z503
PRACTICAL
13Z511
13Z512
13Z513
Mini Project
Laboratory
Graphics and Multimedia
Laboratory
TOTAL
SEMESTER VI
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Credits
Maximum Marks
CIA
ESE
Total
40
60
100
PROJECT
13Z651
Project Work
TOTAL
24
12
24
12

591
ELECTIVES
Course
Code
Course Title
13Z001
Accounting and Financial Management
13Z002
Agent Based Intelligent System
13Z003
13Z004
Big Data Analysis
13Z005
Compiler Design
13Z006
Component Object Technology
13Z007
Cryptography and Steganography
13Z008
Enterprise Resource Planning
13Z009
Grid Computing
13Z010
Semantic Web
13Z011
High Performance Computing
13Z012
13Z013
M-Commerce
13Z014
MIS and Business Intelligence
13Z015
Neural Networks
13Z016
Numerical and Statistical Methods
13Z017
Professional Ethics
13Z018
Resource Management Techniques
13Z019
Software Agents
13Z020
Software Metric and Quality Management
13Z021
13Z022
Cloud Technology Management
592
SEMESTER III
13Z301
SYSTEM SOFTWARE
3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the relationship between System Software and Machine architecture.
To know the design and implementation of Assembler.
To know the design and implementation of Loaders and Linkers.
To know about System Software Tools.
OUTCOMES:
design Assembler.
design and implement Loaders and Linkers.
use Macro processors.
use various System Software Tools.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Basic concepts System software and machine structure Simplified instructional computer Machine
architectures (SIC and SIC/XE) Memory Registers Data formats Instruction formats Addressing
modes Instruction set Input and output SIC and SIC/XE examples.
UNIT II
ASSEMBLERS
9
Basic assembler functions A simple SIC assembler Assembler algorithm and data structures Machine
dependent assembler features Instruction formats and addressing modes Machine independent
assembler features Design options One pass assemblers Multi pass assemblers Implementation
examples MASM assembler.
UNIT III
LOADERS AND LINKERS
9
Basic loader functions Design of an absolute loader A simple bootstrap loader Machine dependent
loader features Relocation Program linking Algorithm and data structures Machine independent
loader features Automatic library search Loader options Design options Linkage editors - Dynamic
linking Bootstrap loaders Implementation examples MSDOS linker.
UNIT IV
MACRO PROCESSORS
9
Basic macro functions Macro definition and expansion Macro processor algorithm and data structures
Machine independent macro processor features Concatenation of macro parameters Generation of
unique labels Conditional macro expansion Keyword macro parameters Macro processor design
options Implementation examples ANSI C language.
UNIT V
COMPILERS AND UTILITIES
9
Introduction to compilers Different phases of compiler System software tools Text editors
Overview of editing process User interface Editor structure Interactive debugging systems
Debugging functions and capabilities Relationship with other parts of the system User interface criteria.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
1.
Author(s)
Leland L Beck
Title of the Book
Publisher
System Software An
Introduction to Systems
Programming
Addison Wesley
593
Year of
Publication
2011
Aho A U
Ravi Sethi
Ullman J D
2.
Compilers Principles
Techniques and Tools
Addison Wesley
2009
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Dhamdhere D M
System Programming and

Operating Systems
Tata Mc Graw Hill

Company
2000
2.
John J Donovan
Systems Programming
Tata Mc Graw Hill
2000
3.
Shalini A C
System Software
SCITECH Publications
2007
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.users.encs.concordia.ca/~zanibbi/comp229_PP/Slides/COMP229_PP_Week1.pdf
http://www.google.co.in/search?hl=en&q=Basic+Loader+Functions&btnG=Search&meta
http://www.google.co.in/search?hl=en&q=Loaders+and+Linkers&btnG=Search&meta
http://www.csie.ncu.edu.tw/~chia/Course/Assembly/macro.ppt
http://www.personal.kent.edu/~rmuhamma/Compilers/compiler.html
13Z302
COMPUTER NETWORKS
3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand networking concepts and basic communication model.
To understand network architectures and components required for data communication.
To analyze the function and design strategy of physical, data link, network layer and transport
layer.
To acquire knowledge of various application protocol standard developed for internet.
OUTCOMES:
trace the flow of information from one node to another node in the network.
identify the components required to build different types of networks.
understand the functionalities needed for data communication into layers.
choose the required functionality at each layer for given application.
understand the working principles of various application protocols.

UNIT I
DATA COMMUNICATIONS
9
Components Direction of data flow Networks Components and categories Types of connections
Topologies Protocols and standards ISO / OSI model Transmission media Coaxial cable Fiber
optics Line coding Modems RS232 interfacing sequences.
UNIT II
DATA LINK LAYER
9
Error Detection and correction Parity LRC CRC Hamming code Low control and error control
Stop and wait Go back NARQ Selective repeat ARQ Sliding window HDLC LAN Ethernet
IEEE 802.3 IEEE 802.4 IEEE 802.5 IEEE 802.11 FDDI SONET Bridges.
594
UNIT III
NETWORK LAYER
9
Internetworks Packet switching and datagram approach IP addressing methods Subnetting Routing
Distance vector routing Link state routing Routers.
UNIT IV
TRANSPORT LAYER
9
Duties of transport layer Multiplexing De-multiplexing Sockets User datagram protocol (UDP)
Transmission control protocol (TCP) Congestion control Quality of services (QOS) Integrated
services.
UNIT V
APPLICATION LAYER
Domain name space (DNS) SMTP FTP HTTP WWW Security Cryptography.
9
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Sl. No.
Author(s)
1.
Behrouz A Forouzan
Data communication and

Networking
Tata McGrawHill
2013
2.
Andrew S Tanenbaum
Computer Networks
PHI, Fourth Edition
2003
Publisher
Year of
Publication
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
James F Kurose
Keith W Ross
Computer Networking: A
TopDown Approach
Featuring the Internet
Pearson Education
2003
2.
William Stallings
Data and Computer

Communication
Pearson Education, 6th

Edition
2000
Douglas E Comer
Internetworking with
TCP/IP Principles,
Protocols and
Architecture
Addison Wesley, 6th

Edition
2013
3.
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.williamstallings.com/DCC/DCC7e.html
http://www.cs.utsa.edu
http://www.pptsearch.co.cc/datacommunicationandnetworkingforouzanppt
http://htmlpdfconverter.com/pdf/datacommunicationandnetworkingforouzan3rd.html
13Z303
SOFTWARE TESTING
3
OBJECTIVES:
To know the behavior of the testing techniques and to detect the errors in the software
To understand standard principles to check the occurrence of defects and its removal.
To learn the functionality of automated testing tools
To understand the models of software reliability.
595
OUTCOMES:
test the software by applying testing techniques to deliver a product free from bugs
evaluate the web applications using bug tracking tools.
investigate the scenario and able to select the proper testing technique
explore the test automation concepts and tools
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Software testing background Software bugs Cost of bugs Software testing realities Testing axioms
Precision and accuracy Verification and validation Quality and reliability Testing and quality
assurance.
UNIT II
SOFTWARE TESTING METHODOLOGY
9
Functional testing Structural testing Static and dynamic testing Low level specification test techniques
Equivalence partitioning Data testing State testing Formal reviews Coding standards and
guidelines Code review checklist Data coverage Code coverage.
UNIT III
SOFTWARE TESTING TECHNIQUES
9
Configuration testing Compatibility testing Foreign language testing Usability testing Testing the
documentation Testing for software security Website testing.
UNIT IV
AUTOMATED TESTING AND TEST TOOLS
9
Benefits of automation and tools Viewers and monitors Drivers Stubs Stress and load tools
Analysis tools Software test automation Random testing Beta testing.
UNIT V
TEST DOCUMENTATION
9
Goal of test planning Test phases Test strategy Resource requirements Test schedule Writing and
tracking test cases Bug tracking systems Metrics and statistics Risks and issues.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Glenford J Myers
Tom Badgett
Corey Sandler
The Art of Software

Testing
John Wiley and Sons

publication, 3rd edition
2012
2.
Ron Patton
Software testing
Pearson education,
2nd edition
2009
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Boris Beizer
Software Testing Techniques
Dream Tech Press
2009
2.
Srinivasan Desikan
Gopalaswamy
Ramesh
Software Testing Principles

and Practices
Pearson education
2009
3.
Aditya P Mathur
Foundations of Software
Testing
Pearson Education
2008
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
http://www.cs.ucl.ac.uk/staff/A.Finkelstein/advmsc/0.pdf
http://www.utest.com
http://www.softwaretesting.com
596
4.
5.
http://www.softwareqatest.com
http://www.softwaretestinghelp.com
13Z304
WEB APPLICATIONS USING JAVA

3
3.5
OBJECTIVES:
To provide an overview of working principles of internet, web related functionalities.
To understand and apply core java, packages, database connectivity for computing.
To enhance the knowledge of server side programming.
To provide knowledge on advanced features like RMI, Sockets.
OUTCOMES:
understand the internet standards and recent web technologies like Conferencing, newsgroup etc.
implement, compile, test and run Java program.
make use of hierarchy of Java classes to provide a solution to a given set of requirements found in
the Java API.
understand the components and patterns that constitute a suitable architecture for a web
application using Java Servlets.
demonstrate systematic knowledge of back end and front end by developing an appropriate
application.
UNIT I
INTERNET CONCEPTS
12
Internet standards WWW and internet concepts Components of network Protocols TCP and UDP
protocols, URLs URI and URL HTML Introduction to SGML Mark up languages HTML tags
Links Hot spots Components Text field Buttons Labels Forms Frames Tables Lists Web
page design options.
UNIT II
JAVA PROGRAMMING
12
Core Java Data types Control structures Arrays Strings Inheritance Packages Exception
handling I/O streams and files Database connectivity Drivers JDBC ODBC connectivity.
UNIT III
AWT PROGRAMMING
12
Java applet Applet life cycle AWT controls Look and feel Layout managers Events Event
handling Image handling Introduction to Java Swing.
UNIT IV
JAVA NETWORKING
12
Socket programming Datagram socket TCP /IP sockets Client/Server programs E-mail client
SMTP POP3 programs Web page retrieval Protocol handlers Content handlers. RMI Distributed
computing RMI architecture Naming remote objects Using RMI Marshalling.
UNIT V
SERVER SIDE PROGRAMMING
12
Servlets Life cycle Deployment in any web server HTTP GET and POST request. JSP JSP
architecture Life cycle Basic tags Models and objects Simple web applications (using Servlets and
JSP) Session management (Servlets) Sessions Creation Tracking Cookies.
TOTAL: 45 + 15
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
1.
Author(s)
Neha Ramanandi
Title of the Book
Global Academic
Publishers and
Distributors
Internet and Java

Programming
597
Publisher
Year of
Publication
2012
2.
Krishnamoorthy R
Internet and Java

Programming
2012
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Harvey Deitel
Abbey Deitel
Internet and World Wide Web

: How to Program
Pearson Education
Publishers
2010
2.
Elliotte Rusty Harold
Java Network Programming
O Reilly Publishers
2012
3.
Jason Hunter
Java Servlets Programming
Shroff Mumbai
2011
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.w3schools.com/html/DEFAULT.asp
http://www.java.sun.com/products
http://www.freejavaguide.com/corejava.htm
http://www.w3.org/Style/Examples/011/firstcss
http://www.howtocreate.co.uk/tutorials/javascript/
13Z305
E-COMMERCE
3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the E-Commerce strategies and value chains.
To understand the E-Commerce services.
To understand E-Commerce infrastructure and applications.
To know the availability of latest technology and applications of M-Commerce in various
domains.
To apply E-Commerce in business-to-business application.
OUTCOMES:
apply E-Commerce principles in market place.
apply E-Commerce principles to various business domains.
understand the theory and applications of E-Commerce in business domain.
get an exposure to current technological advancements in E-Commerce.
build E-Commerce business models.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Networks and commercial transactions Internet and other novelties Electronic transactions today
Commercial transactions Establishing trust Internet environment Internet advantage World Wide
Web.
UNIT II
SECURITY TECHNOLOGIES
9
Why internet is unsecure Internet security holes Cryptography Objective Codes and ciphers
Breaking encryption schemes Data encryption standard Trusted key distribution and verification
Cryptographic applications Encryption Digital signature Non repudiation and message integrity.
598
UNIT III
ELECTRONIC PAYMENT METHODS
9
Traditional transactions Updating Offline and online transactions Secure web servers Required
facilities Digital currencies and payment systems Protocols for the public transport Security
protocols SET Credit card business basics.
UNIT IV
ELECTRONIC COMMERCE PROVIDERS
9
Online commerce options Functions and features Payment systems Electronic Digital and Virtual
internet payment system Account setup and costs Virtual transaction process InfoHaus Security
considerations Cyber cash Model Security Customer protection Client application Selling
through cyber cash.
UNIT V
ONLINE COMMERCE ENVIRONMENTS
9
Servers and commercial environments Payment methods Server market orientation Netscape
commerce server Microsoft internet servers Digital currencies Digicash Using ecash Ecash
client software and implementation Smart cards The chip Electronic data interchange Internet
strategies, techniques and tools.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Year of
Publication
Publisher
1.
Pete Loshin
Electronic Commerce
An imprint of Laxmi
Publications, 4th Edition
2006
2.
Jeffrey F Rayport
Bernard J Jaworski
Introduction to E Commerce
Tata McGraw Hill,

2nd Edition
2003
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
1.
Gary P Schneider
Manlyn Greenstein
Miklos
Laudon
Kenneth
Traver
Carol Guercio
2.
3.
Title of the Book
Year of
Publication
Publisher
Electronic Commerce
Thomson learning and James

T Peny Cambridge USA
2001
Electronic Commerce
Tata McGraw Hill
2002
E - Commerce 2013
Pearson Education
2012
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.webinnovation.in
http://www.intranetservices.com/ecommerce_websites.asp
http://www.ecommerceeducation.com
http://www.indiaecommerce.com/Benefitofecommerce.html
http://www.aug.edu/~sbamdm/ecommerce/Lecture/lecture10.htm
13Z311

0
1.5
OBJECTIVES:
To understand functionalities of Routing Protocols.
To understand socket programming in its entirety.
To understand usage of TCP/ UDP / Raw sockets.
To understand how to build DNS, HTTP, E-mail, multi-user chat application.
599
OUTCOMES:
write socket based programs.
design and implement clientserver applications using TCP and UDP sockets.
implement Sliding window protocol.
develop DNS, HTTP, Email, multiuser chat applications.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Socket Programming.
a. TCP Sockets.
b. UDP Sockets.
2. Applications using Sockets TCP Chat.
3. Applications using Sockets UDP Chat.
4. Simulation of Sliding Window Protocol.
5. Simulation of Routing Protocols.
6. RPC.
7. Development of DNS application.
8. Development of HTTP application.
9. Development of E mail application.
10. Development of Multi user Chat.
13Z312
SOFTWARE TESTING LABORATORY

0
1.5
OBJECTIVES:
To study various testing tools.
To know the testing techniques.
To know about automated test case generation tools.
OUTCOMES:
perform automated testing on applications using test tools.
design and develop automated test case generation tools.
implement various testing techniques.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Study of software testing tools such as WinRunner, LoadRunner, Rational Rose Test Suite etc.
2. Implementation of testing techniques using tools:
(1) Function testing
(2) System testing
(3) Acceptance testing
(4) Usability testing
(5) Agile testing
(6) Configuration testing
(7) Compatibility testing
(8) Foreign language testing
(9) Security testing
3. Miniproject: developing automated test case generation tool for following domains:
a) Website development
b) Passport management system
c) Health care
d) Finance management
e) Travel reservation system
f) Mobile application
600
13Z313
WEB APPLICATIONS USING JAVA LABORATORY

0
1.5
OBJECTIVES:
To provide an overview of working principles of Internet, web related functionalities.
To understand and apply core java, packages, database connectivity for computing.
To enhance the knowledge of server side programming.
OUTCOMES:
implement, compile, test and run Java program.
make use of hierarchy of Java classes to provide a solution to a given set of requirements found in
the Java API.
understand the components and patterns that constitute a suitable architecture for a web
application using Java servlets.
demonstrate systematic knowledge of backend and front end by developing an appropriate
application.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1.
2.
3.
HTML Program to create web application which makes use of the HTML tags and forms.
HTML Program to create web application which makes use of the HTML frames and hotspots.
HTML Program to create web application which makes use of the HTML buttons and image
maps.
4. Java program to demonstrate the usage of inheritance using packages.
5. Java program to demonstrate exception handling using streams.
6. Java program to illustrate the usage of JDBC connectivity.
7. Java AWT programs to demonstrate the use of various AWT Components.
8. Java Applet GUI program to illustrate the usage of JDBC connectivity.
9. Programs in Java using Servlets to invoke Servlets from HTML forms.
10. JSP program to add your personal data to the web site by creating sessions and handling them.
601
SEMESTER IV
13Z401
OBJECT ORIENTED ANALYSIS AND DESIGN

3
OBJECTIVES:
To provide a brief, hands-on overview of object-oriented analysis in software process.
To discuss Case studies based project specifications to develop object-oriented models and
identify implementation strategies.
To demonstrate and apply basic object oriented techniques to create and modify object oriented
analysis and design models.
To understand and apply testing techniques for object oriented software.
OUTCOMES:
understand the basic concepts to identify state and behavior of real world objects.
learn the various object oriented methodologies and choose the appropriate one for solving the
problem with the help of various case studies.
implement analysis, design and testing phases in developing a software project.
understand the testing strategies and the debugging principles.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Overview Object basics Objects Class hierarchy Object relationships and associations
Aggregation Object identity Static and dynamic binding Object persistence Meta classes Object
Oriented systems development life cycle Software development process Object Oriented systems
development.
UNIT II
OBJECT ORIENTED METHODOLOGIES
9
Rumbaugh methodology Booch methodology Jacobson methodology Patterns Frameworks
Unified approach Unified modeling language Static and dynamic models UML diagrams UML
class diagram Use case diagram UML dynamic modeling.
UNIT III
OBJECT ORIENTED ANALYSIS
9
Identifying use cases Use-Case driven object oriented analysis Use-Case model Object analysis
Classification Approaches for identifying classes Identifying object relationships Attributes and
methods Associations Super-Sub Class relationships A-Part-of Relationships Class responsibility.
UNIT IV
OBJECT ORIENTED DESIGN
9
Design axioms Corollaries Designing classes Class visibility Refining attributes Designing
methods and protocols Access layer Object storage Database management systems Database
organization Distributed database and client server computing Distributed objects computing Object
oriented database management systems Object relational systems Multidatabase systems Designing
access layer View layer Macro level process Micro level process.
UNIT V
SOFTWARE QUALITY AND USABILITY
9
Software quality assurance Quality assurance tests Testing strategies Test cases Test plan
Continuous testing Debugging principles System usability Usability testing User satisfaction
testing.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
1.
Author(s)
Ali Bahrami
Title of the Book

Object Oriented Systems
Development
602
Publisher
Tata McGrawHill
Year of
Publication
2012
2.
Martin Fowler
Second Edition,
PHI/Pearson
Education
UML Distilled
2012
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Stephen R Schach
Introduction to Object
Oriented Analysis and
Design
Tata McGrawHill
2003
2.
James Rumbaugh
Ivar Jacobson
Grady Booch
The Unified Modeling

Language reference Manual
Addison Wesley
1999
3.
HansErik Eriksson
Magnus Penker
Brain Lyons
David Fado
UML Toolkit
OMG Press Wiley

Publishing Inc
2006
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://uml-tutorials.trireme.com/
http://www.sqa.org.uk/e-learning/SDM01CD/page_05.htm
http://www.umsl.edu/~sauterv/analysis/488_f01_papers/quillin.htm
http:// staffwww.dcs.shef.ac.uk/people/A.Simons/discovery/ooadfls.html
http://www.tutorialspoint.com/uml/uml_overview.htm
13Z402
WEB TECHNOLOGY
3 0 0
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the concepts and architecture of the World Wide Web.
To understand and practice mark up languages.
To understand and practice embedded dynamic scripting on client side Internet Programming.
To understand and practice web development techniques on clientside.
OUTCOMES:
acquire knowledge about functionalities of world wide web.
explore markup languages features and create interactive web pages using them.
learn and design Client side validation using scripting languages.
acquire knowledge about Open source JavaScript libraries.
able to design front end web page and connect to the back end databases.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO WWW
9
Internet standards Introduction to WWW WWW architecture SMTP POP3 File transfer protocol
Overview of HTTP HTTP request Response Generation of dynamic web pages.
UNIT II
MANAGING DESIGN PROCESS AND TOOLS
9
Markup language (HTML) Introduction to HTML and HTML5 Formatting and fonts Commenting
code Anchors Backgrounds Images Hyperlinks Lists Tables Frames HTML forms.
Cascading style sheet (CSS) The need for CSS Introduction to CSS Basic syntax and structure Inline
styles Embedding style sheets Linking external style sheets Backgrounds Manipulating text
Margins and padding Positioning using CSS.
603
UNIT III
INTRODUCTION TO JAVA SCRIPT
9
Introduction Core features Data types and variables Operators Expressions and statements
Functions Objects Array Date and math related objects Document object model Event handling
Controlling windows Frames and documents Form handling and validations.
UNIT IV
ADVANCED JAVA SCRIPT
9
Browser management and media management Classes Constructors Object Oriented techniques in
JavaScript Object constructor and prototyping Sub classes and super classes JSON jQuery and
AJAX.
UNIT V
PHP
9
Introduction How web works Setting up the environment (LAMP server) Programming basics
Print/echo Variables and constants Strings and arrays Operators Control structures and looping
structures Functions Reading data in web pages Embedding PHP within HTML Establishing
connectivity with MySQL database.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Year of
Publication
2011
Publisher
1.
Harvey Deitel
Abbey Deitel
Internet and World Wide

Web How To Program
Pearson Education
2.
Achyut S Godbole
Atul Kahate
Web Technologies
Tata McGraw Hill
2012
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Year of
Publication
Publisher
1.
Thomas A Powell
Fritz Schneider
JavaScript: The Complete

Reference
Tata
McGraw Hill
2013
2.
David Flanagan
JavaScript: The Definitive

Guide,
O'Reilly Media
2011
3.
Mike Mcgrath
PHP & MySQL in easy

Steps
Tata McGraw Hill
2012
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.dynamicdrive.com/
http://www.ryerson.ca/JavaScript/lectures/contents.html
http://www.leepoint.net/notes-java/index.html
http://www.bcanotes.com/Java.html
http://www.notesengine.com/dept/cse/6sem/anna-university-6-sem-web-technology-wtnotes.html
13Z403
VISUAL PROGRAMMING
3
3.5
OBJECTIVES:
To introduce the concepts of Visual Programming.
To introduce GUI programming.
To develop program using Microsoft Foundation Classes.
To enable the students to develop programs and simple applications using Visual C++.
604
OUTCOMES:
work on windows Programming.
design Single and Multiple Document Interface.
create and utilize Dynamic Link Library.
design Component Object Model.
work with Front End and Back End (Database Connectivity)
UNIT I
WINDOWS PROGRAMMING
12
Windows environment A simple windows program Windows and messages Creating the window
Displaying the window Message loop The window procedure Message processing Text output
Painting and repainting Introduction to GDI Device context Basic drawing Child window controls.
UNIT II
VISUAL C++ PROGRAMMING INTRODUCTION
12
Application framework Introduction to SDI and MDI MFC library Visual C++ components Event
handling Mapping modes Colors Fonts Modal and modeless dialog Windows common controls
Bitmaps.
UNIT III
THE DOCUMENT AND VIEW ARCHITECTURE
12
Menus Keyboard accelerators Rich edit control Toolbars Status bars Reading and writing SDI and
MDI documents Splitter window and multiple views Creating DLLs Creating user defined DLL's
Dialog based applications.
UNIT IV
ACTIVEX CONTROLS, COM AND OLE
12
ActiveX control Vs Ordinary windows controls Installing ActiveX controls Calendar control ActiveX
control container programming Create ActiveX control at runtime Component object model (COM)
Containment and aggregation Vs Inheritance Object Linking and Embedding OLE drag and drop
OLE embedded component and container Interfaces of OLE.
UNIT V
DATABASE CONNECTIVITY AND ADVANCED CONCEPTS
12
Database management with ODBC Database management with DAO Threading VC++ networking
issues WINSOCK.
TOTAL: 45 + 15
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
Charles Petzold
Windows Programming
Microsoft press
2012
2.
David J Kruglinski
George Shepherd
Scot Wingo
Programming Visual C++
Microsoft press
2002
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Year of
Publication
1.
Pappar Murray
Visual C++ The Complete

Reference
TMH
2000
2.
Steve Holtzner
Visual C++ 6 Programming
Microsoft press Wiley

Dreamtech India Pvt.
Ltd.
2003
3.
Petzold
Windows Programming
Microsoft Press
605
Publisher
2002
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http:// www.hypernews.org/~liberte/computing/visual.html.
http://www.web.engr.oregonstate.edu/~burnett/vpl.html
http://www.mrw.interscience.wiley.com/emrw/9780470050118/ecse/article
http://www.ecse450/current/abstract
http://www.edunotes.in/visual-programming
13Z404

3
OBJECTIVES:
To expose the students to the concepts of Data warehousing Architecture and Implementation.
To Understand Data mining principles and techniques and Introduce Data Mining as cutting edge
business intelligence.
To learn to use association rule mining for handling large data.
To understand the concept of classification for the retrieval purposes.
To know the clustering techniques in details for better organization and retrieval of data.
OUTCOMES:
store voluminous data for online processing.
preprocess the data for mining applications.
apply the association rules for mining the data.
design and deploy appropriate classification techniques.
cluster the high dimensional data for better organization of the data.
UNIT I
DATA WAREHOUSE
9
Data warehousing Operational database systems Vs Data warehouses Multidimensional data model
Schemas for multidimensional databases OLAP operations Data warehouse architecture Indexing
OLAP queries and tools.
UNIT II
DATA MINING AND DATA PREPROCESSING
9
Introduction to KDD process Knowledge discovery from databases Need for data preprocessing Data
cleaning Data integration and transformation Data reduction Data discretization and concept
hierarchy generation.
UNIT III
ASSOCIATION RULE MINING
9
Introduction Data mining functionalities Association rule mining Mining frequent itemsets with and
without candidate generation Mining various kinds of association rules Constraintbased association
mining.
UNIT IV
CLASSIFICATION AND PREDICTION
9
Classification vs. prediction Data preparation for classification and prediction Classification by decision
tree Introduction Bayesian classification Rule based classification Classification by back
propagation Support vector machines Associative classification Lazy learners Other classification
methods Prediction Accuracy and error measures Evaluating the accuracy of a classifier or predictor
Ensemble methods Model section.
UNIT V
CLUSTERING
9
Cluster analysis Types of data in cluster analysis A categorization of major clustering methods
Partitioning methods Hierarchical methods Densitybased methods Gridbased methods Model
based clustering methods Clustering high dimensional data Constraintbased cluster analysis
Outlier analysis.
TOTAL: 45
606
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Year of
Publication
Publisher
1.
Jiawei Han
Micheline Kamber
Data Mining: Concepts and

Techniques
Morgan Kaufmann,
2nd Edition
2008
2.
Alex Berson
Stephen J Smith
Data Warehousing, Data Mining

and OLAP
Tata McGraw Hill
2004
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Year of
Publication
Publisher
1.
Usama M Fayyad
Gregory Piatetsky
Shapiro Padhrai Smyth
Ramasamy Uthurusamy
Advances In Knowledge
Discovery And Data Mining
The M.I.T Press
2000
2.
Ralph Kimball
The Data Warehouse Life

Cycle Toolkit
John Wiley and

Sons Inc.,
2001
3.
Bharat Bhushan Agarwal

Sumit Prakash Tayal
Data Mining and Data

Warehousing
Laxmi
Publication,
First Edition
2009
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.iiit.net
http://www.obitko.com
http://www.cs.sunysb.edu
http://www.cs.drexel.edu
http://www.cs.gsu.edu/~cscyqz/courses/dm/dmlectures.html
13Z411
CASE TOOLS LABORATORY

0
1.5
OBJECTIVES:
To learn basic OO analysis and design skills through an elaborate case study.
To use the UML design diagrams.
To apply the appropriate design patterns.
OUTCOMES
design UML diagrams.
use appropriate method for analyzing classes.
apply the appropriate design patterns.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1.
2.
3.
4.
To develop a problem statement.

Develop an SRS document.
Identify Use Cases and develop the Use Case model.
Identify the business activities and develop an UML Activity diagram.
607
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Identity the conceptual classes and develop a domain model with UML Class Diagram.
Use the following scenarios to find the interaction between objects and represent those using UML
Interaction diagrams.
Passport automation system.
Library Management system.
Exam Registration.
Stock Maintenance system.
Online Examination System.
Eticketing.
Credit card processing
Book management system.
Recruitment system.
Draw the State Chart diagram.
Implement the User Interface layer.
Draw Component and Deployment diagrams.
13Z412
WEB TECHNOLOGY LABORATORY

0
1.5
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the concepts and architecture of the World Wide Web.
To understand and practice mark up languages.
To understand and practice embedded dynamic scripting on client side Internet Programming.
To understand and practice web development techniques on clientside.
OUTCOMES:
Learners should able to
explore markup languages features and create interactive web pages using them.
learn and design Client side validation using scripting languages.
acquire knowledge about Open source JavaScript libraries.
design front end web page and connect to the back end databases.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Create a web page with the following using HTML5
(i) To embed an image map in a web page
(ii) To fix the hot spots
(iii) Show all the related information when the hot spots are clicked.
2. Create a web page with all types of Cascading style sheets.
3. Implement Client Side Scripts for Validating Web Form Controls using JavaScript.
4. Designing Quiz Application Personal Information System/ Using JavaScript.
5. Write a JavaScript for Loan Calculation.
6. Develop and demonstrate a HTML file that includes JavaScript that uses functions for the
following problems:
a) Parameter: A string
Output : The position in the string of the leftmost vowel
b) Parameter: A number
Output : The number with its digits in the reverse order
7. Develop PHP program using Arrays, control structures, looping structures and Form Handling.
8. Develop a web application for Airline Reservation System using PHP.
608
13Z413
VISUAL PROGRAMMING LABORATORY

0
1.5
OBJECTIVES:
To introduce the concepts of visual programming.
To introduce GUI programming.
To develop program using Microsoft Foundation Classes.
To enable the students to develop programs and simple applications using Visual C++.
OUTCOMES:
work on windows Programming.
design Single and Multiple Document Interface.
create and utilize Dynamic Link Library.
design Component Object Model.
able to work with Front End and Back End (Database Connectivity)
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
Windows SDK / Visual C++
1.
Display a Simple Message Box and a Simple Window.
2.
Program to create child window.
3.
Writing code for keyboard and mouse events.
4.
Dialog Based applications..
5.
Creating SDI and MDI applications.
Visual C++
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Threads.
Document view Architecture in SDI.
Dynamic controls.
Menu, Accelerator, Tool tip, Tool bar.
Creating DLLs and using them.
Data base access through ODBC.
Creating ActiveX control and using it.
Data base access through DAO.
Document view Architecture with Serialization.
609
ELECTIVES
13Z001
ACCOUNTING AND FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT

3
OBJECTIVES
To understand the basic principles of Double entry system and preparation of balance sheet.
To understand the process of estimating the cost of a particular product.
To Prepare the estimate for various business activities such as purchase, sale, production and
cash budgets.
To ensure decision making process of an organization.
OUTCOMES
understand the balance sheet preparation and do analysis.
understand the budget preparation and control of a company
decide about the state of affairs of a particular firm / company.
ensure the preparation of fiscal policies of the organization.
ensure the factors to be considered in investment policies.
UNIT I
FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING
9
Meaning and scope of accounting Principles Concepts Conventions Accounting standards Final
accounts Trail balance Trading account Profit and loss account Balance sheet Accounting ratio
analysis Funds flow analysis Cash flow analysis.
UNIT II
ACCOUNTING
9
Meaning Objectives Elements of cost Cost sheet Marginal costing and cost volume profit analysis
Break even analysis Applications Limitations Standard costing and variance analysis Material
LaborOverhead Sales Profit variances.
UNIT III
BUDGETS AND BUDGETING CONTROL
9
Budgets and budgetary control Meaning Types Sales budget Production budget Cost of
production budget Flexible budgeting Cash budget Master budget Zero base budgeting
Computerized accounting.
UNIT IV
INVESTMENT DECISION AND COST OF CAPITAL
9
Objectives and functions of financial management Risk Return relationship Time value of money
concepts Capital budgeting Methods of appraisal Cost of capital factors affecting cost of capital
Computation for each source of finance and weighted average cost of capital.
UNIT V
FINANCING DECISION AND WORKING CAPITAL MANAGEMENT
9
Capital structure Factors affecting capital structure Dividend policy Types of dividend policy
Concepts of working capital Working capital policies Factors affecting working capital Estimation of
working capital requirements.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Year of
Publication
1.
Maheswari S N
Financial and Management

Accounting
Sultan Chand and

Sons, 5th edition
2010
2.
Pandey I M
Financial Management
Vikas Publishing
House Pvt. Ltd, 9th
Edition
2009
610
Publisher
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Khan M Y
Jain P K
Financial Management, Text,

Problems and Cases
Tata McGraw Hill, 5th

Edition
2008
2.
Aswat Damodaran
Corporate Finance Thoery and

Practice
John Wiley and Sons
2008
3.
Pandey I M
Management Accounting
Vikas Publishing
House Pvt. Ltd, 3rd
Edition
2009
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.thearchives.net/power_points/fin_acct/fin_acct_notes.html
http://www.scribd.com/doc/11389327/IntroductiontoAccountingLectureNotes
http://www.nos.org/srsec320newE/320EL27a.pdf
http://www.scribd.com/doc/15684466/ManagementAccountingNotes
http://www.scribd.com/doc/18740959/managementaccountingnotes
13Z002
AGENT BASED INTELLIGENT SYSTEM

3
OBJECTIVES:
To represent knowledge.
To plan the agents.
To know about uncertainty.
To learn the grammars.
OUTCOMES:
understand the knowledge representation.
know the approaches to uncertain reasoning.
Plan the multi agents.
understand the grammars.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Definitions Foundations History Intelligent agents Structure Problem solving Solving problem
by searching Search strategies Informed search methods Heuristics functions Game playing.
UNIT II
KNOWLEDGE REPRESENTATION AND REASONING
9
Logical agents First order logic Building knowledge base General ontology First order inference
Unification Chaining Resolution strategies.
UNIT III
PLANNING AGENTS
9
Planning problem Basic representations for planning Partial order planning Practical planning
Practical planners hierarchical decomposition Conditional planning Continuous planning Multi agent
planning.
UNIT IV
AGENTS AND UNCERTAINTY
9
Acting under uncertainty Probability notation Bayes rule and bayesian networks Other approaches to
uncertain reasoning Utility theory Decision network Complex decisions.
611
UNIT V
HIGHER LEVEL AGENTS
9
Knowledge in learning Relevance information Statistical learning methods Reinforcement learning
Communication Formal grammar Augmented grammars Future of AI.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Stuart Russell
Peter Norvig
Artificial Intelligence A
Modern Approach
Prentice Hall,
3rd Edition
2014
2.
Michael Wooldridge
An Introduction to Multi
Agent System
John Wiley and Sons
2002
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Schalkoff R J
Artificial Intelligence an
McGraw Hill
2001
2.
Patrick Henry
Winston
AddisonWesley Series in
Computer science,
3rd Edition
1999
3.
Nils J Nilsson
Principles of Artificial
Intelligence
Narosa Publishing House
2001
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://aima.cs.berkeley.edu/newchap05.pdf
http://www.eng.tau.ac.il
http://www.inf.ed.ac.uk/teaching/courses/abs/slides/abs01-introduction-2x2.pdf
13Z003
ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE
3
OBJECTIVES:
To learn the basics of designing intelligent agents that can solve general purpose problems.
To represent and process knowledge.
To plan and act, reason under uncertainty and learn from experiences.
To know about expert systems.
OUTCOMES:
understand the scope of AI.
represent the knowledge.
handle uncertainty.
Understand the expert systems.
UNIT I
SCOPE OF AI
9
Games Theorem proving Natural language processing Syntactic processing Semantic analysis
Discourse and pragmatic processing Vision and speech processing Robotics Expert systems
Representing and using domain knowledge Expert system shells Knowledge acquisition AI
techniques Search knowledge Abstraction.
612
UNIT II
PROBLEM SOLVING
9
State space search Production systems Problem characteristics Production system characteristics
Issues Search space control Depthfirst Breadthfirst search Heuristic search Hill climbing
Bestfirst search Branch and bound Problem reduction Constraint satisfaction Means End
analysis.
UNIT III
KNOWLEDGE REPRESENTATION
9
Predicate logic Unification Modus pones Resolution Dependency directed backtracking Rule
based systems Forward reasoning Conflict resolution Backward reasoning Resolution Knowledge
representation Use of no backtracks Structured knowledge representation Semantic nets Slots
Exceptions and default frames Conceptual dependency Scripts.
UNIT IV
HANDLING UNCERTAINTY
9
Nonmonotonic reasoning Logics Implementation issues Augmenting a problem solver
Implementation Depth first search and Breadth first search Probabilistic reasoning Use of
certainty factors and rule based systems Bayesian networks DempsterShafer theory Fuzzy logic.
UNIT V
EXPERT SYSTEMS
9
Concept of learning Rote learning Learning automation Genetic algorithm Learning in problem
solving Learning by inductions Formal learning theory Neural nets Need and justification for expert
systems Knowledge acquisition Case studies: MYCIN, RI.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Rich E
Knight K
Tata McGraw Hill
2000
2.
Nilsson N J
Principles of AI
Narosa Publishing
House
2001
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Patterson D W
Introduction to AI and Expert

Systems
2001
2.
Peter Jackson
Introduction to Expert
Systems
Addison Wesley,
Third edition
2000
3.
Schalkoff R J
Artificial Intelligence an
McGraw Hill
2001
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.cs.ccsu.edu/~markov/ccsu_courses/ArtificialIntelligence.html
http://www.aaai.org
http://www.aima.cs.berkeley.edu/ai.html
http://www.cs.nott.ac.uk
http://www.cs.gsu.edu/~cscyqz/courses/ai/aiLectures.html
613
13Z004
BIG DATA ANALYSIS

3
OBJECTIVES:
To explore the fundamental concepts of big data analytics.
To learn to analyze the big data using intelligent techniques.
To understand the various search methods and visualization techniques.
To learn to use various techniques for mining data stream.
To understand the applications using Map Reduce Concepts.
OUTCOMES:
work with big data platform.
analyze the big data analytic techniques for useful business applications.
design efficient algorithms for mining the data from large volumes.
analyze the HADOOP and Map Reduce technologies associated with big data analytics.
explore on Big Data applications Using Pig and Hive.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO BIG DATA
9
Introduction to big data Platform Challenges of conventional systems Intelligent data analysis Nature
of data Analytic processes and tools Analysis vs reporting Modern data analytic tools Statistical
concepts Sampling distributions Resampling Statistical inference Prediction error.
UNIT II
MINING DATA STREAMS
9
Introduction to streams concepts Stream data model and architecture Stream computing Sampling
data in a stream Filtering streams Counting distinct elements in a stream Estimating moments
Counting oneness in a window Decaying window Real time analytics platform(RTAP) applications
Case studies Real time sentiment analysis Stock market predictions.
UNIT III
HADOOP
9
History of hadoop The hadoop distributed file system Components of hadoop Analyzing the data with
hadoop Scaling out Hadoop streaming Design of HDFS Java interfaces to HDFS basics
Developing a map reduce application How map reduce works Anatomy of a map reduce job run
Failures Job scheduling Shuffle and sort Task execution Map reduce types and formats Map
reduce features.
UNIT IV
HADOOP ENVIRONMENT
9
Setting up a hadoop cluster Cluster specification Cluster setup and installation Hadoop configuration
Security in hadoop Administering hadoop HDFS Monitoring Maintenance Hadoop benchmarks
Hadoop in the cloud.
UNIT V
FRAMEWORKS
9
Applications on big data using pig and hive Data processing operators in pig Hive services HiveQL
Querying data in hive Fundamentals of HBase and ZooKeeper IBM InfoSphere BigInsights and streams
Visualizations Visual data analysis techniques Interaction techniques Systems and applications.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
1.
Author(s)
Chris Eaton
Dirk DeRoos
Tom Deutsch
George Lapis
Paul Zikopoulos
Title of the Book
Understanding Big Data:

Analytics for Enterprise Class
Hadoop and Streaming Data
614
Publisher
Tata McGraw Hill
Year of
Publication
2012
2.
Tom White
Hadoop: The Definitive

Guide
Third Edition, Oreilly

Media
2012
Publisher
Year of
Publication
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
Anand Rajaraman
Jeffrey David Ullman
Mining of Massive Datasets
Cambridge
University Press
2012
2.
Pete Warden
Big Data Glossary
OReilly
2011
3.
Michael Minelli
Michele Chambers
Ambiga Dhiraj
Big Data, BigAnalytics:

Emerging Business
Intelligence and Analytic
Trends for Today's Businesses
Wiley
Publications
2013
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.cs.tau.ac.il
http://www.cs.utsa.edu
http://www.stanford.edu
http://www.eb.cs.wpi.edu
13Z005
COMPILER DESIGN
3
OBJECTIVES:
Learn how a compiler works.
Know about the powerful compiler generation tools, which are useful to the other noncompiler
applications.
Learn how to write programs that execute faster.
Gain teamwork experience working on a large, complex software project.
Realize that computing science theory can be used as the basis for real applications.
OUTCOMES:
describe the theory and practice of compilation.
create lexical rules and grammars for a programming language.
use Flex or similar tools to create a lexical analyzer and Yacc/Bison tools to create a parser.
design a compiler for a concise programming language.
use current techniques, skills, and tools necessary for computing practices.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO COMPILERS
9
Compilers Analysis of the source program Phases of a compiler Cousins of the compiler Grouping
of phases Compiler construction tools Simple one pass compiler Overview Syntax definition and
syntaxdirected translation Parsing A translator for simple expressions Lexical analysis
Incorporating a symbol table.
UNIT II
LEXICAL ANALYSIS
9
Lexical analysis Role of lexical analyzer Input buffering Specification of tokens Recognition of
tokens Finite automata From regular expression to NFA Design of a lexical analyzer generator
Optimization of DFA based pattern matches.
615
UNIT III
SYNTAX ANALYSIS
9
Role of the parser Context free grammars Writing grammars Top down parsing Recursive descent
parsing Predictive parsing Bottom up parsing Shift reduce parsing Operator precedent parsing
LR parsers SLR parser.
UNIT IV
INTERMEDIATE CODE GENERATION
9
Intermediate languages Declarations Assignment statements Boolean expressions Case statements
Back patching Procedure calls.
UNIT V
CODE GENERATION AND CODE OPTIMIZATION
9
Issues in the design of code generator The target machine Runtime storage management Basic blocks
and flow graphs A simple code generator DAG representation of basic blocks Peephole optimization
Principal sources of optimization Optimization of basic blocks Introduction to global data flow
analysis A look at compilers Compilers for PASCAL C compiler FORTRAN H compilers.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
Alfred Aho
Ravi Sethi
Jeffrey D Ullman
Compilers Principles,
Techniques and Tools
Pearson New
International Edition
2006
2.
Allen I Holub
Compiler Design in C
2003
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
Fischer C N
LeBlanc R J
Crafting a compiler with C
2.
Benne J P
Introduction to Compiler
Techniques
3.
Henk Alblas
Albert Nymeyer
Practice and Principles of

Compiler Building with C
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Benjamin Cummings
2003
Second Edition, Tata

McGrawHill
2003
PHI
2001
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.personal.kent.edu/~rmuhamma/Compilers/compiler.html
http://www.slideshare.net/anniyappa/compilerdesign
http:// www.cse.iitd.ernet.in
http:// www.onesmartclick.com/engineering/compilerdesign.html
http://www.freetechbooks.com/compilerdesignandconstructionf14.html
13Z006
COMPONENT OBJECT TECHNOLOGY

3
OBJECTIVES:
To know the basic concepts of component based development.
To work with interfaces.
To learn the CORBA architecture and services.
To know the various architectures.
616
OUTCOMES:
understand the concepts of Component Based Development.
build the components and objects.
understand the CORBA architecture and CORBA Services.
understand the DCOM architecture and DCOM services.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Definition Industrialization of software development Component based development drivers and
benefits Technology evolution Components and network computing
UNIT II
FUNDAMENTALS
9
Basic concepts of component based development Scenarios for component based development
Evolution or revolution Build find and use components and objects.
UNIT III
MODELS
9
Basic concepts of object models Components and Interfaces Working with interfaces Component and
interface modeling Specification models Domain modeling Describing classes Patterns and
frameworks.
UNIT IV
USING CBD
9
Categorizing and deploying components CORBA Architecture of CORBA CORBA Services CORBA
Security Issues Portable Object Adapter BOA POA DCOM Architecture DCOM Services
DCOM Activation Framework Clustering in DCOM.
UNIT V
FRAMEWORKS
Class libraries Encapsulated components Software frameworks Pre- Built applications.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Kuth Short
Component Based
Development and Object
Modeling
Sterling software
2000
2.
Clemens Szyperski
The Component Object Model
Addison Wesley
2002
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No
Publisher
Eichner B
Kamber D
Murer
CORBA: Principles and

Practical Experience
AddisonWesley
2003
2.
White head K
Component Based
DevelopmentPrinciples
and Planning for Business
Systems
AddisonWesley
2003
3.
Szyperski C PFister
Black Box: A Component

Framework for Compound
user interfaces
AddisonWesley
617
Year of
Publication
Title of the Book
1.
Author(s)
2002
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.selectbs.com/adt/analysisanddesign/componentbaseddevelopmentcbd
http://www.ratio.co.uk/architectural_reference_model.pdf
http://www.slideshare.net/elfuchs/componentbasedsoftwaredevelopmentpresentation
http://www.objs.com/workshops/ws9801/papers/paper051.doc
http://www.cs.utah.edu/flux/oskit/html/oskit-wwwch4.html
13Z007
CRYPTOGRAPHY AND STEGANOGRAPHY

3
OBJECTIVES:
To introduce the concept s of Cryptography.
To introduce Conventional and public key Encryption.
To introduce HASH and MAC Algorithms.
To enable the students to have introduction in Steganography Concepts.
OUTCOMES:
use conventional encryption algorithms.
implement Conventional and Public key Encryption.
gather knowledge about HASH and MAC Algorithms.
gather knowledge about Steganography Concepts.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Introduction to cryptography Introduction to security Attacks Security and mechanisms Classical
techniques Conventional encryption model and steganography Classical encryption techniques. Modern
techniques Simplified DES Block cipher principles DES standard DES strength Block cipher
design principles.
UNIT II
CONVENTIONAL ENCRYPTION
9
Conventional symmetric encryption algorithms Triple DES Modes of operation (ECB,CBC, OFB,CFB)
Blowfish International data encryption algorithm RCS CAST128 RC2 placement and
encryption function Key distribution Random number generation Placement of encryption function.
UNIT III
9
Public key encryption Prime numbers Fermats and Eulers theorem Testing for primality The
chinese remainder theorem Key management DiffieHellman ElGamal Key exchange algorithms
Principles of public key cryptosystems RSA algorithm.
UNIT IV
HASH AND MAC ALGORITHMS
9
Message authentication and hash functions Authentication requirements Authentication functions
MACs Hash functions Birthday attacks MD5 message digest algorithm Secure hash algorithm
(SHA) Digital signature standard (DSS).
UNIT V
STEGANOGRAPHY
9
Steganographic communication The channel The building blocks Notation and terminology
Information theoretic foundation of steganography Practical steganographic methods.
TOTAL: 45
618
TEXT BOOKS:
SI.No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
William Stallings

Practice
Prentice Hall, New

Jersey
2011
2.
Ingemar J Cox
Matthew L.Miller
Jeffrey A.Bloom
Jersica Fridrich
Ton Kalker
Digital Watermarking and

Steganography
Burlington (Mass.) :
Morgan Kaufmann
2008
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Sl.No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
Johannes A Buchmann
Introduction to cryptography
Springer
2003
2.
Atul Kahate
Cryptography and network

security
Prentice Hall
2003
3.
Charlie Kaufman Radia

Perlman
Mike Speciner
Network Security : Private

Communication in Public
World
Prentice Hall, 2nd

Edition
2002
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.wisdom.weizmann.ac.il/~oded/ln89.html
http://www.progressivecoding.com/tutorial.php?id=3
http://www.slideshare.net/koolkampus/chapterns2
http://www.dominopower.com/issues/issue199910/encryption001.html
http://www.gnupg.org/documentation/manuals/gcrypt/Workingwithhashalgorithms.html
13Z008
ENTERPRISE RESOURCE PLANNING

3
OBJECTIVE:
To make the students aware of the enterprise resource planning using information technology.
To learn the ERP processes.
To learn the Service Oriented Architecture.
To know the Integrated Processes.
OUTCOMES:
understand the traditional ecosystem and the use of technology in enterprises.
understand the Integration of Processes.
develop the ERP tiers.
execute integrated processes.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO ERP
9
ERP essentials ERP evolution ERP market ERP tiers Information systems Presentation tier
Application tier Database tier.
619
UNIT II
ENTERPRISE SYSTEMS
9
Enterprise systems Stand alone mainframe systems Client server architecture Service oriented
architecture Types of enterprise systems Types of data SAP overview.
UNIT III
PROCESS IN ERP
9
Basic procurement process Physical flow Document flow Information flow Financial impact Role
of enterprise systems in the procurement process Fulfillment process Production process.
UNIT IV
INTEGRATION
9
Integrated processes Integrated processes execution Additional intracompany processes Extended
(intracompany) processes.
UNIT V
CASE STUDY
9
ERP for construction industry ERP for a corrugated box manufacturing company ERP for lens making
company ERP for furniture manufacturing company ERP for toys manufacturing company
Mc Donald's story Automobile enterprises.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Simha R Magal
Jeff Word
Essentials of Business
Processes and Information
Systems
Wiley
Publications
2009
2.
Mahadeo Jaiswal
Ganesh Vanapalli
Macmillan India Ltd
2005
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Marianne Bradford
Modern
ERP:
Select,
Implement and use Today's
advanced business
systems
2.
Jyotindra Zaveri
Himalaya Publishing
House, 2nd edition
2012
3.
Joseph A Brady
Ellen F Monk
Bret J Wangner
Concepts in Enterprise
Resource
Planning
Thomson Learning
2001
Lulu Publishers,
2nd Edition
2010
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.business.com
http://www.website.informer.com
http://www.work.com/enterpriseresourceplanning
http://www.authorstream.com/Presentation/Jennarendra154825enterpriseresourceplanning
erppresentationnarendraaryaleducationpptpowerpoint
http://www.authorstream.com/Presentation/Jennarendra154825enterpriseresourceplanning
erppresentationnarendraaryaleducationpptpowerpoint
620
13Z009
GRID COMPUTING
3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand Grid Architecture.
To understand different types of grids.
To know about Grid standards.
To apply grid computing in various areas.
OUTCOMES:
create Grid Middleware architecture.
explain the services offered by grid.
utilize grid for various applications.
Manage the resources and services.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Parallel and Distributed Computing Cluster computing Grid computing anatomy and physiology of grid
Web and grid services.
UNIT II
FRAMEWORK
9
Architecture Implementation of grid architecture Grid services OGSI OGSA WSRF Grid
resource and service management Layers of grid computing Grid monitoring Grid security.
UNIT III
DATA AND KNOWLEDGE GRID
Data source Collective data service Data management Knowledge oriented grid.
UNIT IV
GRID MIDDLEWARE
9
List of globally available toolkits GT3 Architecture details Security System level services Load
balancing.
UNIT V
APPLICATIONS
Scientific Medical Bioinformatics Federated ERM Collaborative science Case study.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
1.
Ian Foster
Carl Kesselman
The Grid 2: Blueprint for a

New Computing Infrastructure
Elsevier Series
2.
Vladimir Silva
Grid Computing for

Developers
Charles River
Media
Year of
Publication
2004
2006
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Year of
Publication
1.
Foster C Kesselman
Grid Blue print for new

computing Infrastructure
International
Engineering
Consortium
2007
2.
Bart Jacob
Introduction to Grid
Computing
Vervante
2005
621
Publisher
3.
Luis Ferreira
Introduction to grid computing

with Globus
IBM Corp
2003
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.seek.ecoinformatics.org/attach?page=BEAMMeetingDec2004Agenda%2FServillaBE
AM20041214GridIntro.ppt
http://www.cs.utk.edu/~dongarra/WEBPAGES/SPRING2005/Lect12.pdf
http://www.csdl2.computer.org/comp/mags/ds/2005/04/o4004.pdf
http://www.sce.carleton.ca/courses/sysc5207/f08/imranpresentationForClass.ppt
http://www.isi.edu/~annc/classes/grid/lectures/lectures.html
13Z010
SEMANTIC WEB
3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the need of semantic web in web services.
To know the methods to discover, classify and build ontology for more reasonable results in
searching.
To build and implement a small ontology that is semantically descriptive of chosen problem
domain.
To implement applications that can access, use and manipulate the ontology.
OUTCOMES:
understand semantic web basics, architecture and technologies.
able to represent data from a chosen problem in XML with appropriate semantic tags obtained or
derived from the ontology.
able to understand the semantic relationships among these data elements using Resource
Description Framework (RDF).
able to design and implement a web services application that discovers the data and/or other
web services via the semantic web.
able to discover the capabilities and limitations of semantic web technology for social networks.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Introduction to the Syntactic web and Semantic Web Evolution of the Web The visual and syntactic
web Levels of Semantics Metadata for web information The semantic web architecture and
technologies Contrasting Semantic with Conventional Technologies Semantic Modeling Potential of
semantic web solutions and challenges of adoption.
UNIT II
ONTOLOGICAL ENGINEERING
9
Ontologies Taxonomies Topic Maps Classifying Ontologies Terminological aspects: concepts, terms
relations between them Complex Objects Subclasses and Sub-properties definitions Upper
Ontologies Quality Uses Types of terminological resources for ontology building Methods and
methodologies for building ontologies Multilingual Ontologies Ontology Development process and
Life cycle Methods for Ontology Learning Ontology Evolution Versioning.
UNIT III
STRUCTURING AND DESCRIBING WEB RESOURCES
9
Structured Web Documents XML Structuring Namespaces Addressing Querying Processing
RDF RDF Data Model Serialization Formats RDF Vocabulary Inferencing RDFS basic Idea
Classes Properties Utility Properties RDFS Modeling for Combinations and Patterns Transitivity.
UNIT IV
WEB ONTOLOGY LANGUAGE
9
OWL Sub-Languages Basic Notions Classes Defining and Using Properties Domain and Range
Describing Properties Data Types Counting and Sets Negative Property Assertions Advanced Class
Description Equivalence Owl Logic.
622
UNIT V
SEMANTIC WEB TOOLS AND APPLICATION
9
Development Tools for Semantic Web Jena Framework SPARL Querying semantic web Semantic
Wikis Semantic Web Services Modeling and aggregating social network data Ontological
representation of social relationships Aggregating and reasoning with social network data.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Liyang Yu
A Developer's Guide to the

Semantic Web
Springer, First
Edition
2011
2.
John Hebeler
Matthew Fisher
Ryan Blace
Andrew Perez-Lopez
Semantic Web
Programming
Wiley, First
Edition
2009
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No
Author(s)
1.
Grigoris Antoniou
Frank van Harmelen
A Semantic Web Primer
MIT Press, 2nd

Edition
2008
2.
Michael C Daconta
Leo J Obrst
Kevin T Smith
The Semantic Web: A Guide to

the Future of XML, Web
Services, and Knowledge
Management
Wiley, 1st Edition
2003
3.
Peter Mika
Social networks and the

Semantic Web
Springer, 1st
edition
2007
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.idc.hust.edu.cn/~rxli/teaching/semanticweb.htm#Lecture%20Notes
http://www.cs.man.ac.uk/~horrocks/Teaching/cs646/
http://www.dcs.bbk.ac.uk/~michael/sw/sw.html
http://staff.um.edu.mt/cabe2/lectures/csa3210.html
http://www.mit.jyu.fi/ai/vagan/itks544.html
13Z011
HIGH PERFORMANCE COMPUTING

3
OBJECTIVES:
To learn the processing concepts.
To know the various architectures.
To learn the design issues in parallel processing.
To know about the basics of Cloud.
OUTCOMES:
understand the various levels of parallelism.
understand the models.
map parallel algorithms onto parallel architectures.
use the services offered by Cloud
623
UNIT I
PROCESSING CONCEPTS
9
Levels of parallelism (instruction, transaction, task, thread, memory, function) Models (SIMD, MIMD,
SIMT, SPMD, Dataflow Models, Demanddriven Computation etc) Architectures Nwide superscalar
architectures multicore multithreaded.
UNIT II
PARALLEL PROGRAMMING WITH CUDA
9
Processor architecture Interconnect Communication Memory organization and programming models
in high performance computing architectures (Examples: IBM CELL BE, Nvidia Tesla GPU, Intel
Larrabee Microarchitecture and Intel Nehalem microarchitecture) Memory hierarchy and transaction
specific memory design Thread organization.
UNIT III
FUNDAMENTAL DESIGN ISSUES IN PARALLEL COMPUTING
9
Synchronization Scheduling Job allocation Job partitioning Dependency analysis Mapping
parallel algorithms onto parallel architectures Performance analysis of parallel algorithms.
UNIT IV
FUNDAMENTAL LIMITATIONS FACING PARALLEL COMPUTING
9
Bandwidth limitations Latency limitations Latency hiding/Tolerating techniques and their limitations.
UNIT V
INTRODUCTION TO CLOUD COMPUTING
9
Introduction to Cloud computing Cloud computing in a Nutshell Roots of CC Layers and types of
cloud Desired features of cloud Cloud infrastructure manage Infrastructure as a service provider
Migration into a cloud Broad approaches to migrate into a cloud Seven step model to migrate into a
cloud.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
George S Almasi
Alan Gottlieb
Highly Parallel Computing
McGraw Hill
1994
2.
Raj Kumar Buyys

James Broberg
AndrzejGoscinski
Cloud Computing
John Wiley and sons
2011
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Year of
Publication
1.
William James Dally

BrianTowles
Morgan Kauffman
Principles and Practices on

Interconnection Networks
Tata McGrawHill
2004
2.
David Culler Jaswinder

Pal Singh
Morgan Kaufmann
Parallel Computer
Architecture: A
hardware/Software Approach
McGraw Hill
1999
3.
Ananth Grama
Anshul Gupta
George Karypis
Vipin Kumar
Introduction to Parallel
Computing
Addison Welsey, 2nd

edition
2003
624
Publisher
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.cfm.brown.edu/people/gk/APMA281A/LECTURES/Lec01.ppt
http://www.cfm.brown.edu
http://www.cse.buffalo.edu
http://www. grids.ucs.indiana.edu/ptliupages/.../cloudcomp_camera_ready.pdf
http://www.tacc.utexas.edu/~eijkhout/Articles/EijkhoutIntroToHPC.pdf
13Z012

3
OBJECTIVES:
To provide fundamental concepts of Service Oriented Architecture.
To gain knowledge about SOAP, UDDI and XML to create web services.
To know about the Cloud Computing architecture and services.
OUTCOMES:
know about the basic principles of service oriented architecture, its components and techniques
understand the architecture of web services
able to design and develop web services using protocol
understand technology underlying the service design
acquire the fundamental knowledge of cloud computing
UNIT I
SOA BASICS
9
Roots of SOA Characteristics of SOA Comparing SOA to client-server and distributed internet
architectures Anatomy of SOA How components in an SOA interrelate Principles of service
orientation Service Layers.
UNIT II
XML AND WEB SERVICES
9
XML structure Elements Creating Well-formed XML - Name Spaces Schema Elements Types
Attributes XSL Transformations Parser Web Services Overview Architecture.
UNIT III
WSDL, SOAP AND UDDI
9
WSDL Overview of SOAP HTTP XML-RPC SOAP: Protocol Message Structure
Intermediaries Actors Design Patterns and Faults SOAP with Attachments UDDI.
UNIT IV
SOA IN J2EE AND .NET
9
SOA platform basics SOA support in J2EE Java API for XML-based web services (JAX-WS) - Java
architecture for XML binding (JAXB) Java API for XML Registries (JAXR) Java API for XML based
RPC (JAX-RPC) JAX-RS SOA support in .NET ASP.NET web services.
UNIT V
CLOUD COMPUTING
9
Vision of Cloud computing Cloud Definition Characteristics and Benefits Virtualization Cloud
computing Architecture Cloud Reference Model Types of Clouds Cloud Platforms in Industry.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Year of
Publication
1.
Thomas Erl
Service-Oriented
Architecture: Concepts,
Technology, and Design
Pearson
Education
2006
2.
Heather Williamson
XML, The Complete

Reference
McGraw Hill
Education
2002
625
Publisher
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
1.
Frank P Coyle
2.
Sandeep Chatterjee
James Webbe
Rajkumar Buyya
Christian Vecchiola
Thamarai Selvi S
Title of the Book

XML, Web Services And The
Data Revolution
Services. An Architects
Guide
Mastering Cloud Computing
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Pearson Education
2002
Pearson Education
2005
McGraw Hill
Education
2013
WED URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.javaworld.com/article/2071889/soa/what-is-service-oriented-architecture.html
http://www.service-architecture.com/
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Service-oriented_architecture
www.mpi.nl/delaman/workshop/ppt/soddemann.pdf
http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-in/library/bb833022.aspx
13Z013
M-COMMERCE
3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the E - commerce strategies and value chains.
To understand the M-commerce services.
To understand M - commerce infrastructure and applications.
To know the availability of latest technology and applications of M- commerce in various
domains.
To apply mobile commerce in business-to-business application
OUTCOMES:
apply E-commerce principles in market place.
apply M-commerce principles to various business domains.
understand the theory and applications of Mcommerce in business domain.
get an exposure to current technological advancements in Mcommerce.
build M- commerce business models.
UNIT I
ELECTRONIC COMMERCE
9
Introduction The Ecommerce environment The Ecommerce marketplace Focus on portals
Location of trading in the marketplace Commercial arrangement for transactions Focus on auctions
Business models for ecommerce Revenue models Focus on internet startup companies the dotcom
Ecommerce versus Ebusiness.
UNIT II
MOBILE COMMERCE
9
Introduction Infrastructure of M Commerce Types of mobile commerce services Technologies of
wireless business Benefits and limitations Support Mobile marketing and advertisement Non
Internet Applications in M Commerce Wireless/Wired commerce comparisons.
UNIT III
MOBILE COMMERCE: TECHNOLOGY
9
A framework for the study of mobile commerce NTT Docomos I Mode Wireless devices for mobile
commerce Towards a classification framework for mobile location based services Wireless personal
and local area networks The impact of technology advances on strategy formulation in mobile
communications networks.
626
UNIT IV
MOBILE COMMERCE: THEORY AND APPLICATIONS
9
The ecology of mobile commerce The wireless application protocol Mobile business services Mobile
portal Factors influencing the adoption of mobile gaming services Mobile data technologies and small
business adoption and diffusion MCommerce in the automotive industry Location based services
Criteria for adoption and solution deployment The role of mobile advertising in building a brand M
Commerce business models.
UNIT V
BUSINESS TO BUSINESS MOBILE ECOMMERCE
9
Enterprise enablement Email and messaging Field force automation (Insurance, Real Estate,
Maintenance, Healthcare) Field sales support (Content Access, Inventory) Asset tracking and
maintenance/management Remote IT support Customer retention (B2C Services, Financial, Special
Deals) Warehouse automation Security.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
1.
Dave Chaffey
EBusiness and E
Commerce Management
2.
Brian E
Mennecke
Troy J Strader
Mobile Commerce:
Technology, Theory and
Applications
Year of
Publication
Pearson
Education , 3rd Edition
2009
Idea Group Inc., IRM

press
2003
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Louis P J
M-Commerce Crash Course
McGraw Hill
Companies
2001
2.
Paul May
Mobile Commerce: Opportunities,

Applications, and Technologies of
Wireless Business
Cambridge
University Press
2001
3.
Pandey
Saurabh Shukla
E-Commerce and Mobile

commerce Technologies
Sultan
chand
2011
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.webinnovation.in
http://www.intranetservices.com/ecommerce_websites.asp
http://www.ecommerceeducation.com
http://www.indiaecommerce.com/Benefitofecommerce.html
http://www.aug.edu/~sbamdm/ecommerce/Lecture/lecture10.htm
13Z014
MIS AND BUSINESS INTELLIGENCE

3
OBJECTIVES:
To learn the system concepts.
To learn the organizational structure and MIS structure.
To know about the project development stages.
To understand the effective business intelligent systems.
627
OUTCOMES:
develop a management information system.
build an effective business intelligence system.
understand the support of systems.
manage the information system.
UNIT I
SYSTEM CONCEPTS
9
Definition Computer based user machine system Integrated system Need for a database Utilization
of models Evolution MIS versus data processing MIS and decision support systems MIS and
information resource management Enduser computing Subsystems Organizational subsystems
Activities subsystems.
UNIT II
ORGANIZATIONAL STRUCTURE AND STRUCTURE OF MIS
9
Basic model Hierarchical Specialization Formalization Centralization Modifications of basic
organizational structure Project organization Lateral relations Matrix organization Organizational
culture and power Organizational change Operating elements Physical components Processing
functions Outputs MIS support for decision making Structured programmable decisions
Unstructured nonprogrammable decisions MIS structure based on management activity and
organizational functions Synthesis of MIS structure Conceptual structure Physical structure.
UNIT III
SYSTEM SUPPORT
9
Data representation The binary code for alphanumeric data and numeric data calculations
Communication network Concept LAN WAN Protocols Distributed systems Logical data
concepts Entities, attributes and relationships Data items, records and files Record identification and
location Sequencing of data Traditional types of files Databases Physical storage devices Serial
and Direct access devices File organizations Concepts Sequential Hashed Indexed To support
multi attribute search Data base organization Single flat file Hierarchical Network Relational
Transaction processing Cycle Methods Controls Retrieval.
UNIT IV
DEVELOPMENT AND MANAGEMENT
9
A contingency approach to choosing an application development strategy Requirements development
uncertainty Selection Lifecycle definition stage Proposal definition Feasibility assessment
Information requirement analysis Conceptual design Lifecycle development stage Physical system
and database design Program and Procedure development Lifecycle installation and operation stage
Conversion Operation and maintenance Post audit Project management.
UNIT V
EFFECTIVE BUSINESS INTELLIGENT SYSTEMS
9
Introduction to effective business intelligence systems Creative underlines business intelligence systems.
Underlying structure of effective business intelligence systems Effective decision making in a business
intelligence environment Effective system and software found in business intelligence systems Data
warehousing and networking found in business intelligence systems Building effective business
intelligence systems Effective business intelligence systems found in companys financial areas.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
1.
2.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Year of
Publication
Gordon B Davis
Margrethe H Olson
Management Information
Systems: Conceptual
foundations, Structure and
development
Tata McGrawHill
2001
Robert J Thierauf
Effective business intelligence

systems
Greenwood
Publishing Group
2001
628
Publisher
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
1.
Wainright Martin E
Carol V Brown
Danial W DeHayes
Jeffrey A Hoffer
William C Perkins
2.
Carlo Vercellis
Vicki L Sauter
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Managing Information
Technology
Prentice Hall
International
2000
Business Intelligence:Data
Mining and Optimization for
Decision Making
John Wiley and sons

Ltd
2009
Decision Support Systems for


Second Edition
2010
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.people.du.ac.in/~ssirpal/presentations/MIS%20Concepts%20and%20Design.pdf
http://www.mahmoudyoussef.com/dam/lecture2.pdf to lecture6.pdf
http://www.csus.edu/indiv/e/eatonr/mis%20175%20notes/ch01a.ppt
http://www.faculty.winthrop.edu/caoq/html/mgmt341/transparency/chap01.ppt to chap17.ppt
http://www.comfsm.fm/.../mis_ch11business
13Z015
NEURAL NETWORKS
3
OBJECTIVES:
To learn the neural architecture.
To study about supervised and unsupervised learning.
To learn the associated models and optimization methods.
To study the various network architectures.
OUTCOMES:
understand the concept of neural network architecture.
understand and differentiate supervised learning and unsupervised learning.
develop the associated models.
understand the optimization methods.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Neural network Human brain Biological and artificial Neurons Model of neuron knowledge
representation Artificial intelligence and neural network Network architecture Basic approach of the
working of ANN Training Learning and generalization.
UNIT II
SUPERVISED LEARNING
9
Single layer networks Perception Linear separability Limitations of multi layer network architecture
Back propagation algorithm (BPA) and other training algorithms Applications of adaptive multilayer
network architecture Recurrent network Feedforward networks Radial basis function (RBF)
networks.
UNIT III
UNSUPERVISED LEARNING
9
Winner-takes-all networks Hamming networks Maxnet Simple competitive learning vector
Quantization Counter-propagation network Adaptive resonance theory Kohonens self organizing
maps Principal component analysis.
629
UNIT IV
ASSOCIATED MODELS
9
Hopfield networks Brain state-in-a-box network Boltzmann machine Learning boltzmann machine
Restricted boltzmann machines Optimization with boltzmann.
UNIT V
OPTIMIZATION METHODS
9
Hopfield networks for-travel salesman problem Solution of simultaneous linear equations Iterated
radiant descent Simulated annealing and genetic algorithm.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
Simon Haykin
Neural Networks A
Comprehensive
Foundation
2.
Mehrotra K
Mohan C K
Sanjay Ranka
Elements of Artificial
Neural Networks
Publisher
Macmillan Publishing
Co., New York,
Year of
Publication
2002
Indian Reprint Penram

International
Publishing (India)
2002
Publisher
Year of
Publication
John Wiley and Sons.
2003
Jaico Publishers,
Mumbai.
2003
TMH Publications
2002
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
Cichocki A
Unbehauen R
Neural Networks for

optimization and Signal
processing
2.
Zurada J M
Neural networks
3.
Limin Fu
Neural Networks in
Computer Intelligence
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.colinfahey.com/2003apr20_neuron/2003apr20_neuron.htm.
http://www.fibo.kmutt.ac.th/publication/thai/article/intro_nn.html.
http://www.geocities.com/fastiland/Teaching/ann1/ann.html.
http://www.learnartificialneuralnetworks.com/machinelearning.html.
http://www.citeulike.org/user/fernandohbc/article/3384860 47k.
13Z016
NUMERICAL AND STATISTICAL METHODS

3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand and apply numerical methods for solving systems of linear equations.
To understand and apply numerical integration and differentiation.
To solving initial value problems of ordinary differential equations numerically.
To provide an understanding of the statistical methods and probabilistic concepts by which real
life problems are analyzed.
OUTCOMES:
develop a good understanding of the various methods used for the numerical solution of scientific
problems.
630
solve system of linear equations and initial value problems of ordinary differential equations
numerically.
understand the value of probability and Statistics in acquiring knowledge and making Decisions.
develop an ability to apply statistical tests in experiments, as well as to analyze and interpret data.
UNIT I
LINEAR SYSTEM OF EQUATIONS
9
Solution of systems of equations Solution of simultaneous linear equations Gauss elimination methods
Gauss jordan methods Jacobi and Gauss Seidal iterative methods.
UNIT II
NUMERICAL DIFFERENTIATION AND INTEGRATION
9
Interpolation Differentiation and integration Difference table Newtons forward and backward
interpolation Lagrangian interpolation Differentiation formulae Trapezoidal and Simpson rule
Gaussian Quadrature.
UNIT III
DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS
9
Ordinary differential equations Taylor Series and Euler methods Runge-Kutta methods Predictor
corrector method Milne and Adam-Bashforth methods Error analysis.
UNIT IV
PROBABILITY DISTRIBUTIONS
9
Probability axioms Bayes Theorem Discrete random variables and Continuous random variables
Density and distribution functions Joint and marginal distributions Conditional distributions
Characteristic function Moment generating function Expectation.
UNIT V
SAMPLING DISTRIBUTIONS
Small sample t-test F-test 2-test ANOVA one way classification and two way classification.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Grewal B S
Numerical methods in Engineering

and Science
Khanna
2008
2.
John E Freund
Irwin Miller
Marylees Miller
Mathematical Statistics with

Applications
Prentice Hall of
India, 7th Edition
2004
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Year of
Publication
1.
Curtis F Gerald
Patrick O Wheatly
Applied Numerical Analysis
Pearson Education
2002
2.
Johnson R A
Probability and Statistics for

Engineers
Prentice Hall
2000
3.
Sheldon M Ross
Introduction to Probability
and Statistics for Engineers
and Scientists
Academic Press,
2nd Edition
2000
4.
Steven C Chapra

Engineers
McGrawHill
4th Edition
2002
5.
Brain Bradie
A Friendly Introduction to
Numerical Analysis
Pearson Education
Prentice Hall
2006
631
Publisher
WEB URLs:
1. http://www.numericalmethods.eng.usf.edu/topics/ppt_index.html
2. http://www.ece.uwaterloo.ca/~ece204/tutorials/
3. http://www.ece.uwaterloo.ca/~ece204/TheBook/04LinearAlgebra/gauss/complete.html
4. http://www.maths.leeds.ac.uk/~stuart/2735/docs/handout06.pdf
5. http://www.maths.leeds.ac.uk/~stuart/2735/docs/handout08.pdf
13Z017
PROFESSIONAL ETHICS
3
OBJECTIVES
To understand the concepts of computer ethics in work environment.
To understand the threats in computing environment.
To understand the intricacies of accessibility issues.
To ensure safe exits when designing the software projects.
OUTCOMES:
examine situations and to internalize the need for applying ethical principles, values to tackle with
various situations.
develop a responsible attitude towards the use of computer as well as the technology.
envision the societal impact on the products/ projects they develop in their career.
understand the code of ethics and standards of computer professionals.
analyze the professional responsibility and empowering access to information in the work place.
UNIT I
COMPUTER ETHICS INTRODUCTION AND COMPUTER HACKING
9
A general Introduction Computer ethics An overview Identifying an ethical issue Ethics and law
Ethical theories Professional code of conduct An ethical dilemma A framework for ethical decision
making Computer hacking Introduction Definition of hacking Destructive programs Hacker ethics
Professional constraints BCS code of conduct To hack or not to hack? Ethical positions on hacking.
UNIT II
ASPECTS OF COMPUTER CRIME AND INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY

RIGHTS
9
Aspects of computer crime Introduction What is computer crime Computer security measures
Professional duties and obligations Intellectual property rights The nature of intellectual property
Intellectual property Patents Trademarks Trade secrets Software issues Copyright The extent
and nature of software piracy Ethical and professional issues Free software and open source code.
UNIT III
REGULATING INTERNET CONTENT, TECHNOLOGY AND SAFETY
9
Introduction In defence of freedom expression Censorship Laws upholding free speech Free speech
and the internet Ethical and professional issues Internet technologies and privacy Safety and risk
Assessment of safety and risk Risk benefit analysis Reducing risk.
UNIT IV
COMPUTER TECHNOLOGIES ACCESSIBILITY ISSUES
9
Introduction Principle of equal access Obstacles to access for individuals Professional responsibility
Empowering computers in the workplace Introduction Computers and employment Computers and
the quality of work Computerized monitoring in the work place Telecommuting Social, Legal and
professional issues Use of Software, Computers and Internetbased Tools Liability for software errors
Documentation authentication and control Software engineering code of ethics and practices IEEECS
ACM joint task force
UNIT V
SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT AND SOCIAL NETWORKING
9
Software development Strategies for engineering quality standards Quality management standards
Social networking Company owned social network web site The use of social networks in the hiring
process Social networking ethical issues Cyber bullying Cyber stalking Online virtual world
Crime in virtual world Digital rights management Online defamation Piracy Fraud.
TOTAL: 45
632
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Penny
Duquenoy
Simon Jones
Barry G
Blundell
Ethical , legal and professional issues

in computing
Middlesex
University Press
2008
2.
George
Reynolds
Ethics in Information Technology
Cengage Learning
2011
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Caroline Whitback
Ethics in Engineering
Practice and Research
Cambridge
University Press
2011
2.
John Weckert
Douglas Adeney
Computer and Information

Ethics
Greenwood Press
1997
Sara Baase
A Gift of Fire: Social, Legal,

and Ethical Issues for
Computing and the
Internet
Prentice Hall,
3rd Edition,
2008
3.
WEB URLs:
1. http://www.bcsp.org/pdf/presentationsarticles/714_1.pdf
2. http://www.nasponline.org/standards/.../1_%20Ethical%20Principles.pdf
3. http://www.isu.edu/audit/Chapter%204.ppt
4. http://www.castonline.ilstu.edu/klitzing/KNR_273/Ethics.ppt
5. http://www.kinindia.com
13Z018
RESOURCE MANAGEMENT TECHNIQUES

3
OBJECTIVES:
To provide the concept and an understanding of basic concepts in Operations Research.
To understand, develop and solve mathematical model of linear programming problems.
To understand, develop and solve mathematical model of Transport and assignment problems.
To understand network modeling for planning and scheduling the project activities.
OUTCOMES:
understand and apply linear, integer programming to solve operational problem with constraints
apply transportation and assignment models to find optimal solution in warehousing and
travelling.
prepare project scheduling using PERT and CPM.
identify and analyze appropriate queuing model to reduce the waiting time in queue.
use optimization concepts in real world problems.
UNIT I
LINEAR PROGRAMMING MODELS
9
Mathematical formulation Graphical solution of linear programming models Simplex method
Artificial variable techniques Variants of simplex method.
633
UNIT II
TRANSPORTATION AND ASSIGNMENT MODELS
9
Mathematical formulation of transportation problem Methods for finding initial basic feasible solution
Optimum solution Degeneracy Mathematical formulation of assignment models Hungarian
algorithm Variants of the assignment problem.
UNIT III
INTEGER PROGRAMMING MODELS
9
Formulation Gomorys IPP method Gomorys mixed integer method Branch and bound technique.
UNIT IV
SCHEDULING BY PERT AND CPM
9
Network construction Critical path method Project evaluation and review technique Resource analysis
in network scheduling
UNIT V
QUEUEING MODELS
9
Characteristics of queuing models Poisson Queues (M / M / 1) (FIFO / /), (M / M / 1) (FIFO/ N
/ ), (M / M / C) (FIFO / / ), (M / M / C) (FIFO / N / ) models.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
1.
Taha H A
Operations Research: An
Introduction
Pearson Education,
8th Edition
2.
Natarajan A M
Balasubramani P
Tamilarasi A
Operations Research
Pearson Education,
Asia
Year of
Publication
2008
2005
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Prem Kumar
Gupta D S Hira
Operations Research
S.Chand and
Company Ltd, 3rd
Edition
2008
2.
John W Chinneck
Feasibility and Infeasibility in

Optimization Algorithms and
Computational Methods
Springer
2008
3.
Ravindran
Phillips
Solberg
Operations Research: Principles

And Practice
JohnWiley
and Sons, 2nd Edition
2007
WEB URLs:
1. http://www.web.ntpu.edu.tw/~juang/ms/Ch02.ppt
2. http://www.pstcc.edu/facstaff/jwlamb/Math1630/6.1.pdf
3. http://www.engr.sjsu.edu/udlpms/.../set2_transport%20&%20network.ppt
4. http://www.math.wm.edu/~rrkinc/queue_intro.ppt
5. http://www.pec.org.pk/scourse_files/engg_project.../pertcpmwbs.ppt
13Z019
SOFTWARE AGENTS
3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the philosophy and psychology of both human agents
To understand software agents regarding coordination, operation and communication.
To know about the Open Agent architecture.
To learn the mobile agents.
634
OUTCOMES:
design the agents.
interface the agent metaphor with character.
process queries.
organize the agents.
UNIT I
AGENT AND USER EXPERIENCE
9
Interacting with agent Agent from direct manipulation to delegation Interface agent metaphor with
character Designing agents Direct manipulation versus agent path to predictable.
UNIT II
AGENTS FOR LEARNING IN INTELLIGENT ASSISTANCE
9
Agents for information sharing and coordination Agents that reduce work information overhead
Approaches to building agents Training a personal digital assistant Agents without programming
language S/W agents for cooperative learning Architecture of intelligent agents.
UNIT III
AGENT COMMUNICATION AND COLLABORATION
9
Overview of agent oriented programming Agent communication language Knowledge Sharing effor t
Knowledge query and manipulation language KQML Applications of KQML. Agent based framework
of interoperability.
UNIT IV
AGENT ARCHITECTURE
9
Agents for information gathering Agent organization Knowledge of an Agent Query processing
Learning open agent architecture Communicative action for artificial agent.
UNIT V
MOBILE AGENTS
9
Mobile agent paradigm Mobile agent concepts Mobile agent technology Case study Tele script,
Agent tel.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Jeffrey M Bradshaw
Software Agents
MIT Press
2000
2.
William R Cockayne
Michael Zyda
Mobile Agents
Prentice Hall
1998
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Year of
Publication
1.
Russel
Norvig
Artificial Intelligence: A
Modern Approach
Prentice Hall,
2nd Edition
2002
2.
Joseph P Bigus
Jennifer Bigus
Constructing Intelligent
agents with Java: A
Programmer's Guide to
Smarter Applications
John Wiley and Sons
1997
3.
Richard Murch
Tony Johnson
Intelligent Software Agents
Prentice Hall
2000
635
Publisher
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.agent.ai/doc/upload/200302/herm97.pdf
http://www.agents.umbc.edu/introduction/01Bradshaw.pdf
http://www.cs.siu.edu
http://www.u.cs.biu.ac.il/~ariel/download/ds590/ppts/ds3_pro.ppt
http://www.cs.berkeley.edu/~russell/aima1e/chapter02.pdf
13Z020
SOFTWARE METRIC AND QUALITY MANAGEMENT

3
OBJECTIVES
To provide a solid background knowledge about software Metrics.
To provide hands on experience to use and implement metrics.
To understand the quality concepts for ensuring the functionality of the software.
To learn about standards and certifications.
OUTCOMES:
apply quality assurance tools and techniques in their project.
work with instructions and procedures in software organizations.
discuss on various metrics and models to assess software.
create reliable, replicable cost estimation that links to the requirements of project planning and
managing
UNIT I
THE HISTORY AND EVOLUTION OF SOFTWARE METRICS
9
Evolution of the software industry and evolution of software measurements The cost of counting function
point metrics The paradox of reversed productivity for high-level languages Future technical
developments in functional metrics Software measures and metrics not based on function points.
UNIT II
PROCESS METRICS
9
Inprocess metrics for software testing Test progress S curve Testing defect Arrivals over time
Product size over time CPU utilization Effort/Outcome model. Metrics for Objectoriented projects
Concepts and constructs Design and complexity Metrics Lorenz metrics and rules of thumb CK OO
metrics suite Productivity metrics.
UNIT III
MEASUREMENTS, METRICS AND INDUSTRY LEADERSHIP
9
Measures and metrics of industry leaders Measures Metrics and innovation Measurements Metrics
and outsource litigation Measurements Metrics and behavioral changes Commercial software
measurement tools Measuring process maturity Process capability Value of process improvement
Process adoption.
UNIT IV
SOFTWARE QUALITY MANAGEMENT COMPONENTS
9
Project progress control Components, internal and external participants Progress control regimes
Computerized tools Software quality metrics Objective Classification Process and product metrics
Implementation and limitation of software metrics Software quality costs Objective Classification
model of cost Extended model and applications.
UNIT V
STANDARDS, CERTIFICATION AND ASSESSMENT
9
SQA standards ISO9001 certification Software process assessment Organizing for quality assurance
Management and its role in quality assurance The software quality assurance unit SQA trustees and
committees.
TOTAL: 45
636
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Daniel Galin
Software Quality Assurance:

From Theory to
Implementation
Pearson Addison
Wesley
2012
2.
Roger S Pressman
Software EngineeringA
Practitioners Approach
McGraw Hill pub
2010
Publisher
Year of
Publication
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
Allen Gilles
Software quality: Theory

and management
International Thomson,
Computer press
1997
2.
Naresh Chauhan
Software Testing
Oxford
University Press
2010
3.
Ravindranath Pandian
C
Software Metrics A Guide

to planning, Analysis,
and Application
Auerbach, First Indian

Reprint
2011
WEB URLs:
1. http://www.bus.utk.edu/BA201/lecture.html
2. http://www.ctg.albany.edu/publications/reports/survey_of_sysdev/survey_of_sysdev.pdf
3. http://www.ent.ohiou.edu/~cparks/708/7BasicToolsofQuality.pdf
4. http://www.books.google.co.in/books?id=EaefcL3pWJYCandprintsec=frontcoveranddq=The+Ray
leigh+Model#PPA306,M1
5. http://www.ics.uci.edu/~taylor/ICS_52_FQ02/ICS52FQ0209.pdf
13Z021

3
OBJECTIVES:
To know of how to do project planning for the software process.
To learn the cost estimation techniques during the analysis of the project.
To understand the quality concepts for ensuring the functionality of the software.
To understand how to perform measurement and assessment of software quality.
OUTCOMES:
understand the activities during the project scheduling of any software application.
learn the risk management activities and the resource allocation for the projects.
apply the software estimation and recent quality standards for evaluation of the software projects.
acquire knowledge and skills needed for the construction of highly reliable software project.
create reliable, replicable cost estimation that links to the requirements of project planning and
managing.
UNIT I
SOFTWARE PROJECT MANAGEMENT CONCEPTS
9
Introduction to software project management An overview of project planning Select project
Identifying project scope and objectives Infrastructure Project products and characteristics Estimate
efforts Identify activity risks and allocate resources.
637
UNIT II
SOFTWARE EVALUATION AND COSTING
9
Project evaluation Strategic assessment Technical assessment Costbenefit analysis Cash flow
forecasting Costbenefit evaluation techniques Risk evaluation Selection of appropriate project
approach Choosing technologies Choice of process models Structured methods.
UNIT III
SOFTWARE ESTIMATION TECHNIQUES
9
Software effort estimation Problems with over and under estimations Basis of software estimation
Software estimation techniques Expert judgment Estimating by analogy Activity planning Project
schedules Projects and activities Sequencing and scheduling activities Networks planning models
Formulating a network model.
UNIT IV
RISK MANAGEMENT
9
Risk management Nature of risk Managing risk Risk identification and analysis Reducing the risk.
Resource allocation Scheduling resources Critical paths Cost scheduling Monitoring and control
Creating framework Cost monitoring Prioritizing monitoring.
UNIT V
SOFTWARE QUALITY MANAGEMENT
9
TQM Six sigma Software quality Defining software quality ISO9126 External standards
Comparison of project management softwares Dot project Launch pad openProj Case study
PRINCE2.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
2012
1.
Bob Hughes
Mike Cotterell
Software Project
Management
Tata McGraw Hill Publications,

5th Edition
2.
Kelkar S A
Software Project
Management
PHI, New Delhi, 3rd Edition,
2013
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Futrell
Quality Software Project

Management
Pearson Education
India
2008
2.
Jalote

in Practice
Pearson Education
2002
3.
Ramesh,
Gopalaswamy
Tata McGraw Hill
2001
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.ogc.gov.uk/methods_prince_2.asp
http://www.softwareprojects.org
http://www.amazon.com/TutorialSoftwareEngineeringProjectManagement/dp/0818607513
http:// www.rspa.com/spi
http://notesengine.com/dept/cse/8sem/anna-university-8-sem-cse-notes.html
638
13Z022
CLOUD TECHNOLOGY MANAGEMENT

3
OBJECTIVES:
To introduce the broad perceptive of cloud architecture and model
To understand the concept of Virtualization and design of cloud Services
To be familiar with the lead players in cloud.
To understand the features of cloud simulator
To apply different cloud programming model as per need.
OUTCOMES:
compare the strengths and limitations of cloud computing
identify the architecture, infrastructure and delivery models of cloud computing
apply suitable virtualization concept.
choose the appropriate cloud player, Programming Models and approach.
address the core issues of cloud computing such as security, privacy and interoperability
design Cloud Services and Set a private cloud
UNIT I
CLOUD ARCHITECTURE AND MODEL
9
Technologies for networkbased System System models for distributed and cloud computing NIST
cloud computing reference architecture Cloud models Characteristics Cloud services Cloud models
(IaaS, PaaS, SaaS) Public vs private cloud Cloud solutions Cloud ecosystem Service management
Computing on demand.
UNIT II
VIRTUALIZATION
9
Basics of virtualization Types of virtualization Implementation levels of virtualization Virtualization
structures Tools and mechanisms Virtualization of CPU Memory I/O devices Virtual clusters and
resource management Virtualization for datacenter automation.
UNIT III
CLOUD INFRASTRUCTURE
9
Architectural design of compute and storage clouds Layered cloud architecture development Design
challenges Inter cloud resource management Resource provisioning and platform deployment Global
exchange of cloud resources.
UNIT IV
PROGRAMMING MODEL
Parallel and distributed programming paradigms MapReduce Twister and iterative MapReduce
Hadoop library from apache Mapping applications Programming support Google app engine
Amazon AWS Cloud software environments Eucalyptus Open nebula OpenStack Aneka
CloudSim.
UNIT V
SECURITY IN THE CLOUD
9
Security overview Cloud security challenges and risks Softwareasaservice security Security
governance Risk management Security monitoring Security architecture design Data security
Application security Virtual machine security Identity management and access control Autonomic
security.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
Kumar Saurabh
Cloud Computing insights into

NewEra Infrastructure
Wiley India
2.
Kai Hwang
Geoffrey C Fox
Jack G Dongarra
Distributed and Cloud Computing,

From Parallel Processing to the
Internet of Things
Morgan Kaufmann
Publishers
639
Publisher
Year of
Publication
2011
2012
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
1.
Ronald L Krutz
Russell Dean Vines
2.
George Reese
3.
Toby Velte
Anthony Velte
Robert Elsenpeter
Title of the Book

Cloud Security A comprehensive
Guide to Secure Cloud
Computing
Cloud Application Architectures:
Building Applications and
Infrastructure in the Cloud
Cloud Computing, A Practical
Approach
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Wiley - India
2010
Cambridge
University Press
2012
TMH
2009
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http:// www.nptel.iitm.ac.in
http:// www.slideshare.net
http:// www.math.uaa.alaska.edu
http:// www.cs.purdue.edu
http:// www.priv.gc.ca
640
B.E. / B.TECH. REGULATIONS 2014
KARPAGAM COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING: COIMBATORE

(Autonomous College Affiliated to Anna University, Chennai)
2014 REGULATION FOR B.E./B.TECH. DEGREE PROGRAMMES

(For the batches of candidates admitted in 2014 2015 and subsequently)
NOTE: The regulations hereunder are subject to amendments as may be made by the Academic
Council of the College from time to time. Any or all such amendments will be effective from such date
and to such batches of candidates as may be decided by the Academic Council.
1. Preliminary Definitions and Nomenclature
In these Regulations, unless the context otherwise requires:
i) Programme means Degree Programme, that is B.E./B.Tech. Degree Programme.
ii) Discipline means specialization or branch of B.E./B.Tech. Degree Programme, like Civil
Engineering, Information Technology, etc.
iii) Course means a theory or practical subject that is normally studied in a semester, like
Mathematics, Physics, etc.
iv) Head of the Institution means the Principal of the College.
v) Chairman means the Head of the Faculty.
vi) Head of the Department means head of the Department concerned.
vii) University means ANNA UNIVERSITY, CHENNAI.
2. Conditions for Admission:

Candidates for admission to the B.E. / B.Tech. degree programme will be required to satisfy
the conditions of admission thereto prescribed by the Anna University and Government of
Tamil Nadu.
3.
Programmes Offered:
The Following are the B.E. / B.Tech Programmes offered:
B.E.
Branch I
Branch II
Branch III
Civil Engineering
Branch IV
Electronics and Communication Engineering
Branch V
Electronics and Telecommunication Engineering
Branch VI
Electrical and Electronics Engineering
Branch VII
Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
Branch VIII
Computer Science and Engineering
B. Tech.
4.
Branch I
Information Technology
Structure of Programmes:
(i). Curriculum:
a) The curriculum will comprise courses of study as given in section 15 infra in accordance
with the prescribed syllabi.
b) Every candidate will be required to opt for electives from the list of electives relating to
his/her branch of study as given in section 15 infra.
c). Every candidate will be required to undertake a suitable project in industry / department
in consultation with the Head of the Department and the faculty guide and submit the
project report thereon at the end of the final semester on dates announced by the
College/Department. Also he/she will be required to present twice per semester about
the progress of the project work during each of semesters 7 and 8.
641
(ii). One Credit Courses:

Candidates can also opt for one credit Industry ready courses of 15 hours duration which
will be offered by experts from industry / Academicians on specialized topics. Candidates
can complete such one credit courses during the semesters 4 to 7 as and when these
courses are offered. Candidates can register only one 1 credit course per semester and
successfully complete during the above period. However, all the candidates are required
to successfully complete minimum of two one credit courses before he/she is going to
complete the programme. Otherwise he/she will not be recommended for the award of
degree.
5.
Duration of the Programme:

The programme will extend over a period of four years leading to the Degree of Bachelor of
Engineering (B.E.) / Bachelor of Technology (B.Tech.) of the Anna University. The four
academic years will be divided into eight semesters with two semesters per year. But in any
case the HSC Candidates should complete the programme within 14 semesters and Lateral
Entry-Diploma candidates should complete the programme within 12 semesters.
Each semester shall normally consist of 90 working days or 450 periods of 50 minutes each.
The Head of the Institution shall ensure that every teacher imparts instruction as per the
number of periods specified in the syllabus and that the teacher teaches the full content of the
specified syllabus for the course being taught.
6. Requirement of Attendance and Progress:

i) A candidate will be deemed to have completed the requirements of study of any semester
only if
a) He / she has kept not less than 80% of attendance in the total number of working
periods of the concerned semester as a whole. However, a candidate who has secured
attendance between 70% and 79% in the current semester due to medical reasons
(hospitalization / accident / specific illness) or due to participation in College/
University / State / National / International level sports events with prior permission
from the Principal shall be given exemption from the prescribed attendance
requirements and he/she shall be permitted to appear for the current semester
examinations.
b) his / her conduct has been satisfactory.
ii) Candidates who do not qualify to appear for End Semester Examinations (ESE) of any
semester for want of attendance and/or conduct have to register for and redo that semester
programme at the next available opportunity subject to the approval of Anna University.
7.
Procedure for Completing the Programme:

i) A candidate will be permitted to proceed to the courses of study of any semester only, if
he/she has satisfied the requirements of attendance and conduct in respect of the
preceding semester and had registered for the highest semester examination for which he /
she was eligible to register.
ii) A candidate who is required to repeat the study of any semester for want of attendance /
conduct or who desires to rejoin the course after a period of discontinuance or who upon
his / her own request is permitted by the authorities to repeat the study of any semester,
may join the semester which he/she is eligible or permitted to join, only at the time of its
normal commencement for a regular batch of candidates and after obtaining the approval
from the Director of Technical Education and Anna University.
8.
Class Advisor
There shall be a class advisor for each class. He / She will be appointed by the Head of the
department concerned. The class advisor is the ex-officio member and the Convener of the
class committee. The responsibilities for the class advisor shall be:
i. To act as the channel of communication between the HoD and the students of the
respective class.
ii. To collect and maintain various statistical details of students.
iii. To help the chairperson of the class committee in planning and conduct of the class
committee meetings.
iv. To monitor the academic performance of the students including attendance and to inform
the class committee.
v. To attend to the students welfare activities like awards, medals, scholarships and
industrial visits.
642
9.
Class Committee
(i). Every class shall have a class committee consisting of teachers of the class
concerned, student representatives and a chairperson who is not teaching the class.
It is like the Quality Circle (more commonly used in industries) with the overall
goal of improving the teaching-learning process. The functions of the class
committee include
a) Solving problems experienced by students in the class room and in the
laboratories.
b) Clarifying the regulations of the degree programme and the details of rules
there in particularly which should be displayed on college Notice-Board.
c) Informing the student representatives, the academic schedule including the
dates of assessments and the syllabus coverage for each assessment.
d) Informing the student representatives the details of Regulations regarding
weightage used for each assessment. In the case of practical courses (laboratory
/ drawing / project work / seminar etc.) the breakup of marks for each
experiment / exercise / module of work, should be clearly discussed in the class
committee meeting and informed to the students.
e) Analyzing the performance of the students of the class after each test and
finding the ways and means of solving problems, if any.
f) Identifying the weak students, if any, and requesting the teachers concerned to
provide some additional help or guidance or coaching to such weak students.
(ii). The class committee for a class under a particular branch is normally constituted by
the Head of the Department.
(iii). The class committee shall be constituted within the first week of each semester. At
least 4 student representatives (usually 2 boys and 2 girls) shall be included in the
class committee. The Chairperson of the class committee may invite the Class
advisor(s) and the Head of the Department to the class committee meeting.
(iv). The Head of the Institution may participate in any class committee of the institution.
(v). The chairperson is required to prepare the minutes of every meeting, submit the same
to Head of the Institution within two days of the meeting and arrange to circulate it
among the students and teachers concerned. If there are some points in the minutes
requiring action by the management, the same shall be brought to the notice of the
Management by the Head of the Institution.
(vi). The first meeting of the class committee shall be held within one week from the date
of commencement of the semester, in order to inform the students about the nature
and weightage of assessments within the framework of the Regulations. Two or three
subsequent meetings may be held in a semester at suitable intervals. During these
meetings the student members representing the entire class, shall meaningfully
interact and express the opinions and suggestions of the other students of the class in
order to improve the effectiveness of the teaching-learning process.
10. Assessment:
i) The assessment will comprise of Continuous Internal Assessment (CIA) and / or End
Semester Examination (ESE), carrying marks as specified in the scheme in section 15
infra.
ii) Continuous Internal Assessment (CIA) marks will be awarded on the basis of continuous
assessment made during the semester as per guidelines given below.
a)
Theory Courses:
Sl.No.
CATEGORY
MAX. MARKS
Assignment / Tutorial / Innovative Work
10
CIA Test I / CIA Test II / CIA Test III*
30
CIA Total Marks

*
Best two out of three Tests will be considered for evaluation.
643
40
b) Practical Courses:
Sl.No.
CATEGORY
MAX. MARKS
Observation and Record Work
20
Model Examination
20
CIA Total Marks
40
iii) End Semester Examination (ESE): End Semester Examination will be held at the end of
each semester for duration of 3 hours for each course. The theory exam question paper
pattern is given below.
INSTRUCTION
Maximum Marks
Pattern
REMARKS
100 marks for all Semester Examinations. (Marks secured will be
reduced to a maximum of 60 during processing)
Section A : 10 questions
Question No. 1 to 10, covering all units of the syllabus.
Section B : 10 questions
Question No. 11 to 20, Either OR type, covering all units of the
syllabus.
Allocation : Section A : 10 X 2 = 20 Marks
Section B : 5 X 16 = 80 Marks
Total
: 100 Marks
Duration : 3 Hours
iv) The letter grade and the grade points are awarded based on the percentage of marks
secured by a candidate in individual course as detailed below.
Range of percentage of total marks
90 to 100
80 to 89
70 to 79
60 to 69
55 to 59
50 to 54
0 to 49
or less than 50% in final examination
Absent
Withdrawal
Other Keys
U*
Grade
S
A
B
C
D
E
Grade Point
10
9
8
7
6
5
0
0
U
W
: Denotes appeared and failed in the Course.

: Denotes Absent for the End Semester Examination and failed in
the course.
: Denotes withdrawal from the End Semester Examination.
SGPA and CGPA:

a) Calculation of Semester Grade Point Average (SGPA)
SGPA = (gi x Ci) / Ci
where, gi : Grade point secured corresponding to the Course of a Semester.
Ci : Credit rating of the course of that Semester.
b) Calculation of Cumulative Grade Point Average (CGPA)
CGPA = (gi x Ci) / Ci
where, gi and Ci are Grade points secured and Credit rating of the course up to the semester in
which CGPA is computed
644
11. Passing Requirements and Provisions:

i) The minimum number of total credits to be earned through successful completion of the
courses of study of the respective branch listed in section 15 infra, by a candidate to
qualify for the award of degree in the various branches of study is provided below.
Minimum number of credits to be earned
through successful completion of the courses of
study of the respective branch listed in section 15
infra, for the award of degree
Branch of Study
for entry at first

semester
for lateral entry at

third semester
188 to190
188 to 190
186 to 188
136 to 138
136 to 138
134 to 136
184 to 186
132 to 134
184 to 186
132 to 134
186 to 188
134 to 136
188 to 190
136 to 138
187 to 189
135 to 137
187 to 189
135 to 137
BE Programmes
Branch: I
Branch: II
Branch: III
Branch: IV
Civil Engineering
Electronics and Communication
Engineering
Branch: V Electronics and Telecommunication
Engineering
Branch: VI Electrical and Electronics
Engineering
Branch: VII Electronics and Instrumentation
Engineering
Branch: VIII Computer Science and Engineering
B Tech Programme
Branch: I
Information Technology
iii) A candidate who secures grade point 5 or more in any course of study will be declared to
have passed that course, provided a minimum of 50% is secured in the ESE of that course
of study.
iii) A candidate, who absents or withdraws or disqualified or secures a letter grade U/U*
(Grade point 0) or less than 50% in final examination in any course carrying CIA and
ESE marks, will retain the already earned continuous assessment marks for two
subsequent attempts only in the examination of that course and thereafter he/she will be
solely assessed by ESE carrying the entire marks of that course.
iv) A candidate who lacks in attendance or who fails to submit the report on the final
semester project (or whose report is not accepted for reasons of incompleteness or other
serious deficiencies) within the prescribed date or whose project work and viva voce has
been assessed as grade U will have to register at the beginning of a subsequent semester
following the final semester, redo and submit the project report at the end of that semester
and appear for ESE.
v)
A candidate who is absent in final examination in a course /project work after having
registered for the same shall be considered to have not appeared and failed in that course
/project work and awarded grade U*.
vi) If a candidate fails to submit the report on project work on or before the date specified by
the college / department, he/she is deemed to have failed in the project work and awarded
grade U*.
vii) A candidate shall be declared to have qualified for the award of the B.E./B.Tech.
Degree provided the candidate has successfully completed the course requirements and
has passed all the prescribed courses of study in all the 8 semesters along with minimum
of two 1 credit courses (6 semesters for lateral entry) within a maximum period of 7 years
(6 years for lateral entry) reckoned from the commencement of the semester to which
the candidate was first admitted to the programme.
645
viii) Classification:
CGPA
8.5 and above with no history of arrear
6.5 and above and less than 8.5 (completion of the course
within 10 Consecutive semesters in case of HSC candidate and
8 consecutive semesters in case of Lateral entry candidate)
All other cases
Classification
I Class with Distinction
I Class
II Class
12. Provisions for withdrawal from Examination

i) A candidate may, for valid reasons, be granted permission to withdraw from appearing for
the examination in any course or courses of only one semester examination during the
entire duration of the degree programme. Also, only one application for withdrawal is
permitted for that semester examination in which withdrawal is sought.
ii) Withdrawal application shall be valid only if the candidate is otherwise eligible to write
the examination and if it is made prior to the commencement of the examination in that
course or courses and also recommended by the Head of the Department.
iii) Withdrawal shall not be construed as an opportunity for appearance in the examination
for the eligibility of a candidate for First Class with Distinction.
13. Temporary Break of Study from the Programme
i) A candidate is not normally permitted to temporarily break the study. However, if a
candidate intends to temporarily discontinue the programme in the middle for valid
reasons (such as accident or hospitalization due to prolonged ill health) and to rejoin the
programme in a later respective semester, he/she shall apply to the Principal in advance,
in any case, not later than the last date for payment of examination fee of the semester in
question, through the Head of the Department and stating the reasons there for.
ii) A candidate is permitted to rejoin the programme at the respective semester as and when
it is offered after the break subject to the approval of Director of Technical Education and
Anna University.
iii) The duration specified for passing all the courses for the purpose of classification (vide
sections 11 (vii) and (viii) supra) shall be increased by the period of such break of study
permitted.
iv) The total period for completion of the programme reckoned from, the commencement of
the semester to which the candidate was first admitted shall not exceed the maximum
period specified in section 11 (vii) supra irrespective of the period of break of study in
order that he/she may be qualified for the award of the degree.
v) If any candidate is detained for want of requisite attendance and conduct, the period spent
in that semester shall not be considered as permitted 'Break of Study' and section 13 (iii)
supra is not applicable for such case.
14. Personality and Character Development
All candidates shall enroll, on admission, in any one of the personality and character
development activities (the NCC / NSS / YRC/Sports and Games) and undergo training during
the first year.
National Cadet Corps (NCC) will have parades.
National Service Scheme (NSS) will have social service activities in and around the College.
Youth Red Cross (YRC) society activities will include peace time activities like health and
hygiene, international friendship, awareness camps etc.
Sports and Games activities will include preparation for inter-collegiate sports events.
While the training activities will normally be during week ends, the camps will normally be
during vacation period.
15. Courses of Study and Scheme of Assessment.
646
Minimum Credits to be Earned: 186+2=188
SEMESTER I
Course Title
Course
Code
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
14O101
40
60
100
14G102

Engineering
40
60
100
14O103
Technical English
40
60
100
14O104
C Programming I
Engineering
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
14A105
14A106
Engineering Drawing
PRACTICAL
14O111
40
60
100
40
60
100
14G113
40
60
100
14G114
40
60
100
TOTAL
17
15
27
14A112
SEMESTER II
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
14O201
40
60
100
14A202
40
60
100
14O203
40
60
100
14O204
C Programming II
40
60
100
14A205
Fuels and Lubricants
40
60
100
14A206
40
60
100
PRACTICAL
14O211
40
60
100
14H212
Physics Laboratory
40
60
100
14A213
Fuels and Lubricants Laboratory
40
60
100
18
11
25
TOTAL
647
SEMESTER III
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
14A301
40
60
100
14A302
40
60
100
14A303
40
60
100
14A304
40
60
100
14A305
40
60
100
14A306
Materials for Automobiles
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
18
24
PRACTICAL
14A311
14A312
14A313
Fluid Mechanics and Strength of

Materials Laboratory
Laboratory
TOTAL
SEMESTER IV
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
14A401
40
60
100
14A402
40
60
100
14A403
Automotive Engines
40
60
100
14A404
Electronics
Automotive Chassis
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
18
24
14A405
14A406
PRACTICAL
Laboratory
Automotive Electrical and
14A412
Automotive Engine and Chassis
14A413
Components Laboratory
TOTAL
14A411
648
SEMESTER V
Course
Code
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Course Title
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
14A501
40
60
100
40
60
100
14A503
Two and Three Wheeler

Design of Automotive Chassis and Engine
Components
Vehicle Dynamics
40
60
100
14A504
Automotive Transmission
40
60
100
14A505
Theory of Machines
100
100
14Axxx
Elective I
40
60
100
14A502
PRACTICAL
14O511
Soft skills
100
100
14A512
Dynamics Laboratory
Computer Aided Chassis Design and
Analysis Laboratory
Two and Three Wheeler Laboratory
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
18
12
26
14A513
14A514
TOTAL
SEMESTER VI
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
14A601
Intelligent Transport System
40
60
100
14A602
Engine Management System
40
60
100
14A603
Finite Element Analysis
40
60
100
14A604
Combustion and Heat Transfer
40
60
100
14A605
Electric and Hybrid Vehicles
40
60
100
14Axxx
Elective II
40
60
100
PRACTICAL
14A611
40
60
100
40
60
100
14A613
Heat Transfer Laboratory

Computer Aided Engine Design and
Manufacturing Laboratory
Engine Testing Laboratory
40
60
100
14A651
Mini Project
100
100
18
12
26
14A612
TOTAL
649
SEMESTER VII
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
14A702

Engineering Ethics
Vehicle Maintenance
14A703
Vehicle Body Engineering
40
60
100
14A704
40
60
100
14Axxx
Elective III
40
60
100
14Axxx
Elective IV
40
60
100
14O701
40
60
100
40
60
100
PRACTICAL
14A711
Vehicle Maintenance Laboratory
40
60
100
14A721
Comprehension
14A751
100
100
TOTAL
18
22
SEMESTER VIII
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
40
60
100
PRACTICAL
14A851
24
12
TOTAL
24
12

650
LIST OF ELECTIVES
Course Code
Course Title
14A001
Aerodynamics of Road Vehicles
14A002
14A003
Automobile Safety and Testing
14A004
14A005
Automotive and Real Time Embedded System
14A006
Automotive Instrumentation
14A007
Automotive Welding and Testing
14A008
Body Structure Design
14A009
Commercial Fleet Operation
14A010
14A011
14A012
Engine Combustion Analysis
14A013
Manufacture of Automotive Components
14A014
Micro Air Vehicle
14A015
14A016
Modeling and Simulation of Internal Combustion Engines
14A017
Special Vehicles
14A018
14A019
Vehicle Accident Analysis and Reconstruction Methods
14A020
Vibration and Noise Control in Automobiles
ONE CREDIT COURSES
Course Code
Course Title
14A901
Vehicle Body Building
14A902
Motor Vehicle Act
14A903
Tyre Maintenance and Retreading
14A904
Engine Trouble Shooting
651
SEMESTER I
14O101
CALCULUS AND ITS APPLICATIONS

(Common to all Branches)
3
OBJECTIVES:
To acquaint the students with the concepts of calculus to solve the problems in all engineering
disciplines.
To impart knowledge in double integral and triple integrals.
To make the students acquire sound knowledge of techniques in solving ordinary differential
equations.
To familiarize the concept of vector differentiation and integration.
To demonstrate ability to compute eigen values and eigen vectors.
OUTCOMES:
understand the idea of optimization and be able to solve extreme value problems.
interpret the definite integral geometrically as the area under a curve.
apply the knowledge of differential equations in order to solve engineering problems.
acquire understanding of linear, surface and volume integrals and perform calculations with
operators grad, curl, div.
identify a system of linear equations(or linear system) and describe its solution.
UNIT I
APPLICATIONS OF DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS
9
Curvature in Cartesian co-ordinates Centre and radius of curvature Circle of curvature Evolutes
and Envelopes (single parameter) Maxima and minima of functions of two variables Lagranges
method of undetermined multipliers.
UNIT II
INTEGRAL CALCULUS
9
Double integrals in Cartesian and polar coordinates Change of order of integration Area enclosed
by plane curves Change of variables in double integrals Area of a curved surface Triple integrals
Volume of Solids.
UNIT III
LINEAR DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS OF SECOND AND HIGHER

ORDER EQUATION
9
Linear differential equation of second and higher order equations with constant coefficients EulerCauchy equation Method of Variation of parameter Application of second order differential
equations connected with electric circuits, Bending of beams (Differential equations and associated
conditions need to be given).
UNIT IV
VECTOR CALCULUS
9
Gradient, divergence and curl Directional derivative Irrotational and solenoidal vector fields
Vector integration Greens theorem in a plane, Gauss divergence theorem and Stokes
theorem(excluding proofs) Simple applications involving cubes and rectangular parallelopipeds.
UNIT V
MATRICES
9
Eigen values and Eigen vectors of a real matrix Statement and Applications of Cayley Hamilton
theorem Orthogonal Diagonalization Reduction of Quadratic form to Canonical form by orthogonal
transformation Nature of quadratic forms.
TOTAL: 45 + 15
TEXT BOOKS:
SI. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
Bali N P
Manish Goyal
A Textbook of
Engineering Mathematics
2.
Veerarajan T
for first year
652
Publisher
Laxmi Publications Pvt
Ltd, 8th Edition
Tata McGraw Hill
Publishing Co., New
Delhi, 5th Edition
Year of
Publication
2011
2008
3.
Grewal B S
Higher Engineering
Mathematics
4.
Ramana B V
Higher Engineering
Mathematics, First reprint
Khanna Publishers, 40th

Edition
Tata McGraw Hill
Publishing Co., New
Delhi
2007
2011
REFERENCE BOOKS:
SI. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Kreyszig E
Mathematics

Singapore, 9th Edition
2013
2.
Venkataraman M K
Engineering
Mathematics
National Publishing Co.,

Chennai, 2nd Edition
2003
3.
Dennis G Zill
Michael R Cullen
Mathematics
Jones and Bartlett

Publishers, 3rd Edition
2006
4.
Tom M Apostol
Calculus
Wiley India Pvt Ltd, 2nd

Edition
2011
5.
Robert Wrede
Murray R Spiegel
Schaums Outlines
Advanced Calculus
McGraw-Hill, 3rd
Edition
2010
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http:// mathworld.wolfram.com
http://.intmath.com
http:// intmath.com/differential-equations
http:// intmath.com/plane-analytic-geometry/intro.php
http://intmath.com/Matrices-determinants
14G102/14H202
ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

3
OBJECTIVES:
To create awareness in engineering graduates about the importance of environment,

biosystems and ecofriendly technology.
To make a sound knowledge in water quality parameters and water technology.
To find the solutions to an array of global environmental issues like deforestation, global
warming and ozone layer depletion and pollution related problems.
To enable the student to be conversant with renewable energy resources and energy storage
devices.
OUTCOMES:
understand the nature, ecosystem and biodiversity.
know water quality parameters and water purification technology.
realize the importance of renewable energy sources and concepts of energy storage devices.
know the importance of socio -economic responsibilities of an engineer in the environmental

protection and reduction of pollution.
have a sound knowledge in applying innovative technology and engineering principles in

environmental conservation.
UNIT I
ENVIRONMENT AND BIO SYSTEMS
9
Environment Definition Scope and importance Planet Earth Atmosphere Structure and
composition of atmosphere Ecosystem Structure and functions of ecosystem Biotic components,
Tropic level, Food chain and Food web, Energy flow in the ecosystem Biodiversity - Definition and
types Biodiversity at the global, national and regional level India as a mega diversity nation
Hotspot of biodiversity Endangered and Endemic species Values of biodiversity Threats to
biodiversity Habitat loss Poaching Man-wildlife conflicts Conservation of biodiversity.
653
UNIT II
WATER RESOURSES AND WATER TECHNOLOGY
9
Water - Hydrological cycle Ground water Confined and unconfined aquifers Dams - Benefits and
problems Water quality parameters - Turbidity, acidity, alkalinity, nitrogen and fluoride (definition,
sources and significance only) WHO and Indian standards Water hardness Estimation of hardness
Softening of water Zeolite and deionization process Desalination Electro dialysis and Reverse
Osmosis Surface water treatment Water conservation Rain water harvesting Water shed
management.
UNIT III
POLLUTIONS AND CONTROL
9
Air pollution Sources, effects and Control methods (particulate control methods) Acid rain
Bhopal Gas Tragedy, Burning of plastics Water pollution - point and non-point sources, effects and
Control Thermal pollution, Noise pollution, Soil pollution sources, effects and control Soil
erosion, salinity E-waste Nuclear waste Solid waste management.
UNIT IV
ENERGY SOURCES AND ENERGY STORAGE DEVICES
9
Renewable and non-renewable energy resources Fossil fuels Hydroelectric energy Tidal energy
Wind energy Green power Bio fuels and bio diesel Nuclear energy Fission and fusion
reactions Light water nuclear reactors for power generation Solar energy - Conversion, Solar cells
Fuel cells Hydrogen - Oxygen fuel cell Energy storage devices Batteries Alkaline batteries
Lead acid battery and Lithium battery.
UNIT V
ENVIRONMENT AND SOCIAL ISSUES
9
Green house effect, Global warming Climate change Ozone layer-depletion and solutions
Deforestation Causes and effects Concept of sustainable development Green Chemistry Principle
and Applications Population studies Variation among nations, Population growth Population
Explosion Environment and Human health Disaster management Flood, Earthquake, Tsunami and
Cyclone.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.
No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Anubha Kaushik
Kaushik C P
Environmental Science
and Engineering
2014
Tyler Miller G
Scott Spoolman
Brooks / Cole
Cengage Learning
2012
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.
No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Jain P C
Monica Jain
Engineering Chemistry
Dhanpat Rai Publishing

Company (P) Ltd., New
Delhi.
2010
2.
Killer Botkin
Willey India Pvt.Ltd.
2012
3.
Erach Bharucha
Text Book of
Environmental Studies
United Grants Commission,

Universities Press Pvt Ltd.,
Hyderabad
2010
Deswal S
Deswal A
A Basic Course in
Environmental Studies
Dhanpat Rai and Co
2004
WEB URLs:
1. http:// freshupdates.in/lecture-notes/anna-university-environmental-science-and-engineering /
2. http:// people.eku.edu/ritchisong/317notes8.html
3. http:// ocw.mit.edu/courses/civil-and-environmental-engineering/
4. http:// renewableenergyworld.com/rea/tech/home
5. http:// batteryuniversity.com/learn/article/is_lithium_ion_the_ideal_battery
654
14O103
TECHNICAL ENGLISH
3
OBJECTIVES:
To have competent knowledge of grammar with an understanding of its basic rules.
To work together in team and accomplish objectives in a cordial atmosphere.
To inculcate the habit of reading and writing leading to effective communication.
To emphasize specially the development of speaking skills amongst learners of Engineering
and Technology.
To engage in writing formal assignments.
OUTCOMES:
use writing and reading for inquiry, learning, thinking, and communicating.
speak and write appropriately applying these rules.
listen/view and comprehend different spoken experts critically and infer unspoken and implied
meanings.
fluent and precise transitions between sentences, ideas, and paragraphs
read and write a critical review of books and reports.
UNIT I
9
Introduction Listening Types of listening Speaking Introducing oneself Free speaking
(Hobbies, school life etc.,) Reading Types of reading (Intensive and Extensive Reading)
Exposure to different reading techniques Writing Writing on any given topic (my favourite
place/favourite games etc., ) Letter writing (Permission letter) Grammar Word formation (Prefix
and suffix) Vocabulary(General and technical) Parts of Speech.
UNIT II
9
Listening Listening process Listening to the lecture/speech Speaking Describing objects
Conversation (face to face / telephone conversation) Telephone etiquettes Reading Reading a
passage and answering questions Identifying the topic sentence and its role in a paragraph Writing
Hints development Checklist Grammar Sentence StructureIdioms and Phrases Phrasal
Verbs British and American Vocabulary.
UNIT III
9
Listening Listening to news on radio/ TV Listening to conversation Speaking Pronunciation
drills Tongue Twisters Speech Sounds Reading Finding key information in a given text
Skimming-Scanning Writing Purpose and function Cause and effect Jumbled sentences Essay
Paragraph Letter writing (Accepting/declining letter) Grammar Articles Tense.
UNIT IV
9
Listening Listening to different accents, listening to speeches/presentation Speaking Syllables
Word stress Sentence stress Intonation Developing confidence through simple speech(About
family, friends, neighbours etc.,) Reading Transfer of information Writing Instruction
Recommendation Note taking Letter writing (Letter to the editor) Grammar Active into Passive
voice (Impersonal passive voice) Subject-verb agreement.
UNIT V
9
Listening Listening to documentation and responding them Speaking Role plays Group
interaction Presentation on the given topic Reading Reading short stories Autobiographies
Writing Report writing Note making Statistical interpretation (Graphic forms/bar charts/flow
charts/tabular column) Grammar Direct and Indirect speech Commonly mispronounced and
misspelt words.
TOTAL: 45+15
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
1.
Sumant
2.
Lakshminarayanan K R
Title of the Book

English for Engineers
English for Technical
Communication
655
Publisher
Vijay Nichole
Publication
SCITECH
Publications
Year of
publication
2011
2013
REFERENCE BOOKS
Sl. No.
Author(s)
1.
Gnanamurali M
2.
Meenakshi Raman
Sangeetha Sharma
3.
4.
5.
Rajamani K
Hamilton G
Meena kumari B
Brindha
Prabhakar K
Elango K
Veena Selvan
Sujatha
Priyadarshini
Title of the Book

English Grammar at a
Glance
Technical
Communication
Technical English-1
Technical English
Resonance
English for Engineers
and Technologies
Publisher
Year of
publication
S.Chand and
Company Ltd
2011
Oxford University
Press
2011
Virutcham
publications
2011
GEMS
Publication
Manas Saikia for
Cambridge
University Press
India Pvt.Ltd.
2012
2013
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http:// BBC learn English .com

http:// onestopenglish.com
http:// british council.org
http:// learn-english-today.com
http:// talkenglish.com
14O104
C PROGRAMMING I

3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand about computer system.
To gain knowledge about different data structures in C language.
To understand the concept of arrays.
To know the concepts of structures and unions.
To understand the concept of functions.
OUTCOMES:
implement the programming style of C for domain based problems in engineering.
develop efficient programs using C with their own logic and capabilities.
design programs with preprocessor directives for solving real time problems.
analyze the working of functions in real time applications.
develop logic through programming and implement basic mathematical and other problems.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
10
Algorithm / pseudo code Flowchart Program development steps Structure of C program A
simple C program Identifiers Basic data types and sizes Constants Variables Arithmetic
Relational and logical operators Increment and decrement operators Conditional operator Bitwise operators Assignment operators Expressions Conditional expressions Precedence and
order of evaluation Input-output statements Statements and blocks IF and switch statements
Loops While Do-while and for statements Break Continue Go to and labels Programming
examples.
UNIT II
CONSOLE I/O AND PREPROCESSOR DIRECTIVES
8
Types of I/O Console I/O functions Formatted I/O Sprintf( ), sscanf( ) Unformatted I/O
functions C Preprocessor Header files #include #define Defining named constants #undef
Predefined macros Macros Conditional compilation Preprocessor operators # ##
defined #line #error #pragma.
656
UNIT III
ARRAYS AND STORAGE CLASSES
8
Arrays Concepts Declaration Definition Accessing elements Storing elements Twodimensional and multi-dimensional arrays Applications of arrays Storage classes Extern Autoregister Static Scope rules.
UNIT IV
STRUCTURES AND UNIONS
10
Derived types Structures Declaration Definition and initialization of structures Accessing
structures Nested structures Arrays of structures Structures and functions Bit fields Unions
C program examples.
UNIT V
FUNCTIONS
9
Designing structured programs Functions Types User defined functions Standard library
functions Function header Function body Function statements Function prototype Function
calls Parameter passing Call by value Return statements Arrays and functions Recursive
functions Functions and static storage class.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.
No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Bryon S Gottfried
Programming with C
Tata McGraw Hill,

2nd Edition
2006
2.
Yashawant Kanetkar
Let us C
BPB Publications
2008
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.
No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
Balagurusamy E
2.
Rajaram V
3.
Ramesh Babu V
4.
Herbert Schildt
C: The Complete reference
5.
Forouzan B A
Gilberg R F
A Structured Programming
Approach Using C
6.
Stephen G Kochan
Programming in C
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Programming in ANSI C
TMH Publishers
2004
Fundamentals of
Computers
Fundamentals of
Computers

4th Edition
2006
VRB Publishers
2002
Tata McGraw Hill

4th Edition
Thomson,
3rd Edition
Pearson Education,
3rd Edition
2000
2001
2004
WEB URLs:
1. http:// programmingtutorials.com
2. http://ibm.com/developerworks/aix/library/auhook_duttac.html.
3. http://cyberwalker.com
4. http://computerbasics.com
14A105/14M105/14C105
BASICS OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

ENGINEERING
(Common to AUTO/ MECH /CIVIL)

3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the basic laws and electric circuits.
To know the construction, working principle and types of electrical machines and measuring
instruments.
To gain a thorough knowledge of electron devices.
To study the performance and applications of electronic circuits.
To gain knowledge on the fundamentals of digital electronics.
657
OUTCOMES:
gain basic knowledge on DC and AC circuits.
familiarize with electrical machines and instruments.
have a basic knowledge on electron devices.
understand the operation of various electronic circuits.
familiarize with digital electronics circuits.
UNIT I
ELECTRIC CIRCUITS
9
DC circuits: Current, potential, resistance, power and energy Ohms law Kirchhoffs laws
Resistors in series and parallel Simple problems.
AC circuits: Introduction and terminologies AC through pure resistance, inductance and capacitance
Series Circuits: RL, RC and RLC Simple problems.
UNIT II
ELECTRICAL MACHINES AND INSTRUMENTS (Qualitative study only) 9
Electrical machines: Construction and principle of operation of DC generators, DC motors single phase
induction motors Applications.
Electrical Instruments: Operating principle of moving coil, moving iron instruments Dynamometer
type watt meter Energy meter.
UNIT III
ELECTRON DEVICES
PN junction diode and its characteristics Zener diode and its characteristics Bipolar junction
transistor CB, CE, CC configurations and characteristics Field effect transistor: Types and
characteristics.
UNIT IV
ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS
9
Half wave and full wave rectifier Filters Single stage amplifier Oscillator circuits.
Operational amplifier: Block diagram, characteristics Applications: Inverting, non inverting, summer
and subtractor.
UNIT V
DIGITAL ELECTRONICS
9
Binary number system Boolean algebra Logic gates Half and full adder Flip-flops A/D and
D/A Converters.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Thyagarajan T
Fundamentals of Electrical
and Electronics Engineering
SCITECH Publications
India (P) Ltd
2011
2.
David A Bell

Circuits
Prentice Hall of
India,Fifth Edition
2008
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.
No.
Author(s)
Title of the book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Robert L Boylestad
Louis Nashelsky
Electronic Devices and Circuit

Theory
Prentice Hall PTR
2011
2.
Donald D Givone
Digital Principles and Design
Tata McGraw-Hill
2003
3.
Morris Mano M
Digital logic and Computer

design
2002
4.
Kothari D P
Nagrath I J
Basic Electrical Engineering
Tata McGraw Hill
2002
658
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
http://www.electronicsworld.com
http://www.facstaff.bucknell.edu/mastascu/elessonshtml/Measurements
http://elearning.vtu.ac.in/ELE1525.html
5. http://www.facstaff.bucknell.edu/mastascu/elessonshtml/EEIndex.html
14A106/14M106/14C106
ENGINEERING DRAWING
(Common to AUTO/MECH/CIVIL)
2
OBJECTIVES:
To enable the students with various concepts like dimensioning, conventions and drawing
standards.
To impart the knowledge on projections of points, lines, plane surfaces and solids.
To understand the basic principles of orthographic projection and its conventions.
To understand the sectioning and development of surfaces.
To enable the students on isometric and perspective projection.
OUTCOMES:
use the appropriate conventions and drawing standards.
create the projections of points, lines, plane surfaces and solids.
acquire visualization skills through free hand sketching of multiple views from pictorial views
of objects.
construct the sectioning and development of surfaces using different methods.
create the isometric and perspective projection.
CONCEPTS AND CONVENTIONS (Not for examination)
3
Importance of graphics in engineering applications Use of drafting instruments BIS conventions
and specifications Size, layout and folding of drawing sheets Lettering, redrawing and
dimensioning.
UNIT I
PLANE CURVES
13
Conics Construction of ellipse, parabola and hyperbola by eccentricity method Construction of
involutes of triangle, square, pentagon, hexagon and circle Construction of cycloids Drawing of
tangents and normal to the above curves.
UNIT II
PROJECTIONS OF POINTS, LINES, PLANE SURFACES AND SOLIDS 15
Projection of points in all quadrants Projection of straight lines located in all quadrants Projection
of planes surfaces. Projection of simple solids like prisms, pyramids, cylinder and cone when the axis is
inclined to one reference plane by change of position method.
UNIT II I
ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS
14
Representation of three Dimensional objects General principles of orthographic projection Need for
importance of multiple views and their placement First angle projection Layout views Developing
visualization skills through free hand sketching of multiple views from pictorial views of objects.
UNIT IV
SECTIONS OF SOLIDS AND DEVELOPMENT OF SURFACES
15
Sectioning of above solids in simple vertical position by cutting planes inclined to one reference plane
and perpendicular to the other Obtaining true shape of section.
Development of lateral surfaces of simple and truncated solids Prisms, pyramids, cylinders and cones
Development of lateral surfaces of solids perpendicular to the axis.
UNIT V
ISOMETRIC AND PERSPECTIVE PROJECTIONS
12
Principles of isometric projection Isometric scale Isometric projections of simple solids, truncated
prisms, pyramids, cylinders and cones Perspective projection of simple solids like prisms,
pyramids and cylinders by visual ray method.
659
COMPUTER AIDED DRAFTING (Demonstration only)

3
Importance of 2D drafting Demonstration of computer Aided drafting and dimensioning using
appropriate software.
TOTAL: 30+45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.
No.
Author(s)
1.
Natarajan K V
2.
Morling K
Publisher
Year of
publication
Dhanalakshmi Publishers,
Chennai
2010
Elsevier Publications
2010
Book name
A text book of
Geometric and
Engineering Drawing
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.
No.
Author(s)
Book name
Venugopal K
Publisher
Year of
publication
1. Prabhu Raja V

Limited
2010
2. DhananjayA.Jolhe
Engineering Drawing
with an introduction to
AutoCAD
Tata McGraw Hill

Publishing Company
Limited
2008
3. Bhatt N D
Engineering Drawing
Charotar Publishing House
2010
Narayana K L
4. Kannaiah P
Basant Agarwal
5. Agarwal C M
Engineering Drawing
Tata McGraw HillPublishing

Company Limited, New
Delhi
Tata McGraw Hill
Publishing Company
Limited, New Delhi
2008
2008
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.mhne.com/joine/ed
http://www.ncsu.edu/project/stemgaming/enggraphics.html
http://www.engineeringdrawing.org
http://www.manajntu.com/engineering-drawing-study-materials-include-lab-manuals/
http://www.scribd.com/doc/37923434/Engineering-Drawing-Course-Book
14O111
C PROGAMMING LABORATORY I
0
OBJECTIVES:
To understand about computer system.
To gain knowledge about different data structures in C language.
To understand the concept of arrays.
To know the concepts of structures and unions.
To understand the concept of functions.
OUTCOMES:
implement the programming style of c for domain based problems in engineering.
develop efficient programs using c with their own logic & capabilities.
design programs with pre-processor directives for solving real time problems.
analyze the working of functions in real time applications.
develop logic through programming and implement basic mathematical and other problems.
660
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Programs using constants, variables, keywords and data types

Programs using operators
Programs using control structures
Programs using arrays
Programs using storage classes
Programs using functions
Programs using call by value and call by reference
Programs using structures
Programs using unions
Programs insisting on different types of errors on structures and unions
Programs on command line arguments
Programs using Preprocessor Directives
14A112/14M112/14C112
ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING

LABORATORY
(Common to AUTO / MECH / CIVIL)
0
OBJECTIVES:
To validate the basic laws and theorems of electrical circuits.
To verify the performance characteristics of electrical machines.
To measure power and power factor of single phase circuit.
To obtain the characteristics of diodes, BJTs and Op-Amp.
OUTCOMES:
evaluate the basic laws and theorems of electrical circuits.
analyze the various characteristics of electrical machines.
measurer single phase power and power factor.
analyze the various characteristics of PN diode, Zener diode, BJT and Op-Amp.
design simple applications using Op-Amp.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Verification of Ohms law and Kirchhoffs laws.

Measurement of single phase power and power factor.
Load test on DC shunt motor.
Load test on DC shunt generator.
Load test on single phase induction motor.
Characteristics of PN diode.
Characteristics of Zener diode.
Half wave rectifier and full wave rectifier.
Characteristics of CB, CC and CE amplifiers.
Characteristics of Op-Amp 741.
Applications of Op-amp 741(Adder, Subtractor).
Study of logic gates and flip-flops.
14G113/14H213
ENVIRONMENTAL CHEMISTRY LABORATORY

0
OBJECTIVES:
To be conversant with the experimental procedure for quantitative analysis.
To analyze the various water quality parameters.
To import hands on experience in the analytical instruments.
To gain working knowledge of chemical analysis.
661
OUTCOMES:
understand the basic principles of quantitative analysis.
conversant with the analysis of water quality parameters.
understand the basic concepts of analytical instruments.
gain the working knowledge of chemical instrumentation and laboratory techniques
know the ability to use their skills to design and conduct independent analytical work.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Estimation of Total, permanent and temporary hardness of water sample by EDTA method.
2. Determination of alkalinity of water sample by Indicator method.
3. Determination of dissolved oxygen content in water by Winklers method.
4. Estimation of chloride content in water sample by Argentometric method.
5. Determination of available chlorine in bleaching powder.
6. Estimation of strength of acid by pH metry.
7. Estimation of iron content in a water sample by Potentiometric method.
8. Estimation of Simple acids by Conductometric method.
9. Estimation of acids in a mixture by Conductometric method.
10. Determination of iron content in a water sample using Spectrophotometer (Thiocyanate
method).
14G114/14H214
ENGINEERING PRACTICES

0
OBJECTIVES:
To know about the usage of appropriate tools and equipments used in plumbing, sheet metal
and welding.
To understand the safety precautions needed for plumbing, sheet metal and welding.
To provide the practical experience on different engineering application works like plumbing,
sheet metal and welding.
To impart knowledge about soldering, electrical materials and perform electrical wiring.
To understand about the calculations of power and energy.
OUTCOMES:
Learners should able to
acquire knowledge on proper usages of tools and equipments used in plumbing, sheet metal
and welding.
adapt safety precautions needed for plumbing, sheet metal and welding.
perform plumbing, sheet metal and welding.
carryout the soldering and electrical wiring.
estimate the power and energy consumed.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
FOUNDRY AND CARPENTARY
1.
Study of tools and equipments Foundry and smithy.
2.
Study of tools and equipments Fitting and carpentry.
PLUMBING
1.
Safety aspects in plumbing
2.
Study of tools and equipments Preparation of models
3.
Cutting and threading of GI Pipes
4.
Study of valves, taps and repairing.
5.
Measuring and marking practice of PVC and GI pipes Connection to service line.
SHEET METAL
1.
Study of tools, equipments and safety precautions.
2.
Study of sheet metal operations.
3.
Different types of joints making Knocked up, double grooving joints.
4.
Model making Trays, baskets and funnels.
662
WELDING
1.
Safety aspects of welding and soldering.
2.
Study of Gas and Arc welding equipments.
3.
Welding of Lap, Butt, T-Joints and Corner Joints.
SOLDERING AND ELECTRICAL WIRING
1.
Safety aspects of electrical wiring.
2.
Soldering of small electrical and electronic Circuits.
3.
Study of electrical materials and wiring components.
4.
Wiring circuit for a lamp using single and stair case switches.
5.
Wiring circuit for fluorescent lamps.
6.
Calculation of power and energy.
SEMESTER II
14O201
LINEAR ALGEBRA AND FOURIER SERIES

3
OBJECTIVES:
To make the students to understand the concept of periodic function and represent them in
Fourier series.
To provide knowledge about the concepts of the partial derivative of functions of two or more
variables.
To learn about the three most important classes of Partial Differential Equations.
To gain good understanding and practice with Fourier transform techniques.
To understand several concepts in linear algebra, including systems of linear equations and
vector spaces.
OUTCOMES:
represent common periodic functions by trigonometric Fourier series.
solve second and higher order Partial Differential Equations.
solve the heat equation, the wave equation and Laplaces equation.
apply Fourier transforms and Convolution theorem.
solve systems of linear equations and vector spaces.
UNIT I
FOURIER SERIES
9
Dirichlets conditions General Fourier series Odd and even functions Half range sine series
Half range cosine series Parsevals Identity Harmonic analysis.
UNIT II
PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS
9
Formation of Partial differential equation Singular integrals Solutions of standard types of first
order partial differential equations Lagranges linear equation Homogeneous linear partial
differential equations of second and higher order with constant coefficients.
UNIT III
APPLICATIONS OF PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS
9
Classification of Partial Differential Equation Solutions of one dimensional wave equation One
dimensional equation of heat conduction Steady state solution of two dimensional equation of heat
conduction (excluding insulated edges)
UNIT IV
FOURIER TRANSFORM
9
Statement of Fourier integral theorem Fourier transform pair Fourier sine and cosine transforms
Properties Transforms of simple functions Convolution theorem Parsevals identity.
UNIT V
LINEAR ALGEBRA
9
Vector spaces Definition and properties Basis and Dimension Row and column spaces Rank and
Nullity Inner Product spaces Orthonormal basis Gram schmidth Process.
TOTAL: 45 + 15
663
TEXT BOOKS:
SI.
No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Bali N P
Manish Goyal
A Textbook of
Laxmi Publications Pvt.

Ltd. , 8th edition
2011
2.
Grewal B S
Higher Engineering
Mathematics
Khanna Publishers, 40th

edition
2007
3.
Ramana B V
Higher Engineering
Mathematics
4.
Herstesin I N
Topics in Algebra
Tata McGraw Hill

Publishing Co., New
Delhi, First reprint
2nd edition
2011
2013
REFERENCE BOOKS:
SI.
No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
Kreyszig E
Mathematics
2.
Venkataraman M
K
Engineering Mathematics,
3.
Veerarajan T
Engineering Mathematics for

First year
4.
Sharma J N
Vasista A P
Linear Algebra
5.
Kandasamy P
Thilagavathy K
Gunavathy K
Volume III, Revised edition
Publisher
Year of
Publication

Singapore ,10th edition
2013
2003
National Publishing Co.,

Chennai, 2nd edition
Tata McGraw Hill
Publishing Co., New
Delhi, 5th edition
Krishna Prakashan
Publications, 42nd
Edition
2008
2010
S Chand and Co., New

Delhi
2014
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http:// mathworld.wolfram.com
http://intmath.com
http:// thefouriertransform.com
http:// fourier-series.com
http:// math.iitb.ac.in
14A202/14M202/14C202
PHYSICS FOR MECHANICAL SCIENCES
3
OBJECTIVES:
To expose the students to the fundamental concepts of lasers, optical fibers and their
properties.
To provide adequate knowledge about the quantum mechanics and its based instruments.
To provide basic concepts on magnetism and magnetic materials.
To describe the students about properties, preparation of nano-materials, basics of vacuum
systems, vacuum pumps and vacuum measurement systems.
OUTCOMES:
understand the basics of lasers and high speed communication system.
understand the basics of modern analytical instruments.
664
understand magnetic materials and magnetic recording.

apply knowledge in contemporary nanomaterials and nano devices.
understand the concepts of industrial vacuum systems.
UNIT I
LASER AND FIBER OPTICS
9
Introduction Spontaneous and stimulated emission Population inversion Einsteins A and B
coefficients Pumping Types of lasers Nd:YAG, CO2 Lasers in industries Medical
applications Introduction to fiber optics Numerical aperture and acceptance angle Step index and
graded index fibres Losses in optical fibers (attenuation, dispersion, bending) Applications of
optical fibres, endoscope Optical communication (Block diagram only).
UNIT II
QUANTUM PHYSICS AND APPLICATIONS
9
Inadequacy of classical mechanics Black body radiation-Introduction to Quantum theory Dual
nature of matter and radiation de Broglie wave length Uncertainty principle Schrdingers
equation Particle in a box (1D) Optical microscope Electron microscope SEM and TEM.
UNIT III
MAGNETIC MATERIALS
9
Magnetic moment Bohr magneton Dia, para and ferro magnetism Weiss theory of
ferromagnetism Heisenberg and domain theory of ferromagnetism Hysteresis Hard and soft
magnetic materials Ferri and antiferro magnetic materials Ferrites Structure, preparation and
applications Permanent magnets, transformer cores, magnetic recording and readout.
UNIT IV
NANOMATERIALS
9
Nanophase materials Properties, Fabrication methods Ball milling method, soft lithographic
method Vapour phase deposition methods PVD, CVD, MBE Liquid phase methods Colloidal
and sol gel methods Carbon nanotubes structure, properties, fabrication and applications Organic
semiconductors Organic FET, organic LED (Principle and working only).
UNIT V
VACUUM SCIENCE
9
Introduction Importance of vacuum in industries Schematic diagram of a vacuum system
Pumping speed and throughput Types of pumps Working principle, construction, pressure range,
limitations and pumping characteristics of rotary pump, diffusion pump, turbo molecular pump
Measurement of vacuum using gauges (Mc Leod gauge, Pirani gauge and Penning gauge).
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.
No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
1.
Senthil Kumar G
Engineering Physics I and II
VRB Publishers
2.
Mani P
Materials Science
Dhanam Publications
Year of
Publication
2011
2012
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.
No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
S. Chand and Co.
publishers
Macmillan
Publishing
Company, 8th edition
Year of
Publication
2013
1.
Avadhanulu M N
Engineering Physics
2.
James F
Shackelford S
Introduction to Materials
Science for Engineers
3.
William D
Callister Jr
Materials Science and

Engineering An Introduction
John Willey and

Sons
2009
4.
Jewett
Serway
Physics for scientists and

engineers with modern physics
Cengage Learning
2014
665
2014
WEB URLs:
1. http://appliedphysics.com
2. http://sparknotes.com
3. http://materialstoday.com
4. http://physicsworld.com
5. http:// freevideolectures.com/University/IIT-Madras
14O203
COMMUNICATIVE ENGLISH
3
OBJECTIVES:
To become self-confident individuals by mastering inter-personal skills, team management

skills, and leadership skills.
To develop effective communication skills (spoken and written).
To develop attitudes conducive for effective intercultural communication
To enhance broad career plans, evaluate the employment market, identify the organizations to
get good placement, match the job requirements and skill sets.
To understand spoken instructions and give spoken instructions to others.

OUTCOMES
Learners can:
identify and analyze problems in difficult situation and make justifiable evaluation.
build a good rapport , interact and work effectively with others
practice ethical attitudes in addition to having the responsibility towards society.
respond in discussions and in writing to a report in the electronic or print media.
gain practical knowledge about the corporate culture .
UNIT I
12
Introduction Communication Importance of communication Process of communication
Listening Types of listening Speaking Opening a conversation (greetings, comments on topics
like weather) Closing a conversation (excuses, general wish, positive comment, thanks giving)
Reading Speed reading Reading passages with time limit Writing Informal letter (Inviting your
friend to a function, congratulating someone for his/her success, Thanking ones friends/relatives)
Grammarregular and irregular verbs.
Language lab Listening and answering the questions Vocabulary building Phonetics Cover
letter with resume.
UNIT II
12
Types of formal communication Principles of communication Barriers to listening listening and
sequencing of sentences Speaking Giving directions Debate Reading Predicting the content
Developing analytical skills, deductive and inductive reasoning (Extensive reading) Writing
Minutes of meeting Format and practice in the preparation of minutes Writing summary writing
summary after reading articles from journals Format for journal articles Grammar Editing
Abbreviation and Acronyms If conditionals.
Language lab Listening Observing a model group discussion and reviewing the performance of
each participant Identifying the characteristics of good listener Conversation skills with a sense of
stress, intonation, pronunciation and meaning Oral presentation Writing Structuring the report
Types of Report.
UNIT III
12
Concept of effective communication Barriers to communication Listening Listening to correct
pronunciation Speaking Sound recognition Role play and mock interview for grasping interview
skills Reading Correct pronunciation through reading Writing Elements of technical articles
(abstract, introduction,methodology,results,discussion,conclusion,appendices,references) Writing
strategies Grammar Tag questions.
666
Language lab Listening to news on TV/Radio Reading comprehension Speaking Group

discussion skills Initiating the discussion Interview skills (Types of interview, required key skills,
common mistakes and how to avoid it).
UNIT IV
12
Media of communication Ear training Inter and intra personal skills Speaking Exchanging
suggestions and proposals Mind mapping techniques Note making skills Making notes from
books or any form of written materials (Intensive reading) Writing Collocation Invitation and
agenda preparation Circular and notice writing Grammar Indianism Use of clauses.
Language Lab Correct Pronunciation Soft skills (Time Management, Articulation, Stress
Management, Creative Thinking).
UNIT V
12
E-mail communication Observing model interviews Listening and correcting the errors Speaking
Innovation and creativity Assertiveness Psychology and psychometric analysis Analytical
thinking Reading Interpretation Critical Interpretation Writing Picture for Discussion
Grammar Editing Infinitives and Gerund.
Language Lab Body Language Personality Development Corporate Culture Campus to
Company Model Presentation Model Group Discussion.
Note: Language Lab will be used for learning LSRW.
TOTAL: 40+20
TEXT BOOKS:
SI.
No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Barun K Mitra
Personality Development
and Soft Skills
Oxford University
Press, New Delhi.
2012
2.
Leena Sen
Communication Skills

Limited, New Delhi.
2011
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.
No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
PHI Learning
Private limited,
New Delhi
SCITECH
Publication
PHI Learning
Private limited,
New Delhi
Year of
Publication
1.
Nira Konar
Communication Skills for

Professonals
2.
Lakshminarayanan K R
Murugavel T
Managing Soft Skills
3.
Kavita Tyagi
Padma Misra
Advanced Technical
Communication
4.
Pushpa Lata
Sanjay Kumar
Communicate or collapse
(A Handbook of Effective
Public Speaking,Group
Discussions and Interviews)
PHI Learning
Private limited,
New Delhi
2013
5.
Elango K
Veena Selvan
Sujatha Priyadarshini
Resonance
English for Engineers and
Technologies
Manas Saikia for

Cambridge
University Press
India Pvt.Ltd.
2013
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
http:// elt@oxford.com
http:// nonverbal.com
http:// onestopenglish.com
667
2010
2010
2011
4.
5.
http:// eslflow.com
http:// myenglishpages.com
14O204
C PROGRAMMING II

3
OBJECTIVES:
To gain knowledge about C language pointer.
To understand the concept of arrays and pointers.
To know about structures and unions with pointers.
To understand the concept of functions with pointers.
To gain knowledge about file operations.
OUTCOMES:
analyse the significance of pointers in c for solving domain based problems.
design programs in c using pointers for scenario based problems.
implement the programs using file concepts in real time applications.
develop problem-solving skills to translate problem statements into programs
analyse the purpose of pointers for parameter passing, referencing and dereferencing, and
linking data structures.
UNIT I
POINTERS
9
Pointers Pointer expressions Pointer assignments Pointer conversions Pointer arithmetic
Pointer comparisons Pointers and arrays Multiple indirection initializing pointers Pointers to
functions Restrict- qualified pointers Problems with pointers.
UNIT II
STRINGS AND POINTERS
9
Strings String I/O String manipulation Arithmetic operations on strings String handling
functions Arrays and strings Functions and strings Pointers and strings Arrays with negative
indexes Using const in pointer declarations Void pointers.
UNIT III
ADVANCE USE OF POINTERS
8
Static and dynamic memory allocation Function pointers Arrays of pointers Pointer to a pointer
The library function qsort The library function bsearch Reallocation Pointer variables in
structures Pointers to structures.
UNIT IV
FILE HANDLING AND ADVANCED FEATURES
10
Standard C vs. unix file Streams and files Streams Files File system basics The File pointer
Opening a file Closing a file Writing a character Reading a character Using fopen( ), getc( ),
putc( ), and fclose( ) Using feof( ) Working with strings: fputs( ) and fgets( ) rewind( )
ferror( ) Erasing files Flushing a stream fread( ) and fwrite( ) Using fread( ) and fwrite( )
fseek( ) and random-access fprintf( ) and fscanf( ) The standard streams The console I/O
connection Using freopen( ) to redirect the standard streams.
UNIT V
CONSOLE I/O
9
Reading and writing characters A problem with getchar( ) Alternatives to getchar( ) Reading and
writing strings Formatted console I/O printf( ) Printing characters Printing numbers
Displaying an address The %n specifier Format modifiers The minimum field width specifier
The precision specifier Justifying output Handling other data types The * and # modifiers
scanf( ) Format specifiers Inputting numbers Inputting unsigned integers Reading individual
characters using scanf( ) Reading strings Inputting an address The %n specifier Using a
scanset Discarding unwanted white space, Non-white space characters in the control string Pass
scanf( ) addresses Format modifiers Suppressing input.
TOTAL: 45
668
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.
No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Herbert Schildt
C: The Complete
reference
Tata McGraw Hill,

4th Edition
2000
2.
Ashok N Kamthane
Computer Programming
ITL Education Solutions

Limited, Pearson
Education
2007
3.
Byson S Gottfried
Programming with C
Tata McGraw Hill,

2nd Edition
2006
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.
No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Balagurusamy E
Programming in ANSI C
TMH Publishers
2004
2.
Rajaram V

4th Edition
2006
3.
Pradip Day and

Manas Ghosh
Computer Fundamentals and

Programming in C
Oxford University
Press
2006
4.
Ramesh Babu V
VRB Publishers
2002
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
http://Programmingtutorials.com
http://ibm.com/developerworks/aix/library/auhook_duttac.html.
http://cyberwalker.com
http://computerbasics.com
14A205
FUELS AND LUBRICANTS

3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the chemical and physical structure of fuels and lubricants.
To understand the effect of friction and the function of lubricants.
To provide the necessary knowledge about various fuels and testing methodologies.
To understand the combustion processes of SI and CI engines and fuel rating.
OUTCOMES:
describe the petroleum refining process and structure of fuels and lubricants.
explain the effect of friction and functions of lubrication system.
explain the properties and mechanism of various lubricants and additives.
exhibit the knowledge on various fuel properties and fuel testing methods.
describe the combustion process of SI and CI engines.
UNIT I
MANUFACTURE OF FUELS AND LUBRICANTS
9
Structure of Petroleum refining process Fuels Thermal cracking Catalytic cracking
Polymerization Alkylation Isomerisation Blending Products of refining process Manufacture
of lubricating oil base stocks Manufacture of finished automotive lubricants.
UNIT II
THEORY OF LUBRICATION
9
Engine friction Introduction Total engine friction Effect of engine variables on friction
Hydrodynamic lubrication Elasto hydrodynamic lubrication Boundary lubrication Bearing
lubrication Functions of the lubrication system Introduction to design of a lubricating system.
669
UNIT III
LUBRICANTS
9
Specific requirements for automotive lubricants Oxidation, deterioration and degradation of
lubricants Additives and additive mechanism Synthetic lubricants Classification of lubricating
oils Properties of lubricating oils Tests on lubricants Grease Classification Properties - Test
used in grease.
UNIT IV
PROPERTIES AND TESTING OF FUELS
9
Thermo-chemistry of fuels Properties and testing of fuels Relative density Calorific value
Distillation Vapour pressure Flash point Spontaneous ignition temperature Viscosity Pour
point Flammability Ignitability Diesel index API gravity Aniline point etc.
UNIT V
COMBUSTION AND FUEL RATING
9
SI Engines Flame propagation and mechanism of combustion Normal combustion Knocking
Octane rating Fuel requirements CI Engine - Mechanism of combustion Diesel knock Cetane
rating Fuel requirements Additive Mechanism Requirements of an additive Petrol fuel
additives and diesel fuel additives Specifications of fuels Emission testing.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.
No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Ganesan V
Internal Combustion
Engineering
Tata McGraw-Hill
Publishing Co.
2003
2.
Mathur M L
Sharma R P
A Course in Internal
Combustion Engines
Dhanpatrai publication
2003
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Surinder Parkash
Petroleum Fuels
Manufacturing Handbook:
including Specialty Products
and Sustainable
Manufacturing Techniques
2.
Mortier R M
Malcolm F Fox
Orszulik S T
Chemistry and Technology of

Lubricants
Springer
2011
3.
Chunsham Song
Chemistry of Diesel Fuels
CRC Press
2000
4.
Stepina V
Vesely V
Lubricants and Special Fluids
Elsevier
1992
McGraw Hill
Professional
2009
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
http:// openlearn.open.ac.uk/mod/oucontent/view.php?id=397829&section=4.1
http:// eng.wayne.edu/page.php?id=756
http:// nptel.ac.in/courses/103103029/pdf/mod2.pdf
http:// astm.org/DIGITAL_LIBRARY/MNL/SOURCE_PAGES/MNL37_foreword.pdf
5. http:// nd.edu/~msen/Teaching/DirStudies/Engines.pdf
670
14A206/14M206/14C206
ENGINEERING MECHANICS
(Common to AUTO/MECH/ CIVIL)

3
OBJECTIVES:
To introduce the importance of statics of mechanics in the context of Engineering, laws of
mechanics and conservation equations.
To introduce the importance of free body diagrams, types of supports and their reactions.
To understand the significance of centroid, centre of gravity and moment of inertia in the
various surfaces and sections of the rigid bodies.
To impart the knowledge on working and types of friction.
OUTCOMES:
identify and solve the problems using laws of mechanics and conservation equations.
solve the various distributed force systems applied in rigid bodies.
solve the centroid, centre of gravity and moments of inertia using integration methods.
know the influence of friction on the mechanical components.
use energy and momentum equations to solve dynamics problems.
UNIT I
STATICS OF PARTICLES
9
Introduction Units and dimensions Laws of Mechanics, Lames theorem, Parallelogram and
Triangular law of forces Vectors Vectorial representation of forces and moments, Coplanar forces
Resolution and composition of forces Equilibrium of a particle Forces in space, Equilibrium of a
particle in space, equivalent systems of forces Principle of transmissibility Single equivalent force.
UNIT II
EQUILIBRIUM OF RIGID BODIES
9
Free body diagram Types of supports and their reactions, requirements of stable equilibrium
Moments and Couples, Moment of a force about a point and about an axis Vectorial representation of
moments and couples, scalar components of a moment Varignons theorem, Equilibrium of rigid
bodies in two dimensions and three dimensions Examples.
UNIT III
PROPERTIES OF SURFACES AND SOLIDS
9
Determination of areas and volumes First moment of area and the Centroid of sections Rectangle,
Circle, Triangle from integration, Centroid of T section, I section, Angle section, hollow section by
using standard formula, Second and Product moments of plane area Rectangle, Triangle, Circle from
integration, Second and Product moments of plane area T section, I section and angle section by
using standard formula, Parallel axis theorem and perpendicular axis theorem Polar moment of
inertia, Principal moments of inertia of plane areas Principal axes of inertia.
UNIT IV
FRICTION
9
Frictional force Laws of friction, Simple contact friction Rolling resistance friction Wedge
friction, Screw friction, Ladder friction Collar friction.
UNIT V
DYNAMICS OF PARTICLES AND ELEMENTS OF RIGID BODY

DYNAMICS
9
Displacements, Velocity and Acceleration and their relationship Relative motion Rectilinear and
Curvilinear motion Newtons law, Energy and Momentum equation of particles Impulse and
Momentum, Impact of elastic bodies Translation and rotation of rigid bodies Velocity and
Acceleration General plane motion.
TOTAL: 45+15
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.
No.
Author(s)
1.
Beer F P
Johnson E R
2.
Bansal R K
Title of the book

Vector Mechanics for
Engineers Statics and
Dynamics
A Text book of
671
Publisher
Tata McGraw Hill
publishing co. Ltd.,
New Delhi
Lakshmi Publications
(P) Ltd. New Delhi
Year of
Publication
2007
2006
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.
No.
Author(s)
Title of the book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Irving H Shames
Krishna Mohana Rao G
Pearson Education
India, New Delhi
2006
2.
Rajasekaran S
SankarasubramanianG
Fundamental of
Vikas Publishing
House Pvt. Ltd.,
New Delhi
2008
3.
Bhavikatti S S
Vector and Classical
Approach

2003
4.
Palanichamy M S
Nagan S
Engineering Mechanics Statics and Dynamics
Tata McGraw Hill

Publishing Company
Ltd., New Delhi
2007
5.
Goyal M C
Raguvanshi G S
PHI Learning Pvt.Ltd.
2009
WEB URLs:
1. http://www.fs.cvut.cz/en/U2052/node38.html
2. http://www.fs.cvut.cz/en/U2052/node62.html
3. http://emweb.unl.edu/NEGAHBAN/EM223/note5/note5.htm
4. http://www.kettering.edu/~jhargrov/statics/varignon.htm
5. http://farside.ph.utexas.edu/teaching/301/lectures/node103.html
14O211
C PROGRAMMING LABORATORY II
0
OBJECTIVES:
To gain knowledge about C language pointer.
To understand the concept of arrays and pointers.
To know about structures and unions with pointers.
To understand the concept of functions with pointers.
To gain knowledge about file operations.
OUTCOMES:
analyze the significance of pointers in c for solving domain based problems.
design programs in c using pointers for scenario based problems.
implement the programs using file concepts in real time applications.
develop problem-solving skills to translate problem statements into programs .
analyze the purpose of pointers for parameter passing, referencing and dereferencing, and
linking data structures.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Programs on pointers
Programs on Functions and pointers
Programs on enumeration constants
Programs using strings and pointers
Programs using Functions and strings
Program using advance use of pointers
Programs insisting on different types of errors on strings and pointers
Programs on malloc ( ) function and calloc ( ) function
Programs on file operations
Programs on encryption and decryption of files
Programs using I/O Functions
Programs on precision specifiers and format specifiers
672
14G112/14H212
PHYSICS LABORATORY

0
OBJECTIVES:
To introduce different experiments to the students for understanding basic physics.
To introduce simple experiments based on concepts in optics, properties of matter and
semiconductors.
To give an insight into scientific method and develop expertise in using it.
To enhance the learning of scientific knowledge.
OUTCOMES:
verify the theoretical physics concepts through experiments.
take systematic scientific data and analysis of data.
understand evaluation and conclusion of physical parameters in given experiment.
acquire the experience of planning and carrying out the experiment.
understand interpreting, analyzing and evaluating experiments.
1.
Determination of Youngs Modulus of the given material of the bar for (l =0.5 m) using
cantilever method.
2. To find the number of lines in the given grating and the wavelengths of the prominent lines in
the mercury spectrum.
3. Determination of thickness of the given wire using air wedge method.
4. Determination of laser parameters, (i) Wavelength of the given laser source using grating (ii)
Refractive index of the given liquid (iii) Angle of divergence.
5. Determination of particle size of Lycopodium powder using diode laser.
6. Determination of band gap energy of semiconductor material.
7. Determination of acceptance angle of the given optical fiber.
8. Determination of velocity of ultrasonic waves and compressibility of the given liquid using
ultrasonic interferometer.
9. Determination of Viscosity of liquid Poiseuilles flow method.
10. Determination of specific resistance of given coil of wire Carey Fosters Bridge.
14A213
FUELS AND LUBRICANTS LABORATORY

0
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the properties and applications of automotive Fuels and Lubricants.
To know the operating principles of automotive fuel and lubrication systems.
To acquire the practical knowledge on testing the lubricants.
To acquire the practical knowledge on the testing methods of Fuels.
OUTCOMES:
describe the properties and use of various lubricants.
explain the properties and use of petrol and diesel fuels.
exhibit the skills in conducting the tests on lubricants.
do the test to find out the fuel properties.
analyze the lubricant and fuels based on the test.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Temperature dependence of viscosity of lubrication oil by Redwood Viscometer.

Viscosity Index of lubricating oil by Say bolt Viscometer.
(a) Flash and Fire points of fuels.
(b) Flash and Fire points of lubricants.
ASME distillation test of gasoline.
Drop point of grease and mechanical penetration in grease.
Aniline distillation test of gasoline
673
7.
8.
9.
10.
Calorific value of liquid fuel.

Calorific value of gaseous fuel.
Reid vapour pressure test.
Emission test for IC Engines.
674
B.E.MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SEMESTER I
Course
Code
THEORY
14O101
14G102
14O103
14O104
14M105
14M106
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
40
60
100

Engineering
40
60
100
3
3
1
0
0
0
3
3
40
40
60
60
100
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
Technical English
C Programming I
Engineering
Engineering Drawing
PRACTICAL
14O111
14M112
14G113
14G114
40
60
100
0
0
0
0
3
3
2
2
40
40
60
60
100
100
TOTAL
17
15
27
SEMESTER II
Course
Code
Course Title
THEORY
14O201
14M202
14O203
14O204
C Programming II
14M205
14M206
PRACTICAL
14O211
14H212
Physics Laboratory
14M213
Laboratory
TOTAL
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
3
3
3
3
3
3
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
2
0
0
0
3
3
4
3
3
3
40
40
40
40
40
40
60
60
60
60
60
60
100
100
100
100
100
100
0
0
0
0
3
3
2
2
40
40
60
60
100
100
40
60
100
18
11
25

675
SEMESTER III
Course
Code
Course Title
THEORY
14M301
14M302
14M303
14M304
14M305
Engineering Metallurgy
14M306
PRACTICAL
Fluid Mechanics and
14M311
Engineering Metallurgy Laboratory
14M312
14M313
Laboratory
TOTAL
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
3
3
3
3
3
3
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
3
3
3
3
3
40
40
40
40
40
40
60
60
60
60
60
60
100
100
100
100
100
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
18
10
24
SEMESTER IV
Course
Code
Course Title
THEORY
14M401
14M402
Kinematics of Machinery
14M403
14M404
Thermal Engineering
14M405
14M406
PRACTICAL
14M411
Machine Drawing
14M412
Thermal Engineering Laboratory
14M413
Laboratory
TOTAL
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
3
3
3
3
3
3
1
2
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
3
3
3
3
3
40
40
40
40
40
40
60
60
60
60
60
60
100
100
100
100
100
100
1
0
0
0
2
3
2
2
100
40
60
100
100
40
60
100
19
24

676
SEMESTER V
Course
Code
THEORY
14M501
14M502
14M503
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
Economics for Business Decisions

3
3
3
0
1
1
0
0
0
3
3
3
40
40
40
60
60
60
100
100
100
14M504
40
60
100
14M505
40
60
100
40
60
100
100
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
18
13
26
14Mxxx
Elective I
PRACTICAL
Soft Skills
14O511
Strength of Materials and Dynamics
14M512
Laboratory
Heat and Mass Transfer Laboratory
14M513
14M514
Laboratory
TOTAL
SEMESTER VI
Course
Code
THEORY
14M601
14M602
14M603
14M604
14M605
Course Title
Mechatronics
Gas Dynamics and Jet Propulsion
Design of Transmission Systems
CAD/CAM/CIM
Operations Research
Elective II
14Mxxx
PRACTICAL
14M611
Automobile Technology Laboratory
14M612
Mechatronics Laboratory
14M613
CAD/CAM Laboratory
14M651
Mini Project
TOTAL
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
3
3
3
3
3
3
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
3
3
3
3
3
40
40
40
40
40
40
60
60
60
60
60
60
100
100
100
100
100
100
0
0
0
0
18
0
0
0
0
3
3
3
3
3
12
2
2
2
2
26
40
40
40
100
60
60
60
-
100
100
100
100

677
SEMESTER VII
Course
Code
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Course Title
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
Engineering Ethics
14M702
14M703
Power Plant Engineering
14M704
Unconventional Machining Processes
14Mxxx
Elective III
14Mxxx
Elective IV
PRACTICAL
Computer Aided Simulation and
14M711
Analysis Laboratory
Comprehension
14M721
14O701
14M751
40
60
100
3
3
3
3
3
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
3
3
3
3
40
40
40
40
40
60
60
60
60
60
100
100
100
100
100
40
60
100
Project Work- Phase I
0
0
0
0
3
3
100
100
TOTAL
18
22
SEMESTER VIII
Course
Code
Course Title
PRACTICAL
14M851
TOTAL
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
0
24
12
24
12

678
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
40
60
100
LIST OF ELECTIVES
Course Code
Course Title
14M001
Design for Manufacture and Assembly
14M002
Process Planning and Cost Estimation
14M003
Flexible Manufacturing Systems
14M004
Composite Materials
14M005
Renewable Energy Sources and Energy Management
14M006
Refrigeration and Air-conditioning
14M007
14M008
Industrial Safety Management
14M009
14M010
14M011
Entrepreneurship Development
14M012
Materials for Automotive Components
14M013
Industrial Robotics
14M014
Aircraft Systems
14M015
Micro Electro Mechanical Systems and Nano Technology
14M016
14M017
14M018
Business Intelligence and Its Applications
14M019
14M020
Embedded System
ONE CREDIT COURSES

Course Code
Course Title
14M901
Design of Jigs, Fixtures and Press tools
14M902
Advanced Welding Processes
14M903
Value Engineering
14M904
14M905
14M906
Industrial Psychology
679
SEMESTER I
14O101

vide automobile engineering
14G102/14H202

14O103
TECHNICAL ENGLISH
14O104
C PROGRAMMING I
14A105/14M105/14C105

ENGINEERING
14A106/14M106/14C106
ENGINEERING DRAWING
14O111 C PROGAMMING LABORATORY I

14A112/14M112/14C112

LABORATORY
14G113/14H213

680
14G114/14H214
(Common to All branches)
SEMESTER II
14O201

14A202/14M202/14C202
14O203
14O204
C PROGRAMMING II
14M205
MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY
3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the procedures of moulding and core making.
To understand the working of furnaces and casting methods.
To understand the manufacturing procedures in forming.
To learn about the evaluation in metal cutting theory.
To provide thorough knowledge in lathe.
OUTCOMES:
gain knowledge in moulding and core making.
recognize furnaces and casting methods.
perform metal forming process.
evaluate various metal cutting process.
perform the various operations in lathe.
UNIT I
MOULDING
9
Overview of production processes Moulding sand Properties Sand testing Patterns Types,
allowances Moulding methods - Core prints Cores Types Core boxes Core sand Core baking.
681
UNIT II
CASTINGS
9
Melting furnaces Cupola furnace Electric arc furnaces Induction furnaces - Gating and risers
Special casting methods Investment casting Centrifugal casting Die casting Continuous casting and
Shell moulding Defects in casting Testing and inspection of castings.
UNIT III
FORMING
9
Hot and cold working Forging Open die forging closed die forging press forging upset and roll
forging Rolling Cold and hot rolling Extrusion Drawing and deep drawing processes Blanking
fine blanking piercing punching trimming shaving nibbling notching Embossing and coining.
UNIT IV
THEORY OF METAL CUTTING
9
Mechanism of metal cutting Types Cutting force Chip formation Merchants circle diagram
Calculations Tool geometry Machinability Tool wear Tool life Cutting tool materials Cutting
fluids.
UNIT V
LATHE
9
Lathe Specifications types Mechanisms Operations Machining time calculations Capstan and
Turret lathes Tooling with examples Contour turning Work holding and supporting devices.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
Sharma P C
A Text Book of Production

Technology
2.
Serope Kalpakjian
Steven R Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering
and Technology
Year of
Publication
Publisher
S Chand and Company
Ltd.., New Delhi, 5th
Edition
Addison Wesley
Longman (Singapore)
Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi
2010
2008
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
1.
Jain R K
Gupta S C
Production Technology
2.
Hajra Choudhry S K
Manufacturing Processes
Vol. I
3.
Jain R K
Gupta S C
Production Technology
Rajput R K
A Textbook of
Manufacturing
Technology:
Manufacturing Processes
Hajra Choudhry S K
Bose S K
Workshop Technology,
Vol. I and II
4.
5.
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Khanna Publishers,
New Delhi,
Ninth Edition
Media Promoters and
Publishers Pvt. Ltd.,
Bombay
Khanna Publishers,
New Delhi
Laxmi publications pvt.
Ltd.
Media Promoters and
Publishers Pvt. Ltd.,
Bombay
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.public.iastate.edu/~mebbs/courses/ME322/Machining.html
http://thelibraryofmanufacturing.com/investment_casting.html
http://web.iitd.ac.in/~pmpandey/MEL120_html/Metal%20Forming%20Processes.pdf
http://me.emu.edu.tr/me364/lecnotes.html
http://uhv.cheme.cmu.edu/procedures/machining/ch7.pdf
682
2008
2008
2005
2007
2003
14A206/14M206/14C206
14O211
14G112/14H212
PHYSICS LABORATORY
14M213
MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY LABORATORY

0
OBJECTIVES:
To study about different types of lathes and its tools.
To learn about the various mechanisms used in lathe.
To gain thorough knowledge in various lathe operations.
To study concepts about capstan and turret lathes.
To study tooling layout of turret lathe for producing engineering components.
OUTCOMES:
acquire the knowledge of various types of lathes and its tools.
familiarize in various lathe mechanisms.
perform various machining operations in Centre lathe.
identify the concepts of capstan and turret lathes.
prepare the tooling layout for generate engineering components.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Study of different types of lathes and its tools.
2. Study of various mechanisms in lathe and its operations.
3. Study of measuring instruments used in lathe.
4. Facing, plain turning operations.
5. Facing, plain turning and step turning operations.
6. Facing, plain turning, step turning and thread cutting operations.
7. Facing, plain turning, parting and Knurling operations
8. Facing, plain turning and Taper turning operations.
9. Study of capstan and turret lathes.
10. Preparation of a tooling layout for a hexagonal bolt.
683
684
SEMESTER I
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
14O101
14G102
14O103
14O104
14C105
14C106
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
C Programming I
Engineering
40
60
100
40
60
100
Engineering Drawing
40
60
100

Engineering
Technical English
PRACTICAL
0
40
60
100
40
60
100
14G113
40
60
100
14G114
40
60
100
TOTAL
17
15
27
14O111
14C112
SEMESTER II
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
14O201
40
60
100
14C202
40
60
100
14O203
40
60
100
14O204
C Programming II
40
60
100
14C205
Construction Materials
40
60
100
14C206
40
60
100
PRACTICAL
14O211
40
60
100
14H212
Physics Laboratory
40
60
100
14C213
Construction Materials Laboratory
40
60
100
18
11
25
TOTAL

685
SEMESTER III
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
14C301
40
60
100
14C302
Mechanics of Solids I
40
60
100
14C303
Mechanics of Fluids
40
60
100
14C304
Applied Geology
Water Supply and Wastewater
Engineering
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
14C305
14C306
PRACTICAL
14C311
40
60
100
14C312
Survey Laboratory I
40
60
100
14C313
Building Drawing (Manual)
40
60
100
18
24
TOTAL
SEMESTER IV
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
14C401
40
60
100
14C402
Mechanics of Solids II
40
60
100
14C403
Applied Hydraulic Engineering

Water Resource and Irrigation
Engineering
Concrete and Construction
Technology
Advanced Surveying
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
18
24
14C404
14C405
14C406
PRACTICAL
14C411
14C412
14C413
Computer Aided Building Drawing

Laboratory
Survey Laboratory II
TOTAL

686
SEMESTER V
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
14C501
Structural Analysis I
40
60
100
14C502
Transportation Engineering
40
60
100
14C503
Soil Mechanics
100
100
14C504
Design of RC Elements
40
60
100
14C505
Construction Management
40
60
100
14Cxxx
Elective I
40
60
100
PRACTICAL
14O511
Soft Skills
100
100
14C512
Soil Mechanics Laboratory

Computer Aided Irrigation and
Environmental Drawing
TOTAL
40
60
100
40
60
100
18
24
14C513
SEMESTER VI
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
3
40
60
100
14C602
Structural Dynamics and Earthquake

Engineering
Structural Analysis II
40
60
100
14C603
40
60
100
14C604
40
60
100
14C605
Remote Sensing and GIS
40
60
100
14Cxxx
Elective II
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
100
100
18
12
26
14C601
PRACTICAL
14C613
Computer Applications in Civil

Engineering
Environmental Engineering
Laboratory
Concrete and Highway Laboratory
14C651
Mini Project
14C611
14C612
TOTAL

687
SEMESTER VII
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
14C702

Engineering Ethics
Advanced Concrete Design
14C703
40
60
100
14C704
Building Services
40
60
100
14Cxxx
Elective III
40
60
100
14Cxxx
Elective IV
40
60
100
40
60
100
100
100
14O701
40
60
100
40
60
100
PRACTICAL
14C721
Structural Design and Drafting

Laboratory
Comprehension
14C751
TOTAL
18
22
14C711
SEMESTER VIII
Course
Code
Course Title
PRACTICAL
14C851
TOTAL
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
24
12
24
12

688
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
40
60
100
LIST OF ELECTIVES
Course Code
Course Title
14C001
Pre-stressed Concrete Structures
14C002
14C003
Housing Planning Management
14C004
Pavement Engineering
14C005
Ground Improvement Techniques
14C006
Soil Dynamics and Machine Foundation
14C007
Environmental Impact Assessment
14C008
Industrial Waste Water Management
14C009
Air Pollution Management
14C010
14C011
Bridge Engineering
14C012
Tall Buildings
14C013
Prefabricated Structures
14C014
Industrial Structures
14C015
Smart Structures
14C016
Contract Laws and Regulations
14C017
Advanced Concrete Technology
14C018
Maintenance and Rehabilitation of Structures
14C019
Quality Control and Assurance in Construction
14C020
Green Buildings
ONE CREDIT COURSES

Course Code
Course Title
14C901
Town Planning
14C902
Building Bye Laws
14C903
Value Engineering
14C904
Fire Safety Engineering
689
SEMESTER I
14O101

14G102/14H202

14O103
TECHNICAL ENGLISH
14O104
C PROGRAMMING I
114A105/14M105/14C105

ENGINEERING
14A106/14M106/14C106
ENGINEERING DRAWING
14O111
C PROGAMMING LABORATORY I
14A112/14M112/14C112

LABORATORY
14G113/14H213

14G114/14H214

690
SEMESTER II
14O201

14A202/14M202/14C202
14O203
14O204
C PROGRAMMING II
14C205
CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS
3
OBJECTIVES:
To recognize and distinguish the materials used during construction of civil engineering
structures.
To establish the most important physical, chemical and mechanical properties for construction
materials.
To build up an investigative attitude towards construction materials and Environmental
considerations.
OUTCOMES:
Learners should be able to,
identify the different materials used in civil engineering structures according to their
characteristics and properties and in accordance with the requirements for each engineering
project.
take advantage of the physical, chemical and mechanical properties of construction materials
in order to reach the best cost-effective relationship in the construction project.
properly apply the techniques of materials testing in the laboratory.
know the importance of quality control of materials and laboratory testing.
UNIT I
STONES - BRICKS - CONCRETE BLOCKS
9
Stone as building material Criteria for selection Tests on stones Deterioration and preservation of
stone work Bricks Classification Manufacture of city bricks Tests on bricks Compressive
strength Water absorption Efflorescence Bricks for special use Refractory bricks.
UNIT II
LIME - CEMENT AGGREGATES - MORTAR
9
Lime Preparation of lime mortar Cement ingredients Manufacturing process Types and grades
Properties of cement and cement mortar Ready mix mortar Hydration Compressive strength
Tensile strength Soundness and consistency Setting time Aggregates Natural stone aggregates
Industrial by products Crushing strength Impact strength Flakiness Abrasion Resistance
Grading Code practices.
691
UNIT III
CONCRETE
9
Concrete Ingredients Manufacture Batching plants RMC Properties of fresh concrete Slump
flow and compaction Principles of hardened concrete Compressive and tensile strength tests Mix
specification Mix Proportioning (IS method) High strength concrete and HPC Other types of
concrete Code practices.
UNIT IV
REPAIR MATERIALS
9
Repair Assessment procedure for evaluating a damaged structure Causes of deterioration Repair
techniques Expansive cement Polymer concrete Sulphur infiltrated concrete Ferro cement
gunite and shotcrete Epoxy injection Methods of corrosion protection.
UNIT V
MODERN MATERIALS
9
Glass Ceramics Sealants for joints Fibre glass reinforced plastic Clay products Refractories
Composite materials Types Geosynthetics for Civil Engineering applications Fly ash M-Sand.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOK:
Sl. No.
1.
Author(s)
Rangwala
Title of the Book
Publisher
Charotar Publishing House,
Gujarat
Engineering Materials
Year of
Publication
2011
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
1.
Shetty M S
Concrete Technology
(Theory and Practice)
S Chand and Company Ltd,

New Delhi
S Chand and Company Ltd,
New Delhi
2.
Rajput R K
Engineering Materials
3.
Joseph Iano
Fundamentals of Building
Construction Material and
Methods
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.howconcreteworks.com/properties_of_concrete.html
http://www.howconcreteworks.com/types_of_concrete.html
http://www.howconcreteworks.com/application_of_concrete.html
http://parisaramahiti.kar.nic.in/pdf/publications/fly%20ash.pdf
14A206/14M206/14C206
14O211 C PROGRAMMING LABORATORY II

14G112/14H212
PHYSICS LABORATORY
692
Year of
Publication
2012
2011
2010
14C213
CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS LABORATORY

0
1.5
OBJECTIVES:
To have a knowledge of different construction materials which can be used in industry
To understand fully about the properties of different materials by doing applicable testing on
it.
To have a knowledge of the application of different construction materials in different areas of
construction.
OUTCOMES:
differentiate various classes of bricks by doing required testing.
have a knowledge on strength of bricks and application of bricks in various construction
locations.
have a knowledge about different testing in cement and its properties.
have a knowledge on setting time of cement and its application in various environmental
conditions.
understand properties of aggregate and its application in different structures.
understand size distribution of aggregates and its usage.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Determination of Compressive strength of bricks

Determination of Water Absorption of bricks
Determination of Specific Gravity of Cement
Determination of Standard Consistency of Cement
Determination of Initial and Final Setting Time of Cement
Determination of Fineness of Cement
Determination of Specific Gravity of Fine Aggregate
Determination of Bulking of Fine Aggregate
Sieve Analysis of Fine aggregate
Sieve Analysis of Coarse aggregate
Determination of Aggregate Impact Value
Abrasion Test on Tile.
693
694

SEMESTER I
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Credits
Maximum Marks
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
14O101
40
60
100
40
60
100
14O103

Engineering
Technical English
40
60
100
14O104
C Programming I
40
60
100
14L105
Electric Circuits
40
60
100
14L106
Electrical Machines
40
60
100
14G102
PRACTICAL
14O111
40
60
100
14L112

Laboratory
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
18
12
26
14G113
14G114
TOTAL
SEMESTER II
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Credits
Maximum Marks
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
14L202

Series
14O203
40
60
100
14O204
C Programming II
Engineering
Electronic Devices
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
14O201
14L205
14L206
40
60
100
40
60
100
PRACTICAL
14O211
40
60
100
14H212
Physics Laboratory
40
60
100
14L213
40
60
100
19
11
26
TOTAL
695
SEMESTER III
Course
Code
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Course Title
Credits
Maximum Marks
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
14L302

Analysis
14L303
Data Structures
40
60
100
14L304
Digital Electronics
40
60
100
14L305
Electronic Circuits
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
18
24
14L301
14L306
40
60
100
40
60
100
PRACTICAL
14L311
14L312
14L313

Laboratory
Laboratory
TOTAL
SEMESTER IV
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Credits
Maximum Marks
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
14L401
14L402
14L403
14L404
14L405
14L406

Processes
Signals and Systems
Measurements and
Instrumentation
Microprocessors and
Microcontrollers
Fields, Transmission Lines and
Waveguides
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
100
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
18
24
PRACTICAL
14L411
14L412
14L413

Microprocessors and
Laboratory
TOTAL

696
SEMESTER V
Course
Code
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Course Title
Credits
Maximum Marks
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
14L502
Analog and Digital

Communication
14L503
Embedded Systems
40
60
100
14L504
Control Systems
40
60
100
14L505
Operating Systems
40
60
100
14Lxxx
Elective I
40
60
100
100
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
18
24
14L501
40
60
100
40
60
100
PRACTICAL
14O511
14L512
14L513
Soft Skills
Laboratory
Analog and Digital
Laboratory
TOTAL
SEMESTER VI
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Credits
Maximum Marks
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
14L602

Design
14L603
40
60
100
14L604
40
60
100
14L605
Computer Networks
40
60
100
14Lxxx
Elective II
40
60
100
40
60
100
14L601
40
60
100
40
60
100
PRACTICAL
40
60
100
14L613

Design Laboratory
Laboratory
40
60
100
14L651
Mini Project
100
100
18
12
26
14L611
14L612
TOTAL
697
SEMESTER VII
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Credits
Maximum Marks
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
14O701
40
60
100
40
60
100
14L703
Cellular and Mobile
Communication
40
60
100
14L704
Wireless Networks
40
60
100
14Lxxx
Elective III
40
60
100
14Lxxx
Elective IV
40
60
100
14L702
PRACTICAL
14L721
Comprehension
14L751
100
100
18
20
TOTAL
SEMESTER VIII
Course
Code
14L851
Course Title
TOTAL
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
0
0
24
0

698
24
Credits
12
12
Maximum Marks
CIA
40
ESE
60
Total
100
LIST OF ELECTIVES
Course Code
Course Title
14L001
Medical Electronics
14L002
14L003
Neural Networks
14L004
14L005
14L006
Digital Control System
14L007
14L008
Java Programming
14L009
Numerical methods
14L010
Network Processors
14L011
14L012
RF Circuit Design
14L013
14L014
Telecommunication Switching and Networks
14L015
14L016
Optoelectronic devices
14L017
14L018
14L019
Remote Sensing
14L020
Network Security and Cryptography
LIST OF ONE CREDIT COURSES
Course Code
Course Title
14L901
Programming Logic Controllers - Principles and

Practice
14L902
ARM Processor Programming and System Design
14L903
Digital Signal Controller Principles and Practice
14L904
Mixed Signal Processor Programming and Practice
699
SEMESTER I
14O101

14G102/14H202

14O103
TECHNICAL ENGLISH
14O104
C PROGRAMMING I
14L105/14T105
ELECTRIC CIRCUITS
(Common to ECE/ETE)
3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the concept of circuit elements, electrical connections, laws and networks
classification.
To analyze the concept of AC circuits for resistance, inductive and capacitive loads.
To analyze the electrical network using mesh, nodal analysis and network theorems.
To know the fundamentals of coupled and resonance circuits.
OUTCOMES:
gain an intuitive learning of electrical networks.
explain the fundamental concepts of AC circuits.
solve electrical networks using mesh, nodal and network theorems.
gain knowledge about the coupled and resonance circuits.
describe the concept of duality and topology in networks.
UNIT I
BASIC CIRCUIT CONCEPTS
9
Basic electrical quantities Terminologies Source Transformation Ohms Law Kirchhoffs Laws
Voltage Division Current Division Series and Parallel Connection Classification of Circuit Elements
Classification of Networks Star -Delta Transformation.
UNIT II
AC CIRCUITS
9
Analysis of AC circuits Purely Resistive, Inductive and Capacitive Circuits RL, RC and RLC Series
Circuits Parallel RLC Circuits.
UNIT III
NETWORK THEOREMS
9
Mesh and Nodal Analysis Equivalence of sources - Superposition Thevenins and Nortons theorems
Maximum Power Transfer theorem Reciprocity theorem.
700
UNIT IV
RESONANCE AND COUPLED CIRCUITS
9
Frequency response Series resonance Parallel resonance circuits Self and mutual inductance
Coupling co-efficient DOT rules Connection of two cols to form a coupled coil Tuned circuits.
UNIT V
DUALITY AND TOPOLOGY
9
Concept of duality Dual network Graphs of a network Trees, chords and branches Tie set and cut
set of a graph Application to network analysis.
TOTAL: 45+15
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
1.
Nageswara Rao T
Electric Circuit analysis
2.
Sudhakar A
Shyammohan S Palli
Circuits and Networks

Analysis and Synthesis
A R Publications
Tata McGraw-Hill
Publishing Company
Limited, New Delhi.
3rd Edition.
Year of
Publication
2007
2007
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Charles K
Alexander
Mathew N O Sadiku
Jack E Kemmerly
Steven M Durbin
William H Hayt Jr
1.
2.
Fundamentals of
Electric Circuits
Engineering Circuit
Analysis
3.
David Irwin J
Basic Engineering
Circuit Analysis
4.
William Hayt
Jack E Kemmerly
Engineering Circuit
Analysis
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing

Company Limited, New Delhi.
Third Edition.
Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing
Company Limited, New Delhi.
7th Edition.
Company and Colier
Macmillan Publishers New
York, London,
3rd Edition
2007
2006
2010
McGrawHill, New Delhi. 6th

Edition
2012
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.allaboutcircuits.com/vol_1/index.html
http://www.allaboutcircuits.com/vol_2/chpt_1/4.html
http://www.electronics-tutorials.ws/dccircuits/dcp_6.html
http://www.elect.mrt.ac.lk/EE201_network_theorems.pdf
http://www.blogs.bcit.ca/cbennie/taxonomy/term/58/9
14L106/14T106
ELECTRICAL MACHINES
(Common to ECE/ETE)
3
OBJECTIVES:
To study construction, working principle and performance characteristics of DC machines.
To study construction, working principle and performance characteristics of Transformers.
To study construction, working principle, performance characteristics, starting and speed control
of AC machines.
To know about the applications of DC machines and AC machines.
701
OUTCOMES:
explain the working principle of DC machines and AC machines.
have an idea about construction and principles of transformers.
decide the required starting method(s) and speed control of induction motor.
analyze the working of synchronous machines.
have knowledge about various applications of electrical machines.
UNIT I
DC MACHINES
9
Constructional details EMF equation Methods of excitation Self and separately excited generators
Characteristics of series, shunt and compound generators Principle of operation of DC motor Back
EMF and torque equation Characteristics of series, shunt and compound motors.
UNIT II
TRANSFORMERS
9
Constructional details Principle of operation EMF equation Transformation ratio Equivalent circuit
Transformer on no load Transformer on load Regulation Testing: Open circuit and Short circuit
tests, Load test.
UNIT III
INDUCTION MOTORS
9
Construction Types Principle of operation of three-phase induction motors Equivalent circuit
Starting and speed control Single-phase induction motors.
UNIT IV
SYNCHRONOUS MACHINES
9
Synchronous Generator: Construction Principle EMF equation Paralleling of synchronous generators.
Synchronous Motor: Construction Principle Hunting Speed-torque characteristics.
UNIT V
APPLICATION OF ELECTRICAL MACHINES
9
Domestic applications: Printer, fan, mixer grinder, hair drier, washing machine, vacuum cleaner, pump,
sewing machine.
Industrial applications: Steel rolling mill, paper mill, cement mill, machine tool, lift, solar and battery
powered drive, hybrid electric vehicle.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s) Name
Title of the Book
1.
Kothari D P
Nagrath I J
2.
Bhattacharya S K
Electrical Machines
Publisher
Tata McGraw Hill
Publishing Company
Ltd, Second Edition
Tata McGraw Hill
Publishing Company
Ltd, Second Edition
Year of
Publication
2007
2007
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s) Name
Title of the Book
1.
Fitzgerald A E
Charles Kingsley
Stephen D Umans
Electrical Machinery
2.
Murugesh kumar K
Electrical Machines II
3.
Mehta V K
Principles of Electrical
Engineering
4.
Gupta J B
Electrical Machines
702
Publisher
Tata McGraw Hill
Vikas Publishing
house
S Chand and
Company Ltd,
2nd Edition
SK Katarina and
sons, 4th Edition
Year of
Publication
2009
2010
2006
2012
WEB URLs:
1. http://www.ustudy.in/eee/em2
2. http://www.ncert.nic.in/html/learning_basket/electricity/electricity/machine/
3. http://www.ece.umn.edu/users/riaz/animations/listanimations.html
4. http://www.egr.msu.edu/~fzpeng/ece320/ece320-notes-part1.pdf
5. http://www.nptel.ac.in/courses/108105017/10

14L112/14T213
ELECTRIC CIRCUITS LABORATORY

(Common to ECE/ETE)
0
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the concept of circuit elements, circuit laws and network reduction
To solve the electrical network using mesh and nodal analysis.
To analyze the transient and frequency response of series and parallel AC circuits.
To analyze the electrical network by applying network theorems.
OUTCOMES:
gain knowledge about the fundamentals of various electrical networks using basic laws.
know the performance characteristics of electrical circuits.
gain knowledge about the fundamentals of various electrical networks using network theorems.
know the transient response of electrical circuits.
nalyze the configuration of any simple electrical appliances.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Verification of Ohms Law and Kirchoffs Laws.

Verification of Thevenins Theorem and Nortons Theorem.
Verification of Super position Theorem.
Verification of Maximum Power Transfer Theorem.
Verification of Reciprocity Theorem.
Verification of Self and Mutual Inductances of a Coil.
Verification of Nodal and Mesh Analysis.
Transient Response of RL and RC Circuits.
Frequency Response of Series and Parallel Resonance Circuits.
Frequency Response of Single Tuned Coupled Circuits.
14G113/14H213

14G114/14H214
703
SEMESTER II
14O201

14L202/14T202/14E102/14N102/14P102/14F102
SCIENCES
PHYSICS FOR ELECTRICAL
(Common for ECE/ETE/EEE/EIE/CSE/IT)

3
OBJECTIVES:
To expose the students to the fundamental concepts of lasers, optical fibers and their properties.
To provide an adequate knowledge about the quantum mechanics and its based instruments.
To describe the students to the ultrasonic fundamentals and its applications.
To introduce the concepts about semiconductors and its based devices, superconductors and
advanced materials
OUTCOMES:
understand the basics of lasers and high speed communication system.
know the basics of modern analytical instruments.
work in cleaning systems and transducers.
work on different electronics devices.
describe Contemporary research materials.
UNIT I
LASER AND FIBER OPTICS
9
Introduction Spontaneous and stimulated emission Population inversion Einsteins A and B
coefficients Pumping Types of lasers Nd:YAG, CO2 Lasers in industries Medical applications
Introduction to fiber optics Numerical aperture and acceptance angle Step index and graded index
fibres Losses in optical fibers (attenuation, dispersion, bending) Applications of optical fibres,
endoscope Optical communication (block diagram only).
UNIT II
QUANTUM PHYSICS AND APPLICATIONS
9
Inadequacy of classical mechanics Black body radiation Introduction to Quantum theory Dual nature
of matter and radiation de Broglie wave length Uncertainty principle Schrdingers equation
Particle in a box (1D) Optical microscope Electron microscope SEM and TEM.
UNIT III
ULTRASONICS
9
Introduction Production Magnetostriction generator, piezoelectric generator Acoustic grating
Detection of ultrasonics Cavitation Industrial applications Drilling, welding, soldering and cleaning
Non destructive testing Pulse echo system through transmission, resonance system Medical
applications Cardiology, ultrasonic imaging.
UNIT IV
SEMICONDUCTING MATERIALS AND DEVICES
9
Elemental and compound semiconductors Intrinsic and extrinsic semiconductors Fermi level
Variation of Fermi level with temperature Electrical conductivity Carrier concentration in intrinsic
semiconductors Determination of bandgap energy Hall effect Hall coefficient in extrinsic
semiconductors, experimental determination of Hall coefficient Application of Hall effect
Semiconductor devices Solar cells, LED and photodiode.
UNIT V
MODERN ENGINEERING MATERIALS
9
Shape Memory alloys (SMA) Characteristics, application, merits, demerits of SMA Metallic glasses
Preparation, properties and applications Superconductivity BCS theory of superconductivity
(qualitative) Types of superconductors, properties High TC superconductors Applications SQUIDS,
cryotron, magnetic levitation.
TOTAL: 45
704
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Mani P
Engineering Physics II
Dhanam Publications
2013
Senthil kumar G
Engineering Physics I and II
VRB Publishers
2011
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Avadhanulu M N
Engineering Physics
S Chand publishers
2013
James F
Shackelford S
Company
2014
William D
Callister Jr
Jewett
Serway
Introduction to Materials
Science for Engineers
Materials Science and
Engineering An
Introduction
Physics for scientists and
engineers with modern
physics
2009
John Willey and Sons
Cengage Learning
2014
WEB URLs:
1. http://www.appliedphysics.com
2. http://www.sparknotes.com/physics
3. http://www.materialstoday.com
4. http://www.physicsworld.com
5. http://www.freevideolectures.com/University/IIT-Madras
14O203
14O204
C PROGRAMMING II
14L205/14T205/14N205/14E105/14P105/14F105 BASICS OF CIVIL AND

MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
4
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the process involved in the manufacturing of cement and types of concrete.
To know the types and properties of construction materials such as cement, concrete, steel
sections.
To learn the surveying and its applications.
To understand the concepts of energy generation in power plants.
To study about construction of IC engines and Boilers.
To understand the concepts of refrigeration and air conditioning system.
705
OUTCOMES:
gain knowledge on applications of different construction materials in various structures.
acquire a knowledge on different kinds of structures and its usage in different applications.
familiarize on Surveying both theoretically and practically.
know about the working of power plant.
know the working of IC engines and Boilers.
make use of refrigeration and Air Conditioning systems for comfort and industrial applications.
A. CIVIL ENGINEERING
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
10
Introduction Civil Engineering Materials Bricks Sand Cement Concrete Steel sections Site
for foundations Bearing capacity Loads Requirement of good foundations Types.
UNIT II
BASIC CONCEPTS
10
Superstructure Brick Masonry Stone masonry Beams Columns Lintels Roofing Flooring
Plastering Valuation mechanics Internal and External forces Strain Elasticity Types of Bridges
and Dams Basics of Interior and Landscaping.
UNIT III
SURVEYING
10
Surveying Objects Types Classification Principles Measurements of Distances Angles
Leveling Determination of areas Illustrative examples.
B. MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
UNIT I
POWER PLANT ENGINEERING
10
Introduction Classification of Power Plants Working principle of Steam, Gas, Diesel,
Hydro-electric and Nuclear power plants Merits and Demerits Pumps and turbines Classifications,
working of centrifugal and reciprocating pump(single and double acting) Applications.
UNIT II
IC ENGINES AND BOILERS
10
Internal combustion engines as automobile power plant Working principle of Petrol and Diesel engines
Four stroke and two stroke cycles Comparison of four stroke and two stroke engines Lubrication system
Ignition system Magneto and Battery types Cooling system Boiler Classification Water tube
boiler, Fire tube boiler Boiler mounting and accessories.
UNIT III
REFRIGERATION AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
10
Terminology of Refrigeration and Air conditioning Refrigerant Properties, types Principle of Vapour
compression and absorption system Layout of typical domestic refrigerator Window and Split type
room air conditioner.
TOTAL: 60
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Ramesh Babu V
Basic Civil and Mechanical

Engineering
VRB Publishers pvt. Ltd.
2010
2.
Venugopal K
Prabu Raja V
Basic Mechanical
Engineering
Anuradha Publishers,
Kumbakonam
2010
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No
1.
Author(s)
Shanmugam G
Palanichamy M S
Title of the Book

Basic Civil and Mechanical
Engineering
706
Publisher
Tata McGraw- Hill
Year of
Publication
2008
2.
Arora S C
Domkundwar S
A Course in Power plant

Engineering
Dhanpat Rai and Co. Pvt.

Ltd.
2005
3.
Shanthakumar S R J
Basic Mechanical
Engineering
Hi-Tech Publications
2005
4.
Basak N N
Tata McGraw- Hill
2008
5.
Seetharaman S
Basic Civil Engineering
Anuradha Agencies
2005
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.surveying.com
http://www.levelling.org/
http://www.constructionmaterials.com
http://www.scribd.com/doc/23430482/Basic-Mechanical-Engineering-Power-Plant-Engineering
http://nptel.iitk.ac.in/courses/Webcourse- contents/IIT%20Kharagpur/Ref%20 and%20Air
%20Cond/New_index1.html
14L206/14T206
ELECTRONIC DEVICES
(Common to ECE/ETE)
3
OBJECTIVES:
To describe, explain, and analyze the operation of important semiconductor devices in terms
of their physical structure.
To enhance comprehension capabilities of students through understanding standard and specific
electronic devices.
To understand the device fabrication process.
To create foundation for forthcoming circuit design courses.
OUTCOMES:
explain semiconductor devices through energy band diagrams.
differentiate between bipolar and unipolar conduction.
describe the operation of JFET and MOSFET.
illustrate the device fabrication process.
explain the concept of various types of special semiconductor devices.
UNIT I
P-N JUNCTION DIODE
8
V-I characteristics Static and dynamic resistance Temperature dependence of characteristics
Diffusion and transition capacitances Diode as a circuit element, small signal and large signal models
Diode switching times p-n junction diode ratings. Breakdown phenomena in diodes - Zener diodes. The
metal - Semiconductor junction - Schottky barrier diodes.
UNIT II
BIPOLAR JUNCTION TRANSISTOR
9
Physical behaviour of a BJT Ebers-Moll model Large signal current gains Modes of transistor
operation - Common base, Common emitter and Common collector configurations Input and output
Characteristics, Early effect, Regions of operation AC and DC load lines - Need for stability of Q-Point
Bias stability - fixed bias, Collector to base bias, Self bias Transistor switching times. High frequency
effects BJT ratings.
UNIT III
FIELD EFFECT TRANSISTOR
8
JFET operation - V-I characteristics, Transfer characteristics, Regions of operation DC analysis - JFET
biasing Small signal JFET model, JFET as a switch, Voltage variable resistor and An amplifier.
MOSFET: Constructional details - Operation of enhancement and depletion type MOSFETs V-I
Characteristics, Transfer characteristics, Comparison of PMOS and NMOS devices.
707
UNIT IV
DEVICE FABRICATION
9
Monolithic IC technology - Planar processes, Epitaxial growth, Oxidation, Photolithography, Diffusion, Ion
implantation, Metallization. BJT fabrication - Need for buried layer, Junction and dielectric isolation,
Fabrication of p-n-p, multiple emitter transistors. Monolithic diodes. Fabrication of FETs, NMOS
enhancement and depletion MOSFETs, Self isolation, CMOS technology. Monolithic IC Resistors: Sheet
resistance - Diffused, ion implanted, Epitaxial, pinch, MOS and thin film resistors. Monolithic IC
capacitors - Junction, MOS and thin film capacitors. IC packaging. Microelectronic circuit layout.
UNIT V
SPECIAL SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES (Qualitative Treatment only)
11
Tunnel diodes PIN diode, varactor diode SCR characteristics and two transistor equivalent model UJT
Diac and Triac Laser, CCD, Photodiode, Phototransistor, Photoconductive and Photovoltaic cells
LED, LCD.
TOTAL: 45 + 15
TEXT BOOKS:
SI. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Millman J
Grabel A
Microelectronics
Tata McGraw-Hill
2000
2.
Boylestead L R
Nashelsky L
Electronic Devices
and Circuit theory
Pearson Education India,

2006
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Adel S Sedra
Kenneth C Smith
Microelectronic
Circuits

Newyork, 4th Edition
2011
2.
Thomas L Floyd
Electronic Devices

New Delhi, 7th Edition.
2007
3.
David A Bell
Electronic Devices
and Circuits
Prentice Hall of India, New

Delhi, 4th Edition.
2000
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.electronics-tutorials.ws/diode/diode_3.html
http://www.tpub.com/neets/book7/26i.htm
http://www.icknowledge.com/misc_technology/fundamentalprinciples.html
http://www.shelf3d.com/Search/Introduction%2Bto%2BElectronic%2BCircuits%2Bby%2BProf.S
.C.Dutta%2Broy%2BPlayListIDPL2D75EC7EC87B37E0
14O211
14G112/14H212
PHYSICS LABORATORY
708
14L213/14T112/14E113/14N113/14P113/14F113
ENGINEERING GRAPHICS
0
OBJECTIVES:
To enable the students with various concepts like dimensioning, conventions and standards related
to free hand sketching.
To understand the basic principles of orthographic projection and its conventions.
To impart the knowledge on projections of points, lines, plane surfaces and solids.
To understand the sectioning and development of surfaces.
To enable the students on 2D drafting and basic design software tools.
OUTCOMES:
use the appropriate conventions and standards related to free hand sketching.
acquire visualization skills through free hand sketching of multiple views from pictorial views of
objects.
create the projections of points, lines, plane surfaces and solids.
construct the sectioning and development of surfaces using different methods.
use 2D drafting and basic design software tools for engineering applications.
UNIT I
PLANE CURVES AND FREE HAND SKETCHING
9
Conics Construction of ellipse, parabola and hyperbola by eccentricity method Construction of
involutes of triangle, square, pentagon, hexagon and circle Drawing of tangents and normal to the above
curves.
UNIT II
FREE HAND SKETCHING ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS
9
Representation of Three Dimensional objects General principles of orthographic projection Need for
importance of multiple views and their placement First angle projection Layout views Developing
visualization skills through free hand sketching of multiple views from pictorial views of objects.
UNIT III
PROJECTIONS OF POINTS, LINES, PLANE SURFACES AND SOLIDS
9
Projection of points in all quadrants Projection of straight lines located in first quadrants Projection of
plane surfaces, Projection of simple solids like prisms, pyramids, cylinder and cone when the axis is
inclined to one reference plane by change of position method.
UNIT IV
SECTIONS OF SOLIDS AND DEVELOPMENT OF SURFACES
9
Sectioning of above solids in simple vertical position by cutting planes inclined to one reference plane and
perpendicular to the other Obtaining true shape of section. Development of lateral surfaces of simple and
truncated solids Prisms, pyramids, cylinders and cones Development of lateral surfaces of solids
perpendicular to the axis.
UNIT V
2D DRAFTING
9
Importance of 2D drafting sketching, mirroring, scaling, copying (simple and multiple) dimensioning
Wiring diagram and piping layout drawings Practice of Computer Aided Drafting and dimensioning
using appropriate software packages.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
1.
Natrajan K V
Fredrick E Giesecke
Title of the Book

A text book of
Principles of Engineering
Graphics
709
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Dhanalakshmi
Publishers
2010
Prentice Hall
2003
REFERENCES BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Venugopal K
Prabhu Raja V

(P) Limited
2010
2.
Dhananjay A Jolhe
Engineering Drawing
with an introduction to
AutoCAD
Tata McGraw Hill
2008
3.
Bhatt N D
Engineering Drawing
Charotar Publishing
House
2008
4.
Narayana K L
Kannaiah P
Tata McGraw Hill
2005
5.
Shah P J
S Chand and Co Ltd
2012
WEB URLs:
1.
http://www.techtrain123.com/publicdownloadsallfiles/Engineering%20Graphics%20Free%20Han
d%20sketch.pdf
2. http://transport.itu.edu.tr/PDF/mak112e/CADD-3.pdf
3. http://www.freewebs.com/fadillah218/ORTHOGRAPHIC%20PROJECTION%20Exercises.pdf
4. http://ef.engr.utk.edu/ef101-2002/as/book/as_chap3.pdf
5. http://www.me.umn.edu/courses/me2011/handouts/drawing/blanco-tutorial.html
710

SEMESTER I
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Credits
Maximum Marks
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
14O101
40
60
100
40
60
100
14O103

Engineering
Technical English
40
60
100
14O104
C Programming I
40
60
100
14T105
Electric Circuits
40
60
100
14T106
Electrical Machines
40
60
100
14G102
PRACTICAL
14O111
40
60
100
14T112
Laboratory
TOTAL
40
60
100
40
60
100
18
24
14G113
SEMESTER II
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Credits
Maximum Marks
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
14T202

Series
14O203
40
60
100
14O204
C Programming II
Engineering
Electron Devices
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
14O201
14T205
14T206
40
60
100
40
60
100
PRACTICAL
14O211
40
60
100
14H212
Physics Laboratory
40
60
100
14T213
Electric circuits Laboratory
40
60
100
14H214
40
60
100
19
14
28
TOTAL
711
SEMESTER III
Course
Code
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Course Title
Credits
Maximum Marks
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
14T302

Analysis
14T303
Data Structures
14T301
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
14T304
Digital Electronics
40
60
100
14T305
Electronic Circuits
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
18
24
14T306
PRACTICAL
14T311
14T312
14T313

Laboratory
Laboratory
TOTAL
SEMESTER IV
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Credits
Maximum Marks
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
14T401
14T402
14T403

Processes
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
14T405
Signals and Systems

Microprocessors and
Microcontrollers
40
60
100
14T406
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
18
24
14T404
PRACTICAL
14T411
14T412
14T413

Controllers Laboratory
Laboratory
TOTAL

712
SEMESTER V
Course
Code
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Course Title
Credits
Maximum Marks
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
3
100
100
14T502
Transmission Lines and Wave

Guides
40
60
100
14T503
Operating Systems
40
60
100
14T504
40
60
100
14T505
Control Systems
40
60
100
14Txxx
Elective I
40
60
100
100
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
18
24
14T501
PRACTICAL
14O511
14T512
14T513
Soft Skills
Laboratory
Communication Laboratory
TOTAL
SEMESTER VI
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Credits
Maximum Marks
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
14T602
Radio Frequency and

Embedded Systems
14T603
40
60
100
14T604
Computer Networks
40
60
100
14T605
40
60
100
14Txxx
Elective II
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
14O601
40
60
100
40
60
100
PRACTICAL
14T612

Laboratory
RF System Design Laboratory
14T613
40
60
100
14T651
Mini Project
100
100
18
12
26
14T611
TOTAL
713
SEMESTER VII
Course
Code
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Course Title
Credits
Maximum Marks
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
14Txxx

Engineering Ethics
Cellular and Mobile
Communication
Tele Communications Switching
Techniques
Wireless Broadband
Communication
Elective III
14Txxx
Elective IV
14O701
14T702
14T703
14T704
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
PRACTICAL
14T721
Comprehension
14T751
100
100
18
20
TOTAL
SEMESTER VIII
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Credits
Maximum Marks
CIA
ESE
Total
40
60
100
PRACTICAL
14T851

TOTAL
24
12
24
12

714
LIST OF ELECTIVES
Course Code
Course Title
14T001
Medical Electronics
14T002
14T003
14T004
14T005
Cognitive Radio
14T006
14T007
High Speed Networks
14T008
14T009
RF Circuit Design
14T010
Wireless Networks
14T011
14T012
14T013
14T014
14T015
Remote Sensing
14T016
Secure Communications
14T017
14T018
14T019
Java Programming
14T020
Satellite and Space Communication
LIST OF ONE CREDIT SUBJECTS

Course Code
Course Title
14T901
Hardware Description Languages
14T902
Analog and Digital Circuit Design using CADENCE Tool
14T903
MEMS Design and Fabrication Techniques
14T904
ARM Cortex - MO+ Controller
715
SEMESTER I
14O101

(common to All Branches)
14G102/14H202

14O103
TECHNICAL ENGLISH

14O104
C PROGRAMMING I

14L105/14T105
ELECTRIC CIRCUITS
(Common to ECE/ETE)
14L106/14T106
ELECTRICAL MACHINES
(Common to ECE/ETE)
14O111
C PROGRAMMING LABORATORY I
14L213/14T112/14E113/14N113/14P113/14F113
14G113/14H213

SEMESTER II
14O201

(common to all Branches)
716
14L202/14T202/14N202/14P202/14F202
PHYSICS FOR ELECTRICAL SCIENCES
(Common to ECE/ETE/EIE/CSE/IT)
14O203
14O204
C PROGRAMMING II

14L205/14T205/14N205/14P205/14F205 BASICS OF CIVIL AND MECHANICAL

ENGINEERING
(Common to ECE/ETE/EIE/CSE/IT)
14L206/14T206
ELECTRON DEVICES
(Common to ECE/ETE)
14O211
14H212
PHYSICS LABORATORY

14L112/14T213
(common to ECE/ETE)
14G114/14H214

717
718

SEMESTER I
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
14O101
40
60
100
14E102
40
60
100
14O103
Technical English
40
60
100
14O104
C Programming I
Engineering
Fundamentals of Electrical
Engineering
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
14E105
14E106
PRACTICAL
14O111
40
60
100
14G112
Physics Laboratory
40
60
100
14E113
40
60
100
14G114
40
60
100
TOTAL
19
12
27
SEMESTER II
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
14O201
40
60
100
40
60
100
14O203

Engineering
40
60
100
14O204
C Programming II
40
60
100
14E205
Electric Circuits
40
60
100
14E206
Electronic Devices
40
60
100
14H202
PRACTICAL
14O211
40
60
100
14E212
40
60
100
14H213
40
60
100
18
11
25
TOTAL

719
SEMESTER III
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
14E301
40
60
100
14E302
Data Structures
40
60
100
14E303
Electronic Circuits
40
60
100
14E304
40
60
100
14E305
40
60
100
14E306
Digital Electronics
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
18
24
PRACTICAL
14E311
14E312
14E313

Laboratory
Laboratory
TOTAL
SEMESTER IV
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
14E401
40
60
100
14E402
40
60
100
14E403
40
60
100
14E404
Electromagnetic Theory
40
60
100
14E405
Synchronous and Induction Machines
40
60
100
14E406
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
18
24
PRACTICAL
14E411
14E412
14E413

Laboratory
AC Machines Laboratory
Digital and Linear Integrated Circuits
Laboratory
TOTAL

720
SEMESTER V
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
14E503
Generation, Transmission and

Distribution
Microprocessors and
Microcontrollers
14E504
Electrical Machine Design
40
60
100
14E505
Control Systems
40
60
100
14Exxx
Elective I
40
60
100
100
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
18
12
26
14E501
14E502
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
PRACTICAL
14O511
14E512
14E513
14E514
Soft Skills
Microprocessors and
Laboratory
Control and Instrumentation
Laboratory
TOTAL
SEMESTER VI
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
14E601
Power System Analysis and Stability
100
100
14E602
Embedded Systems
40
60
100
14E603
Power Electronics
40
60
100
14E604
Computer Networks
40
60
100
14E605
40
60
100
14Exxx
Elective II
40
60
100
PRACTICAL
14E611
Power System Simulation Laboratory
40
60
100
14E612
Power Electronics Laboratory
40
60
100
14E651
Mini Project
100
100
18
24
TOTAL

721
SEMESTER VII
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
14Exxx

Engineering Ethics
Electric Drives and Control
Electric Energy Utilization and
Conservation
Power System Protection and
Switchgear
Elective III
14Exxx
Elective IV
14O701
14E702
14E703
14E704
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
PRACTICAL
14E711
Design Laboratory
40
60
100
14E721
Comprehension
14E751
100
100
TOTAL
18
22
SEMESTER VIII
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
40
60
100
PRACTICAL
14E851
24
12
TOTAL
24
12

722
LIST OF ELECTIVES
Course Code
Course Title
14E001
14E002
Power Quality Engineering
14E003
14E004
Operating Systems
14E005
Special Electrical Machines and Controllers
14E006
HVDC and FACTS
14E007
Java Programming
14E008
Computer Aided Design of Electrical Machines
14E009
VLSI Design
14E010
14E011
14E012
14E013
Smart Grid
14E014
Energy Auditing and Management
14E015
Digital System Design
14E016
14E017
MEMS and Nanotechnology
14E018
Advanced Control of Electrical Drives
14E019
Power System Operation and Control
14E020
Course Code
Course Title
14E901
Programmable Logic Controllers
14E902
Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition System
14E903
Distributed Control Systems
14E904
Automotive Power Electronics
723
SEMESTER I
14O101

14L202/14T202/14E102/14N102/14P102/14F102
SCIENCES
14O103
TECHNICAL ENGLISH
14O104
C PROGRAMMING I

14E106
FUNDAMENTALS OF ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING

3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the basic concepts of AC, DC and magnetic circuits.
To know about the concept and working of batteries.
To expose to electrical safety precautions and first-aid procedures.
To get an overview of generation, transmission and distribution of power.
OUTCOMES:
gain knowledge about DC circuit elements and basic laws.
understand the basics of single phase and three phase system.
have the knowledge of magnetic circuits and different types of batteries.
familiarize with electrical safety precautions and first-aid procedures.
UNIT I
DC CIRCUITS
9
System of units Electrical quantities: charge, current, potential, potential difference, voltage source,
current source and power Ohms law Kirchhoffs laws Resistance, factors affecting resistance,
resistivity and conductivity Effective resistance of series and parallel circuit Simple problems.
UNIT II
AC CIRCUITS
10
Introduction Advantages of AC supply types of AC wave forms Generation of AC voltage
Terminologies: instantaneous value, cycle, time period, frequency, amplitude, angular frequency,
average value, RMS value, crest value, form factor and peak factor Equation of alternating quantity
Phasor representation of sine wave Introduction to three phase system Types of connections
Relationship between line and phase values Three phase power (qualitative treatment only) Simple
problems.
724
UNIT III
MAGNETIC CIRCUITS
9
Introduction to magnetic circuits Terminologies: Magneto motive force, reluctance, flux, flux density,
magnetic field intensity, permeance and permittivity Magnetization curve Faradays laws Self and
mutual inductance Simple problems.
UNIT IV
BATTERIES
9
Energy storage in batteries Ampere-hour rating of batteries Types of batteries Primary and
secondary batteries Torpedo batteries Rechargeable batteries Automotive batteries.
UNIT V
ELECTRICAL SAFETY AND INTRODUCTION TO POWER SYSTEM
8
Safety measures in electrical system First-aid procedures Basic principles of earthing Types of
earthing Simple layout of generation, transmission and distribution of power (single line diagram).
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.
No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Mehta V K
Principles of Electrical
Engineering and Electronics
S Chand Publications
2010
2.
Dash S S
Subramani C
Vijayakumar K
Vijay Nicole Imprints

Pvt. Ltd.
2013
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Sl. No.
Author(s)
1.
Sanjeev Sharma
Basics of Electrical
Engineering
I K International
2007
2.
Ronald Dell
David Anthony
James Rand
Understanding Batteries
Royal Society of
Chemistry, Cambridge,
U.K
2001
3.
James L Kirtley
Electric Power Principles:

Sources, Conversion,
Distribution and Use
Wiley Publications
2010
4.
Nagsarkar T K
Sukhija M S
Basics of Electrical
Engineering
Oxford Press
2005
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://nptel.ac.in/courses/Webcourse-ontents/ IIT Kharagpur/Basic Electrical Technology
http://electrical-engineering-portal.com/21-safety-rules-for-working-with-electricalequipment.
14O111
14G112/14H212
PHYSICS LABORATORY
725
14L213/14T112/14E113/14N113/14P113/14F113
14G114/14H214
SEMESTER II
14O201

14G102/14H202

14O203
14O204
C PROGRAMMING II
14E205
ELECTRIC CIRCUITS
3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the concept of circuit elements, electrical connections, laws and networks
classification.
To analyze the concept of AC circuits for resistance, inductive and capacitive loads.
To analyze the electrical network using mesh, nodal analysis and network theorems.
To know the fundamentals of coupled and resonance circuits.
OUTCOMES:
gain knowledge about electrical networks.
understand the fundamental concepts of AC circuits.
analyze the electrical networks using mesh, nodal and network theorems.
gain knowledge about the coupled and resonance circuits.
UNIT I
BASIC CIRCUIT CONCEPTS
9
Basic electrical quantities Terminologies Source transformation Voltage division Current
division Classification of circuit elements Classification of networks Star-delta transformation.
UNIT II
ANALYSIS OF AC CIRCUITS
9
Introduction Purely resistive, inductive and capacitive circuits RL, RC and RLC series circuits
parallel RLC circuits.
UNIT III
NETWORK THEOREMS
9
Mesh and nodal analysis Superposition theorem Thevenins and Nortons theorems Maximum
power transfer theorem Reciprocity theorem.
726
UNIT IV
9
Frequency response Series resonance Parallel resonance Self and mutual inductance Coupling
coefficient DOT rules Connection of two coils to form a coupled coil Tuned circuits.
UNIT V
DUALITY AND TOPOLOGY
9
Concept of duality Dual network Graphs of a network Trees Chords and branches Tie set and
cut set of a graph Application to network analysis.
TOTAL: 45+15
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.
No.
1.
2.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Nageswara Rao T
Electric Circuit analysis
Sudhakar A and
Shyammohan S Palli
Circuits and Networks

Analysis and
Synthesis
Publisher
A R Publications
Tata McGraw-Hill
Publishing Company
Limited, New
Delhi,Third Edition.
Year of
Publication
2012
2007
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.
No.
Author(s)
1.
Charles K Alexander
Mathew N O Sadiku
Fundamentals of
Electric Circuits
2.
Jack E Kemmerly,
Steven M Durbin
William H Hayt Jr
Engineering Circuit
Analysis
3.
David Irwin J
Basic Engineering
Circuit Analysis
4.
William Hayt
Jack E Kemmerly
Engineering Circuit
Analysis
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Tata McGraw-Hill
Publishing Company
Limited, New Delhi,
Third Edition.
Tata McGraw-Hill
Publishing Company
Limited, New Delhi,
Seventh Edition.
Company and Colier
Macmillan Publishers
New York, London,
Ninth Edition
McGrawHill, New Delh,
Eight Edition
2007
2006
2010
2011
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.allaboutcircuits.com/vol_1/index.html
http://www.elect.mrt.ac.lk/EE201_network_theorems.pdf
http://blogs.bcit.ca/cbennie/taxonomy/term/58/9
14E206
ELECTRONIC DEVICES
3
OBJECTIVES
To understand the physical structure and operational characteristics of semiconductor devices.
To impart knowledge on fabrication of integrated circuits.
To know about special semiconductor devices.
OUTCOMES
understand the fundamental concepts and characteristics of semiconductors.
familiarize with the fabrication of integrated circuits.
gain knowledge about special semiconductor devices.
727
UNIT I
PN JUNCTION DIODE
9
VI characteristics Static and dynamic resistance Temperature dependence of characteristics
Diffusion and transition capacitance Diode as a circuit element Small signal and large signal
models Diode switching times PN junction diode ratings Breakdown phenomena in diodes
Zener diode Schottky barrier diode.
UNIT II
9
Physical behaviour of a BJT Ebers-Moll model Large signal current gains Modes of transistor
operation Common base, common emitter and common collector configurations Input and output
characteristics Early effect Regions of operation AC and DC load lines Need for stability of QPoint Bias stability - Fixed bias Collector to base bias Voltage divider bias Transistor switching
times BJT ratings.
UNIT III
9
JFET operation VI characteristics Transfer characteristics Regions of operation DC analysis
JFET biasing Small signal JFET model JFET as a switch, voltage variable resistor and an amplifier
MOSFET: Constructional details Operation of enhancement and depletion type MOSFETs VI
characteristics Transfer characteristics Comparison of PMOS and NMOS devices.
UNIT IV
DEVICE FABRICATION
9
Monolithic IC technology Planar processes Epitaxial growth Oxidation Photolithography
Diffusion Ion implantation Metallization BJT fabrication Need for buried layer Junction and
dielectric isolation Fabrication of PNP Multiple emitter transistors Monolithic diodes
fabrication of FETs NMOS enhancement and depletion MOSFETs Self isolation CMOS
technology.
UNIT V
SPECIAL SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES (Qualitative Treatment only)
9
Tunnel diodes PIN diode Varactor diode Transient voltage suppression diode CCD
photodiode Phototransistor Photoconductive and photovoltaic cells.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
1.
2.
Author(s)
Millman J
Christos C Halkias
Satyabrabrata Jit
Boylestead L R
Nashelsky L
Title of the Book
Publisher
Electronic Devices
and Circuit theory
Tata McGraw-Hill
New Delhi, 2nd Edition.
Title of the Book
Publisher
Electronic Devices
and Circuits
Year of
Publication
2007
2010
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
1.
Adel S Sedra
Kenneth C Smith
Microelectronic
Circuits
2.
Thomas L Floyd
Electronic Devices
3.
David A Bell
4.
Gupta J B
Electronic Devices
and Circuits
Electronic Devices
and Circuits

Newyork, Seventh
Edition.
S K Kataria snd Sons
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
http://www.tpub.com/neets/book7/26i.htm
728
Year of
Publication
2010
2008
2008
2009
14O211
C PROGAMMING LABORATORY II
14E212

0
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the concept of circuit elements, circuit laws and network reduction.
To solve the electrical network using mesh and nodal analysis by applying network theorems.
To analyze the transient and frequency response of series and parallel A.C circuits.
OUTCOMES:
gain knowledge about the various electrical networks theorems.
understand the self and mutual inductance of a coil.
analyze the transient response of electrical circuits.
familiarize with frequency response of electrical circuits.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1.
Verification of Ohms Law and Kirchhoffs Laws.
2. Verification of Thevenins Theorem and Nortons Theorem.

3. Verification of Super position Theorem.
4. Verification of Maximum Power Transfer Theorem.
5. Verification of Reciprocity Theorem.
6. Measurement of Self and Mutual Inductance of a coil.
7. Study of Nodal and Mesh Analysis.
8. Transient Response of RL and RC Circuits.
9. Frequency Response of Series and Parallel Resonance Circuits.
10. Frequency Response of Single Tuned Coupled Circuits.
14G113/14H213

729
730

SEMESTER I
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
14O101
40
60
100
14N102
40
60
100
14O103
Technical English
40
60
100
14O104
C Programming I
40
60
100
Electronic Devices
Fundamentals of Electronics and
14N106
Instrumentation Engineering
PRACTICAL
40
60
100
40
60
100
14N105
14O111
40
60
100
14G112
Physics Laboratory
40
60
100
14N113
40
60
100
18
24
TOTAL
SEMESTER II
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
14O201
14H202
14O203
14O204
14N205
14N206

Engineering
C Programming II
Engineering
Electric Circuits
40
60
100
40
60
100
3
3
0
0
2
0
4
3
40
40
60
60
100
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
PRACTICAL
14O211
40
60
100
14N212
40
60
100
14H213
40
60
100
40
60
100
14H214
TOTAL
19
14
28

731
SEMESTER III
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
14N301
40
60
100
14N302
Data Structures
40
60
100
14N303
Electronic Circuits
40
60
100
14N304
40
60
100
14N305
40
60
100
14N306
Digital Electronics
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
18
24
PRACTICAL
14N311
14N312
14N313

Laboratory
Transducer and Measurements
Laboratory
TOTAL
SEMESTER IV
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
14N401
40
60
100
14N402
40
60
100
14N403
Electrical Machines
40
60
100
14N404
Modern Electronic Instrumentation
40
60
100
14N405
40
60
100
14N406
Power Electronics
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
18
24
PRACTICAL
14N411
14N412
14N413
Electrical Machines Laboratory

Linear and Digital Integrated Circuits
Laboratory
Laboratory
TOTAL

732
SEMESTER V
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
14N501
40
60
100
40
60
100
14N503
Control Systems
Microprocessors and
Microcontrollers
40
60
100
14N504
40
60
100
14N505
Industrial Instrumentation I
40
60
100
Elective I
40
60
100
100
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
18
12
26
14N502
14NXXX
PRACTICAL
14O511
14N512
14N513
14N514
Soft Skills
Microprocessors and
Laboratory
Control Systems Laboratory
TOTAL
SEMESTER VI
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
14N601
Process Control
40
60
100
14N602
Embedded Systems
40
60
100
14N603
Industrial Instrumentation II
40
60
100
14N604
Computer Networks
40
60
100
14N605
Analytical Instrumentation
40
60
100
Elective II
40
60
100
14NXXX
PRACTICAL
14N611
Process Control Laboratory
40
60
100
14N612
Industrial Instrumentation Laboratory
40
60
100
14N613
Design Project Laboratory
40
60
100
14N651
Mini Project
100
100
18
12
26
TOTAL
733
SEMESTER VII
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
14N701
40
60
100
14N702

Logic and Distributed Control
Systems
Power Plant Instrumentation
40
60
100
100
100
40
60
100
14NXXX
Elective III
40
60
100
14NXXX
Elective IV
40
60
100
40
60
100
100
100
TOTAL
18
22
14N703
14N704
PRACTICAL
14N711
Laboratory
14N721
Comprehension
14N751
SEMESTER VIII
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
40
60
100
PRACTICAL
14N851
24
12
TOTAL
24
12

734
LIST OF ELECTIVES
Course Code
Course Title
14N001
14N002
14N003
Advanced Control Theory
14N004
Operating Systems
14N005
Instrumentation and Control in Petrochemical Industries
14N006
Fiber Optics and Laser Based Instrumentation
14N007
Instrumentation and Control in Paper Industry
14N008
Instrumentation and Control in Iron and Steel Industry
14N009
Aircraft Instrumentation
14N010
Robotics and Automation
14N011
Mechatronics
14N012
14N013
Industrial Instrumentation Practices
14N014
Optimal Control Theory
14N015
System Identification and Adaptive Control
14N016
Ultrasonic Instrumentation
14N017
Autotronix
14N018
14N019
VLSI Design
14N020
Java Programming
Course Code
Course Title
14N901
Distributed Control System in Industries
14N902
Advanced Industrial Automation
14N903
Robotic Controllers
14N904
Data Acquisition Using Lab VIEW
735
SEMESTER I
14O101

14L202/14T202/14E102/14N102/14P102/14F102
SCIENCES
14O103
TECHNICAL ENGLISH
14O104
C PROGRAMMING I
14N105
ELECTRONIC DEVICES
3
OBJECTIVES:
To deliver the knowledge about physics of basic semiconductor devices.
To enhance comprehension capabilities of students through understanding of electronic devices.
To introduce and motivate students to the use of advanced microelectronic devices.
To create foundation for forthcoming circuit design courses.
OUTCOMES:
describe the operation of semiconductor devices through energy band diagrams.
analyze characteristics of semiconductor junctions .
differentiate between bipolar and unipolar conduction.
describe the about advanced semiconductor devices used in research.
use of semiconductor devices in various applications
UNIT I
THEORY OF P-N JUNCTION DIODE
9
Theory of PN junction diode Energy band structure Quantitative theory of PN diode currents Diode
current equation Diode resistance Transition capacitance Diffusion capacitance Temperature
dependence characteristics Switching characteristics Breakdown phenomena in diodes Diode as
circuit element PN diode applications.
UNIT II
OTHER DIODES
9
Construction Operation and characteristics of Zener diode Varactor diode Tunnel diode PIN diode
Laser diode Schottky diode Current limiting diode Avalanche photo diode-PNPN diode.
UNIT III
9
BJT Construction transistor biasing Operation of NPN and PNP transistor Types of configuration
transistor as a amplifier Large signal, small signal DC models of transistor Breakdown in transistors
Ebers Moll model Bias stability Methods of transistor biasing-biasing compensation
736
UNIT IV
9
JFET : Construction and operation Characteristics parameters of JFET Expression for saturation drain
current Biasing JFET as a switch, voltage variable resistor and an amplifier Comparison with BJT
applications
MOSFET: Constructional details Operation of enhancement and depletion type MOSFETs V-I
characteristics Transfer characteristics, biasing Comparison of PMOS and NMOS devices
Comparison with JFET Applications.
UNIT V
MISCELLANEOUS DEVICES
9
Uni Junction Transistor Programmable Unijunction Transistor Silicon Controlled Rectifier Light
Activated Silicon Controlled Rectifier Triode in AC Diode in AC Gate Turn On and Off Charge
Coupled Devices Seven segment display Thermistors Optocouplers.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl.No
Authors
Title of the Book
1.
Millman Jacob Christos

Halkias Satyabrata Jit
Electronic Devices
and Circuits
2.
Boylestead L R
Nashelsky L
Electronic Devices
and Circuit theory
Salivahanan S
Suresh Kumar N
Electronic Devices
and Circuits
Publisher
Year of
Publication

Company Ltd, New Delhi,
Third Edition
Pearson Education India, New
Delhi, Ninth Edition
Company Ltd, New Delhi,
Second Edition
2010
2006
2012
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No
Authors
Title of the Book
1.
Despande N
Electronic devices and

Circuits
2.
Thomas L Floyd
Electronic Devices
3.
David A Bell
Electronic Devices
and Circuits
Publisher
Year of
Publication

Company Ltd New Delhi
First Edition
Pearson Education India New
Delhi Seventh Edition
Prentice Hall of India New
Delhi Fourth Edition
2007
2007
2000
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.tpub.com/neets/book7/26i.html
http://www.circuitstoday.com/scr-characteristics
14N106
FUNDAMENTALS OF ELECTRONICS AND INSTRUMENTATION

ENGINEERING
3
OBJECTIVES:
To study the basics and working of semiconductors, passive components and their characteristics.
To expose the students about the basics of units and standards of electrical quantities.
To explain the basics of measurements and measuring instruments with their applications
To understand the static characteristics of instruments
To know the basics of control systems and its types along with its applications.
737
OUTCOMES:
review the basics of semiconductors, passive components and their characteristics.
analyze the types of units and standards of electrical quantities
deal with measurements and measuring instruments
review the static characteristics of instruments
analyze the basics of control systems and its types with its applications
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO CIRCUIT COMPONENTS AND SEMICONDUCTORS 9
Passive circuit components Types of resistor, capacitor and inductor Classification of semiconductor
Conductivity in semiconductors Carrier concentration in intrinsic semi conductors Mass action law
Properties of intrinsic semiconductors Variation in semiconductors with temperature Drift and diffusion
current Carrier life time Continuity equation.
UNIT II
UNITS AND STANDARDS
9
Units Absolute units Fundamental and derived units Dimensions CGS systems of units Practical
units Dimension equation MKS system SI units Determination of absolute units Absolute
measurement of current and resistance Standards and their classification Standards for mass and length
Electrical, EMF, resistance and current standards Conversion of units.
UNIT III
MEASUREMENTS AND INSTRUMENT SYSTEMS
9
Measurements Significance of measurement Method of measurement Instruments Classification of
instruments Deflection and null instruments Functions of instruments and measurements systems
Applications of measurement system Types of instrumentation systems Elements of generalized
measurement system Input output configuration Methods of correction.
UNIT IV
CHARACTERISTICS OF INSTRUMENTS AND MEASUREMENT SYSTEM 9
Calibration Static characteristics Accuracy, precision, range, hysteresis, linearity, reproducibility, drift,
static error, dead zone, resolution, threshold and loading effect Noise Errors Types Gross
Systematic Random errors
UNIT V
INTRODUCTION TO CONTROL SYSTEMS
9
System Concept Feedback system Open loop and closed loop system Comparison of open loop and
closed loop control Classification of system models Physical models Mathematical models Basic
classification of control system On/Off Control Temperature control system.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
1.
Sawhney A K
2.
Gopal M
Nagrath I J
Title of the Book

A Course in Electrical
and Electronics
Measurements and
Instrumentation
Control Systems
Engineering
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Dhanpat Rai and Sons,

New Delhi
2005

Pvt. Ltd.
2005
Publisher
Year of
Publication
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Salivahanan S
Suresh Kumar N
Electronic Devices
and Circuits
Tata McGraw Hill
2012
2.
David A Bell
Electronic Devices
and Circuits

2000
3.
Manjita Srivasta
Srivastava M C
Smrit Bhatnagar
Control Systems
Tata McGraw Hill
2009
738
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.semiconductor-today.com/
http://www.edinformatics.com/math_science/units.html
http://www.mathsisfun.com/measure/unit.html
http://www.ocw.utm.my/file.php/128/OCW_SKN3022_Instrumentation_Ch_3.pdf
http://www.aoengr.com/SampleBook.pdf
14O111
14G112/14H212
PHYSICS LABORATORY
14L213/14T112/14E113/14N113/14P113/14F113
SEMESTER II
14O201

14G102/14H202

14O203
14O204
C PROGRAMMING II

739
14N206
ELECTRIC CIRCUITS
3
OBJECTIVES:
To analyze the circuits in time and frequency domain
To study network functions, inter relation among various circuit parameters and analyse complex
network.
To analyze three phase circuits and power measurement.
To synthesize AC and DC circuits and to become familiar in circuit analysis
OUTCOMES:
apply their knowledge in solving real and complex electric circuits.
evaluate the time and frequency response which is useful in understanding behavior of electronic
circuits and control system.
deal in circuit theorems
implement the concept in communication circuits.
describe how the power in terms of electromagnetic energy is transmitted through passive
elements.
UNIT I
BASIC CIRCUITS ANALYSIS
9
Ohms Law Kirchhoffs laws DC and AC Circuits Resistors in series and parallel circuits Mesh
current and node voltage method of analysis for DC and AC circuits.
UNIT II
NETWORK REDUCTION AND NETWORK THEOREMS FOR DC AND AC

CIRCUITS
9
Network reduction Voltage and current division Source transformation Star delta conversion
Thevenins and Norton theorem Superposition theorem Maximum power transfer theorem
Reciprocity theorem
UNIT III
9
Series and parallel resonance frequency response Quality factor and bandwidth Self and mutual
inductance Coefficient of coupling Tuned circuits Single tuned circuits.
UNITIV
TRANSIENT RESPONSE FOR DC and AC CIRCUITS
9
Transient responses of RL, RC and RLC Circuits using Laplace transform for DC input and AC input.
UNIT V
THREE PHASE CIRCUITS
9
Three phase star and delta connections Phase sequence Line and phase quantities Analysis of three
phase circuits with star and delta connected balanced loads Phasor diagram representation of voltages and
currents Two wattmeter method of power and power factor measurements in three phase circuits.
TOTAL: 45+15
TEXT BOOKS:
S.No.
1.
2
Author(s)
William H Hayt
Jr Jack E Kemmerly
Steven M Durbin
Sudhakar A
Shyam Mohan S P
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Engineering
Circuits Analysis
Tata Mc Graw Hill

New Delhi
2010
Circuits and Network Analysis

andSynthesis
Tata Mc Graw Hill

New Delhi
2007
Title of the Book
REFERENCE BOOKS:
S.No.
1.
Author(s)
Paranjothi S R
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Electric Circuits Analysis
New Age International Ltd

New Delhi
2011
740
2.
Joseph A Edminister
Mahmood Nahri
Electric circuits
Schaums series Tata Mc

Graw Hill New Delhi
2001
3.
Chakrabati A
Circuits Theory (Analysis

and synthesis)
Dhanpath Rai and

Sons New Delhi
1999
4.
Charles K Alexander
Mathew N O Sadik
Fundamentals of Electric
Circuits
Mc Graw Hill
2008
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.ntpel.iitm.ac.in
http://www. ocw.mit.edu/
http://forum.jntuworld.com
http://www.aeroelectric.com/articles/LowOhmsAdapter_3.pdf
http://www.allaboutcircuits.com
14O211
14N212

0
OBJECTIVES:
To implement the circuits in time and frequency domain
To study network functions, inter relationship among various circuit parameters and to solve
complex network.
To verify the basic theorems by analyzing simple electric circuits.
To expose the students to the operation of Coupled Circuits
OUTCOMES:
apply their knowledge in real and complex circuits.
evaluate the time and frequency response of circuits.
explain the behavior of electronic circuits
analyze and implement the circuit theorems in practical situations.
describe how the coupled circuits are practically implemented.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Verification of Ohms Law and Kirchhoffs laws.

Verification of Thevenins theorem and Nortons theorem.
Verification of Superposition theorem.
Verification of Maximum power transfer theorem.
Verification of Reciprocity theorem.
Measurement of Self and Mutual inductances of a Coil.
Study of Nodal and Mesh analysis.
Transient response of RL and RC circuits.
Frequency response of Series and Parallel resonance circuits.
Frequency response of single tuned coupled circuits.
14G113/14H213


741
14G114/14H214
742

SEMESTER I
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
14O101
40
60
100
14P102
40
60
100
14O103
Technical English
40
60
100
14O104
14P105
C Programming I
Engineering
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
14P106
PRACTICAL
14O111
40
60
100
14G112
Physics Laboratory
40
60
100
14P113
40
60
100
14G114
40
60
100
TOTAL
19
12
27
SEMESTER II
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
14O201
14H202
40
60
100
40
60
100
14O203

Engineering
40
60
100
14O204
C Programming II
40
60
100
14P205
40
60
100
14P206
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
18
11
25
PRACTICAL
14O211
14P212
14H213
Electrical and Electronics Engineering
Laboratory
TOTAL

743
SEMESTER III
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
14P301
40
60
100
14P302
40
60
100
14P303
System Software
40
60
100
14P304
Digital Principles and System Design
40
60
100
14P305
Data Structures I
40
60
100
14P306
40
60
100
PRACTICAL
14P311
Digital Laboratory
40
60
100
14P312

Laboratory
TOTAL
40
60
100
40
60
100
18
24
14P313
SEMESTER IV
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
14P401
Probability and Queuing Theory
40
60
100
14P402
Data Structures II
40
60
100
14P403
40
60
100
40
60
100
14P405

Microprocessors and
Microcontrollers
Operating Systems
40
60
100
14P406
100
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
18
11
25
14P404
PRACTICAL
14P411
14P412
14P413

Laboratory
TOTAL

744
SEMESTER V
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
14P501
40
60
100
14P502
Java programming
40
60
100
14P503
Computer Networks
40
60
100
14P504
Design and Analysis of Algorithms
40
60
100
14PXXX
Elective I
40
60
100
14PXXX
Elective II
40
60
100
PRACTICAL
14O511
Soft Skills
100
100
14P512
Compiler Design Laboratory
40
60
100
14P513
40
60
100
14P514
40
60
100
18
12
26
TOTAL
SEMESTER VI
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
14P601
40
60
100
14P602

Design
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
14PXXX
Elective III
40
60
100
14PXXX
Elective IV
40
60
100
40
60
100
14P603
14P604
PRACTICAL
40
60
100
14P613

Laboratory
Laboratory
CASE Tools Laboratory
40
60
100
14P651
Mini Project
100
100
18
12
26
14P611
14P612
TOTAL
745
SEMESTER VII
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
14P702

Engineering Ethics
14P703
40
60
100
14P704
Cloud Computing
40
60
100
14PXXX
Elective V
40
60
100
14PXXX
Elective VI
40
60
100
14O701
40
60
100
40
60
100
PRACTICAL
14P751
100
100
14P721
Comprehension
TOTAL
18
20
SEMESTER VIII
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
40
60
100
PRACTICAL
14P851
24
12
TOTAL
24
12

746
LIST OF ELECTIVES
Course Code
Course Title
14P001
Data Warehousing and Data mining
14P002
Embedded Systems
14P003
14P004
14P005
E Commerce Technology
14P006
High Speed Networks
14P007
14P008
Web Programming
14P009
Open Source Technologies
14P010
14P011
14P012
14P013
14P014
Data Science and Big Data Analysis
14P015
Green Computing
14P016
14P017
Mobile and Pervasive Computing
14P018
14P019
Cyber Security
Main Frame Computing
14P020
Grid Computing
ONE CREDIT COURSES
Course Code
Course Title
14P901
Modern Network Systems
14P902
Directory Services
14P903
User Interface Design
14P904
PL / SQL Programming
747
SEMESTER I
14O101

14L202/14T202/14E102/14N102/14P102/14F102
SCIENCES
14O103
TECHNICAL ENGLISH
14O104
C PROGRAMMING I

14P106/14F106
FUNDAMENTALS OF COMPUTERS
(Common to CSE/IT)
3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the basic knowledge of computer system.
To develop knowledge about the hardware and the software regarding the computer.
To know about office automation tools.
To understand the concept of internet and its applications.
To know about computer graphics.
OUTCOMES:
demonstrate how to organize files and documents on a USB/hard drive.
compose, format and edit a word and excel document.
compose, format and edit a PowerPoint presentation.
generate reports using access.
navigate and search through internet and design a web page using HTML.
implement animations using Photoshop or flash.
UNIT I
COMPUTER BASICS AND PROBLEM SOLVING
9
Evolution of computers Generations of computers Classification of computers Applications of
computers Computer components Hardware Memory and its types Software booting Types of
softwares Introduction to operating system Concept of BIOS, Booting Problem solving techniques
Algorithms Flow chart Program control structure Language translator.
748
UNIT II
OFFICE AUTOMATION I
9
Introduction to Microsoft word Document formatting Advanced letter/memo/report/table Formatting
Introductory Microsoft excel Spreadsheet management Charts Formulas and calculations Excel
forms Tables.
UNIT III
OFFICE AUTOMATION II
9
Introduction to Microsoft access Database creation using different wizards Introductory Microsoft
PowerPoint Inserting text and graphics Working with videos, Movie-Clips, Animations, and transitions
Sounds Creating photo albums.
UNIT IV
BASICS OF INTERNET
9
Introduction Internet Basic internet terms Getting connected to internet The World Wide Web
HTML history HTML documents Elements of an HTML document Header tags Body tags
Formatting HTML documents Managing images in html Frames Hypertext and link in HTML
documents Special effects in HTML documents.
UNIT V
COMPUTER GRAPHICS
9
Graphics primitives Line Circle Ellipse Rectangle Introduction to Flash Introduction to
Photoshop.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
1.
Balagurusamy E
John Dimarco
Title of the Book

Fundamentals of Computing
and Programming
Multimedia
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Tata McGraw Hill
2010
IGI Global
2008
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Rajaram V
Prentice Hall India
2006
Gary B Shelly
Misty E Vermaat
Microsoft Office 2010:

Introductory
Course Technology
2010
Deitel
Neito
INTERNET and WORLD

WIDE WEB How to
program
Edition Pearson
education
2008
Shane
Rebenschied
Flash Professional 8 Beyond

the Basics HandsOn Training
Peachpit Press
2006
Michelle Perkins
Beginner's Guide to Adobe

Photoshop
Amherst Media, Inc
2006
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.tutorialized.com
http://www.adobephotoshoptutorials.com
http://www.officetutorials.com
http://www.ae.sharif.edu/~aerocad/Output%20primitives.ppt
http://www.cise.ufl.edu/~lok/teaching/csgss08/primitives.ppt
749

14G112/14H212
PHYSICS LABORATORY
14L213/14T112/14E113/14N113/14P113/14F113
14G114/14H214
SEMESTER II
14O201

14G102/14H202

14O203
14O204
C PROGRAMMING II
14P205/14F205
BASICS OF ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING

(Common to CSE / IT)
3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the basic laws and theorems of DC circuits.
To gain a thorough knowledge in electromagnetic and AC circuits.
To know the construction, working principle, types of electrical machines.
To expose the types and working of various type of measuring instruments.
750
OUTCOMES:
familiarize with DC and AC circuits.
have knowledge about the electromagnetism and electric machines.
posses knowledge about single phase transformer.
identify and handle appropriate measuring instruments according to the requirements.
UNIT I
DC CIRCUITS AND THEOREMS
9
DC circuits: Introduction Ohms law Kirchhoffs laws Mesh and nodal analysis Simple problems.
Theorems: Super position theorem, Thevenins theorem, Nortons theorem and Maximum power transfer
theorem Simple problems.
UNIT II
ELECTROMAGNETISM AND AC CIRCUITS
9
Electromagnetism: Introduction and terminologies Faradays law, Lenzs law Self and mutual
inductance Simple problems.
AC circuits: Introduction and terminologies AC through pure resistance, inductance and capacitance
Series Circuits: RL, RC and RLC Simple problems.
UNIT III
DC MACHINES (Qualitative study only)
9
DC generator: Construction and principle of operation, EMF equation Self and separately excited
generators Characteristics of series, shunt and compound generators.
DC motor: Principle of operation, back EMF and torque equation Types and characteristics of DC
motors.
UNIT IV
AC MACHINES (Qualitative study only)
9
Alternator: Construction and principle of operation Types and load characteristics.
Single phase induction motor: Principle of operation, types and torque-speed characteristics Three phase
induction motor: Principle of operation, types and torque-slip characteristics.
UNIT V
TRANSFORMER AND MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
9
Single Phase Transformer: Construction, principle of operation, EMF equation, types and applications
Simple problems.
Measuring Instruments: Functional elements of an instrument Moving coil and moving iron instruments
Dynamometer type watt meter Induction type energy meter.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
Sl.No.
Author(s)
1.
Sanjeev Sharma
I.K.International
2007
2.
Kothari D P
Nagrath I J
Tata McGraw Hill
2009
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl.No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Del Toro
Electrical Engineering Fundamentals
Prentice Hall
2009
2.
Mehta V K
Rohit Mehta
Principles of Electrical Machines
New Age
International
2006
3.
Mehta V K
Rohit Mehta
S Chand Company
2008
751
4.
Sawhney A K
A Course in Electrical and Electronic

Dhanpat Rai and

Co.
2012
WEB URLs:
1. http://www.onesmartclick.com/engineering/basic-electrical-engineering.html
2. http://elearning.vtu.ac.in/ELE1525.html
3. http://www.facstaff.bucknell.edu/mastascu/elessonshtml/EEIndex.html
4. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/Webcourse-ontents/ IIT Kharagpur/Basic Electrical Technology
5. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/108105059/
14P206/14F206
ELECTRONIC DEVICES AND CIRCUITS

(Common to CSE/IT)
3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand and analyse the operation of important semiconductor devices in terms of their
physical structure.
To understand the methods of biasing of transistors and FET devices.
To understand and model the small signal amplifier for low frequency, high frequency operations
using H parameter and Hybrid Pi parameters.
To understand the operation and designing methods of different types of amplifiers, sinusoidal
oscillators and power supply systems.
OUTCOMES:
learn how to develop and employ circuit models for diodes and transistors.
understand the need for biasing and principles of different biasing circuits for BJT and FET along
with various compensation techniques.
design and analyse small signal amplifiers for their gain, input/output impedance, bandwidth using
suitable model.
select a specific class of large signal amplifier and analyse the same for performance.
design various types of sinusoidal oscillators for the given range of frequencies.
analyze and design power supplies with suitable rectifiers, filters and regulators for specific
applications.
UNIT I
PN DIODES AND SPECIAL DOIDES
9
PN junction diodes: VI characteristics, current equation, effect of temperature on characteristics, static and
dynamic resistance, applications and specifications Zener diodes: VI characteristics, equivalent circuit,
applications and specifications Varactar diode: VI characteristics, equivalent circuit, applications and
specifications Pin diode: Construction, equivalent circuit, applications and specifications Photodiodes:
Construction, characteristics, applications LED, Seven segment display LCD Construction and
applications.
UNIT II
TRANSISTORS AND FET
9
Transistors: Configuration, characteristics in CE,CB,CC configurations Transistor ratings, maximum
power dissipation Thermal runaway DC load line, Q point, biasing, stability factor, methods of biasing
(Base bias, emitter feedback, collector feedback, voltage divider) Ebersmoll model of a transistor in CE
Configuration Low frequency Small signal model Hybrid model High frequency hybrid Pi model
FETS: Operation of JFET characteristics ,comparison with BJT, MOSFET operation types,
characteristics Biasing of FET, small signal frequency FET model.
UNIT III
AMPLIFIERS
9
Single stage amplifier CE amplifier, analysis Swamped amplifier, analysis CB amplifier, CC
amplifier, analysis, comparison Multistage amplifiers Coupling types RC coupled amplifier, voltage
gain, frequency response Transformer coupled amplifier Direct coupled amplifiers Darlington
amplifier Single tuned voltage amplifier frequency response Feedback amplifier types and
advantages.
752
UNIT IV
SINUSOIDAL OSCILLATORS
9
Classification Criterion for oscillations Hartley oscillator Colpitts Oscillator Clapp Oscillator RC
oscillator Wein bridge oscillator circuit diagram and operation.
UNIT V
POWER SUPPLIES
9
Rectifiers Half wave, full wave, bridge rectifier, average value of output voltage, load current,
comparison, ripple, efficeicy of the rectifiers Filters, capacitor filter, LC filter, Pi filter Regulated Power
supplies: Voltage regulators, types, Zener regulator Transistorized series and shunt regulators
Adjustable voltage regulators.
TOTAL: 45
TEXT BOOK:
Sl. No.
1.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
A text book of applied

Electronics
Sedha R S
Year of
Publication
S Chand and
Company Pvt. Ltd.
2005
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Sl. No.
Author(s)
Title of the Book
Publisher
Year of
Publication
1.
Millman J
Halkias C
Satyabrata

Circuits
Tata McGraw Hill
2007
2.
Salivahanan S

circuits
Tata McGraw Hill
2005
WEB URLs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://www.electronics-circuits.com
http://www.discovercircuits.com
http://www.projectcircuits.com
http://www.dmoz.org
http://www.opencorus.org
14O211
14P212/14F212

LABORATORY
(Common to CSE/IT)
0
1.5
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the concept of circuit laws and theorem.
To analyze the performance of D.C. Motor / Generator.
To analyze the performance of single phase transformer and three phase induction motor.
To measure single phase power and power factor.
To understand and study the basic characteristics of electronic devices like diodes and transistors.
To setup biasing circuits for transistor and FET devices.
To design, implement and test FET and transistor amplifiers.
To design, implement and test sinusoidal oscillator, power supplies and regulators
753
OUTCOMES:
evaluate the basic laws and theorems of electrical circuits.
analyze the performance characteristics of electrical machines.
measure single phase power and power factor.
verify the working of diodes, transistors.
set up biasing point for transistor, FET devices.
build a common emitter/base/collector amplifier and measure its voltage gain.
design different types of oscillators and amplifiers.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Verification of Ohms law and Kirchhoffs law.
2. Verification of circuit theorem.
3. Load Test on DC shunt motor / generator.
4. Measurement of single phase power and power factor.
5. Load Test on Single Phase Transformer.
6. Load Test on three phase induction Motor.
7. Characteristics of PN Junction Diode and Zener Diode.
8. Characteristics of BJT (common emitter configuration).
9. Characteristics of Half Wave and Full Wave rectifiers.
10. Amplifying circuits
a.Simple Common emitter amplifier configuration-gain and band width
b.Common Source amplifier
11. Oscillator
a. RC Oscillator
b. Multivibrator
12. Characteristics of 3pin regulators.
14G113/14H213

754

SEMESTER I
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Credits
Maximum Marks
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
14O101
40
60
100
14F102
40
60
100
14O103
Technical English
40
60
100
14O104
C Programming I
Engineering
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
14F105
14F106
PRACTICAL
14O111
40
60
100
14G112
Physical Laboratory
40
60
100
14F113
40
60
100
14G114
40
60
100
19
12
27
TOTAL
SEMESTER II
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Credits
Maximum Marks
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
14O203

Series
Engineering
14O204
C Programming II
40
60
100
14F205
40
60
100
14F206
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
18
11
25
14O201
14H202
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
PRACTICAL
14O211
14F212
14H213
Laboratory
TOTAL

755
SEMESTER III
Course
Code
Course Title
THEORY
14F301
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Credits
Maximum Marks
CIA
ESE
Total
40
60
100
14F302
40
60
100
14F303
40
60
100
40
60
100
14F305
System Software
Digital Principles and System
Design
Data Structures I
40
60
100
14F306
40
60
100
14F304
PRACTICAL
14F311
Digital Laboratory
40
60
100
14F312

Laboratory
TOTAL
40
60
100
40
60
100
18
24
14F313
SEMESTER IV
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Credits
Maximum Marks
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
14F401
14F402
14F403
Probability and Queueing

Theory
Data Structures II
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
14F405

Microprocessors and
Microcontrollers
Operating Systems
40
60
100
14F406
100
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
18
11
25
14F404
PRACTICAL
14F411
14F412
14F413

Laboratory
TOTAL

756
SEMESTER V
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Credits
Maximum Marks
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
14F501
40
60
100
14F502
40
60
100
40
60
100
14F504
Java Programming
Communication
Computer Networks
40
60
100
14Fxxx
Elective I
40
60
100
14Fxxx
Elective II
40
60
100
100
100
14F503
PRACTICAL
14O511
40
60
100
14F513
Soft Skills
Laboratory
40
60
100
14F514
40
60
100
18
12
26
14F512
TOTAL
SEMESTER VI
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Credits
Maximum Marks
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
14Fxxx

Design
Multimedia
Algorithms
Elective III
14Fxxx
Elective IV
14F601
14F602
14F603
14F604
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
100
100
18
12
26
PRACTICAL
14F613

Laboratory
Computer Graphics And
Multimedia Laboratory
14F651
Mini Project
14F611
14F612
TOTAL
757
SEMESTER VII
Course
Code
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Course Title
Maximum Marks
Credits
CIA
ESE
Total
THEORY
14O701

Engineering Ethics
Mobile Computing
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
40
60
100
14Fxxx
Cloud Infrastructure and Services

Mining
Elective V
40
60
100
14Fxxx
Elective VI
40
60
100
14F702
14F703
14F704
PRACTICAL
14F751
100
100
14F721
Comprehension
TOTAL
18
20
SEMESTER VIII
Course
Code
Course Title
Instruction
Hours/Week
L
T
P
Credits
Maximum Marks
CIA
ESE
Total
40
60
100
PRACTICAL
14F851

TOTAL
24
12
24
12

758
LIST OF ELECTIVES
Course Code
Course Title
14F001
14F002
High Speed Networks
14F003
Embedded Systems
14F004
Enterprise Application
14F005
14F006
Data Science and Big data Analysis
14F007
Backup Recovery Systems and Architecture
14F008
14F009
14F010
14F011
14F012
14F013
Information Security
14F014
Green Computing
14F015
Web Programming
14F016
14F017
Wireless Networks
14F018
14F019
Cyber Security
14F020
ONE CREDIT SUBJECTS

Course Code
Course Title
14F901
User Interface Design
14F902
Modern Network Systems
14F903
Directory Services
14F904
PL / SQL Programming
759
SEMESTER I
14O101

14L202/14T202/14E102/14N102/14P102/14F102
SCIENCES
14O103
TECHNICAL ENGLISH
14O104
C PROGRAMMING I

14P106/14F106
FUNDAMENTALS OF COMPUTERS
(Common to CSE/IT)

14G112/14H212
PHYSICS LABORATORY
14L213/14T112/14E113/14N113/14P113/14F113
14G114/14H214
760
SEMESTER II
14O201

14G102/14H202

14O203
14O204
C PROGRAMMING II
14P205/14F205
BASICS OF ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING

(Common to CSE / IT)
14P206/14F206
ELECTRONIC DEVICES AND CIRCUITS

(Common to CSE/IT)
14O211
14P212/14F212

LABORATORY
(Common to CSE/IT)
14G113/14H213

761
762

8th AC Proceedings

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

8th AC Proceedings

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

AutonomousCollege,ApprovedbyAICTE,

Minutes of the Meeting

2012 Regulation Scheme and Syllabi for semesters 5 and 6

2012 Regulation Scheme and Syllabi for semesters 5 and 6

2014 Regulation Scheme and Syllabi for semesters 1 and 2

2012 Regulation Scheme and Syllabi for semesters 5 and 6

BE Electronics and Communication Engineering

2012 Regulation Scheme and Syllabi for semesters 5 and 6

2014 Regulation Scheme and Syllabi for semesters 1 and 2

2014 Regulation Scheme and Syllabi for semesters 1 and 2

BE Electronics and Telecommunication Engineering

2010 Regulation Scheme and Syllabi for semesters 7 and 8

BE Electronics and Telecommunication Engineering

2012 Regulation Scheme and Syllabi for semesters 5 and 6

BE Electrical and Electronics Engineering

2012 Regulation Scheme and Syllabi for semesters 5 and 6

BE Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering

2012 Regulation Scheme and Syllabi for semesters 5 and 6

BE Computer Science and Engineering

2012 Regulation Scheme and Syllabi for semesters 5 and 6

B. Tech Information Technology

2012 Regulation Scheme and Syllabi for semesters 5 and 6

Master of Computer Applications

2013 Regulation Scheme and Syllabi for semesters 3 and 4

BE / B Tech Degree Programmes

2014 Regulation Scheme and Syllabi for semesters 1 and 2

2014 Regulation Scheme and Syllabi for semesters 1 and 2

2014 Regulation Scheme and Syllabi for semesters 1 and 2

BE Electronics and Communication Engineering

2014 Regulation Scheme and Syllabi for semesters 1 and 2

BE Electronics and Telecommunication Engineering

2014 Regulation Scheme and Syllabi for semesters 1 and 2

BE Electrical and Electronics Engineering

2014 Regulation Scheme and Syllabi for semesters 1 and 2

BE Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering

2014 Regulation Scheme and Syllabi for semesters 1 and 2

BE Computer Science and Engineering

2014 Regulation Scheme and Syllabi for semesters 1 and 2

B. Tech Information Technology

AGENDA OF EIGHTH ACADEMIC COUNCIL MEETING

Welcome and Introductory remarks by the Chairman.

The Board of Studies in Automobile Engineering recommended the scheme

The Board of Studies in Mechanical Engineering recommended the scheme

that the Regulation and scheme for M.E degree Programmes of

that this takes effect for the batches of students to be admitted in

AGENDA OF EIGHTH ACADEMIC COUNCIL MEETING

that the scheme and syllabi for the ME Mechatronics degree

that this takes effect for the batches of students to be admitted in

The Board of Studies in Civil Engineering recommended the scheme and

The Board of Studies in Electronics and Communication Engineering

that the scheme and syllabi for the ME Communication

that this takes effect for the batches of students to be admitted in

that this takes effect for the batches of students to be admitted in

The Board of Studies in Electronics and Telecommunication Engineering

AGENDA OF EIGHTH ACADEMIC COUNCIL MEETING

The Board of Studies in Electrical and Electronics Engineering

The Board of Studies in Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering

The Board of Studies in Computer Science and Engineering recommended

AGENDA OF EIGHTH ACADEMIC COUNCIL MEETING

The Board of Studies in Information Technology recommended the scheme

The Board of Studies in Master of Computer Applications recommended the

The Board of Studies in Science and Humanities recommended the

that the Regulation, scheme and syllabi for semesters 1 and

that this takes effect for the batches of students to be admitted in